Command Reference for AlliedWare Plus™ Version 5.4.7-0.x

Allied Telesis AT-GS970M/18-50 User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for AT-GS970M/18-50 by Allied Telesis which is a product in the Network Switches category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

Jumbo 18505 Manual

Microsoft Wireless Mobile Mouse 1850 Manual

RAM Mounts RAM-FP3-6300-1850 Manual

Princess 185000 Manual

Allied Telesis AT-CV5001AC-60 Manual

Allied Telesis AT-CVMNT12 Manual

Allied Telesis AT-STACKXG-00 Manual

C613-50163-01 Rev C

CentreCOM® GS970M Series

MANAGED GIGABIT ETHERNET SWITCH

Command Reference for

AlliedWare Plus™ Version 5.4.7-0.x

GS970M/10

GS970M/10PS

GS970M/18

GS970M/18PS

GS970M/28

GS970M/28PS

Acknowledgments

This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. For information about this see

www.openssl.org/

This product includes software licensed under v2 and v3 of the GNU General Public License, available from: www.gnu.org/licenses/

gpl2.html and www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html respectively.

Source code for all GPL licensed software in this product can be obtained from the Allied Telesis GPL Code Download Center at:

www.alliedtelesis.com/support/

Allied Telesis is committed to meeting the requirements of the open source licenses including the GNU General Public License (GPL) and

will make all required source code available.

If you would like a copy of the GPL source code contained in Allied Telesis products, please send us a request by registered mail including

a check for US$15 to cover production and shipping costs and a CD with the GPL code will be mailed to you.

GPL Code Request

Allied Telesis Labs (Ltd)

PO Box 8011

Christchurch

New Zealand

Allied Telesis, AlliedWare Plus, Allied Telesis Management Framework, EPSRing, SwitchBlade, VCStack, and VCStack Plus are trademarks or

registered trademarks in the United States and elsewhere of Allied Telesis, Inc.

Microsoft and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other product names, company names, logos or

other designations mentioned herein may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

 2017 Allied Telesis, Inc.

Allied Telesis, Inc. reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document without prior

written notice. The information provided herein is subject to change without notice. In no event shall Allied Telesis, Inc. be liable for any

incidental, special, indirect, or consequential damages whatsoever, including but not limited to lost profits, arising out of or related to this

manual or the information contained herein, even if Allied Telesis, Inc. has been advised of, known, or should have known, the possibility

of such damages.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 3

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Contents

PART 1: Setup and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Chapter 1: CLI Navigation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

configure terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

disable (Privileged Exec mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

enable (Privileged Exec mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

show history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

Chapter 2: File and Configuration Management Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

autoboot enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

boot config-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

boot config-file backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

boot system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

boot system backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

cd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

copy (filename) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

copy current-software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

copy debug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

copy running-config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

copy startup-config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

copy zmodem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

create autoboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

delete debug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

dir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

edit (filename) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 4

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

erase factory-default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

erase startup-config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

ip tftp source-interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

ipv6 tftp source-interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

mkdir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

move debug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

pwd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

rmdir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

show autoboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

show boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

show file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

show file systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

show running-config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

show running-config interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

show startup-config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

show version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

write file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

write memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

write terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Chapter 3: User Access Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

clear line console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

clear line vty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

enable password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

enable secret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

exec-timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

flowcontrol hardware (asyn/console) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

length (asyn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

privilege level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

security-password history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

security-password forced-change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

security-password lifetime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

security-password minimum-categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

security-password minimum-length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

security-password reject-expired-pwd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

security-password warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

service advanced-vty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

service password-encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

service telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

service terminal-length (deleted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

show privilege . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

show security-password configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

show security-password user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

show telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

show users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

telnet server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

terminal length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

terminal resize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 5

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Chapter 4: Feature Licensing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

license . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

show license . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

show license brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Chapter 5: Subscription Licensing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

license update (filename) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

license update online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

show license external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Chapter 6: GUI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

atmf topology-gui enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

gui-timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

log event-host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

service http . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

show http . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Chapter 7: System Configuration and Monitoring Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

banner exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

banner login (system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

banner motd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

clock summer-time date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

clock summer-time recurring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

clock timezone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

ecofriendly led . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

findme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

hostname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

max-fib-routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

max-static-routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

no debug all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

reload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

show clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

show cpu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

show cpu history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

show debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

show ecofriendly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

show interface memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

show memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

show memory allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

show memory history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

show memory pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

show memory shared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

show process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

show reboot history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

show router-id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

show system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 6

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

show system environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

show system interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

show system mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

show system serialnumber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

show tech-support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

speed (asyn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

system territory (deprecated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

terminal monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

undebug all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Chapter 8: Pluggables and Cabling Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

clear test cable-diagnostics tdr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

debug fiber-monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

fiber-monitoring action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

fiber-monitoring baseline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

fiber-monitoring enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

fiber-monitoring interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

fiber-monitoring sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

show system fiber-monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

show system pluggable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

show system pluggable detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

show system pluggable diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

show test cable-diagnostics tdr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

test cable-diagnostics tdr interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Chapter 9: Logging Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

clear exception log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

clear log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

clear log buffered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

clear log permanent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

default log buffered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

default log console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

default log email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

default log host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

default log monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

default log permanent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

log buffered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

log buffered (filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

log buffered exclude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

log buffered size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

log console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

log console (filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

log console exclude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

log email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

log email (filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

log email exclude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

log email time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

log facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

log host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

log host (filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 7

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

log host exclude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

log host source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

log host time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

log monitor (filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

log monitor exclude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

log permanent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

log permanent (filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

log permanent exclude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

log permanent size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

log-rate-limit nsm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

log trustpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

show counter log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

show exception log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

show log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

show log config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

show log permanent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

show running-config log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Chapter 10: Scripting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Chapter 11: Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

description (interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

interface (to configure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

mru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

mtu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

show interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

show interface brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

show interface memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

show interface status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Chapter 12: Port Mirroring and Remote Mirroring Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

mirror interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

remote-mirror interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

show mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

show mirror interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

show remote-mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

switchport remote-mirror-egress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

vlan mode remote-mirror-vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Chapter 13: Interface Testing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

clear test interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

service test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

test interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 8

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PART 2: Interfaces and Layer 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Chapter 14: Switching Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

backpressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

clear loop-protection counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

clear mac address-table dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

clear mac address-table static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

clear port counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

clear port-security intrusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

debug loopprot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

debug platform packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

flowcontrol (switch port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

linkflap action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

loop-protection loop-detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

loop-protection action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

loop-protection action-delay-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

loop-protection timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

mac address-table acquire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

mac address-table ageing-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

mac address-table logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

mac address-table static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

mac address-table thrash-limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

platform load-balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

platform stop-unreg-mc-flooding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

platform vlan-stacking-tpid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

show debugging loopprot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

show debugging platform packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

show flowcontrol interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

show interface err-disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

show interface switchport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

show loop-protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

show mac address-table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

show mac address-table thrash-limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

show platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

show platform classifier statistics utilization brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

show platform port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

show port-security interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

show port-security intrusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

show storm-control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

storm-control level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

switchport port-security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

switchport port-security aging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

switchport port-security maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

switchport port-security violation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

thrash-limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

undebug loopprot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

undebug platform packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 9

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Chapter 15: VLAN Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

port-vlan-forwarding-priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

private-vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

private-vlan association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

show port-vlan-forwarding-priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

show vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

show vlan access-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

show vlan filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

show vlan private-vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

switchport access vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

switchport mode access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

switchport mode private-vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

switchport mode private-vlan trunk promiscuous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

switchport mode private-vlan trunk secondary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

switchport mode trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

switchport private-vlan host-association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

switchport private-vlan mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

switchport trunk allowed vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

switchport trunk native vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

switchport vlan-stacking (double tagging) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

switchport voice dscp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

switchport voice vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

switchport voice vlan priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

vlan access-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

vlan database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

vlan filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

Chapter 16: Spanning Tree Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

clear spanning-tree statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

clear spanning-tree detected protocols (RSTP and MSTP) . . . . . . . . . . . 479

debug mstp (RSTP and STP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

instance priority (MSTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484

instance vlan (MSTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

region (MSTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

revision (MSTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

show debugging mstp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

show spanning-tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

show spanning-tree brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

show spanning-tree mst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

show spanning-tree mst config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

show spanning-tree mst detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

show spanning-tree mst detail interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

show spanning-tree mst instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

show spanning-tree mst instance interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

show spanning-tree mst interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503

show spanning-tree mst detail interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

show spanning-tree statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506

show spanning-tree statistics instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

show spanning-tree statistics instance interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 10

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

show spanning-tree statistics interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

show spanning-tree vlan range-index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

spanning-tree autoedge (RSTP and MSTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514

spanning-tree bpdu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515

spanning-tree cisco-interoperability (MSTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

spanning-tree edgeport (RSTP and MSTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

spanning-tree enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519

spanning-tree errdisable-timeout enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

spanning-tree errdisable-timeout interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522

spanning-tree force-version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

spanning-tree forward-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524

spanning-tree guard root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

spanning-tree hello-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526

spanning-tree link-type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

spanning-tree max-age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

spanning-tree max-hops (MSTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

spanning-tree mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

spanning-tree mst configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

spanning-tree mst instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

spanning-tree mst instance path-cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

spanning-tree mst instance priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

spanning-tree mst instance restricted-role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

spanning-tree mst instance restricted-tcn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538

spanning-tree path-cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539

spanning-tree portfast (STP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540

spanning-tree portfast bpdu-filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

spanning-tree portfast bpdu-guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

spanning-tree priority (bridge priority) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546

spanning-tree priority (port priority) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

spanning-tree restricted-role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548

spanning-tree restricted-tcn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549

spanning-tree transmit-holdcount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550

undebug mstp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551

Chapter 17: Link Aggregation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

channel-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

clear lacp counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556

debug lacp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557

lacp global-passive-mode enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558

lacp port-priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559

lacp system-priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560

lacp timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

platform load-balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

show debugging lacp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564

show diagnostic channel-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565

show etherchannel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

show etherchannel detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

show etherchannel summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569

show lacp sys-id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570

show lacp-counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571

show port etherchannel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572

show static-channel-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 11

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

static-channel-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574

undebug lacp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576

Chapter 18: Power over Ethernet Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

clear power-inline counters interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579

debug power-inline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580

power-inline allow-legacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

power-inline description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

power-inline enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584

power-inline max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585

power-inline priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

power-inline usage-threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589

service power-inline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590

show debugging power-inline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591

show power-inline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592

show power-inline counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

show power-inline interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597

show power-inline interface detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599

PART 3: Layer 3 Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602

Chapter 19: IP Addressing and Protocol Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603

arp-aging-timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

arp-mac-disparity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606

arp (IP address MAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609

arp log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610

arp opportunistic-nd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613

arp-reply-bc-dmac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614

clear arp-cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615

debug ip packet interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

ip address (IP Addressing and Protocol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618

ip gratuitous-arp-link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620

ip redirects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622

ip unreachables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623

ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625

show arp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

show debugging ip packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628

show ip interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630

show ip sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631

show ip traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634

tcpdump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636

traceroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637

undebug ip packet interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638

Chapter 20: Domain Name Service (DNS) Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639

ip domain-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640

ip domain-lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641

ip domain-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642

ip name-server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 12

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

show hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644

show ip domain-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645

show ip domain-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646

show ip name-server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647

Chapter 21: IPv6 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648

clear ipv6 neighbors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650

ipv6 address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651

ipv6 address autoconfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653

ipv6 enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

ipv6 eui64-linklocal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657

ipv6 forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658

ipv6 multicast forward-slow-path-packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659

ipv6 nd accept-ra-pinfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660

ipv6 nd minimum-ra-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661

ipv6 nd ra-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662

ipv6 nd raguard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663

ipv6 nd suppress-ra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665

ipv6 neighbor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666

ipv6 opportunistic-nd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667

ipv6 route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668

ipv6 unreachables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669

ping ipv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670

show ipv6 forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671

show ipv6 interface brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672

show ipv6 neighbors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673

show ipv6 route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

show ipv6 route summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676

traceroute ipv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677

Chapter 22: Routing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678

ip route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679

ipv6 route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681

max-fib-routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682

max-static-routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683

show ip route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684

show ip route database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686

show ip route summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687

show ipv6 route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

show ipv6 route summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690

Chapter 23: RIP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691

accept-lifetime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693

alliedware-behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695

cisco-metric-behavior (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697

clear ip rip route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698

debug rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699

default-information originate (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700

default-metric (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 13

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

distance (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702

distribute-list (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703

fullupdate (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704

ip rip authentication key-chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705

ip rip authentication mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707

ip rip authentication string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710

ip rip receive-packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712

ip rip receive version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713

ip rip send-packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714

ip rip send version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715

ip rip send version 1-compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717

ip rip split-horizon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719

key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720

key chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721

key-string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722

maximum-prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723

neighbor (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724

network (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725

offset-list (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726

passive-interface (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727

recv-buffer-size (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728

redistribute (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729

restart rip graceful . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730

rip restart grace-period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731

route (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732

router rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733

send-lifetime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734

show debugging rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736

show ip protocols rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737

show ip rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738

show ip rip database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739

show ip rip interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740

timers (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741

undebug rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742

version (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

PART 4: Multicast Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744

Chapter 24: IGMP and IGMP Snooping Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745

clear ip igmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747

clear ip igmp group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748

clear ip igmp interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749

debug igmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750

ip igmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751

ip igmp access-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752

ip igmp flood specific-query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753

ip igmp immediate-leave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754

ip igmp last-member-query-count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755

ip igmp last-member-query-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756

ip igmp limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757

ip igmp maximum-groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 14

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

ip igmp querier-timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760

ip igmp query-holdtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761

ip igmp query-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763

ip igmp query-max-response-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765

ip igmp ra-option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767

ip igmp robustness-variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

ip igmp snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769

ip igmp snooping fast-leave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770

ip igmp snooping mrouter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771

ip igmp snooping querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772

ip igmp snooping report-suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773

ip igmp snooping routermode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

ip igmp snooping tcn query solicit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776

ip igmp source-address-check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778

ip igmp static-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779

ip igmp startup-query-count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781

ip igmp startup-query-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782

ip igmp trusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783

ip igmp version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784

show debugging igmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785

show ip igmp groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786

show ip igmp interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788

show ip igmp snooping mrouter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790

show ip igmp snooping routermode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791

show ip igmp snooping statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792

undebug igmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794

Chapter 25: MLD Snooping Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795

clear ipv6 mld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796

clear ipv6 mld group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797

clear ipv6 mld interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798

debug mld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799

ipv6 mld immediate-leave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800

ipv6 mld limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801

ipv6 mld snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803

ipv6 mld snooping fast-leave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

ipv6 mld snooping mrouter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806

ipv6 mld snooping querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808

ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809

ipv6 mld static-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811

show debugging mld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813

show ipv6 mld groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814

show ipv6 mld interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815

show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816

show ipv6 mld snooping statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817

Chapter 26: Multicast Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818

clear ip mroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820

clear ip mroute statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821

clear ipv6 mroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 15

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

clear ipv6 mroute statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823

ipv6 multicast forward-slow-path-packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824

debug nsm mcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825

debug nsm mcast6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826

ip mroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827

ip multicast forward-first-packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829

ip multicast route-limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830

ip multicast wrong-vif-suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831

ip multicast-routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832

ipv6 mroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833

ipv6 multicast route-limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835

ipv6 multicast-routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836

multicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837

show ip mroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838

show ip mvif . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840

show ip rpf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841

show ipv6 mroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842

show ipv6 multicast forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844

show ipv6 mif . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845

PART 5: Access and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846

Chapter 27: IPv4 Hardware Access Control List (ACL) Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 847

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847

access-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for ICMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for IP packets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for IP protocols) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for MAC addresses) . . . . . . . . . . . 863

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for TCP or UDP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866

access-list hardware (named hardware ACL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870

(named hardware ACL: ICMP entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872

(named hardware ACL: IP packet entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876

(named hardware ACL: IP protocol entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880

(named hardware ACL: MAC entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886

(named hardware ACL: TCP or UDP entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889

commit (IPv4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893

show access-list (IPv4 Hardware ACLs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894

show interface access-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896

Chapter 28: IPv4 Software Access Control List (ACL) Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 897

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897

access-list extended (named) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900

access-list (extended numbered) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908

(access-list extended ICMP filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910

(access-list extended IP filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912

(access-list extended IP protocol filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915

(access-list extended TCP UDP filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919

access-list standard (named) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921

access-list (standard numbered) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923

(access-list standard named filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925

(access-list standard numbered filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 16

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

dos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929

maximum-access-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932

show access-list (IPv4 Software ACLs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933

show dos interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935

show ip access-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938

vty access-class (numbered) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939

Chapter 29: IPv6 Software Access Control List (ACL) Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 940

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940

ipv6 access-list standard (named) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942

(ipv6 access-list standard filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944

show ipv6 access-list (IPv6 Software ACLs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946

vty ipv6 access-class (named) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947

Chapter 30: QoS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948

class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950

class-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951

clear mls qos interface policer-counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952

default-action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953

description (QoS policy-map) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954

egress-rate-limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955

match access-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956

match cos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958

match dscp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959

match eth-format protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960

match inner-cos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963

match inner-vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964

match ip-precedence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965

match mac-type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966

match tcp-flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967

match vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968

mls qos cos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969

mls qos enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970

mls qos map cos-queue to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971

mls qos map premark-dscp to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972

no police . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974

police single-rate action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975

police twin-rate action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977

policy-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979

priority-queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980

remark-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981

remark new-cos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983

service-policy input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985

show class-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986

show mls qos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987

show mls qos interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988

show mls qos interface policer-counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989

show mls qos interface queue-counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991

show mls qos interface storm-status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993

show mls qos maps cos-queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994

show mls qos maps premark-dscp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 17

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

show platform classifier statistics utilization brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996

show policy-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997

storm-action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998

storm-downtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999

storm-protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000

storm-rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001

storm-window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002

trust dscp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003

wrr-queue disable queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004

wrr-queue egress-rate-limit queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005

wrr-queue weight queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006

Chapter 31: 802.1X Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007

dot1x accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009

dot1x authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010

debug dot1x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011

dot1x control-direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012

dot1x eap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014

dot1x eapol-version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015

dot1x initialize interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017

dot1x initialize supplicant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018

dot1x keytransmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019

dot1x max-auth-fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020

dot1x max-reauth-req . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022

dot1x port-control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024

dot1x timeout tx-period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026

show debugging dot1x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028

show dot1x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029

show dot1x diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032

show dot1x interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034

show dot1x sessionstatistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039

show dot1x statistics interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040

show dot1x supplicant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041

show dot1x supplicant interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043

undebug dot1x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046

Chapter 32: Authentication Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047

auth auth-fail vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050

auth critical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052

auth dynamic-vlan-creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053

auth guest-vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1056

auth guest-vlan forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059

auth host-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061

auth log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063

auth max-supplicant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065

auth profile (Global Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067

auth profile (Interface Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068

auth reauthentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069

auth roaming disconnected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070

auth roaming enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 18

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

auth supplicant-ip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074

auth supplicant-mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076

auth timeout connect-timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079

auth timeout quiet-period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081

auth timeout reauth-period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082

auth timeout server-timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084

auth timeout supp-timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086

auth two-step enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088

auth-mac accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091

auth-mac authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092

auth-mac enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093

auth-mac method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095

auth-mac password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097

auth-mac reauth-relearning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098

auth-mac username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099

auth-web accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100

auth-web authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101

auth-web enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102

auth-web forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104

auth-web max-auth-fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107

auth-web method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109

auth-web-server blocking-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110

auth-web-server dhcp ipaddress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111

auth-web-server dhcp lease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112

auth-web-server dhcp-wpad-option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113

auth-web-server host-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114

auth-web-server intercept-port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115

auth-web-server ipaddress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116

auth-web-server page language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1117

auth-web-server login-url . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118

auth-web-server page logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119

auth-web-server page sub-title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120

auth-web-server page success-message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121

auth-web-server page title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122

auth-web-server page welcome-message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123

auth-web-server ping-poll enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1124

auth-web-server ping-poll failcount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125

auth-web-server ping-poll interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126

auth-web-server ping-poll reauth-timer-refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127

auth-web-server ping-poll timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128

auth-web-server port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129

auth-web-server redirect-delay-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130

auth-web-server redirect-url . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131

auth-web-server session-keep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132

auth-web-server ssl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1133

auth-web-server ssl intercept-port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134

copy proxy-autoconfig-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135

copy web-auth-https-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136

description (Authentication Profile) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137

erase proxy-autoconfig-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138

erase web-auth-https-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139

platform l3-vlan-hashing-algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1140

platform mac-vlan-hashing-algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 19

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

show auth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142

show auth diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144

show auth interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146

show auth sessionstatistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1149

show auth statistics interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1150

show auth supplicant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151

show auth supplicant interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1154

show auth two-step supplicant brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155

show auth-web-server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156

show auth-web-server page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157

show proxy-autoconfig-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1158

Chapter 33: AAA Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159

aaa accounting auth-mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161

aaa accounting auth-web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163

aaa accounting commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165

aaa accounting dot1x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167

aaa accounting login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169

aaa accounting update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172

aaa authentication auth-mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174

aaa authentication auth-web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176

aaa authentication dot1x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178

aaa authentication enable default group tacacs+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180

aaa authentication enable default local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182

aaa authentication login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183

aaa authorization commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185

aaa authorization config-commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187

aaa group server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1188

aaa local authentication attempts lockout-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190

aaa local authentication attempts max-fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191

aaa login fail-delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192

accounting login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1193

authorization commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194

clear aaa local user lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1196

debug aaa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197

proxy-port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199

radius-secure-proxy aaa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200

server (radsecproxy-aaa) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201

server mutual-authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203

server name-check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204

server trustpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205

show aaa local user locked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207

show aaa server group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208

show debugging aaa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209

show radius server group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1210

undebug aaa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212

Chapter 34: RADIUS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213

auth radius send nas-identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 20

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

auth radius send service-type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215

deadtime (RADIUS server group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216

debug radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1217

ip radius source-interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218

radius-server deadtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219

radius-server host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220

radius-server key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223

radius-server retransmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1224

radius-server timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1226

server (Server Group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228

show debugging radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1230

show radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231

show radius statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234

undebug radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235

Chapter 35: Local RADIUS Server Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236

attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238

authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1241

client (radsecproxy-srv) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1242

client mutual-authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244

client name-check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245

client trustpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1246

clear radius local-server statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247

copy fdb-radius-users (to file) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248

copy local-radius-user-db (from file) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250

copy local-radius-user-db (to file) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251

crypto pki enroll local (deleted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1252

crypto pki enroll local local-radius-all-users (deleted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253

crypto pki enroll local user (deleted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1254

crypto pki export local pem (deleted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255

crypto pki export local pkcs12 (deleted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1256

crypto pki trustpoint local (deleted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257

debug crypto pki (deleted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1258

domain-style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259

egress-vlan-id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1260

egress-vlan-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262

group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1264

nas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265

radius-secure-proxy local-server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266

radius-server local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1267

server auth-port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268

server enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1269

show crypto pki certificates (deleted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270

show crypto pki certificates local-radius-all-users (deleted) . . . . . . . . . 1271

show crypto pki certificates user (deleted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1272

show crypto pki trustpoints (deleted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1273

show radius local-server group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274

show radius local-server nas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1275

show radius local-server statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1276

show radius local-server user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277

user (RADIUS server) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1279

vlan (RADIUS server) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 21

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Chapter 36: Public Key Infrastructure Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282

crypto key generate rsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283

crypto key zeroize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1284

crypto pki authenticate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285

crypto pki enroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286

crypto pki enroll user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287

crypto pki export pem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1289

crypto pki export pkcs12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1290

crypto pki import pem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1292

crypto pki import pkcs12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294

crypto pki trustpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295

enrollment (trustpoint configuration mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296

fingerprint (trustpoint configuration mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297

no crypto pki certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299

rsakeypair (trustpoint configuration mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300

show crypto key mypubkey rsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301

show crypto pki certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302

show crypto pki enrollment user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304

show crypto pki trustpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305

subject-name (trustpoint configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306

Chapter 37: TACACS+ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308

authorization commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309

aaa authorization commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311

aaa authorization config-commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313

ip tacacs source-interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314

show tacacs+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315

tacacs-server host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317

tacacs-server key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319

tacacs-server timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320

Chapter 38: DHCP Snooping Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321

arp security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323

arp security violation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324

clear arp security statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326

clear ip dhcp snooping binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327

clear ip dhcp snooping statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328

debug arp security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329

debug ip dhcp snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330

ip dhcp snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331

ip dhcp snooping agent-option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332

ip dhcp snooping agent-option allow-untrusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333

ip dhcp snooping agent-option circuit-id vlantriplet . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334

ip dhcp snooping agent-option remote-id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335

ip dhcp snooping binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336

ip dhcp snooping database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337

ip dhcp snooping delete-by-client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338

ip dhcp snooping delete-by-linkdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339

ip dhcp snooping max-bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 22

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

ip dhcp snooping trust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341

ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342

ip dhcp snooping violation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343

ip source binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1344

service dhcp-snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1346

show arp security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348

show arp security interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1349

show arp security statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1351

show debugging arp security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1353

show debugging ip dhcp snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354

show ip dhcp snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355

show ip dhcp snooping acl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356

show ip dhcp snooping agent-option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359

show ip dhcp snooping binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361

show ip dhcp snooping interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363

show ip dhcp snooping statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365

show ip source binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368

PART 6: Network Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369

Chapter 39: Ethernet Protection Switched Ring (EPSRing™) Commands . . . . . . 1370

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1370

debug epsr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1372

epsr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1373

epsr configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374

epsr datavlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375

epsr enhancedrecovery enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1376

epsr mode master controlvlan primary port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377

epsr mode transit controlvlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1378

epsr priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379

epsr state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380

epsr trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381

show debugging epsr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382

show epsr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383

show epsr common segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387

show epsr config-check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1388

show epsr <epsr-instance> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389

show epsr <epsr-instance> counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390

show epsr counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1391

show epsr summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1392

undebug epsr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393

Chapter 40: RRP Snooping Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1394

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1394

ip rrp snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1395

show ip rrp snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1396

PART 7: Network Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397

Chapter 41: Allied Telesis Management Framework™ (AMF) Commands . . . . . . 1398

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1398

area-link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 23

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

atmf area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405

atmf area password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407

atmf authorize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1409

atmf authorize provision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411

atmf backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1413

atmf backup area-masters delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1414

atmf backup area-masters enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415

atmf backup area-masters now . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1416

atmf backup area-masters synchronize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417

atmf backup bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1418

atmf backup delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419

atmf backup enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1420

atmf backup guests delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421

atmf backup guests enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422

atmf backup guests now . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1423

atmf backup guests synchronize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1424

atmf backup now . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1425

atmf backup redundancy enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1427

atmf backup server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1428

atmf backup stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430

atmf backup synchronize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431

atmf cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1432

atmf container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433

atmf container login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1434

atmf controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435

atmf distribute firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1436

atmf domain vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438

atmf enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441

atmf group (membership) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442

atmf guest-class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444

atmf log-verbose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446

atmf management subnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447

atmf management vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1450

atmf master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1452

atmf mtu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453

atmf network-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454

atmf provision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455

atmf provision node clone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456

atmf provision node configure boot config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458

atmf provision node configure boot system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1459

atmf provision node create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460

atmf provision node delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462

atmf provision node license-cert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1464

atmf provision node locate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1466

atmf reboot-rolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1467

atmf recover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471

atmf recover guest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1473

atmf recover led-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474

atmf remote-login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475

atmf restricted-login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1477

atmf secure-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1479

atmf secure-mode certificate expire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481

atmf secure-mode certificate expiry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1482

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 24

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

atmf secure-mode certificate renew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1483

atmf secure-mode enable-all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484

atmf select-area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1486

atmf virtual-crosslink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1487

atmf virtual-link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1489

atmf working-set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491

bridge-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1493

clear atmf links statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1494

clear atmf secure-mode certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1495

clear atmf secure-mode statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1496

debug atmf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1497

debug atmf packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1499

discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502

description (amf container) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1504

erase factory-default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505

http-enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1506

modeltype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1508

show atmf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509

show atmf area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1513

show atmf area guests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1516

show atmf area guests-detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1518

show atmf area nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1520

show atmf area nodes-detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522

show atmf area summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1524

show atmf authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1525

show atmf backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1528

show atmf backup area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1532

show atmf backup guest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1534

show atmf container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1536

show atmf detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1539

show atmf group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541

show atmf group members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1543

show atmf guests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1545

show atmf guests detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1547

show atmf links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1550

show atmf links detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1552

show atmf links guest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1561

show atmf links guest detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1563

show atmf links statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1567

show atmf nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1570

show atmf provision nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1572

show atmf secure-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1573

show atmf secure-mode audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1575

show atmf secure-mode audit link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1576

show atmf secure-mode certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1577

show atmf secure-mode sa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1580

show atmf secure-mode statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1583

show atmf tech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1585

show atmf virtual-links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1588

show atmf working-set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1590

show debugging atmf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1591

show debugging atmf packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1592

show running-config atmf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1593

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 25

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1594

switchport atmf-agentlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1596

switchport atmf-arealink remote-area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1597

switchport atmf-crosslink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1599

switchport atmf-guestlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601

switchport atmf-link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603

type atmf node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1604

undebug atmf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1607

username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1608

Chapter 42: Management Stacking Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1610

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1610

mstack command-node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1611

mstack enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1612

mstack remote-login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1613

show mstack nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615

switchport mstack-link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1616

Chapter 43: NTP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1617

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1617

ntp access-group (deprecated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1618

ntp authenticate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1619

ntp authentication-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1620

ntp broadcastdelay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1621

ntp discard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622

ntp peer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1623

ntp restrict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625

ntp server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1627

ntp source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1629

ntp trusted-key (deprecated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1631

show counter ntp (deprecated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1632

show ntp associations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633

show ntp counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1635

show ntp counters associations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1637

show ntp status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639

Chapter 44: SNMP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640

debug snmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642

show counter snmp-server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643

show debugging snmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1647

show running-config snmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1648

show snmp-server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1649

show snmp-server community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1650

show snmp-server group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1651

show snmp-server user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1652

show snmp-server view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1653

snmp trap link-status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1654

snmp trap link-status suppress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1656

snmp-server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1658

snmp-server community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1660

snmp-server contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1661

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 26

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

snmp-server enable trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1662

snmp-server engineID local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1664

snmp-server engineID local reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1666

snmp-server group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1667

snmp-server host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1669

snmp-server legacy-ifadminstatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1671

snmp-server location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1672

snmp-server source-interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1673

snmp-server startup-trap-delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1674

snmp-server user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1675

snmp-server view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1678

undebug snmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1679

Chapter 45: LLDP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1680

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1680

clear lldp statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1682

clear lldp table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1683

debug lldp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1684

lldp faststart-count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1686

lldp holdtime-multiplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1687

lldp management-address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1688

lldp med-notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1689

lldp med-tlv-select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1690

lldp non-strict-med-tlv-order-check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1693

lldp notification-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1694

lldp notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1695

lldp port-number-type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1696

lldp reinit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1697

lldp run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1698

lldp timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1699

lldp tlv-select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1700

lldp transmit receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1702

lldp tx-delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1703

location civic-location configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1704

location civic-location identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1708

location civic-location-id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709

location coord-location configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1710

location coord-location identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1712

location coord-location-id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1713

location elin-location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1714

location elin-location-id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1715

show debugging lldp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1716

show lldp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1718

show lldp interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1720

show lldp local-info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1722

show lldp neighbors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1727

show lldp neighbors detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1729

show lldp statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1733

show lldp statistics interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1735

show location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1737

Chapter 46: SMTP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1739

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 27

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1739

debug mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1740

delete mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1741

mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1742

mail from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1743

mail smtpserver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1744

show counter mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1745

show mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1746

undebug mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1747

Chapter 47: RMON Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1748

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1748

rmon alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1749

rmon collection history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1751

rmon collection stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1752

rmon event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1753

show rmon alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1754

show rmon event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1755

show rmon history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1757

show rmon statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1759

Chapter 48: Secure Shell (SSH) Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1761

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1761

banner login (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1763

clear ssh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1764

crypto key destroy hostkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1765

crypto key destroy userkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1766

crypto key generate hostkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1767

crypto key generate userkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1769

crypto key pubkey-chain knownhosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1770

crypto key pubkey-chain userkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1772

debug ssh client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1774

debug ssh server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1775

service ssh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1776

show banner login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1778

show crypto key hostkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1779

show crypto key pubkey-chain knownhosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1781

show crypto key pubkey-chain userkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1782

show crypto key userkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1783

show running-config ssh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1784

show ssh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1786

show ssh client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1788

show ssh server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1789

show ssh server allow-users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1791

show ssh server deny-users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1792

ssh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1793

ssh client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1795

ssh server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1797

ssh server allow-users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1799

ssh server authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1801

ssh server deny-users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1803

ssh server max-auth-tries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1805

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 28

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

ssh server resolve-host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1806

ssh server scp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1807

ssh server sftp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1808

undebug ssh client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1809

undebug ssh server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1810

Chapter 49: Trigger Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1811

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1811

active (trigger) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1813

day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1814

debug trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1816

description (trigger) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1817

repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1818

script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1819

show debugging trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1821

show running-config trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1822

show trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1823

test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1828

time (trigger) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1829

trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1831

trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1832

trigger activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1833

type atmf node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1834

type card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1837

type cpu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1838

type interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1839

type memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1840

type periodic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1841

type ping-poll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1842

type reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1843

type time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1844

undebug trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1845

Chapter 50: Ping-Polling Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1846

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1846

active (ping-polling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1848

clear ping-poll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1849

critical-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1850

debug ping-poll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1851

description (ping-polling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1852

fail-count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1853

ip (ping-polling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1854

length (ping-poll data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1855

normal-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1856

ping-poll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1857

sample-size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1858

show counter ping-poll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1860

show ping-poll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1862

source-ip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1866

timeout (ping polling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1868

up-count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1869

undebug ping-poll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1870

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 29

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Chapter 51: sFlow Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1871

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1871

debug sflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1872

debug sflow agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1873

sflow agent (address) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1874

sflow collector (address) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1876

sflow collector max-datagram-size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1878

sflow enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1879

sflow max-header-size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1880

sflow polling-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1882

sflow sampling-rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1883

show debugging sflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1884

show running-config sflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1886

show sflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1887

show sflow interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1889

undebug sflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1890

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 30

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

List of Commands

(access-list extended ICMP filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .910

(access-list extended IP filter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .912

(access-list extended IP protocol filter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .915

(access-list extended TCP UDP filter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .919

(access-list standard named filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .925

(access-list standard numbered filter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .927

(ipv6 access-list standard filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .944

(named hardware ACL: ICMP entry). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .872

(named hardware ACL: IP packet entry). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .876

(named hardware ACL: IP protocol entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .880

(named hardware ACL: MAC entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .886

(named hardware ACL: TCP or UDP entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .889

aaa accounting auth-mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161

aaa accounting auth-web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163

aaa accounting commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165

aaa accounting dot1x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167

aaa accounting login. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169

aaa accounting update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172

aaa authentication auth-mac. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174

aaa authentication auth-web. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176

aaa authentication dot1x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178

aaa authentication enable default group tacacs+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180

aaa authentication enable default local. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182

aaa authentication login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183

aaa authorization commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 31

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

aaa authorization commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1311

aaa authorization config-commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1187

aaa authorization config-commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1313

aaa group server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1188

aaa local authentication attempts lockout-time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1190

aaa local authentication attempts max-fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1191

aaa login fail-delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1192

accept-lifetime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693

access-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850

access-list (extended numbered) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for ICMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for IP packets). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for IP protocols). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for MAC addresses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for TCP or UDP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866

access-list (standard numbered). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923

access-list extended (named) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900

access-list hardware (named hardware ACL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870

access-list standard (named) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921

accounting login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1193

activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

active (ping-polling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1848

active (trigger). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1813

alliedware-behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695

area-link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1403

arp (IP address MAC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609

arp log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610

arp opportunistic-nd. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613

arp security violation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1324

arp security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1323

arp-aging-timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

arp-mac-disparity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606

arp-reply-bc-dmac. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614

atmf area password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1407

atmf area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1405

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 32

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

atmf authorize provision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1411

atmf authorize. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1409

atmf backup area-masters delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1414

atmf backup area-masters enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1415

atmf backup area-masters now. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1416

atmf backup area-masters synchronize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1417

atmf backup bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1418

atmf backup delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1419

atmf backup enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1420

atmf backup guests delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1421

atmf backup guests enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1422

atmf backup guests now. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1423

atmf backup guests synchronize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1424

atmf backup now. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1425

atmf backup redundancy enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1427

atmf backup server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1428

atmf backup stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1430

atmf backup synchronize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1431

atmf backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1413

atmf cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1432

atmf container login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1434

atmf container. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1433

atmf controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1435

atmf distribute firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1436

atmf domain vlan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1438

atmf enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1441

atmf group (membership) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1442

atmf guest-class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1444

atmf log-verbose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1446

atmf management subnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1447

atmf management vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1450

atmf master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1452

atmf mtu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1453

atmf network-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1454

atmf provision node clone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1456

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 33

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

atmf provision node configure boot config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1458

atmf provision node configure boot system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1459

atmf provision node create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1460

atmf provision node delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1462

atmf provision node license-cert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1464

atmf provision node locate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1466

atmf provision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1455

atmf reboot-rolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1467

atmf recover guest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1473

atmf recover led-off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1474

atmf recover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1471

atmf remote-login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1475

atmf restricted-login. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1477

atmf secure-mode certificate expire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1481

atmf secure-mode certificate expiry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1482

atmf secure-mode certificate renew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1483

atmf secure-mode enable-all. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1484

atmf secure-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1479

atmf select-area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1486

atmf topology-gui enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

atmf virtual-crosslink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1487

atmf virtual-link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1489

atmf working-set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1491

attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1238

auth auth-fail vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1050

auth critical. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1052

auth dynamic-vlan-creation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1053

auth guest-vlan forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1059

auth guest-vlan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1056

auth host-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1061

auth log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1063

auth max-supplicant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1065

auth profile (Global Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1067

auth profile (Interface Configuration). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1068

auth radius send nas-identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1214

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 34

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

auth radius send service-type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1215

auth reauthentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1069

auth roaming disconnected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1070

auth roaming enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1072

auth supplicant-ip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1074

auth supplicant-mac. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1076

auth timeout connect-timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1079

auth timeout quiet-period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1081

auth timeout reauth-period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1082

auth timeout server-timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1084

auth timeout supp-timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1086

auth two-step enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1088

authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1241

auth-mac accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1091

auth-mac authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1092

auth-mac enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1093

auth-mac method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1095

auth-mac password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1097

auth-mac reauth-relearning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1098

auth-mac username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1099

authorization commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1194

authorization commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1309

auth-web accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1100

auth-web authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1101

auth-web enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1102

auth-web forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1104

auth-web max-auth-fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1107

auth-web method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1109

auth-web-server blocking-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1110

auth-web-server dhcp ipaddress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1111

auth-web-server dhcp lease. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1112

auth-web-server dhcp-wpad-option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1113

auth-web-server host-name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1114

auth-web-server intercept-port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1115

auth-web-server ipaddress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1116

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 35

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

auth-web-server login-url . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1118

auth-web-server page language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1117

auth-web-server page logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1119

auth-web-server page sub-title. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1120

auth-web-server page success-message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1121

auth-web-server page title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1122

auth-web-server page welcome-message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1123

auth-web-server ping-poll enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1124

auth-web-server ping-poll failcount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1125

auth-web-server ping-poll interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1126

auth-web-server ping-poll reauth-timer-refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1127

auth-web-server ping-poll timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1128

auth-web-server port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1129

auth-web-server redirect-delay-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1130

auth-web-server redirect-url . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1131

auth-web-server session-keep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1132

auth-web-server ssl intercept-port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1134

auth-web-server ssl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1133

autoboot enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

backpressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

banner exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

banner login (SSH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1763

banner login (system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

banner motd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

boot config-file backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

boot config-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

boot system backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

boot system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

bridge-group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1493

cd. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

channel-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

cisco-metric-behavior (RIP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697

class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950

class-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951

clear aaa local user lockout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1196

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 36

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

clear arp security statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1326

clear arp-cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615

clear atmf links statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1494

clear atmf secure-mode certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1495

clear atmf secure-mode statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1496

clear exception log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

clear ip dhcp snooping binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1327

clear ip dhcp snooping statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1328

clear ip igmp group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748

clear ip igmp interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749

clear ip igmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747

clear ip mroute statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821

clear ip mroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820

clear ip rip route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698

clear ipv6 mld group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797

clear ipv6 mld interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798

clear ipv6 mld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796

clear ipv6 mroute statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823

clear ipv6 mroute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822

clear ipv6 neighbors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650

clear lacp counters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556

clear line console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

clear line vty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

clear lldp statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1682

clear lldp table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1683

clear log buffered. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

clear log permanent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

clear log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

clear loop-protection counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

clear mac address-table dynamic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

clear mac address-table static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

clear mls qos interface policer-counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952

clear ping-poll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1849

clear port counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

clear port-security intrusion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 37

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

clear power-inline counters interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579

clear radius local-server statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1247

clear spanning-tree detected protocols (RSTP and MSTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

clear spanning-tree statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

clear ssh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1764

clear test cable-diagnostics tdr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

clear test interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

client (radsecproxy-srv) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1242

client mutual-authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1244

client name-check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1245

client trustpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1246

clock set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

clock summer-time date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

clock summer-time recurring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

clock timezone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

commit (IPv4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893

configure terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

copy (filename) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

copy current-software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

copy debug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

copy fdb-radius-users (to file) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1248

copy local-radius-user-db (from file). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1250

copy local-radius-user-db (to file) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1251

copy proxy-autoconfig-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1135

copy running-config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

copy startup-config. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

copy web-auth-https-file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1136

copy zmodem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

create autoboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

critical-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1850

crypto key destroy hostkey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1765

crypto key destroy userkey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1766

crypto key generate hostkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1767

crypto key generate rsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1283

crypto key generate userkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1769

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 38

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

crypto key pubkey-chain knownhosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1770

crypto key pubkey-chain userkey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1772

crypto key zeroize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1284

crypto pki authenticate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1285

crypto pki enroll local (deleted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1252

crypto pki enroll local local-radius-all-users (deleted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1253

crypto pki enroll local user (deleted). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1254

crypto pki enroll user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1287

crypto pki enroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1286

crypto pki export local pem (deleted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1255

crypto pki export local pkcs12 (deleted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1256

crypto pki export pem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1289

crypto pki export pkcs12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1290

crypto pki import pem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1292

crypto pki import pkcs12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1294

crypto pki trustpoint local (deleted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1257

crypto pki trustpoint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1295

day. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1814

deadtime (RADIUS server group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1216

debug aaa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1197

debug arp security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1329

debug atmf packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1499

debug atmf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1497

debug crypto pki (deleted). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1258

debug dot1x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1011

debug epsr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1372

debug fiber-monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

debug igmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750

debug ip dhcp snooping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1330

debug ip packet interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

debug lacp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557

debug lldp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1684

debug loopprot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

debug mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1740

debug mld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 39

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

debug mstp (RSTP and STP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

debug nsm mcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825

debug nsm mcast6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826

debug ping-poll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1851

debug platform packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

debug power-inline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580

debug radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1217

debug rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699

debug sflow agent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1873

debug sflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1872

debug snmp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1642

debug ssh client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1774

debug ssh server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1775

debug trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1816

default log buffered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

default log console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

default log email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

default log host. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

default log monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

default log permanent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

default-action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953

default-information originate (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700

default-metric (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701

delete debug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

delete mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1741

delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

description (amf container) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1504

description (Authentication Profile) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1137

description (interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

description (ping-polling). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1852

description (QoS policy-map) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954

description (trigger) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1817

dir. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

disable (Privileged Exec mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

discovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1502

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 40

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

distance (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702

distribute-list (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703

do. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

domain-style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1259

dos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929

dot1x accounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1009

dot1x authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1010

dot1x control-direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1012

dot1x eap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1014

dot1x eapol-version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1015

dot1x initialize interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1017

dot1x initialize supplicant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1018

dot1x keytransmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1019

dot1x max-auth-fail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1020

dot1x max-reauth-req . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1022

dot1x port-control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1024

dot1x timeout tx-period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1026

duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

ecofriendly led . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

edit (filename). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

egress-rate-limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955

egress-vlan-id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1260

egress-vlan-name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1262

enable (Privileged Exec mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

enable password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

enable secret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

enrollment (trustpoint configuration mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1296

epsr configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1374

epsr datavlan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1375

epsr enhancedrecovery enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1376

epsr mode master controlvlan primary port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1377

epsr mode transit controlvlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1378

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 41

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

epsr priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1379

epsr state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1380

epsr trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1381

epsr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1373

erase factory-default. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

erase factory-default. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1505

erase proxy-autoconfig-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1138

erase startup-config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

erase web-auth-https-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1139

exec-timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

exit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

fail-count. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1853

fiber-monitoring action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

fiber-monitoring baseline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

fiber-monitoring enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

fiber-monitoring interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

fiber-monitoring sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

findme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

fingerprint (trustpoint configuration mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1297

flowcontrol (switch port). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

flowcontrol hardware (asyn/console). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

fullupdate (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704

group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1264

gui-timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

hostname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

http-enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1506

instance priority (MSTP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484

instance vlan (MSTP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

interface (to configure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

ip (ping-polling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1854

ip address (IP Addressing and Protocol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618

ip dhcp snooping agent-option allow-untrusted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1333

ip dhcp snooping agent-option circuit-id vlantriplet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1334

ip dhcp snooping agent-option remote-id. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1335

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 42

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

ip dhcp snooping agent-option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1332

ip dhcp snooping binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1336

ip dhcp snooping database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1337

ip dhcp snooping delete-by-client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1338

ip dhcp snooping delete-by-linkdown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1339

ip dhcp snooping max-bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1340

ip dhcp snooping trust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1341

ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1342

ip dhcp snooping violation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1343

ip dhcp snooping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1331

ip domain-list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640

ip domain-lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641

ip domain-name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642

ip gratuitous-arp-link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620

ip igmp access-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752

ip igmp flood specific-query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753

ip igmp immediate-leave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754

ip igmp last-member-query-count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755

ip igmp last-member-query-interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756

ip igmp limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757

ip igmp maximum-groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758

ip igmp querier-timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760

ip igmp query-holdtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761

ip igmp query-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763

ip igmp query-max-response-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765

ip igmp ra-option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767

ip igmp robustness-variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

ip igmp snooping fast-leave. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770

ip igmp snooping mrouter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771

ip igmp snooping querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772

ip igmp snooping report-suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773

ip igmp snooping routermode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

ip igmp snooping tcn query solicit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776

ip igmp snooping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769

ip igmp source-address-check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 43

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

ip igmp startup-query-count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781

ip igmp startup-query-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .782

ip igmp static-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779

ip igmp trusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783

ip igmp version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784

ip igmp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751

ip mroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827

ip multicast forward-first-packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829

ip multicast route-limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830

ip multicast wrong-vif-suppression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831

ip multicast-routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832

ip name-server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643

ip radius source-interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1218

ip redirects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622

ip rip authentication key-chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705

ip rip authentication mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707

ip rip authentication string. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710

ip rip receive version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713

ip rip receive-packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712

ip rip send version 1-compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717

ip rip send version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715

ip rip send-packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714

ip rip split-horizon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719

ip route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679

ip rrp snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1395

ip source binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1344

ip tacacs source-interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1314

ip tftp source-interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

ip unreachables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623

ipv6 access-list standard (named) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942

ipv6 address autoconfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653

ipv6 address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651

ipv6 enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

ipv6 eui64-linklocal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657

ipv6 forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 44

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

ipv6 mld immediate-leave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800

ipv6 mld limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801

ipv6 mld snooping fast-leave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

ipv6 mld snooping mrouter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806

ipv6 mld snooping querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808

ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809

ipv6 mld snooping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803

ipv6 mld static-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811

ipv6 mroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833

ipv6 multicast forward-slow-path-packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659

ipv6 multicast forward-slow-path-packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824

ipv6 multicast route-limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835

ipv6 multicast-routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836

ipv6 nd accept-ra-pinfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660

ipv6 nd minimum-ra-interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661

ipv6 nd raguard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663

ipv6 nd ra-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662

ipv6 nd suppress-ra. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665

ipv6 neighbor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666

ipv6 opportunistic-nd. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667

ipv6 route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668

ipv6 route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681

ipv6 tftp source-interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

ipv6 unreachables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669

key chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721

key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720

key-string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722

lacp global-passive-mode enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558

lacp port-priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559

lacp system-priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560

lacp timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

length (asyn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

length (ping-poll data). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1855

license update (filename) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

license update online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 45

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

license . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

linkflap action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

lldp faststart-count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1686

lldp holdtime-multiplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1687

lldp management-address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1688

lldp med-notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1689

lldp med-tlv-select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1690

lldp non-strict-med-tlv-order-check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1693

lldp notification-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1694

lldp notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1695

lldp port-number-type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1696

lldp reinit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1697

lldp run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1698

lldp timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1699

lldp tlv-select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1700

lldp transmit receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1702

lldp tx-delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1703

location civic-location configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1704

location civic-location identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1708

location civic-location-id. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1709

location coord-location configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1710

location coord-location identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1712

location coord-location-id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1713

location elin-location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1714

location elin-location-id. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1715

log buffered (filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

log buffered exclude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

log buffered size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

log buffered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

log console (filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

log console exclude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

log console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

log email (filter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

log email exclude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 46

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

log email time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

log email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

log event-host. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

log facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

log host (filter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

log host exclude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

log host source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

log host time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

log host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

log monitor (filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

log monitor exclude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

log permanent (filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

log permanent exclude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

log permanent size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

log permanent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

log trustpoint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

login authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1198

logout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

log-rate-limit nsm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

loop-protection action. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

loop-protection action-delay-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

loop-protection loop-detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

loop-protection timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

mac address-table acquire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

mac address-table ageing-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

mac address-table logging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

mac address-table static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

mac address-table thrash-limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

mail from. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1743

mail smtpserver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1744

mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1742

match access-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956

match cos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958

match dscp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959

match eth-format protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 47

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

match inner-cos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963

match inner-vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964

match ip-precedence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965

match mac-type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .966

match tcp-flags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967

match vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968

max-fib-routes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

max-fib-routes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682

maximum-access-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932

maximum-prefix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723

max-static-routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

max-static-routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683

mirror interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

mkdir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

mls qos cos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969

mls qos enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970

mls qos map cos-queue to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971

mls qos map premark-dscp to. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972

modeltype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1508

move debug. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

move. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

mru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

mstack command-node. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1611

mstack enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1612

mstack remote-login. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1613

mtu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

multicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837

nas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1265

neighbor (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724

network (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725

no crypto pki certificate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1299

no debug all. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

no police . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974

normal-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1856

ntp access-group (deprecated). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1618

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 48

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

ntp authenticate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1619

ntp authentication-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1620

ntp broadcastdelay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1621

ntp discard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1622

ntp peer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1623

ntp restrict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1625

ntp server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1627

ntp source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1629

ntp trusted-key (deprecated). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1631

offset-list (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726

passive-interface (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727

ping ipv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670

ping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625

ping-poll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1857

platform l3-vlan-hashing-algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1140

platform load-balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

platform load-balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

platform mac-vlan-hashing-algorithm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1141

platform stop-unreg-mc-flooding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

platform vlan-stacking-tpid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

polarity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

police single-rate action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975

police twin-rate action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977

policy-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979

port-vlan-forwarding-priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

power-inline allow-legacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

power-inline description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

power-inline enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584

power-inline max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585

power-inline priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

power-inline usage-threshold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589

priority-queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980

private-vlan association. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

private-vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

privilege level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 49

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

proxy-port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1199

pwd. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

radius-secure-proxy aaa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1200

radius-secure-proxy local-server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1266

radius-server deadtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1219

radius-server host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1220

radius-server key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1223

radius-server local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1267

radius-server retransmit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1224

radius-server timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1226

reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

recv-buffer-size (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728

redistribute (RIP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729

region (MSTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

reload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

remark new-cos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983

remark-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981

remote-mirror interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

repeat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1818

restart rip graceful . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730

revision (MSTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

rip restart grace-period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731

rmdir. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

rmon alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1749

rmon collection history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1751

rmon collection stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1752

rmon event. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1753

route (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732

router rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733

rsakeypair (trustpoint configuration mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1300

sample-size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1858

script. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1819

security-password forced-change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

security-password history. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

security-password lifetime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 50

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

security-password minimum-categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

security-password minimum-length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

security-password reject-expired-pwd. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

security-password warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

send-lifetime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734

server (radsecproxy-aaa) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1201

server (Server Group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1228

server auth-port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1268

server enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1269

server mutual-authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1203

server name-check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1204

server trustpoint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1205

service advanced-vty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

service dhcp-snooping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1346

service http. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

service password-encryption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

service power-inline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590

service ssh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1776

service telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

service terminal-length (deleted). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

service test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

service-policy input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985

sflow agent (address) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1874

sflow collector (address) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1876

sflow collector max-datagram-size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1878

sflow enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1879

sflow max-header-size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1880

sflow polling-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1882

sflow sampling-rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1883

show aaa local user locked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1207

show aaa server group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1208

show access-list (IPv4 Hardware ACLs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894

show access-list (IPv4 Software ACLs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933

show arp security interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1349

show arp security statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1351

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 51

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

show arp security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1348

show arp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

show atmf area guests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1516

show atmf area guests-detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1518

show atmf area nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1520

show atmf area nodes-detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1522

show atmf area summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1524

show atmf area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1513

show atmf authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1525

show atmf backup area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1532

show atmf backup guest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1534

show atmf backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1528

show atmf container. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1536

show atmf detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1539

show atmf group members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1543

show atmf group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1541

show atmf guests detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1547

show atmf guests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1545

show atmf links detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1552

show atmf links guest detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1563

show atmf links guest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1561

show atmf links statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1567

show atmf links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1550

show atmf nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1570

show atmf provision nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1572

show atmf secure-mode audit link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1576

show atmf secure-mode audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1575

show atmf secure-mode certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1577

show atmf secure-mode sa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1580

show atmf secure-mode statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1583

show atmf secure-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1573

show atmf tech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1585

show atmf virtual-links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1588

show atmf working-set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1590

show atmf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1509

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 52

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

show auth diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1144

show auth interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1146

show auth sessionstatistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1149

show auth statistics interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1150

show auth supplicant interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1154

show auth supplicant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1151

show auth two-step supplicant brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1155

show auth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1142

show auth-web-server page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1157

show auth-web-server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1156

show autoboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

show banner login. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1778

show boot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

show class-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986

show clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

show counter log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

show counter mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1745

show counter ntp (deprecated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1632

show counter ping-poll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1860

show counter snmp-server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1643

show cpu history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

show cpu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

show crypto key hostkey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1779

show crypto key mypubkey rsa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1301

show crypto key pubkey-chain knownhosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1781

show crypto key pubkey-chain userkey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1782

show crypto key userkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1783

show crypto pki certificates (deleted). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1270

show crypto pki certificates local-radius-all-users (deleted). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1271

show crypto pki certificates user (deleted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1272

show crypto pki certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1302

show crypto pki enrollment user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1304

show crypto pki trustpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1305

show crypto pki trustpoints (deleted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1273

show debugging aaa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1209

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 53

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

show debugging arp security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1353

show debugging atmf packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1592

show debugging atmf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1591

show debugging dot1x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1028

show debugging epsr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1382

show debugging igmp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785

show debugging ip dhcp snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1354

show debugging ip packet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628

show debugging lacp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564

show debugging lldp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1716

show debugging loopprot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

show debugging mld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813

show debugging mstp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

show debugging platform packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

show debugging power-inline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591

show debugging radius. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1230

show debugging rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736

show debugging sflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1884

show debugging snmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1647

show debugging trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1821

show debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

show diagnostic channel-group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565

show dos interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .935

show dot1x diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1032

show dot1x interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1034

show dot1x sessionstatistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1039

show dot1x statistics interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1040

show dot1x supplicant interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1043

show dot1x supplicant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1041

show dot1x. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1029

show ecofriendly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

show epsr <epsr-instance> counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1390

show epsr <epsr-instance> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1389

show epsr common segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1387

show epsr config-check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1388

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 54

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

show epsr counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1391

show epsr summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1392

show epsr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1383

show etherchannel detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

show etherchannel summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569

show etherchannel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

show exception log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

show file systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

show file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

show flowcontrol interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

show history. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

show hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644

show http . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

show interface access-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896

show interface brief. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

show interface err-disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

show interface memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

show interface memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

show interface status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

show interface switchport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

show interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

show ip access-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938

show ip dhcp snooping acl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1356

show ip dhcp snooping agent-option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1359

show ip dhcp snooping binding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1361

show ip dhcp snooping interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1363

show ip dhcp snooping statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1365

show ip dhcp snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1355

show ip domain-list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645

show ip domain-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646

show ip igmp groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786

show ip igmp interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788

show ip igmp snooping mrouter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790

show ip igmp snooping routermode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791

show ip igmp snooping statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 55

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

show ip interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630

show ip mroute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838

show ip mvif. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840

show ip name-server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647

show ip protocols rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737

show ip rip database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739

show ip rip interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740

show ip rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738

show ip route database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686

show ip route summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687

show ip route. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684

show ip rpf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841

show ip rrp snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1396

show ip sockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631

show ip source binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1368

show ip traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634

show ipv6 access-list (IPv6 Software ACLs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946

show ipv6 forwarding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671

show ipv6 interface brief. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672

show ipv6 mif . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845

show ipv6 mld groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814

show ipv6 mld interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815

show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816

show ipv6 mld snooping statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817

show ipv6 mroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842

show ipv6 multicast forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844

show ipv6 neighbors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673

show ipv6 route summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676

show ipv6 route summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690

show ipv6 route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

show ipv6 route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

show lacp sys-id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570

show lacp-counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571

show license brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

show license external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 56

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

show license. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

show lldp interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1720

show lldp local-info. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1722

show lldp neighbors detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1729

show lldp neighbors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1727

show lldp statistics interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1735

show lldp statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1733

show lldp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1718

show location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1737

show log config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

show log permanent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

show log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

show loop-protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

show mac address-table thrash-limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

show mac address-table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

show mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1746

show memory allocations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

show memory history. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

show memory pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

show memory shared. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

show memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

show mirror interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

show mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

show mls qos interface policer-counters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989

show mls qos interface queue-counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991

show mls qos interface storm-status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993

show mls qos interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988

show mls qos maps cos-queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994

show mls qos maps premark-dscp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995

show mls qos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987

show mstack nodes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1615

show ntp associations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1633

show ntp counters associations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1637

show ntp counters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1635

show ntp status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1639

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 57

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

show ping-poll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1862

show platform classifier statistics utilization brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

show platform classifier statistics utilization brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996

show platform port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

show platform. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

show policy-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997

show port etherchannel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572

show port-security interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

show port-security intrusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

show port-vlan-forwarding-priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

show power-inline counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

show power-inline interface detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599

show power-inline interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597

show power-inline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592

show privilege. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

show process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

show proxy-autoconfig-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1158

show radius local-server group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1274

show radius local-server nas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1275

show radius local-server statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1276

show radius local-server user. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1277

show radius server group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1210

show radius statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1234

show radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1231

show reboot history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

show remote-mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

show rmon alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1754

show rmon event. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1755

show rmon history. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1757

show rmon statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1759

show router-id. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

show running-config atmf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1593

show running-config interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

show running-config log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

show running-config sflow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1886

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 58

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

show running-config snmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1648

show running-config ssh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1784

show running-config trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1822

show running-config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

show security-password configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

show security-password user. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

show sflow interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1889

show sflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1887

show snmp-server community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1650

show snmp-server group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1651

show snmp-server user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1652

show snmp-server view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1653

show snmp-server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1649

show spanning-tree brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

show spanning-tree mst config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

show spanning-tree mst detail interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

show spanning-tree mst detail interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

show spanning-tree mst detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

show spanning-tree mst instance interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

show spanning-tree mst instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

show spanning-tree mst interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503

show spanning-tree mst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

show spanning-tree statistics instance interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

show spanning-tree statistics instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

show spanning-tree statistics interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

show spanning-tree statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506

show spanning-tree vlan range-index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

show spanning-tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

show ssh client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1788

show ssh server allow-users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1791

show ssh server deny-users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1792

show ssh server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1789

show ssh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1786

show startup-config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

show static-channel-group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 59

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

show storm-control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

show system environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

show system fiber-monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

show system interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

show system mac. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

show system pluggable detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

show system pluggable diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

show system pluggable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

show system serialnumber. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

show system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

show tacacs+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1315

show tech-support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

show telnet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

show test cable-diagnostics tdr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

show trigger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1823

show users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

show version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

show vlan access-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

show vlan filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

show vlan private-vlan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

show vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

snmp trap link-status suppress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1656

snmp trap link-status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1654

snmp-server community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1660

snmp-server contact. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1661

snmp-server enable trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1662

snmp-server engineID local reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1666

snmp-server engineID local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1664

snmp-server group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1667

snmp-server host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1669

snmp-server legacy-ifadminstatus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1671

snmp-server location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1672

snmp-server source-interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1673

snmp-server startup-trap-delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1674

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 60

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

snmp-server user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1675

snmp-server view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1678

snmp-server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1658

source-ip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1866

spanning-tree autoedge (RSTP and MSTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514

spanning-tree bpdu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515

spanning-tree cisco-interoperability (MSTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

spanning-tree edgeport (RSTP and MSTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

spanning-tree enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519

spanning-tree errdisable-timeout enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

spanning-tree errdisable-timeout interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522

spanning-tree force-version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

spanning-tree forward-time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524

spanning-tree guard root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

spanning-tree hello-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526

spanning-tree link-type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

spanning-tree max-age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

spanning-tree max-hops (MSTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

spanning-tree mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

spanning-tree mst configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

spanning-tree mst instance path-cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

spanning-tree mst instance priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

spanning-tree mst instance restricted-role. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

spanning-tree mst instance restricted-tcn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538

spanning-tree mst instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

spanning-tree path-cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539

spanning-tree portfast (STP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540

spanning-tree portfast bpdu-filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

spanning-tree portfast bpdu-guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

spanning-tree priority (bridge priority) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546

spanning-tree priority (port priority). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

spanning-tree restricted-role. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548

spanning-tree restricted-tcn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549

spanning-tree transmit-holdcount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550

speed (asyn). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 61

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

ssh client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1795

ssh server allow-users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1799

ssh server authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1801

ssh server deny-users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1803

ssh server max-auth-tries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1805

ssh server resolve-host. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1806

ssh server scp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1807

ssh server sftp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1808

ssh server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1797

ssh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1793

state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1594

static-channel-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574

storm-action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998

storm-control level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432

storm-downtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999

storm-protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1000

storm-rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1001

storm-window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1002

subject-name (trustpoint configuration). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1306

switchport access vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

switchport atmf-agentlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1596

switchport atmf-arealink remote-area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1597

switchport atmf-crosslink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1599

switchport atmf-guestlink. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1601

switchport atmf-link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1603

switchport mode access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

switchport mode private-vlan trunk promiscuous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

switchport mode private-vlan trunk secondary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

switchport mode private-vlan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

switchport mode trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

switchport mstack-link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1616

switchport port-security aging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

switchport port-security maximum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

switchport port-security violation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 62

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

switchport port-security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

switchport private-vlan host-association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

switchport private-vlan mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

switchport remote-mirror-egress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

switchport trunk allowed vlan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

switchport trunk native vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

switchport vlan-stacking (double tagging). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

switchport voice dscp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

switchport voice vlan priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

switchport voice vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

system territory (deprecated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

tacacs-server host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1317

tacacs-server key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1319

tacacs-server timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1320

tcpdump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636

telnet server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

terminal length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

terminal monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

terminal resize. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

test cable-diagnostics tdr interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

test interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1828

thrash-limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

time (trigger) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1829

timeout (ping polling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1868

timers (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741

traceroute ipv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677

traceroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637

trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1831

trigger activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1833

trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1832

trust dscp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1003

type atmf node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1604

type atmf node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1834

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 63

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

type card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1837

type cpu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1838

type interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1839

type memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1840

type periodic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1841

type ping-poll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1842

type reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1843

type time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1844

undebug aaa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1212

undebug all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

undebug atmf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1607

undebug dot1x. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1046

undebug epsr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1393

undebug igmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794

undebug ip packet interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638

undebug lacp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576

undebug loopprot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

undebug mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1747

undebug mstp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551

undebug ping-poll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1870

undebug platform packet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

undebug radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1235

undebug rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742

undebug sflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1890

undebug snmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1679

undebug ssh client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1809

undebug ssh server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1810

undebug trigger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1845

up-count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1869

user (RADIUS server) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1279

username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1608

username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

version (RIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

vlan (RADIUS server) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1281

vlan access-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 64

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

vlan database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

vlan filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

vlan mode remote-mirror-vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

vty access-class (numbered) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939

vty ipv6 access-class (named) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947

wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

write file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

write memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

write terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

wrr-queue disable queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1004

wrr-queue egress-rate-limit queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1005

wrr-queue weight queues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1006

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 65

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Part 1: Setup and Troubleshooting

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 66

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

CLI Navigation

Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference for the commands used to

navigate between different modes. This chapter also provides a reference for the

help and show commands used to help navigate within the CLI.

Command List •“configure terminal” on page 67

•“disable (Privileged Exec mode)” on page 68

•“do” on page 69

•“enable (Privileged Exec mode)” on page 70

•“end” on page 72

•“exit” on page 73

•“help” on page 74

•“logout” on page 75

•“show history” on page 76

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 67

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

CLI NAVIGATION COMMANDS

CONFIGURE TERMINAL

configure terminal

Overview This command enters the Global Configuration command mode.

Syntax configure terminal

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To enter the Global Configuration command mode (note the change in the

command prompt), enter the command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)#

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 68

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

CLI NAVIGATION COMMANDS

DISABLE (PRIVILEGED EXEC MODE)

disable (Privileged Exec mode)

Overview This command exits the Privileged Exec mode, returning the prompt to the User

Exec mode. To end a session, use the exit command.

Syntax disable

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To exit the Privileged Exec mode, enter the command:

awplus# disable

awplus>

Commands

enable (Privileged Exec mode)

end

exit

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 69

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

CLI NAVIGATION COMMANDS

Overview This command lets you to run User Exec and Privileged Exec mode commands

when you are in any configuration mode.

Syntax do <command>

Mode Any configuration mode

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# do ping 192.0.2.23

Parameter Description

<command>Specify the command and its parameters.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 70

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

CLI NAVIGATION COMMANDS

ENABLE (PRIVILEGED EXEC MODE)

enable (Privileged Exec mode)

Overview This command enters the Privileged Exec mode and optionally changes the

privilege level for a session. If a privilege level is not specified then the maximum

privilege level (15) is applied to the session. If the optional privilege level is omitted

then only users with the maximum privilege level can access Privileged Exec mode

without providing the password as specified by the enable password or enable

secret commands. If no password is specified then only users with the maximum

privilege level set with the username command can assess Privileged Exec mode.

Syntax enable [<privilege-level>]

Mode User Exec

Usage Many commands are available from the Privileged Exec mode that configure

operating parameters for the device, so you should apply password protection to

the Privileged Exec mode to prevent unauthorized use. Passwords can be

encrypted but then cannot be recovered. Note that non-encrypted passwords are

shown in plain text in configurations.

The username command sets the privilege level for the user. After login, users are

given access to privilege level 1. Users access higher privilege levels with the

enable (Privileged Exec mode) command. If the privilege level specified is higher

than the users configured privilege level specified by the username command,

then the user is prompted for the password for that level.

Note that a separate password can be configured for each privilege level using the

enable password and the enable secret commands from the Global Configuration

mode. The service password-encryption command encrypts passwords

configured by the enable password and the enable secret commands, so

passwords are not shown in plain text in configurations.

Example The following example shows the use of the enable command to enter the

Privileged Exec mode (note the change in the command prompt).

awplus> enable

awplus#

The following example shows the enable command enabling access the

Privileged Exec mode for users with a privilege level of 7 or greater. Users with a

privilege level of 7 or greater do not need to enter a password to access Privileged

Exec mode. Users with a privilege level 6 or less need to enter a password to access

Parameter Description

<privilege

- level>

Specify the privilege level for a CLI session in the range <1-15>, where

15 is the maximum privilege level, 7 is the intermediate privilege level

and 1 is the minimum privilege level. The privilege level for a user must

match or exceed the privilege level set for the CLI session for the user

to access Privileged Exec mode. Privilege level for a user is configured

by username.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 71

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

CLI NAVIGATION COMMANDS

ENABLE (PRIVILEGED EXEC MODE)

Privilege Exec mode. Use the enable password command or the enable secret

commands to set the password to enable access to Privileged Exec mode.

awplus> enable 7

awplus#

Commands

disable (Privileged Exec mode)

enable password

enable secret

exit

service password-encryption

username

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 72

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

CLI NAVIGATION COMMANDS

END

end

Overview This command returns the prompt to the Privileged Exec command mode from

any other advanced command mode.

Syntax end

Mode All advanced command modes, including Global Configuration and Interface

Configuration modes.

Example The following example shows the use of the end command to return to the

Privileged Exec mode directly from Interface mode.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# end

awplus#

Commands

disable (Privileged Exec mode)

enable (Privileged Exec mode)

exit

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 73

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

CLI NAVIGATION COMMANDS

EXIT

exit

Overview This command exits the current mode, and returns the prompt to the mode at the

previous level. When used in User Exec mode, the exit command terminates the

session.

Syntax exit

Mode All command modes, including Global Configuration and Interface Configuration

modes.

Example The following example shows the use of the exit command to exit Interface mode,

and return to Configure mode.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# exit

awplus(config)#

Commands

disable (Privileged Exec mode)

enable (Privileged Exec mode)

end

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 74

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

CLI NAVIGATION COMMANDS

HELP

help

Overview This command displays a description of the AlliedWare Plus™ OS help system.

Syntax help

Mode All command modes

Example To display a description on how to use the system help, use the command:

awplus# help

Output Figure 1-1: Example output from the help command

When you need help at the command line, press '?'.



If nothing matches, the help list will be empty. Delete 

characters until entering a '?' shows the available options.



Enter '?' after a complete parameter to show remaining valid 

command parameters (e.g. 'show ?').



Enter '?' after part of a parameter to show parameters that 

complete the typed letters (e.g. 'show ip?').

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 75

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

CLI NAVIGATION COMMANDS

LOGOUT

logout

Overview This command exits the User Exec or Privileged Exec modes and ends the session.

Syntax logout

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To exit the User Exec mode, use the command:

awplus# logout

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 76

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

CLI NAVIGATION COMMANDS

SHOW HISTORY

show history

Overview This command lists the commands entered in the current session. The history

buffer is cleared automatically upon reboot.

The output lists all command line entries, including commands that returned an

error.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show history

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the commands entered during the current session, use the command:

awplus# show history

Output Figure 1-2: Example output from the show history command

1 en

2 show ru

3 conf t

4 route-map er deny 3

5 exit

6 ex

7 di

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 77

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

File and

Configuration

Management

Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference of AlliedWare Plus™ OS file and

configuration management commands.

Filename Syntax

and Keyword

Usage

Many of the commands in this chapter use the placeholder “filename” to represent

the name and location of the file that you want to act on. The following table

explains the syntax of the filename for each different type of file location.

When you copy a

file... Use this syntax: Example:

Copying in local

Flash memory

flash:[/][<directory>/]<filename>To specify a file in the configs directory

in Flash:

flash:configs/example.cfg

Copying to or from

an SD (or SDHC)

card

card:[/][<directory>/]<filename>To specify a file in the top-level

directory of the SD card:

card:example.cfg

Copying with

HTTP

http://[[<username>:<password>]@]

{<hostname>|<host-ip>}[/<filepath

>]/<filename>

To specify a file in the configs directory

on the server:

http://www.company.com/configs/exa

mple.cfg

Copying with TFTP tftp://[[<location>]/<directory>]

/<filename>

To specify a file in the top-level

directory of the server:

tftp://172.1.1.1/example.cfg

Copying with SCP scp://<username>@<location>[/<dir

ectory>][/<filename>]

To specify a file in the configs directory

on the server, logging on as user “bob”:

e.g.

scp://bob@10.10.0.12/configs/example

.cfg

Copying with SFTP sftp://[[<location>]/<directory>]

/<filename>

To specify a file in the top-level

directory of the server:

sftp://10.0.0.5/example.cfg

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 78

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

Valid characters The filename and path can include characters from up to four categories. The

categories are:

1) uppercase letters: A to Z

2) lowercase letters: a to z

3) digits: 0 to 9

4) special symbols: most printable ASCII characters not included in the previous

three categories, including the following characters:

•-

•/

•.

•_

•@

•"

•'

•*

•:

•~

•?

Do not use spaces, parentheses or the + symbol within filenames. Use hyphens or

underscores instead.

Syntax for

directory listings

A leading slash (/) indicates the root of the current filesystem location.

In commands where you need to specify the local filesystem’s Flash base directory,

you may use flash or flash: or flash:/. For example, these commands are all the

same:

•dir flash

•dir flash:

•dir flash:/

Similarly, you can specify the SD (or SDHC) card base directory with card or card:

or card:/

You cannot name a directory or subdirectory flash, nvs, usb, card, tftp, scp, sftp

or http. These keywords are reserved for tab completion when using various file

commands.

Command List •“autoboot enable” on page 80

•“boot config-file” on page 81

•“boot config-file backup” on page 83

•“boot system” on page 84

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 79

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

•“boot system backup” on page 85

•“cd” on page 86

•“copy (filename)” on page 87

•“copy current-software” on page 89

•“copy debug” on page 90

•“copy running-config” on page 91

•“copy startup-config” on page 92

•“copy zmodem” on page 93

•“create autoboot” on page 94

•“delete” on page 95

•“delete debug” on page 96

•“dir” on page 97

•“edit” on page 99

•“edit (filename)” on page 100

•“erase factory-default” on page 101

•“erase startup-config” on page 102

•“ip tftp source-interface” on page 103

•“ipv6 tftp source-interface” on page 104

•“mkdir” on page 105

•“move” on page 106

•“move debug” on page 107

•“pwd” on page 108

•“rmdir” on page 109

•“show autoboot” on page 110

•“show boot” on page 111

•“show file” on page 113

•“show file systems” on page 114

•“show running-config” on page 116

•“show running-config interface” on page 119

•“show startup-config” on page 121

•“show version” on page 122

•“write file” on page 124

•“write memory” on page 125

•“write terminal” on page 126

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 80

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

AUTOBOOT ENABLE

autoboot enable

Overview This command enables the device to restore a release file and/or a configuration

file from external media, such as an SD card.

When the Autoboot feature is enabled, the device looks for a special file called

autoboot.txt on the external media. If this file exists, the device will check the

key and values in the file and recover the device with a new release file and/or

configuration file from the external media. An example of a valid autoboot.txt

file is shown in the following figure.

Figure 2-1: Example autoboot.txt file

Use the no variant of this command to disable the Autoboot feature.

Syntax autoboot enable

no autoboot enable

Default The Autoboot feature operates the first time the device is powered up in the field,

after which the feature is disabled by default.

Mode Global Configuration

Example To enable the Autoboot feature, use the command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no autoboot enable

Commands

create autoboot

show autoboot

show boot

[AlliedWare Plus]

Copy_from_external_media_enabled=yes

Boot_Release=GS970-5.4.7-0.1.rel

Boot_Config=network1.cfg

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 81

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

BOOT CONFIG-FILE

boot config-file

Overview Use this command to set the configuration file to use during the next boot cycle.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the configuration file.

Syntax boot config-file <filepath-filename>

no boot config-file

Mode Global Configuration

Usage You can only specify that the configuration file is on an SD card if there is a backup

configuration file already specified in Flash. If you attempt to set the configuration

file on an SD card and a backup configuration file is not specified in Flash, the

following error message is displayed:

For an explanation of the configuration fallback order, see the File Management

Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Examples To run the configuration file “branch.cfg” stored on the device’s Flash filesystem

the next time the device boots up, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# boot config-file flash:/branch.cfg

To stop running the configuration file “branch.cfg” stored on the device’s Flash

filesystem when the device boots up, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no boot config-file flash:/branch.cfg

To run the configuration file “branch.cfg” stored on the device’s SD card filesystem

the next time the device boots up, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# boot config-file card:/branch.cfg

Parameter Description

<filepath-filename> Filepath and name of a configuration file.

The specified configuration file must exist in the

specified filesystem.

Valid configuration files must have a . cfg extension.

% Backup configuration files must be stored in the flash 

filesystem

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 82

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

BOOT CONFIG-FILE

To stop running the configuration file “branch.cfg” stored on the device’s SD card

filesystem when the device boots up, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no boot config-file card:/branch.cfg

Commands

boot config-file backup

boot system

boot system backup

show boot

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 83

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

BOOT CONFIG-FILE BACKUP

boot config-file backup

Overview Use this command to set a backup configuration file to use if the main

configuration file cannot be accessed.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the backup configuration file.

Syntax boot config-file backup <filepath-filename>

no boot config-file backup

Mode Global Configuration

Usage For an explanation of the configuration fallback order, see the File Management

Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Examples To set the configuration file backup.cfg as the backup to the main

configuration file, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# boot config-file backup flash:/backup.cfg

To remove the configuration file backup.cfg as the backup to the main

configuration file, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no boot config-file backup flash:/backup.cfg

Commands

boot config-file

boot system

boot system backup

show boot

Parameter Description

<filepath-filename> Filepath and name of a backup configuration file.

Backup configuration files must be in the Flash filesystem.

Valid backup configuration files must have a . cfg

extension.

backup The specified file is a backup configuration file.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 84

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

BOOT SYSTEM

boot system

Overview Use this command to set the release file to load during the next boot cycle.

Use the no variant of this command to stop specifying a primary release file to boot

from. If the device boots up with no release file set, it will use autoboot or the

backup release file if either of those are configured, or you can use the boot menu

to select a release file source. To access the boot menu, type Ctrl-B at bootup.

Syntax boot system <filepath-filename>

no boot system

Mode Global Configuration

Usage You can only specify that the release file is on an SD card if there is a backup release

file already specified in Flash. If you attempt to set the release file on an SD card and

a backup release file is not specified in Flash, the following error message is

displayed:

Examples To boot up with the release GS970-5.4.7-0.1.rel file, which is stored on the device’s

Flash filesystem, the next time the device boots up, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# boot system flash:/GS970-5.4.7-0.1.rel

To run the release file GS970-5.4.7-0.1.rel, which is stored on the device’s SD card

filesystem, the next time the device boots up, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# boot system card:/GS970-5.4.7-0.1.rel

Commands

boot config-file

boot config-file backup

boot system backup

show boot

Parameter Description

<filepath-filename> Filepath and name of a release file.

The specified release file must exist and must be stored

in the root directory of the specified filesystem.

Valid release files must have a . rel extension.

% A backup boot image must be set before setting a current boot 

image on card

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 85

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

BOOT SYSTEM BACKUP

boot system backup

Overview Use this command to set a backup release file to load if the main release file cannot

be loaded.

Use the no variant of this command to stop specifying a backup release file.

Syntax boot system backup <filepath-filename>

no boot system backup

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To specify the file GS970-5.4.6-2.4.rel as the backup to the main release file, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# boot system backup flash:/GS970-5.4.6-2.4.rel

To stop specifying a backup to the main release file, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no boot system backup

Commands

boot config-file

boot config-file backup

boot system

show boot

Parameter Description

<filepath-filename> Filepath and name of a backup release file.

Backup release files must be in the Flash filesystem.

Valid release files must have a . rel extension.

backup The specified file is a backup release file.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 86

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

Overview This command changes the current working directory.

Syntax cd <directory-name>

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To change to the directory called images, use the command:

awplus# cd images

Commands

dir

pwd

show file systems

Parameter Description

<directory-name> Name and path of the directory.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 87

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

COPY (FILENAME)

copy (filename)

Overview This command copies a file. This allows you to:

• copy files from your device to a remote device

• copy files from a remote device to your device

• copy files stored on Flash memory to or from a different memory type, such

as an SD card

• create two copies of the same file on your device

Syntax copy [force] <source-name> <destination-name>

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples To use TFTP to copy the file “bob.key” into the current directory from the remote

server at 10.0.0.1, use the command:

awplus# copy tftp://10.0.0.1/bob.key bob.key

To use SFTP to copy the file “new.cfg” into the current directory from a remote

server at 10.0.1.2, use the command:

awplus# copy sftp://10.0.1.2/new.cfg bob.key

To use SCP with the username “beth” to copy the file old.cfg into the directory

config_files on a remote server that is listening on TCP port 2000, use the

command:

awplus# copy scp://beth@serv:2000/config_files/old.cfg old.cfg

To copy the file “newconfig.cfg” onto your device’s Flash from an SD (or SDHC)

Card, use the command:

awplus# copy card:/newconfig.cfg flash:/newconfig.cfg

To copy the file “newconfig.cfg” to an SD (or SDHC) Card from your device’s Flash,

use the command:

awplus# copy flash:/newconfig.cfg card:/newconfig.cfg

Parameter Description

force This parameter forces the copy command to overwrite the

destination file, if it already exists, without prompting the

user for confirmation.

If you specify force, you can copy files to multiple AMF

nodes through a working-set.

<source-name> The filename and path of the source file. See Introduction

on page 77 for valid syntax.

<destination-name> The filename and path for the destination file. See

Introduction on page 77 for valid syntax.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 88

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

COPY (FILENAME)

To copy the file “config.cfg” into the current directory from an SD (or SDHC) Card,

and rename it to “configtest.cfg”, use the command:

awplus# copy card:/config.cfg configtest.cfg

To copy the file “config.cfg” into the current directory from a remote file server, and

rename it to “configtest.cfg”, use the command:

awplus# copy fserver:/config.cfg configtest.cfg

On an AMF managed network to distribute the file “file.txt” to the top level of flash

memory on all nodes from the top level of flash memory on the node named

“master”, use the commands:

awplus# atmf working-set group all

network-name[80]# copy force master.atmf/flash:/file.txt flash:

Commands

copy zmodem

edit (filename)

show file systems

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 89

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

COPY CURRENT-SOFTWARE

copy current-software

Overview This command copies the AlliedWare Plus™ OS software that the device has

booted from, to a destination file. Specify whether the destination is Flash or card

when saving the software to the local filesystem.

Syntax copy current-software <destination-name>

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To copy the current software as installed in the working directory with the file

name my-release.rel, use the command:

awplus# copy current-software my-release.rel

Commands

boot system backup

show boot

Parameter Description

<destination-name> The filename and path where you would like the current

running-release saved. This command creates a file if no file

exists with the specified filename. If a file already exists,

then the CLI prompts you before overwriting the file. See

Introduction on page 77 for valid syntax.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 90

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

COPY DEBUG

copy debug

Overview This command copies a specified debug file to a destination file. Specify whether

the destination is Flash or Card when saving the software to the local filesystem.

Syntax copy debug {<destination-name>|card|debug|flash|nvs|scp|tftp}

{<source-name>|card|debug|flash|nvs|scp|tftp}

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To copy debug output to an SD (or SDHC) card with a filename “my-debug”, use

the following command:

awplus# copy debug card:my-debug

Output Figure 2-2: CLI prompt after entering the copy debug command

Commands

delete debug

move debug

Parameter Description

<destination-name> The filename and path where you would like the debug

output saved. See Introduction on page 77 for valid syntax.

<source-name> The filename and path where the debug output originates.

See Introduction on page 77 for valid syntax.

Enter source file name []:

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 91

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

COPY RUNNING-CONFIG

copy running-config

Overview This command copies the running-config to a destination file, or copies a source

file into the running-config. Commands entered in the running-config do not

survive a device reboot unless they are saved in a configuration file.

Syntax copy <source-name> running-config

copy running-config [<destination-name>]

copy running-config startup-config

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples To copy the running-config into the startup-config, use the command:

awplus# copy running-config startup-config

To copy the file layer3.cfg into the running-config, use the command:

awplus# copy layer3.cfg running-config

To use SCP to copy the running-config as current.cfg to the remote server

listening on TCP port 2000, use the command:

awplus# copy running-config

scp://user@server:2000/config_files/current.cfg

Commands

copy startup-config

write file

write memory

Parameter Description

<source-name>The filename and path of a configuration file. This must be

a valid configuration file with a . cfg filename extension.

Specify this when you want the script in the file to become

the new running-config. See Introduction on page 77 for

valid syntax.

<destination-name>The filename and path where you would like the current

running-config saved. This command creates a file if no file

exists with the specified filename. If a file already exists,

then the CLI prompts you before overwriting the file. See

Introduction on page 77 for valid syntax. If you do not

specify a file name, the device saves the running-config to

a file called default.cfg.

startup-config Copies the running-config into the file set as the current

startup-config file.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 92

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

COPY STARTUP-CONFIG

copy startup-config

Overview This command copies the startup-config script into a destination file, or

alternatively copies a configuration script from a source file into the startup-config

file. Specify whether the destination is Flash or card when loading from the local

filesystem.

Syntax copy <source-name> startup-config

copy startup-config <destination-name>

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples To copy the file Layer3.cfg to the startup-config, use the command:

awplus# copy Layer3.cfg startup-config

To copy the startup-config as the file oldconfig.cfg in the current

directory, use the command:

awplus# copy startup-config oldconfig.cfg

Commands

copy running-config

Parameter Description

<source-name> The filename and path of a configuration file. This must be

a valid configuration file with a . cfg filename extension.

Specify this to copy the script in the file into the startup-

config file. Note that this does not make the copied file the

new startup file, so any further changes made in the

configuration file are not added to the startup-config file

unless you reuse this command. See Introduction on page

77 for valid syntax.

<destination-name> The destination and filename that you are saving the

startup- config as. This command creates a file if no file

exists with the specified filename. If a file already exists,

then the CLI prompts you before overwriting the file. See

Introduction on page 77 for valid syntax.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 93

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

COPY ZMODEM

copy zmodem

Overview This command allows you to copy files using ZMODEM using Minicom. ZMODEM

works over a serial connection and does not need any interfaces configured to do

a file transfer.

Syntax copy <source-name> zmodem

copy zmodem

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To copy the local file asuka.key using ZMODEM, use the command:

awplus# copy asuka.key zmodem

Commands

copy (filename)

show file systems

Parameter Description

<source-name> The filename and path of the source file. See Introduction on

page 77 for valid syntax.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 94

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

CREATE AUTOBOOT

create autoboot

Overview Use this command to create an autoboot.txt file on external media. This

command will automatically ensure that the keys and values that are expected in

this file are correct. After the file is created the create autoboot command will

copy the current release and configuration files across to the external media. The

external media is then available to restore a release file and/or a configuration file

to the device.

Syntax create autoboot card

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To create an autoboot.txt file on an SD card, use the command:

awplus# create autoboot card

Commands

autoboot enable

show autoboot

show boot

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 95

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

DELETE

delete

Overview This command deletes files or directories.

Syntax delete [force] [recursive] <filename>

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples To delete the file temp.cfg from the current directory, use the command:

awplus# delete temp.cfg

To delete the read-only file one.cfg from the current directory, use the

command:

awplus# delete force one.cfg

To delete the directory old_configs, which is not empty, use the command:

awplus# delete recursive old_configs

To delete the directory new_configs, which is not empty, without prompting if

any read-only files are being deleted, use the command:

awplus# delete force recursive new_configs

Commands

erase startup-config

rmdir

Parameter Description

force Ignore nonexistent filenames and never prompt before deletion.

recursive Remove the contents of directories recursively.

<filename>The filename and path of the file to delete. See Introduction on page

77 for valid syntax.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 96

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

DELETE DEBUG

delete debug

Overview Use this command to delete a specified debug output file.

Syntax delete debug <source-name>

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To delete debug output, use the following command:

awplus# delete debug

Output Figure 2-3: CLI prompt after entering the delete debug command

Commands

copy debug

move debug

Parameter Description

<source-name> The filename and path where the debug output originates.

See Introduction on page 77 for valid URL syntax.

Enter source file name []:

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 97

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

DIR

dir

Overview This command lists the files on a filesystem. If no directory or file is specified then

this command lists the files in the current working directory.

Syntax dir [all] [recursive] [sort [reverse] [name|size|time]

[<filename>|card|debug|flash|nvs]

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples To list the files in the current working directory, use the command:

awplus# dir

To list the non-hidden files in the root of the Flash filesystem, use the command:

awplus# dir flash

To list all the files in the root of the Flash filesystem, use the command:

awplus# dir all flash:

To list recursively the files in the Flash filesystem, use the command:

awplus# dir recursive flash:

To list the files in alphabetical order, use the command:

awplus# dir sort name

Parameter Description

all List all files.

recursive List the contents of directories recursively.

sort Sort directory listing.

reverse Sort using reverse order.

name Sort by name.

size Sort by size.

time Sort by modification time (default).

<filename>The name of the directory or file. If no directory or file is

specified, then this command lists the files in the current

working directory.

card SD (or SDHC) card root directory

debug Debug root directory

flash Flash memory root directory

nvs NVS memory root directory

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 98

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

DIR

To list the files by size, smallest to largest, use the command:

awplus# dir sort reverse size

To sort the files by modification time, oldest to newest, use the command:

awplus# dir sort reverse time

Output Figure 2-4: Example output from the dir command

Commands

pwd

awplus#dir

630 -rw- May 19 2016 23:36:31 example.cfg

23652123 -rw- May 17 2016 03:41:18 

149 -rw- Feb 9 2016 00:40:35 exception.log

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 99

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

EDIT

edit

Overview This command opens a text file in the AlliedWare Plus™ text editor. Once opened

you can use the editor to alter to the file.

If a filename is specified and it already exists, then the editor opens it in the text

editor.

If no filename is specified, the editor prompts you for one when you exit it.

Before starting the editor make sure your terminal, terminal emulation program, or

Telnet client is 100% compatible with a VT100 terminal. The editor uses VT100

control sequences to display text on the terminal.

For more information about using the editor, including control sequences, see the

File Management Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax edit [<filename>]

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples To create and edit a new text file, use the command:

awplus# edit

To edit the existing configuration file myconfig.cfg stored on your device’s

Flash memory, use the command:

awplus# edit myconfig.cfg

Commands

edit (filename)

show file

Parameter Description

<filename> Name of a file in the local Flash filesystem.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 100

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

EDIT (FILENAME)

edit (filename)

Overview This command opens a remote text file as read-only in the AlliedWare Plus™ text

editor.

Before starting the editor make sure your terminal, terminal emulation program, or

Telnet client is 100% compatible with a VT100 terminal. The editor uses VT100

control sequences to display text on the terminal.

Syntax edit <filename>

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To view the file bob.key stored in the security directory of a TFTP server, use the

command:

awplus# edit tftp://security/bob.key

Commands

copy (filename)

edit

show file

Parameter Description

<filename> The filename and path of the remote file. See Introduction on

page 77 for valid syntax.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 101

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

ERASE FACTORY-DEFAULT

erase factory-default

Overview This command erases all data from NVS and all data from flash excluding the

following:

• the current release file

• the backup release file

•license files

The device is then rebooted and returned to its factory default condition. The

device can then be used for AMF automatic node recovery.

Syntax erase factory-default

Mode Privileged Exec.

Usage This command is an alias to the atmf cleanup command.

Example To erase data, use the command:

Node_1# erase factory-default

This command will erase all NVS, all flash contents except for

the boot release, and any license files, and then reboot the

switch. Continue? (y/n):y

Commands

atmf cleanup

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 102

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

ERASE STARTUP-CONFIG

erase startup-config

Overview This command deletes the file that is set as the startup-config file, which is the

configuration file that the system runs when it boots up.

At the next restart, the device loads the default configuration file, default.cfg. If

default.cfg no longer exists, then the device loads with the factory default

configuration. This provides a mechanism for you to return the device to the

factory default settings.

Syntax erase startup-config

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To delete the file currently set as the startup-config, use the command:

awplus# erase startup-config

Commands

boot config-file backup

copy running-config

copy startup-config

show boot

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 103

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

IP TFTP SOURCE-INTERFACE

ip tftp source-interface

Overview Use this command to manually specify the IP address that all TFTP requests

originate from. This is useful in network configurations where TFTP servers only

accept requests from certain devices, or where the server cannot dynamically

determine the source of the request.

Use the no variant of this command to stop specifying a source.

Syntax ip tftp source-interface [<interface>|<ip-add>]

no ip tftp source-interface

Default There is no default source specified.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage This command is helpful in network configurations where TFTP traffic needs to

traverse point-to-point links or subnets within your network, and you do not want

to propagate those point-to-point links through your routing tables.

In those circumstances, the TFTP server cannot dynamically determine the source

of the TFTP request, and therefore cannot send the requested data to the correct

device. Specifying a source interface or address enables the TFTP server to send the

data correctly.

Example To specify that TFTP requests originate from the IP address 192.0.2.1, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ip tftp source-interface 192.0.2.1

Commands

copy (filename)

Parameter Description

<interface> The VLAN that TFTP requests originate from. The device will use

the IP address of this interface as its source IP address.

<ip-add> The IP address that TFTP requests originate from, in dotted

decimal format

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 104

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

IPV6 TFTP SOURCE-INTERFACE

ipv6 tftp source-interface

Overview Use this command to manually specify the IPv6 address that all TFTP requests

originate from. This is useful in network configurations where TFTP servers only

accept requests from certain devices, or where the server cannot dynamically

determine the source of the request.

Use the no variant of this command to stop specifying a source.

Syntax ipv6 tftp source-interface [<interface>|<ipv6-add>]

no ipv6 tftp source-interface

Default There is no default source specified.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage This command is helpful in network configurations where TFTP traffic needs to

traverse point-to-point links or subnets within your network, and you do not want

to propagate those point-to-point links through your routing tables.

In those circumstances, the TFTP server cannot dynamically determine the source

of the TFTP request, and therefore cannot send the requested data to the correct

device. Specifying a source interface or address enables the TFTP server to send the

data correctly.

Example To specify that TFTP requests originate from the IPv6 address 2001:db8::8a2e:7334,

use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ipv6 tftp source-interface 2001:db8::8a2e:7334

Commands

copy (filename)

Parameter Description

<interface> The VLAN that TFTP requests originate from. The device will use

the IPv6 address of this interface as its source IPv6 address.

<ipv6-add> The IPv6 address that TFTP requests originate from, in the format

x:x::x:x, for example, 2001:db8::8a2e:7334.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 105

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

MKDIR

mkdir

Overview This command makes a new directory.

Syntax mkdir <name>

Mode Privileged Exec

Usage You cannot name a directory or subdirectory flash, nvs, usb, card, tftp, scp, sftp

or http. These keywords are reserved for tab completion when using various file

commands.

Example To make a new directory called images in the current directory, use the

command:

awplus# mkdir images

Commands

dir

pwd

Parameter Description

<name> The name and path of the directory that you are creating.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 106

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

MOVE

move

Overview This command renames or moves a file.

Syntax move <source-name> <destination-name>

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples To rename the file temp.cfg to startup.cfg, use the command:

awplus# move temp.cfg startup.cfg

To move the file temp.cfg from the root of the Flash filesystem to the directory

myconfigs, use the command:

awplus# move temp.cfg myconfigs/temp.cfg

Commands

delete

edit

show file

show file systems

Parameter Description

<source-name> The filename and path of the source file. See Introduction

on page 77 for valid syntax.

<destination-name> The filename and path of the destination file. See

Introduction on page 77 for valid syntax.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 107

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

MOVE DEBUG

move debug

Overview This command moves a specified debug file to a destination debug file.

Syntax move debug {<destination-name>|card|debug|flash|nvs}

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To move debug output onto an SD (or SDHC) card with a filename “my-debug”, use

the following command:

awplus# move debug card:my-debug

Output Figure 2-5: CLI prompt after entering the move debug command

Commands

copy debug

delete debug

Parameter Description

<destination-name> The filename and path where you would like the debug

output moved to. See Introduction on page 77 for valid

syntax.

Enter source file name []:

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 108

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

PWD

pwd

Overview This command prints the current working directory.

Syntax pwd

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To print the current working directory, use the command:

awplus# pwd

Commands

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 109

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

RMDIR

rmdir

Overview This command removes a directory. This command only works on empty

directories, unless you specify the optional force keyword.

Syntax rmdir [force] <name>

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples To remove the directory “images” from the top level of the Flash filesystem, use the

command:

awplus# rmdir flash:/images

To create a directory called “level1” containing a subdirectory called “level2”, and

then force the removal of both directories, use the commands:

awplus# mkdir level1

awplus# mkdir level1/level2

awplus# rmdir force level1

Commands

dir

mkdir

pwd

Parameter Description

force Optional keyword that allows you to delete directories that

are not empty and contain files or subdirectories.

<name>The name and path of the directory.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 110

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

SHOW AUTOBOOT

show autoboot

Overview This command displays the Autoboot configuration and status.

Syntax show autoboot

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To show the Autoboot configuration and status, use the command:

awplus# show autoboot

Output Figure 2-6: Example output from the show autoboot command

Figure 2-7: Example output from the show autoboot command when an

external media source is not present

Commands

autoboot enable

create autoboot

show boot

awplus#show autoboot

Autoboot configuration

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Autoboot status : enabled

SD Card file autoboot.txt exists : yes



Restore information on SD card

Autoboot enable in autoboot.txt : yes

Restore release file : GS970-5.4.7-0.1.rel (file exists)

Restore configuration file : network_1.cfg (file exists)

awplus#show autoboot

Autoboot configuration

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Autoboot status : enabled

External media source : SD card not found.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 111

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

SHOW BOOT

show boot

Overview This command displays the current boot configuration. We recommend that the

currently running release is set as the current boot image.

Syntax show boot

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To show the current boot configuration, use the command:

awplus# show boot

Output Figure 2-8: Example output from show boot when the current boot config is

on an SD card



awplus#show boot

Boot configuration

----------------------------------------------------------------

Current software : GS970-5.4.7-0.1.rel

Current boot image : card:/GS970-5.4.7-0.1.rel

Backup boot image : flash:/GS970-5.4.6-2.4.rel

Default boot config: flash:/default.cfg

Current boot config: card:/my.cfg (file exists)

Backup boot config: flash:/backup.cfg (file not found)

Autoboot status : enabled

Table 2-1: Parameters in the output from show boot

Parameter Description

Current software The current software release that the device is using.

Current boot image The boot image currently configured for use during the

next boot cycle.

Backup boot image The boot image to use during the next boot cycle if the

device cannot load the main image.

Default boot

config

The default startup configuration file. The device loads

this configuration script if no file is set as the startup-

config file.

Current boot

config

The configuration file currently configured as the

startup-config file. The device loads this configuration file

during the next boot cycle if this file exists.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 112

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

SHOW BOOT

Commands

autoboot enable

boot config-file backup

boot system backup

show autoboot

Backup boot config The configuration file to use during the next boot cycle if

the main configuration file cannot be loaded.

Autoboot status The status of the Autoboot feature; either enabled or

disabled.

Table 2-1: Parameters in the output from show boot (cont.)

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 113

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

SHOW FILE

show file

Overview This command displays the contents of a specified file.

Syntax show file <filename>

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To display the contents of the file oldconfig.cfg, which is in the current

directory, use the command:

awplus# show file oldconfig.cfg

Commands

edit

edit (filename)

show file systems

Parameter Description

<filename> Name of a file on the local Flash filesystem, or name and

directory path of a file.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 114

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

SHOW FILE SYSTEMS

show file systems

Overview This command lists the filesystems and their utilization information where

appropriate.

Syntax show file systems

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples To display the filesystems, use the command:

awplus# show file systems

Output Figure 2-9: Example output from the show file systems command

awplus#show file systems

Size(b) Free(b) Type Flags Prefixes S/D/V Lcl/Ntwk Avail

-------------------------------------------------------------------

63.0M 28.5M flash rw flash: static local Y

- - system rw system: virtual local -

10.0M 9.8M debug rw debug: static local Y

499.0K 431.0K nvs rw nvs: static local Y

- - tftp rw tftp: - network -

- - scp rw scp: - network -

- - sftp ro sftp: - network -

- - http ro http: - network -

- - rsync rw rsync: - network -

Table 3: Parameters in the output of the show file systems command

Parameter Description

Size (B)

Available

The total memory available to this filesystem. The units are given

after the value and are M for Megabytes or k for kilobytes.

Free (B) The total memory free within this filesystem. The units are given

after the value and are M for Megabytes or k for kilobytes.

Type The memory type used for this filesystem; one of:

flash

system

nvs

sdcard

tftp

scp

sftp

http.

Flags The file setting options: rw (read write), ro (read only).

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 115

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

SHOW FILE SYSTEMS

Commands

edit

edit (filename)

show file

Prefixes The prefixes used when entering commands to access the

filesystems; one of:

flash

system

nvs

card

tftp

scp

sftp

http.

S/V/D The memory type: static, virtual, dynamic.

Lcl / Ntwk Whether the memory is located locally or via a network

connection.

Avail Whether the memory is accessible: Y (yes), N (no), - (not applicable)

Table 3: Parameters in the output of the show file systems command (cont.)

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 116

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

SHOW RUNNING-CONFIG

show running-config

Overview This command displays the current configuration of your device. Its output

includes all non-default configuration. The default settings are not displayed.

NOTE: You can control the output by entering | or > at the end of the command:

• To display only lines that contain a particular word, enter:

| include <word>

• To start the display at the first line that contains a particular word, enter:

| begin <word>

• To save the output to a file, enter:

> <filename>

Syntax show running-config [full|<feature>]

Parameter Description

full Display the running-config for all features. This is the default setting, so

it is the same as entering show running-config.

<feature>Display only the configuration for a single feature. The features

available depend on your device and will be some of the following list:

access-list ACL configuration

antivirus Antivirus configuration

application Application configuration

as-path Autonomous system path filter

configuration

as-path access-list Configuration of ACLs for AS path filtering

atmf Allied Telesis Management Framework

configuration

bgp Border Gateway Protocol (BGP)

configuration

community-list Community-list configuration

crypto Security-specific configuration

dhcp DHCP configuration

dpi Deep Packet Inspection configuration

entity Entity configuration

firewall Firewall configuration

interface Interface configuration. See show

running-config interface for further

options.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 117

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

SHOW RUNNING-CONFIG

ip Internet Protocol (IP) configuration

ip pim dense-mode PIM-DM configuration

ip pim sparse-mode PIM-SM configuration

ip route IP static route configuration

ip-reputation IP Reputation configuration

ips IPS configuration

ipsec Internet Protocol Security (IPSec)

configuration

ipv6 Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6)

configuration

ipv6 access-list IPv6 ACL configuration

ipv6 mroute IPv6 multicast route configuration

ipv6 prefix-list IPv6 prefix list configuration

ipv6 route IPv6 static route configuration

isakmp Internet Security Association Key

Management Protocol (ISAKMP)

configuration

key chain Authentication key management

configuration

l2tp-profile L2TP tunnel profile configuration

lldp LLDP configuration

log Logging utility configuration

malware-protection Malware protection configuration

nat Network Address Translation configuration

power-inline Power over Ethernet (PoE) configuration

policy-based-routing Policy-based routing (PBR) configuration

pppoe-ac PPPoE access concentrator configuration

prefix-list Prefix-list configuration

route-map Route-map configuration

router Router configuration

router-id Configuration of the router identifier for

this system

security-password Strong password security configuration

snmp SNMP configuration

ssh Secure Shell configuration

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 118

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

SHOW RUNNING-CONFIG

Mode Privileged Exec and Global Configuration

Example To display the current configuration of your device, use the command:

awplus# show running-config

Output Figure 2-10: Example output from show running-config

Commands

copy running-config

show running-config interface

switch Switch configuration

web-control Web Control configuration

Parameter Description

awplus#show running-config

!

service password-encryption

!

username manager privilege 15 password 8 $1$bJoVec4D$JwOJGPr7YqoExA0GVasdE0

!

service telnet

!

no clock timezone

!

spanning-tree mode rstp

!

interface port1.0.1-1.0.6

switchport

switchport mode access

!

stack virtual-mac

stack virtual-chassis-id 2111

!

ip domain-lookup

!

interface vlan2

ip address 172.28.8.210/16

!

ip route 0.0.0.0/0 172.28.0.1

!

line con 0

line vty 0 4

!

end

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 119

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

SHOW RUNNING-CONFIG INTERFACE

show running-config interface

Overview This command displays the current configuration of one or more interfaces on the

device.

Syntax show running-config interface [<interface-list>] [dot1x|ip

igmp|ip multicast|ip pim dense-mode|ip pim sparse-mode|ipv6

rip|lacp|mstp|ospf|rip|rstp|stp]

Mode Privileged Exec and Global Configuration

Default Displays information for all protocols on all interfaces

Examples To display the current running configuration of your device for ports 1 to 4, use the

command:

awplus# show running-config interface port1.0.1-port1.0.4

Parameter Description

<interface-list>The interfaces or ports to display information about. An

interface-list can be:

• a VLAN (e.g. vlan2), a LAN port (e.g. port1.0.4), a static

channel group (e.g. sa2) or a dynamic (LACP) channel

group (e.g. po2)

• a continuous range of VLANs, ports, static channel

groups or dynamic (LACP) channel groups, separated by

a hyphen (e.g. vlan2-8, or port1.0.1-1.0.4, or sa1-2, or

po1-2)

• a comma-separated list of the above (e.g.

vlan2,vlan20-30). Do not mix interface types in a list.

The specified interfaces must exist.

dot1x Displays running configuration for 802.1X port

authentication for the specified interfaces.

lacp Displays running configuration for LACP (Link Aggregation

Control Protocol) for the specified interfaces.

ip igmp Displays running configuration for IGMP (Internet Group

Management Protocol) for the specified interfaces.

ip multicast Displays running configuration for general multicast

settings for the specified interfaces.

mstp Displays running configuration for MSTP (Multiple

Spanning Tree Protocol) for the specified interfaces.

rstp Displays running configuration for RSTP (Rapid Spanning

Tree Protocol) for the specified interfaces.

stp Displays running configuration for STP (Spanning Tree

Protocol) for the specified interfaces.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 120

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

SHOW RUNNING-CONFIG INTERFACE

To display the current running configuration of a device for VLAN 1, use the

command:

awplus# show running-config interface vlan1

To display the current running configuration of a device for VLANs 1 and 3-5, use

the command:

awplus# show running-config interface vlan1,vlan3-vlan5

Output Figure 2-11: Example output from a show running-config interface port1.0.2

command

Commands

copy running-config

show running-config

awplus#show running-config interface port1.0.2

!

interface port1.0.2

switchport

switchport mode access

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 121

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

SHOW STARTUP-CONFIG

show startup-config

Overview This command displays the contents of the start-up configuration file, which is the

file that the device runs on start-up.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show startup-config

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To display the contents of the current start-up configuration file, use the

command:

awplus# show startup-config

Output Figure 2-12: Example output from the show startup-config command

Commands

boot config-file backup

copy running-config

copy startup-config

erase startup-config

show boot

awplus#show startup-config

!

service password-encryption

!

no banner motd

!

username manager privilege 15 password 8 $1$bJoVec4D$JwOJGPr7YqoExA0GVasdE0

!

no service ssh

!

service telnet

!

service http

!

no clock timezone

.

line con 0

line vty 0 4

!

end

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 122

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

SHOW VERSION

show version

Overview This command displays the version number and copyright details of the current

AlliedWare Plus™ OS your device is running.

Syntax show version

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the version details of your currently installed software, use the

command:

awplus# show version

Output Figure 2-13: Example output from show version

awplus#show version 



AlliedWare Plus (TM) 5.4.3 19/11/12 13:22:32 



Build name : GS970-5.4.7-0.1.rel

Build date : Fri Jun 6 13:22:32 NZST 2014 

Build type : RELEASE 

NET-SNMP SNMP agent software 

Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications. 

RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm 

OpenSSL Library 

Original SSLeay License 

sFlow(R) Agent Software 

DHCP Library 

DHCP Bind 

Application Interface Specification Framework 

Hardware Platform Interface Library 

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 123

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

SHOW VERSION

Commands

boot system backup

show boot

Corosync Cluster Engine 

Software written by Ian F. Darwin and others; 

maintained 1994- Christos Zoulas.

ProL2TP 



Portions of this product are covered by the GNU GPL, source code may be 

downloaded from: http://www.alliedtelesis.co.nz/support/gpl/awp.html

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 124

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

WRITE FILE

write file

Overview This command copies the running-config into the file that is set as the current

startup-config file. This command is a synonym of the write memory and copy

running-config startup-config commands.

Syntax write [file]

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To write configuration data to the start-up configuration file, use the command:

awplus# write file

Commands

copy running-config

write memory

show running-config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 125

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

WRITE MEMORY

write memory

Overview This command copies the running-config into the file that is set as the current

startup-config file. This command is a synonym of the write file and copy

running-config startup-config commands.

Syntax write [memory]

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To write configuration data to the start-up configuration file, use the command:

awplus# write memory

Commands

copy running-config

write file

show running-config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 126

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FILE AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

WRITE TERMINAL

write terminal

Overview This command displays the current configuration of the device. This command is a

synonym of the show running-config command.

Syntax write terminal

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To display the current configuration of your device, use the command:

awplus# write terminal

Commands

show running-config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 127

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

User Access

Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference of commands used to configure

user access.

Command List •“clear line console” on page 129

•“clear line vty” on page 130

•“enable password” on page 131

•“enable secret” on page 134

•“exec-timeout” on page 137

•“flowcontrol hardware (asyn/console)” on page 139

•“length (asyn)” on page 141

•“line” on page 142

•“privilege level” on page 144

•“security-password history” on page 145

•“security-password forced-change” on page 146

•“security-password lifetime” on page 147

•“security-password minimum-categories” on page 148

•“security-password minimum-length” on page 149

•“security-password reject-expired-pwd” on page 150

•“security-password warning” on page 151

•“service advanced-vty” on page 152

•“service password-encryption” on page 153

•“service telnet” on page 154

•“service terminal-length (deleted)” on page 155

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 128

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

•“show privilege” on page 156

•“show security-password configuration” on page 157

•“show security-password user” on page 158

•“show telnet” on page 159

•“show users” on page 160

•“telnet” on page 161

•“telnet server” on page 162

•“terminal length” on page 163

•“terminal resize” on page 164

•“username” on page 165

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 129

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

CLEAR LINE CONSOLE

clear line console

Overview This command resets a console line. If a terminal session exists on the line then the

terminal session is terminated. If console line settings have changed then the new

settings are applied.

Syntax clear line console 0

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To reset the console line (asyn), use the command:

awplus# clear line console 0

awplus# % The new settings for console line 0 have been applied

Commands

clear line vty

flowcontrol hardware (asyn/console)

line

show users

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 130

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

CLEAR LINE VTY

clear line vty

Overview This command resets a VTY line. If a session exists on the line then it is closed.

Syntax clear line vty <0-32>

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To reset the first VTY line, use the command:

awplus# clear line vty 1

Commands

privilege level

line

show telnet

show users

Parameter Description

<0-32>Line number

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 131

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

ENABLE PASSWORD

enable password

Overview To set a local password to control access to various privilege levels, use the enable

password Global Configuration command. Use the enable password command to

modify or create a password to be used, and use the no enable password

command to remove the password.

Note that the enable secret command is an alias for the enable password

command, and the no enable secret command is an alias for the no enable

password command. Issuing a no enable password command removes a password

configured with the enable secret command. The enable password command is

shown in the running and startup configurations. Note that if the enable secret

command is entered then enable password is shown in the configuration.

Syntax enable password [<plain>|8 <hidden>|level <1-15> 8 <hidden>]

no enable password [level <1-15>]

Default The privilege level for enable password is level 15 by default. Previously the default

was level 1.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage This command enables the Network Administrator to set a password for entering

the Privileged Exec mode when using the enable (Privileged Exec mode)

command. There are three methods to enable a password. In the examples below,

for each method, note that the configuration is different and the configuration file

output is different, but the password string to be used to enter the Privileged Exec

mode with the enable command is the same (mypasswd).

A user can now have an intermediate CLI security level set with this command for

privilege level 7 to access all the show commands in Privileged Exec mode and all

the commands in User Exec mode, but not any configuration commands in

Privileged Exec mode.

Parameter Description

<plain>Specifies the unencrypted password.

8Specifies a hidden password will follow.

<hidden>Specifies the hidden encrypted password. Use an encrypted

password for better security where a password crosses the network

or is stored on a TFTP server.

level Privilege level <1-15>. Level for which the password applies. You can

specify up to 16 privilege levels, using numbers 1 through 15. Level 1

is normal EXEC-mode user privileges for User Exec mode. If this

argument is not specified in the command or the no variant of the

command, the privilege level defaults to 15 (enable mode privileges)

for Privileged Exec mode. A privilege level of 7 can be set for

intermediate CLI security.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 132

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

ENABLE PASSWORD

Note that the enable password command is an alias for the enable secret

command and one password per privilege level is allowed using these commands.

Do not assign one password to a privilege level with enable password and another

password to a privilege level with enable secret. Use enable password or enable

secret commands. Do not use both on the same level.

Using plain

passwords

The plain password is a clear text string that appears in the configuration file as

configured.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# enable password mypasswd

awplus(config)# end

This results in the following show output:

Using encrypted

passwords

You can configure an encrypted password using the service password-encryption

command. First, use the enable password command to specify the string that you

want to use as a password (mypasswd). Then, use the service

password-encryption command to encrypt the specified string (mypasswd). The

advantage of using an encrypted password is that the configuration file does not

show mypasswd, it will only show the encrypted string fU7zHzuutY2SA.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# enable password mypasswd

awplus(config)# service password-encryption

awplus(config)# end

This results in the following show output:

Using hidden

passwords

You can configure an encrypted password using the HIDDEN parameter (8) with

the enable password command. Use this method if you already know the

encrypted string corresponding to the plain text string that you want to use as a

password. It is not required to use the service password-encryption command for

awplus#show run

Current configuration:

hostname awplus

enable password mypasswd

!

interface lo

awplus#show run

Current configuration:

hostname awplus

enable password 8 fU7zHzuutY2SA

service password-encryption

!

interface lo

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 133

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

ENABLE PASSWORD

this method. The output in the configuration file will show only the encrypted

string, and not the text string.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# enable password 8 fU7zHzuutY2SA

awplus(config)# end

This results in the following show output:

Commands

enable (Privileged Exec mode)

enable secret

service password-encryption

privilege level

show privilege

username

show running-config

awplus#show run

Current configuration:

hostname awplus

enable password 8 fU7zHzuutY2SA

!

interface lo

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 134

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

ENABLE SECRET

enable secret

Overview To set a local password to control access to various privilege levels, use the enable

secret Global Configuration command. Use the enable secret command to modify

or create a password to be used, and use the no enable secret command to remove

the password.

Note that the enable secret command is an alias for the enable password

command, and the no enable secret command is an alias for the no enable

password command. Issuing a no enable password command removes a password

configured with the enable secret command. The enable password command is

shown in the running and startup configurations. Note that if the enable secret

command is entered then enable password is shown in the configuration

Syntax enable secret [<plain>|8 <hidden>|level <0-15> 8 <hidden>]

no enable secret [level <1-15>]

Default The privilege level for enable secret is level 15 by default.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage This command enables the Network Administrator to set a password for entering

the Privileged Exec mode when using the enable (Privileged Exec mode)

command. There are three methods to enable a password. In the examples below,

for each method, note that the configuration is different and the configuration file

output is different, but the password string to be used to enter the Privileged Exec

mode with the enable command is the same (mypasswd).

A user can have an intermediate CLI security level set with this command for

privilege level 7 to access all the show commands in Privileged Exec mode and all

the commands in User Exec mode, but not any configuration commands in

Privileged Exec mode.

Parameter Description

<plain>Specifies the unencrypted password.

8Specifies a hidden password will follow.

<hidden>Specifies the hidden encrypted password. Use an encrypted

password for better security where a password crosses the network

or is stored on a TFTP server.

level Privilege level <1-15>. Level for which the password applies. You can

specify up to 16 privilege levels, using numbers 1 through 15. Level 1

is normal EXEC-mode user privileges for User Exec mode. If this

argument is not specified in the command or the no variant of the

command, the privilege level defaults to 15 (enable mode privileges)

for Privileged Exec mode. A privilege level of 7 can be set for

intermediate CLI security.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 135

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

ENABLE SECRET

Note that the enable secret command is an alias for the enable password

command and one password per privilege level is allowed using these commands.

Do not assign one password to a privilege level with enable password and another

password to a privilege level with enable secret. Use enable password or enable

secret commands. Do not use both on the same level.

Using plain

passwords

The plain password is a clear text string that appears in the configuration file as

configured.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# enable secret mypasswd

awplus(config)# end

This results in the following show output:

Using encrypted

passwords

Configure an encrypted password using the service password-encryption

command. First, use the enable password command to specify the string that you

want to use as a password (mypasswd). Then, use the service

password-encryption command to encrypt the specified string (mypasswd). The

advantage of using an encrypted password is that the configuration file does not

show mypasswd, it will only show the encrypted string fU7zHzuutY2SA.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# enable secret mypasswd

awplus(config)# service password-encryption

awplus(config)# end

This results in the following show output:

Using hidden

passwords

Configure an encrypted password using the HIDDEN parameter (8) with the

enable password command. Use this method if you already know the encrypted

string corresponding to the plain text string that you want to use as a password. It

is not required to use the service password-encryption command for this method.

awplus#show run

Current configuration:

hostname awplus

enable password mypasswd

!

interface lo

awplus#show run

Current configuration:

hostname awplus

enable password 8 fU7zHzuutY2SA

service password-encryption

!

interface lo

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 136

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

ENABLE SECRET

The output in the configuration file will show only the encrypted string, and not

the text string:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# enable secret 8 fU7zHzuutY2SA

awplus(config)# end

This results in the following show output:

Commands

enable (Privileged Exec mode)

enable secret

service password-encryption

privilege level

show privilege

username

show running-config

awplus#show run

Current configuration:

hostname awplus

enable password 8 fU7zHzuutY2SA

!

interface lo

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 137

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

EXEC-TIMEOUT

exec-timeout

Overview This command sets the interval your device waits for user input from either a

console or VTY connection. Once the timeout interval is reached, the connection is

dropped. This command sets the time limit when the console or VTY connection

automatically logs off after no activity.

The no variant of this command removes a specified timeout and resets to the

default timeout (10 minutes).

Syntax exec-timeout {<minutes>} [<seconds>]

no exec-timeout

Default The default for the exec-timeout command is 10 minutes and 0 seconds

(exec-timeout 10 0).

Mode Line Configuration

Usage This command is used set the time the telnet session waits for an idle VTY session,

before it times out. An exec-timeout 0 0 setting will cause the telnet session to

wait indefinitely. The command exec-timeout 0 0 is useful while configuring a

device, but reduces device security.

If no input is detected during the interval then the current connection resumes. If

no connections exist then the terminal returns to an idle state and disconnects

incoming sessions.

Examples To set VTY connections to timeout after 2 minutes, 30 seconds if there is no

response from the user, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# line vty 0 32

awplus(config-line)# exec-timeout 2 30

To reset the console connection to the default timeout of 10 minutes 0 seconds if

there is no response from the user, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# line console 0

awplus(config-line)# no exec-timeout

Validation

Commands

show running-config

Parameter Description

<minutes> <0-35791> Required integer timeout value in minutes

<seconds> <0-2147483> Optional integer timeout value in seconds

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 138

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

EXEC-TIMEOUT

Commands

line

service telnet

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 139

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

FLOWCONTROL HARDWARE (ASYN/CONSOLE)

flowcontrol hardware (asyn/console)

Overview Use this command to enable RTS/CTS (Ready To Send/Clear To Send) hardware

flow control on a terminal console line (asyn port) between the DTE (Data Terminal

Equipment) and the DCE (Data Communications Equipment).

Syntax flowcontrol hardware

no flowcontrol hardware

Mode Line Configuration

Default Hardware flow control is disabled by default.

Usage Hardware flow control makes use of the RTS and CTS control signals between the

DTE and DCE where the rate of transmitted data is faster than the rate of received

data. Flow control is a technique for ensuring that a transmitting entity does not

overwhelm a receiving entity with data. When the buffers on the receiving device

are full, a message is sent to the sending device to suspend the transmission until

the data in the buffers has been processed.

Hardware flow control can be configured on terminal console lines (e.g. asyn0). For

Reverse Telnet connections, hardware flow control must be configured to match

on both the Access Server and the Remote Device. For terminal console sessions,

hardware flow control must be configured to match on both the DTE and the DCE.

Settings are saved in the running configuration. Changes are applied after reboot,

clear line console, or after closing the session.

Use show running-config and show startup-config commands to view hardware

flow control settings that take effect after reboot for a terminal console line. See

the show running-config command output:

Note that line configuration commands do not take effect immediately. Line

configuration commands take effect after one of the following commands or

events:

•issuing a clear line console command

•issuing a reboot command

• logging out of the current session

awplus#show running-config

!

line con 1

speed 9600

mode out 2001

flowcontrol hardware

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 140

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

FLOWCONTROL HARDWARE (ASYN/CONSOLE)

Examples To enable hardware flow control on terminal console line asyn0, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# line console 0

awplus(config-line)# flowcontrol hardware

To disable hardware flow control on terminal console line asyn0, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# line console 0

awplus(config-line)# no flowcontrol hardware

Commands

clear line console

show running-config

speed (asyn)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 141

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

LENGTH (ASYN)

length (asyn)

Overview Use this command to specify the number of rows of output that the device will

display before pausing, for the console or VTY line that you are configuring.

The no variant of this command restores the length of a line (terminal session)

attached to a console port or to a VTY to its default length of 22 rows.

Syntax length <0-512>

no length

Mode Line Configuration

Default The length of a terminal session is 22 rows. The no length command restores the

default.

Usage If the output from a command is longer than the length of the line the output will

be paused and the ‘–More–’ prompt allows you to move to the next screen full of

data.

A length of 0 will turn off pausing and data will be displayed to the console as long

as there is data to display.

Examples To set the terminal session length on the console to 10 rows, use the command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# line console 0

awplus(config-line)# length 10

To reset the terminal session length on the console to the default (22 rows), use the

command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# line console 0

awplus(config-line)# no length

To display output to the console continuously, use the command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# line console 0

awplus(config-line)# length 0

Commands

terminal resize

terminal length

Parameter Description

<0-512> Number of lines on screen. Specify 0 for no pausing.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 142

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

LINE

line

Overview Use this command to enter line configuration mode for the specified VTYs or the

console. The command prompt changes to show that the device is in Line

Configuration mode.

Syntax line vty <first-line> [<last-line>]

line console 0

Mode Global Configuration

Usage This command puts you into Line Configuration mode. Once in Line Configuration

mode, you can configure console and virtual terminal settings, including setting

speed (asyn), length (asyn), privilege level, and authentication (login

authentication) or accounting (accounting login) method lists.

To change the console (asyn) port speed, use this line command to enter Line

Configuration mode before using the speed (asyn)command. Set the console

speed (Baud rate) to match the transmission rate of the device connected to the

console (asyn) port on your device.

Note that line configuration commands do not take effect immediately. Line

configuration commands take effect after one of the following commands or

events:

•issuing a clear line console command

•issuing a reboot command

• logging out of the current session

Examples To enter Line Configuration mode in order to configure all VTYs, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# line vty 0 32

awplus(config-line)#

Parameter Description

<first-line> <0-32> Specify the first line number.

<last-line> <0-32> Specify the last line number.

console The console terminal line(s) for local access.

vty Virtual terminal for remote console access.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 143

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

LINE

To enter Line Configuration mode to configure the console (asyn 0) port terminal

line, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# line console 0

awplus(config-line)#

Commands

accounting login

clear line console

clear line vty

flowcontrol hardware (asyn/console)

length (asyn)

privilege level

speed (asyn)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 144

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

PRIVILEGE LEVEL

privilege level

Overview This command sets a privilege level for VTY or console connections. The

configured privilege level from this command overrides a specific user’s initial

privilege level at the console login.

Syntax privilege level <1-15>

Mode Line Configuration

Usage You can set an intermediate CLI security level for a console user with this command

by applying privilege level 7 to access all show commands in Privileged Exec and

all User Exec commands. However, intermediate CLI security will not show

configuration commands in Privileged Exec.

Examples To set the console connection to have the maximum privilege level, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# line console 0

awplus(config-line)# privilege level 15

To set all VTY connections to have the minimum privilege level, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# line vty 0 5

awplus(config-line)# privilege level 1

To set all VTY connections to have an intermediate CLI security level, to access all

show commands, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# line vty 0 5

awplus(config-line)# privilege level 7

Commands

enable password

line

show privilege

username

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 145

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

SECURITY-PASSWORD HISTORY

security-password history

Overview This command specifies the number of previous passwords that are unable to be

reused. A new password is invalid if it matches a password retained in the

password history.

The no variant of the command disables this feature.

Syntax security-password history <0-15>

no security-password history

Default The default history value is 0, which will disable the history functionality.

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To restrict reuse of the three most recent passwords, use the command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# security-password history 3

To allow the reuse of recent passwords, use the command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no security-password history

Commands

security-password forced-change

security-password lifetime

security-password minimum-categories

security-password minimum-length

security-password reject-expired-pwd

security-password warning

show running-config security-password

show security-password configuration

Parameter Description

<0-15> The allowable range of previous passwords to match against. A

value of 0 will disable the history functionality and is equivalent to

the no security-password history command. If the history

functionality is disabled, all users’ password history is reset and all

password history is lost.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 146

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

SECURITY-PASSWORD FORCED-CHANGE

security-password forced-change

Overview This command specifies whether or not a user is forced to change an expired

password at the next login. If this feature is enabled, users whose passwords have

expired are forced to change to a password that must comply with the current

password security rules at the next login.

Note that to use this command, the lifetime feature must be enabled with the

security-password lifetime command and the reject-expired-pwd feature must be

disabled with the security-password reject-expired-pwd command.

The no variant of the command disables this feature.

Syntax security-password forced-change

no security-password forced-change

Default The forced-change feature is disabled by default.

Mode Global Configuration

Example To force a user to change their expired password at the next login, use the

command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# security-password forced-change

Commands

security-password history

security-password lifetime

security-password minimum-categories

security-password minimum-length

security-password reject-expired-pwd

security-password warning

show running-config security-password

show security-password configuration

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 147

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

SECURITY-PASSWORD LIFETIME

security-password lifetime

Overview This command enables password expiry by specifying a password lifetime in days.

Note that when the password lifetime feature is disabled, it also disables the

security-password forced-change command and the security-password warning

command.

The no variant of the command disables this feature.

Syntax security-password lifetime <0-1000>

no security-password lifetime

Default The default password lifetime is 0, which will disable the lifetime functionality.

Mode Global Configuration

Example To configure the password lifetime to 10 days, use the command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# security-password lifetime 10

Commands

security-password forced-change

security-password history

security-password minimum-categories

security-password minimum-length

security-password reject-expired-pwd

security-password warning

show running-config security-password

show security-password configuration

Parameter Description

<0-1000> Password lifetime specified in days. A value of 0 will disable lifetime

functionality and the password will never expire. This is equivalent

to the no security-password lifetime command.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 148

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

SECURITY-PASSWORD MINIMUM-CATEGORIES

security-password minimum-categories

Overview This command specifies the minimum number of categories that the password

must contain in order to be considered valid. The password categories are:

• uppercase letters: A to Z

• lowercase letters: a to z

• digits: 0 to 9

• special symbols: all printable ASCII characters not included in the previous

three categories. The question mark (?) cannot be used as it is reserved for

help functionality.

Note that to ensure password security, the minimum number of categories should

align with the lifetime selected, i.e. the fewer categories specified the shorter the

lifetime specified.

Syntax security-password minimum-categories <1-4>

Default The default number of categories that the password must satisfy is 1.

Mode Global Configuration

Example To configure the required minimum number of character categories to be 3, use

the command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# security-password minimum-categories 3

Commands

security-password forced-change

security-password history

security-password lifetime

security-password minimum-length

security-password reject-expired-pwd

security-password warning

show running-config security-password

show security-password configuration

username

Parameter Description

<1-4> Number of categories the password must satisfy, in the range 1 to 4.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 149

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

SECURITY-PASSWORD MINIMUM-LENGTH

security-password minimum-length

Overview This command specifies the minimum allowable password length. This value is

checked against when there is a password change or a user account is created.

Syntax security-password minimum-length <1-23>

Default The default minimum password length is 1.

Mode Global Configuration

Example To configure the required minimum password length as 8, use the command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# security-password minimum-length 8

Commands

security-password history

security-password forced-change

security-password lifetime

security-password minimum-categories

security-password reject-expired-pwd

security-password warning

show running-config security-password

show security-password configuration

username

Parameter Description

<1-23> Minimum password length in the range from 1 to 23.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 150

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

SECURITY-PASSWORD REJECT-EXPIRED-PWD

security-password reject-expired-pwd

Overview This command specifies whether or not a user is allowed to login with an expired

password. Users with expired passwords are rejected at login if this functionality is

enabled. Users then have to contact the Network Administrator to change their

password.

CAUTION: Once all users’ passwords are expired you are unable to login to the device

again if the security-password reject-expired-pwd command has been executed. You

will have to reboot the device with a default configuration file, or load an earlier

software version that does not have the security password feature.

We recommend you never have the command line “security-password

reject-expired-pwd” in a default config file.

Note that when the reject-expired-pwd functionality is disabled and a user logs on

with an expired password, if the forced-change feature is enabled with

security-password forced-change command, a user may have to change the

password during login depending on the password lifetime specified by the

security-password lifetime command.

The no variant of the command disables this feature.

Syntax security-password reject-expired-pwd

no security-password reject-expired-pwd

Default The reject-expired-pwd feature is disabled by default.

Mode Global Configuration

Example To configure the system to reject users with an expired password, use the

command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# security-password reject-expired-pwd

Commands

security-password forced-change

security-password history

security-password lifetime

security-password minimum-categories

security-password minimum-length

security-password warning

show running-config security-password

show security-password configuration

show security-password user

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 151

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

SECURITY-PASSWORD WARNING

security-password warning

Overview This command specifies the number of days before the password expires that the

user will receive a warning message specifying the remaining lifetime of the

password.

Note that the warning period cannot be set unless the lifetime feature is enabled

with the security-password lifetime command.

The no variant of the command disables this feature.

Syntax security-password warning <0-1000>

no security-password warning

Default The default warning period is 0, which disables warning functionality.

Mode Global Configuration

Example To configure a warning period of three days, use the command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# security-password warning 3

Commands

security-password forced-change

security-password history

security-password lifetime

security-password minimum-categories

security-password minimum-length

security-password reject-expired-pwd

show running-config security-password

show security-password configuration

Parameter Description

<0-1000> Warning period in the range from 0 to 1000 days. A value 0 disables

the warning functionality and no warning message is displayed for

expiring passwords. This is equivalent to the no security-password

warning command. The warning period must be less than, or equal

to, the password lifetime set with the security-password lifetime

command.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 152

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

SERVICE ADVANCED-VTY

service advanced-vty

Overview This command enables the advanced-vty help feature. This allows you to use TAB

completion for commands. Where multiple options are possible, the help feature

displays the possible options.

The no service advanced-vty command disables the advanced-vty help feature.

Syntax service advanced-vty

no service advanced-vty

Default The advanced-vty help feature is enabled by default.

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To disable the advanced-vty help feature, use the command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no service advanced-vty

To re-enable the advanced-vty help feature after it has been disabled, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# service advanced-vty

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 153

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

SERVICE PASSWORD-ENCRYPTION

service password-encryption

Overview Use this command to enable password encryption. This is enabled by default.

When password encryption is enabled, the device displays passwords in the

running config in encrypted form instead of in plain text.

Use the no service password-encryption command to stop the device from

displaying newly-entered passwords in encrypted form. This does not change the

display of existing passwords.

Syntax service password-encryption

no service password-encryption

Mode Global Configuration

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# service password-encryption

Validation

Commands

show running-config

Commands

enable password

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 154

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

SERVICE TELNET

service telnet

Overview Use this command to enable the telnet server. The server is enabled by default.

Enabling the telnet server starts the device listening for incoming telnet sessions

on the configured port.

The server listens on port 23, unless you have changed the port by using the

privilege level command.

Use the no variant of this command to disable the telnet server. Disabling the

telnet server will stop the device listening for new incoming telnet sessions.

However, existing telnet sessions will still be active.

Syntax service telnet [ip|ipv6]

no service telnet [ip|ipv6]

Default The IPv4 and IPv6 telnet servers are enabled by default.

The configured telnet port is TCP port 23 by default.

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To enable both the IPv4 and IPv6 telnet servers, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# service telnet

To enable the IPv6 telnet server only, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# service telnet ipv6

To disable both the IPv4 and IPv6 telnet servers, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no service telnet

To disable the IPv6 telnet server only, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no service telnet ipv6

Commands

clear line vty

show telnet

telnet server

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 155

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

SERVICE TERMINAL-LENGTH (DELETED)

service terminal-length (deleted)

Overview This command has been deleted in Software Version 5.4.5-0.1 and later.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 156

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

SHOW PRIVILEGE

show privilege

Overview This command displays the current user privilege level, which can be any privilege

level in the range <1-15>. Privilege levels <1-6> allow limited user access (all User

Exec commands), privilege levels <7-14> allow restricted user access (all User Exec

commands plus Privileged Exec show commands). Privilege level 15 gives full user

access to all Privileged Exec commands.

Syntax show privilege

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Usage A user can have an intermediate CLI security level set with this command for

privilege levels <7-14> to access all show commands in Privileged Exec mode and

all commands in User Exec mode, but no configuration commands in Privileged

Exec mode.

Example To show the current privilege level of the user, use the command:

awplus# show privilege

Output Figure 3-1: Example output from the show privilege command

Commands

privilege level

awplus#show privilege

Current privilege level is 15

awplus#disable

awplus>show privilege

Current privilege level is 1

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 157

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

SHOW SECURITY-PASSWORD CONFIGURATION

show security-password configuration

Overview This command displays the configuration settings for the various security

password rules.

Syntax show security-password configuration

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To display the current security-password rule configuration settings, use the

command:

awplus# show security-password configuration

Output Figure 3-2: Example output from the show security-password configuration

command

Commands

show running-config security-password

show security-password user

Security Password Configuration

Minimum password length ............................ 8

Minimum password character categories to match ..... 3

Number of previously used passwords to restrict..... 4

Password lifetime .................................. 30 day(s)

Warning period before password expires ........... 3 day(s)

Reject expired password at login ................... Disabled

Force changing expired password at login ......... Enabled

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 158

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

SHOW SECURITY-PASSWORD USER

show security-password user

Overview This command displays user account and password information for all users.

Syntax show security-password user

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To display the system users’ remaining lifetime or last password change, use the

command:

awplus# show security-password user

Output Figure 3-3: Example output from the show security-password user command

Commands

show running-config security-password

show security-password configuration

User account and password information



UserName Privilege Last-PWD-Change Remaining-lifetime

----------------------------------------------------------------

manager 15 4625 day(s) ago No Expiry

bob15 15 0 day(s) ago 30 days

ted7 7 0 day(s) ago No Expiry

mike1 1 0 day(s) ago No Expiry

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 159

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

SHOW TELNET

show telnet

Overview This command shows the Telnet server settings.

Syntax show telnet

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To show the Telnet server settings, use the command:

awplus# show telnet

Output Figure 3-4: Example output from the show telnet command

Commands

clear line vty

service telnet

show users

telnet server

Telnet Server Configuration

------------------------------------------------------------

Telnet server : Enabled

Protocol : IPv4,IPv6

Port : 23

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 160

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

SHOW USERS

show users

Overview This command shows information about the users who are currently logged into

the device.

Syntax show users

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To show the users currently connected to the device, use the command:

awplus# show users

Output Figure 3-5: Example output from the show users command

Line User Host(s) Idle Location Priv Idletime Timeout

con 0 manager idle 00:00:00 ttyS0 15 10 N/A

vty 0 bob idle 00:00:03 172.16.11.3 1 0 5

Table 1: Parameters in the output of the show users command

Parameter Description

Line Console port user is connected to.

User Login name of user.

Host(s) Status of the host the user is connected to.

Idle How long the host has been idle.

Location URL location of user.

Priv The privilege level in the range 1 to 15, with 15 being the highest.

Idletime The time interval the device waits for user input from either a

console or VTY connection.

Timeout The time interval before a server is considered unreachable.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 161

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

TELNET

telnet

Overview Use this command to open a telnet session to a remote device.

Syntax telnet {<hostname>|[ip] <ipv4-addr>|[ipv6] <ipv6-addr>}

[<port>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Examples To connect to TCP port 2602 on the device at 10.2.2.2, use the command:

awplus# telnet 10.2.2.2 2602

To connect to the telnet server host.example, use the command:

awplus# telnet host.example

To connect to the telnet server host.example on TCP port 100, use the

command:

awplus# telnet host.example 100

Parameter Description

<hostname>The host name of the remote system.

ip Keyword used to specify the IPv4 address or host name of a remote

system.

<ipv4-addr> An IPv4 address of the remote system.

ipv6 Keyword used to specify the IPv6 address of a remote system

<ipv6-addr> Placeholder for an IPv6 address in the format x:x::x:x, for

example, 2001:db8::8a2e:7334

<port>Specify a TCP port number (well known ports are in the range 1-

1023, registered ports are 1024-49151, and private ports are 49152-

65535).

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 162

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

TELNET SERVER

telnet server

Overview This command enables the telnet server on the specified TCP port. If the server is

already enabled then it will be restarted on the new port. Changing the port

number does not affect the port used by existing sessions.

Syntax telnet server {<1-65535>|default}

Mode Global Configuration

Example To enable the telnet server on TCP port 2323, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# telnet server 2323

Commands

show telnet

Parameter Description

<1-65535> The TCP port to listen on.

default Use the default TCP port number 23.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 163

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

TERMINAL LENGTH

terminal length

Overview Use the terminal length command to specify the number of rows of output that

the device will display before pausing, for the currently-active terminal only.

Use the terminal no length command to remove the length specified by this

command. The default length will apply unless you have changed the length for

some or all lines by using the length (asyn) command.

Syntax terminal length <length>

terminal no length [<length>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Examples The following example sets the number of lines to 15:

awplus# terminal length 15

The following example removes terminal length set previously:

awplus# terminal no length

Commands

terminal resize

length (asyn)

Parameter Description

<length><0-512> Number of rows that the device will display on the

currently-active terminal before pausing.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 164

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

TERMINAL RESIZE

terminal resize

Overview Use this command to automatically adjust the number of rows of output on the

console, which the device will display before pausing, to the number of rows

configured on the user’s terminal.

Syntax terminal resize

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Usage When the user’s terminal size is changed, then a remote session via SSH or TELNET

adjusts the terminal size automatically. However, this cannot normally be done

automatically for a serial or console port. This command automatically adjusts the

terminal size for a serial or console port.

Examples The following example automatically adjusts the number of rows shown on the

console:

awplus# terminal resize

Commands

length (asyn)

terminal length

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 165

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

USERNAME

username

Overview This command creates or modifies a user to assign a privilege level and a password.

NOTE: The default username privilege level of 1 is not shown in running-config output.

Any username privilege level that has been modified from the default is shown.

Syntax username <name> privilege <1-15> [password [8] <password>]

username <name> password [8] <password>

no username <name>

Mode Global Configuration

Default The privilege level is 1 by default. Note the default is not shown in running-config

output.

Parameter Description

<name>The login name for the user. Do not use punctuation marks such as single quotes (‘ ‘),

double quotes (“ “), or colons ( : ) with the user login name.

privilege The user’s privilege level. Use the privilege levels to set the access rights for each user.

<1-15> A privilege level: either 1-14 (limited access) or 15 (full access). A user

with privilege level 1-14 can only access higher privilege levels if an

enable password has been configured for the level the user tries to

access and the user enters that password.

A user at privilege level 1 can access the majority of show

commands. A user at privilege level 7 can access the majority of

show commands including platform show commands. Privilege

Level 15 (to access the Privileged Exec command mode) is required

to access configuration commands as well as show commands in

Privileged Exec.

password A password that the user must enter when logging in.

8Specifies that you are entering a password as a string that has

already been encrypted, instead of entering a plain-text password.

The running-config displays the new password as an encrypted

string even if password encryption is turned off.

Note that the user enters the plain-text version of the password

when logging in.

<password>The user’s password. The password can be up to 23 characters in

length and include characters from up to four categories. The

password categories are:

• uppercase letters: A to Z

• lowercase letters: a to z

• digits: 0 to 9

• special symbols: all printable ASCII characters not included in the

previous three categories. The question mark ? cannot be used as

it is reserved for help functionality.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 166

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

USER ACCESS COMMANDS

USERNAME

Usage An intermediate CLI security level (privilege level 7 to privilege level 14) allows a

CLI user access to the majority of show commands, including the platform show

commands that are available at privilege level 1 to privilege level 6. Note that some

show commands, such as show running-configuration and show

startup-configuration, are only available at privilege level 15.

Examples To create the user “bob” with a privilege level of 15, for all show commands

including show running-configuration and show startup-configuration and to

access configuration commands in Privileged Exec command mode, and the

password “bobs_secret”, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# username bob privilege 15 password bobs_secret

To create a user “junior_admin” with a privilege level of 7, which will have

intermediate CLI security level access for most show commands, and the password

“show_only”, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# username junior_admin privilege 7 password

show_only

Commands

enable password

security-password minimum-categories

security-password minimum-length

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 167

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Feature Licensing

Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference for each of the Feature Licensing

commands. Feature Licensing enables you to use advanced features such as Layer

3 routing.

To see which Feature Licenses are available for your device, see the AlliedWare Plus

Datasheet.

For step-by-step instructions about how to license AlliedWare Plus devices, see the

Licensing Feature Overview and Configuration_Guide.

Command List •“license” on page 168

•“show license” on page 169

•“show license brief” on page 171

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 168

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FEATURE LICENSING COMMANDS

LICENSE

license

Overview This command activates the licensed software feature set on a device.

Use the no variant of this command to deactivate the licensed software feature set

on a device.

For feature licenses, contact your authorized distributor or reseller. If a license key

expires or is incorrect so the license key is invalid, then some software features will

be unavailable.

NOTE: See the AlliedWare Plus™ datasheet for a list of current feature licenses available

by product. Purchase licenses from your authorized dealer or reseller.

Syntax license <label> <key>

no license <label>

Mode Privileged Exec

Usage You can change the license label using this command to make it specific to you

when you initially add a license. Once a license is added, any change to the license

label first requires removal of the license before adding a license again with a new

license label.

The default feature license labels are issued along with encrypted license keys by

e-mail for you to apply using this command to activate features. You can change

default feature license labels, but they must be 15 characters or less.

Examples To activate the license called “IPv6” that has the key

12345678ABCDE123456789ABCDE, use the command:

awplus# license IPv6 12345678ABCDE123456789ABCDE

To deactivate the license called “IPv6”, use the command:

awplus# no license ipv6

Commands

show license

Parameter Description

<label> A name for the feature license. To determine names already in

use, use the show license command. This can be the default

name supplied for the feature, or a renamed feature name.

<key> The encrypted license key to enable a set of software features.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 169

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FEATURE LICENSING COMMANDS

SHOW LICENSE

show license

Overview This command displays information about a specific software feature license, or all

enabled software feature licenses on the device.

Syntax show license [feature] [<label>|index <index-number>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Examples To display full information about all enabled licenses, use the command:

awplus# show license

To display full information about the licenses with index number 1, use the

command:

awplus# show license index 1

Parameter Description

feature Only display license information for any applied feature licenses.

<label>The license name to show information about. This can be used

instead of the index number to identify a specific license.

index

<index-number>

The index number of the license to show information about. This

can be used instead of the license name to identify a specific

license.

Table 4-1: Parameters in the output of show license

Parameter Description

Board region Name of the region for the Base License features.

Index Index identifying entry. The index is assigned

automatically by the software. It is not configured.

License name Name of the license key bundle (case-sensitive).

Customer name Customer name.

Quantity of licenses Quantity of licensed installations.

Type of license Full or Trial.

License issue date Date the license was generated.

License expiry date Expiry date for trial license.

Features included List of features included in the feature license.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 170

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FEATURE LICENSING COMMANDS

SHOW LICENSE

Commands

license

show license brief

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 171

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

FEATURE LICENSING COMMANDS

SHOW LICENSE BRIEF

show license brief

Overview This command displays information about a specific software feature license, or all

enabled software feature licenses on the device.

Syntax show license [feature] [<label>|index <index-number>] brief

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Examples To display a brief summary of information about all feature licenses, use the

command:

awplus# show license feature brief

Commands

license

show license

Parameter Description

feature Only display license information for any applied feature licenses.

<label>The license name to show information about. This can be used

instead of the index number to identify a specific license.

index

<index-number>

The index number of the license to show information about. This

can be used instead of the license name to identify a specific

license.

brief Displays a brief summary of license information.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 172

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Subscription

Licensing

Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference for each of the Subscription

Licensing commands.

For Software Version 5.4.6-2.x and later, Subscription Licensing enables you to use

OpenFlow. To see the OpenFlow subscriptions for your device, see the AlliedWare

Plus Datasheet.

For step-by-step instructions about how to license AlliedWare Plus devices, see the

Licensing Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Command List •“license update (filename)” on page 173

•“license update online” on page 174

•“show license external” on page 175

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 173

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SUBSCRIPTION LICENSING COMMANDS

LICENSE UPDATE (FILENAME)

license update (filename)

Overview Use this command to load a license, after you have manually copied the license file

onto the device.

Only use this command if you cannot directly access the Allied Telesis Download

Center from this device. Otherwise, use the command license update online

instead.

Syntax license update <filename>

Mode Privileged Exec

Usage You can download subscription licenses from the Allied Telesis Download Center,

in order to copy them onto the device.

Examples To load a license onto a device from a file called “license_file.bin” that is stored at

the top level of Flash memory, use the following command:

awplus#license update license_file.bin

Commands

license update online

show license external

Command

changes

Version 5.4.6-2.1: usage changed by introduction of license update online

Parameter Description

<filename>Name and path of the license file on the device.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 174

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SUBSCRIPTION LICENSING COMMANDS

LICENSE UPDATE ONLINE

license update online

Overview Use this command to add or update subscription licenses from the Allied Telesis

Download Center, to subscribe to features such as OpenFlow.

When you enter this command, the device will:

1) Connect to the Download Center

2) Check if new or changed licenses are available for the device, keyed to the

device’s serial number

3) For each such license it finds, download and install the license.

Syntax license update online

Default AlliedWare Plus devices do not automatically connect to the Download Center and

check whether licenses are available. They only check when you run the license

update online command.

Mode User Exec/Privileged Exec

Usage Verifying the update

The update process normally takes approximately 5 seconds.

If the console does not respond for 10 or more seconds after typing the command,

a network, routing or firewall configuration error is probably preventing the

connection from establishing. If this happens, you can abort the command by

pressing Ctrl-C, or wait for the command to time out after 30 seconds.

If the connection to the Download Centers fails and times out, an error message

will be generated on the CLI to indicate the problem. If you abort the command,

no error message is displayed.

If the update is successful, the device will produce log messages to say which

features have had their licensing state updated (activated, deactivated, number of

items changed, or expiry date changed). If the command completes successfully

but there are no licenses available for the device, or no change in the licenses

already on the device, no log messages will be produced.

You should also use the show license external command to confirm which licenses

are active on the device after the update has been applied.

Example To add a subscription license, use the command:

awplus# license update online

Commands

show license external

Command

changes

Version 5.4.6-2.1: command added

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 175

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SUBSCRIPTION LICENSING COMMANDS

SHOW LICENSE EXTERNAL

show license external

Overview Use this command to show information about subscription (external) licenses.

Syntax show license external

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples To show information about what subscription features the device is licensed for,

use the following command:

awplus#show license external

Output Figure 5-1: Example output from show license external

Commands

license update online

awplus#show license external 



Features with installed entitlements:



OpenFlow



Currently licensed: Yes



Start date: 19 Sep 2016 00:00

Expiry date: 19 Sep 2017 23:59

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 176

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

GUI Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference of commands used to configure

the GUI. For more information, see the Getting Started with Alliedware Plus

Command List •“atmf topology-gui enable” on page 177

•“gui-timeout” on page 178

•“log event-host” on page 179

•“service http” on page 180

•“show http” on page 181

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 177

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

GUI COMMANDS

ATMF TOPOLOGY-GUI ENABLE

atmf topology-gui enable

Overview Use this command to enable the operation of AMF Vista Manager on the Master

device.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this feature.

Syntax atmf topology-gui enable

no atmf topology-gui enable

Default By default the GUI support will not be enabled on AMF Master devices. An AMF

Controller device will have the GUI enabled by default. Regular nodes (not master

or controller) will always have it disabled.

Mode Global Configuration mode

Usage This command is run from an AMF Master node. Topology information about your

network is displayed in the GUI. For example; Node Name, status (i.e. link state,

node status and recovery status), Role (i.e. Master or Controller) and IP address.

Example To enable AMF Vista Manager on Node1, use the following commands:

Node1# configure terminal

Node1(config)# atmf topology-gui enable

To disable AMF Vista Manager on Node1, use the following commands:

Node1# configure terminal

Node1(config)# no atmf topology-gui enable

Commands

atmf enable

gui-timeout

log event-host

service http

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 178

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

GUI COMMANDS

GUI-TIMEOUT

gui-timeout

Overview Use this command to configure an idle timeout period for a GUI session. The time

can be set in minutes and/or seconds.

Use the no variant of this command to disable the GUI session idle timeout.

Syntax gui-timeout <minutes> [<seconds>]

no gui-timeout

Default Disabled

Mode Global Configuration

Usage The GUI uses the configured timeout period (set in either minutes and/or seconds)

to determine when a GUI session should be closed. Once the GUI timeout has

expired, you will need to login to reactivate your session.

To enter seconds only, enter 0 for minutes, followed by a space, and then enter the

seconds.

If the GUI timeout is disabled, a GUI session will remain active until you terminate

it. No idle time will be configured.

The same timeout period will apply to all GUI sessions logged into a specific device.

Examples Use this command to configure the GUI timeout period for 3 minutes and 30

seconds for a GUI session.

awplus# gui-timeout 3 30

Use this command to configure the GUI timeout period for 0 minutes and 61

seconds for a GUI session.

awplus# gui-timeout 0 61

Use this command to disable the GUI timeout period.

awplus# no gui-timeout

Output Figure 6-1: Example output from gui-timeout

Commands

show running-config

Parameter Description

<minutes> Specifies the idle time in minutes from 0 through 35791

<seconds> Specifies the idle time in seconds from 0 through 2147483

awplus#configure terminal

awplus(config)#gui-timeout 3 30

The new gui-timeout settings [3 min 30 sec] will apply to new sessions only

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 179

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

GUI COMMANDS

LOG EVENT-HOST

log event-host

Overview Use this command to set up an external host to log AMF topology events through

Vista Manager. This command is run on the Master device.

Use the no variant of this command to disable log events through Vista Manager.

Syntax log event-host [<ipv4-addr>|<ipv6-addr>] atmf-topology-event

no log event-host [<ipv4-addr>|<ipv6-addr>] atmf-topology-event

Default Log events are disabled by default.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage Event hosts are set so syslog sends the messages out as they come.

NOTE: There is a difference between log event and log host messages:

• Log event messages are sent out as they come by syslog

• Log host messages are set to wait for a number of messages (20) to send

them out together for traffic optimization.

Example To enable Node 1 to log event messages from host ipv6 address 192.0.2.31, use the

following commands:

Node1# configure terminal

Node1(config)# log event-host 192.0.2.31 atmf-topology-event

To disable Node 1 to log event messages from host ipv6 address 192.0.2.31, use the

following commands:

Node1# configure terminal

Node1(config)# no log event-host 192.0.2.31 atmf-topology-event

Commands

atmf topology-gui enable

Parameter Description

<ipv4-addr> ipv4 address of the event host

<ipv6-addr> ipv6 address of the event host

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 180

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

GUI COMMANDS

SERVICE HTTP

service http

Overview Use this command to enable the HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) service. This

service, which is enabled by default, is required to support the AlliedWare Plus™

GUI Java applet on a Java enabled browser.

Use the no variant of this command to disable the HTTP feature.

Syntax service http

no service http

Default Enabled

Mode Global Configuration

Validation

Commands

show running-config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 181

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

GUI COMMANDS

SHOW HTTP

show http

Overview This command shows the HTTP server settings.

Syntax show http

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To show the HTTP server settings, use the command:

awplus# show http

Output Figure 6-2: Example output from the show http command

Commands

clear line vty

service http

awplus#show http

HTTP Server Configuration

------------------------------------------------------------

HTTP server : Enabled

Port : 80

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 182

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

System

Configuration and

Monitoring

Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference of commands for configuring and

monitoring the system.

Command List •“banner exec” on page 184

•“banner login (system)” on page 186

•“banner motd” on page 188

•“clock set” on page 190

•“clock summer-time date” on page 191

•“clock summer-time recurring” on page 193

•“clock timezone” on page 195

•“ecofriendly led” on page 196

•“findme” on page 197

•“hostname” on page 199

•“max-fib-routes” on page 201

•“max-static-routes” on page 202

•“no debug all” on page 203

•“reboot” on page 204

•“reload” on page 205

•“show clock” on page 206

•“show cpu” on page 208

•“show cpu history” on page 211

•“show debugging” on page 213

•“show ecofriendly” on page 214

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 183

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

•“show interface memory” on page 215

•“show memory” on page 217

•“show memory allocations” on page 219

•“show memory history” on page 221

•“show memory pools” on page 222

•“show memory shared” on page 223

•“show process” on page 224

•“show reboot history” on page 226

•“show router-id” on page 227

•“show system” on page 228

•“show system environment” on page 229

•“show system interrupts” on page 230

•“show system mac” on page 231

•“show system serialnumber” on page 232

•“show tech-support” on page 233

•“speed (asyn)” on page 235

•“system territory (deprecated)” on page 237

•“terminal monitor” on page 238

•“undebug all” on page 239

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 184

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

BANNER EXEC

banner exec

Overview This command configures the User Exec mode banner that is displayed on the

console after you login. The banner exec default command restores the User Exec

banner to the default banner. Use the no banner exec command to disable the

User Exec banner and remove the default User Exec banner.

Syntax banner exec <banner-text>

banner exec default

no banner exec

Default By default, the AlliedWare Plus™ version and build date is displayed at console

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To configure a User Exec mode banner after login (in this example, to tell people to

use the enable command to move to Privileged Exec mode), enter the following

commands:

To restore the default User Exec mode banner after login, enter the following

commands:

AlliedWare Plus (TM) 5.4.7 01/03/17 12:00:00

awplus#configure terminal

awplus(config)#banner exec Use enable to move to Priv Exec mode

awplus(config)#exit

awplus#exit



awplus login: manager

Password:



Use enable to move to Priv Exec mode



awplus>

awplus#configure terminal

awplus(config)#banner exec default

awplus(config)#exit

awplus#exit



awplus login: manager

Password:



AlliedWare Plus (TM) 5.4.7 01/03/17 12:00:00



awplus>

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 185

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

BANNER EXEC

To remove the User Exec mode banner after login, enter the following commands:

Commands

banner login (system)

banner motd

awplus#configure terminal

awplus(config)#no banner exec

awplus(config)#exit

awplus#exit



awplus login: manager

Password:



awplus>

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 186

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

BANNER LOGIN (SYSTEM)

banner login (system)

Overview This command configures the login banner that is displayed on the console when

you login. The login banner is displayed on all connected terminals. The login

banner is displayed after the MOTD (Message-of-the-Day) banner and before the

Use the no banner login command to disable the login banner.

Syntax banner login

no banner login

Default By default, no login banner is displayed at console login.

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To configure a login banner of “Authorised users only” to be displayed when you

To remove the login banner, enter the following commands:

awplus#configure terminal

awplus(config)#banner login

Type CNTL/D to finish.



Authorised users only



awplus(config)#exit

awplus#exit



Authorised users only



awplus login: manager

Password:



AlliedWare Plus (TM) 5.4.7 01/03/17 12:00:00



awplus>

awplus#configure terminal

awplus(config)#no banner login

awplus(config)#exit

awplus#exit



awplus login: manager

Password:



AlliedWare Plus (TM) 5.4.7 01/03/17 12:00:00



awplus>

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 187

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

BANNER LOGIN (SYSTEM)

Commands

banner exec

banner motd

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 188

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

BANNER MOTD

banner motd

Overview Use this command to create or edit the text MotD (Message-of-the-Day) banner

displayed before login. The MotD banner is displayed on all connected terminals.

The MotD banner is useful for sending messages that affect all network users, for

example, any imminent system shutdowns.

Use the no variant of this command to delete the MotD banner.

Syntax banner motd <motd-text>

no banner motd

Default By default, the device displays the AlliedWare Plus™ OS version and build date

when you login.

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To configure a MotD banner of “System shutdown at 6pm today” to be displayed

when you log in, enter the following commands:

To delete the login banner, enter the following commands:

Parameter Description

<motd-text> The text to appear in the Message of the Day banner.

awplus>enable

awplus#configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

awplus(config)#banner motd System shutdown at 6pm today

awplus(config)#exit

awplus#exit



System shutdown at 6pm today

awplus login: manager

Password:



AlliedWare Plus (TM) 5.4.7 01/03/17 12:00:00



awplus>

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 189

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

BANNER MOTD

Commands

banner exec

banner login (system)

awplus>enable

awplus#configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

awplus(config)#no banner motd

awplus(config)#exit

awplus#exit



awplus login: manager

Password:



AlliedWare Plus (TM) 5.4.7 01/03/17 12:00:00



awplus>

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 190

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

CLOCK SET

clock set

Overview This command sets the time and date for the system clock.

Syntax clock set <hh:mm:ss> <day> <month> <year>

Mode Privileged Exec

Usage Configure the timezone before setting the local time. Otherwise, when you change

the timezone, the device applies the new offset to the local time.

NOTE: If Network Time Protocol (NTP) is enabled, then you cannot change the time or

date using this command. NTP maintains the clock automatically using an external

time source. If you wish to manually alter the time or date, you must first disable NTP.

Example To set the time and date on your system to 2pm on the 2nd of October 2016, use

the command:

awplus# clock set 14:00:00 2 oct 2016

Commands

clock timezone

Parameter Description

<hh:mm:ss> Local time in 24-hour format

<day> Day of the current month, from 1 to 31

<month> The first three letters of the current month

<year> Current year, from 2000 to 2035

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 191

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

CLOCK SUMMER-TIME DATE

clock summer-time date

Overview This command defines the start and end of summertime for a specific year only,

and specifies summertime’s offset value to Standard Time for that year.

The no variant of this command removes the device’s summertime setting. This

clears both specific summertime dates and recurring dates (set with the clock

summer-time recurring command).

By default, the device has no summertime definitions set.

Syntax clock summer-time <timezone-name> date <start-day>

<start-month> <start-year> <start-time> <end-day> <end-month>

<end-year> <end-time> <1-180>

no clock summer-time

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To set a summertime definition for New Zealand using NZST (UTC+12:00) as the

standard time, and NZDT (UTC+13:00) as summertime, with the summertime set to

begin on the 25th of September 2016 and end on the 2nd of April 2017:

awplus(config)# clock summer-time NZDT date 25 sep 2:00 2016 2

apr 2:00 2017 60

To remove any summertime settings on the system, use the command:

awplus(config)# no clock summer-time

Parameter Description

<timezone-name> A description of the summertime zone, up to 6 characters long.

date Specifies that this is a date-based summertime setting for just

the specified year.

<start-day> Day that the summertime starts, from 1 to 31.

<start-month> First three letters of the name of the month that the

summertime starts.

<start-year> Year that summertime starts, from 2000 to 2035.

<start-time> Time of the day that summertime starts, in the 24-hour time

format HH:MM.

<end-day> Day that summertime ends, from 1 to 31.

<end-month> First three letters of the name of the month that the

summertime ends.

<end-year> Year that summertime ends, from 2000 to 2035.

<end-time> Time of the day that summertime ends, in the 24-hour time

format HH:MM.

<1-180> The offset in minutes.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 192

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

CLOCK SUMMER-TIME DATE

Commands

clock summer-time recurring

clock timezone

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 193

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

CLOCK SUMMER-TIME RECURRING

clock summer-time recurring

Overview This command defines the start and end of summertime for every year, and

specifies summertime’s offset value to Standard Time.

The no variant of this command removes the device’s summertime setting. This

clears both specific summertime dates (set with the clock summer-time date

command) and recurring dates.

By default, the device has no summertime definitions set.

Syntax clock summer-time <timezone-name> recurring <start-week>

<start-day> <start-month> <start-time> <end-week> <end-day>

<end-month> <end-time> <1-180>

no clock summer-time

Parameter Description

<timezone-

name>

A description of the summertime zone, up to 6 characters long.

recurring Specifies that this summertime setting applies every year from

now on.

<start-week> Week of the month when summertime starts, in the range 1-5. The

value 5 indicates the last week that has the specified day in it for

the specified month. For example, to start summertime on the last

Sunday of the month, enter 5 for <start-week> and sun for

<start-day>.

<start-day> Day of the week when summertime starts. Valid values are mon,

tue, wed, thu, fri, sat or sun.

<start-month> First three letters of the name of the month that summertime

starts.

<start-time> Time of the day that summertime starts, in the 24-hour time

format HH:MM.

<end-week> Week of the month when summertime ends, in the range 1-5. The

value 5 indicates the last week that has the specified day in it for

the specified month. For example, to end summertime on the last

Sunday of the month, enter 5 for <end-week> and sun for <end-

day>.

<end-day> Day of the week when summertime ends. Valid values are mon,

tue, wed, thu, fri, sat or sun.

<end-month> First three letters of the name of the month that summertime

ends.

<end-time> Time of the day that summertime ends, in the 24-hour time format

HH:MM.

<1-180> The offset in minutes.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 194

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

CLOCK SUMMER-TIME RECURRING

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To set a summertime definition for New Zealand using NZST (UTC+12:00) as the

standard time, and NZDT (UTC+13:00) as summertime, with summertime set to

start on the last Sunday in September, and end on the 1st Sunday in April, use the

command:

awplus(config)# clock summer-time NZDT recurring 5 sun sep 2:00

1 sun apr 2:00 60

To remove any summertime settings on the system, use the command:

awplus(config)# no clock summer-time

Commands

clock summer-time date

clock timezone

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 195

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

CLOCK TIMEZONE

clock timezone

Overview This command defines the device’s clock timezone. The timezone is set as a offset

to the UTC.

The no variant of this command resets the system time to UTC.

By default, the system time is set to UTC.

Syntax clock timezone <timezone-name> {minus|plus}

[<0-13>|<0-12>:<00-59>]

no clock timezone

Mode Global Configuration

Usage Configure the timezone before setting the local time. Otherwise, when you change

the timezone, the device applies the new offset to the local time.

Examples To set the timezone to New Zealand Standard Time with an offset from UTC of +12

hours, use the command:

awplus(config)# clock timezone NZST plus 12

To set the timezone to Indian Standard Time with an offset from UTC of +5:30

hours, use the command:

awplus(config)# clock timezone IST plus 5:30

To set the timezone back to UTC with no offsets, use the command:

awplus(config)# no clock timezone

Commands

clock set

clock summer-time date

clock summer-time recurring

Parameter Description

<timezone-name> A description of the timezone, up to 6 characters long.

minusorplus The direction of offset from UTC. The minus option

indicates that the timezone is behind UTC. The plus option

indicates that the timezone is ahead of UTC.

<0-13> The offset in hours or from UTC.

<0-12>:<00-59> The offset in hours or from UTC.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 196

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

ECOFRIENDLY LED

ecofriendly led

Overview Use this command to enable the eco-friendly LED (Light Emitting Diode) feature,

which turns off power to the port LEDs. Power to the system status LED is not

disabled.

Use the no variant of this command to disable the eco-friendly LED feature.

Syntax ecofriendly led

no ecofriendly led

Default The eco-friendly LED feature is disabled by default.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage When the eco-friendly LED feature is enabled, a change in port status will not affect

the display of the associated LED. When the eco-friendly LED feature is disabled

and power is returned to port LEDs, the LEDs will correctly show the current state

of the ports.

For an example of how to configure a trigger to turn off power to port LEDs, see the

Triggers Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Examples To enable the eco-friendly LED feature which turns off power to all port LEDs, use

the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ecofriendly led

To disable the eco-friendly LED feature, use the following command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no ecofriendly led

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 197

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

FINDME

findme

Overview Use this command to physically locate a specific device from a group of similar

devices. Activating the command causes a selected number of port LEDs to

alternately flash green then amber (if that device has amber LEDs) at a rate of 1 Hz.

Use the no variant of this command to deactivate the Find Me feature prior to the

timeout expiring.

Syntax findme [interface <port-list>] [timeout <duration>]

no findme

Default By default all port LEDs flash for 60 seconds.

Mode Privileged Exec

Usage Running the findme command causes the device’s port LEDs to flash. An optional

timeout parameter specifies the flash behavior duration. Normal LED behavior is

restored automatically after either the default time, or a specified time has elapsed,

or a no findme command is used. You can specify which interface or interfaces are

flashed with the optional interface parameter.

Example To activate the Find Me feature for the default duration (60 seconds) on all ports,

use the following command:

awplus# findme

To activate the Find Me feature for 120 seconds on all ports, use the following

command:

awplus# findme timeout 120

To activate the Find Me feature for the default duration (60 seconds) on switch port

interfaces port1.0.2 through port1.0.4, use the following command:

awplus# findme interface port1.0.2-1.0.4

In the example above, ports 2 to 4 will flash 4 times and then all ports will flash

twice. Each alternate flash will be amber (if that device has amber LEDs). This

pattern will repeat until timeout (default or set) or no findme commands are used.

Parameter Description

interface <port-list> The ports to flash. The port list can be:

•a switch port, e.g. port1.0.4

• a continuous range of ports separated by a hyphen,

e.g. port1.0.1-1.0.4

• a comma-separated list of ports and port ranges,

e.g. port1.0.1,port1.0.5-1.0.6.

timeout <duration>How long the LEDs flash, in seconds, in the range 5 to

3600 seconds.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 198

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

FINDME

To deactivate the Find Me feature, use the following command:

awplus# no findme

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 199

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

HOSTNAME

hostname

Overview This command sets the name applied to the device as shown at the prompt. The

hostname is:

• displayed in the output of the show system command

• displayed in the CLI prompt so you know which device you are configuring

• stored in the MIB object sysName

Use the no variant of this command to revert the hostname setting to its default.

For devices that are not part of an AMF network, the default is “awplus”.

Syntax hostname <hostname>

no hostname [<hostname>]

Default awplus

Mode Global Configuration

Usage Within an AMF network, any device without a user-defined hostname will

automatically be assigned a name based on its MAC address.

To efficiently manage your network using AMF, we strongly advise that you devise

a naming convention for your network devices and apply an appropriate

hostname to each device.

The name must also follow the rules for ARPANET host names. The name must start

with a letter, end with a letter or digit, and use only letters, digits, and hyphens.

Refer to RFC 1035.

Example To set the system name to HQ-Sales, use the command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# hostname HQ-Sales

This changes the prompt to:

HQ-Sales(config)#

To revert to the default hostname awplus, use the command:

HQ-Sales(config)# no hostname

This changes the prompt to:

awplus(config)#

Parameter Description

<hostname> Specifies the name given to a specific device. This is also referred to as

the Node name in AMF output screens.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 200

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

HOSTNAME

NOTE: When AMF is configured, running the no hostname command will apply a

hostname that is based on the MAC address of the device node, for example,

node_0000_5e00_5301.

Commands

show system

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 201

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

MAX-FIB-ROUTES

max-fib-routes

Overview This command enables you to control the maximum number of FIB routes

configured. It operates by providing parameters that enable you to configure

preset maximums and warning message thresholds.

NOTE: For static routes use the max-static-routes command.

Use the no variant of this command to set the maximum number of FIB routes to

the default of 4294967294 FIB routes.

Syntax max-fib-routes <1-4294967294> [<1-100>|warning-only]

no max-fib-routes

Default The default number of FIB routes is the maximum number of FIB routes

(4294967294).

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To set the maximum number of dynamic routes to 2000 and warning threshold of

75%, use the following commands:

awplus# config terminal

awplus(config)# max-fib-routes 2000 75

Parameter Description

max-fib-routes This is the maximum number of routes that can be stored in the

device’s Forwarding Information dataBase. In practice, other

practical system limits would prevent this maximum being

reached.

<1-4294967294>The allowable configurable range for setting the maximum

number of FIB-routes.

<1-100>This parameter enables you to optionally apply a percentage

value. This percentage will be based on the maximum number

of FIB routes you have specified. This will cause a warning

message to appear when your routes reach your specified

percentage value. Routes can continue to be added until your

configured maximum value is reached.

warning-only This parameter enables you to optionally apply a warning

message. If you set this option a warning message will appear if

your maximum configured value is reached. Routes can

continue to be added until your device reaches either the

maximum capacity value of 4294967294, or a practical system

limit.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 202

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

MAX-STATIC-ROUTES

max-static-routes

Overview Use this command to set the maximum number of static routes, excluding FIB

(Forwarding Information Base) routes.

NOTE: For FIB routes use the max-fib-routes command.

Use the no variant of this command to set the maximum number of static routes

to the default of 1000 static routes.

Syntax max-static-routes <1-1000>

no max-static-routes

Default The default number of static routes is the maximum number of static routes (1000).

Mode Global Configuration

Example To reset the maximum number of static routes to the default maximum, use the

command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no max-static-routes

NOTE: Static routes are applied before adding routes to the RIB (Routing Information

Base). Therefore, rejected static routes will not appear in the running config.

Commands

max-fib-routes

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 203

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

NO DEBUG ALL

no debug all

Overview This command disables the debugging facility for all features on your device. This

stops the device from generating any diagnostic debugging messages.

The debugging facility is disabled by default.

Syntax no debug all [ipv6|dot1x|nsm]

Mode Global Configuration and Privileged Exec

Example To disable debugging for all features, use the command:

awplus# no debug all

To disable all 802.1X debugging, use the command:

awplus# no debug all dot1x

To disable all IPv6 debugging, use the command:

awplus# no debug all ipv6

To disable all NSM debugging, use the command:

awplus# no debug all nsm

Commands

undebug all

Parameter Description

dot1x Turns off all debugging for IEEE 802.1X port-based network access-

control.

ipv6 Turns off all debugging for IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6).

nsm Turns off all debugging for the NSM (Network Services Module).

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 204

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

REBOOT

reboot

Overview This command halts the device and performs a cold restart (also known as reload).

It displays a confirmation request before restarting.

Syntax reboot

reload

Mode Privileged Exec

Usage The reboot and reload commands perform the same action.

Examples To restart the device, use the command:

awplus# reboot

reboot system? (y/n): y

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 205

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

RELOAD

reload

Overview This command performs the same function as the reboot command.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 206

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW CLOCK

show clock

Overview This command displays the system’s current configured local time and date. It also

displays other clock related information such as timezone and summertime

configuration.

Syntax show clock

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the system’s current local time, use the command:

awplus# show clock

Output Figure 7-1: Example output from the show clock command for a device using

New Zealand time

Local Time: Mon, 17 Oct 2016 13:56:06 +1200

UTC Time: Mon, 17 Oct 2016 01:56:06 +0000

Timezone: NZST

Timezone Offset: +12:00

Summer time zone: NZDT

Summer time starts: Last Sunday in September at 02:00:00

Summer time ends: First Sunday in April at 02:00:00

Summer time offset: 60 mins

Summer time recurring: Yes

Table 1: Parameters in the output of the show clock command

Parameter Description

Local Time Current local time.

UTC Time Current UTC time.

Timezone The current configured timezone name.

Timezone Offset Number of hours offset to UTC.

Summer time zone The current configured summertime zone name.

Summer time starts Date and time set as the start of summer time.

Summer time ends Date and time set as the end of summer time.

Summer time offset Number of minutes that summer time is offset from the

system’s timezone.

Summer time

recurring

Whether the device will apply the summer time settings

every year or only once.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 207

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW CLOCK

Commands

clock set

clock summer-time date

clock summer-time recurring

clock timezone

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 208

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW CPU

show cpu

Overview This command displays a list of running processes with their CPU utilization.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show cpu [sort {thrds|pri|sleep|runtime}]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Examples To show the CPU utilization of current processes, sorting them by the number of

threads the processes are using, use the command:

awplus# show cpu sort thrds

Parameter Description

sort Changes the sorting order using the following fields. If you do not

specify a field, then the list is sorted by percentage CPU

utilization.

thrds Sort by the number of threads.

pri Sort by the process priority.

sleep Sort by the average time sleeping.

runtime Sort by the runtime of the process.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 209

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW CPU

Output Figure 7-2: Example output from show cpu

CPU averages:

1 second: 12%, 20 seconds: 2%, 60 seconds: 2%

System load averages:

1 minute: 0.03, 5 minutes: 0.02, 15 minutes: 0.00

Current CPU load:

userspace: 6%, kernel: 4%, interrupts: 1% iowaits: 0%



user processes

==============

pid name thrds cpu% pri state sleep% runtime

1544 hostd 1 2.8 20 run 0 120

1166 exfx 17 1.8 20 sleep 0 3846

1284 aisexec 44 0.9 -2 sleep 0 2606

1 init 1 0.0 20 sleep 0 120

9772 sh 1 0.0 20 sleep 0 0

9773 corerotate 1 0.0 20 sleep 0 0

853 syslog-ng 1 0.0 20 sleep 0 356

859 klogd 1 0.0 20 sleep 0 1

910 inetd 1 0.0 20 sleep 0 3

920 portmap 1 0.0 20 sleep 0 0

931 crond 1 0.0 20 sleep 0 1

1090 openhpid 11 0.0 20 sleep 0 233

1111 hpilogd 1 0.0 20 sleep 0 0

1240 hsl 1 0.0 20 sleep 0 79

1453 authd 1 0.0 20 sleep 0 85

...

Table 2: Parameters in the output of the show cpu command

Parameter Description

CPU averages Average CPU utilization for the periods stated.

System load

averages

The average number of processes waiting for CPU time for the

periods stated.

Current CPU

load

Current CPU utilization specified by load types.

pid Identifier number of the process.

name A shortened name for the process

thrds Number of threads in the process.

cpu% Percentage of CPU utilization that this process is consuming.

pri Process priority state.

state Process state; one of “run”, “sleep”, “zombie”, and “dead”.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 210

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW CPU

Commands

show memory

show memory allocations

show memory history

show memory pools

show process

sleep% Percentage of time that the process is in the sleep state.

runtime The time that the process has been running for, measured in

jiffies. A jiffy is the duration of one tick of the system timer

interrupt.

Table 2: Parameters in the output of the show cpu command (cont.)

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 211

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW CPU HISTORY

show cpu history

Overview This command prints a graph showing the historical CPU utilization.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show cpu history

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Usage This command’s output displays three graphs of the percentage CPU utilization:

• per second for the last minute, then

• per minute for the last hour, then

• per 30 minutes for the last 30 hours.

Examples To display a graph showing the historical CPU utilization of the device, use the

command:

awplus# show cpu history

Output Figure 7-3: Example output from the show cpu history command

Per second CPU load history



100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20 *

10 ******************************************* ****************

|....|....|....|....|....|....|....|....|....|....|....|....

Oldest Newest

CPU load% per second (last 60 seconds)

* = average CPU load%

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 212

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW CPU HISTORY

Commands

show memory

show memory allocations

show memory pools

show process

Per minute CPU load history



100

90

80

70

60 +

50

40

30

20 ++ +++++++++ +++++++ ++++ + ++++++ ++++ +++ +++++ +++++++++

10 ************************************************************

|....|....|....|....|....|....|....|....|....|....|....|....

Oldest Newest

CPU load% per minute (last 60 minutes)

* = average CPU load%, + = maximum

Per (30) minute CPU load history



100

90

80

70 +

60

50

40

30

20

10 ***

|....|....|....|....|....|....|....|....|....|....|....|....

Oldest Newest

CPU load% per 30 minutes (last 60 values / 30 hours)

* = average, - = minimum, + = maximum

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 213

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW DEBUGGING

show debugging

Overview This command displays information for all debugging options.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show debugging

Default This command runs all the show debugging commands in alphabetical order.

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Usage This command displays all debugging information, similar to the way the show

tech-support command displays all show output for use by Allied Telesis

authorized service personnel only.

Example To display all debugging information, use the command:

awplus# show debugging

Output Figure 7-4: Example output from the show debugging command

awplus#show debugging

AAA debugging status:

Authentication debugging is off

Accounting debugging is off



% DHCP Snooping service is disabled



802.1X debugging status:



EPSR debugging status:

EPSR Info debugging is off

EPSR Message debugging is off

EPSR Packet debugging is off

EPSR State debugging is off



IGMP Debugging status:

IGMP Decoder debugging is off

IGMP Encoder debugging is off

...

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 214

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW ECOFRIENDLY

show ecofriendly

Overview This command displays the switch’s eco-friendly configuration status. The

ecofriendly led configuration status are shown in the show ecofriendly output.

Syntax show ecofriendly

Mode Privileged Exec and Global Configuration

Example To display the switch’s eco-friendly configuration status, use the following

command:

awplus# show ecofriendly

Output Figure 7-5: Example output from the show ecofriendly command

awplus#show ecofriendly 

Front panel port LEDs normal



Energy efficient ethernet

Port Name Configured Status

port1.0.1 Port 1 off -

port1.0.2 off off

port1.0.3 off -

port1.0.4 Port 4 off -

port1.0.5 off -

...

Table 3: Parameters in the output of the show ecofriendly command

Parameter Description

normal The eco-friendly LED feature is disabled and port LEDs

show the current state of the ports. This is the default

setting.

off The eco-friendly LED feature is enabled and power to

the port LEDs is disabled.

Port Displays the port number as assigned by the switch.

Name Displays the port name if a name is configured for a

port number.

Configured Because LPI is not supported, this entry always shows

“off” or a dash (-).

Status Because LPI is not supported, this entry always shows

“off” or a dash (-).

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 215

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW INTERFACE MEMORY

show interface memory

Overview This command displays the shared memory used by either all interfaces, or the

specified interface or interfaces. The output is useful for diagnostic purposes by

Allied Telesis authorized service personnel.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show interface memory

show interface <port-list> memory

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the shared memory used by all interfaces, use the command:

awplus# show interface memory

To display the shared memory used by port1.0.1 and port1.0.5 to port1.0.6, use the

command:

awplus# show interface port1.0.1,port1.0.5-1.0.6 memory

Parameter Description

<port-list> Display information about only the specified port or ports. The port

list can be:

• a switch port (e.g. port1.0.4), a static channel group (e.g. sa2) or a

dynamic (LACP) channel group (e.g. po2)

• a continuous range of ports separated by a hyphen (e.g.

port1.0.1-1.0.4, or sa1-2, or po1-2)

• a comma-separated list of ports and port ranges (e.g.

port1.0.1,port1.0.4-1.0.6). Do not mix switch ports, static channel

groups, and dynamic (LACP) channel groups in the same list.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 216

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW INTERFACE MEMORY

Output Figure 7-6: Example output from the show interface memory command

Figure 7-7: Example output from show interface <port-list> memory for a list

of interfaces

Commands

show interface brief

show interface status

show interface switchport

awplus#show interface memory

Vlan blocking state shared memory usage

---------------------------------------------

Interface shmid Bytes Used nattch Status

port1.0.1 393228 512 1

port1.0.2 458766 512 1

port1.0.3 360459 512 1

port1.0.4 524304 512 1

port1.0.5 491535 512 1

port1.0.6 557073 512 1

...

lo 425997 512 1

po1 1179684 512 1

po2 1212453 512 1

sa3 1245222 512 1

awplus#show interface port1.0.1,port1.0.5-1.0.6 memory

Vlan blocking state shared memory usage

---------------------------------------------

Interface shmid Bytes Used nattch Status

port1.0.1 393228 512 1

port1.0.5 491535 512 1

port1.0.6 557073 512 1

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 217

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW MEMORY

show memory

Overview This command displays the memory used by each process that is currently running

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show memory [sort {size|peak|stk}]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the memory used by the current running processes, use the command:

awplus# show memory

Output Figure 7-8: Example output from show memory

Parameter Description

sort Changes the sorting order for the list of processes. If you do not

specify this, then the list is sorted by percentage memory

utilization.

size Sort by the amount of memory the process is

currently using.

peak Sort by the amount of memory the process is

currently using.

stk Sort by the stack size of the process.

awplus#show memory sort stk



RAM total: 124384 kB; free: 64236 kB; buffers: 15888 kB



user processes

==============

pid name mem% size(kB) peak(kB) data(kB) stk(kB) virt(kB)

490 openhpid 1.5 1988 7480 1308 528 6704

578 hsl 7.1 8940 29312 5148 312 21052

18986 imish 1.3 1660 13668 3876 172 13668

18931 imish 3.6 4548 13668 3876 172 13668

576 imi 4.6 5772 14532 4428 144 14532

572 nsm 4.9 6128 15092 4480 140 15092

574 hostd 1.6 2048 8116 1876 140 8116

586 cntrd 2.5 3168 12140 3288 140 12136

606 sflowd 2.8 3564 12336 3408 140 12336

610 authd 3.0 3808 12604 3472 140 12604

616 mstpd 3.1 3856 12652 3480 140 12652

...

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 218

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW MEMORY

Commands

show memory allocations

show memory history

show memory pools

show memory shared

Table 4: Parameters in the output of the show memory command

Parameter Description

RAM total Total amount of RAM memory free.

free Available memory size.

buffers Memory allocated kernel buffers.

pid Identifier number for the process.

name Short name used to describe the process.

mem% Percentage of memory utilization the process is currently using.

size Amount of memory currently used by the process.

peak Greatest amount of memory ever used by the process.

data Amount of memory used for data.

stk The stack size.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 219

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW MEMORY ALLOCATIONS

show memory allocations

Overview This command displays the memory allocations used by processes.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show memory allocations [<process>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the memory allocations used by all processes on your device, use the

command:

awplus# show memory allocations

Output Figure 7-9: Example output from the show memory allocations command

Parameter Description

<process> Displays the memory allocation used by the specified process.

awplus#show memory allocations

Memory allocations for imi

-----------------------------



Current 15093760 (peak 15093760)



Statically allocated memory:

- binary/exe : 1675264

- libraries : 8916992

- bss/global data : 2985984

- stack : 139264



Dynamically allocated memory (heap):

- total allocated : 1351680

- in use : 1282440

- non-mmapped : 1351680

- maximum total allocated : 1351680

- total free space : 69240

- releasable : 68968

- space in freed fastbins : 16



Context

filename:line allocated freed

+ lib.c:749 484

.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 220

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW MEMORY ALLOCATIONS

Commands

show memory

show memory history

show memory pools

show memory shared

show tech-support

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 221

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW MEMORY HISTORY

show memory history

Overview This command prints a graph showing the historical memory usage.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show memory history

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Usage This command’s output displays three graphs of the percentage memory

utilization:

• per second for the last minute, then

• per minute for the last hour, then

• per 30 minutes for the last 30 hours.

Examples To show a graph displaying the historical memory usage, use the command:

awplus# show memory history

Output Figure 7-10: Example output from the show memory history command

Commands

show memory allocations

show memory pools

show memory shared

show tech-support

Per minute memory utilization history



100

90

80

70

60

50

40*************************************************************

30

20

10

|....|....|....|....|....|....|....|....|....|....|....|....

Oldest Newest

Memory utilization% per minute (last 60 minutes)

* = average memory utilisation%.

...

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 222

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW MEMORY POOLS

show memory pools

Overview This command shows the memory pools used by processes.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show memory pools [<process>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To shows the memory pools used by processes, use the command:

awplus# show memory pools

Output Figure 7-11: Example output from the show memory pools command

Commands

show memory allocations

show memory history

show tech-support

Parameter Description

<process> Displays the memory pools used by the specified process.

awplus#show memory pools

Memory pools for imi

----------------------



Current 15290368 (peak 15290368)



Statically allocated memory:

- binary/exe : 1675264

- libraries : 8916992

- bss/global data : 2985984

- stack : 139264



Dynamically allocated memory (heap):

- total allocated : 1548288

- in use : 1479816

- non-mmapped : 1548288

- maximum total allocated : 1548288

- total free space : 68472

- releasable : 68200

- space in freed fastbins : 16

.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 223

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW MEMORY SHARED

show memory shared

Overview This command displays shared memory allocation information. The output is

useful for diagnostic purposes by Allied Telesis authorized service personnel.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show memory shared

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display information about the shared memory allocation used on the device,

use the command:

awplus# show memory shared

Output Figure 7-12: Example output from the show memory shared command

Commands

show memory allocations

show memory history

show memory

awplus#show memory shared

Shared Memory Status

--------------------------

Segment allocated = 39

Pages allocated = 39

Pages resident = 11



Shared Memory Limits

--------------------------

Maximum number of segments = 4096

Maximum segment size (kbytes) = 32768

Maximum total shared memory (pages) = 2097152

Minimum segment size (bytes) = 1

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 224

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW PROCESS

show process

Overview This command lists a summary of the current running processes.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show process [sort {cpu|mem}]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Usage This command displays a snapshot of currently-running processes. If you want to

see CPU or memory utilization history instead, use the commands show cpu

history or show memory history.

Example To display a summary of the current running processes, use the command:

awplus# show process

Output Figure 7-13: Example output from the show process command

Parameter Description

sort Changes the sorting order for the list of processes.

cpu Sorts the list by the percentage of CPU utilization.

mem Sorts the list by the percentage of memory

utilization.

CPU averages:

1 second: 8%, 20 seconds: 5%, 60 seconds: 5%

System load averages:

1 minute: 0.04, 5 minutes: 0.08, 15 minutes: 0.12

Current CPU load:

userspace: 9%, kernel: 9%, interrupts: 0% iowaits: 0%

RAM total: 514920 kB; free: 382600 kB; buffers: 16368 kB



user processes

==============

pid name thrds cpu% mem% pri state sleep% 

962 pss 12 0 6 25 sleep 5 

1 init 1 0 0 25 sleep 0 

797 syslog-ng 1 0 0 16 sleep 88 

...

kernel threads

==============

pid name cpu% pri state sleep% 

71 aio/0 0 20 sleep 0 

3 events/0 0 10 sleep 98 

...

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 225

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW PROCESS

Commands

show cpu

show cpu history

Table 5: Parameters in the output from the show process command

Parameter Description

CPU averages Average CPU utilization for the periods stated.

System load

averages

The average number of processes waiting for CPU time for the

periods stated.

Current CPU

load

Current CPU utilization specified by load types

RAM total Total memory size.

free Available memory.

buffers Memory allocated to kernel buffers.

pid Identifier for the process.

name Short name to describe the process.

thrds Number of threads in the process.

cpu% Percentage of CPU utilization that this process is consuming.

mem% Percentage of memory utilization that this process is consuming.

pri Process priority.

state Process state; one of “run”, “sleep”, “stop”, “zombie”, or “dead”.

sleep% Percentage of time the process is in the sleep state.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 226

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW REBOOT HISTORY

show reboot history

Overview Use this command to display the device’s reboot history.

Syntax show reboot history

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To show the reboot history, use the command:

awplus# show reboot history

Output Figure 7-14: Example output from the show reboot history command

Commands

show tech-support

awplus#show reboot history



<date> <time> <type> <description>

-----------------------------------------------

2016-10-10 01:42:04 Expected User Request

2016-10-10 01:35:31 Expected User Request

2016-10-10 01:16:25 Unexpected Rebooting due to critical process (network/nsm) 

failure!

2016-10-10 01:11:04 Unexpected Rebooting due to critical process (network/nsm) 

failure!

2016-10-09 19:56:16 Expected User Request

2016-10-09 19:51:20 Expected User Request

Table 6: Parameters in the output from the show reboot history command

Parameter Description

Unexpected A non-intended reboot.

Expected A planned or user-triggered reboot.

User request User initiated reboot via the CLI.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 227

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW ROUTER-ID

show router-id

Overview Use this command to show the Router ID of the current system.

Syntax show router-id

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the Router ID of the current system, use the command:

awplus# show router-id

Output Figure 7-15: Example output from the show router-id command

awplus>show router-id

Router ID: 10.55.0.2 (automatic)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 228

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW SYSTEM

show system

Overview This command displays general system information about the device, including

the hardware, installed, memory, and software versions loaded. It also displays

location and contact details when these have been set.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show system

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display configuration information, use the command:

awplus# show system

Output Figure 7-16: Example output from show system

Commands

show system environment



awplus#show system

System Status Thu May 18 11:45:24 2017



Board ID Bay Board Name Rev Serial number

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Base 537 AT-GS970M/18 A-0 G27ZFA06P

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

RAM: Total: 511248 kB Free: 402392 kB

Flash: 61.9MB Used: 27.4MB Available: 34.5MB

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Environment Status : Normal

Uptime : 0 days 00:04:24

Bootloader version : 3.2.1



Current software : GS970-5.4.7-0.1.rel

Software version : 5.4.7-0.1

Build date : Thu Mar 23 21:28:38 UTC 2017



Current boot config: flash:/default.cfg (file exists)



System Name

awplus

System Contact



System Location

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 229

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT

show system environment

Overview This command displays the current environmental status of your device and any

attached PSU, XEM, or other expansion option. The environmental status covers

information about temperatures, fans, and voltage.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show system environment

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the system’s environmental status, use the command:

awplus# show system environment

Output Figure 7-17: Example output from the show system environment command

Commands

show system

awplus#show system environment

Environment Monitoring Status



Overall Status: Normal



Resource ID: 1 Name: AT-GS970M/18

ID Sensor (Units) Reading Low Limit High Limit Status

1 Fan: Fan 1 (Rpm) 3924 2700 - Ok

2 Voltage: 2.5V (Volts) 2.508 2.339 2.859 Ok

3 Voltage: 1.0V (Volts) 1.006 0.896 1.099 Ok

4 Voltage: 3.3V (Volts) 3.338 3.028 3.545 Ok

5 Voltage: 1.5V (Volts) 1.538 1.335 1.649 Ok

6 Voltage: 12.0V (Volts) 11.813 10.767 13.166 Ok

7 Temp: System (Degrees C) 49 -11 73 Ok

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 230

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW SYSTEM INTERRUPTS

show system interrupts

Overview Use this command to display the number of interrupts for each IRQ (Interrupt

Request) used to interrupt input lines on a PIC (Programmable Interrupt Controller)

on your device.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show system interrupts

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display information about the number of interrupts for each IRQ in your device,

use the command:

awplus# show system interrupts

Output Figure 7-18: Example output from the show system interrupts command

Commands

show system environment

awplus#show system interrupts

CPU0 

27:1387835593 GIC Disabled 1 iproc_gtimer

29: 0 GIC Disabled 1 twd

62: 0 GIC Enabled 0 IDM

63: 0 GIC Enabled 0 IDM

64: 0 GIC Enabled 0 IDM

65: 0 GIC Enabled 0 IDM

66: 0 GIC Enabled 0 IDM

67: 0 GIC Enabled 0 IDM

68: 0 GIC Enabled 0 IDM

69: 0 GIC Enabled 0 IDM

70: 0 GIC Enabled 0 IDM

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 231

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW SYSTEM MAC

show system mac

Overview This command displays the physical MAC address of the device.

Syntax show system mac

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the physical MAC address enter the following command:

awplus# show system mac

Output Figure 7-19: Example output from the show system mac command

awplus#show system mac

eccd.6d9d.4eed (system)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 232

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW SYSTEM SERIALNUMBER

show system serialnumber

Overview This command shows the serial number information for the device.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show system serialnumber

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the serial number information for the device, use the command:

awplus# show system serialnumber

Output Figure 7-20: Example output from the show system serial number command

awplus#show system serialnumber

45AX5300X

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 233

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW TECH-SUPPORT

show tech-support

Overview This command generates system and debugging information for the device and

saves it to a file.

This command is useful for collecting a large amount of information so that it can

then be analyzed for troubleshooting purposes. The output of this command can

be provided to technical support staff when reporting a problem.

You can optionally limit the command output to display only information for a

given protocol or feature. The features available depend on your device and will be

a subset of the features listed in the table below.

Syntax show tech-support

{[all|atmf|auth|bgp|card|dhcpsn|epsr|firewall|igmp|ip|ipv6|mld

update]} [outfile <filename>]

Parameter Description

all Display full information

atmf Display ATMF-specific information

auth Display authentication-related information

bgp Display BGP-related information

card Display Chassis Card specific information

dhcpsn Display DHCP Snooping specific information

epsr Display EPSR specific information

firewall Display firewall specific information

igmp Display IGMP specific information

ip Display IP specific information

ipv6 Display IPv6 specific information

mld Display MLD specific information

openflow Display information related to OpenFlow

ospf Display OSPF related information

ospf6 Display OSPF6 specific information

pim Display PIM related information

rip RIP related information

ripng Display RIPNG specific information

stack Display stacking device information

stp Display STP specific information

system Display general system information

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 234

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SHOW TECH-SUPPORT

Default Captures all information for the device.

By default the output is saved to the file ‘tech-support.txt.gz’ in the current

directory. If this file already exists in the current directory then a new file is

generated with the time stamp appended to the file name, for example

‘tech-support20161009.txt.gz’, so the previous file is retained.

Usage The command generates a large amount of output, which is saved to a file in

compressed format. The output file name can be specified by outfile option. If the

output file already exists, a new file name is generated with the current time stamp.

If the output filename does not end with “.gz”, then “.gz” is appended to the

filename. Since output files may be too large for Flash on the device we

recommend saving files to external memory or a TFTP server whenever possible to

avoid device lockup. This method is not likely to be appropriate when running the

working set option of AMF across a range of physically separated devices.

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples To produce the output needed by technical support staff, use the command:

awplus# show tech-support

tacacs+ Display TACACS+ information

update Display resource update specific information

|Output modifier

>Output redirection

>> Output redirection (append)

outfile Output file name

<filename>Specifies a name for the output file. If no name is specified, this file

will be saved as: tech-support.txt.gz.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 235

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SPEED (ASYN)

speed (asyn)

Overview This command changes the console speed from the device. Note that a change in

console speed is applied for subsequent console sessions. Exit the current session

to enable the console speed change using the clear line console command.

Syntax speed <console-speed-in-bps>

Default The default console speed baud rate is 9600 bps.

Mode Line Configuration

Usage This command is used to change the console (asyn) port speed. Set the console

speed to match the transmission rate of the device connected to the console (asyn)

port on your device.

Example To set the terminal console (asyn0) port speed from the device to 57600 bps, then

exit the session, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# line console 0

awplus(config-line)# speed 57600

awplus(config-line)# exit

awplus(config)# exit

awplus# exit

Then log in again to enable the change:

awplus login:

Password:

awplus>

Parameter Description

<console-speed-in-bps>Console speed Baud rate in bps (bits per second).

1200 1200 Baud

2400 2400 Baud

9600 9600 Baud

19200 19200 Baud

38400 38400 Baud

57600 57600 Baud

115200 115200 Baud

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 236

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SPEED (ASYN)

Commands

clear line console

line

show running-config

show startup-config

speed

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 237

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

SYSTEM TERRITORY (DEPRECATED)

system territory (deprecated)

Overview This command has been deprecated in Software Version 5.4.4-0.1 and later. It now

has no effect.

It is no longer useful to specify a system territory, so there is no alternative

command.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 238

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

TERMINAL MONITOR

terminal monitor

Overview Use this command to display debugging output on a terminal.

To display the cursor after a line of debugging output, press the Enter key.

Use the command terminal no monitor to stop displaying debugging output on

the terminal, or use the timeout option to stop displaying debugging output on

the terminal after a set time.

Syntax terminal monitor [<1-60>]

terminal no monitor

Default Disabled

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Examples To display debugging output on a terminal, enter the command:

awplus# terminal monitor

To specify timeout of debugging output after 60 seconds, enter the command:

awplus# terminal monitor 60

To stop displaying debugging output on the terminal, use the command:

awplus# terminal no monitor

Commands

All debug commands

Parameter Description

<1-60>Set a timeout between 1 and 60 seconds for terminal output.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 239

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING COMMANDS

UNDEBUG ALL

undebug all

Overview This command applies the functionality of the no debug all command.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 240

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Pluggables and

Cabling Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference of commands used to configure

and monitor Pluggables and Cabling, including:

• Cable Fault Locator for finding faults in copper cabling

• Optical Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) to help find fiber issues when

links go down

• Active Fiber Monitoring for detecting changes in optical power received over

fiber cables.

For more information, see the Pluggables and Cabling Feature Overview and

Configuration Guide.

Command List •“clear test cable-diagnostics tdr” on page 241

•“debug fiber-monitoring” on page 242

•“fiber-monitoring action” on page 244

•“fiber-monitoring baseline” on page 245

•“fiber-monitoring enable” on page 247

•“fiber-monitoring interval” on page 248

•“fiber-monitoring sensitivity” on page 249

•“show system fiber-monitoring” on page 251

•“show system pluggable” on page 254

•“show system pluggable detail” on page 256

•“show system pluggable diagnostics” on page 259

•“show test cable-diagnostics tdr” on page 261

•“test cable-diagnostics tdr interface” on page 262

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 241

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PLUGGABLES AND CABLING COMMANDS

CLEAR TEST CABLE-DIAGNOSTICS TDR

clear test cable-diagnostics tdr

Overview Use this command to clear the results of the last cable test that was run.

Syntax clear test cable-diagnostics tdr

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples To clear the results of a previous cable-diagnostics test use the following

commands:

awplus# clear test cable-diagnostics tdr

Commands

show test cable-diagnostics tdr

test cable-diagnostics tdr interface

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 242

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PLUGGABLES AND CABLING COMMANDS

DEBUG FIBER-MONITORING

debug fiber-monitoring

Overview Use this command to enable debugging of active fiber monitoring on the specified

ports.

Use the no variant of this command to disable debugging on all ports or the

specified ports.

Syntax debug fiber-monitoring interface <port-list>

no debug fiber-monitoring [interface <port-list>]

Default Debugging of active fiber monitoring is disabled by default.

Mode User Exec/Privileged Exec

Usage While debugging is enabled by this command for a port, all the optical power

readings for the port are sent to the console.

Example To enable debugging messages for active fiber monitoring of port 1.0.2 to be sent

to the console, use the commands:

awplus# debug fiber-monitoring interface port 1.0.2

awplus# terminal monitor

To disable debugging messages for active fiber monitoring on port 1.0.2, use the

command:

awplus# no debug fiber-monitoring interface port 1.0.2

To disable all debugging messages for active fiber monitoring, use the command:

awplus# no debug fiber-monitoring

Parameter Description

<port-list> The list of fiber ports to enable or disable debugging for, as a

single port, a comma separated list or a hyphenated range.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 243

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PLUGGABLES AND CABLING COMMANDS

DEBUG FIBER-MONITORING

Output Figure 8-1: Example output from debug fiber-monitoring

Commands

show system fiber-monitoring

awplus#debug fiber-monitoring interface port2.0.1

awplus#terminal monitor 

% Warning: Console logging enabled

awplus#01:42:50 awplus Pluggable[522]: Fiber-monitor port2.0.1: Channel:1

Reading:1748 Baseline:1708 Threshold:1356

01:42:52 awplus Pluggable[522]: Fiber-monitor port2.0.1: Channel:1 Reading:1717

Baseline:1709 Threshold:1357

01:42:54 awplus Pluggable[522]: Fiber-monitor port2.0.1: Channel:1 Reading:1780

Baseline:1709 Threshold:1357

01:42:56 awplus Pluggable[522]: Fiber-monitor port2.0.1: Channel:1 Reading:1685

Baseline:1710 Threshold:1358

01:42:58 awplus Pluggable[522]: Fiber-monitor port2.0.1: Channel:1 Reading:1701

Baseline:1710 Threshold:1358

01:43:01 awplus Pluggable[522]: Fiber-monitor port2.0.1: Channel:1 Reading:1733

Baseline:1709 Threshold:1357

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 244

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PLUGGABLES AND CABLING COMMANDS

FIBER-MONITORING ACTION

fiber-monitoring action

Overview Use this command to specify an action to be taken if the optical power received on

the port changes from the baseline by the amount specified in the

fiber-monitoring sensitivity command.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the specified action or all actions

from the port.

Syntax fiber-monitoring action {trap|shutdown}

no fiber-monitoring action [trap|shutdown]

Default By default a log message is generated, but no additional action is performed.

Mode Interface Configuration mode for a fiber port.

Usage If fiber monitoring is enabled and this command is not used to set an action, a

change in received power on a fiber port only generates a log message.

Example To set the device to send an SNMP notification when ports 1.0.1 or 1.0.2 receive

reduced power, use the commands:

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1-1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# fiber-monitoring action trap

To set the device to send an SNMP notification and to shut down the port when

ports 1.0.1 or 1.0.2 receive reduced power, use the commands:

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1-1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# fiber-monitoring action trap shutdown

To set the device not to send an SNMP notification when ports 1.0.1 or 1.0.2 receive

reduced power, use the commands:

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1-1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# no fiber-monitoring action trap

To set the device not to perform any action when it receives reduced power on

ports 1.0.1 or 1.0.2, use the commands:

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1-1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# no fiber-monitoring action

Commands

fiber-monitoring sensitivity

show system fiber-monitoring

Parameter Description

trap Send an SNMP notification.

shutdown Shutdown the port.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 245

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PLUGGABLES AND CABLING COMMANDS

FIBER-MONITORING BASELINE

fiber-monitoring baseline

Overview Use this command to configure how the baseline value for comparison is

calculated for active fiber monitoring on the port.

Note that alarm generation will not commence until the link has been up for a full

averaging period.

Use the no variant of this command to set the fiber-monitoring baseline to its

default value.

Syntax fiber-monitoring baseline (average <12-150>|fixed <1-65535>)

no fiber-monitoring baseline

Default The default is a moving average of the last 12 values. If the fiber-monitoring

interval is set to its default (5s), the fiber-monitoring baseline default will be the

average over the last minute.

Mode Interface Configuration for a fiber port

Usage CAUTION: We do not recommend setting a fixed value because gradual change over

time caused by temperature fluctuations, etc. could lead to unnecessary alarms.

There are two ways to configure the baseline. The first is to choose a number of

readings to average. This is the default and recommended method. The second is

to set a fixed value in units of x0.0001mW.

If a fixed value is required, the easiest way is to enable fiber monitoring on the port

and use the show system fiber-monitoring command to see what readings can

be expected.

Example To set the baseline optical power to a moving average of the last 30 readings, use

the command:

awplus(config-if)# fiber-monitoring baseline average 30

To set the baseline to its default, averaging the last 12 readings, use the command:

awplus(config-if)# no fiber-monitoring baseline

Parameter Description

average Set the baseline optical power received to be based on the

moving average of the specified number of most recent

(non-zero) values. Default.

<12-150> The number of most recent values to average for the baseline.

Default: 12.

fixed Set the baseline to a fixed level of received optical power. Not

recommended—see Usage below.

<1-65535> The fixed baseline value of received optical power in 0.0001mW.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 246

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PLUGGABLES AND CABLING COMMANDS

FIBER-MONITORING BASELINE

Commands

fiber-monitoring interval

fiber-monitoring sensitivity

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 247

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PLUGGABLES AND CABLING COMMANDS

FIBER-MONITORING ENABLE

fiber-monitoring enable

Overview Use this command to enable active fiber monitoring on a fiber port. If the port can

support fiber monitoring but does not have the correct SFP or fiber type installed,

the configuration will be saved, and monitoring will commence when a supported

SFP is inserted. Disabling and re-enabling fiber monitoring on a port resets the

baseline calculation.

Use the no variants of this command to disable active fiber monitoring on the

interface, or to remove all the configuration and state for the ports, respectively.

Syntax fiber-monitoring enable

no fiber-monitoring enable

no fiber-monitoring

Default Active fiber monitoring is disabled by default.

Mode Interface Configuration mode for a fiber port

Examples To enable active fiber monitoring on a ports 1.0.1 and 1.0.2, use the commands:

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1-1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# fiber-monitoring enable

To disable fiber monitoring on the ports, use the commands:

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1-1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# no fiber-monitoring enable

To remove all fiber-monitoring configuration and state for the ports, use the

commands:

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1-1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# no fiber-monitoring

Commands

fiber-monitoring action

fiber-monitoring sensitivity

show system fiber-monitoring

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 248

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PLUGGABLES AND CABLING COMMANDS

FIBER-MONITORING INTERVAL

fiber-monitoring interval

Overview Use this command to configure the fiber monitoring polling interval in seconds for

the port. The optical power will be read every <interval> seconds and compared

against the calculated threshold values to see if a log message or other action is

required.

Use the no variant of this command to reset the polling interval to the default (5

seconds).

Syntax fiber-monitoring interval <2-60>

no fiber-monitoring interval

Default The interval is set to 5 seconds by default.

Mode Interface configuration mode for a fiber port.

Example To set the fiber monitoring polling interval for port 1.0.2 to 30 seconds, use the

commands:

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# fiber-monitoring interval 30

To reset the fiber monitoring polling interval back to the default (5s), use the

commands:

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# no fiber-monitoring interval

Commands

fiber-monitoring baseline

show system fiber-monitoring

Parameter Description

<2-60> Optical power polling interval in seconds.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 249

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PLUGGABLES AND CABLING COMMANDS

FIBER-MONITORING SENSITIVITY

fiber-monitoring sensitivity

Overview Use this command to configure the sensitivity of the alarm thresholds on the port

for active fiber monitoring.

Use the no variant of this command to reset the sensitivity to the default.

Syntax fiber-monitoring sensitivity (low|medium|high|highest|fixed

<25-65535>)|relative <0.01-10.0>

no fiber-monitoring sensitivity

Default The default is medium sensitivity.

Mode User Exec/Privileged Exec

Usage A log message is generated and configured actions are taken if the received optical

power drops below the baseline value by the sensitivity configured with this

command.

The sensitivity can be configured to one of four pre-defined levels in decibels or to

a fixed absolute delta in units of 0.0001mW. The alarm thresholds can be seen in

the show system fiber-monitoring output. The maximum absolute sensitivity

configurable is 0.0025 mW. Note that 0.0025 mW equates to a reduction of

approximately 1dB at the maximum attenuation of an AT-SPLX10/1.

Example To set the fiber monitoring sensitivity for port 1.0.2 to a relative sensitivity of 0.1 dB,

use the commands:

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# fiber-monitoring sensitivity relative 0.1

To reset the fiber monitoring sensitivity to the default (medium), use the

commands:

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# no fiber-monitoring sensitivity

Parameter Description

low Low sensitivity (+/-2 dB)

medium Medium sensitivity (1 dB) (default)

high High sensitivity (the greater of 0.5 dB and 0.0025 mW)

highest The highest sensitivity available: 0.0025mW

fixed<25-65535>Fixed sensitivity at the specified level in 0.0001 mW.

relative

<0.01-10.0>

Relative sensitivity at the specified level in dB.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 250

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PLUGGABLES AND CABLING COMMANDS

FIBER-MONITORING SENSITIVITY

Commands

fiber-monitoring action

fiber-monitoring baseline

show system fiber-monitoring

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 251

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PLUGGABLES AND CABLING COMMANDS

SHOW SYSTEM FIBER-MONITORING

show system fiber-monitoring

Overview Use this command to display settings and current status for Active Fiber

Monitoring.

Syntax show system fiber-monitoring

Mode User Exec/Privileged Exec

Example To display configuration and status for active fiber monitoring on ports, use the

command:

awplus# show system fiber-monitoring

Output Figure 8-2: Example output from show system fiber-monitoring

awplus#show sys fiber-monitoring 

Fiber Monitoring Status

Reading units 0.0001mW



Stack member 1:



Interface port1.0.1

Status: enabled

Supported: Supported pluggable

Debugging: disabled

Interval: 2 seconds

Sensitivity: 1.00dB

Baseline type: average of last 35 values greater than 50

Status:

Baseline value: 496

Alarm threshold: 393

Alarm: no

Last 12 Readings: 498 498 498 498 498 498 498 498 498 498 498 498 

Minimum reading: 486

Maximum reading: 498



Interface port1.0.2

Status: enabled

Supported: Supported pluggable

Debugging: disabled

Interval: 2 seconds

Sensitivity: 1.00dB

Baseline type: average of last 30 values greater than 50

Status:

Baseline value: 0

Alarm threshold: 0

Alarm: no

Last 12 Readings: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

Minimum reading: 0

Maximum reading: 0

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 252

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PLUGGABLES AND CABLING COMMANDS

SHOW SYSTEM FIBER-MONITORING

Commands

debug fiber-monitoring

fiber-monitoring action

fiber-monitoring baseline

fiber-monitoring enable

Table 8-1: Parameters in the output from show system fiber-monitoring

Parameter Description

Reading units The units for optical power readings in the rest of the

display, e.g. 0.0001mW.

Status Whether active fiber monitoring is enabled or disabled for

this port.

Supported Whether the pluggable inserted in this port supports

active fiber monitoring.

Debugging Whether debugging of active fiber monitoring is enabled

or disabled for this port.

Interval The configured interval between readings of optical

power on this port.

Sensitivity The configured sensitivity threshold for optical power

changes on this port.

Baseline type How the baseline optical power level is calculated: either

the average of the specified number of previous readings

or a specified fixed value in 0.0001mW.

Status Current values for the following parameters.

Baseline value The baseline value, calculated according to the configured

baseline method, in 0.0001mW.

Alarm threshold The current threshold for a change in optical power,

calculated according to the configured sensitivity method,

that will result in action.

Alarm Whether the optical power at the most recent reading

fallen below the threshold.

Last 12 readings The last 12 optical power values measured, in 0.0001mW,

with oldest value first.

Minimum reading The lowest optical power reading since the fiber

pluggable was last inserted, or since active fiber

monitoring was last enabled on the port.

Maximum reading The highest optical power reading since the fiber

pluggable was last inserted, or since active fiber

monitoring was last enabled on the port.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 253

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PLUGGABLES AND CABLING COMMANDS

SHOW SYSTEM FIBER-MONITORING

fiber-monitoring interval

fiber-monitoring sensitivity

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 254

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PLUGGABLES AND CABLING COMMANDS

SHOW SYSTEM PLUGGABLE

show system pluggable

Overview This command displays brief pluggable transceiver information showing the

pluggable type, the pluggable serial number, and the pluggable port on the

device. Different types of pluggable transceivers are supported in different models

of device. See your Allied Telesis dealer for more information about the models of

pluggables that your device supports.

Syntax show system pluggable [<port-list>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display brief information about all installed pluggable transceivers, use the

command:

awplus# show system pluggable

Output Figure 8-3: Example output from show system pluggable

Parameter Description

<port-list> The ports to display information about. The port list can be:

• a switch port (e.g. port1.0.9)

• a continuous range of ports separated by a hyphen (e.g.

port1.0.9-1.0.10)

• a comma-separated list of ports and port ranges (e.g.

port1.0.9,port1.0.10)

awplus#show system pluggable 

System Pluggable Information



Port Vendor Device Serial Number Datecode Type

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1.0.9 ATI AT-SPSX A03240R111801427 11050801 1000BASE-SX 

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 9: Parameters in the output from the show system pluggable command

Parameter Description

Port Specifies the port number for the installed pluggable

transceiver.

Vendor Specifies the vendor’s name for the installed pluggable

transceiver.

Device Specifies the device name for the installed pluggable

transceiver.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 255

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PLUGGABLES AND CABLING COMMANDS

SHOW SYSTEM PLUGGABLE

Commands

show system environment

show system pluggable detail

show system pluggable diagnostics

Serial Number Specifies the serial number for the installed pluggable

transceiver.

Datecode Specifies the manufacturing datecode for the installed

pluggable transceiver. Checking the manufacturing

datecode with the vendor may be useful when

determining Laser Diode aging issues. For more

information, see ”How To Troubleshoot Fiber and

Pluggable Issues” in the “Getting Started with AlliedWare

Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Type Specifies the device type for the installed pluggable

transceiver.

Table 9: Parameters in the output from the show system pluggable command

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 256

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PLUGGABLES AND CABLING COMMANDS

SHOW SYSTEM PLUGGABLE DETAIL

show system pluggable detail

Overview This command displays detailed pluggable transceiver information showing the

pluggable type, the pluggable serial number, and the pluggable port on the

device. Different types of pluggable transceivers are supported in different models

of device. See your Allied Telesis dealer for more information about the models of

pluggables that your device supports.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show system pluggable [<port-list>] detail

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Usage In addition to the information about pluggable transceivers displayed using the

show system pluggable command (port, manufacturer, serial number,

manufacturing datecode, and type information), the show system pluggable

detail command displays the following information:

•SFP Laser Wavelength: Specifies the laser wavelength of the installed

pluggable transceiver

•Single mode Fiber: Specifies the link length supported by the pluggable

transceiver using single mode fiber

•OM1 (62.5μ m) Fiber: Specifies the link length, in meters (m) or kilometers

(km) supported by the pluggable transceiver using 62.5 micron multi-mode

fiber.

•OM2 (50μ m) Fiber: Specifies the link length (in meters or kilometers)

supported by the pluggable transceiver using 50 micron multi-mode fiber.

•Diagnostic Calibration: Specifies whether the pluggable transceiver

supports DDM or DOM Internal or External Calibration.

–Internal is displayed if the pluggable transceiver supports DDM or

DOM Internal Calibration.

–External is displayed if the pluggable transceiver supports DDM or

DOM External Calibration.

– a dash (-) is displayed if neither Internal Calibration or External

Calibration is supported.

Parameter Description

<port-list> The ports to display information about. The port list can be:

• a switch port (e.g. port1.0.9)

• a continuous range of ports separated by a hyphen (e.g.

port1.0.9-1.0.10)

• a comma-separated list of ports and port ranges (e.g.

port1.0.9,port1.0.10)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 257

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PLUGGABLES AND CABLING COMMANDS

SHOW SYSTEM PLUGGABLE DETAIL

•Power Monitoring: Displays the received power measurement type, which

can be either OMA(Optical Module Amplitude) or Avg(Average Power)

measured in μW.

NOTE: For parameters that are not supported or not specified, a hyphen is displayed

instead.

Example To display detailed information about the pluggable transceivers installed in a

particular port on the device, use a command like:

awplus# show system pluggable port1.0.9 detail

To display detailed information about all the pluggable transceivers installed on

the device, use the command:

awplus# show system pluggable detail

Output Figure 8-4: Example output from show system pluggable detail for a specific

port on a device

awplus#show system pluggable detail

System Pluggable Information Detail



Port1.0.9

==========

Vendor Name: ATI

Device Name: AT-SP10SR

Device Revision: A

Device Type: 10GBASE-SR

Serial Number: A04440R1112200058

Manufacturing Datecode: 11052300

SFP Laser Wavelength: 850nm

Link Length Supported

Single Mode Fiber : -

OM1 (62.5um) Fiber: 30m

OM2 (50um) Fiber : 80m

Diagnostic Calibration: Internal

Power Monitoring: Average

FEC BER support: -

Table 8-1: Parameters in the output from show system pluggable detail

Parameter Description

Port Specifies the port the pluggable transceiver is installed in.

Vendor Name Specifies the vendor’s name for the installed pluggable

transceiver.

Device Name Specifies the device name for the installed pluggable

transceiver.

Device Revision Specifies the hardware revision code for the pluggable

transceiver. This may be useful for troubleshooting because

different devices may support different pluggable

transceiver revisions.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 258

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PLUGGABLES AND CABLING COMMANDS

SHOW SYSTEM PLUGGABLE DETAIL

Commands

show system environment

show system pluggable

show system pluggable diagnostics

Device Type Specifies the device type for the installed pluggable

transceiver.

Serial Number Specifies the serial number for the installed pluggable

transceiver.

Manufacturing

Datecode

Specifies the manufacturing datecode for the installed

pluggable transceiver. Checking the manufacturing

datecode with the vendor may be useful when

determining Laser Diode aging issues. For more

information, see ”How To Troubleshoot Fiber and

Pluggable Issues” in the “Getting Started with AlliedWare

Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

SFP Laser

Wavelength

Specifies the laser wavelength of the installed pluggable

transceiver.

Single Mode Fiber Specifies the link length supported by the pluggable

transceiver using single mode fiber.

OM1 (62.5um)

Fiber

Specifies the link length (in μm - micron) supported by the

pluggable transceiver using 62.5 micron multi-mode fiber.

OM2 (50um) Fiber Specifies the link length (in μm - micron) supported by the

pluggable transceiver using 50 micron multi-mode fiber.

Diagnostic

Calibration

Specifies whether the pluggable transceiver supports DDM

or DOM Internal or External Calibration:

Internal is displayed if the pluggable transceiver supports

DDM or DOM Internal Calibration.

External is displayed if the pluggable transceiver supports

DDM or DOM External Calibration.

- is displayed if neither Internal Calibration or External

Calibration is supported.

Power Monitoring Displays the received power measurement type, which can

be either OMA (Optical Module Amplitude) or Avg

(Average Power) measured in μW.

Table 8-1: Parameters in the output from show system pluggable detail (cont.)

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 259

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PLUGGABLES AND CABLING COMMANDS

SHOW SYSTEM PLUGGABLE DIAGNOSTICS

show system pluggable diagnostics

Overview This command displays diagnostic information about SFP pluggable transceivers

that support Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM).

Different types of pluggable transceivers are supported in different models of

device. See your device’s Datasheet for more information about the models of

pluggables that your device supports.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show system pluggable [<port-list>] diagnostics

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Usage Modern optical SFP transceivers support Digital Diagnostics Monitoring (DDM)

functions.

Diagnostic monitoring features allow you to monitor real-time parameters of the

pluggable transceiver, such as optical output power, optical input power,

temperature, laser bias current, and transceiver supply voltage. Additionally, RX

LOS (Loss of Signal) is shown when the received optical level is below a preset

threshold. Monitor these parameters to check on the health of all transceivers,

selected transceivers or a specific transceiver installed in a device.

Examples To display detailed information about all pluggable transceivers installed on a

standalone device, use the command:

awplus# show system pluggable diagnostics

Parameter Description

<port-list> The ports to display information about. The port list can be:

• a switch port (e.g. port1.0.9)

• a continuous range of ports separated by a hyphen (e.g.

port1.0.9-1.0.10)

• a comma-separated list of ports and port ranges (e.g.

port1.0.9,port1.0.10)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 260

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PLUGGABLES AND CABLING COMMANDS

SHOW SYSTEM PLUGGABLE DIAGNOSTICS

Output Figure 8-5: Example output from the show system pluggable diagnostics

command on a device

Commands

show system environment

show system pluggable

show system pluggable detail

awplus#show system pluggable diagnostics 

System Pluggable Information Diagnostics



Port1.0.9 Status Alarms Warnings

Reading Alarm Max Min Warning Max Min 

Temp: (Degrees C) 31.105 - 78.00 -13.00 - 73.000 -8.000

Vcc: (Volts) 3.283 - 3.800 2.800 - 3.500 3.100

Tx Bias: (mA) - Low 15.440 0.440 Low -12.440 2.440

Tx Power: (mW) 0.357 Low 1.175 0.200 Low 0.933 0.251

Rx Power: (mW) - Low 1.259 0.049 Low 1.000 0.062

Rx LOS: Rx Down

Table 9: Parameters in the output from the show system pluggables

diagnostics command

Parameter Description

Temp (Degrees C) Shows the temperature inside the transceiver.

Vcc (Volts) Shows voltage supplied to the transceiver.

Tx Bias (mA) Shows current to the Laser Diode in the transceiver.

Tx Power (mW) Shows the amount of light transmitted from the transceiver.

Rx Power (mW) Shows the amount of light received in the transceiver.

Rx LOS Rx Loss of Signal. This indicates whether:

• light is being received (Rx Up) and therefore the link is up,

• light is not being received (Rx Down) and therefore the

link is down

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 261

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PLUGGABLES AND CABLING COMMANDS

SHOW TEST CABLE-DIAGNOSTICS TDR

show test cable-diagnostics tdr

Overview Use this command to display the results of the last cable-diagnostics test that was

run using the TDR (Time Domain Reflectometer) on a fixed copper cable port.

The displayed status of the cable can be either:

•OK

•Open

• Short (within-pair)

• Short (across-pair)

• Error

Syntax show test cable-diagnostics tdr

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples To show the results of a cable-diagnostics test use the following command:

awplus# show test cable-diagnostics tdr

Output Figure 8-6: Example output from the show test cable-diagnostics tdr

command

Commands

clear test cable-diagnostics tdr

test cable-diagnostics tdr interface

Port Pair Length Status 

------------------------------------------------- 

1.0.1 A - OK 

B - OK 

C - OK 

D - OK

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 262

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PLUGGABLES AND CABLING COMMANDS

TEST CABLE-DIAGNOSTICS TDR INTERFACE

test cable-diagnostics tdr interface

Overview Use this command to apply the Cable Fault Locator’s cable-diagnostics tests to

twisted pair data cables for a selected port. The tests will detect either correct,

short circuit, or open, circuit terminations. For more information on running the

CFL, see the “Cable Fault Locator” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

The test can take several seconds to complete. See the related show command to

display the test results.

A new test can only be started if no other test is in progress. CFL cannot run on a

port that is currently supplying power via PoE.

The displayed status of the cable can be either, OK, Short (within-pair), or Open.

The “Open” or “Short” status is accompanied with the distance from the source

port to the incorrect termination.

Syntax test cable-diagnostics tdr interface <interface>

Mode [KEY:mode_privexec]

Example To run a cable test on the cable inserted into port1.0.1 use the following command:

awplus# test cable-diagnostics tdr interface port1.0.1

You will receive the following message:

Link will go down while test is in progress. Continue? (y/n): y

Select y to continue.

awplus# y

You will then receive the following message:

Test started. This will take several seconds to complete. Use

"show test cable-diagnostics tdr" to print results.

Commands

clear test cable-diagnostics tdr

show test cable-diagnostics tdr

Parameter Description

cable-diagnostics The cable diagnostic tests.

tdr Time Domain Reflectometry.

interface Selects the interface to test.

<interface> Interface number of the port to be tested, e.g. port1.0.2.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 263

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Logging Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference of commands used to configure

logging.

Command List •“clear exception log” on page 265

•“clear log” on page 266

•“clear log buffered” on page 267

•“clear log permanent” on page 268

•“default log buffered” on page 269

•“default log console” on page 270

•“default log email” on page 271

•“default log host” on page 272

•“default log monitor” on page 273

•“default log permanent” on page 274

•“log buffered” on page 275

•“log buffered (filter)” on page 276

•“log buffered exclude” on page 279

•“log buffered size” on page 282

•“log console” on page 283

•“log console (filter)” on page 284

•“log console exclude” on page 287

•“log email” on page 290

•“log email (filter)” on page 291

•“log email exclude” on page 294

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 264

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

•“log email time” on page 297

•“log facility” on page 299

•“log host” on page 301

•“log host (filter)” on page 303

•“log host exclude” on page 306

•“log host source” on page 309

•“log host time” on page 310

•“log monitor (filter)” on page 312

•“log monitor exclude” on page 315

•“log permanent” on page 318

•“log permanent (filter)” on page 319

•“log permanent exclude” on page 322

•“log permanent size” on page 325

•“log-rate-limit nsm” on page 326

•“log trustpoint” on page 328

•“show counter log” on page 329

•“show exception log” on page 330

•“show log” on page 331

•“show log config” on page 333

•“show log permanent” on page 335

•“show running-config log” on page 336

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 265

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

CLEAR EXCEPTION LOG

clear exception log

Overview This command resets the contents of the exception log, but does not remove the

associated core files.

Syntax clear exception log

Mode Privileged Exec

Example awplus# clear exception log

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 266

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

CLEAR LOG

clear log

Overview This command removes the contents of the buffered and permanent logs.

Syntax clear log

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To delete the contents of the buffered and permanent log use the command:

awplus# clear log

Commands

clear log buffered

clear log permanent

show log

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 267

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

CLEAR LOG BUFFERED

clear log buffered

Overview This command removes the contents of the buffered log.

Syntax clear log buffered

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To delete the contents of the buffered log use the following commands:

awplus# clear log buffered

Commands

default log buffered

log buffered

log buffered (filter)

log buffered size

log buffered exclude

show log

show log config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 268

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

CLEAR LOG PERMANENT

clear log permanent

Overview This command removes the contents of the permanent log.

Syntax clear log permanent

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To delete the contents of the permanent log use the following commands:

awplus# clear log permanent

Commands

default log permanent

log permanent

log permanent (filter)

log permanent exclude

log permanent size

show log config

show log permanent

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 269

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

DEFAULT LOG BUFFERED

default log buffered

Overview This command restores the default settings for the buffered log stored in RAM. By

default the size of the buffered log is 50 kB and it accepts messages with the

severity level of “warnings” and above.

Syntax default log buffered

Default The buffered log is enabled by default.

Mode Global Configuration

Example To restore the buffered log to its default settings use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# default log buffered

Commands

clear log buffered

log buffered

log buffered (filter)

log buffered size

log buffered exclude

show log

show log config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 270

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

DEFAULT LOG CONSOLE

default log console

Overview This command restores the default settings for log messages sent to the terminal

when a log console command is issued. By default all messages are sent to the

console when a log console command is issued.

Syntax default log console

Mode Global Configuration

Example To restore the log console to its default settings use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# default log console

Commands

log console

log console (filter)

log console exclude

show log config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 271

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

DEFAULT LOG EMAIL

default log email

Overview This command restores the default settings for log messages sent to an email

address. By default no filters are defined for email addresses. Filters must be

defined before messages will be sent. This command also restores the remote

syslog server time offset value to local (no offset).

Syntax default log email <email-address>

Mode Global Configuration

Example To restore the default settings for log messages sent to the email address

admin@alliedtelesis.com use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# default log email admin@alliedtelesis.com

Commands

log email

log email (filter)

log email exclude

log email time

show log config

Parameter Description

<email-address> The email address to send log messages to

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 272

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

DEFAULT LOG HOST

default log host

Overview This command restores the default settings for log sent to a remote syslog server.

By default no filters are defined for remote syslog servers. Filters must be defined

before messages will be sent. This command also restores the remote syslog server

time offset value to local (no offset).

Syntax default log host <ip-addr>

Mode Global Configuration

Example To restore the default settings for messages sent to the remote syslog server with

IP address 10.32.16.21 use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# default log host 10.32.16.21

Commands

log host

log host (filter)

log host exclude

log host source

log host time

show log config

Parameter Description

<ip-addr>The IP address of a remote syslog server

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 273

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

DEFAULT LOG MONITOR

default log monitor

Overview This command restores the default settings for log messages sent to the terminal

when a terminal monitor command is used.

Syntax default log monitor

Default All messages are sent to the terminal when a terminal monitor command is used.

Mode Global Configuration

Example To restore the log monitor to its default settings use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# default log monitor

Commands

log monitor (filter)

log monitor exclude

show log config

terminal monitor

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 274

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

DEFAULT LOG PERMANENT

default log permanent

Overview This command restores the default settings for the permanent log stored in NVS.

By default, the size of the permanent log is 50 kB and it accepts messages with the

severity level of warnings and above.

Syntax default log permanent

Default The permanent log is enabled by default.

Mode Global Configuration

Example To restore the permanent log to its default settings use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# default log permanent

Commands

clear log permanent

log permanent

log permanent (filter)

log permanent exclude

log permanent size

show log config

show log permanent

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 275

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG BUFFERED

log buffered

Overview This command configures the device to store log messages in RAM. Messages

stored in RAM are not retained on the device over a restart. Once the buffered log

reaches its configured maximum allowable size old messages will be deleted to

make way for new ones.

Syntax log buffered

no log buffered

Default The buffered log is configured by default.

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To configured the device to store log messages in RAM use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log buffered

To configure the device to not store log messages in a RAM buffer use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no log buffered

Commands

clear log buffered

default log buffered

log buffered (filter)

log buffered size

log buffered exclude

show log

show log config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 276

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG BUFFERED (FILTER)

log buffered (filter)

Overview Use this command to create a filter to select messages to be sent to the buffered

log. Selection can be based on the priority/ severity of the message, the program

that generated the message, the logging facility used, a sub-string within the

message or a combination of some or all of these.

The no variant of this command removes the corresponding filter, so that the

specified messages are no longer sent to the buffered log.

Syntax log buffered [level <level>] [program <program-name>] [facility

<facility>] [msgtext <text-string>]

no log buffered [level <level>] [program <program-name>]

[facility <facility>] [msgtext <text-string>]

Parameter Description

level Filter messages to the buffered log by severity level.

<level>The minimum severity of message to send to the buffered log. The level can be specified as

one of the following numbers or level names, where 0 is the highest severity and 7 is the

lowest severity:

0|emergencies System is unusable

1|alerts Action must be taken immediately

2|critical Critical conditions

3|errors Error conditions

4|warnings Warning conditions

5|notices Normal, but significant, conditions

6|informational Informational messages

7|debugging Debug-level messages

program Filter messages to the buffered log by program. Include messages from a specified program in

the buffered log.

<program-

name>

The name of a program to log messages from, either one of the following predefined program

names (not case-sensitive), or another program name (case-sensitive) that you find in the log

output:

rsvp Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)

dot1x IEEE 802.1X Port-Based Access Control

lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

stp Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

rstp Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

mstp Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

imi Integrated Management Interface (IMI)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 277

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG BUFFERED (FILTER)

Default By default the buffered log has a filter to select messages whose severity level is

“notices (5)” or higher. This filter may be removed using the no variant of this

command.

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To add a filter to send all messages generated by EPSR that have a severity of

notices or higher to the buffered log, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log buffered level notices program epsr

To add a filter to send all messages containing the text “Bridging initialization” to

the buffered log, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log buffered msgtext Bridging initialization

imish Integrated Management Interface Shell (IMISH)

epsr Ethernet Protection Switched Rings (EPSR)

rmon Remote Monitoring

loopprot Loop Protection

dhcpsn DHCP snooping (DHCPSN)

facility Filter messages to the buffered log by syslog facility.

<facility>Specify one of the following syslog facilities to include messages from in the buffered log:

kern Kernel messages

user Random user-level messages

mail Mail system

daemon System daemons

auth Security/authorization messages

syslog Messages generated internally by syslogd

lpr Line printer subsystem

news Network news subsystem

uucp UUCP subsystem

cron Clock daemon

authpriv Security/authorization messages (private)

ftp FTP daemon

msgtext Select messages containing a certain text string.

<text-

string>

A text string to match (maximum 128 characters). This is case sensitive, and must be the last

text on the command line.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 278

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG BUFFERED (FILTER)

To remove a filter that sends all messages generated by EPSR that have a severity

of notices or higher to the buffered log, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no log buffered level notices program epsr

To remove a filter that sends all messages containing the text “Bridging

initialization” to the buffered log, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no log buffered msgtext Bridging initialization

Commands

clear log buffered

default log buffered

log buffered

log buffered size

log buffered exclude

show log

show log config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 279

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG BUFFERED EXCLUDE

log buffered exclude

Overview Use this command to exclude specified log messages from the buffered log. You

can exclude messages on the basis of:

• the priority/severity of the message

• the program that generated the message

• the logging facility used

• a sub-string within the message, or

• a combination of some or all of these.

Use the no variant of this command to stop excluding the specified messages.

Syntax log buffered exclude [level <level>] [program <program-name>]

[facility <facility>] [msgtext <text-string>]

no log buffered exclude [level <level>] [program

<program-name>] [facility <facility>] [msgtext <text-string>]

Parameter Description

level Exclude messages of the specified severity level.

<level>The severity level to exclude. The level can be specified as one of the following numbers or

level names, where 0 is the highest severity and 7 is the lowest severity:

0|emergencies System is unusable

1|alerts Action must be taken immediately

2|critical Critical conditions

3|errors Error conditions

4|warnings Warning conditions

5|notices Normal, but significant, conditions

6|informational Informational messages

7|debugging Debug-level messages

program Exclude messages from a specified program.

<program-

name>

The name of a program. Either one of the following predefined program names (not

case-sensitive), or another program name (case-sensitive) that you find in the log output.

rsvp Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)

dot1x IEEE 802.1X Port-Based Access Control

lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

stp Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

rstp Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

mstp Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 280

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG BUFFERED EXCLUDE

Default No log messages are excluded

Mode Global configuration

Example To remove messages that contain the string “example of irrelevant message”, use

the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log buffered exclude msgtext example of

irrelevant message

Commands

clear log buffered

default log buffered

imi Integrated Management Interface (IMI)

imish Integrated Management Interface Shell (IMISH)

epsr Ethernet Protection Switched Rings (EPSR)

rmon Remote Monitoring

loopprot Loop Protection

dhcpsn DHCP snooping (DHCPSN)

facility Exclude messages from a syslog facility.

<facility>Specify one of the following syslog facilities to exclude messages from:

kern Kernel messages

user Random user-level messages

mail Mail system

daemon System daemons

auth Security/authorization messages

syslog Messages generated internally by syslogd

lpr Line printer subsystem

news Network news subsystem

uucp UUCP subsystem

cron Clock daemon

authpriv Security/authorization messages (private)

ftp FTP daemon

msgtext Exclude messages containing a certain text string.

<text-

string>

A text string to match (maximum 128 characters). This is case sensitive, and must be the last

text on the command line.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 281

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG BUFFERED EXCLUDE

log buffered

log buffered (filter)

log buffered size

show log

show log config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 282

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG BUFFERED SIZE

log buffered size

Overview This command configures the amount of memory that the buffered log is

permitted to use. Once this memory allocation has been filled old messages will be

deleted to make room for new messages.

Syntax log buffered size <50-250>

Mode Global Configuration

Example To allow the buffered log to use up to 100 kB of RAM use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log buffered size 100

Commands

clear log buffered

default log buffered

log buffered

log buffered (filter)

log buffered exclude

show log

show log config

Parameter Description

<50-250>Size of the RAM log in kilobytes

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 283

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG CONSOLE

log console

Overview This command configures the device to send log messages to consoles. The

console log is configured by default to send messages to the device’s main console

port.

Use the no variant of this command to configure the device not to send log

messages to consoles.

Syntax log console

no log console

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To configure the device to send log messages use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log console

To configure the device not to send log messages in all consoles use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no log console

Commands

default log console

log console (filter)

log console exclude

show log config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 284

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG CONSOLE (FILTER)

log console (filter)

Overview This command creates a filter to select messages to be sent to all consoles when

the log console command is given. Selection can be based on the priority/severity

of the message, the program that generated the message, the logging facility

used, a sub-string within the message or a combination of some or all of these.

Syntax log console [level <level>] [program <program-name>] [facility

<facility>] [msgtext <text-string>]

no log console [level <level>] [program <program-name>]

[facility <facility>] [msgtext <text-string>]

Parameter Description

level Filter messages by severity level.

<level>The minimum severity of message to send. The level can be specified as one of the following

numbers or level names, where 0 is the highest severity and 7 is the lowest severity:

0|emergencies System is unusable

1|alerts Action must be taken immediately

2|critical Critical conditions

3|errors Error conditions

4|warnings Warning conditions

5|notices Normal, but significant, conditions

6|informational Informational messages

7|debugging Debug-level messages

program Filter messages by program. Include messages from a specified program.

<program-

name>

The name of a program to log messages from, either one of the following predefined program

names (not case-sensitive), or another program name (case-sensitive) that you find in the log

output:

rsvp Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)

dot1x IEEE 802.1X Port-Based Access Control

lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

stp Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

rstp Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

mstp Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

imi Integrated Management Interface (IMI)

imish Integrated Management Interface Shell (IMISH)

epsr Ethernet Protection Switched Rings (EPSR)

rmon Remote Monitoring

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 285

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG CONSOLE (FILTER)

Default By default the console log has a filter to select messages whose severity level is

critical or higher. This filter may be removed using the no variant of this

command. This filter may be removed and replaced by filters that are more

selective.

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To create a filter to send all messages containing the text “Bridging initialization”

to console instances where the log console command has been entered, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log console msgtext "Bridging initialization"

To remove a filter that sends all messages generated by EPSR that have a severity

of notices or higher to consoles, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no log console level notices program epsr

loopprot Loop Protection

dhcpsn DHCP snooping (DHCPSN)

facility Filter messages by syslog facility.

<facility>Specify one of the following syslog facilities to include messages from:

kern Kernel messages

user Random user-level messages

mail Mail system

daemon System daemons

auth Security/authorization messages

syslog Messages generated internally by syslogd

lpr Line printer subsystem

news Network news subsystem

uucp UUCP subsystem

cron Clock daemon

authpriv Security/authorization messages (private)

ftp FTP daemon

msgtext Select messages containing a certain text string.

<text-

string>

A text string to match (maximum 128 characters). This is case sensitive, and must be the last

text on the command line.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 286

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG CONSOLE (FILTER)

To remove a default filter that includes sending critical, alert and emergency

level messages to the console, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no log console level critical

Commands

default log console

log console

log console exclude

show log config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 287

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG CONSOLE EXCLUDE

log console exclude

Overview Use this command to prevent specified log messages from being sent to the

console, when console logging is turned on. You can exclude messages on the

basis of:

• the priority/severity of the message

• the program that generated the message

• the logging facility used

• a sub-string within the message, or

• a combination of some or all of these.

Use the no variant of this command to stop excluding the specified messages.

Syntax log console exclude [level <level>] [program <program-name>]

[facility <facility>] [msgtext <text-string>]

no log console exclude [level <level>] [program <program-name>]

[facility <facility>] [msgtext <text-string>]

Parameter Description

level Exclude messages of the specified severity level.

<level>The severity level to exclude. The level can be specified as one of the following numbers or

level names, where 0 is the highest severity and 7 is the lowest severity:

0|emergencies System is unusable

1|alerts Action must be taken immediately

2|critical Critical conditions

3|errors Error conditions

4|warnings Warning conditions

5|notices Normal, but significant, conditions

6|informational Informational messages

7|debugging Debug-level messages

program Exclude messages from a specified program.

<program-

name>

The name of a program. Either one of the following predefined program names (not

case-sensitive), or another program name (case-sensitive) that you find in the log output.

rsvp Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)

dot1x IEEE 802.1X Port-Based Access Control

lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

stp Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

rstp Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 288

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG CONSOLE EXCLUDE

Default No log messages are excluded

Mode Global configuration

Example To remove messages that contain the string “example of irrelevant message”, use

the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log console exclude msgtext example of

irrelevant message

Commands

default log console

log console

mstp Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

imi Integrated Management Interface (IMI)

imish Integrated Management Interface Shell (IMISH)

epsr Ethernet Protection Switched Rings (EPSR)

rmon Remote Monitoring

loopprot Loop Protection

dhcpsn DHCP snooping (DHCPSN)

facility Exclude messages from a syslog facility.

<facility>Specify one of the following syslog facilities to exclude messages from:

kern Kernel messages

user Random user-level messages

mail Mail system

daemon System daemons

auth Security/authorization messages

syslog Messages generated internally by syslogd

lpr Line printer subsystem

news Network news subsystem

uucp UUCP subsystem

cron Clock daemon

authpriv Security/authorization messages (private)

ftp FTP daemon

msgtext Exclude messages containing a certain text string.

<text-

string>

A text string to match (maximum 128 characters). This is case sensitive, and must be the last

text on the command line.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 289

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG CONSOLE EXCLUDE

log console (filter)

show log config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 290

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG EMAIL

log email

Overview This command configures the device to send log messages to an email address.

The email address is specified in this command.

Syntax log email <email-address>

Default By default no filters are defined for email log targets. Filters must be defined before

messages will be sent.

Mode Global Configuration

Example To have log messages emailed to the email address

admin@alliedtelesis.com use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log email admin@alliedtelesis.com

Commands

default log email

log email (filter)

log email exclude

log email time

show log config

Parameter Description

<email-address> The email address to send log messages to

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 291

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG EMAIL (FILTER)

log email (filter)

Overview This command creates a filter to select messages to be sent to an email address.

Selection can be based on the priority/ severity of the message, the program that

generated the message, the logging facility used, a sub-string within the message

or a combination of some or all of these.

The no variant of this command configures the device to no longer send log

messages to a specified email address. All configuration relating to this log target

will be removed.

Syntax log email <email-address> [level <level>] [program

<program-name>] [facility <facility>] [msgtext <text-string>]

no log email <email-address> [level <level>] [program

<program-name>] [facility <facility>] [msgtext <text-string>]

Parameter Description

<email-

address>

The email address to send logging messages to

level Filter messages by severity level.

<level>The minimum severity of message to send. The level can be specified as one of the following

numbers or level names, where 0 is the highest severity and 7 is the lowest severity:

0|emergencies System is unusable

1|alerts Action must be taken immediately

2|critical Critical conditions

3|errors Error conditions

4|warnings Warning conditions

5|notices Normal, but significant, conditions

6|informational Informational messages

7|debugging Debug-level messages

program Filter messages by program. Include messages from a specified program.

<program-

name>

The name of a program to log messages from, either one of the following predefined program

names (not case-sensitive), or another program name (case-sensitive) that you find in the log

output:

rsvp Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)

dot1x IEEE 802.1X Port-Based Access Control

lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

stp Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

rstp Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

mstp Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 292

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG EMAIL (FILTER)

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To create a filter to send all messages generated by EPSR that have a severity of

notices or higher to the email address admin@homebase.com, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log email admin@homebase.com level notices

program epsr

To create a filter to send all messages containing the text “Bridging initialization”,

to the email address admin@homebase.com, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log email admin@homebase.com msgtext "Bridging

initialization"

imi Integrated Management Interface (IMI)

imish Integrated Management Interface Shell (IMISH)

epsr Ethernet Protection Switched Rings (EPSR)

rmon Remote Monitoring

loopprot Loop Protection

dhcpsn DHCP snooping (DHCPSN)

facility Filter messages by syslog facility.

<facility>Specify one of the following syslog facilities to include messages from:

kern Kernel messages

user Random user-level messages

mail Mail system

daemon System daemons

auth Security/authorization messages

syslog Messages generated internally by syslogd

lpr Line printer subsystem

news Network news subsystem

uucp UUCP subsystem

cron Clock daemon

authpriv Security/authorization messages (private)

ftp FTP daemon

msgtext Select messages containing a certain text string.

<text-

string>

A text string to match (maximum 128 characters). This is case sensitive, and must be the last

text on the command line.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 293

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG EMAIL (FILTER)

To create a filter to send messages with a severity level of informational and

above to the email address admin@alliedtelesis.com, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log email admin@alliedtelesis.com level

informational

To stop the device emailing log messages emailed to the email address

admin@alliedtelesis.com, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no log email admin@homebase.com

To remove a filter that sends all messages generated by EPSR that have a severity

of notices or higher to the email address admin@homebase.com, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no log email admin@homebase.com level notices

program epsr

To remove a filter that sends messages with a severity level of informational and

above to the email address admin@alliedtelesis.com, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no log email admin@alliedtelesis.com level

informational

Commands

default log email

log email

log email exclude

log email time

show log config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 294

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG EMAIL EXCLUDE

log email exclude

Overview Use this command to prevent specified log messages from being emailed, when

the device is configured to send log messages to an email address. You can

exclude messages on the basis of:

• the priority/severity of the message

• the program that generated the message

• the logging facility used

• a sub-string within the message, or

• a combination of some or all of these.

Use the no variant of this command to stop excluding the specified messages.

Syntax log email exclude [level <level>] [program <program-name>]

[facility <facility>] [msgtext <text-string>]

no log email exclude [level <level>] [program <program-name>]

[facility <facility>] [msgtext <text-string>]

Parameter Description

level Exclude messages of the specified severity level.

<level>The severity level to exclude. The level can be specified as one of the following numbers or

level names, where 0 is the highest severity and 7 is the lowest severity:

0|emergencies System is unusable

1|alerts Action must be taken immediately

2|critical Critical conditions

3|errors Error conditions

4|warnings Warning conditions

5|notices Normal, but significant, conditions

6|informational Informational messages

7|debugging Debug-level messages

program Exclude messages from a specified program.

<program-

name>

The name of a program. Either one of the following predefined program names (not

case-sensitive), or another program name (case-sensitive) that you find in the log output.

rsvp Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)

dot1x IEEE 802.1X Port-Based Access Control

lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

stp Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

rstp Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 295

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG EMAIL EXCLUDE

Default No log messages are excluded

Mode Global configuration

Example To remove messages that contain the string “example of irrelevant message”, use

the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log email exclude msgtext example of irrelevant

message

Commands

default log email

log email

mstp Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

imi Integrated Management Interface (IMI)

imish Integrated Management Interface Shell (IMISH)

epsr Ethernet Protection Switched Rings (EPSR)

rmon Remote Monitoring

loopprot Loop Protection

dhcpsn DHCP snooping (DHCPSN)

facility Exclude messages from a syslog facility.

<facility>Specify one of the following syslog facilities to exclude messages from:

kern Kernel messages

user Random user-level messages

mail Mail system

daemon System daemons

auth Security/authorization messages

syslog Messages generated internally by syslogd

lpr Line printer subsystem

news Network news subsystem

uucp UUCP subsystem

cron Clock daemon

authpriv Security/authorization messages (private)

ftp FTP daemon

msgtext Exclude messages containing a certain text string.

<text-

string>

A text string to match (maximum 128 characters). This is case sensitive, and must be the last

text on the command line.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 296

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG EMAIL EXCLUDE

log email (filter)

log email time

show log config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 297

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG EMAIL TIME

log email time

Overview This command configures the time used in messages sent to an email address. If

the syslog server is in a different time zone to your device then the time offset can

be configured using either the utc-offset parameter option keyword or the

local-offset parameter option keyword, where utc-offset is the time difference

from UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated) and local-offset is the difference from

local time.

Syntax log email <email-address> time {local|local-offset|utc-offset

{plus|minus}<0-24>}

Default The default is local time.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage Use the local option if the email recipient is in the same time zone as this device.

Messages will display the time as on the local device when the message was

generated.

Use the offset option if the email recipient is in a different time zone to this device.

Specify the time offset of the email recipient in hours. Messages will display the

time they were generated on this device but converted to the time zone of the

email recipient.

Parameter Description

<email-address> The email address to send log messages to

time Specify the time difference between the email recipient and the

device you are configuring.

local The device is in the same time zone as the email recipient

local-offset The device is in a different time zone to the email recipient. Use

the plus or minus keywords and specify the difference (offset)

from local time of the device to the email recipient in hours.

utc-offset The device is in a different time zone to the email recipient. Use

the plus or minus keywords and specify the difference (offset)

from UTC time of the device to the email recipient in hours.

plus Negative offset (difference) from the device to the email

recipient.

minus Positive offset (difference) from the device to the email

recipient.

<0-24> World Time zone offset in hours

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 298

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG EMAIL TIME

Examples To send messages to the email address test@home.com in the same time zone

as the device’s local time zone, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log email admin@base.com time local 0

To send messages to the email address admin@base.com with the time

information converted to the time zone of the email recipient, which is 3 hours

ahead of the device’s local time zone, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log email admin@base.com time local-offset plus

To send messages to the email address user@remote.com with the time

information converted to the time zone of the email recipient, which is 3 hours

behind the device’s UTC time zone, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log email user@remote.com time utc-offset minus

Commands

default log email

log email

log email (filter)

log email exclude

show log config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 299

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG FACILITY

log facility

Overview Use this command to assign a facility to all log messages generated on this device.

This facility overrides any facility that is automatically generated as part of the log

message.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the configured facility.

Syntax log facility {kern|user|mail|daemon|auth|syslog|lpr|news|uucp|

local6|local7}

no log facility

Default None. The outgoing syslog facility depends on the log message.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage Specifying different facilities for log messages generated on different devices can

allow messages from multiple devices sent to a common server to be

distinguished from each other.

Ordinarily, the facility values generated in log messages have meanings as shown

in the following table. Using this command will override these meanings, and the

new meanings will depend on the use you put them to.

Table 9-1: Ordinary meanings of the facility parameter in log messages

Facility Description

kern Kernel messages

user User-level messages

mail Mail system

daemon System daemons

auth Security/authorization messages

syslog Messages generated internally by the syslog daemon

lpr Line printer subsystem

news Network news subsystem

uucp UNIX-to-UNIX Copy Program subsystem

cron Clock daemon

authpriv Security/authorization (private) messages

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 300

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG FACILITY

Example To specify a facility of local6, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log facility local6

Commands

show log config

ftp FTP daemon

local<0..7>The facility labels above have specific meanings, while the

local facility labels are intended to be put to local use. In

AlliedWare Plus, some of these local facility labels are used

in log messages. In particular, local5 is assigned to log

messages generated by UTM Firewall security features.

Table 9-1: Ordinary meanings of the facility parameter in log messages (cont.)

Facility Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 301

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG HOST

log host

Overview This command configures the device to send log messages to a remote syslog

server via UDP port 514. The IP address of the remote server must be specified. By

default no filters are defined for remote syslog servers. Filters must be defined

before messages will be sent.

Use the no variant of this command to stop sending log messages to the remote

syslog server.

Syntax log host <ipv4-addr>|<ipv6-addr> [secure]

no log host <ipv4-addr>|<ipv6-addr>

Mode Global Configuration

Usage Use the optional secure parameter to configure a secure syslog host. For secure

hosts, syslog over TLS is used to encrypt the logs. The certificate received from the

remote log server must have an issuer chain that terminates with the root CA

certificate for any of the trustpoints that are associated with the application.

The remote server may also request that a certificate is transmitted from the local

device. In this situation the first trustpoint added to the syslog application will be

transmitted to the remote server.

Examples To configure the device to send log messages to a remote secure syslog server with

IP address 10.32.16.99 use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log host 10.32.16.99 secure

To stop the device from sending log messages to the remote syslog server with IP

address 10.32.16.99 use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no log host 10.32.16.99

Commands

default log host

log host (filter)

log host exclude

log host source

Parameter Description

<ipv4-addr>Specify the source IPv4 address, in dotted decimal notation (A.B.C.D).

<ipv6-addr> Specify the source IPv6 address, in X:X::X:X notation.

secure Optional value to create a secure log destination

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 302

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG HOST

log host time

log trustpoint

show log config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 303

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG HOST (FILTER)

log host (filter)

Overview This command creates a filter to select messages to be sent to a remote syslog

server. Selection can be based on the priority/severity of the message, the program

that generated the message, the logging facility used, a substring within the

message or a combination of some or all of these.

The no variant of this command configures the device to no longer send log

messages to a remote syslog server. The IP address of the syslog server must be

specified. All configuration relating to this log target will be removed.

Syntax log host <ip-addr> [level <level>] [program <program-name>]

[facility <facility>] [msgtext <text-string>]

no log host <ip-addr> [level <level>] [program <program-name>]

[facility <facility>] [msgtext <text-string>]

Parameter Description

<ip-addr> The IP address of a remote syslog server.

level Filter messages by severity level.

<level>The minimum severity of message to send. The level can be specified as one of the following

numbers or level names, where 0 is the highest severity and 7 is the lowest severity:

0|emergencies System is unusable

1|alerts Action must be taken immediately

2|critical Critical conditions

3|errors Error conditions

4|warnings Warning conditions

5|notices Normal, but significant, conditions

6|informational Informational messages

7|debugging Debug-level messages

program Filter messages by program. Include messages from a specified program.

<program-

name>

The name of a program to log messages from, either one of the following predefined program

names (not case-sensitive), or another program name (case-sensitive) that you find in the log

output:

rsvp Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)

dot1x IEEE 802.1X Port-Based Access Control

lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

stp Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

rstp Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

mstp Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

imi Integrated Management Interface (IMI)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 304

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG HOST (FILTER)

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To create a filter to send all messages generated by EPSR that have a severity of

notices or higher to a remote syslog server with IP address 10.32.16.21, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log host 10.32.16.21 level notices program epsr

To create a filter to send all messages containing the text “Bridging initialization”,

to a remote syslog server with IP address 10.32.16.21, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log host 10.32.16.21 msgtext "Bridging

initialization"

imish Integrated Management Interface Shell (IMISH)

epsr Ethernet Protection Switched Rings (EPSR)

rmon Remote Monitoring

loopprot Loop Protection

dhcpsn DHCP snooping (DHCPSN)

facility Filter messages by syslog facility.

<facility>Specify one of the following syslog facilities to include messages from:

kern Kernel messages

user Random user-level messages

mail Mail system

daemon System daemons

auth Security/authorization messages

syslog Messages generated internally by syslogd

lpr Line printer subsystem

news Network news subsystem

uucp UUCP subsystem

cron Clock daemon

authpriv Security/authorization messages (private)

ftp FTP daemon

msgtext Select messages containing a certain text string.

<text-

string>

A text string to match (maximum 128 characters). This is case sensitive, and must be the last

text on the command line.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 305

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG HOST (FILTER)

To create a filter to send messages with a severity level of informational and

above to the syslog server with IP address 10.32.16.21, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log host 10.32.16.21 level informational

To remove a filter that sends all messages generated by EPSR that have a severity

of notices or higher to a remote syslog server with IP address 10.32.16.21, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no log host 10.32.16.21 level notices program

epsr

To remove a filter that sends all messages containing the text “Bridging

initialization”, to a remote syslog server with IP address 10.32.16.21, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no log host 10.32.16.21 msgtext "Bridging

initialization"

To remove a filter that sends messages with a severity level of informational and

above to the syslog server with IP address 10.32.16.21, use the following

commands:

awplusawpluls# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no log host 10.32.16.21 level informational

Commands

default log host

log host

log host exclude

log host source

log host time

show log config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 306

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG HOST EXCLUDE

log host exclude

Overview Use this command to prevent specified log messages from being sent to the

remote syslog server, when log host is enabled. You can exclude messages on the

basis of:

• the priority/severity of the message

• the program that generated the message

• the logging facility used

• a sub-string within the message, or

• a combination of some or all of these.

Use the no variant of this command to stop excluding the specified messages.

Syntax log host exclude [level <level>] [program <program-name>]

[facility <facility>] [msgtext <text-string>]

no log host exclude [level <level>] [program <program-name>]

[facility <facility>] [msgtext <text-string>]

Parameter Description

level Exclude messages of the specified severity level.

<level>The severity level to exclude. The level can be specified as one of the following numbers or

level names, where 0 is the highest severity and 7 is the lowest severity:

0|emergencies System is unusable

1|alerts Action must be taken immediately

2|critical Critical conditions

3|errors Error conditions

4|warnings Warning conditions

5|notices Normal, but significant, conditions

6|informational Informational messages

7|debugging Debug-level messages

program Exclude messages from a specified program.

<program-

name>

The name of a program. Either one of the following predefined program names (not

case-sensitive), or another program name (case-sensitive) that you find in the log output.

rsvp Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)

dot1x IEEE 802.1X Port-Based Access Control

lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

stp Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

rstp Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 307

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG HOST EXCLUDE

Default No log messages are excluded

Mode Global configuration

Example To remove messages that contain the string “example of irrelevant message”, use

the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log host exclude msgtext example of irrelevant

message

Commands

default log host

log host

mstp Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

imi Integrated Management Interface (IMI)

imish Integrated Management Interface Shell (IMISH)

epsr Ethernet Protection Switched Rings (EPSR)

rmon Remote Monitoring

loopprot Loop Protection

dhcpsn DHCP snooping (DHCPSN)

facility Exclude messages from a syslog facility.

<facility>Specify one of the following syslog facilities to exclude messages from:

kern Kernel messages

user Random user-level messages

mail Mail system

daemon System daemons

auth Security/authorization messages

syslog Messages generated internally by syslogd

lpr Line printer subsystem

news Network news subsystem

uucp UUCP subsystem

cron Clock daemon

authpriv Security/authorization messages (private)

ftp FTP daemon

msgtext Exclude messages containing a certain text string.

<text-

string>

A text string to match (maximum 128 characters). This is case sensitive, and must be the last

text on the command line.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 308

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG HOST EXCLUDE

log host (filter)

log host source

log host time

show log config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 309

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG HOST SOURCE

log host source

Overview Use this command to specify a source interface or IP address for the device to send

syslog messages from. You can specify any one of an interface name, an IPv4

address or an IPv6 address.

This is useful if the device can reach the syslog server via multiple interfaces or

addresses and you want to control which interface/address the device uses.

Use the no variant of this command to stop specifying a source interface or

address.

Syntax log host source {<interface-name>|<ipv4-addr>|<ipv6-addr>}

no log host source

Default None (no source is configured)

Mode Global Configuration

Example To send syslog messages from 192.168.1.1, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log host source 192.168.1.1

Commands

default log host

log host

log host (filter)

log host exclude

log host time

show log config

Parameter Description

<interface-name> Specify the source interface name. You can enter a VLAN, eth

interface or loopback interface.

<ipv4-add> Specify the source IPv4 address, in dotted decimal notation

(A.B.C.D).

<ipv6-add> Specify the source IPv6 address, in X:X::X:X notation.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 310

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG HOST TIME

log host time

Overview This command configures the time used in messages sent to a remote syslog

server. If the syslog server is in a different time zone to your device then the time

offset can be configured using either the utc-offset parameter option keyword or

the local-offset parameter option keyword, where utc-offset is the time

difference from UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated) and local-offset is the

difference from local time.

Syntax log host <email-address> time {local|local-offset|utc-offset

{plus|minus} <0-24>}

Default The default is local time.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage Use the local option if the remote syslog server is in the same time zone as the

device. Messages will display the time as on the local device when the message

was generated.

Use the offset option if the email recipient is in a different time zone to this device.

Specify the time offset of the remote syslog server in hours. Messages will display

the time they were generated on this device but converted to the time zone of the

remote syslog server.

Examples To send messages to the remote syslog server with the IP address 10.32.16.21

in the same time zone as the device’s local time zone, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log host 10.32.16.21 time local 0

Parameter Description

<email-address> The email address to send log messages to

time Specify the time difference between the email recipient and the

device you are configuring.

local The device is in the same time zone as the email recipient

local-offset The device is in a different time zone to the email recipient. Use

the plus or minus keywords and specify the difference (offset)

from local time of the device to the email recipient in hours.

utc-offset The device is in a different time zone to the email recipient. Use

the plus or minus keywords and specify the difference (offset)

from UTC time of the device to the email recipient in hours.

plus Negative offset (difference) from the device to the syslog server.

minus Positive offset (difference) from the device to the syslog server.

<0-24> World Time zone offset in hours

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 311

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG HOST TIME

To send messages to the remote syslog server with the IP address 10.32.16.12

with the time information converted to the time zone of the remote syslog server,

which is 3 hours ahead of the device’s local time zone, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log host 10.32.16.12 time local-offset plus 3

To send messages to the remote syslog server with the IP address 10.32.16.02

with the time information converted to the time zone of the email recipient, which

is 3 hours behind the device’s UTC time zone, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log host 10.32.16.02 time utc-offset minus 3

Commands

default log host

log host

log host (filter)

log host exclude

log host source

show log config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 312

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG MONITOR (FILTER)

log monitor (filter)

Overview This command creates a filter to select messages to be sent to the terminal when

the terminal monitor command is given. Selection can be based on the

priority/severity of the message, the program that generated the message, the

logging facility used, a sub-string within the message or a combination of some or

all of these.

Syntax log monitor [level <level>] [program <program-name>] [facility

<facility>] [msgtext <text-string>]

no log monitor [level <level>] [program <program-name>]

[facility <facility>] [msgtext <text-string>]

Parameter Description

level Filter messages by severity level.

<level>The minimum severity of message to send. The level can be specified as one of the following

numbers or level names, where 0 is the highest severity and 7 is the lowest severity:

0|emergencies System is unusable

1|alerts Action must be taken immediately

2|critical Critical conditions

3|errors Error conditions

4|warnings Warning conditions

5|notices Normal, but significant, conditions

6|informational Informational messages

7|debugging Debug-level messages

program Filter messages by program. Include messages from a specified program.

<program-

name>

The name of a program to log messages from, either one of the following predefined program

names (not case-sensitive), or another program name (case-sensitive) that you find in the log

output:

rsvp Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)

dot1x IEEE 802.1X Port-Based Access Control

lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

stp Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

rstp Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

mstp Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

imi Integrated Management Interface (IMI)

imish Integrated Management Interface Shell (IMISH)

epsr Ethernet Protection Switched Rings (EPSR)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 313

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG MONITOR (FILTER)

Default By default there is a filter to select all messages. This filter may be removed and

replaced by filters that are more selective.

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To create a filter to send all messages that are generated by authentication and

have a severity of info or higher to terminal instances where the terminal monitor

command has been given, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log monitor level info program auth

To remove a filter that sends all messages generated by EPSR that have a severity

of notices or higher to the terminal, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no log monitor level notices program epsr

rmon Remote Monitoring

loopprot Loop Protection

dhcpsn DHCP snooping (DHCPSN)

facility Filter messages by syslog facility.

<facility>Specify one of the following syslog facilities to include messages from:

kern Kernel messages

user Random user-level messages

mail Mail system

daemon System daemons

auth Security/authorization messages

syslog Messages generated internally by syslogd

lpr Line printer subsystem

news Network news subsystem

uucp UUCP subsystem

cron Clock daemon

authpriv Security/authorization messages (private)

ftp FTP daemon

msgtext Select messages containing a certain text string.

<text-

string>

A text string to match (maximum 128 characters). This is case sensitive, and must be the last

text on the command line.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 314

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG MONITOR (FILTER)

To remove a default filter that includes sending everything to the terminal, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no log monitor level debugging

Commands

default log monitor

log monitor exclude

show log config

terminal monitor

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 315

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG MONITOR EXCLUDE

log monitor exclude

Overview Use this command to prevent specified log messages from being displayed on a

terminal, when terminal monitor is enabled. You can exclude messages on the

basis of:

• the priority/severity of the message

• the program that generated the message

• the logging facility used

• a sub-string within the message, or

• a combination of some or all of these.

Use the no variant of this command to stop excluding the specified messages.

Syntax log console exclude [level <level>] [program <program-name>]

[facility <facility>] [msgtext <text-string>]

no log console exclude [level <level>] [program <program-name>]

[facility <facility>] [msgtext <text-string>]

Parameter Description

level Exclude messages of the specified severity level.

<level>The severity level to exclude. The level can be specified as one of the following numbers or

level names, where 0 is the highest severity and 7 is the lowest severity:

0|emergencies System is unusable

1|alerts Action must be taken immediately

2|critical Critical conditions

3|errors Error conditions

4|warnings Warning conditions

5|notices Normal, but significant, conditions

6|informational Informational messages

7|debugging Debug-level messages

program Exclude messages from a specified program.

<program-

name>

The name of a program. Either one of the following predefined program names (not

case-sensitive), or another program name (case-sensitive) that you find in the log output.

rsvp Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)

dot1x IEEE 802.1X Port-Based Access Control

lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

stp Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

rstp Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 316

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG MONITOR EXCLUDE

Default No log messages are excluded

Mode Global configuration

Example To remove messages that contain the string “example of irrelevant message”, use

the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log monitor exclude msgtext example of

irrelevant message

Commands

default log monitor

log monitor (filter)

mstp Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

imi Integrated Management Interface (IMI)

imish Integrated Management Interface Shell (IMISH)

epsr Ethernet Protection Switched Rings (EPSR)

rmon Remote Monitoring

loopprot Loop Protection

dhcpsn DHCP snooping (DHCPSN)

facility Exclude messages from a syslog facility.

<facility>Specify one of the following syslog facilities to exclude messages from:

kern Kernel messages

user Random user-level messages

mail Mail system

daemon System daemons

auth Security/authorization messages

syslog Messages generated internally by syslogd

lpr Line printer subsystem

news Network news subsystem

uucp UUCP subsystem

cron Clock daemon

authpriv Security/authorization messages (private)

ftp FTP daemon

msgtext Exclude messages containing a certain text string.

<text-

string>

A text string to match (maximum 128 characters). This is case sensitive, and must be the last

text on the command line.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 317

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG MONITOR EXCLUDE

show log config

terminal monitor

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 318

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG PERMANENT

log permanent

Overview This command configures the device to send permanent log messages to

non-volatile storage (NVS) on the device. The content of the permanent log is

retained over a reboot. Once the permanent log reaches its configured maximum

allowable size old messages will be deleted to make way for new messages.

The no variant of this command configures the device not to send any messages

to the permanent log. Log messages will not be retained over a restart.

Syntax log permanent

no log permanent

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To enable permanent logging use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log permanent

To disable permanent logging use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no log permanent

Commands

clear log permanent

default log permanent

log permanent (filter)

log permanent exclude

log permanent size

show log config

show log permanent

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 319

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG PERMANENT (FILTER)

log permanent (filter)

Overview This command creates a filter to select messages to be sent to the permanent log.

Selection can be based on the priority/ severity of the message, the program that

generated the message, the logging facility used, a sub-string within the message

or a combination of some or all of these.

The no variant of this command removes the corresponding filter, so that the

specified messages are no longer sent to the permanent log.

Syntax log permanent [level <level>] [program <program-name>]

[facility <facility>] [msgtext <text-string>]

no log permanent [level <level>] [program <program-name>]

[facility <facility>] [msgtext <text-string>]

Parameter Description

level Filter messages sent to the permanent log by severity level.

<level>The minimum severity of message to send. The level can be specified as one of the following

numbers or level names, where 0 is the highest severity and 7 is the lowest severity:

0|emergencies System is unusable

1|alerts Action must be taken immediately

2|critical Critical conditions

3|errors Error conditions

4|warnings Warning conditions

5|notices Normal, but significant, conditions

6|informational Informational messages

7|debugging Debug-level messages

program Filter messages by program. Include messages from a specified program.

<program-

name>

The name of a program to log messages from, either one of the following predefined program

names (not case-sensitive), or another program name (case-sensitive) that you find in the log

output:

rsvp Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)

dot1x IEEE 802.1X Port-Based Access Control

lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

stp Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

rstp Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

mstp Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

imi Integrated Management Interface (IMI)

imish Integrated Management Interface Shell (IMISH)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 320

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG PERMANENT (FILTER)

Default By default the buffered log has a filter to select messages whose severity level is

notices (5) or higher. This filter may be removed using the no variant of this

command.

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To create a filter to send all messages generated by EPSR that have a severity of

notices or higher to the permanent log use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log permanent level notices program epsr

To create a filter to send all messages containing the text “Bridging

initialization”, to the permanent log use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log permanent msgtext Bridging initialization

epsr Ethernet Protection Switched Rings (EPSR)

rmon Remote Monitoring

loopprot Loop Protection

dhcpsn DHCP snooping (DHCPSN)

facility Filter messages by syslog facility.

<facility>Specify one of the following syslog facilities to include messages from:

kern Kernel messages

user Random user-level messages

mail Mail system

daemon System daemons

auth Security/authorization messages

syslog Messages generated internally by syslogd

lpr Line printer subsystem

news Network news subsystem

uucp UUCP subsystem

cron Clock daemon

authpriv Security/authorization messages (private)

ftp FTP daemon

msgtext Select messages containing a certain text string.

<text-

string>

A text string to match (maximum 128 characters). This is case sensitive, and must be the last

text on the command line.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 321

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG PERMANENT (FILTER)

Commands

clear log permanent

default log permanent

log permanent

log permanent exclude

log permanent size

show log config

show log permanent

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 322

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG PERMANENT EXCLUDE

log permanent exclude

Overview Use this command to prevent specified log messages from being sent to the

permanent log. You can exclude messages on the basis of:

• the priority/severity of the message

• the program that generated the message

• the logging facility used

• a sub-string within the message, or

• a combination of some or all of these.

Use the no variant of this command to stop excluding the specified messages.

Syntax log permanent exclude [level <level>] [program <program-name>]

[facility <facility>] [msgtext <text-string>]

no log permanent exclude [level <level>] [program

<program-name>] [facility <facility>] [msgtext <text-string>]

Parameter Description

level Exclude messages of the specified severity level.

<level>The severity level to exclude. The level can be specified as one of the following numbers or

level names, where 0 is the highest severity and 7 is the lowest severity:

0|emergencies System is unusable

1|alerts Action must be taken immediately

2|critical Critical conditions

3|errors Error conditions

4|warnings Warning conditions

5|notices Normal, but significant, conditions

6|informational Informational messages

7|debugging Debug-level messages

program Exclude messages from a specified program.

<program-

name>

The name of a program. Either one of the following predefined program names (not

case-sensitive), or another program name (case-sensitive) that you find in the log output.

rsvp Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)

dot1x IEEE 802.1X Port-Based Access Control

lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

stp Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

rstp Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

mstp Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 323

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG PERMANENT EXCLUDE

Default No log messages are excluded

Mode Global configuration

Example To remove messages that contain the string “example of irrelevant message”, use

the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log permanent exclude msgtext example of

irrelevant message

Commands

clear log permanent

default log permanent

log permanent

imi Integrated Management Interface (IMI)

imish Integrated Management Interface Shell (IMISH)

epsr Ethernet Protection Switched Rings (EPSR)

rmon Remote Monitoring

loopprot Loop Protection

dhcpsn DHCP snooping (DHCPSN)

facility Exclude messages from a syslog facility.

<facility>Specify one of the following syslog facilities to exclude messages from:

kern Kernel messages

user Random user-level messages

mail Mail system

daemon System daemons

auth Security/authorization messages

syslog Messages generated internally by syslogd

lpr Line printer subsystem

news Network news subsystem

uucp UUCP subsystem

cron Clock daemon

authpriv Security/authorization messages (private)

ftp FTP daemon

msgtext Exclude messages containing a certain text string.

<text-

string>

A text string to match (maximum 128 characters). This is case sensitive, and must be the last

text on the command line.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 324

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG PERMANENT EXCLUDE

log permanent (filter)

log permanent size

show log config

show log permanent

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 325

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG PERMANENT SIZE

log permanent size

Overview This command configures the amount of memory that the permanent log is

permitted to use. Once this memory allocation has been filled old messages will be

deleted to make room for new messages.

Syntax log permanent size <50-250>

Mode Global Configuration

Example To allow the permanent log to use up to 100 kB of NVS use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log permanent size 100

Commands

clear log permanent

default log permanent

log permanent

log permanent (filter)

log permanent exclude

show log config

show log permanent

Parameter Description

<50-250>Size of the permanent log in kilobytes

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 326

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG-RATE-LIMIT NSM

log-rate-limit nsm

Overview This command limits the number of log messages generated by the device for a

given interval.

Use the no variant of this command to revert to the default number of log

messages generated by the device of up to 200 log messages per second.

Syntax log-rate-limit nsm messages <message-limit> interval

<time-interval>

no log-rate-limit nsm

Default By default, the device will allow 200 log messages to be generated per second.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage Previously, if the device received a continuous stream of IGMP packets with errors,

such as when a packet storm occurs because of a network loop, then the device

generates a lot of log messages using more and more memory, which may

ultimately cause the device to shutdown. This log rate limiting feature constrains

the rate that log messages are generated by the device.

Note that if within the given time interval, the number of log messages exceeds the

limit, then any excess log messages are discarded. At the end of the time interval,

a single log message is generated indicating that log messages were discarded

due to the log rate limit being exceeded.

Thus if the expectation is that there will be a lot of discarded log messages due to

log rate limiting, then it is advisable to set the time interval to no less than 100,

which means that there would only be one log message, indicating log excessive

log messages have been discarded.

Examples To limit the device to generate up to 300 log messages per second, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log-rate-limit nsm messages 300 interval 100

Parameter Description

<message-limit><1-65535>

The number of log messages generated by the device.

<time-interval><0-65535>

The time period for log message generation in 1/100 seconds.

If an interval of 0 is specified then no log message rate limiting

is applied.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 327

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG-RATE-LIMIT NSM

To return the device the default setting, to generate up to 200 log messages per

second, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no log-rate-limit nsm

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 328

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

LOG TRUSTPOINT

log trustpoint

Overview This command adds one or more trustpoints to be used with the syslog

application. Multiple trustpoints may be specified, or the command may be

executed multiple times, to add multiple trustpoints to the application.

The no version of this command removes one or more trustpoints from the list of

trustpoints associated with the application.

Syntax log trustpoint [<trustpoint-list>]

no log trustpoint [<trustpoint-list>]

Default No trustpoints are created by default.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage The device certificate associated with first trustpoint added to the application will

be transmitted to remote servers. The certificate received from the remote server

must have an issuer chain that terminates with the root CA certificate for any of the

trustpoints that are associated with the application.

If no trustpoints are specified in the command, the trustpoint list will be

unchanged.

If no log trustpoint is issued without specifying any trustpoints, then all

trustpoints will be disassociated from the application.

Example You can add multiple trustpoints by executing the command multiple times:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log trustpoint trustpoint_1

awplus(config)# log trustpoint trustpoint_2

Alternatively, add multiple trustpoints with a single command:

awplus(config)# log trustpoint trustpoint_2 trustpoint_3

Disassociate all trustpoints from the syslog application using the command:

awplus(config)# log trustpoint trustpoint_2 trustpoint_3

Commands

log host

show log config

Parameter Description

<trustpoint-list> Specify one or more trustpoints to be added or deleted.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 329

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

SHOW COUNTER LOG

show counter log

Overview This command displays log counter information.

Syntax show counter log

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the log counter information, use the command:

awplus# show counter log

Output Figure 9-1: Example output from the show counter log command

Commands

show log config

Log counters

Total Received ......... 2328

Total Received P0 ......... 0

Total Received P1 ......... 0

Total Received P2 ......... 1

Total Received P3 ......... 9

Total Received P4 ......... 32

Total Received P5 ......... 312

Total Received P6 ......... 1602

Total Received P7 ......... 372

Table 10: Parameters in output of the show counter log command

Parameter Description

Total Received Total number of messages received by the log

Total Received P0 Total number of Priority 0 (Emergency) messages

received

Total Received P1 Total number of Priority 1 (Alert) messages received

Total Received P2 Total number of Priority 2 (Critical) messages received

Total Received P3 Total number of Priority 3 (Error) messages received

Total Received P4 Total number of Priority 4 (Warning) messages received

Total Received P5 Total number of Priority 5 (Notice) messages received

Total Received P6 Total number of Priority 6 (Info) messages received

Total Received P7 Total number of Priority 7 (Debug) messages received

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 330

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

SHOW EXCEPTION LOG

show exception log

Overview This command displays the contents of the exception log.

Syntax show exception log

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the exception log, use the command:

awplus# show exception log

Output Figure 9-2: Example output from the show exception log command on a

switch that has never had an exception occur

awplus#show exception log

<date> <time> <facility>.<severity> <program[<pid>]>: <message>

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

None

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

awplus#

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 331

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

SHOW LOG

show log

Overview This command displays the contents of the buffered log.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare_Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show log [tail [<10-250>]]

Default By default the entire contents of the buffered log is displayed.

Mode User Exec, Privileged Exec and Global Configuration

Usage If the optional tail parameter is specified only the latest 10 messages in the

buffered log are displayed. A numerical value can be specified after the tail

parameter to select how many of the latest messages should be displayed.

The show log command is only available to users at privilege level 7 and above. To

set a user’s privilege level, use the command:

awplus(config)# username <name> privilege <1-15>

Examples To display the contents of the buffered log use the command:

awplus# show log

To display the 10 latest entries in the buffered log use the command:

awplus# show log tail 10

Parameter Description

tail Display only the latest log entries.

<10-250>Specify the number of log entries to display.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 332

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

SHOW LOG

Output Figure 9-3: Example output from the show log command

Commands

clear log buffered

default log buffered

log buffered

log buffered (filter)

log buffered size

log buffered exclude

show log config

awplus#show log



<date> <time> <facility>.<severity> <program[<pid>]>: <message>



--------------------------------------------------------------------

2011 Aug 29 07:55:22 kern.notice awplus kernel: Linux version 2.6.32.12-at1 (mak

er@awpmaker03-dl) (gcc version 4.3.3 (Gentoo 4.3.3-r3 p1.2, pie-10.1.5) ) #1 Wed

Dec 8 11:53:40 NZDT 2010

2011 Aug 29 07:55:22 kern.warning awplus kernel: No pci config register base in

dev tree, using default

2011 Aug 29 07:55:23 kern.notice awplus kernel: Kernel command line: console=tty

S0,9600 releasefile=GS970-5.4.7-0.1.rel ramdisk=14688 bootversion=1.1.0-rc12

loglevel=1 extraflash=00000000

2011 Aug 29 07:55:25 kern.notice awplus kernel: RAMDISK: squashfs filesystem fou

nd at block 0

2011 Aug 29 07:55:28 kern.warning awplus kernel: ipifwd: module license 'Proprie

tary' taints kernel.

...

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 333

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

SHOW LOG CONFIG

show log config

Overview This command displays information about the logging system. This includes the

configuration of the various log destinations, buffered, permanent, syslog servers

(hosts) and email addresses. This also displays the latest status information for

each of these destinations.

Syntax show log config

Mode User Exec, Privileged Exec and Global Configuration

Example To display the logging configuration use the command:

awplus# show log config

Output Figure 9-4: Example output from the show log config command

Facility: default



PKI trustpoints: example_trustpoint



Buffered log:

Status ......... enabled

Maximum size ... 100kb

Filters:

*1 Level ........ notices

Program ...... any

Facility ..... any

Message text . any

2 Level ........ informational

Program ...... auth

Facility ..... daemon

Message text . any

Statistics ..... 1327 messages received, 821 accepted by filter (2016 Oct 11 

10:36:16)

Permanent log:

Status ......... enabled

Maximum size ... 60kb

Filters:

1 Level ........ error

Program ...... any

Facility ..... any

Message text . any

*2 Level ........ warnings

Program ...... dhcp

Facility ..... any

Message text . "pool exhausted"

Statistics ..... 1327 messages received, 12 accepted by filter (2016 Oct 11 

10:36:16)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 334

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

SHOW LOG CONFIG

In the above example the ’*’ next to filter 1 in the buffered log configuration

indicates that this is the default filter. The permanent log has had its default filter

removed, so none of the filters are marked with ‘*’.

NOTE: Terminal log and console log cannot be set at the same time. If console logging

is enabled then the terminal logging is turned off.

Commands

show counter log

show log

show log permanent

Host 10.32.16.21:

Time offset .... +2:00

Offset type .... UTC

Source ......... -

Secured ........ enabled

Filters:

1 Level ........ critical

Program ...... any

Facility ..... any

Message text . any

Statistics ..... 1327 messages received, 1 accepted by filter (2016 Oct 11 

10:36:16)

Email admin@alliedtelesis.com:

Time offset .... +0:00

Offset type .... Local

Filters:

1 Level ........ emergencies

Program ...... any

Facility ..... any

Message text . any

Statistics ..... 1327 messages received, 0 accepted by filter (2016 Oct 11 

10:36:16)

...

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 335

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

SHOW LOG PERMANENT

show log permanent

Overview This command displays the contents of the permanent log.

Syntax show log permanent [tail [<10-250>]]

Default If the optional tail parameter is specified only the latest 10 messages in the

permanent log are displayed. A numerical value can be specified after the tail

parameter to select how many of the latest messages should be displayed.

Mode User Exec, Privileged Exec and Global Configuration

Example To display the permanent log, use the command:

awplus# show log permanent

Output Figure 9-5: Example output from the show log permanent command

Commands

clear log permanent

default log permanent

log permanent

log permanent (filter)

log permanent exclude

log permanent size

show log config

Parameter Description

tail Display only the latest log entries.

<10-250>Specify the number of log entries to display.

awplus#show log permanent



<date> <time> <facility>.<severity> <program[<pid>]>: <message>

------------------------------------------------------------------------

2014 Jun 10 09:30:09 syslog.notice syslog-ng[67]: syslog-ng starting up; 

version=\’2.0rc3\’

2014 Jun 10 09:30:09 auth.warning portmap[106]: user rpc not found, reverting to 

user bin

2014 Jun 10 09:30:09 cron.notice crond[116]: crond 2.3.2 dillon, started, log 

level 8

2014 Jun 10 09:30:14 daemon.err snmpd[181]: /flash/.configs/snmpd.conf: line 20: 

Error: bad SUBTREE object 

2014 Jun 10 09:30:14 user.info HSL[192]: HSL: INFO: Registering port port1.0.1

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 336

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LOGGING COMMANDS

SHOW RUNNING-CONFIG LOG

show running-config log

Overview This command displays the current running configuration of the Log utility.

Syntax show running-config log

Mode Privileged Exec and Global Configuration

Example To display the current configuration of the log utility, use the command:

awplus# show running-config log

Commands

show log

show log config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 337

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Scripting

Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides commands used for command scripts.

Command List •“activate” on page 338

•“echo” on page 339

•“wait” on page 340

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 338

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SCRIPTING COMMANDS

ACTIVATE

activate

Overview This command activates a script file.

Syntax activate [background] <script>

Mode Privileged Exec

Usage When a script is activated, the privilege level is set to 1 enabling User Exec

commands to run in the script. If you need to run Privileged Exec commands in

your script you need to add an enable (Privileged Exec mode) command to the

start of your script. If you need to run Global Configuration commands in your

script you need to add a configure terminal command after the enable command

at the start of your script.

The activate command executes the script in a new shell. A terminal length shell

command, such as terminal length 0 may also be required to disable a delay that

would pause the display.

A script must be a text file with a filename extension of either . sh or . scp only for

the AlliedWare Plus™ CLI to activate the script file. The . sh filename extension

indicates the file is an ASH script, and the . scp filename extension indicates the file

is an AlliedWare Plus™ script.

Examples To activate a command script to run as a background process, use the command:

awplus# activate background test.scp

Commands

configure terminal

echo

enable (Privileged Exec mode)

wait

Parameter Description

background Activate a script to run in the background. A process that is running in

the background will operate as a separate task, and will not interrupt

foreground processing. Generally, we recommend running short,

interactive scripts in the foreground and longer scripts in the

background. The default is to run the script in the foreground.

consisting of commands documented in this software reference.

Note that you must use either a . scp or a . sh filename extension for a

valid script text file, as described below in the usage section for this

command.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 339

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SCRIPTING COMMANDS

ECHO

echo

Overview This command echoes a string to the terminal, followed by a blank line.

Syntax echo <line>

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Usage This command may be useful in CLI scripts, to make the script print user-visible

comments.

Example To echo the string Hello World to the console, use the command:

awplus# echo Hello World

Output

Commands

activate

wait

Parameter Description

<line>The string to echo

Hello World

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 340

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SCRIPTING COMMANDS

WAIT

wait

Overview This command pauses execution of the active script for the specified period of

time.

Syntax wait <delay>

Default No wait delay is specified by default to pause script execution.

Mode Privileged Exec (when executed from a script not directly from the command line)

Usage Use this command to pause script execution in an .scp (AlliedWare Plus™ script) or

an .sh (ASH script) file executed by the activate command. The script must contain

an enable command, because the wait command is only executed in the

Privileged Exec mode.

Example See an .scp script file extract below that will show port counters for interface

port1.0.1 over a 10 second interval:

Commands

activate

echo

enable (Privileged Exec mode)

Parameter Description

<delay><1-65335> Specify the time delay in seconds

enable



show interface port1.0.1



wait 10



show interface port1.0.1

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 341

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Interface

Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference of commands used to configure

and display interfaces.

Command List •“description (interface)” on page 342

•“interface (to configure)” on page 343

•“mru” on page 345

•“mtu” on page 347

•“show interface” on page 349

•“show interface brief” on page 352

•“show interface memory” on page 353

•“show interface status” on page 355

•“shutdown” on page 357

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 342

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

INTERFACE COMMANDS

DESCRIPTION (INTERFACE)

description (interface)

Overview Use this command to add a description to a specific port or interface.

Syntax description <description>

Mode Interface Configuration

Example The following example uses this command to describe the device that a switch

port is connected to.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# description Boardroom PC

Parameter Description

<description>Text describing the specific interface.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 343

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

INTERFACE COMMANDS

INTERFACE (TO CONFIGURE)

interface (to configure)

Overview Use this command to select one or more interfaces to configure.

Syntax interface <interface-list>

interface lo

Usage A local loopback interface is one that is always available for higher layer protocols

to use and advertise to the network. Although a local loopback interface is

assigned an IP address, it does not have the usual requirement of connecting to a

lower layer physical entity. This lack of physical attachment creates the perception

of a local loopback interface always being accessible via the network.

Local loopback interfaces can be utilized by a number of protocols for various

purposes. They can be used to improve access to the device and also increase its

reliability, security, scalability and protection. In addition, local loopback interfaces

can add flexibility and simplify management, information gathering and filtering.

One example of this increased reliability is for OSPF to advertise a local loopback

interface as an interface-route into the network irrespective of the physical links

that may be “up” or “down” at the time. This provides a higher probability that the

routing traffic will be received and subsequently forwarded.

Mode Global Configuration

Example The following example shows how to enter Interface mode to configure vlan1.

Note how the prompt changes.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan1

awplus(config-if)#

Parameter Description

<interface-list>The interfaces or ports to configure.

An interface-list can be:

• an interface such as a VLAN (e.g. vlan2), a switch port (e.g.

port1.0.6), a static channel group (e.g. sa2) or a

dynamic (LACP) channel group (e.g. po2)

• a continuous range of interfaces, ports, static channel

groups or dynamic (LACP) channel groups separated by a

hyphen; e.g. vlan2-8, or port1.0.1-1.0.6, or

sa1-2, or po1-2

• a comma-separated list of the above; e.g.

port1.0.1,port1.0.4-1.0.6. Do not mix interface

types in a list

The specified interfaces must exist.

lo The local loopback interface.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 344

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

INTERFACE COMMANDS

INTERFACE (TO CONFIGURE)

The following example shows how to enter Interface mode to configure the local

loopback interface.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface lo

awplus(config-if)#

Commands

ip address (IP Addressing and Protocol)

show interface

show interface brief

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 345

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

INTERFACE COMMANDS

MRU

mru

Overview Use this command to set the Maximum Receive Unit (MRU) size for switch ports,

where MRU is the maximum frame size (excluding headers) that switch ports can

receive. For more information, see the Switching Feature Overview and

Configuration Guide.

Use the no variant of this command to remove a previously specified Maximum

Receive Unit (MRU) size for switch ports, and restore the default MRU size (1500

bytes) for switch ports.

NOTE: The figure of 1500 bytes specifies the payload only. For an IEEE 802.1q frame,

provision is made (internally) for the following additional components:

• Source and Destination addresses

• EtherType field

• Priority and VLAN tag fields

•FCS

These additional components increase the frame size internally to 1522 bytes.

Syntax mru <mru-size>

no mru

Default The default MRU size is 1500 bytes for switch ports.

Mode Interface Configuration for switch ports.

Usage Note that show interface output will only show MRU size for switch ports.

Examples To configure an MRU of 16357 bytes on port1.0.2, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# mru 16357

To configure an MRU of 1500 bytes on port1.0.2 to port1.0.4, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2-port1.0.4

awplus(config-if)# mru 1500

Parameter Description

<mru-size><68-16357>

Specifies the Maximum Receive Unit (MRU) size in bytes, where 1500

bytes is the default Ethernet MRU size for an interface.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 346

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

INTERFACE COMMANDS

MRU

To restore the MRU size of 1500 bytes on port1.0.2, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# no mru

Commands

show interface

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 347

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

INTERFACE COMMANDS

MTU

mtu

Overview Use this command to set the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) size for VLANs,

where MTU is the maximum packet size that VLANs can transmit. The MTU size

setting is applied to both IPv4 and IPv6 packet transmission.

Use the no variant of this command to remove a previously specified Maximum

Transmission Unit (MTU) size for VLANs, and restore the default MTU size (1500

bytes) for VLANs.

Syntax mtu <68-1582>

no mtu

Default The default MTU size is 1500 bytes for VLAN interfaces.

Mode Interface Configuration for VLAN interfaces.

Usage If a device receives an IPv4 packet for Layer 3 switching to another VLAN with an

MTU size smaller than the packet size, and if the packet has the ‘don’t fragment’

bit set, then the device will send an ICMP ‘destination unreachable’ (3) packet

type and a ‘fragmentation needed and DF set’ (4) code back to the source. For

IPv6 packets bigger than the MTU size of the transmitting VLAN interface, an ICMP

‘packet too big’ (ICMP type 2 code 0) message is sent to the source.

Note that show interface output will only show MTU size for VLAN interfaces.

Examples To configure an MTU size of 1500 bytes on interface vlan2, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# mtu 1500

To configure an MTU size of 1500 bytes on interfaces vlan2 to vlan4, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2-vlan4

awplus(config-if)# mtu 1500

To restore the MTU size to the default MTU size of 1500 bytes on vlan2, use the

commands

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# no mtu

To restore the MTU size to the default MTU size of 1500 bytes on vlan2 and

vlan4, use the commands

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2-vlan4

awplus(config-if)# no mtu

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 348

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

INTERFACE COMMANDS

MTU

Commands

show interface

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 349

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

INTERFACE COMMANDS

SHOW INTERFACE

show interface

Overview Use this command to display interface configuration and status.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show interface [<interface-list>]

show interface lo

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Usage Note that the output displayed with this command will show MTU (Maximum

Transmission Unit) size for VLAN interfaces, and MRU (Maximum Received Unit)

size for switch ports.

Example To display configuration and status information for all interfaces, use the

command:

awplus# show interface

Parameter Description

<interface-list>The interfaces or ports to configure. An interface-list can be:

• an interface such as a VLAN (e.g. vlan2), a switch port (e.g.

port1.0.6), a static channel group (e.g. sa2) or a

dynamic (LACP) channel group (e.g. po2)

• a continuous range of interfaces, ports, static channel

groups or dynamic (LACP) channel groups separated by a

hyphen; e.g. vlan2-8, or port1.0.1-1.0.6, or sa1-2,

or po1-2

• a comma-separated list of the above; e.g.

port1.0.1,port1.0.4-1.0.6. Do not mix interface

types in a list

The specified interfaces must exist.

lo The local loopback interface.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 350

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

INTERFACE COMMANDS

SHOW INTERFACE

Figure 11-1: Example output from the show interface command

To display configuration and status information for interface lo, use the

command:

awplus# show interface lo

Figure 11-2: Example output from the show interface lo command

To display configuration and status information for interfaces vlan1 and vlan2,

use the command:

awplus# show interface vlan1,vlan2

awplus#show interface

Interface port1.0.1

Scope: both

Link is DOWN, administrative state is UP

Thrash-limiting

Status Not Detected, Action learn-disable, Timeout 1(s)

Hardware is Ethernet, address is 001a.eb54.f3ae

index 5001 metric 1 mru 1500

configured duplex auto, configured speed auto, configured polarity auto

<UP,BROADCAST,MULTICAST>

SNMP link-status traps: Disabled

input packets 4368, bytes 420692, dropped 0, multicast packets 56

output packets 85254, bytes 10912512, multicast packets 85254 broadcast packets 0

Time since last state change: 36 days 01:33:20



...

awplus#show interface lo

Interface lo

Scope: both

Link is UP, administrative state is UP

Hardware is Loopback

index 1 metric 1

<UP,LOOPBACK,RUNNING>

SNMP link-status traps: Disabled

input packets 0, bytes 0, dropped 0, multicast packets 0

output packets 0, bytes 0, multicast packets 0 broadcast packets 0

Time since last state change: 69 days 01:28:47

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 351

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

INTERFACE COMMANDS

SHOW INTERFACE

Figure 11-3: Example output from the show interface vlan1,vlan2 command

Commands

mru

mtu

show interface brief



awplus#show interface vlan1,vlan2

Interface vlan1

Scope: both

Link is UP, administrative state is UP

Hardware is VLAN, address is 0015.77e9.5c50

IPv4 address 192.168.1.1/24 broadcast 192.168.1.255

index 201 metric 1 mtu 1500

arp ageing timeout 300

<UP,BROADCAST,RUNNING,MULTICAST>

SNMP link-status traps: Disabled

Bandwidth 1g

input packets 295606, bytes 56993106, dropped 5, multicast packets 156

output packets 299172, bytes 67379392, multicast packets 0 broadcast packets 0

Time since last state change: 0 days 14:22:39



Interface vlan2

Scope: both

Link is DOWN, administrative state is UP

Hardware is VLAN, address is 0015.77e9.5c50

IPv4 address 192.168.2.1/24 broadcast 192.168.2.255

Description: ip_phone_vlan

index 202 metric 1 mtu 1500

arp ageing timeout 300

<UP,BROADCAST,MULTICAST>

SNMP link-status traps: Disabled

Bandwidth 1g

input packets 0, bytes 0, dropped 0, multicast packets 0

output packets 90, bytes 4244, multicast packets 0 broadcast packets 0

Time since last state change: 0 days 14:22:39

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 352

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

INTERFACE COMMANDS

SHOW INTERFACE BRIEF

show interface brief

Overview Use this command to display brief interface, configuration, and status information,

including provisioning information.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show interface brief

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Output Figure 11-4: Example output from the show interface brief command

Commands

show interface

show interface memory

awplus#show int brief

Interface Status Protocol

port1.0.1 admin up down

port1.0.2 admin up down

port1.0.3 admin up down

port1.0.4 admin up down

port1.0.5 admin up down

port1.0.6 admin up running

lo admin up running

vlan1 admin up down

vlan2 admin up down

Table 1: Parameters in the output of the show interface brief command

Parameter Description

Interface The name or type of interface.

Status The administrative state. This can be either admin up or admin

down.

Protocol The link state. This can be either down, running, or provisioned.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 353

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

INTERFACE COMMANDS

SHOW INTERFACE MEMORY

show interface memory

Overview This command displays the shared memory used by either all interfaces, or the

specified interface or interfaces. The output is useful for diagnostic purposes by

Allied Telesis authorized service personnel.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show interface memory

show interface <port-list> memory

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the shared memory used by all interfaces, use the command:

awplus# show interface memory

To display the shared memory used by port1.0.1 and port1.0.5 to port1.0.6, use the

command:

awplus# show interface port1.0.1,port1.0.5-1.0.6 memory

Parameter Description

<port-list> Display information about only the specified port or ports. The port

list can be:

• a switch port (e.g. port1.0.4), a static channel group (e.g. sa2) or a

dynamic (LACP) channel group (e.g. po2)

• a continuous range of ports separated by a hyphen (e.g.

port1.0.1-1.0.4, or sa1-2, or po1-2)

• a comma-separated list of ports and port ranges (e.g.

port1.0.1,port1.0.4-1.0.6). Do not mix switch ports, static channel

groups, and dynamic (LACP) channel groups in the same list.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 354

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

INTERFACE COMMANDS

SHOW INTERFACE MEMORY

Output Figure 11-5: Example output from the show interface memory command

Figure 11-6: Example output from show interface <port-list> memory for a list

of interfaces

Commands

show interface brief

show interface status

show interface switchport

awplus#show interface memory

Vlan blocking state shared memory usage

---------------------------------------------

Interface shmid Bytes Used nattch Status

port1.0.1 393228 512 1

port1.0.2 458766 512 1

port1.0.3 360459 512 1

port1.0.4 524304 512 1

port1.0.5 491535 512 1

port1.0.6 557073 512 1

...

lo 425997 512 1

po1 1179684 512 1

po2 1212453 512 1

sa3 1245222 512 1

awplus#show interface port1.0.1,port1.0.5-1.0.6 memory

Vlan blocking state shared memory usage

---------------------------------------------

Interface shmid Bytes Used nattch Status

port1.0.1 393228 512 1

port1.0.5 491535 512 1

port1.0.6 557073 512 1

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 355

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

INTERFACE COMMANDS

SHOW INTERFACE STATUS

show interface status

Overview Use this command to display the status of the specified interface or interfaces.

Note that when no interface or interfaces are specified then the status of all

interfaces on the device are shown.

Syntax show interface [<port-list>] status

Examples To display the status of ports 1.0.1 to 1.0.4, use the commands:

awplus# show interface port1.0.1-1.0.4 status

To display the status of all ports, use the commands:

awplus# show interface status

Parameter Description

<port-list> The ports to display information about. The port list can be:

• a switch port (e.g. port1.0.6), a static channel group (e.g. sa2) or a

dynamic (LACP) channel group (e.g. po2)

• a continuous range of ports separated by a hyphen, e.g.

port1.0.1-1.0.6, or sa1-2, or po1-2

• a comma-separated list of ports and port ranges, e.g.

port1.0.1,port1.0.4-1.0.6. Do not mix switch ports, static channel

groups, and dynamic (LACP) channel groups in the same list

Table 2: Example output from the show interface <port-list> status command

awplus#show interface port1.0.1-1.0.4 status

Port Name Status Vlan Duplex Speed Type

port1.0.1 notconnect 1 auto auto 1000BASE-T

port1.0.2 notconnect 1 auto auto 1000BASE-T

port1.0.3 notconnect 1 auto auto 1000BASE-T

port1.0.4 notconnect 1 auto auto 1000BASE-T

Table 3: Example output from the show interface status command

awplus#sho int status

Port Name Status Vlan Duplex Speed Type

port1.0.1 Trunk_Net connected trunk a-full a-1000 1000BaseTX

port1.0.2 Access_Net1 connected 5 full 1000 1000BaseTX

port1.0.3 Access_Net1 disabled 5 auto auto 1000BaseTX

port1.0.4 Access_Net2 connected 6 auto auto 1000BaseTX

port1.0.5 Private_Prom connected 10 auto auto 1000BaseTX

port1.0.6 Private_Net1 connected 10,11 auto auto 1000BaseTX

...

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 356

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

INTERFACE COMMANDS

SHOW INTERFACE STATUS

Commands

show interface

show interface memory

Table 4: Parameters in the output from the show interface status command

Parameter Description

Port Name/Type of the interface.

Name Description of the interface.

Status The administrative and operational status of the interface; one of:

• disabled: the interface is administratively down.

• connect: the interface is operationally up.

• notconnect: the interface is operationally down.

Vlan VLAN type or VLAN IDs associated with the port:

• When the VLAN mode is trunk, it displays trunk (it does not

display the VLAN IDs).

• When the VLAN mode is access, it displays the VLAN ID.

• When the VLAN mode is private promiscuous, it displays the

primary VLAN ID if it has one, and promiscuous if it does not

have a VLAN ID.

• When the VLAN mode is private host, it displays the primary

and secondary VLAN IDs.

• When the port is an Eth port, it displays none: there is no VLAN

associated with it.

• When the VLAN is dynamically assigned, it displays the current

dynamically assigned VLAN ID (not the access VLAN ID), or

dynamic if it has multiple VLANs dynamically assigned.

Duplex The actual duplex mode of the interface, preceded by a- if it has

autonegotiated this duplex mode. If the port is disabled or not

connected, it displays the configured duplex setting.

Speed The actual link speed of the interface, preceded by a- if it has

autonegotiated this speed. If the port is disabled or not

connected, it displays the configured speed setting.

Type The type of interface, e.g. 1000BaseTX. For SFP bays, it displays

Unknown if it does not recognize the type of SFP installed, or Not

present if an SFP is not installed or is faulty.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 357

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

INTERFACE COMMANDS

SHUTDOWN

shutdown

Overview This command shuts down the selected interface. This administratively disables

the link and takes the link down at the physical (electrical) layer.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this function and therefore to bring

the link back up again.

Syntax shutdown

no shutdown

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage If you shutdown an aggregator, the device shows the admin status of the

aggregator and its component ports as “admin down”. While the aggregator is

down, the device accepts shutdown and no shutdown commands on

component ports, but these have no effect on port status. Ports will not come up

again while the aggregator is down.

Example To shut down port1.0.2, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# shutdown

To bring up port1.0.2, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# no shutdown

To shut down vlan2, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# shutdown

To bring up vlan2, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# no shutdown

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 358

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Port Mirroring and

Remote Mirroring

Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference of commands used to configure

Port Mirroring and Remote Mirroring (also known as RSPAN).

For more information, see the Mirroring Feature Overview and Configuration

Guide.

Command List •“mirror interface” on page 359

•“remote-mirror interface” on page 361

•“show mirror” on page 363

•“show mirror interface” on page 364

•“show remote-mirror” on page 365

•“switchport remote-mirror-egress” on page 367

•“vlan mode remote-mirror-vlan” on page 368

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 359

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PORT MIRRORING AND REMOTE MIRRORING COMMANDS

MIRROR INTERFACE

mirror interface

Overview Use this command to define a mirror port and mirrored (monitored) ports and

direction of traffic to be mirrored. The port for which you enter interface mode will

be the mirror port.

The destination port is removed from all VLANs, and no longer participates in other

switching.

Use the no variant of this command to disable port mirroring by the destination

port on the specified source port.

Use the none variant of this command when using copy-to-mirror ACL and QoS

commands.

Syntax mirror interface <source-port-list> direction

{both|receive|transmit}

mirror interface none

no mirror interface <source-port-list>

no mirror interface none

Parameter Description

<source-port-list> The source switch ports to mirror. A port-list can be:

• a port (e.g. port1.0.2)

• a continuous range of ports separated by a hyphen, e.g.

port1.0.1-1.0.2

• a comma-separated list of ports and port ranges, e.g.

port1.0.1,port1.0.4-1.0.6

The source port list cannot include dynamic or static

channel groups (link aggregators).

direction Specifies whether to mirror traffic that the source port

receives, transmits, or both.

both Mirroring traffic both received and transmitted by the

source port.

receive Mirroring traffic received by the source port.

transmit Mirroring traffic transmitted by the source port.

none Specify this parameter for use with the ACL (Access Control

List) access-list and QoS (Quality of Service) default action

commands when used with the copy-to-mirror parameter

option, so you can specify the destination port (the

analyzer port) for the traffic without specifying a source

mirror port. See the ACL commands access-list (numbered

hardware ACL for IP packets) and access-list (numbered

hardware ACL for MAC addresses), and the QoS command

default-action for further information.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 360

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PORT MIRRORING AND REMOTE MIRRORING COMMANDS

MIRROR INTERFACE

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage Use this command to send traffic to another device connected to the mirror port

for monitoring.

For more information, see the Mirroring Feature Overview and Configuration

Guide.

A mirror port cannot be associated with a VLAN. If a switch port is configured to be

a mirror port, it is automatically removed from any VLAN it was associated with.

This command can only be applied to a single mirror (destination) port, not to a

range of ports, nor to a static or dynamic channel group. Do not apply multiple

interfaces with an interface command before issuing the mirror interface

command. One interface may have multiple mirror interfaces.

Access control lists can be used to mirror a subset of traffic from the mirrored port

by using the copy-to-mirror parameter in hardware ACL commands.

Example To mirror traffic received and transmitted on port1.0.4 and port1.0.5 to destination

port1.0.3, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.3

awplus(config-if)# mirror interface port1.0.4,port1.0.5

direction both

To enable use with the access-list (numbered hardware ACL for IP packets) ACL and

default-action QoS commands to destination port1.0.3 without specifying a source

port, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.3

awplus(config-if)# mirror interface none

To mirror TCP traffic to analyzer port1.0.1 if it is received or transmitted on port

1.0.2, use the sample configuration snippet below:

Commands

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for IP packets)

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for MAC addresses)

default-action

awplus#show running-config



mls qos enable

access-list 3000 copy-to-mirror tcp any any

!

interface port1.0.1

mirror interface none

!

interface port1.0.2

access-group 3000

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 361

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PORT MIRRORING AND REMOTE MIRRORING COMMANDS

REMOTE-MIRROR INTERFACE

remote-mirror interface

Overview Use this command on the source device to specify the source port whose traffic is

to be remote-mirrored (monitored), and the remote mirroring VLAN ID these

mirrored frames will be tagged with when they egress from the source device. The

port for which Interface Configuration mode is entered is the port via which the

mirrored traffic egresses the source device towards the remote destination device.

Use the no variant of this command to disable remote mirroring of the specified

mirrored port by the egress (destination) port on the source device.

Syntax remote-mirror interface <port-list> direction

{both|receive|transmit} vlan <2-4090> [priority <0-7>]

remote-mirror interface none vlan <2-4090> [priority <0-7>]

no remote-mirror interface <port-list> [direction

{receive|transmit}]

no remote-mirror interface none

Default No ports are set to be remote mirrored by default.

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage To prevent unwanted processing of mirrored traffic, we recommend configuring

remote monitoring on the receiving device before configuring it on the source

device.

Parameter Description

<port-list> The ports from which to mirror traffic. A port-list can be:

• a port (e.g. port1.0.2)

• a continuous range of ports separated by a hyphen, e.g.

port1.0.1-1.0.2 or port1.0.1-port1.0.24

• a comma-separated list of ports and port ranges, e.g.

port1.0.1,port1.0.4-1.0.6

direction Specifies whether to mirror traffic that the source port

receives, transmits, or both.

both Mirroring traffic both received and transmitted by the source

port.

receive Mirroring traffic received by the source port.

transmit Mirroring traffic transmitted by the source port.

2-4090 The VLAN ID of the remote mirroring VLAN that this mirrored

traffic is to be tagged with at the egress port on the source

device.

priority The 802.1p priority tag to apply to mirrored packets.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 362

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PORT MIRRORING AND REMOTE MIRRORING COMMANDS

REMOTE-MIRROR INTERFACE

This command can only be used to configure a single egress port on the source

device, not a range of egress ports. Do not use the interface command with

multiple interfaces before using this remote-mirror interface command. One

egress (destination) port on the source device can transmit mirrored frames from

up to four remote mirrored (source) ports.

The egress port on the source device can be associated with other VLANs in

addition to the remote mirror VLAN, so it can function as an uplink for traffic from

multiple VLANs. This command does not change the VLAN associations of the

mirrored ports.

Only one port on the device can be configured as either a mirror port for port

mirroring (mirror interface command) or as an egress port on the source device

for remote mirroring (remote-mirror interface command).

All mirrored ports on a single device must use the same remote mirror VLAN and

priority.

Access control lists can be used to mirror a subset of traffic from the mirrored port

by using the copy-to-mirror parameter in hardware ACL commands.

Example To configure the source device to send all the traffic that it receives on

remote-mirrored port 1.0.5 out egress port 1.0.1 tagged with remote mirroring

VLAN ID 2, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1

awplus(config-if)# remote-mirror interface port1.0.5 direction

receive vlan 2

To stop port 1.0.1 remote-mirroring traffic received on mirrored port 1.0.5, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1

awplus(config-if)# no remote-mirror interface port1.0.5

direction receive

Commands

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for IP packets)

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for MAC addresses)

default-action

mirror interface

remote-mirror interface

show remote-mirror

switchport remote-mirror-egress

vlan mode remote-mirror-vlan

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 363

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PORT MIRRORING AND REMOTE MIRRORING COMMANDS

SHOW MIRROR

show mirror

Overview Use this command to display the status of all mirrored ports.

Syntax show mirror

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the status of all mirrored ports, use the following command:

awplus# show mirror

Output Figure 12-1: Example output from the show mirror command

Mirror Test Port Name: port1.0.1

Mirror option: Enabled

Mirror direction: both

Monitored Port Name: port1.0.2

Mirror Test Port Name: port1.0.3

Mirror option: Enabled

Mirror direction: receive

Monitored Port Name: port1.0.4

Mirror Test Port Name: port1.0.3

Mirror option: Enabled

Mirror direction: receive

Monitored Port Name: port1.0.1

Mirror Test Port Name: port1.0.1

Mirror option: Enabled

Mirror direction: receive

Monitored Port Name: port1.0.3

Mirror Test Port Name: port1.0.1

Mirror option: Enabled

Mirror direction: transmit

Monitored Port Name: port1.0.4

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 364

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PORT MIRRORING AND REMOTE MIRRORING COMMANDS

SHOW MIRROR INTERFACE

show mirror interface

Overview Use this command to display port mirroring configuration for a mirrored

(monitored) switch port.

Syntax show mirror interface <port>

Mode User Exec, Privileged Exec and Interface Configuration

Example To display port mirroring configuration for the port1.0.4, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.4

awplus(config-if)# show mirror interface port1.0.4

Output Figure 12-2: Example output from the show mirror interface command

Parameter Description

<port>The monitored switch port to display information about.

Mirror Test Port Name: port1.0.3

Mirror option: Enabled

Mirror direction: both

Monitored Port Name: port1.0.4

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 365

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PORT MIRRORING AND REMOTE MIRRORING COMMANDS

SHOW REMOTE-MIRROR

show remote-mirror

Overview Use this command to display information for remote-mirroring.

Syntax show remote-mirror

Mode User Exec

Example To display information about remote mirroring, use the command:

awplus# show remote-mirror

Output Figure 12-3: Example output from show remote-mirror

awplus#show remote-mirror

Remote mirror information: 

Remote mirror destination:

Port: port1.0.3

VLAN: 259

User priority: 0



Monitored ports:

port1.0.1

direction: both



Remote mirror egress ports:



Remote mirror VLANs:

VLAN 259

Table 12-1: Parameters in the output from show remote-mirror

Parameter Description

Remote mirror

destination

On the source device, this displays information about:

• the egress port for the mirrored traffic on the source

device

• the remote mirroring VLAN ID this traffic is tagged with

on egress

• the user priority this traffic is tagged with on egress

Monitored ports On the source device, this displays:

• the ports being mirrored (monitored)

• the direction—whether both received traffic,

transmitted traffic or both are mirrored

• ‘none (via ACL)’ if it is configured with the command

remote-mirror interface none to allow ACLs to select

the traffic to be mirrored

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 366

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PORT MIRRORING AND REMOTE MIRRORING COMMANDS

SHOW REMOTE-MIRROR

Commands

remote-mirror interface

switchport remote-mirror-egress

vlan mode remote-mirror-vlan

Remote mirror

egress ports

On the destination device, this displays :

• the remote mirror egress ports

• the remote mirror VLANs they are associated with

Remote mirror

VLANs

On source, destination and intermediate devices, this

displays a list of any VLANs configured in remote mirror

VLAN mode. To see a list of the ports associated with these

VLANs, use the command show vlan brief.

Table 12-1: Parameters in the output from show remote-mirror (cont.)

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 367

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PORT MIRRORING AND REMOTE MIRRORING COMMANDS

SWITCHPORT REMOTE-MIRROR-EGRESS

switchport remote-mirror-egress

Overview Use this command on the device receiving remote mirrored traffic to set the

remote mirroring egress port for the specified remote mirroring VLAN. This port

removes the remote mirror VLAN tagging before transmitting the mirrored traffic.

Ingress traffic on this port is disabled.

Use the no variant of this command to reset the port to no longer function as a

remote mirror egress port.

Syntax switchport remote-mirror-egress vlan <vlan-id>

no switchport remote-mirror-egress

Default There is no remote mirror egress port by default.

Mode Interface Configuration for a switch port

Usage To prevent unwanted processing of mirrored traffic, we recommend configuring

remote monitoring on the receiving device before configuring it on the source

device.

This command would typically be used for the port that transmits the

remote-mirrored traffic to a device that will analyze it. The port effectively

functions as an access port in the remote mirror VLAN, with the added feature of

not allowing ingress traffic on the port.

Example To set port 1.0.1 on the destination device as the remote mirror egress port for

mirrored traffic that is tagged with VLAN ID 2, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1

awplus(config-if)# switchport remote-mirror-egress vlan 2

To unset port 1.0.1 as a remote mirror egress port, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1

awplus(config-if)# no switchport remote-mirror-egress

Commands

remote-mirror interface

show remote-mirror

vlan mode remote-mirror-vlan

Parameter Description

<vlan-id> The port will transmit the mirrored traffic it receives from this

remote mirror VLAN.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 368

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PORT MIRRORING AND REMOTE MIRRORING COMMANDS

VLAN MODE REMOTE-MIRROR-VLAN

vlan mode remote-mirror-vlan

Overview Use this command to create a single VLAN or a range of VLANs in remote mirror

mode to be used for remote mirroring.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the remote mirror VLAN from the

VLAN database and its configurations.

Syntax vlan [<vid>|<vid-range>] mode remote-mirror-vlan

no vlan [<vid>|<vid-range>]

Default There is no remote mirror VLAN by default.

Mode VLAN Configuration

Usage This remote mirror VLAN needs to be configured on the remote mirroring source

device, the destination (receiving) device, and any devices in between that are to

forward the mirrored traffic. We recommend configuring this on the receiving

device and intermediate devices before configuring the source device.

The remote mirror VLAN operates in a special mode— all traffic on the remote

mirror VLAN is flooded, and no learning or CPU processing is done for packets in

the VLAN. BPDU packets (link-local packets used to control features like spanning

tree or AMF) are dropped on remote mirror VLANs.

Disabling the remote-mirroring VLAN on the source switch does not prevent the

mirrored packets from being sent with the remote-mirror VLAN tag. To stop the

mirroring, the command no remote-mirror interface must be used.

Example To create a VLAN with VLAN ID 3 in remote mirror VLAN mode, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# vlan database

awplus(config-vlan)# vlan 3 mode remote-mirror-vlan

To remove the remote mirror VLAN with ID 3, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# vlan database

awplus(config-vlan)# no vlan 3

Commands

remote-mirror interface

show remote-mirror

Parameter Description

<vid> The VLAN ID of the remote mirroring VLAN to be created.

<vid-range> The range of VLAN IDs for the remote mirroring VLANs to be

created.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 369

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

PORT MIRRORING AND REMOTE MIRRORING COMMANDS

VLAN MODE REMOTE-MIRROR-VLAN

switchport remote-mirror-egress

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 370

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Interface Testing

Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference of commands used for testing

interfaces.

Command List •“clear test interface” on page 371

•“service test” on page 372

•“test interface” on page 373

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 371

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

INTERFACE TESTING COMMANDS

CLEAR TEST INTERFACE

clear test interface

Overview This command clears test results and counters after issuing the test interface

command. Test results and counters must be cleared before executing subsequent

test interface commands.

Syntax clear test interface {<port-list>|all}

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples To clear the counters for port1.0.1 use the command:

awplus# clear test interface port1.0.1

To clear the counters for all interfaces use the command:

awplus# clear test interface all

Commands

test interface

Parameter Description

<port-list>The ports to test. A port-list can be:

• a switch port (e.g. port1.0.6)

• a continuous range of ports separated by a hyphen, e.g.

port1.0.1-port1.0.6

•a comma-separated list of the above, e.g.

port1.0.1,port1.0.5-1.0.6

The specified ports must exist.

all All interfaces

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 372

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

INTERFACE TESTING COMMANDS

SERVICE TEST

service test

Overview This command puts the device into the interface testing state, ready to begin

testing. After entering this command, enter Interface Configuration mode for the

desired interfaces and enter the command test interface.

Do not test interfaces on a device that is part of a live network—disconnect the

device first.

Use the no variant of this command to stop the test service.

Syntax service test

no service test

Mode Global Configuration

Example To put the device into a test state, use the command:

awplus(config)# service test

Commands

test interface

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 373

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

INTERFACE TESTING COMMANDS

TEST INTERFACE

test interface

Overview This command starts a test on a port or all ports or a selected range or list of ports.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this function. The test duration can

be configured by specifying the time in minutes after specifying a port or ports to

test.

For an example of all the commands required to test switch ports, see the

Examples section in this command. To test an Ethernet port, set its speed to 100 by

using the command speed 100.

NOTE: Do not run test interface on live networks because this will degrade network

performance.

Syntax test interface {<port-list>|all} [time{<1-60>|cont}]

no test interface {<port-list>|all}

Mode Privileged Exec

Parameter Description

<port-list>The ports to test. A port-list can be:

• a switch port (e.g. port1.0.6)

• a continuous range of ports separated by a hyphen, e.g.

port1.0.1-port1.0.6

• a comma-separated list of the above, e.g.

port1.0.1,port1.0.5-1.0.6

The specified ports must exist.

all All ports

time Keyword entered prior to the value for the time duration of the

interface test.

<1-60>Specifies duration of time to test the interface or interfaces in

minutes (from a minimum of 1 minute to a maximum of 60 minutes).

The default is 4 minutes.

cont Specifies continuous interface testing until canceled with command

negation.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 374

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

INTERFACE TESTING COMMANDS

TEST INTERFACE

Example To test the switch ports in VLAN 1, install loopbacks in the ports, and enter the

following commands:

awplus(config)# service test

awplus(config)# no spanning-tree rstp enable bridge-forward

awplus(config)# interface vlan1

awplus(config-if)# shutdown

awplus(config-if)# end

awplus# test interface all

To see the output, use the commands:

awplus# show test

awplus# show test count

To start the test on all interfaces for 1 minute use the command:

awplus# test interface all time 1

Commands

clear test interface

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 375

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Part 2: Interfaces and Layer 2

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 376

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Switching

Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference of commands used to configure

switching.

For more information, see the Switching Feature Overview and Configuration

Guide.

Command List •“backpressure” on page 378

•“clear loop-protection counters” on page 380

•“clear mac address-table dynamic” on page 381

•“clear mac address-table static” on page 383

•“clear port counter” on page 384

•“clear port-security intrusion” on page 385

•“debug loopprot” on page 388

•“debug platform packet” on page 389

•“duplex” on page 391

•“flowcontrol (switch port)” on page 393

•“linkflap action” on page 395

•“loop-protection loop-detect” on page 396

•“loop-protection action” on page 397

•“loop-protection action-delay-time” on page 398

•“loop-protection timeout” on page 399

•“mac address-table acquire” on page 400

•“mac address-table ageing-time” on page 401

•“mac address-table logging” on page 402

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 377

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

•“mac address-table static” on page 403

•“mac address-table thrash-limit” on page 404

•“platform load-balancing” on page 405

•“platform stop-unreg-mc-flooding” on page 406

•“platform vlan-stacking-tpid” on page 408

•“polarity” on page 409

•“show debugging loopprot” on page 410

•“show debugging platform packet” on page 411

•“show flowcontrol interface” on page 412

•“show interface err-disabled” on page 413

•“show interface switchport” on page 414

•“show loop-protection” on page 415

•“show mac address-table” on page 417

•“show mac address-table thrash-limit” on page 419

•“show platform” on page 420

•“show platform classifier statistics utilization brief” on page 422

•“show platform port” on page 423

•“show port-security interface” on page 427

•“show port-security intrusion” on page 428

•“show storm-control” on page 429

•“speed” on page 430

•“storm-control level” on page 432

•“switchport port-security” on page 433

•“switchport port-security aging” on page 434

•“switchport port-security maximum” on page 435

•“switchport port-security violation” on page 436

•“thrash-limiting” on page 437

•“undebug loopprot” on page 439

•“undebug platform packet” on page 440

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 378

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

BACKPRESSURE

backpressure

Overview This command provides a method of applying flow control to ports running in half

duplex mode. The setting will only apply when the link is in the half-duplex state.

You can disable backpressure on an interface using the off parameter or the no

variant of this command.

Syntax backpressure {on|off}

no backpressure

Default Backpressure is turned off by default. You can determine whether an interface has

backpressure enabled by viewing the running-config output; backpressure on is

shown for interfaces if this feature is enabled.

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage The backpressure feature enables half duplex Ethernet ports to control traffic flow

during congestion by preventing further packets arriving. Back pressure utilizes a

pre-802.3x mechanism in order to apply Ethernet flow control to switch ports that

are configured in the half duplex mode.

The flow control applied by the flowcontrol (switch port) command operates only

on full-duplex links, whereas back pressure operates only on half-duplex links.

If a port has insufficient capacity to receive further frames, the device will simulate

a collision by transmitting a CSMACD jamming signal from this port until the buffer

empties. The jamming signal causes the sending device to stop transmitting and

wait a random period of time, before retransmitting its data, thus providing time

for the buffer to clear. Although this command is only valid for switch ports

operating in half-duplex mode the remote device (the one sending the data) can

be operating in the full duplex mode.

To see the currently-negotiated duplex mode for ports whose links are up, use the

command show interface. To see the configured duplex mode (when different

from the default), use the command show running-config.

Examples To enable back pressure flow control on interfaces port1.0.1-port1.0.2

enter the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1-port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# backpressure on

Parameters Description

on Enables half-duplex flow control.

off Disables half-duplex flow control.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 379

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

BACKPRESSURE

To disable back pressure flow control on interface port1.0.2 enter the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# backpressure off

Validation

Commands

show running-config

show interface

Commands

duplex

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 380

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

CLEAR LOOP-PROTECTION COUNTERS

clear loop-protection counters

Overview Use this command to clear the counters for the Loop Protection counters.

Syntax clear loop-protection [interface <port-list>] counters

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples To clear the counter information for all interfaces:

awplus# clear loop-protection counters

To clear the counter information for a single port:

awplus# clear loop-protection interface port1.0.1 counters

Parameters Description

interface The interface whose counters are to be cleared.

<port-list>A port, a port range, or an aggregated link.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 381

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

CLEAR MAC ADDRESS-TABLE DYNAMIC

clear mac address-table dynamic

Overview Use this command to clear the filtering database of all entries learned for a selected

MAC address, an MSTP instance, a switch port interface or a VLAN interface.

Syntax clear mac address-table dynamic [address

<mac-address>|interface <port> [instance <inst>]|vlan <vid>]

Mode Privileged Exec

Usage Use this command with options to clear the filtering database of all entries learned

for a given MAC address, interface or VLAN. Use this command without options to

clear any learned entries.

Use the optional instance parameter to clear the filtering database entries

associated with a specified MSTP instance Note that you must first specify a switch

port interface before you can specify an MSTP instance.

Compare this usage and operation with the clear mac address-table static

command. Note that an MSTP instance cannot be specified with the command

clear mac address-table static.

Examples This example shows how to clear all dynamically learned filtering database entries

for all interfaces, addresses, VLANs.

awplus# clear mac address-table dynamic

This example shows how to clear all dynamically learned filtering database entries

when learned through device operation for the MAC address 0000.5E00.5302.

awplus# clear mac address-table dynamic address 0000.5E00.5302

Parameter Description

address Specify a MAC (Media Access Control) address to be cleared from

the filtering database.

<mac-address> Enter a MAC address to be cleared from the database in the format

HHHH.HHHH.HHHH.

interface Specify a switch port to be cleared from the filtering database.

instance Specify an MSTP (Multiple Spanning Tree) instance to be cleared

from the filtering database.

<inst> Enter an MSTP instance in the range 1 to 63 to be cleared from the

filtering database.

vlan Specify a VLAN to be cleared from the filtering database.

<vid> Enter a VID (VLAN ID) in the range 1 to 4094 to be cleared from the

filtering database.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 382

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

CLEAR MAC ADDRESS-TABLE DYNAMIC

This example shows how to clear all dynamically learned filtering database entries

when learned through device operation for a given MSTP instance 1 on switch port

interface port1.0.2.

awplus# clear mac address-table dynamic interface port1.0.2

instance 1

Commands

clear mac address-table static

show mac address-table

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 383

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

CLEAR MAC ADDRESS-TABLE STATIC

clear mac address-table static

Overview Use this command to clear the filtering database of all statically configured entries

for a selected MAC address, interface, or VLAN.

Syntax clear mac address-table static [address <mac-address>|interface

<port>|vlan <vid>]

Mode Privileged Exec

Usage Use this command with options to clear the filtering database of all entries made

from the CLI for a given MAC address, interface or VLAN. Use this command

without options to clear any entries made from the CLI.

Compare this usage with clear mac address-table dynamic command.

Examples This example shows how to clear all filtering database entries configured through

the CLI.

awplus# clear mac address-table static

This example shows how to clear all filtering database entries for a specific

interface configured through the CLI.

awplus# clear mac address-table static interface port1.0.3

This example shows how to clear filtering database entries configured through the

CLI for the mac address 0000.5E00.5302.

awplus# clear mac address-table static address 0000.5E00.5302

Commands

clear mac address-table dynamic

mac address-table static

show mac address-table

Parameter Description

address The MAC address whose entries are to be cleared from the filtering

database.

<mac-address> Specifies the MAC (Media Access Control) address to be cleared

from. Enter this address in the format HHHH.HHHH.HHHH.

interface Specify the interface from which statically configured entries are

to be cleared.

<port> Specify the switch port from which address entries will be cleared.

This can be a single switch port, (e.g. port1.0.4), a static channel

group (e.g. sa2), or a dynamic (LACP) channel group (e.g. po2).

vlan A VLAN whose statically configured entries are to be cleared.

<vid> Specifies the VLAN ID whose statically configured entries are to be

cleared.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 384

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

CLEAR PORT COUNTER

clear port counter

Overview Use this command to clear the packet counters of the port.

Syntax clear port counter [<port>]

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To clear the packet counter for port1.0.1, use the command:

awplus# clear port counter port1.0.1

Commands

show platform port

Parameter Description

<port> The port number or range

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 385

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

CLEAR PORT-SECURITY INTRUSION

clear port-security intrusion

Overview Use this command to clear the history of the port-security intrusion list on all ports,

or an individual port. If a port is not specified, the intrusion lists of all ports are

cleared. This command does not clear any MAC addresses the device has already

learned on the ports. If you want to clear MAC addresses on a switch port from the

filtering database, you can use the clear mac address-table dynamic command or

the clear mac address-table static command.

Syntax clear port-security intrusion [interface <port>]

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples To see the port-security status on port1.0.1, use the following command:

awplus# show port-security interface port1.0.1

To see the intrusion list on port1.0.1, use the following command:

awplus# show port-security intrusion interface port1.0.1

Parameter Description

<port> Specify the switch port from which the history of violated address

entries will be cleared. The port can be a single switch port, (e.g.

port1.0.4), a static channel group (e.g. sa2), or a dynamic

(LACP) channel group (e.g. po2).

Table 1: Example output from the show port-security interface command



awplus#show port-security interface port1.0.1

Port Security configuration

------------------------------------------------------------

Security Enabled : YES

Port Status : ENABLED

Violation Mode : TRAP

Aging : OFF

Maximum MAC Addresses : 1

Total MAC Addresses : 1

Lock Status : LOCKED

Security Violation Count : 1

Last Violation Source Address : 801f.0200.19da

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 386

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

CLEAR PORT-SECURITY INTRUSION

To clear the history of port-security intrusion list on port1.0.1, use the following

command:

awplus# clear port-security intrusion interface port1.0.1

To see the port-security status on port1.0.1, use the following command:

awplus# show port-security interface port1.0.1

NOTE: Note that the port status is still locked while the history of port violation is

cleared from the database.

To see the intrusion list on port1.0.1, use the following command:

awplus# show port-security intrusion interface port1.0.1

Table 2: Example output from the show port-security intrusion command



awplus#show port-security intrusion interface port1.0.1

Port Security Intrusion List

------------------------------------------------------------

Interface: port1.0.1 - 1 intrusion(s) detected

801f.0200.19da

Table 3: Example output from the show port-security interface command



awplus#show port-security interface port1.0.1

Port Security configuration

------------------------------------------------------------

Security Enabled : YES

Port Status : ENABLED

Violation Mode : TRAP

Aging : OFF

Maximum MAC Addresses : 1

Total MAC Addresses : 1

Lock Status : LOCKED

Security Violation Count : 0

Last Violation Source Address : None

Table 4: Example output from the show port-security intrusion command



awplus#show port-security intrusion interface port1.0.1

Port Security Intrusion List

------------------------------------------------------------

Interface: port1.0.1 - no intrusions detected

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 387

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

CLEAR PORT-SECURITY INTRUSION

Commands

show port-security interface

show port-security intrusion

switchport port-security

switchport port-security aging

switchport port-security maximum

switchport port-security violation

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 388

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

DEBUG LOOPPROT

debug loopprot

Overview This command enables Loop Protection debugging.

The no variant of this command disables Loop Protection debugging.

Syntax debug loopprot {info|msg|pkt|state|nsm|all}

no debug loopprot {info|msg|pkt|state|nsm|all}

Mode Privileged Exec and Global Configuration

Example To enable debug for all state transitions, use the command:

awplus# debug loopprot state

Commands

show debugging loopprot

undebug loopprot

Parameter Description

info General Loop Protection information.

msg Received and transmitted Loop Detection Frames (LDFs).

pkt Echo raw ASCII display of received and transmitted LDF packets to

the console.

state Loop Protection states transitions.

nsm Network Service Module information.

all All debugging information.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 389

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

DEBUG PLATFORM PACKET

debug platform packet

Overview This command enables platform to CPU level packet debug functionality on the

device.

Use the no variant of this command to disable platform to CPU level packet debug.

If the result means both send and receive packet debug are disabled, then any

active timeout will be canceled.

Syntax debug platform packet [recv] [send] [sflow] [timeout <timeout>]

[vlan <vlan-id>|all]

no debug platform packet [recv] [send]

Default A 5 minute timeout is configured by default if no other timeout duration is

specified.

Mode Privileged Exec and Global Configuration

Usage This command can be used to trace packets sent and received by the CPU. If a

timeout is not specified, then a default 5 minute timeout will be applied.

If a timeout of 0 is specified, packet debug will be generated until the no variant of

this command is used or another timeout value is specified. The timeout value

applies to both send and receive debug and is updated whenever the debug

platform packet command is used.

Examples To enable both receive and send packet debug for the default timeout of 5

minutes, enter:

awplus# debug platform packet

To enable receive packet debug for 10 seconds, enter:

awplus# debug platform packet recv timeout 10

Parameter Description

recv Debug packets received.

send Debug packets sent.

sflow Debug sFlow packets.

timeout Stop debug after a specified time.

<timeout><0-3600>The timeout period, specified in seconds.

vlan Limit debug to a single VLAN ID specified.

<vlan-id><1-4094> The VLAN ID to limit the debug output on.

all Debug all VLANs (default setting).

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 390

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

DEBUG PLATFORM PACKET

To enable packet debug for sFlow packets only for the default timeout of 5

minutes, enter:

awplus# debug platform packet sflow

To enable send packet debug with no timeout, enter:

awplus# debug platform packet send timeout 0

To enable VLAN packet debug for VLAN 2 with a timeout duration of 3 minutes,

enter:

awplus# debug platform packet vlan 2 timeout 150

To disable receive packet debug, enter:

awplus# no debug platform packet recv

Commands

show debugging platform packet

undebug platform packet

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 391

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

DUPLEX

duplex

Overview This command changes the duplex mode for the specified port.

To see the currently-negotiated duplex mode for ports whose links are up, use the

command show interface. To see the configured duplex mode (when different

from the default), use the command show running-config.

Syntax duplex {auto|full|half}

Default By default, ports auto-negotiate duplex mode (except for 100Base-FX ports which

do not support auto-negotiation, so default to full duplex mode).

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage Switch ports in a static or dynamic (LACP) channel group must have the same port

speed and be in full duplex mode. Once switch ports have been aggregated into a

channel group, you can set the duplex mode of all the switch ports in the channel

group by applying this command to the channel group.

Examples To specify full duplex for port1.0.4, enter the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.4

awplus(config-if)# duplex full

To specify half duplex for port1.0.4, enter the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.4

awplus(config-if)# duplex half

To auto-negotiate duplex mode for port1.0.4, enter the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.4

awplus(config-if)# duplex auto

Parameter Description

auto Auto-negotiate duplex mode.

full Operate in full duplex mode only.

half Operate in half duplex mode only.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 392

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

DUPLEX

Commands

backpressure

polarity

speed

show interface

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 393

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

FLOWCONTROL (SWITCH PORT)

flowcontrol (switch port)

Overview Use this command to enable flow control, and configure the flow control mode for

the switch port.

Use the no variant of this command to disable flow control for the specified switch

port.

Syntax flowcontrol {send|receive} {off|on}

no flowcontrol

Default By default, flow control is disabled.

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage The flow control mechanism specified by 802.3x is only for full duplex links. It

operates by sending PAUSE frames to the link partner to temporarily suspend

transmission on the link.

Flow control enables connected Ethernet ports to control traffic rates during

congestion by allowing congested nodes to pause link operation at the other end.

If one port experiences congestion, and cannot receive any more traffic, it notifies

the other port to stop sending until the condition clears. When the local device

detects congestion at its end, it notifies the remote device by sending a pause

frame. On receiving a pause frame, the remote device stops sending data packets,

which prevents loss of data packets during the congestion period.

Flow control is not recommended when running QoS or ACLs, because the

complex queuing, scheduling, and filtering configured by QoS or ACLs may be

slowed by applying flow control.

For half-duplex links, an older form of flow control known as backpressure is

supported. See the related backpressure command.

For flow control on async serial (console) ports, see the flowcontrol hardware

(asyn/console) command.

Parameter Description

receive When the port receives pause frames, it temporarily stops (pauses)

sending traffic.

on Enable the specified flow control.

off Disable the specified flow control.

send When the port is congested (receiving too much traffic), it sends

pause frames to request the other end to temporarily stop (pause)

sending traffic.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 394

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

FLOWCONTROL (SWITCH PORT)

Examples awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# flowcontrol receive on

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# flowcontrol send on

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# flowcontrol receive off

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# flowcontrol send off

Commands

backpressure

show running-config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 395

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

LINKFLAP ACTION

linkflap action

Overview Use this command to detect flapping on all ports. If more than 15 flaps occur in less

than 15 seconds the flapping port will shut down.

Use the no variant of this command to disable flapping detection at this rate.

Syntax linkflap action [shutdown]

no linkflap action

Default Linkflap action is disabled by default.

Mode Global Configuration

Example To enable the linkflap action command on the device, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# linkflap action shutdown

Parameter Description

linkflap Global setting for link flapping.

action Specify the action for port.

shutdown Shutdown the port.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 396

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

LOOP-PROTECTION LOOP-DETECT

loop-protection loop-detect

Overview Use this command to enable the loop-protection loop-detect feature and

configure its parameters.

Use the no variant of this command to disable the loop-protection loop-detect

feature.

Syntax loop-protection loop-detect [ldf-interval <period>]

[ldf-rx-window <frames>] [fast-block]

no loop-protection loop-detect

Default The loop-protection loop-detect feature is disabled by default. The default interval

is 10 seconds, and the default window size is 3 frames.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage See the “Loop Protection” section in the Switching Feature Overview and

Configuration Guide for relevant conceptual, configuration, and overview

information prior to applying this command.

Example To enable the loop-detect mechanism on the switch, and generate loop-detect

frames once every 5 seconds, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# loop-protection loop-detect ldf-interval 5

Commands

loop-protection action

loop-protection timeout

show loop-protection

thrash-limiting

Parameter Description

ldf-interval The time (in seconds) between successive loop-detect frames

being sent.

<period> Specify a period between 1 and 600 seconds. The default is 10

seconds.

ldf-rx-window The number of transmitted loop detect frames whose details

are held for comparing with frames arriving at the same port.

<frames> Specify a value for the window size between 1 and 5 frames.

The default is 3 frames.

[fast-block] The fast-block blocks transmitting port to keep partial

connectivity.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 397

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

LOOP-PROTECTION ACTION

loop-protection action

Overview Use this command to specify the protective action to apply when a network loop

is detected on an interface.

Use the no variant of this command to reset the loop protection actions to the

default action, vlan-disable, on an interface.

Syntax loop-protection action

{link-down|log-only|port-disable|vlan-disable|none}

no loop-protection action

Default loop-protection action vlan-disable

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage See the “Loop Protection” section in the Switching Feature Overview and

Configuration Guide for relevant conceptual, configuration, and overview

information prior to applying this command.

Example To disable the interface port1.0.4 and bring the link down when a network

loop is detected, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.4

awplus(config-if)# loop-protection action link-down

Commands

loop-protection loop-detect

loop-protection timeout

show loop-protection

thrash-limiting

Parameter Description

link-down Block all traffic on a port (or aggregated link) that detected the

loop, and take down the link.

log-only Details of loop conditions are logged. No action is applied to the

port (or aggregated link).

port-disable Block all traffic on interface for which the loop occurred, but keep

the link in the up state.

vlan-disable Block all traffic for the VLAN on which the loop traffic was

detected. Note that setting this parameter will also enable ingress

filtering. This is the default action.

none Applies no protective action.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 398

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

LOOP-PROTECTION ACTION-DELAY-TIME

loop-protection action-delay-time

Overview Use this command to sets the loop protection action delay time for an interface to

specified values in seconds. The action delay time specifies the waiting period for

the action.

Use the no variant of this command to reset the loop protection action delay time

for an interface to default.

Syntax loop-protection action-delay-time <0-86400>

no loop-protection action

Default Action delay timer is disabled by default.

Mode Interface Configuration

Example To configure a loop protection action delay time of 10 seconds on port 1.0.4, use

the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.4

awplus(config-if)# loop-protection action-delay-time 10

Commands

show loop-protection

Parameter Description

<0-86400> Time in seconds; 0 means action delay timer is disabled.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 399

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

LOOP-PROTECTION TIMEOUT

loop-protection timeout

Overview Use this command to specify the Loop Protection recovery action duration on an

interface.

Use the no variant of this command to set the loop protection timeout to the

default.

Syntax loop-protection timeout <duration>

no loop-protection timeout

Default The default is 7 seconds.

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage See the “Loop Protection” section in the Switching Feature Overview and

Configuration Guide for relevant conceptual, configuration, and overview

information prior to applying this command.

Example To configure a loop protection action timeout of 10 seconds for port1.0.4, use

the command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.4

awplus(config-if)# loop-protection timeout 10

Commands

loop-protection loop-detect

loop-protection action

show loop-protection

thrash-limiting

Parameter Description

<duration> The time (in seconds) for which the configured action will apply

before being disabled. This duration can be set between 0 and 86400

seconds (24 hours). The set of 0 means infinity so timeout does not

expire.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 400

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

MAC ADDRESS-TABLE ACQUIRE

mac address-table acquire

Overview Use this command to enable MAC address learning on the device.

Use the no variant of this command to disable learning.

Syntax mac address-table acquire

no mac address-table acquire

Default Learning is enabled by default for all instances.

Mode Global Configuration

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# mac address-table acquire

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 401

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

MAC ADDRESS-TABLE AGEING-TIME

mac address-table ageing-time

Overview Use this command to specify an ageing-out time for a learned MAC address. The

learned MAC address will persist for at least the specified time.

The no variant of this command will reset the ageing-out time back to the default

of 300 seconds (5 minutes).

Syntax mac address-table ageing-time <ageing-timer> none

no mac address-table ageing-time

Default The default ageing time is 300 seconds.

Mode Global Configuration

Examples The following commands specify various ageing timeouts on the device:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# mac address-table ageing-time 1000

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# mac address-table ageing-time none

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no mac address-table ageing-time

Parameter Description

<ageing-timer> <10-1000000> The number of seconds of persistence.

none Disable learned MAC address timeout.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 402

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

MAC ADDRESS-TABLE LOGGING

mac address-table logging

Overview Use this command to create log entries when the content of the FDB (forwarding

database) changes. Log messages are produced when a MAC address is added to

or removed from the FDB.

CAUTION: MAC address table logging may impact the performance of the switch. Only

enable it when necessary as a debug tool.

Use the no variant of this command to stop creating log entries when the content

of the FDB changes.

Syntax mac address-table logging

no mac address-table logging

Default MAC address table logging is disabled by default.

Mode User Exec/Privileged Exec

Usage When MAC address table logging is enabled, the switch produces the following

messages:

Note that rapid changes may not be logged. For example, if an entry is added and

then removed within a few seconds, those actions may not be logged.

To see whether MAC address table logging is enabled, use the command show

running-config.

Example To create log messages when the content of the FDB changes, use the command:

awplus# mac address-table logging

Commands

show running-config

Change Message format Example

MAC added MAC add <mac> <port> <vlan>MAC add eccd.6db5.68a7 port1.0.1 vlan2

MAC removed MAC remove <mac> <port> <vlan>MAC remove eccd.6db5.68a7 port1.0.1 vlan2

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 403

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

MAC ADDRESS-TABLE STATIC

mac address-table static

Overview Use this command to statically configure the MAC address-table to forward or

discard frames with a matching destination MAC address.

Syntax mac address-table static <mac-addr> {forward|discard} interface

<port> [vlan <vid>]

no mac address-table static <mac-addr> {forward|discard}

interface <port> [vlan <vid>]

Mode Global Configuration

Usage The mac address-table static command is only applicable to Layer 2 switched

traffic within a single VLAN. Do not apply the mac address-table static command

to Layer 3 switched traffic passing from one VLAN to another VLAN. Frames will not

be discarded across VLANs because packets are routed across VLANs. This

command only works on Layer 2 traffic.

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# mac address-table static 2222.2222.2222 forward

interface port1.0.4 vlan 3

Commands

clear mac address-table static

show mac address-table

Parameter Description

<mac-addr> The destination MAC address in HHHH.HHHH.HHHH format.

<port>The port to display information about. The port may be a switch port

(e.g. port1.0.4), a static channel group (e.g. sa2), or a dynamic

(LACP) channel group (e.g. po2).

<vid> The VLAN ID. If you do not specify a VLAN, its value defaults to vlan 1.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 404

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

MAC ADDRESS-TABLE THRASH-LIMIT

mac address-table thrash-limit

Overview Use this command to set the thrash limit on the device.

Thrashing occurs when a MAC address table rapidly “flips” its mapping of a single

MAC address between two subnets, usually as a result of a network loop.

Use the no variant of this command to disable thrash limiting.

Syntax mac address-table thrash-limit <rate>

no mac address-table thrash-limit

Default No thrash limiting

Mode Global Configuration

Usage Use this command to limit thrashing on the selected port range.

Example To apply a thrash limit of 100 MAC address flips per second:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# mac address-table thrash-limit 100

Commands

show mac address-table thrash-limit

Parameter Description

<rate> sets the maximum thrash rate at which limiting is applied. This rate can

be set between 5 and 255 MAC thrashing flips per second. Once the

thrash limit rate is reached, the port is considered to be thrashing.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 405

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

PLATFORM LOAD-BALANCING

platform load-balancing

Overview This command selects which address fields are used as inputs into the load

balancing algorithm for aggregated links. The output from this algorithm is used

to select which individual path a given packet will traverse within an aggregated

link.

The no variant of this command applies its default setting.

Syntax platform load-balancing {src-dst-mac|src-dst-ip}

no platform load-balancing

Default The default is src-dst-ip.

Mode Global configuration

Examples To set the load balancing algorithm to include only Layer 2 MAC addresses, enter:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# platform load-balancing src-dst-mac

To set the load balancing algorithm to include only Layer 3 IP addresses and L4

ports, enter:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# platform load-balancing src-dst-ip

Commands

show platform

Parameter Description

src-dst-mac Include the source and destination MAC addresses (Layer 2)

src-dst-ip Include the source and destination IP addresses (Layer 3) and

UDP/TCP source and destination ports.

If you choose this option, the algorithm will use MAC addresses

to calculate load balancing for Layer 2 and non-IP packets.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 406

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

PLATFORM STOP-UNREG-MC-FLOODING

platform stop-unreg-mc-flooding

Overview If a multicast stream is arriving at a network device, and that network device has

received no IGMP reports that request the receipt of the stream, then that stream

is referred to as "unregistered". IGMP snooping actively prevents the flooding of

unregistered streams to all ports in the VLAN on which the stream is received.

However, there are brief moments at which this prevention is not in operation, and

an unregistered stream may be briefly flooded. This command stops this flooding

during even those brief periods when IGMP snooping is not explicitly preventing

the flooding.

Use the no variant of this command to revert to default behavior and disable this

feature.

NOTE: This command should not be used within any IPv6 networks. IPv6 neighbor

discovery operation is inhibited by this feature.

This command does not affect the flooding of Local Network Control Block IPv4

multicast packets in the address range 224.0.0.1 to 224.0.0.255 (224.0.0/24). Such

packets will continue to be uninterruptedly flooded, as they need to be.

Syntax platform stop-unreg-mc-flooding

no platform stop-unreg-mc-flooding

Default This feature is disabled by default.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage This command stops the periodic flooding of unknown or unregistered multicast

packets when the Group Membership interval timer expires and there are no

subscribers to a multicast group. If there is multicast traffic in a VLAN without

subscribers, multicast traffic temporarily floods out of the VLAN when the Group

Membership interval timer expires, which happens when the switch does not get

replies from Group Membership queries.

This command also stops the initial flood of multicast packets that happens when

a new multicast source starts to send traffic. This flooding lasts until snooping

realises that this the multicast group is arriving at the switch, and puts an entry into

hardware to prevent it from being flooded.

This command is useful in networks where low-performance devices are attached.

The operation of such devices can be impaired by them receiving unnecessary

streams of traffic. For example, in sites where IP cameras are in use, the flooding of

video streams to a whole VLAN can send enough traffic to the cameras to cause

interruption of their video streaming.

Output Do not use this command in IPv6 networks. The following console message is

displayed after entering this command to warn you of this:

% WARNING: IPv6 will not work with this setting enabled

% Please consult the documentation for more information

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 407

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

PLATFORM STOP-UNREG-MC-FLOODING

Examples To enable this feature and stop multicast packet flooding, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# platform stop-unreg-mc-flooding

To disable this feature and allow multicast packet flooding, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no platform stop-unreg-mc-flooding

Commands

show platform

show running-config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 408

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

PLATFORM VLAN-STACKING-TPID

platform vlan-stacking-tpid

Overview This command specifies the Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) value that applies to all

frames that are carrying double tagged VLANs. All nested VLANs must use the

same TPID value. (This feature is sometimes referred to as VLAN stacking or VLAN

double-tagging.)

Use the no variant of this command to revert to the default TPID value (0x8100).

NOTE: Because the additional tag increases the frame size beyond 1522 bytes, you

must increase the MRU size to activate VLAN-stacking. Go into interface mode for the

appropriate ports and use the mru command.

Syntax platform vlan-stacking-tpid <tpid>

no platform vlan-stacking-tpid

Default The default TPID value is 0x8100.

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To set the VLAN stacking TPID value to 0x9100, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# platform vlan-stacking-tpid 9100

To reset the VLAN stacking TPID value to the default (0x8100), use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no platform vlan-stacking-tpid

Commands

switchport vlan-stacking (double tagging)

show platform

show running-config

Parameter Description

<tpid> The Ethernet type of the tagged packet, as a two byte hexadecimal

number.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 409

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

POLARITY

polarity

Overview This command sets the MDI/MDIX polarity on a copper-based switch port.

Syntax polarity {auto|mdi|mdix}

Default By default, switch ports set the polarity automatically (auto).

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage We recommend the default auto setting for MDI/MDIX polarity. Polarity applies to

copper 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T, and 1000BASE-T switch ports; it does not apply to

fiber ports. See the “MDI/MDIX Connection Modes” section in the Switching

Feature Overview and Configuration Guide for more information.

Example To set the polarity for port1.0.6 to fixed MDI mode, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.6

awplus(config-if)# polarity mdi

Parameter Description

mdi Sets the polarity to MDI (medium dependent interface).

mdix Sets the polarity to MDI-X (medium dependent interface crossover).

auto The switch port sets the polarity automatically. This is the default option.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 410

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SHOW DEBUGGING LOOPPROT

show debugging loopprot

Overview This command shows Loop Protection debugging information.

Syntax show debugging loopprot

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the enabled Loop Protection debugging modes, use the command:

awplus# show debugging loopprot

Commands

debug loopprot

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 411

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SHOW DEBUGGING PLATFORM PACKET

show debugging platform packet

Overview This command shows platform to CPU level packet debugging information.

Syntax show debugging platform packet

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the platform packet debugging information, use the command:

awplus# show debugging platform packet

Commands

debug platform packet

undebug platform packet

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 412

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SHOW FLOWCONTROL INTERFACE

show flowcontrol interface

Overview Use this command to display flow control information.

Syntax show flowcontrol interface <port>

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the flow control for the port1.0.5, use the command:

awplus# show flowcontrol interface port1.0.5

Output Figure 14-1: Example output from the show flowcontrol interface command

for a specific interface

Parameter Description

<port> Specifies the name of the port to be displayed.

Port Send FlowControl Receive FlowControl RxPause TxPause

admin oper admin oper

----- ------- -------- ------- -------- ------- -------

port1.0.5 on on on on 0 0

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 413

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SHOW INTERFACE ERR-DISABLED

show interface err-disabled

Overview Use this command to show the ports which have been dynamically shut down by

protocols running on the device and the protocols responsible for the shutdown.

Syntax show interface [<interface-range> err-disabled]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To show which protocols have shut down ports, use the commands:

awplus# show interface err-disabled

Output Figure 14-2: Example output from show interface err-disabled

Parameter Description

<interface-range> Interface range

err-disabled Brief summary of interfaces shut down by protocols

awplus#show interface err-disabled

Interface Reason

port1.0.1 loop protection

port1.0.2 loop protection

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 414

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SHOW INTERFACE SWITCHPORT

show interface switchport

Overview Use this command to show VLAN information about each switch port.

Syntax show interface switchport

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display VLAN information about each switch port, enter the command:

awplus# show interface switchport

Output Figure 14-3: Example output from the show interface switchport command

Commands

show interface memory

Interface name : port1.0.1

Switchport mode : access

Ingress filter : enable

Acceptable frame types : all

Default Vlan : 2

Configured Vlans : 2



Interface name : port1.0.2

Switchport mode : trunk

Ingress filter : enable

Acceptable frame types : all

Default Vlan : 1

Configured Vlans : 1 4 5 6 7 8

...

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 415

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SHOW LOOP-PROTECTION

show loop-protection

Overview Use this command to display the current loop protection setup for the device.

Syntax show loop-protection [interface <port-list>] [counters]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Usage This command is used to display the current configuration and operation of the

Loop Protection feature

Examples To display the current configuration status, use the command:

awplus# show loop-protection

Figure 14-4: Example output from the show loop-protection command

To display the counter information, use the command:

awplus# show loop-protection counters

Figure 14-5: Example output from the show loop-protection counters

command

Parameter Description

interface The interface selected for display.

<port-list>A port, a port range, or an aggregated link.

counters Displays counter information for loop protection.

awplus#show loop-protection



LDF Interval: 10

LDF Rx Window: 3

Fast Block: Disabled

Timeout

Int Enabled Action Status Timeout Remain Rx port

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

port1.0.1 Yes vlan-dis Normal 7 - -

port1.0.2 Yes vlan-dis Normal 7 - -

port1.0.3 Yes vlan-dis Normal 7 - -

...

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 416

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SHOW LOOP-PROTECTION

awplus#show loop-protection counters



Switch Loop Detection Counter



Interface Tx Rx Rx Invalid Last LDF Rx

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

port1.0.1

vlan1 60 0 0 -

port1.0.2

vlan1 0 0 0 -

port1.0.3

vlan1 0 0 0 -

...

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 417

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SHOW MAC ADDRESS-TABLE

show mac address-table

Overview Use this command to display the mac address-table for all configured VLANs.

Syntax show mac address-table

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Usage The show mac address-table command is only applicable to view a mac

address-table for Layer 2 switched traffic within VLANs.

Example To display the mac address-table, use the following command:

awplus# show mac address-table

Output See the below sample output captured when there was no traffic being switched:

See the sample output captured when packets were switched and mac addresses

were learned:

Note the new mac addresses learned for port1.0.4 and port1.0.6 added as

dynamic entries.

Note the first column of the output below shows VLAN IDs if multiple VLANs are

configured:

Also note manually configured static mac-addresses are shown to the right of the

type column:

awplus#show mac address-table



VLAN Port MAC State

1 unknown 0000.cd28.0752 static

ARP - 0000.cd00.0000 static

awplus#show mac address-table



VLAN Port MAC State

1 unknown 0000.cd28.0752 static

1 port1.0.6 0030.846e.9bf4 dynamic

1 port1.0.4 0030.846e.bac7 dynamic

ARP - 0000.cd00.0000 static

awplus#show mac address-table



VLAN Port MAC State

1 unknown 0000.cd28.0752 static

1 port1.0.4 0030.846e.bac7 dynamic

2 unknown 0000.cd28.0752 static

2 port1.0.6 0030.846e.9bf4 dynamic 

ARP - 0000.cd00.0000 static

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 418

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SHOW MAC ADDRESS-TABLE

Commands

clear mac address-table dynamic

clear mac address-table static

mac address-table static

awplus(config)#mac address-table static 0000.1111.2222 for int 

port1.0.3 vlan 2

awplus(config)#end

awplus#

awplus#show mac address-table



VLAN Port MAC State

1 unknown 0000.cd28.0752 static

1 port1.0.2 0030.846e.bac7 dynamic

2 port1.0.3 0000.1111.2222 static

2 unknown 0000.cd28.0752 static

2 port1.0.5 0030.846e.9bf4 dynamic

ARP - 0000.cd00.0000 static

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 419

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SHOW MAC ADDRESS-TABLE THRASH-LIMIT

show mac address-table thrash-limit

Overview Use this command to display the current thrash limit set for all interfaces on the

device.

Syntax show mac address-table thrash-limit

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the current, use the following command:

awplus# show mac address-table thrash-limit

Output Figure 14-6: Example output from the show mac address-table thrash-limit

command

Commands

mac address-table thrash-limit

% Thrash-limit 7 movements per second

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 420

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SHOW PLATFORM

show platform

Overview This command displays the settings configured by using the platform commands.

Syntax show platform

Mode Privileged Exec

Usage This command displays the settings in the running config. For changes in some of

these settings to take effect, the device must be rebooted with the new settings in

the startup config.

Example To check the settings configured with platform commands on the device, use the

following command:

awplus# show platform

Output Figure 14-7: Example output from the show platform command

awplus# show platform



MAC vlan hashing algorithm crc32l

L3 hashing algorithm crc32l

stop-unreg-mc-flooding off

Vlan-stacking TPID 0x8100

Table 5: Parameters in the output of the show platform command

Parameter Description

MAC vlan hashing

algorithm

The MAC VLAN hash-key-generating algorithm (set with

the platform mac-vlan-hashing-algorithm command). The

default algorithm is crc32l. The algorithm may need to be

changed in rare circumstances in which hash collisions

occur.

L3 hashing algorithm The L3 VLAN hash-key-generating algorithm (set with the

platform l3-vlan-hashing-algorithm command). The

default algorithm is crc32l. The algorithm may need to be

changed in rare circumstances in which hash collisions

occur.

Load Balancing Which packet fields are used in the channel load

balancing algorithm (set with the platform load-balancing

command).

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 421

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SHOW PLATFORM

stop-unreg-mc-flooding Whether the stop-unreg-mc-flooding feature is on or off

(set with the platform stop-unreg-mc-flooding

command). This feature prevents flooding of unregistered

multicast packets in the occasional situations in which

IGMP snooping does not prevent it.

Vlan-stacking TPID The value of the TPID set in the Ethernet type field when a

frame has a double VLAN tag (set with the platform

vlan-stacking-tpid command).

Table 5: Parameters in the output of the show platform command (cont.)

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 422

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SHOW PLATFORM CLASSIFIER STATISTICS UTILIZATION BRIEF

show platform classifier statistics utilization

brief

Overview This command displays the number of used entries available for various platform

functions, and the percentage that number of entries represents of the total

available.

Syntax show platform classifier statistics utilization brief

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To display the platform classifier utilization statistics, use the following command:

awplus# show platform classifier statistics utilization brief

Output Figure 14-8: Output from the show platform classifier statistics utilization

brief command

Commands

show platform

awplus#show platform classifier statistics utilization brief



[Instance 0]

Number of Entries:

Policy Type Group ID Used / Total

----------------------------------------------

ACL 1476395009 0 / 118 ( 0%)

Web Auth Inactive 0 / 0 ( 0%)

QoS 0 / 128 ( 0%)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 423

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SHOW PLATFORM PORT

show platform port

Overview This command displays the various port registers or platform counters for

specified switchports.

Syntax show platform port [<port-list>|counters]

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples To display port registers for port1.0.1 and port1.0.2 use the following command:

awplus# show platform port port1.0.1-port1.0.2

To display platform counters for port1.0.1 and port1.0.2 use the following

command:

awplus# show platform port port1.0.1-port1.0.2 counters

Parameter Description

<port-list> The ports to display information about. A port-list can be:

• a continuous range of ports separated by a hyphen, e.g.

port1.0.1-1.0.6

• a comma-separated list of ports and port ranges, e.g.

port1.0.1,port1.0.4-1.0.6.

counters Show the platform counters.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 424

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SHOW PLATFORM PORT

Output Figure 14-9: Example output from the show platform port command

awplus#show platform port port1.0.1

Phy register value for port1.0.1 (ifindex: 5001)



00:1140 01:79ed 02:600d 03:85b0 04:01e1 05:c1e1 06:006d 07:2001 

08:4d44 09:0600 0a:3800 0b:0000 0c:0000 0d:4007 0e:0000 0f:3000 

10:0021 11:0f00 12:0000 13:0000 14:0000 15:0238 16:0000 17:0000 

18:4c00 19:871c 1a:243e 1b:ffff 1c:0002 1d:22d7 1e:0000 1f:0000 



Port configuration for lport 0x08002002:

Phy Driver: 542XX Gigabit PHY Driver

enabled: 1

loopback: 0

link: 1

speed: 1000 max speed: 1000

duplex: 1

linkscan: 2

autonegotiate: 1

master: 2

tx pause: 0 rx pause: 0

untagged vlan: 4000

vlan filter: 3

stp state: 4

learn: 5

discard: 0

jam: 0

max frame size: 1500

MC Disable SA: no

MC Disable TTL: no

MC egress untag: 0

MC egress vid: 1

MC TTL threshold: -1

Table 6: Parameters in the output from the show platform port command

Parameter Description

Ethernet MAC counters

Combined receive/

transmit packets by

size (octets) counters

Number of packets in each size range received and

transmitted.

64 Number of 64 octet packets received and

transmitted.

65 - 127 Number of 65 - 127 octet packets received and

transmitted.

128 - 255 Number of 128 - 255 octet packets received and

transmitted.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 425

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SHOW PLATFORM PORT

256 - 511 Number of 256 - 511 octet packets received and

transmitted.

512 - 1023 Number of 512 - 1023 octet packets received and

transmitted.

1024 - MaxPktSz Number of packets received and transmitted with

size 1024 octets to the maximum packet length.

1519 - 1522 Number of 1519 - 1522 octet packets received and

transmitted.

1519 - 2047 Number of 1519 - 2047 octet packets received and

transmitted.

2048 - 4095 Number of 2048 - 4095 octet packets received and

transmitted.

4096 - 9216 Number of 4096 - 9216 octet packets received and

transmitted.

General Counters

Receive Counters for traffic received.

Octets Number of octets received.

Pkts Number of packets received.

FCSErrors Number of FCS (Frame Check Sequence) error

events received.

UnicastPkts Number of unicast packets received.

MulticastPkts Number of multicast packets received.

BroadcastPkts Number of broadcast packets received.

PauseMACCtlFrms Number of Pause MAC Control Frames received.

OversizePkts Number of oversize packets received.

Fragments Number of fragments received.

Jabbers Number of jabber frames received.

UnsupportOpcode Number of MAC Control frames with unsupported

opcode received.

AlignmentErrors Receive Alignment Error Frame Counter.

SysErDurCarrier Receive Code Error Counter.

Table 6: Parameters in the output from the show platform port command

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 426

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SHOW PLATFORM PORT

CarrierSenseErr Receive False Carrier Counter.

UndersizePkts Number of undersized packets received.

Transmit Counters for traffic transmitted.

Octets Number of octets transmitted.

Pkts Number of packets transmitted.

UnicastPkts Number of unicast packets transmitted.

MulticastPkts Number of multicast packets transmitted.

BroadcastPkts Number of broadcast packets transmitted.

PauseMACCtlFrms Number of Pause MAC Control Frames transmitted.

OversizePkts Number of oversize packets transmitted.

FrameWDeferrdTx Transmit Single Deferral Frame counter.

FrmWExcesDefer Transmit Multiple Deferral Frame counter.

SingleCollsnFrm Transmit Single Collision Frame counter.

MultCollsnFrm Transmit Multiple Collision Frame counter.

LateCollisions Transmit Late Collision Frame counter.

ExcessivCollsns Transmit Excessive Collision Frame counter.

Collisions Transmit Total Collision counter

Layer 3 Counters

ifInUcastPkts Inbound interface Unicast counter.

ifInDiscards Inbound interface Discarded Packets counter.

ipInHdrErrors Inbound interface Header Errors counter.

ifOutUcastPkts Outbound interface Unicast counter.

ifOutErrors Outbound interface Error counter.

Miscellaneous Counters

DropEvents Drop Event counter

ifOutDiscards Outbound interface Discarded Packets counter.

MTUExcdDiscard Receive MTU Check Error Frame Counter

Table 6: Parameters in the output from the show platform port command

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 427

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SHOW PORT-SECURITY INTERFACE

show port-security interface

Overview Use this command to show the current port-security configuration and the switch

port status.

Syntax show port-security interface <port>

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To see the port-security status on port1.0.1, use the following command:

awplus# show port-security interface port1.0.1

Output Figure 14-10: Example output from the show port-security interface command

Commands

clear port-security intrusion

show port-security intrusion

switchport port-security

switchport port-security aging

switchport port-security maximum

switchport port-security violation

Parameter Description

<port> The port to display information about. The port may be a switch

port (e.g. port1.0.4), a static channel group (e.g. sa3), or a

dynamic (LACP) channel group (e.g. po4).

Port Security configuration

Security Enabled : YES

Port Status : ENABLED

Violation Mode : TRAP

Aging : OFF

Maximum MAC Addresses : 3

Total MAC ddresses : 1

Lock Status : UNLOCKED

Security Violation Count : 0

Last Violation Source Address : None

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 428

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SHOW PORT-SECURITY INTRUSION

show port-security intrusion

Overview Use this command to show the intrusion list. If the port is not specified, the entire

intrusion table is shown.

Syntax show port-security intrusion [interface <port>]

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To see the intrusion list on port1.0.1, use the following command:

awplus# show port-security intrusion interface port1.0.1

Output Figure 14-11: Example output from the show port-security intrusion command

for port 1.0.1

Commands

clear port-security intrusion

show port-security interface

switchport port-security

switchport port-security aging

switchport port-security maximum

switchport port-security violation

Parameter Description

interface Specify a port

<port>The port to display information about. The port may be a switch

port (e.g. port1.0.4), a static channel group (e.g. sa3), or a

dynamic (LACP) channel group (e.g. po4).

Port Security Intrusion List 

Interface: port1.0.1 -3 intrusion(s) detected 

11-22-33-44-55-04 11-22-33-44-55-06 11-22-33-44-55-08

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 429

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SHOW STORM-CONTROL

show storm-control

Overview Use this command to display storm-control information for all interfaces or a

particular interface.

Syntax show storm-control [<port>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display storm-control information for port1.0.2, use the following command:

awplus# show storm-control port1.0.2

Output Figure 14-12: Example output from the show storm-control command for

port1.0.2

Commands

storm-control level

Parameter Description

<port>The port to display information about. The port may be a switch port

(e.g. port1.0.4), a static channel group (e.g. sa2), or a dynamic (LACP)

channel group (e.g. po2).

Port BcastLevel McastLevel DlfLevel

port1.0.2 40. 0% 100. 0% 100. 0%

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 430

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SPEED

speed

Overview This command changes the speed of the specified port. You can optionally specify

the speed or speeds that get autonegotiated, so autonegotiation is only

attempted at the specified speeds.

To see the currently-negotiated speed for ports whose links are up, use the show

interface command. To see the configured speed (when different from the

default), use the show running-config command.

Syntax speed {10|100|1000}

speed auto [10] [100] [1000]

The following table shows the speed options for each type of port.

Mode Interface Configuration

Default By default, ports autonegotiate speed (except for 100Base-FX ports which do not

support auto-negotiation, so default to 100Mbps).

Usage Switch ports in a static or dynamic (LACP) channel group must have the same port

speed and be in full duplex mode. Once switch ports have been aggregated into a

channel group, you can set the speed of all the switch ports in the channel group

by applying this command to the channel group.

NOTE: If multiple speeds are specified after the auto option to autonegotiate speeds,

then the device only attempts autonegotiation at those specified speeds.

Examples To set the speed of a tri-speed port to 100Mbps, enter the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# speed 100

Port type Speed Options (units are Mbps)

RJ-45 copper ports auto (default)

100

1000

tri-speed copper SFPs auto (default)

100

1000

100Mbps fiber SFPs 100

1000Mbps copper or fiber SFPs auto (default)

1000

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 431

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SPEED

To return the port to auto-negotiating its speed, enter the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# speed auto

To set the port to auto-negotiate its speed at 100Mbps and 1000Mbps, enter the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# speed auto 100 1000

To set the port to auto-negotiate its speed at 1000Mbps only, enter the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# speed auto 1000

Commands

duplex

polarity

show interface

speed (asyn)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 432

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

STORM-CONTROL LEVEL

storm-control level

Overview Use this command to specify the speed limiting level for broadcasting, multicast,

or destination lookup failure (DLF) traffic for the port. Storm-control limits the

selected traffic type to the specified percentage of the maximum port speed.

Use the no variant of this command to disable storm-control for broadcast,

multicast or DLF traffic.

Syntax storm-control {broadcast|multicast|dlf} level <level>

no storm-control {broadcast|multicast|dlf} level

Default By default, storm-control is disabled.

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage Flooding techniques are used to block the forwarding of unnecessary flooded

traffic. A packet storm occurs when a large number of broadcast packets are

received on a port. Forwarding these packets can cause the network to slow down

or time out.

Example To limit broadcast traffic on port1.0.2 to 30% of the maximum port speed, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# storm-control broadcast level 30

Commands

show storm-control

Parameter Description

<level> <0-100> Specifies the percentage of the maximum port speed

allowed for broadcast, multicast or destination lookup failure traffic.

broadcast Applies the storm-control to broadcast frames.

multicast Applies the storm-control to multicast frames.

dlf Applies the storm-control to destination lookup failure traffic.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 433

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SWITCHPORT PORT-SECURITY

switchport port-security

Overview Use this command to enable the port-security feature. This feature is also known

as the port-based learn limit. It allows the user to set the maximum number of MAC

addresses that each port can learn.

Use the no variant of this command to disable the port-security feature.

Syntax switchport port-security

no switchport port-security

Mode Interface Configuration

Examples To enable the port-security feature on port1.0.4, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.4

awplus(config-if)# switchport port-security

To disable the port-security feature on port1.0.4, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.4

awplus(config-if)# no switchport port-security

Commands

clear port-security intrusion

show port-security interface

show port-security intrusion

switchport port-security aging

switchport port-security maximum

switchport port-security violation

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 434

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SWITCHPORT PORT-SECURITY AGING

switchport port-security aging

Overview Use this command to set MAC addresses that have been learned by port security

to age out.

Use the no variant of this command to set the MAC addresses to not age out.

Syntax switchport port-security aging

no switchport port-security aging

Mode Interface Configuration

Examples To set port1.0.4 so that the MAC addresses that have been learned by port security

age out, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.4

awplus(config-if)# switchport port-security aging

To stop the MAC addresses that have been learned by port security from aging out

on port1.0.4, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.4

awplus(config-if)# no switchport port-security aging

Commands

clear port-security intrusion

show port-security interface

show port-security intrusion

switchport port-security

switchport port-security maximum

switchport port-security violation

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 435

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SWITCHPORT PORT-SECURITY MAXIMUM

switchport port-security maximum

Overview Use this command to set the maximum number of MAC addresses that each port

can learn.

Use the no variant of this command to unset the maximum number of MAC

addresses that each port can learn. This is same as setting the maximum number

to 0. This command also resets the intrusion list table.

If a new MAC is seen on a port with port security enabled and the MAC is statically

configured for another port, a violation is triggered. The maximum learn limit will

be ignored and the specified intrusion action for the port will be carried out.

Syntax switchport port-security maximum <0-256>

no switchport port-security maximum

Mode Interface Configuration

Examples To learn 3 MAC addresses on port1.0.4, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.4

awplus(config-if)# switchport port-security maximum 3

To remove the MAC learning limit on port1.0.4, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.4

awplus(config-if)# no switchport port-security maximum

Commands

clear port-security intrusion

show port-security interface

show port-security intrusion

switchport port-security

switchport port-security aging

switchport port-security violation

Parameter Description

maximum <0-256> Specify the maximum number of addresses to learn.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 436

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

SWITCHPORT PORT-SECURITY VIOLATION

switchport port-security violation

Overview Use this command to set the action taken on a switch port when the port exceeds

the learning limits. The port action can be either shutdown, restrict or protect. If

shutdown is set, the physical link will be disabled and “shutdown” will be shown

in the config. If restrict is set, the packet from the un-authorized MAC will be

discarded and SNMP TRAP will be generated to alert management. If protect is set,

the packet will simply be discarded by the packet processor silently.

Use the no variant of this command to set the violation action to default. The

default violation action is protect.

Syntax switchport port-security violation {shutdown|restrict|protect}

no switchport port-security violation

Mode Interface Configuration

Examples To set the action to be shutdown on port1.0.4, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.4

awplus(config-if)# switchport port-security violation shutdown

To set the port-security action to the default (protect) on port1.0.4, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.4

awplus(config-if)# no switchport port-security violation

Commands

clear port-security intrusion

show port-security interface

show port-security intrusion

switchport port-security

switchport port-security aging

switchport port-security maximum

Parameter Description

shutdown Disable the port.

restrict Alert the network administrator.

protect Discard the packet.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 437

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

THRASH-LIMITING

thrash-limiting

Overview Sets and configures the thrash limit action that will be applied to any port on the

device when a thrashing condition is detected. The thrash-limiting timeout

specifies the time, in seconds, for which the thrash action is employed.

Syntax thrash-limiting {[action

{learn-disable|link-down|port-disable|vlan-disable|none}]

[timeout <0-86400>]}

no thrash-limiting {action|timeout}

Default The default action is learn-disable.

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage See the “Thrash Limiting” section in the Switching Feature Overview and

Configuration Guide for relevant conceptual, configuration, and overview

information prior to applying this command.

Examples To set the action to learn disable for port1.0.4, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.4

awplus(config-if)# thrash-limiting action learn-disable

To block all traffic on a vlan, use the following command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# thrash-limiting action vlan-disable

To set the thrash limiting timeout to 5 seconds, use the following command:

awplus(config-if)# thrash-limiting timeout 5

Parameter Description

action The mac thrashing detected action. The default is vlan-disable.

learn-disable Disable mac address learning

link-down Block all traffic on an interface - link down

port-disable Block all traffic on an interface - link remains up

vlan-disable Block all traffic on a vlan. Note that setting this parameter will

also enable ingress filtering.

none No thrash action

timeout Set the duration for the thrash action

<0-86400> The duration of the applied thrash action in seconds. The

default is 1 seconds.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 438

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

THRASH-LIMITING

To set the thrash limiting action to its default, use the following command:

awplus(config-if)# no thrash-limiting action

To set the thrash limiting timeout to its default, use the following command:

awplus(config-if)# no thrash-limiting timeout

Commands

loop-protection loop-detect

loop-protection action

loop-protection timeout

show loop-protection

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 439

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

UNDEBUG LOOPPROT

undebug loopprot

Overview This command applies the functionality of the no debug loopprot command.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 440

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SWITCHING COMMANDS

UNDEBUG PLATFORM PACKET

undebug platform packet

Overview This command applies the functionality of the no debug platform packet

command.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 441

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference of commands used to configure

VLANs. For more information see the VLAN Feature Overview and Configuration

Guide.

Command List •“port-vlan-forwarding-priority” on page 443

•“private-vlan” on page 446

•“private-vlan association” on page 447

•“show port-vlan-forwarding-priority” on page 448

•“show vlan” on page 449

•“show vlan access-map” on page 450

•“show vlan filter” on page 451

•“show vlan private-vlan” on page 452

•“switchport access vlan” on page 453

•“switchport mode access” on page 454

•“switchport mode private-vlan” on page 455

•“switchport mode private-vlan trunk promiscuous” on page 456

•“switchport mode private-vlan trunk secondary” on page 458

•“switchport mode trunk” on page 460

•“switchport private-vlan host-association” on page 461

•“switchport private-vlan mapping” on page 462

•“switchport trunk allowed vlan” on page 463

•“switchport trunk native vlan” on page 466

•“switchport vlan-stacking (double tagging)” on page 467

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 442

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

•“switchport voice dscp” on page 468

•“switchport voice vlan” on page 469

•“switchport voice vlan priority” on page 471

•“vlan” on page 472

•“vlan access-map” on page 473

•“vlan database” on page 474

•“vlan filter” on page 475

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 443

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

PORT-VLAN-FORWARDING-PRIORITY

port-vlan-forwarding-priority

Overview Use this command to specify which protocol has the highest priority for controlling

transitions from blocking to forwarding traffic, when more than one of EPSR, Loop

Protection, and MAC thrashing protection are used on the switch.

These protocols use the same mechanism to block or forward traffic. This

command specifies either EPSR or Loop Protection as the highest priority protocol.

Setting the priority stops contention between protocols.

For more information, see the Usage section below.

CAUTION: The loop-protection and none parameter options must not be set on an

EPSR master node. Use the epsr parameter option on an EPSR master node instead.

Setting this command incorrectly on an EPSR master node could cause unexpected

broadcast storms.

Use the no variant of this command to restore the default highest priority protocol

back to the default of EPSR.

For more information about EPSR, see the EPSR Feature Overview and

Configuration_Guide.

Syntax port-vlan-forwarding-priority {epsr|loop-protection|none}

no port-vlan-forwarding-priority

Default By default, the highest priority protocol is EPSR

Mode Global Configuration

Usage Only one of EPSR, Loop Protection and MAC Thrashing protection usually needs to

be configured on a switch, because they perform similar functions—each prevents

network loops by blocking a selected port for each (loop-containing) VLAN.

However, if more than one of these three features is configured on a switch, you

can use this command to prioritize either EPSR or Loop Protection when their

Parameter Description

epsr Sets EPSR as the highest priority protocol. Use this parameter on

an EPSR master node to avoid unexpected broadcast storms.

loop-

protection

Sets Loop Protection as the highest priority protocol.

Note that this option must not be set on an EPSR master node.

Use the epsr parameter option on an EPSR master node to avoid

unexpected broadcast storms.

none Sets the protocols to have equal priority. This was the previous

behavior before this command was added, and allows protocols

to override each other to set a port to forwarding a VLAN.

Note that this option must not be set on a EPSR master node.

Use the epsr parameter option on an EPSR master node to avoid

unexpected broadcast storms.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 444

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

PORT-VLAN-FORWARDING-PRIORITY

effects on a port would conflict and override each other. Without this command,

each protocol could set a port to forwarding for a VLAN, sometimes overriding the

previous setting by another protocol to block the port. This could sometimes lead

to unexpected broadcast storms.

This command means that, when a protocol is set to have the highest priority over

a data VLAN on a port, it will not allow other protocols to put that port-vlan into a

forwarding state if the highest priority protocol blocked it.

The priority mechanism is only used for blocking-to-forwarding transitions;

protocols remain independent on the forwarding-to-blocking transitions.

For example, with an EPSR master node in a two-node ESPR ring with the following

settings:

• The EPSR master node primary port is configured to switchport interface

port1.0.1

• The EPSR master node secondary port is configured to switchport interface

port1.0.2

• The EPSR master node control VLAN is configured to VLAN interface vlan10

• The EPSR master node has a first data VLAN configured to VLAN interface

vlan20

• The EPSR master node has a second data VLAN configured to VLAN interface

vlan30.

Initially, the EPSR ring is complete, with port1.0.2 blocking data VLANs vlan20 and

vlan30 and some broadcast traffic flowing through. If the user removes vlan30

from EPSR, a storm is created on vlan30. MAC thrashing protection detects it and

blocks vlan30.

Then after the storm has stopped, MAC thrashing protection sets it to forwarding

again and it keeps oscillating between forwarding and blocking. In the meantime,

the user adds back vlan30 to EPSR as a data VLAN and EPSR blocks it on port1.0.2.

If the priority is set to none (port-vlan-forwarding-priority none), MAC thrashing

protection notices that the storm has stopped again and decides to put vlan30 on

port1.0.2 into forwarding state. This overrides what EPSR requires for this

port-VLAN and creates a storm.

If the priority is set to EPSR or default (port-vlan-forwarding-priority epsr), MAC

thrashing protection notices that the storm has stopped again and attempts to put

vlan30 on port1.0.2 into forwarding state. The higher priority protocol (EPSR) is

blocking the VLAN on this port, so it stays blocking and no storm occurs.

Example To prioritize EPSR over Loop Protection or MAC Thrashing protection settings, so

that Loop Protection or MAC Thrashing protection cannot set a port to the

forwarding state for a VLAN if EPSR has set it to the blocking state, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# port-vlan-forwarding-priority epsr

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 445

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

PORT-VLAN-FORWARDING-PRIORITY

To prioritize Loop Protection over EPSR or MAC Thrashing protection settings, so

that EPSR or MAC Thrashing protection cannot set a port to the forwarding state

for a VLAN if Loop Protection has set it to the blocking state, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# port-vlan-forwarding-priority loop-protection

To set EPSR, Loop Protection, and MAC Thrashing protection protocols to have

equal priority for port forwarding and blocking, which allows the protocols to

override each other to set a port to the forwarding or blocking states, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# port-vlan-forwarding-priority none

To restore the default highest priority protocol back to the default of EPSR, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no port-vlan-forwarding-priority

Commands

show port-vlan-forwarding-priority

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 446

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

PRIVATE-VLAN

private-vlan

Overview Use this command to a create a private VLAN. Private VLANs can be either primary

or secondary. Secondary VLANs can be ether community or isolated.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the specified private VLAN.

For more information, see the VLAN Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax private-vlan <vlan-id> {community|isolated|primary}

no private-vlan <vlan-id> {community|isolated|primary}

Mode VLAN Configuration

Examples awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# vlan database

awplus(config-vlan)# vlan 2 name vlan2 state enable

awplus(config-vlan)# vlan 3 name vlan3 state enable

awplus(config-vlan)# vlan 4 name vlan4 state enable

awplus(config-vlan)# private-vlan 2 primary

awplus(config-vlan)# private-vlan 3 isolated

awplus(config-vlan)# private-vlan 4 community

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# vlan database

awplus(config-vlan)# no private-vlan 2 primary

awplus(config-vlan)# no private-vlan 3 isolated

awplus(config-vlan)# no private-vlan 4 community

Parameter Description

<vlan-id>VLAN ID in the range <2-4094> for the VLAN which is to be made a

private VLAN.

community Community VLAN.

isolated Isolated VLAN.

primary Primary VLAN.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 447

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

PRIVATE-VLAN ASSOCIATION

private-vlan association

Overview Use this command to associate a secondary VLAN to a primary VLAN. Only one

isolated VLAN can be associated to a primary VLAN. Multiple community VLANs

can be associated to a primary VLAN.

Use the no variant of this command to remove association of all the secondary

VLANs to a primary VLAN.

For more information, see the VLAN Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax private-vlan <primary-vlan-id> association {add

<secondary-vlan-id>|remove <secondary-vlan-id>}

no private-vlan <primary-vlan-id> association

Mode VLAN Configuration

Examples The following commands associate primary VLAN 2 with secondary VLAN 3:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# vlan database

awplus(config-vlan)# private-vlan 2 association add 3

The following commands remove the association of primary VLAN 2 with

secondary VLAN 3:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# vlan database

awplus(config-vlan)# private-vlan 2 association remove 3

The following commands remove all secondary VLAN associations of primary

VLAN 2:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# vlan database

awplus(config-vlan)# no private-vlan 2 association

Parameter Description

<primary-vlan-id>VLAN ID of the primary VLAN.

<secondary-vlan-id>VLAN ID of the secondary VLAN

(either isolated or community).

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 448

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

SHOW PORT-VLAN-FORWARDING-PRIORITY

show port-vlan-forwarding-priority

Overview Use this command to display the highest priority protocol that controls port-vlan

forwarding or blocking traffic. This command displays whether EPSR or Loop

Protection is set as the highest priority for determining whether a port forwards a

VLAN, as set by the port-vlan-forwarding-priority command.

For more information about EPSR, see the EPSR Feature Overview and

Configuration_Guide.

Syntax show port-vlan-forwarding-priority

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To display the highest priority protocol, use the command:

awplus# show port-vlan-forwarding-priority

Output Figure 15-1: Example output from the show port-vlan-forwarding-priority

command

Commands

port-vlan-forwarding-priority

Port-vlan Forwarding Priority: EPSR

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 449

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

SHOW VLAN

show vlan

Overview Use this command to display information about a particular VLAN by specifying its

VLAN ID. Selecting all will display information for all the VLANs configured.

Syntax show vlan

{all|brief|dynamic|static|auto|static-ports|<1-4094>}

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display information about VLAN 2, use the command:

awplus# show vlan 2

Output Figure 15-2: Example output from the show vlan command

Commands

vlan

Parameter Description

<1-4094> Display information about the VLAN specified by the VLAN ID.

all Display information about all VLANs on the device.

brief Display information about all VLANs on the device.

dynamic Display information about all VLANs learned dynamically.

static Display information about all statically configured VLANs.

auto Display information about all auto-configured VLANs.

static-ports Display static egress/forbidden ports.

VLAN ID Name Type State Member ports

(u)-Untagged, (t)-Tagged

======= ================ ======= ======= ====================================

2 VLAN0002 STATIC ACTIVE port1.0.3(u) port1.0.4(u) port1.0.5(u)

port1.0.6(u)

...

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 450

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

SHOW VLAN ACCESS-MAP

show vlan access-map

Overview Use this command to display information about the configured VLAN

access-maps. VLAN access-maps contain a series of ACLs and enable you to filter

traffic ingressing specified VLANs.

Syntax show vlan access-map [<name>]

Mode User Exec/Privileged Exec

Example To display the ACLs in all access-maps, use the command:

awplus# show vlan access-map

Output Figure 15-3: Example output from show vlan access-map

Commands

vlan access-map

Command

changes

Version 5.4.6-2.1: command added

Parameter Description

<name> The name of the access-map to display.

awplus#show vlan access-map 



Vlan access map : deny_all 

Hardware MAC access list 4000

10 deny any any 



Vlan access map : ip_range 

Hardware IP access list 3000

10 deny ip 192.168.1.1/24 any

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 451

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

SHOW VLAN FILTER

show vlan filter

Overview Use this command to display information about the configured VLAN filters. VLAN

filters apply access-maps (and therefore ACLs) to VLANs. This enables you to filter

traffic ingressing specified VLANs.

Syntax show vlan filter [<access-map-name>]

Mode User Exec/Privileged Exec

Example To display information about the filter that uses the access-map named “deny_all”,

use the command:

awplus# show vlan filter deny_all

Output Figure 15-4: Example output from show vlan filter

Commands

vlan access-map

vlan filter

Command

changes

Version 5.4.6-2.1: command added

Parameter Description

<access-map-name> The name of an access-map. The command output displays

only the filters that use that access-map.

awplus#show vlan filter deny_all 

Vlan filter : deny_all

direction : ingress 

vlan list : 48-49

access map : deny_all

Hardware MAC access list 4000 

10 deny any any

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 452

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

SHOW VLAN PRIVATE-VLAN

show vlan private-vlan

Overview Use this command to display the private VLAN configuration and associations.

Syntax show vlan private-vlan

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the private VLAN configuration and associations, enter the command:

awplus# show vlan private-vlan

Output Figure 15-5: Example output from the show vlan private-vlan command

Commands

private-vlan

private-vlan association

awplus#show vlan private-vlan

PRIMARY SECONDARY TYPE INTERFACES

------- --------- ---------- ----------

2 3 isolated

2 4 community

8 isolated

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 453

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

SWITCHPORT ACCESS VLAN

switchport access vlan

Overview Use this command to change the port-based VLAN of the current port.

Use the no variant of this command to change the port-based VLAN of this port to

the default VLAN, vlan1.

Syntax switchport access vlan <vlan-id>

no switchport access vlan

Default Reset the default VLAN 1 to specified switchports using the negated form of this

command.

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage Any untagged frame received on this port will be associated with the specified

VLAN.

Examples To change the port-based VLAN to VLAN 3 for port1.0.2, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# switchport access vlan 3

To reset the port-based VLAN to the default VLAN 1 for port1.0.2, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# no switchport access vlan

Commands

show interface switchport

show vlan

Parameter Description

<vlan-id><1-4094> The port-based VLAN ID for the port.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 454

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

SWITCHPORT MODE ACCESS

switchport mode access

Overview Use this command to set the switching characteristics of the port to access mode.

Received frames are classified based on the VLAN characteristics, then accepted or

discarded based on the specified filtering criteria.

Syntax switchport mode access [ingress-filter {enable|disable}]

Default By default, ports are in access mode with ingress filtering on.

Usage Use access mode to send untagged frames only.

Mode Interface Configuration

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# switchport mode access ingress-filter enable

Validation

Command

show interface switchport

Parameter Description

ingress-filter Set the ingress filtering for the received frames.

enable Turn on ingress filtering for received frames. This is the default.

disable Turn off ingress filtering to accept frames that do not meet the

classification criteria.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 455

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

SWITCHPORT MODE PRIVATE-VLAN

switchport mode private-vlan

Overview Use this command to make a Layer 2 port a private VLAN host port or a

promiscuous port.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the configuration.

Syntax switchport mode private-vlan {host|promiscuous}

no switchport mode private-vlan {host|promiscuous}

Mode Interface Configuration

Examples awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan host

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.3

awplus(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan promiscuous

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.4

awplus(config-if)# no switchport mode private-vlan promiscuous

Commands

switchport private-vlan mapping

Parameter Description

host This port type can communicate with all other host ports assigned to

the same community VLAN, but it cannot communicate with the

ports in the same isolated VLAN. All communications outside of this

VLAN must pass through a promiscuous port in the associated

primary VLAN.

promiscuous A promiscuous port can communicate with all interfaces, including

the community and isolated ports within a private VLAN.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 456

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

SWITCHPORT MODE PRIVATE-VLAN TRUNK PROMISCUOUS

switchport mode private-vlan trunk

promiscuous

Overview Use this command to enable a port in trunk mode to be promiscuous port for

isolated VLANs.

Use the no variant of this command to remove a port in trunk mode as a

promiscuous port for isolated VLANs. You must first remove the secondary port, or

ports, in trunk mode associated with the promiscuous port with the no switchport

mode private-vlan trunk secondary command.

Syntax switchport mode private-vlan trunk promiscuous group <group-id>

no switchport mode private-vlan trunk promiscuous

Default By default, a port in trunk mode is disabled as a promiscuous port.

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage A port must be put in trunk mode with switchport mode trunk command before it

can be enabled as a promiscuous port.

To add VLANs to be trunked over the promiscuous port, use the switchport trunk

allowed vlan command. These VLANs can be isolated VLANs, or non-private VLANs.

To configure the native VLAN for the promiscuous port, use the switchport trunk

native vlan command. The native VLAN can be an isolated VLAN, or a non-private

VLAN.

When you enable a promiscuous port, all of the secondary port VLANs associated

with the promiscuous port via the group ID number must be added to the

promiscuous port. In other words, the set of VLANs on the promiscuous port must

be a superset of all the VLANs on the secondary ports within the group.

Parameter Description

<group-id>The group ID is a numeric value in the range 1 to 32 that is

used to associate the promiscuous port with secondary ports.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 457

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

SWITCHPORT MODE PRIVATE-VLAN TRUNK PROMISCUOUS

Examples To create the isolated VLANs 2, 3 and 4 and then enable port1.0.2 in trunk

mode as a promiscuous port for these VLANs with the group ID of 3, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# vlan database

awplus(config-vlan)# vlan 2-4

awplus(config-vlan)# private-vlan 2 isolated

awplus(config-vlan)# private-vlan 3 isolated

awplus(config-vlan)# private-vlan 4 isolated

awplus(config-vlan)# exit

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# switchport mode trunk

awplus(config-if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 2-4

awplus(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan trunk

promiscuous group 3

To remove port1.0.2 in trunk mode as a promiscuous port for a private VLAN, use

the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# no switchport mode private-vlan trunk

promiscuous

Note that you must remove the secondary port or ports enabled as trunk ports that

are associated with the promiscuous port before removing the promiscuous port.

Commands

switchport mode private-vlan trunk secondary

switchport mode trunk

switchport trunk allowed vlan

switchport trunk native vlan

show vlan private-vlan

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 458

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

SWITCHPORT MODE PRIVATE-VLAN TRUNK SECONDARY

switchport mode private-vlan trunk

secondary

Overview Use this command to enable a port in trunk mode to be a secondary port for

isolated VLANs.

Use the no variant of this command to remove a port in trunk mode as a secondary

port for isolated VLANs.

Syntax switchport mode private-vlan trunk secondary group <group-id>

no switchport mode private-vlan trunk secondary

Default By default, a port in trunk mode is disabled as a secondary port.

When a port in trunk mode is enabled to be a secondary port for isolated VLANs,

by default it will have a native VLAN of none(no native VLAN specified).

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage A port must be put in trunk mode with switchport mode trunk command before

the port is enabled as a secondary port in trunk mode.

To add VLANs to be trunked over the secondary port use the switchport trunk

allowed vlan command. These must be isolated VLANs and must exist on the

associated promiscuous port.

To configure the native VLAN for the secondary port, use the switchport trunk

native vlan command. The native VLAN must be an isolated VLAN and must exist

on the associated promiscuous port.

Parameter Description

<group-id>The group ID is a numeric value in the range 1 to 32 that is

used to associate a secondary port with its promiscuous port.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 459

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

SWITCHPORT MODE PRIVATE-VLAN TRUNK SECONDARY

Examples To create isolated private VLAN 2 and then enable port1.0.3 in trunk mode as

a secondary port for the this VLAN with the group ID of 3, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# vlan database

awplus(config-vlan)# vlan 2

awplus(config-vlan)# private-vlan 2 isolated

awplus(config-vlan)# exit

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.3

awplus(config-if)# switchport mode trunk

awplus(config-if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 2

awplus(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan trunk secondary

group 3

To remove port1.0.3 in trunk mode as a secondary port, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.3

awplus(config-if)# no switchport mode private-vlan trunk

secondary

Commands

switchport mode private-vlan trunk promiscuous

switchport mode trunk

switchport trunk allowed vlan

switchport trunk native vlan

show vlan private-vlan

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 460

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

SWITCHPORT MODE TRUNK

switchport mode trunk

Overview Use this command to set the switching characteristics of the port to trunk.

Received frames are classified based on the VLAN characteristics, then accepted or

discarded based on the specified filtering criteria.

Syntax switchport mode trunk [ingress-filter {enable|disable}]

Default By default, ports are in access mode, are untagged members of the default VLAN

(vlan1), and have ingress filtering on.

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage A port in trunk mode can be a tagged member of multiple VLANs, and an untagged

member of one native VLAN.

To configure which VLANs this port will trunk for, use the switchport trunk allowed

vlan command.

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.3

awplus(config-if)# switchport mode trunk ingress-filter enable

Validation

Command

show interface switchport

Parameter Description

ingress-filter Set the ingress filtering for the frames received.

enable Turn on ingress filtering for received frames. This is the default.

disable Turn off ingress filtering to accept frames that do not meet the

classification criteria.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 461

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

SWITCHPORT PRIVATE-VLAN HOST-ASSOCIATION

switchport private-vlan host-association

Overview Use this command to associate a primary VLAN and a secondary VLAN to a host

port. Only one primary and secondary VLAN can be associated to a host port.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the association.

Syntax switchport private-vlan host-association <primary-vlan-id> add

<secondary-vlan-id>

no switchport private-vlan host-association

Mode Interface Configuration

Examples awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# switchport private-vlan host-association 2

add 3

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# no switchport private-vlan host-association

Parameter Description

<primary-vlan-id>VLAN ID of the primary VLAN.

<secondary-vlan-id>VLAN ID of the secondary VLAN (either isolated or com

munity).

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 462

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

SWITCHPORT PRIVATE-VLAN MAPPING

switchport private-vlan mapping

Overview Use this command to associate a primary VLAN and a set of secondary VLANs to a

promiscuous port.

Use the no variant of this to remove all the association of secondary VLANs to

primary VLANs for a promiscuous port.

Syntax switchport private-vlan mapping <primary-vlan-id> add

<secondary-vid-list>

switchport private-vlan mapping <primary-vlan-id> remove

<secondary-vid-list>

no switchport private-vlan mapping

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage This command can be applied to a switch port or a static channel group, but not a

dynamic (LACP) channel group. LACP channel groups (dynamic/LACP

aggregators) cannot be promiscuous ports in private VLANs.

Examples awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# switchport private-vlan mapping 2 add 3-4

awplus(config-if)# switchport private-vlan mapping 2 remove 3-4

awplus(config-if)# no switchport private-vlan mapping

Commands

switchport mode private-vlan

Parameter Description

<primary-vlan-id>VLAN ID of the primary VLAN.

<secondary-vid-list>VLAN ID of the secondary VLAN (either isolated or

community), or a range of VLANs, or a comma-separated

list of VLANs and ranges.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 463

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

SWITCHPORT TRUNK ALLOWED VLAN

switchport trunk allowed vlan

Overview Use this command to add VLANs to be trunked over this switch port. Traffic for

these VLANs can be sent and received on the port.

Use the no variant of this command to reset switching characteristics of a specified

interface to negate a trunked configuration specified with switchport trunk

allowed vlan command.

Syntax switchport trunk allowed vlan all

switchport trunk allowed vlan none

switchport trunk allowed vlan add <vid-list>

switchport trunk allowed vlan remove <vid-list>

switchport trunk allowed vlan except <vid-list>

no switchport trunk

Default By default, ports are untagged members of the default VLAN (vlan1).

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage The all parameter sets the port to be a tagged member of all the VLANs configured

on the device. The none parameter removes all VLANs from the port’s tagged

member set. The add and remove parameters will add and remove VLANs to and

from the port’s member set. See the note below about restrictions when using the

add, remove, except, and all parameters.

Parameter Description

all Allow all VLANs to transmit and receive through the port.

none Allow no VLANs to transmit and receive through the port.

add Add a VLAN to transmit and receive through the port. Only use this

parameter if a list of VLANs are already configured on a port.

remove Remove a VLAN from transmit and receive through the port. Only use

this parameter if a list of VLANs are already configured on a port.

except All VLANs, except the VLAN for which the VID is specified, are part of

its port member set. Only use this parameter to remove VLANs after

either this parameter or the all parameter have added VLANs to a

port.

<vid-list><2-4094> The ID of the VLAN or VLANs that will be added to, or

removed from, the port. A single VLAN, VLAN range, or comma-

separated VLAN list can be set.

For a VLAN range, specify two VLAN numbers: lowest, then highest

number in the range, separated by a hyphen.

For a VLAN list, specify the VLAN numbers separated by commas.

Do not enter spaces between hyphens or commas when setting

parameters for VLAN ranges or lists.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 464

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

SWITCHPORT TRUNK ALLOWED VLAN

NOTE: Only use the add or the remove parameters with this command if a list of

VLANs are configured on a port. Only use the except parameter to remove VLANs after

either the except or the all parameters have first been used to add a list of VLANs to a

port.

Remove VLAN 3 by re-entering the except parameter with the list of VLANs to

remove, instead of using the remove parameter, as shown in the command

example below:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.6

awplus(config-if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan except 3,4

Then the configuration is changed after entering the above commands to remove

VLAN 3:

To add a VLAN, where the configuration for port1.0.6 shows the below output:

Add VLAN 4 by re-entering the except parameter with a list of VLANs to exclude,

instead of using the add parameter to include VLAN 4, as shown in the command

example below:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.5

awplus(config-if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan except 3,5

The configuration is changed after entering the above commands to add VLAN 4:

awplus#show running-config



!



interface port1.0.6

switchport

switchport mode trunk

switchport trunk allowed vlan except 3-4

awplus#show running-config



!



interface port1.0.6

switchport

switchport mode trunk

switchport trunk allowed vlan except 3-5

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 465

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

SWITCHPORT TRUNK ALLOWED VLAN

Examples The following shows adding a single VLAN to the port’s member set.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 2

The following shows adding a range of VLANs to the port’s member set.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 2-4

The following shows adding a list of VLANs to the port’s member set.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 2,3,4

awplus#show running-config



!



interface port1.0.5

switchport

switchport mode trunk

switchport trunk allowed vlan except 3,5

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 466

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

SWITCHPORT TRUNK NATIVE VLAN

switchport trunk native vlan

Overview Use this command to configure the native VLAN for this port. The native VLAN is

used for classifying the incoming untagged packets. Use the none parameter with

this command to remove the native VLAN from the port and set the acceptable

frame types to vlan-tagged only.

Use the no variant of this command to revert the native VLAN to the default VLAN

ID 1. Command negation removes tagged VLANs, and sets the native VLAN to the

default VLAN.

Syntax switchport trunk native vlan {<vid>|none}

no switchport trunk native vlan

Default VLAN 1 (the default VLAN), which is reverted to using the no form of this

command.

Mode Interface Configuration

Examples The following commands show configuration of VLAN 2 as the native VLAN for

port1.0.2:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# switchport trunk native vlan 2

The following commands show the removal of the native VLAN for interface

port1.0.2:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# switchport trunk native vlan none

The following commands revert the native VLAN to the default VLAN 1 for interface

port1.0.2:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# no switchport trunk native vlan

Parameter Description

<vid>The ID of the VLAN that will be used to classify the incoming

untagged packets, in the range 2-2094. The VLAN ID must be a part of

the VLAN member set of the port.

none No native VLAN specified. This option removes the native VLAN from

the port and sets the acceptable frame types to vlan-tagged only.

Note: Use the no variant of this command to revert to the default

VLAN 1 as the native VLAN for the specified interface switchport - not

none.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 467

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

SWITCHPORT VLAN-STACKING (DOUBLE TAGGING)

switchport vlan-stacking (double tagging)

Overview Use this command to enable VLAN stacking on a port and set it to be a

customer-edge-port or provider-port. This is sometimes referred to as VLAN

double-tagging, nested VLANs, or Q in Q.

Use no parameter with this command to disable VLAN stacking on an interface.

Syntax switchport vlan-stacking {customer-edge-port|provider-port}

no switchport vlan-stacking

Default By default, ports are not VLAN stacking ports.

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage Use VLAN stacking to separate traffic from different customers to that they can be

managed over a provider network.

Note that you must also set an MRU of 1504 or higher on the customer edge port,

using the mru command.

Traffic with an extra VLAN header added by VLAN stacking cannot be routed.

Example To apply vlan-stacking to the selected port, configure it to be a customer edge

port, and increase the MRU, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# switchport vlan-stacking customer-edge-port

awplus(config-if)# mru 10240

Parameter Description

customer-edge-port Set the port to be a customer edge port. This port must

already be in access mode.

provider-port Set the port to be a provider port. This port must already

be in trunk mode.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 468

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

SWITCHPORT VOICE DSCP

switchport voice dscp

Overview Use this command for a specific port to configure the Layer 3 DSCP value

advertised when the transmission of LLDP-MED Network Policy TLVs for voice

devices is enabled. When LLDP-MED capable IP phones receive this network policy

information, they transmit voice data with the specified DSCP value.

Use the no variant of this command to reset the DSCP value to the default, 0.

Syntax switchport voice dscp <0-63>

no switchport voice dscp

Default A DSCP value of 0 will be advertised.

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage LLDP-MED advertisements including Network Policy TLVs are transmitted via a

port if:

•LLDP is enabled (lldp run command)

• Voice VLAN is configured for the port (switchport voice vlan command)

• The port is configured to transmit LLDP advertisements—enabled by default

(lldp transmit receive command)

• The port is configured to transmit Network Policy TLVs—enabled by default

(lldp med-tlv-select command)

• There is an LLDP-MED device connected to the port

Example To tell IP phones connected to port1.0.5 to send voice data with DSCP value 27,

use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.5

awplus(config-if)# switchport voice dscp 27

Commands

lldp med-tlv-select

show lldp

switchport voice vlan

Parameter Description

dscp Specify a DSCP value for voice data.

<0-63>DSCP value.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 469

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

SWITCHPORT VOICE VLAN

switchport voice vlan

Overview Use this command to configure the Voice VLAN tagging advertised when the

transmission of LLDP-MED Network Policy TLVs for voice endpoint devices is

enabled. When LLDP-MED capable IP phones receive this network policy

information, they transmit voice data with the specified tagging. This command

also sets the ports to be spanning tree edge ports, that is, it enables spanning tree

portfast on the ports.

Use the no variant of this command to remove LLDP-MED network policy

configuration for voice devices connected to these ports. This does not change the

spanning tree edge port status.

Syntax switchport voice vlan [<vid>|dot1p|dynamic|untagged]

no switchport voice vlan

Default By default, no Voice VLAN is configured, and therefore no network policy is

advertised for voice devices.

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage LLDP-MED advertisements including Network Policy TLVs are transmitted via a

port if:

•LLDP is enabled (lldp run command)

• Voice VLAN is configured for the port using this command (switchport voice

vlan)

• The port is configured to transmit LLDP advertisements—enabled by default

(lldp transmit receive command)

• The port is configured to transmit Network Policy TLVs—enabled by default

(lldp med-tlv-select command)

• There is an LLDP-MED device connected to the port.

To set the priority value to be advertised for tagged frames, use the switchport

voice vlan priority command.

If the Voice VLAN details are to be assigned by RADIUS, then the RADIUS server

must be configured to send the attribute “Egress-VLANID (56)” or

Parameter Description

dot1p The IP phone should send User Priority tagged packets, that is, packets in

which the tag contains a User Priority value, and a VID of 0. (The User

Priority tag is also known as the 802.1p priority tag, or the Class of Service

(CoS) tag.)

dynamic The VLAN ID with which the IP phone should send tagged packets will be

assigned by RADIUS authentication.

untagged The IP phone should send untagged packets.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 470

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

SWITCHPORT VOICE VLAN

“Egress-VLAN-Name (58)” in the RADIUS Accept message when authenticating a

phone attached to this port.

To set these attributes on the local RADIUS server, use the egress-vlan-id command

or the egress-vlan-name command.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 471

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

SWITCHPORT VOICE VLAN PRIORITY

switchport voice vlan priority

Overview Use this command to configure the Layer 2 user priority advertised when the

transmission of LLDP-MED Network Policy TLVs for voice devices is enabled. This is

the priority in the User Priority field of the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tag, also known as the

Class of Service (CoS), or 802.1p priority. When LLDP-MED capable IP phones

receive this network policy information, they transmit voice data with the specified

priority.

Syntax switchport voice vlan priority <0-7>

no switchport voice vlan priority

To remove the Voice VLAN, and therefore disable the transmission of LLDP-MED

network policy information for voice devices on port1.0.6, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.6

awplus(config-if)# no switchport voice vlan

Parameter Description

priority Specify a user priority value for voice data.

<0-7>Priority value.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 472

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

VLAN

vlan

Overview This command creates VLANs, assigns names to them, and enables or disables

them. Disabling the VLAN causes all forwarding over the specified VLAN ID to

cease. Enabling the VLAN allows forwarding of frames on the specified VLAN.

The no variant of this command destroys the specified VLANs or returns their MTU

to the default.

Syntax vlan <vid> [name <vlan-name>] [state {enable|disable}]

vlan <vid-range> [state {enable|disable}]

vlan {<vid>|<vlan-name>} [mtu <mtu-value>]

no vlan {<vid>|<vid-range>} [mtu]

Default By default, VLANs are enabled when they are created.

Mode VLAN Configuration

Examples To enable vlan 45, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# vlan database

awplus(config-vlan)# vlan 45 name accounts state enable

To destroy vlan 45, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# vlan database

awplus(config-vlan)# no vlan 45

Commands

mtu

vlan database

show vlan

Parameter Description

<vid>The VID of the VLAN to enable or disable, in the range 1-4094.

<vlan-name>The ASCII name of the VLAN. Maximum length: 32 characters.

<vid-range>Specifies a range of VLAN identifiers.

<mtu-value>Specifies the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) size in bytes, in the

range 68 to 1500 bytes, for the VLAN.

enable Puts the VLAN into an enabled state.

disable Puts the VLAN into a disabled state.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 473

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

VLAN ACCESS-MAP

vlan access-map

Overview Use this command to create a VLAN access-map and enter into VLAN access-map

mode, so you can add ACLs to the map. You can use any IPv4 or IPv6 hardware

ACLs. VLAN access-maps are used to attach ACLs to VLANs, and therefore to filter

traffic as it ingresses VLANs.

See the ACL Feature Overview and Configuration Guide for more information,

including information about the number of rules consumed by per-VLAN ACLs,

and ACL processing order.

Use the no variant of this command to delete a VLAN access-map.

Syntax vlan access-map <name>

no vlan access-map <name>

Default By default, no VLAN access-maps exist.

Mode Global Configuration

Example To apply ACL 3001 to VLAN 48, where the ACL drops IP traffic from any source to

any destination, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list 3001 deny ip any any

awplus(config)# vlan access-map deny_all

awplus(config-vlan-access-map)# match access-group 3001

awplus(config-vlan-access-map)# exit

awplus(config)# vlan filter deny_all vlan-list 48 input

Commands

match access-group

show vlan access-map

vlan filter

Command

changes

Version 5.4.6-2.1: command added

Parameter Description

<name> A name for the access-map.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 474

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

VLAN DATABASE

vlan database

Overview Use this command to enter the VLAN Configuration mode.

Syntax vlan database

Mode Global Configuration

Usage Use this command to enter the VLAN configuration mode. You can then add or

delete a VLAN, or modify its values.

Example In the following example, note the change to VLAN configuration mode from

Configure mode:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# vlan database

awplus(config-vlan)#

Commands

vlan

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 475

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

VLAN COMMANDS

VLAN FILTER

vlan filter

Overview Use this command to apply a VLAN access-map to a list of VLANs. The switch uses

the ACLs in the access-map to filter traffic ingressing those VLANs.

See the ACL Feature Overview and Configuration Guide for more information,

including information about the number of rules consumed by per-VLAN ACLs,

and ACL processing order.

Use the no variant of this command to to remove the access-map filter from the

listed VLANs.

Syntax vlan filter <access-map-name> vlan-list <vid> input

no vlan filter <access-map-name> vlan-list <vid> input

Default By default, no VLAN filters exist.

Mode Global Configuration

Example To apply ACL 3001 to VLAN 48, where the ACL drops IP traffic from any source to

any destination, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list 3001 deny ip any any

awplus(config)# vlan access-map deny_all

awplus(config-vlan-access-map)# match access-group 3001

awplus(config-vlan-access-map)# exit

awplus(config)# vlan filter deny_all vlan-list 48 input

Commands

match access-group

show vlan filter

vlan access-map

Command

changes

Version 5.4.6-2.1: command added

Parameter Description

<access-map-name> The name of the VLAN access-map to apply to the

specified list of VLANs

vlan-list <vid>The list of VLANs to filter. You can specify a single VLAN

(e.g. 49), a comma-separated list of VLANs (e.g. 49, 51), a

hyphenated range of VLANs (e.g. 49-51), or a combination

(e.g. 49,51-53)

input Apply the filter to ingress traffic

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 476

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Spanning Tree

Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference for commands used to configure

RSTP, STP or MSTP. For information about spanning trees, including configuration

procedures, see the STP Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Command List •“clear spanning-tree statistics” on page 478

•“clear spanning-tree detected protocols (RSTP and MSTP)” on page 479

•“debug mstp (RSTP and STP)” on page 480

•“instance priority (MSTP)” on page 484

•“instance vlan (MSTP)” on page 486

•“region (MSTP)” on page 488

•“revision (MSTP)” on page 489

•“show debugging mstp” on page 490

•“show spanning-tree” on page 491

•“show spanning-tree brief” on page 494

•“show spanning-tree mst” on page 495

•“show spanning-tree mst config” on page 496

•“show spanning-tree mst detail” on page 497

•“show spanning-tree mst detail interface” on page 499

•“show spanning-tree mst instance” on page 501

•“show spanning-tree mst instance interface” on page 502

•“show spanning-tree mst interface” on page 503

•“show spanning-tree mst detail interface” on page 504

•“show spanning-tree statistics” on page 506

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 477

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

•“show spanning-tree statistics instance” on page 508

•“show spanning-tree statistics instance interface” on page 509

•“show spanning-tree statistics interface” on page 511

•“show spanning-tree vlan range-index” on page 513

•“spanning-tree autoedge (RSTP and MSTP)” on page 514

•“spanning-tree bpdu” on page 515

•“spanning-tree cisco-interoperability (MSTP)” on page 517

•“spanning-tree edgeport (RSTP and MSTP)” on page 518

•“spanning-tree enable” on page 519

•“spanning-tree errdisable-timeout enable” on page 521

•“spanning-tree errdisable-timeout interval” on page 522

•“spanning-tree force-version” on page 523

•“spanning-tree forward-time” on page 524

•“spanning-tree guard root” on page 525

•“spanning-tree hello-time” on page 526

•“spanning-tree link-type” on page 527

•“spanning-tree max-age” on page 528

•“spanning-tree max-hops (MSTP)” on page 529

•“spanning-tree mode” on page 530

•“spanning-tree mst configuration” on page 531

•“spanning-tree mst instance” on page 532

•“spanning-tree mst instance path-cost” on page 533

•“spanning-tree mst instance priority” on page 535

•“spanning-tree mst instance restricted-role” on page 536

•“spanning-tree mst instance restricted-tcn” on page 538

•“spanning-tree path-cost” on page 539

•“spanning-tree portfast (STP)” on page 540

•“spanning-tree portfast bpdu-filter” on page 542

•“spanning-tree portfast bpdu-guard” on page 544

•“spanning-tree priority (bridge priority)” on page 546

•“spanning-tree priority (port priority)” on page 547

•“spanning-tree restricted-role” on page 548

•“spanning-tree restricted-tcn” on page 549

•“

spanning-tree transmit-holdcount” on page 550

•“undebug mstp” on page 551

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 478

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

CLEAR SPANNING-TREE STATISTICS

clear spanning-tree statistics

Overview Use this command to clear all the STP BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) statistics.

Syntax clear spanning-tree statistics

clear spanning-tree statistics [instance <mstp-instance>]

clear spanning-tree statistics [interface <port> [instance

<mstp-instance>]]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Usage Use this command with the instance parameter in MSTP mode. Specifying this

command with the interface parameter only not the instance parameter will work

in STP and RSTP mode.

Examples awplus# clear spanning-tree statistics

awplus# clear spanning-tree statistics instance 1

awplus# clear spanning-tree statistics interface port1.0.2

instance 1

Parameter Description

<port>The port to clear STP BPDU statistics for. The port may be a switch

port (e.g. port1.0.4), a static channel group (e.g. sa2), or a

dynamic (LACP) channel group (e.g. po2).

<mstp-

instance>

The MSTP instance (MSTI - Multiple Spanning Tree Instance) to clear

MSTP BPDU statistics.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 479

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

CLEAR SPANNING-TREE DETECTED PROTOCOLS (RSTP AND MSTP)

clear spanning-tree detected protocols

(RSTP and MSTP)

Overview Use this command to clear the detected protocols for a specific port, or all ports.

Use this command in RSTP or MSTP mode only.

Syntax clear spanning-tree detected protocols [interface <port>]

Mode Privileged Exec

Example awplus# clear spanning-tree detected protocols

Parameter Description

<port>The port to clear detected protocols for. The port may be a switch

port (e.g. port1.0.4), a static channel group (e.g. sa2), or a

dynamic (LACP) channel group (e.g. po2).

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 480

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

DEBUG MSTP (RSTP AND STP)

debug mstp (RSTP and STP)

Overview Use this command to enable debugging for the configured spanning tree mode,

and echo data to the console, at various levels. Note that although this command

uses the keyword mstp it displays debugging output for RSTP and STP protocols

as well the MSTP protocol.

Use the no variant of this command to disable spanning tree debugging.

Syntax debug mstp {all|cli|protocol [detail]|timer [detail]}

debug mstp {packet {rx|tx} [decode] [interface <interface>]}

debug mstp {topology-change [interface <interface>]}

no debug mstp {all|cli|protocol [detail]|timer [detail]}

no debug mstp {packet {rx|tx} [decode] [interface <interface>]}

no debug mstp {topology-change [interface <interface>]}

Mode Privileged Exec and Global Configuration mode

Usage 1 Use the debug mstp topology-change interface command to generate

debugging messages when the device receives an indication of a topology change

in a BPDU from another device. The debugging can be activated on a per-port

basis. Although this command uses the keyword mstp, it displays debugging

output for RSTP and STP protocols as well as the MSTP protocol.

Due to the likely volume of output, these debug messages are best viewed using

the terminal monitor command before issuing the relevant debug mstp

Parameter Description

all Echoes all spanning tree debugging levels to the console.

cli Echoes spanning tree commands to the console.

packet Echoes spanning tree packets to the console.

rx Received packets.

tx Transmitted packets.

protocol Echoes protocol changes to the console.

timer Echoes timer information to the console.

detail Detailed output.

decode Interprets packet contents

topology-change Interprets topology change messages

interface Keyword before <interface> placeholder to specify an

interface to debug

<interface>Placeholder used to specify the name of the interface to

debug.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 481

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

DEBUG MSTP (RSTP AND STP)

command. The default terminal monitor filter will select and display these

messages. Alternatively, the messages can be directed to any of the other log

outputs by adding a filter for the MSTP application using log buffered (filter)

command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# log buffered program mstp

Output 1

Usage 2 Use the debug mstp packet rx|tx decode interface command to generate

debugging messages containing the entire contents of a BPDU displayed in

readable text for transmitted and received xSTP BPDUs. The debugging can be

activated on a per-port basis and transmit and receive debugging is controlled

independently. Although this command uses the keyword mstp, it displays

debugging output for RSTP and STP protocols as well as the MSTP protocol.

Due to the likely volume of output, these debug messages are best viewed using

the terminal monitor command before issuing the relevant debug mstp

command. The default terminal monitor filter will select and display these

messages. Alternatively, the messages can be directed to any of the other log

outputs by adding a filter for the MSTP application using the log buffered (filter)

command:

awplus(config)# log buffered program mstp

Output 2 In MSTP mode - an MSTP BPDU with 1 MSTI:

awplus#terminal monitor

awplus#debug mstp topology-change interface port1.0.4

10:09:09 awplus MSTP[1409]: Topology change rcvd on port1.0.4 (internal)

10:09:09 awplus MSTP[1409]: Topology change rcvd on MSTI 1 port1.0.4

aawplus#debug mstp topology-change interface port1.0.6

10:09:29 awplus MSTP[1409]: Topology change rcvd on port1.0.6 (external)

10:09:29 awplus MSTP[1409]: Topology change rcvd on MSTI 1 port1.0.6

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 482

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

DEBUG MSTP (RSTP AND STP)

In STP mode transmitting a TCN BPDU:

In STP mode receiving an STP BPDU:

In RSTP mode receiving an RSTP BPDU:

awplus#terminal monitor

awplus#debug mstp packet rx decode interface port1.0.4

17:23:42 awplus MSTP[1417]: port1.0.4 xSTP BPDU rx - start

17:23:42 awplus MSTP[1417]: Protocol version: MSTP, BPDU type: RST

17:23:42 awplus MSTP[1417]: CIST Flags: Agree Forward Learn role=Desig

17:23:42 awplus MSTP[1417]: CIST root id : 0000:0000cd1000fe

17:23:42 awplus MSTP[1417]: CIST ext pathcost : 0

17:23:42 awplus MSTP[1417]: CIST reg root id : 0000:0000cd1000fe

17:23:42 awplus MSTP[1417]: CIST port id : 8001 (128:1)

17:23:42 awplus MSTP[1417]: msg age: 0 max age: 20 hellotime: 2 fwd delay: 15

17:23:42 awplus MSTP[1417]: Version 3 length : 80

17:23:42 awplus MSTP[1417]: Format id : 0

17:23:42 awplus MSTP[1417]: Config name : test

17:23:42 awplus MSTP[1417]: Revision level : 0

17:23:42 awplus MSTP[1417]: Config digest : 3ab68794d602fdf43b21c0b37ac3bca8

17:23:42 awplus MSTP[1417]: CIST int pathcost : 0

17:23:42 awplus MSTP[1417]: CIST bridge id : 0000:0000cd1000fe

17:23:42 awplus MSTP[1417]: CIST hops remaining : 20

17:23:42 awplus MSTP[1417]: MSTI flags : Agree Forward Learn role=Desig

17:23:42 awplus MSTP[1417]: MSTI reg root id : 8001:0000cd1000fe

17:23:42 awplus MSTP[1417]: MSTI pathcost : 0

17:23:42 awplus MSTP[1417]: MSTI bridge priority : 32768 port priority : 128

17:23:42 awplus MSTP[1417]: MSTI hops remaining : 20

17:23:42 awplus MSTP[1417]: port1.0.4 xSTP BPDU rx - finish

awplus#terminal monitor

awplus#debug mstp packet tx decode interface port1.0.4

17:28:09 awplus MSTP[1417]: port1.0.4 xSTP BPDU tx - start

17:28:09 awplus MSTP[1417]: Protocol version: STP, BPDU type: TCN

17:28:09 awplus MSTP[1417]: port1.0.4 xSTP BPDU tx - finish

awplus#terminal monitor

awplus#debug mstp packet rx decode interface port1.0.4

17:31:36 awplus MSTP[1417]: port1.0.4 xSTP BPDU rx - start

17:31:36 awplus MSTP[1417]: Protocol version: STP, BPDU type: Config

17:31:36 awplus MSTP[1417]: Flags: role=none

17:31:36 awplus MSTP[1417]: Root id : 8000:0000cd1000fe

17:31:36 awplus MSTP[1417]: Root pathcost : 0

17:31:36 awplus MSTP[1417]: Bridge id : 8000:0000cd1000fe

17:31:36 awplus MSTP[1417]: Port id : 8001 (128:1)

17:31:36 awplus MSTP[1417]: msg age: 0 max age: 20 hellotime: 2 fwd delay: 15

17:31:36 awplus MSTP[1417]: ort1.0.4 xSTP BPDU rx - finish



C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 483

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

DEBUG MSTP (RSTP AND STP)

Examples awplus# debug mstp all

awplus# debug mstp cli

awplus# debug mstp packet rx

awplus# debug mstp protocol detail

awplus# debug mstp timer

awplus# debug mstp packet rx decode interface port1.0.2

awplus# debug mstp packet tx decode interface port1.0.6

Commands

log buffered (filter)

show debugging mstp

terminal monitor

undebug mstp

awplus#terminal monitor

awplus#debug mstp packet rx decode interface port1.0.4

awplus#17:30:17 awplus MSTP[1417]: port1.0.4 xSTP BPDU rx - start

17:30:17 awplus MSTP[1417]: Protocol version: RSTP, BPDU type: RST

17:30:17 awplus MSTP[1417]: CIST Flags: Forward Learn role=Desig

17:30:17 awplus MSTP[1417]: CIST root id : 8000:0000cd1000fe

17:30:17 awplus MSTP[1417]: CIST ext pathcost : 0

17:30:17 awplus MSTP[1417]: CIST reg root id : 8000:0000cd1000fe

17:30:17 awplus MSTP[1417]: CIST port id : 8001 (128:1)

17:30:17 awplus MSTP[1417]: msg age: 0 max age: 20 hellotime: 2 fwd delay: 15

17:30:17 awplus MSTP[1417]: port1.0.4 xSTP BPDU rx - finish

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 484

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

INSTANCE PRIORITY (MSTP)

instance priority (MSTP)

Overview Use this command to set the priority for this device to become the root bridge for

the specified MSTI (Multiple Spanning Tree Instance).

Use this command for MSTP only.

Use the no variant of this command to restore the root bridge priority of the device

for the instance to the default.

Syntax instance <instance-id> priority <priority>

no instance <instance-id> priority

Default The default priority value for all instances is 32768.

Mode MST Configuration

Usage MSTP lets you distribute traffic more efficiently across a network by blocking

different links for different VLANs. You do this by making different devices into the

root bridge for each MSTP instance, so that each instance blocks a different link.

If all devices have the same root bridge priority for the instance, MSTP selects the

device with the lowest MAC address to be the root bridge. Give the device a higher

priority for becoming the root bridge for a particular instance by assigning it a

lower priority number, or vice versa.

Examples To set the root bridge priority for MSTP instance 2 to be the highest (0), so that it

will be the root bridge for this instance when available, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration

awplus(config-mst)# instance 2 priority 0

To reset the root bridge priority for instance 2 to the default (32768), use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration

awplus(config-mst)# no instance 2 priority

Parameter Description

<instance-id>Specify an MSTP instance in the range 1-15.

<priority> Specify the root bridge priority for the device for the MSTI in the

range <0-61440>. Note that a lower priority number indicates a

greater likelihood of the device becoming the root bridge. The

priority values can be set only in increments of 4096. If you

specify a number that is not a multiple of 4096, it will be rounded

down. The default priority is 32768.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 485

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

INSTANCE PRIORITY (MSTP)

Commands

region (MSTP)

revision (MSTP)

show spanning-tree mst config

spanning-tree mst instance

spanning-tree mst instance priority

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 486

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

INSTANCE VLAN (MSTP)

instance vlan (MSTP)

Overview Use this command to create an MST Instance (MSTI), and associate the specified

VLANs with it. An MSTI is a spanning tree instance that exists within an MST region

(MSTR).

When a VLAN is associated with an MSTI the member ports of the VLAN are

automatically configured to send and receive spanning-tree information for the

associated MSTI. You can disable this automatic configuration of member ports of

the VLAN to the associated MSTI by using a no spanning-tree mst instance

command to remove the member port from the MSTI.

Use the instance vlan command for MSTP only.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the specified VLANs from the MSTI.

Syntax instance <instance-id> vlan <vid-list>

no instance <instance-id> vlan <vid-list>

Mode MST Configuration

Usage The VLANs must be created before being associated with an MST instance (MSTI).

If the VLAN range is not specified, the MSTI will not be created.

This command removes the specified VLANs from the CIST and adds them to the

specified MSTI. If you use the no variant of this command to remove the VLAN from

the MSTI, it returns it to the CIST. To move a VLAN from one MSTI to another, you

must first use the no variant of this command to return it to the CIST.

Ports in these VLANs will remain in the control of the CIST until you associate the

ports with the MSTI using the spanning-tree mst instance command.

Example To associate VLAN 30 with MSTI 2, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# spanning-tree mode mstp

awplus(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration

awplus(config-mst)# instance 2 vlan 30

Parameter Description

<instance-id>Specify an MSTP instance in the range 1-15.

<vid-list> Specify one or more VLAN identifiers (VID) to be associated with

the MSTI specified. This can be a single VID in the range 1-4094,

or a hyphen-separated range or a comma-separated list of VLAN

IDs.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 487

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

INSTANCE VLAN (MSTP)

Commands

region (MSTP)

revision (MSTP)

show spanning-tree mst config

spanning-tree mst instance

vlan

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 488

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

REGION (MSTP)

region (MSTP)

Overview Use this command to assign a name to the device’s MST Region. MST Instances

(MSTI) of a region form different spanning trees for different VLANs.

Use this command for MSTP only.

Use the no variant of this command to remove this region name and reset it to the

default.

Syntax region <region-name>

no region

Default By default, the region name is My Name.

Mode MST Configuration

Usage The region name, the revision number, and the digest of the VLAN to MSTI

configuration table must be the same on all devices that are intended to be in the

same MST region.

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration

awplus(config-mst)# region ATL

Commands

revision (MSTP)

show spanning-tree mst config

Parameter Description

<region-name>Specify the name of the region, up to 32 characters. Valid

characters are upper-case, lower-case, digits, underscore.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 489

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

REVISION (MSTP)

revision (MSTP)

Overview Use this command to specify the MST revision number to be used in the

configuration identifier.

Use this command for MSTP only.

Syntax revision <revision-number>

Default The default of revision number is 0.

Mode MST Configuration

Usage The region name, the revision number, and the digest of the VLAN to MSTI

configuration table must be the same on all devices that are intended to be in the

same MST region.

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration

awplus(config-mst)# revision 25

Commands

region (MSTP)

show spanning-tree mst config

instance vlan (MSTP)

Parameter Description

<revision-number><0-65535> Revision number.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 490

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SHOW DEBUGGING MSTP

show debugging mstp

Overview Use this command to show the MSTP debugging options set.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show debugging mstp

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec mode

Example To display the MSTP debugging options set, enter the command:

awplus# show debugging mstp

Output Figure 16-1: Example output from show debugging mstp

Commands

debug mstp (RSTP and STP)

MSTP debugging status:

MSTP receiving packet debugging is on

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 491

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SHOW SPANNING-TREE

show spanning-tree

Overview Use this command to display detailed spanning tree information on the specified

port or on all ports. Use this command for RSTP, MSTP or STP.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show spanning-tree [interface <port-list>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Usage Note that any list of interfaces specified must not span any interfaces that are not

installed.

A topology change counter has been included for RSTP and MSTP. You can see the

topology change counter for RSTP by using the show spanning-tree command.

You can see the topology change counter for MSTP by using the show

spanning-tree mst instance command.

Example To display spanning tree information about port1.0.3, use the command:

awplus# show spanning-tree interface port1.0.3

Parameter Description

interface Display information about the following port only.

<port-list>The ports to display information about. A port-list can be:

• a switch port (e.g. port1.0.6) a static channel group (e.g. sa2) or a

dynamic (LACP) channel group (e.g. po2)

• a continuous range of ports separated by a hyphen, e.g.

port1.0.1-1.0.4, or sa1-2, or po1-2

• a comma-separated list of ports and port ranges, e.g.

port1.0.1,port1.0.4-1.0.6. Do not mix switch ports, static channel

groups, and dynamic (LACP) channel groups in the same list

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 492

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SHOW SPANNING-TREE

Output Figure 16-2: Example output from show spanning-tree in RSTP mode

Output Figure 16-3: Example output from show spanning-tree

awplus#show spanning-tree

% 1: Bridge up - Spanning Tree Enabled

% 1: Root Path Cost 0 - Root Port 0 - Bridge Priority 32768

% 1: Forward Delay 15 - Hello Time 2 - Max Age 20

% 1: Root Id 80000000cd24ff2d

% 1: Bridge Id 80000000cd24ff2d

% 1: last topology change Mon Oct 3 02:06:26 2016

% 1: portfast bpdu-filter disabled

% 1: portfast bpdu-guard disabled

% 1: portfast errdisable timeout disabled

% 1: portfast errdisable timeout interval 300 sec

% port1.0.1: Port 5001 - Id 8389 - Role Disabled - State Discarding

% port1.0.1: Designated Path Cost 0

% port1.0.1: Configured Path Cost 20000000 - Add type Explicit ref count 1

% port1.0.1: Designated Port Id 8389 - Priority 128 -

% port1.0.1: Root 80000000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.1: Designated Bridge 80000000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.1: Message Age 0 - Max Age 20

% port1.0.1: Hello Time 2 - Forward Delay 15

% port1.0.1: Forward Timer 0 - Msg Age Timer 0 - Hello Timer 0 - topo change 

timer 0

% port1.0.1: forward-transitions 0

% port1.0.1: Version Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol - Received None - Send STP

% port1.0.1: No portfast configured - Current portfast off

% port1.0.1: portfast bpdu-guard default - Current portfast bpdu-guard off

% port1.0.1: portfast bpdu-filter default - Current portfast bpdu-filter off

% port1.0.1: no root guard configured - Current root guard off

% port1.0.1: Configured Link Type point-to-point - Current shared

%

% port1.0.2: Port 5002 - Id 838a - Role Disabled - State Discarding

% port1.0.2: Designated Path Cost 0

% port1.0.2: Configured Path Cost 20000000 - Add type Explicit ref count 1

% port1.0.2: Designated Port Id 838a - Priority 128 -

% port1.0.2: Root 80000000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.2: Designated Bridge 80000000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.2: Message Age 0 - Max Age 20

% port1.0.2: Hello Time 2 - Forward Delay 15

% port1.0.2: Forward Timer 0 - Msg Age Timer 0 - Hello Timer 0 - topo change 

timer 0

% port1.0.2: forward-transitions 0

% port1.0.2: Version Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol - Received None - Send STP

% port1.0.2: No portfast configured - Current portfast off

% port1.0.2: portfast bpdu-guard default - Current portfast bpdu-guard off

% port1.0.2: portfast bpdu-filter default - Current portfast bpdu-filter off

% port1.0.2: no root guard configured - Current root guard off

% port1.0.2: Configured Link Type point-to-point - Current shared

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 493

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SHOW SPANNING-TREE

% 1: Bridge up - Spanning Tree Enabled

% 1: Root Path Cost 0 - Root Port 0 - Bridge Priority 32768

% 1: Forward Delay 15 - Hello Time 2 - Max Age 20

% 1: Root Id 80000000cd20f093

% 1: Bridge Id 80000000cd20f093

% 1: last topology change Mon Oct 3 02:06:26 2016

% 1: portfast bpdu-filter disabled

% 1: portfast bpdu-guard disabled

% 1: portfast errdisable timeout disabled

% 1: portfast errdisable timeout interval 300 sec

% port1.0.3: Port 5023 - Id 839f - Role Designated - State Forwarding

% port1.0.3: Designated Path Cost 0

% port1.0.3: Configured Path Cost 200000 - Add type Explicit ref count 1

% port1.0.3: Designated Port Id 839f - Priority 128 -

% port1.0.3: Root 80000000cd20f093

% port1.0.3: Designated Bridge 80000000cd20f093

% port1.0.3: Message Age 0 - Max Age 20

% port1.0.3: Hello Time 2 - Forward Delay 15

% port1.0.3: Forward Timer 0 - Msg Age Timer 0 - Hello Timer 1 - topo change 

timer 0

% port1.0.3: forward-transitions 32

% port1.0.3: Version Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol - Received None - Send RSTP

% port1.0.3: No portfast configured - Current portfast off

% port1.0.3: portfast bpdu-guard default - Current portfast bpdu-guard off

% port1.0.3: portfast bpdu-filter default - Current portfast bpdu-filter off

% port1.0.3: no root guard configured - Current root guard off

% port1.0.3: Configured Link Type point-to-point - Current point-to-point

...

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 494

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SHOW SPANNING-TREE BRIEF

show spanning-tree brief

Overview Use this command to display a summary of spanning tree status information on all

ports. Use this command for RSTP, MSTP or STP.

Syntax show spanning-tree brief

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Usage Note that any list of interfaces specified must not span any interfaces that are not

installed.

A topology change counter has been included for RSTP and MSTP. You can see the

topology change counter for RSTP by using the show spanning-tree command.

You can see the topology change counter for MSTP by using the show

spanning-tree mst instance command.

Example To display a summary of spanning tree status information, use the command:

awplus# show spanning-tree brief

Output Figure 16-4: Example output from show spanning-tree brief

Commands

show spanning-tree

Parameter Description

brief A brief summary of spanning tree information.

Default: Bridge up - Spanning Tree Enabled

Default: Root Path Cost 40000 - Root Port 4501 - Bridge Priority 32768

Default: Root Id 8000:0000cd250001

Default: Bridge Id 8000:0000cd296eb1



Port Designated Bridge Port Id Role State

sa1 8000:001577c9744b 8195 Rootport Forwarding

po1 8000:0000cd296eb1 81f9 Designated Forwarding

port1.0.1 8000:0000cd296eb1 8389 Disabled Discarding

port1.0.2 8000:0000cd296eb1 838a Disabled Discarding

port1.0.3 8000:0000cd296eb1 838b Disabled Discarding

...

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 495

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SHOW SPANNING-TREE MST

show spanning-tree mst

Overview This command displays bridge-level information about the CIST and VLAN to MSTI

mappings.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show spanning-tree mst

Mode User Exec, Privileged Exec and Interface Configuration

Example To display bridge-level information about the CIST and VLAN to MSTI mappings,

enter the command:

awplus# show spanning-tree mst

Output Figure 16-5: Example output from show spanning-tree mst

Commands

show spanning-tree mst interface

% 1: Bridge up - Spanning Tree Enabled

% 1: CIST Root Path Cost 0 - CIST Root Port 0 - CIST Bridge 

Priority 32768

% 1: Forward Delay 15 - Hello Time 2 - Max Age 20 - Max-hops 20

% 1: CIST Root Id 8000000475e93ffe

% 1: CIST Reg Root Id 8000000475e93ffe

% 1: CST Bridge Id 8000000475e93ffe

% 1: portfast bpdu-filter disabled

% 1: portfast bpdu-guard disabled

% 1: portfast errdisable timeout disabled

% 1: portfast errdisable timeout interval 300 sec

%

% Instance VLAN

% 0: 1

% 2: 4

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 496

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SHOW SPANNING-TREE MST CONFIG

show spanning-tree mst config

Overview Use this command to display MSTP configuration identifier for the device.

Syntax show spanning-tree mst config

Mode User Exec, Privileged Exec and Interface Configuration

Usage The region name, the revision number, and the digest of the VLAN to MSTI

configuration table must be the same on all devices that are intended to be in the

same MST region.

Example To display MSTP configuration identifier information, enter the command:

awplus# show spanning-tree mst config

Output Figure 16-6: Example output from show spanning-tree mst config

Commands

instance vlan (MSTP)

region (MSTP)

revision (MSTP)

awplus#show spanning-tree mst config

%

% MSTP Configuration Information:

%------------------------------------------------------

% Format Id : 0

% Name : My Name

% Revision Level : 0

% Digest : 0x80DEE46DA92A98CF21C603291B22880A

%------------------------------------------------------

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 497

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SHOW SPANNING-TREE MST DETAIL

show spanning-tree mst detail

Overview This command displays detailed information about each instance, and all

interfaces associated with that particular instance.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show spanning-tree mst detail

Mode User Exec, Privileged Exec and Interface Configuration

Example To display detailed information about each instance, and all interfaces associated

with them, enter the command:

awplus# show spanning-tree mst detail

Output Figure 16-7: Example output from show spanning-tree mst detail

% 1: Bridge up - Spanning Tree Enabled

% 1: CIST Root Path Cost 0 - CIST Root Port 0 - CIST Bridge Priority 32768

% 1: Forward Delay 15 - Hello Time 2 - Max Age 20 - Max-hops 20

% 1: CIST Root Id 80000000cd24ff2d

% 1: CIST Reg Root Id 80000000cd24ff2d

% 1: CIST Bridge Id 80000000cd24ff2d

% 1: portfast bpdu-filter disabled

% 1: portfast bpdu-guard disabled

% 1: portfast errdisable timeout disabled

% 1: portfast errdisable timeout interval 300 sec

% port1.0.1: Port 5001 - Id 8389 - Role Disabled - State Discarding

% port1.0.1: Designated External Path Cost 0 -Internal Path Cost 0

% port1.0.1: Configured Path Cost 20000000 - Add type Explicit ref count 1

% port1.0.1: Designated Port Id 8389 - CIST Priority 128 -

% port1.0.1: CIST Root 80000000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.1: Regional Root 80000000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.1: Designated Bridge 80000000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.1: Message Age 0 - Max Age 20

% port1.0.1: CIST Hello Time 2 - Forward Delay 15

% port1.0.1: CIST Forward Timer 0 - Msg Age Timer 0 - Hello Timer 0 - topo 

change timer 0

...

% port1.0.2: forward-transitions 0

% port1.0.2: Version Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol - Received None - Send STP

% port1.0.2: No portfast configured - Current portfast off

% port1.0.2: portfast bpdu-guard default - Current portfast bpdu-guard off

% port1.0.2: portfast bpdu-filter default - Current portfast bpdu-filter off

% port1.0.2: no root guard configured - Current root guard off

% port1.0.2: Configured Link Type point-to-point - Current shared

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 498

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SHOW SPANNING-TREE MST DETAIL

% port1.0.3: Port 5003 - Id 838b - Role Disabled - State Discarding

% port1.0.3: Designated External Path Cost 0 -Internal Path Cost 0

% port1.0.3: Configured Path Cost 20000000 - Add type Explicit ref count 1

% port1.0.3: Designated Port Id 838b - CIST Priority 128 -

% port1.0.3: CIST Root 80000000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.3: Regional Root 80000000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.3: Designated Bridge 80000000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.3: Message Age 0 - Max Age 20

% port1.0.3: CIST Hello Time 2 - Forward Delay 15

% port1.0.3: CIST Forward Timer 0 - Msg Age Timer 0 - Hello Timer 0 - topo 

change timer 0

% port1.0.3: forward-transitions 0

% port1.0.3: Version Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol - Received None - Send STP

% port1.0.3: No portfast configured - Current portfast off

% port1.0.3: portfast bpdu-guard default - Current portfast bpdu-guard off

% port1.0.3: portfast bpdu-filter default - Current portfast bpdu-filter off

% port1.0.3: no root guard configured - Current root guard off

% port1.0.3: Configured Link Type point-to-point - Current shared

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 499

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SHOW SPANNING-TREE MST DETAIL INTERFACE

show spanning-tree mst detail interface

Overview This command displays detailed information about the specified switch port, and

the MST instances associated with it.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show spanning-tree mst detail interface <port>

Mode User Exec, Privileged Exec and Interface Configuration

Example To display detailed information about port1.0.3 and the instances associated

with it, enter the command:

awplus# show spanning-tree mst detail interface port1.0.3

Output Figure 16-8: Example output from show spanning-tree mst detail interface

Parameter Description

<port>The port to display information about. The port may be a switch port

(e.g. port1.0.4), a static channel group (e.g. sa2), or a dynamic

(LACP) channel group (e.g. po2).

% 1: Bridge up - Spanning Tree Enabled

% 1: CIST Root Path Cost 0 - CIST Root Port 0 - CIST Bridge Priority 32768

% 1: Forward Delay 15 - Hello Time 2 - Max Age 20 - Max-hops 20

% 1: CIST Root Id 80000000cd24ff2d

% 1: CIST Reg Root Id 80000000cd24ff2d

% 1: CIST Bridge Id 80000000cd24ff2d

% 1: portfast bpdu-filter disabled

% 1: portfast bpdu-guard disabled

% 1: portfast errdisable timeout disabled

% 1: portfast errdisable timeout interval 300 sec

% port1.0.2: Port 5002 - Id 838a - Role Disabled - State Discarding

% port1.0.2: Designated External Path Cost 0 -Internal Path Cost 0

% port1.0.2: Configured Path Cost 20000000 - Add type Explicit ref count 2

% port1.0.2: Designated Port Id 838a - CIST Priority 128 -

% port1.0.2: CIST Root 80000000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.2: Regional Root 80000000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.2: Designated Bridge 80000000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.2: Message Age 0 - Max Age 20

% port1.0.2: CIST Hello Time 2 - Forward Delay 15

% port1.0.2: CIST Forward Timer 0 - Msg Age Timer 0 - Hello Timer 0 - topo 

change timer 0

% port1.0.2: forward-transitions 0

% port1.0.2: Version Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol - Received None - Send STP

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 500

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SHOW SPANNING-TREE MST DETAIL INTERFACE

% port1.0.2: No portfast configured - Current portfast off

% port1.0.2: portfast bpdu-guard default - Current portfast bpdu-guard off

% port1.0.2: portfast bpdu-filter default - Current portfast bpdu-filter off

% port1.0.2: no root guard configured - Current root guard off

% port1.0.2: Configured Link Type point-to-point - Current shared

%

% Instance 2: Vlans: 2

% 1: MSTI Root Path Cost 0 -MSTI Root Port 0 - MSTI Bridge Priority 32768

% 1: MSTI Root Id 80020000cd24ff2d

% 1: MSTI Bridge Id 80020000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.2: Port 5002 - Id 838a - Role Disabled - State Discarding

% port1.0.2: Designated Internal Path Cost 0 - Designated Port Id 838a

% port1.0.2: Configured Internal Path Cost 20000000

% port1.0.2: Configured CST External Path cost 20000000

% port1.0.2: CST Priority 128 - MSTI Priority 128

% port1.0.2: Designated Root 80020000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.2: Designated Bridge 80020000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.2: Message Age 0 - Max Age 0

% port1.0.2: Hello Time 2 - Forward Delay 15

% port1.0.2: Forward Timer 0 - Msg Age Timer 0 - Hello Timer 0

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 501

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SHOW SPANNING-TREE MST INSTANCE

show spanning-tree mst instance

Overview This command displays detailed information for the specified instance, and all

switch ports associated with that instance.

A topology change counter has been included for RSTP and MSTP. You can see the

topology change counter for RSTP by using the show spanning-tree command.

You can see the topology change counter for MSTP by using the show

spanning-tree mst instance command.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show spanning-tree mst instance <instance-id>

Mode User Exec, Privileged Exec, and Interface Configuration

Example To display detailed information for instance 2, and all switch ports associated with

that instance, use the command:

awplus# show spanning-tree mst instance 2

Output Figure 16-9: Example output from show spanning-tree mst instance

Parameter Description

<instance-id>Specify an MSTP instance in the range 1-15.

% 1: MSTI Root Path Cost 0 - MSTI Root Port 0 - MSTI Bridge Priority 32768

% 1: MSTI Root Id 80020000cd24ff2d

% 1: MSTI Bridge Id 80020000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.2: Port 5002 - Id 838a - Role Disabled - State Discarding

% port1.0.2: Designated Internal Path Cost 0 - Designated Port Id 838a

% port1.0.2: Configured Internal Path Cost 20000000

% port1.0.2: Configured CST External Path cost 20000000

% port1.0.2: CST Priority 128 - MSTI Priority 128

% port1.0.2: Designated Root 80020000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.2: Designated Bridge 80020000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.2: Message Age 0 - Max Age 0

% port1.0.2: Hello Time 2 - Forward Delay 15

% port1.0.2: Forward Timer 0 - Msg Age Timer 0 - Hello Timer 0

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 502

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SHOW SPANNING-TREE MST INSTANCE INTERFACE

show spanning-tree mst instance interface

Overview This command displays detailed information for the specified MST (Multiple

Spanning Tree) instance, and the specified switch port associated with that MST

instance.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show spanning-tree mst instance <instance-id> interface <port>

Mode User Exec, Privileged Exec, and Interface Configuration

Example To display detailed information for instance 2, interface port1.0.2, use the

command:

awplus# show spanning-tree mst instance 2 interface port1.0.2

Output Figure 16-10: Example output from show spanning-tree mst instance

Parameter Description

<instance-id>Specify an MSTP instance in the range 1-15.

<port>The port to display information about. The port may be a switch

port (e.g. port1.0.4), a static channel group (e.g. sa2), or a dynamic

(LACP) channel group (e.g. po2).

% 1: MSTI Root Path Cost 0 - MSTI Root Port 0 - MSTI Bridge Priority 32768

% 1: MSTI Root Id 80020000cd24ff2d

% 1: MSTI Bridge Id 80020000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.2: Port 5002 - Id 838a - Role Disabled - State Discarding

% port1.0.2: Designated Internal Path Cost 0 - Designated Port Id 838a

% port1.0.2: Configured Internal Path Cost 20000000

% port1.0.2: Configured CST External Path cost 20000000

% port1.0.2: CST Priority 128 - MSTI Priority 128

% port1.0.2: Designated Root 80020000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.2: Designated Bridge 80020000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.2: Message Age 0 - Max Age 0

% port1.0.2: Hello Time 2 - Forward Delay 15

% port1.0.2: Forward Timer 0 - Msg Age Timer 0 - Hello Timer 0

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 503

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SHOW SPANNING-TREE MST INTERFACE

show spanning-tree mst interface

Overview This command displays the number of instances created, and VLANs associated

with it for the specified switch port.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show spanning-tree mst interface <port>

Mode User Exec, Privileged Exec, and Interface Configuration

Example To display detailed information about each instance, and all interfaces associated

with them, for port1.0.4, use the command:

awplus# show spanning-tree mst interface port1.0.4

Output Figure 16-11: Example output from show spanning-tree mst interface

Parameter Description

<port>The port to display information about. The port may be a switch port

(e.g. port1.0.4), a static channel group (e.g. sa2), or a dynamic

(LACP) channel group (e.g. po2).

% 1: Bridge up - Spanning Tree Enabled

% 1: CIST Root Path Cost 0 - CIST Root Port 0 - CIST Bridge Priority 32768

% 1: Forward Delay 15 - Hello Time 2 - Max Age 20 - Max-hops 20

% 1: CIST Root Id 80000008c73a2b22

% 1: CIST Reg Root Id 80000008c73a2b22

% 1: CST Bridge Id 80000008c73a2b22

% 1: portfast bpdu-filter disabled

% 1: portfast bpdu-guard disabled

% 1: portfast errdisable timeout disabled

% 1: portfast errdisable timeout interval 1 sec

%

% Instance VLAN

% 0: 1

% 1: 2-3

% 2: 4-5

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 504

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SHOW SPANNING-TREE MST DETAIL INTERFACE

show spanning-tree mst detail interface

Overview This command displays detailed information about the specified switch port, and

the MST instances associated with it.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show spanning-tree mst detail interface <port>

Mode User Exec, Privileged Exec and Interface Configuration

Example To display detailed information about port1.0.3 and the instances associated

with it, enter the command:

awplus# show spanning-tree mst detail interface port1.0.3

Output Figure 16-12: Example output from show spanning-tree mst detail interface

Parameter Description

<port>The port to display information about. The port may be a switch port

(e.g. port1.0.4), a static channel group (e.g. sa2), or a dynamic

(LACP) channel group (e.g. po2).

% 1: Bridge up - Spanning Tree Enabled

% 1: CIST Root Path Cost 0 - CIST Root Port 0 - CIST Bridge Priority 32768

% 1: Forward Delay 15 - Hello Time 2 - Max Age 20 - Max-hops 20

% 1: CIST Root Id 80000000cd24ff2d

% 1: CIST Reg Root Id 80000000cd24ff2d

% 1: CIST Bridge Id 80000000cd24ff2d

% 1: portfast bpdu-filter disabled

% 1: portfast bpdu-guard disabled

% 1: portfast errdisable timeout disabled

% 1: portfast errdisable timeout interval 300 sec

% port1.0.2: Port 5002 - Id 838a - Role Disabled - State Discarding

% port1.0.2: Designated External Path Cost 0 -Internal Path Cost 0

% port1.0.2: Configured Path Cost 20000000 - Add type Explicit ref count 2

% port1.0.2: Designated Port Id 838a - CIST Priority 128 -

% port1.0.2: CIST Root 80000000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.2: Regional Root 80000000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.2: Designated Bridge 80000000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.2: Message Age 0 - Max Age 20

% port1.0.2: CIST Hello Time 2 - Forward Delay 15

% port1.0.2: CIST Forward Timer 0 - Msg Age Timer 0 - Hello Timer 0 - topo 

change timer 0

% port1.0.2: forward-transitions 0

% port1.0.2: Version Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol - Received None - Send STP

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 505

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SHOW SPANNING-TREE MST DETAIL INTERFACE

% port1.0.2: No portfast configured - Current portfast off

% port1.0.2: portfast bpdu-guard default - Current portfast bpdu-guard off

% port1.0.2: portfast bpdu-filter default - Current portfast bpdu-filter off

% port1.0.2: no root guard configured - Current root guard off

% port1.0.2: Configured Link Type point-to-point - Current shared

%

% Instance 2: Vlans: 2

% 1: MSTI Root Path Cost 0 -MSTI Root Port 0 - MSTI Bridge Priority 32768

% 1: MSTI Root Id 80020000cd24ff2d

% 1: MSTI Bridge Id 80020000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.2: Port 5002 - Id 838a - Role Disabled - State Discarding

% port1.0.2: Designated Internal Path Cost 0 - Designated Port Id 838a

% port1.0.2: Configured Internal Path Cost 20000000

% port1.0.2: Configured CST External Path cost 20000000

% port1.0.2: CST Priority 128 - MSTI Priority 128

% port1.0.2: Designated Root 80020000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.2: Designated Bridge 80020000cd24ff2d

% port1.0.2: Message Age 0 - Max Age 0

% port1.0.2: Hello Time 2 - Forward Delay 15

% port1.0.2: Forward Timer 0 - Msg Age Timer 0 - Hello Timer 0

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 506

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SHOW SPANNING-TREE STATISTICS

show spanning-tree statistics

Overview This command displays BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) statistics for all

spanning-tree instances, and all switch ports associated with all spanning-tree

instances.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show spanning-tree statistics

Mode Privileged Exec

Usage To display BPDU statistics for all spanning-tree instances, and all switch ports

associated with all spanning-tree instances, use the command:

awplus# show spanning-tree statistics

Output Figure 16-13: Example output from show spanning-tree statistics

Port number = 915 Interface = port1.0.6

================================

% BPDU Related Parameters

% -----------------------

% Port Spanning Tree : Disable

% Spanning Tree Type : Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

% Current Port State : Discarding

% Port ID : 8393

% Port Number : 393

% Path Cost : 20000000

% Message Age : 0

% Designated Root : ec:cd:6d:20:c0:ed

% Designated Cost : 0

% Designated Bridge : ec:cd:6d:20:c0:ed

% Designated Port Id : 8393

% Top Change Ack : FALSE

% Config Pending : FALSE

% PORT Based Information & Statistics

% -----------------------------------

% Config Bpdu's xmitted : 0

% Config Bpdu's received : 0

% TCN Bpdu's xmitted : 0

% TCN Bpdu's received : 0

% Forward Trans Count : 0

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 507

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SHOW SPANNING-TREE STATISTICS

% STATUS of Port Timers

% ---------------------

% Hello Time Configured : 2

% Hello timer : INACTIVE

% Hello Time Value : 0

% Forward Delay Timer : INACTIVE

% Forward Delay Timer Value : 0

% Message Age Timer : INACTIVE

% Message Age Timer Value : 0

% Topology Change Timer : INACTIVE

% Topology Change Timer Value : 0

% Hold Timer : INACTIVE

% Hold Timer Value : 0

% Other Port-Specific Info

------------------------

% Max Age Transitions : 1

% Msg Age Expiry : 0

% Similar BPDUS Rcvd : 0

% Src Mac Count : 0

% Total Src Mac Rcvd : 0

% Next State : Learning

% Topology Change Time : 0

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 508

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SHOW SPANNING-TREE STATISTICS INSTANCE

show spanning-tree statistics instance

Overview This command displays BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) statistics for the specified

MST (Multiple Spanning Tree) instance, and all switch ports associated with that

MST instance.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show spanning-tree statistics instance <instance-id>

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To display BPDU statistics information for MST instance 2, and all switch ports

associated with that MST instance, use the command:

awplus# show spanning-tree statistics instance 2

Output Figure 16-14: Example output from show spanning-tree statistics instance

Commands

show spanning-tree statistics

Parameter Description

<instance-id>Specify an MSTP instance in the range 1-15.

% % INST_PORT port1.0.3 Information & Statistics

% ----------------------------------------

% Config Bpdu's xmitted (port/inst) : (0/0)

% Config Bpdu's received (port/inst) : (0/0)

% TCN Bpdu's xmitted (port/inst) : (0/0)

% TCN Bpdu's received (port/inst) : (0/0)

% Message Age(port/Inst) : (0/0)

% port1.0.3: Forward Transitions : 0

% Next State : Learning

% Topology Change Time : 0

...

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 509

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SHOW SPANNING-TREE STATISTICS INSTANCE INTERFACE

show spanning-tree statistics instance

interface

Overview This command displays BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) statistics for the specified

MST (Multiple Spanning Tree) instance and the specified switch port associated

with that MST instance.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show spanning-tree statistics instance <instance-id> interface

<port>

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To display BPDU statistics for MST instance 2, interface port1.0.2, use the

command:

awplus# show spanning-tree statistics instance 2 interface

port1.0.2

Parameter Description

<instance-id>Specify an MSTP instance in the range 1-15.

<port>The port to display information about. The port may be a switch

port (e.g. port1.0.4), a static channel group (e.g. sa2), or a

dynamic (LACP) channel group (e.g. po2).

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 510

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SHOW SPANNING-TREE STATISTICS INSTANCE INTERFACE

Output Figure 16-15: Example output from show spanning-tree statistics instance

interface

Commands

show spanning-tree statistics

awplus#sh spanning-tree statistics interface port1.0.2 instance 1

Spanning Tree Enabled for Instance : 1

==================================

% INST_PORT port1.0.2 Information & Statistics

% ----------------------------------------

% Config Bpdu's xmitted (port/inst) : (0/0)

% Config Bpdu's received (port/inst) : (0/0)

% TCN Bpdu's xmitted (port/inst) : (0/0)

% TCN Bpdu's received (port/inst) : (0/0)

% Message Age(port/Inst) : (0/0)

% port1.0.2: Forward Transitions : 0

% Next State : Learning

% Topology Change Time : 0



% Other Inst/Vlan Information & Statistics

% ----------------------------------------

% Bridge Priority : 0

% Bridge Mac Address : ec:cd:6d:20:c0:ed

% Topology Change Initiator : 5023

% Last Topology Change Occured : Mon Oct 3 05:42:06 2016

% Topology Change : FALSE

% Topology Change Detected : FALSE

% Topology Change Count : 1

% Topology Change Last Recvd from : 00:00:00:00:00:00

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 511

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SHOW SPANNING-TREE STATISTICS INTERFACE

show spanning-tree statistics interface

Overview This command displays BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) statistics for the specified

switch port, and all MST instances associated with that switch port.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show spanning-tree statistics interface <port>

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To display BPDU statistics about each MST instance for port1.0.2, use the

command:

awplus# show spanning-tree statistics interface port1.0.2

Output Figure 16-16: Example output from show spanning-tree statistics interface

Parameter Description

<port>The port to display information about. The port may be a switch port

(e.g. port1.0.4), a static channel group (e.g. sa2), or a dynamic (LACP)

channel group (e.g. po2).



awplus#show spanning-tree statistics interface port1.0.2



Port number = 906 Interface = port1.0.2

================================

% BPDU Related Parameters

% -----------------------

% Port Spanning Tree : Disable

% Spanning Tree Type : Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

% Current Port State : Discarding

% Port ID : 838a

% Port Number : 38a

% Path Cost : 20000000

% Message Age : 0

% Designated Root : ec:cd:6d:20:c0:ed

% Designated Cost : 0

% Designated Bridge : ec:cd:6d:20:c0:ed

% Designated Port Id : 838a

% Top Change Ack : FALSE

% Config Pending : FALSE

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 512

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SHOW SPANNING-TREE STATISTICS INTERFACE

Commands

show spanning-tree statistics

% PORT Based Information & Statistics

% -----------------------------------

% Config Bpdu's xmitted : 0

% Config Bpdu's received : 0

% TCN Bpdu's xmitted : 0

% TCN Bpdu's received : 0

% Forward Trans Count : 0

% STATUS of Port Timers

% ---------------------

% Hello Time Configured : 2

% Hello timer : INACTIVE

% Hello Time Value : 0

% Forward Delay Timer : INACTIVE

% Forward Delay Timer Value : 0

% Message Age Timer : INACTIVE

% Message Age Timer Value : 0

% Topology Change Timer : INACTIVE

% Topology Change Timer Value : 0

% Hold Timer : INACTIVE

% Hold Timer Value : 0

% Other Port-Specific Info

------------------------

% Max Age Transitions : 1

% Msg Age Expiry : 0

% Similar BPDUS Rcvd : 0

% Src Mac Count : 0

% Total Src Mac Rcvd : 0

% Next State : Learning

% Topology Change Time : 0

% Other Bridge information & Statistics

--------------------------------------

% STP Multicast Address : 01:80:c2:00:00:00

% Bridge Priority : 32768

% Bridge Mac Address : ec:cd:6d:20:c0:ed

% Bridge Hello Time : 2

% Bridge Forward Delay : 15

% Topology Change Initiator : 5023

% Last Topology Change Occured : Mon Oct 3 05:41:20 2016

% Topology Change : FALSE

% Topology Change Detected : TRUE

% Topology Change Count : 1

% Topology Change Last Recvd from : 00:00:00:00:00:00

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 513

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SHOW SPANNING-TREE VLAN RANGE-INDEX

show spanning-tree vlan range-index

Overview Use this command to display information about MST (Multiple Spanning Tree)

instances and the VLANs associated with them including the VLAN range-index

value for the device.

Syntax show spanning-tree vlan range-index

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To display information about MST instances and the VLANs associated with them

for the device, including the VLAN range-index value, use the following command:

awplus# show spanning-tree vlan range-index

Output Figure 16-17: Example output from show spanning-tree vlan range-index

Commands

show spanning-tree statistics

awplus#show spanning-tree vlan range-index

% MST Instance VLAN RangeIdx

% 1 1 1%

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 514

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE AUTOEDGE (RSTP AND MSTP)

spanning-tree autoedge (RSTP and MSTP)

Overview Use this command to enable the autoedge feature on the port.

The autoedge feature allows the port to automatically detect that it is an edge

port. If it does not receive any BPDUs in the first three seconds after linkup,

enabling, or entering RSTP or MSTP mode, it sets itself to be an edgeport and

enters the forwarding state.

Use this command for RSTP or MSTP.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this feature.

Syntax spanning-tree autoedge

no spanning-tree autoedge

Default Disabled

Mode Interface Configuration

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.3

awplus(config-if)# spanning-tree autoedge

Commands

spanning-tree edgeport (RSTP and MSTP)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 515

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE BPDU

spanning-tree bpdu

Overview Use this command to configure BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) discarding or

forwarding, when STP is disabled on the switch. This may be needed for correct STP

operation in complex networks.

There is no no variant for this command. Instead, apply the discard parameter to

reset it back to the default then re-enable STP with the command spanning-tree

enable.

Syntax spanning-tree bpdu

{discard|forward|forward-untagged-vlan|forward-vlan}

Default The discard parameter is enabled by default.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage This command enables the switch to forward unsupported BPDUs with an

unsupported Spanning Tree Protocol, such as proprietary STP protocols with

unsupported BPDUs, by forwarding BDPU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) frames

unchanged through the switch.

You must disable RSTP with the no spanning-tree rstp enable command before

you can use this command.

When you want to revert to default behavior on the switch, issue a spanning-tree

bdpu discard command and re-enable Spanning Tree with a spanning-tree rstp

enable command.

Parameter Description

bpdu A port that has BPDU filtering enabled will not transmit any BPDUs

and will ignore any BPDUs received. This port type has one of the

following parameters (in Global Configuration mode):

discard Discards all ingress STP BPDU frames.

forward Forwards any ingress STP BPDU packets to all ports,

regardless of any VLAN membership.

forward-

untagged-

vlan

Forwards any ingress STP BPDU frames to all ports

that are untagged members of the ingress port’s

native VLAN.

forward-

vlan

Forwards any ingress STP BPDU frames to all ports

that are tagged members of the ingress port’s native

VLAN.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 516

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE BPDU

Examples To enable STP BPDU discard in Global Configuration mode with STP disabled,

which discards all ingress STP BPDU frames, enter the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no spanning-tree rstp enable

awplus(config)# spanning-tree bpdu discard

To enable STP BPDU forward in Global Configuration mode with STP disabled,

which forwards any ingress STP BPDU frames to all ports regardless of any VLAN

membership, enter the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no spanning-tree rstp enable

awplus(config)# spanning-tree bpdu forward

To enable STP BPDU forwarding for untagged frames in Global Configuration

mode with STP disabled, which forwards any ingress STP BPDU frames to all ports

that are untagged members of the ingress port’s native VLAN, enter the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no spanning-tree rstp enable

awplus(config)# spanning-tree bpdu forward-untagged-vlan

To enable STP BPDU forwarding for tagged frames in Global Configuration mode

with STP disabled, which forwards any ingress STP BPDU frames to all ports that are

tagged members of the ingress port’s native VLAN, enter the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no spanning-tree rstp enable

awplus(config)# spanning-tree bpdu forward-vlan

To reset STP BPDU back to the default discard parameter and re-enable RSTP on

the switch, enter the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# spanning-tree bpdu discard

awplus(config)# spanning-tree rstp enable

Commands

show spanning-tree

spanning-tree enable

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 517

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE CISCO-INTEROPERABILITY (MSTP)

spanning-tree cisco-interoperability (MSTP)

Overview Use this command to enable/disable Cisco-interoperability for MSTP.

Use this command for MSTP only.

Syntax spanning-tree cisco-interoperability {enable|disable}

Default If this command is not used, Cisco interoperability is disabled.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage For compatibility with certain Cisco devices, all devices in the switched LAN

running the AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System must have Cisco-interoperability

enabled. When the AlliedWare Plus Operating System is interoperating with Cisco,

the only criteria used to classify a region are the region name and revision level.

VLAN to instance mapping is not used to classify regions when interoperating with

Cisco.

Examples To enable Cisco interoperability on a Layer 2 device:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# spanning-tree cisco-interoperability enable

To disable Cisco interoperability on a Layer 2 device:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# spanning-tree cisco-interoperability disable

Parameter Description

enable Enable Cisco interoperability for MSTP.

disable Disable Cisco interoperability for MSTP.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 518

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE EDGEPORT (RSTP AND MSTP)

spanning-tree edgeport (RSTP and MSTP)

Overview Use this command to set a port as an edge-port.

Use this command for RSTP or MSTP.

This command has the same effect as the spanning-tree portfast (STP) command,

but the configuration displays differently in the output of some show commands.

Use the no variant of this command to set a port to its default state (not an

edge-port).

Syntax spanning-tree edgeport

no spanning-tree edgeport

Default Not an edge port.

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage Use this command on a switch port connected to a LAN that has no other bridges

attached. If a BPDU is received on the port that indicates that another bridge is

connected to the LAN, then the port is no longer treated as an edge port.

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# spanning-tree edgeport

Commands

spanning-tree autoedge (RSTP and MSTP)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 519

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE ENABLE

spanning-tree enable

Overview Use this command in Global Configuration mode to enable the specified spanning

tree protocol for all switch ports. Note that this must be the spanning tree protocol

that is configured on the device by the spanning-tree mode command.

Use the no variant of this command to disable the configured spanning tree

protocol. This places all switch ports in the forwarding state.

Syntax spanning-tree {mstp|rstp|stp} enable

no spanning-tree {mstp|rstp|stp} enable

Default RSTP is enabled by default for all switch ports.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage With no configuration, spanning tree is enabled, and the spanning tree mode is set

to RSTP. To change the mode, see spanning-tree mode command.

Examples To enable STP in Global Configuration mode, enter the below commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# spanning-tree stp enable

To disable STP in Global Configuration mode, enter the below commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no spanning-tree stp enable

To enable MSTP in Global Configuration mode, enter the below commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# spanning-tree mstp enable

To disable MSTP in Global Configuration mode, enter the below commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no spanning-tree mstp enable

To enable RSTP in Global Configuration mode, enter the below commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# spanning-tree rstp enable

Parameter Description

mstp Enables or disables MSTP (Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol).

rstp Enables or disables RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol).

stp Enables or disables STP (Spanning Tree Protocol).

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 520

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE ENABLE

To disable RSTP in Global Configuration mode, enter the below commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no spanning-tree rstp enable

Commands

spanning-tree bpdu

spanning-tree mode

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 521

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE ERRDISABLE-TIMEOUT ENABLE

spanning-tree errdisable-timeout enable

Overview Use this command to enable the errdisable-timeout facility, which sets a timeout

for ports that are disabled due to the BPDU guard feature.

Use this command for RSTP or MSTP.

Use the no variant of this command to disable the errdisable-timeout facility.

Syntax spanning-tree errdisable-timeout enable

no spanning-tree errdisable-timeout enable

Default By default, the errdisable-timeout is disabled.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage The BPDU guard feature shuts down the port on receiving a BPDU on a

BPDU-guard enabled port. This command associates a timer with the feature such

that the port is re- enabled without manual intervention after a set interval. This

interval can be configured by the user using the spanning-tree errdisable-timeout

interval command.

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# spanning-tree errdisable-timeout enable

Commands

show spanning-tree

spanning-tree errdisable-timeout interval

spanning-tree portfast bpdu-guard

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 522

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE ERRDISABLE-TIMEOUT INTERVAL

spanning-tree errdisable-timeout interval

Overview Use this command to specify the time interval after which a port is brought back

up when it has been disabled by the BPDU guard feature.

Use this command for RSTP or MSTP.

Syntax spanning-tree errdisable-timeout interval <10-1000000>

no spanning-tree errdisable-timeout interval

Default By default, the port is re-enabled after 300 seconds.

Mode Global Configuration

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# spanning-tree errdisable-timeout interval 34

Commands

show spanning-tree

spanning-tree errdisable-timeout enable

spanning-tree portfast bpdu-guard

Parameter Description

<10-1000000> Specify the errdisable-timeout interval in seconds.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 523

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE FORCE-VERSION

spanning-tree force-version

Overview Use this command in Interface Configuration mode for a switch port interface only

to force the protocol version for the switch port. Use this command for RSTP or

MSTP only.

Syntax spanning-tree force-version <version>

no spanning-tree force-version

Default By default, no version is forced for the port. The port is in the spanning tree mode

configured for the device, or a lower version if it automatically detects one.

Mode Interface Configuration mode for a switch port interface only.

Examples Set the value to enforce the spanning tree protocol (STP):

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# spanning-tree force-version 0

Set the default protocol version:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# no spanning-tree force-version

Commands

show spanning-tree

Parameter Description

<version> <0-3> Version identifier.

0Forces the port to operate in STP mode.

1Not supported.

2Forces the port to operate in RSTP mode. If it receives STP

BPDUs, it can automatically revert to STP mode.

3Forces the port to operate in MSTP mode (this option is only

available if MSTP mode is configured). If it receives RSTP or

STP BPDUs, it can automatically revert to RSTP or STP mode.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 524

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE FORWARD-TIME

spanning-tree forward-time

Overview Use this command to set the forward delay value. Use the no variant of this

command to reset the forward delay value to the default setting of 15 seconds.

The forward delay sets the time (in seconds) to control how fast a port changes its

spanning tree state when moving towards the forwarding state. If the mode is set

to STP, the value determines how long the port stays in each of the listening and

learning states which precede the forwarding state. If the mode is set to RSTP or

MSTP, this value determines the maximum time taken to transition from

discarding to learning and from learning to forwarding.

This value is used only when the device is acting as the root bridge. Devices not

acting as the Root Bridge use a dynamic value for the forward delay set by the root

bridge. The forward delay, max-age, and hello time parameters are interrelated.

Syntax spanning-tree forward-time <forward-delay>

no spanning-tree forward-time

Default The default is 15 seconds.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage The allowable range for forward-time is 4-30 seconds.

The forward delay, max-age, and hello time parameters should be set according

to the following formula, as specified in IEEE Standard 802.1d:

2 x (forward delay - 1.0 seconds) >= max-age

max-age >= 2 x (hello time + 1.0 seconds)

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# spanning-tree forward-time 6

Commands

show spanning-tree

spanning-tree forward-time

spanning-tree hello-time

spanning-tree mode

Parameter Description

<forward-delay> <4-30> The forwarding time delay in seconds.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 525

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE GUARD ROOT

spanning-tree guard root

Overview Use this command in Interface Configuration mode for a switch port only to enable

the Root Guard feature for the switch port. The root guard feature disables

reception of superior BPDUs. You can use this command for RSTP, STP or MSTP.

Use the no variant of this command to disable the root guard feature for the port.

Syntax spanning-tree guard root

no spanning-tree guard root

Mode Interface Configuration mode for a switch port interface only.

Usage The Root Guard feature makes sure that the port on which it is enabled is a

designated port. If the Root Guard enabled port receives a superior BPDU, it goes

to a Listening state (for STP) or discarding state (for RSTP and MSTP).

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# spanning-tree guard root

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 526

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE HELLO-TIME

spanning-tree hello-time

Overview Use this command to set the hello-time. This sets the time in seconds between the

transmission of device spanning tree configuration information when the device is

the Root Bridge of the spanning tree or is trying to become the Root Bridge.

Use this command for RSTP, STP or MSTP.

Use the no variant of this command to restore the default of the hello time.

Syntax spanning-tree hello-time <hello-time>

no spanning-tree hello-time

Default Default is 2 seconds.

Mode Global Configuration and Interface Configuration for switch ports.

Usage The allowable range of values is 1-10 seconds.

The forward delay, max-age, and hello time parameters should be set according to

the following formula, as specified in IEEE Standard 802.1d:

2 x (forward delay - 1.0 seconds) >= max-age

max-age>= 2 x (hello time + 1.0 seconds)

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# spanning-tree hello-time 3

Commands

spanning-tree forward-time

spanning-tree max-age

show spanning-tree

Parameter Description

<hello-time><1-10> The hello BPDU interval in seconds.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 527

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE LINK-TYPE

spanning-tree link-type

Overview Use this command in Interface Configuration mode for a switch port interface only

to enable or disable point-to-point or shared link types on the switch port.

Use this command for RSTP or MSTP only.

Use the no variant of this command to return the port to the default link type.

Syntax spanning-tree link-type {point-to-point|shared}

no spanning-tree link-type

Default The default link type is point-to-point.

Mode Interface Configuration mode for a switch port interface only.

Usage You may want to set link type to shared if the port is connected to a hub with

multiple devices connected to it.

Examples awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# spanning-tree link-type point-to-point

Parameter Description

shared Disable rapid transition.

point-to-point Enable rapid transition.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 528

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE MAX-AGE

spanning-tree max-age

Overview Use this command to set the max-age. This sets the maximum age, in seconds, that

dynamic spanning tree configuration information is stored in the device before it

is discarded.

Use this command for RSTP, STP or MSTP.

Use the no variant of this command to restore the default of max-age.

Syntax spanning-tree max-age <max-age>

no spanning-tree max-age

Default The default of spanning-tree max-age is 20 seconds.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage Max-age is the maximum time in seconds for which a message is considered valid.

Configure this value sufficiently high, so that a frame generated by the root bridge

can be propagated to the leaf nodes without exceeding the max-age.

The forward delay, max-age, and hello time parameters should be set according

to the following formula, as specified in IEEE Standard 802.1d:

2 x (forward delay - 1.0 seconds) >= max-age

max-age >= 2 x (hello time + 1.0 seconds)

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# spanning-tree max-age 12

Commands

show spanning-tree

spanning-tree forward-time

spanning-tree hello-time

Parameter Description

<max-age><6-40> The maximum time, in seconds.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 529

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE MAX-HOPS (MSTP)

spanning-tree max-hops (MSTP)

Overview Use this command to specify the maximum allowed hops for a BPDU in an MST

region. This parameter is used by all the instances of the MST region.

Use the no variant of this command to restore the default.

Use this command for MSTP only.

Syntax spanning-tree max-hops <hop-count>

no spanning-tree max-hops <hop-count>

Default The default max-hops in a MST region is 20.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage Specifying the max hops for a BPDU prevents the messages from looping

indefinitely in the network. The hop count is decremented by each receiving port.

When a device receives an MST BPDU that has a hop count of zero, it discards the

BPDU.

Examples awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# spanning-tree max-hops 25

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no spanning-tree max-hops

Parameter Description

<hop-count> Specify the maximum hops the BPDU will be valid for in the range

<1-40>.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 530

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE MODE

spanning-tree mode

Overview Use this command to change the spanning tree protocol mode on the device. The

spanning tree protocol mode on the device can be configured to either STP, RSTP

or MSTP.

Syntax spanning-tree mode {stp|rstp|mstp}

Default The default spanning tree protocol mode on the device is RSTP.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage With no configuration, the device will have spanning tree enabled, and the

spanning tree mode will be set to RSTP. Use this command to change the spanning

tree protocol mode on the device. MSTP is VLAN aware, but RSTP and STP are not

VLAN aware. To enable or disable spanning tree operation, see the spanning-tree

enable command.

Examples To change the spanning tree mode from the default of RSTP to MSTP, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# spanning-tree mode mstp

Commands

spanning-tree enable

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 531

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE MST CONFIGURATION

spanning-tree mst configuration

Overview Use this command to enter the MST Configuration mode to configure the Multiple

Spanning-Tree Protocol.

Syntax spanning-tree mst configuration

Mode Global Configuration

Examples The following example uses this command to enter MST Configuration mode. Note

the change in the command prompt.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration

awplus(config-mst)#

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 532

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE MST INSTANCE

spanning-tree mst instance

Overview Use this command to assign a Multiple Spanning Tree instance (MSTI) to a switch

port or channel group.

Note that ports are automatically configured to send and receive spanning-tree

information for the associated MSTI when VLANs are assigned to MSTIs using the

instance vlan (MSTP) command.

Use the no variant of this command in Interface Configuration mode to remove the

MSTI from the specified switch port or channel group.

Syntax spanning-tree mst instance <instance-id>

no spanning-tree mst instance <instance-id>

Default A port automatically becomes a member of an MSTI when it is assigned to a VLAN.

Mode Interface Configuration mode for a switch port or channel group.

Usage You can disable automatic configuration of member ports of a VLAN to an

associated MSTI by using a no spanning-tree mst instance command to remove

the member port from the MSTI. Use the spanning-tree mst instance command

to add a VLAN member port back to the MSTI.

Examples To assign instance 3 to a switch port, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# spanning-tree mst instance 3

To remove instance 3 from a switch port, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# no spanning-tree mst instance 3

Commands

instance vlan (MSTP)

spanning-tree mst instance path-cost

spanning-tree mst instance priority

spanning-tree mst instance restricted-role

spanning-tree mst instance restricted-tcn

Parameter Description

<instance-id>Specify an MSTP instance in the range 1-15. The MST instance must

have already been created using the instance vlan (MSTP)

command.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 533

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE MST INSTANCE PATH-COST

spanning-tree mst instance path-cost

Overview Use this command to set the cost of a path associated with a switch port, for the

specified MSTI.

This specifies the switch port’s contribution to the cost of a path to the MSTI

regional root via that port. This applies when the port is the root port for the MSTI.

Use the no variant of this command to restore the default cost value of the path.

Syntax spanning-tree mst instance <instance-id> path-cost <path-cost>

no spanning-tree mst instance <instance-id> path-cost

Default The default path cost values and the range of recommended path cost values

depend on the port speed, as shown in the following table from the IEEE

802.1q-2003 standard.

Mode Interface Configuration mode for a switch port interface only.

Usage Before you can use this command to set a path-cost in a VLAN configuration, you

must explicitly add an MST instance to a port using the spanning-tree mst instance

command.

Examples To set a path cost of 1000 on instance 3, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# spanning-tree mst instance 3 path-cost 1000

Parameter Description

<instance-id>Specify an MSTP instance in the range 1-15.

<path-cost> Specify the cost of path in the range of <1-200000000>, where

a lower path-cost indicates a greater likelihood of the specific

interface becoming a root.

Port speed Default path cost Recommended path cost range

Less than 100 Kb/s

1Mbps

10Mbps

100 Mbps

1 Gbps

10 Gbps

100 Gbps

1Tbps

10 Tbps

200,000,000

20,000,000

2,000,000

200,000

20,000

2,000

200

20,000,000-200,000,000

2,000,000-20,000,000

200,000-2,000,000

20,000-200,000

2,000-20,000

200-2,000

20-200

2-200

2-20

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 534

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE MST INSTANCE PATH-COST

To return the path cost to its default value on instance 3, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# no spanning-tree mst instance 3 path-cost

Commands

instance vlan (MSTP)

spanning-tree mst instance

spanning-tree mst instance priority

spanning-tree mst instance restricted-role

spanning-tree mst instance restricted-tcn

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 535

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE MST INSTANCE PRIORITY

spanning-tree mst instance priority

Overview Use this command in Interface Configuration mode for a switch port interface only

to set the port priority for an MST instance (MSTI).

Use the no variant of this command to restore the default priority value (128).

Syntax spanning-tree mst instance <instance-id> priority <priority>

no spanning-tree mst instance <instance-id> [priority]

Default The default is 128.

Mode Interface Configuration mode for a switch port interface.

Usage This command sets the value of the priority field contained in the port identifier.

The MST algorithm uses the port priority when determining the root port for the

switch in the MSTI. The port with the lowest value has the highest priority, so it will

be chosen as root port over a port that is equivalent in all other aspects but with a

higher priority value.

Examples To set the priority to 112 on instance 3, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# spanning-tree mst instance 3 priority 112

To return the priority to its default value of 128 on instance 3, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# no spanning-tree mst instance 3 priority

Commands

instance vlan (MSTP)

spanning-tree priority (port priority)

spanning-tree mst instance

spanning-tree mst instance path-cost

spanning-tree mst instance restricted-role

spanning-tree mst instance restricted-tcn

Parameter Description

<instance-id>Specify an MSTP instance in the range 1-15.

<priority>This must be a multiple of 16 and within the range <0-240>. A

lower priority indicates greater likelihood of the port becoming

the root port.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 536

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE MST INSTANCE RESTRICTED-ROLE

spanning-tree mst instance restricted-role

Overview Use this command in Interface Configuration mode for a switch port interface only

to enable the restricted role for an MSTI (Multiple Spanning Tree Instance) on a

switch port. Configuring the restricted role for an MSTI on a switch port prevents

the switch port from becoming the root port in a spanning tree topology.

Use the no variant of this command to disable the restricted role for an MSTI on a

switch port. Removing the restricted role for an MSTI on a switch port allows the

switch port to become the root port in a spanning tree topology.

Syntax spanning-tree mst instance <instance-id> restricted-role

no spanning-tree mst instance <instance-id> restricted-role

Default The restricted role for an MSTI instance on a switch port is disabled by default.

Mode Interface Configuration mode for a switch port interface only.

Usage The root port is the port providing the best path from the bridge to the root bridge.

Use this command to disable a port from becoming a root port. Use the no variant

of this command to enable a port to become a root port. See the STP Feature

Overview and Configuration Guide for root port information.

Examples To prevent a switch port from becoming the root port, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# spanning-tree mst instance 3 restricted-role

To stop preventing the switch port from becoming the root port, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# no spanning-tree mst instance 3

restricted-role

Parameter Description

<instance-id>Specify an MSTP instance in the range 1-15. The MST instance must

have already been created using the instance vlan (MSTP)

command.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 537

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE MST INSTANCE RESTRICTED-ROLE

Commands

instance vlan (MSTP)

spanning-tree priority (port priority)

spanning-tree mst instance

spanning-tree mst instance path-cost

spanning-tree mst instance restricted-tcn

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 538

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE MST INSTANCE RESTRICTED-TCN

spanning-tree mst instance restricted-tcn

Overview Use this command to prevent a switch port from propagating received topology

change notifications and topology changes to other switch ports. This is named

restricted TCN (Topology Change Notification). A TCN is a simple Bridge Protocol

Data Unit (BPDU) that a bridge sends out to its root port to signal a topology

change.

Use the no variant of this command to stop preventing the switch port from

propagating received topology change notifications and topology changes to

other switch ports for the specified MSTI (Multiple Spanning Tree Instance).

The restricted TCN setting applies only to the specified MSTI (Multiple Spanning

Tree Instance).

Syntax spanning-tree mst instance <instance-id> restricted-tcn

no spanning-tree mst instance <instance-id> restricted-tcn

Default Disabled. By default, switch ports propagate TCNs.

Mode Interface Configuration mode for a switch port interface only.

Examples To prevent a switch port from propagating received topology change notifications

and topology changes to other switch ports, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# spanning-tree mst instance 3 restricted-tcn

To stop preventing a switch port from propagating received topology change

notifications and topology changes to other switch ports, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# no spanning-tree mst instance 3

restricted-tcn

Commands

instance vlan (MSTP)

spanning-tree priority (port priority)

spanning-tree mst instance

spanning-tree mst instance path-cost

spanning-tree mst instance restricted-role

Parameter Description

<instance-id>Specify an MSTP instance in the range 1-15. The MST instance must

have already been created using the instance vlan (MSTP)

command.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 539

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE PATH-COST

spanning-tree path-cost

Overview Use this command in Interface Configuration mode for a switch port interface only

to set the cost of a path for the specified port. This value then combines with others

along the path to the root bridge in order to determine the total cost path value

from the particular port, to the root bridge. The lower the numeric value, the

higher the priority of the path. This applies when the port is the root port.

Use this command for RSTP, STP or MSTP. When MSTP mode is configured, this will

apply to the port’s path cost for the CIST.

Syntax spanning-tree path-cost <pathcost>

no spanning-tree path-cost

Default The default path cost values and the range of recommended path cost values

depend on the port speed, as shown in the following table from the IEEE

802.1q-2003 and IEEE 802.1d-2004 standards.

Mode Interface Configuration mode for switch port interface only.

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# spanning-tree path-cost 123

Parameter Description

<pathcost><1-200000000> The cost to be assigned to the port.

Port speed Default path cost Recommended path cost range

Less than 100 Kb/s

1Mbps

10Mbps

100 Mbps

1 Gbps

10 Gbps

100 Gbps

1Tbps

10 Tbps

200,000,000

20,000,000

2,000,000

200,000

20,000

2,000

200

20,000,000-200,000,000

2,000,000-20,000,000

200,000-2,000,000

20,000-200,000

2,000-20,000

200-2, 000

20-200

2-200

2-20

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 540

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE PORTFAST (STP)

spanning-tree portfast (STP)

Overview Use this command in Interface Configuration mode for a switch port interface only

to set a port as an edge-port. The portfast feature enables a port to rapidly move

to the forwarding state, without having first to pass through the intermediate

spanning tree states. This command has the same effect as the spanning-tree

edgeport (RSTP and MSTP) command, but the configuration displays differently in

the output of some show commands.

NOTE: You can run either of two additional parameters with this command. To simplify

the syntax these are documented as separate commands. See the following additional

portfast commands:

•spanning-tree portfast bpdu-filter command

•spanning-tree portfast bpdu-guard command.

You can obtain the same effect by running the spanning-tree edgeport (RSTP and

MSTP) command. However, the configuration output may display differently in

some show commands.

Use the no variant of this command to set a port to its default state (not an

edge-port).

Syntax spanning-tree portfast

no spanning-tree portfast

Default Not an edge port.

Mode Interface Configuration mode for a switch port interface only.

Usage Portfast makes a port move from a blocking state to a forwarding state, bypassing

both listening and learning states. The portfast feature is meant to be used for

ports connected to end-user devices. Enabling portfast on ports that are

connected to a workstation or server allows devices to connect to the network

without waiting for spanning-tree to converge.

For example, you may need hosts to receive a DHCP address quickly and waiting

for STP to converge would cause the DHCP request to time out. Ensure you do not

use portfast on any ports connected to another device to avoid creating a

spanning-tree loop on the network.

Use this command on a switch port that connects to a LAN with no other bridges

attached. An edge port should never receive BPDUs. Therefore if an edge port

receives a BPDU, the portfast feature takes one of three actions.

• Cease to act as an edge port and pass BPDUs as a member of a spanning tree

network (spanning-tree portfast (STP) command disabled).

• Filter out the BPDUs and pass only the data and continue to act as a edge

port (spanning-tree portfast bpdu-filter command enabled).

• Block the port to all BPDUs and data (spanning-tree portfast bpdu-guard

command enabled).

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 541

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE PORTFAST (STP)

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# spanning-tree portfast

Commands

spanning-tree edgeport (RSTP and MSTP)

show spanning-tree

spanning-tree portfast bpdu-filter

spanning-tree portfast bpdu-guard

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 542

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE PORTFAST BPDU-FILTER

spanning-tree portfast bpdu-filter

Overview This command sets the bpdu-filter feature and applies a filter to any BPDUs (Bridge

Protocol Data Units) received. Enabling this feature ensures that configured ports

will not transmit any BPDUs and will ignore (filter out) any BPDUs received. BPDU

Filter is not enabled on a port by default.

Using the no variant of this command to turn off the bpdu-filter, but retain the

port’s status as an enabled port. If the port then receives a BPDU it will change its

role from an edge-port to a non edge-port.

Syntax (Global

Configuration)

spanning-tree portfast bpdu-filter

no spanning-tree portfast bpdu-filter

Syntax (Interface

Configuration)

spanning-tree portfast bpdu-filter {default|disable|enable}

no spanning-tree portfast bpdu-filter

Default BPDU Filter is not enabled on any ports by default.

Mode Global Configuration and Interface Configuration

Usage This command filters the BPDUs and passes only data to continue to act as an edge

port. Using this command in Global Configuration mode applies the portfast

bpdu-filter feature to all ports on the device. Using it in Interface mode applies the

feature to a specific port, or range of ports.The command will operate in both RSTP

and MSTP networks.

Use the show spanning-tree command to display status of the bpdu-filter

parameter for the switch ports.

Example To enable STP BPDU filtering in Global Configuration mode, enter the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# spanning-tree portfast bpdu-filter

Parameter Description

bpdu-filter A port that has bpdu-filter enabled will not transmit any BPDUs and

will ignore any BPDUs received. This port type has one of the

following parameters (in Interface Configuration mode):

default Takes the setting that has been configured for the whole

device, i.e. the setting made from the Global

configuration mode.

disable Turns off BPDU filter.

enable Turns on BPDU filter.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 543

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE PORTFAST BPDU-FILTER

To enable STP BPDU filtering in Interface Configuration mode, enter the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# spanning-tree portfast bpdu-filter enable

Commands

spanning-tree edgeport (RSTP and MSTP)

show spanning-tree

spanning-tree portfast (STP)

spanning-tree portfast bpdu-guard

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 544

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE PORTFAST BPDU-GUARD

spanning-tree portfast bpdu-guard

Overview This command applies a BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) guard to the port. A port

with the bpdu-guard feature enabled will block all traffic (BPDUs and user data), if

it starts receiving BPDUs.

Use this command in Global Configuration mode to apply BPDU guard to all ports

on the device. Use this command in Interface mode for an individual interface or a

range of interfaces specified. BPDU Guard is not enabled on a port by default.

Use the no variant of this command to disable the BPDU Guard feature on a device

in Global Configuration mode or to disable the BPDU Guard feature on a port in

Interface mode.

Syntax (Global

Configuration)

spanning-tree portfast bpdu-guard

no spanning-tree portfast bpdu-guard

Syntax (Interface

Configuration)

spanning-tree portfast bpdu-guard {default|disable|enable}

no spanning-tree portfast bpdu-guard

Default BPDU Guard is not enabled on any ports by default.

Mode Global Configuration or Interface Configuration

Usage This command blocks the port(s) to all devices and data when enabled. BPDU

Guard is a port-security feature that changes how a portfast-enabled port behaves

if it receives a BPDU. When bpdu-guard is set, then the port shuts down if it

receives a BPDU. It does not process the BPDU as it is considered suspicious. When

bpdu-guard is not set, then the port will negotiate spanning-tree with the device

sending the BPDUs. By default, bpdu- guard is not enabled on a port.

You can configure a port disabled by the bpdu-guard to re-enable itself after a

specific time interval. This interval is set with the spanning-tree errdisable-timeout

interval command. If you do not use the errdisable-timeout feature, then you will

need to manually re-enable the port by using the no shutdown command.

Parameter Description

bpdu-guard A port that has bpdu-guard turned on will enter the STP blocking state

if it receives a BPDU. This port type has one of the following

parameters (in Interface Configuration mode):

default Takes the setting that has been configured for the whole

device, i.e. the setting made from the Global configuration

mode.

disable Turns off BPDU guard.

enable Turns on BPDU guard and will also set the port as an edge

port.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 545

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE PORTFAST BPDU-GUARD

Use the show spanning-tree command to display the device and port

configurations for the BPDU Guard feature. It shows both the administratively

configured and currently running values of bpdu-guard.

Example To enable STP BPDU guard in Global Configuration mode, enter the below

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# spanning-tree portfast bpdu-guard

To enable STP BPDU guard in Interface Configuration mode, enter the below

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# spanning-tree portfast bpdu-guard enable

Commands

spanning-tree edgeport (RSTP and MSTP)

show spanning-tree

spanning-tree portfast (STP)

spanning-tree portfast bpdu-filter

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 546

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE PRIORITY (BRIDGE PRIORITY)

spanning-tree priority (bridge priority)

Overview Use this command to set the bridge priority for the device. A lower priority value

indicates a greater likelihood of the device becoming the root bridge.

Use this command for RSTP, STP or MSTP. When MSTP mode is configured, this will

apply to the CIST.

Use the no variant of this command to reset it to the default.

Syntax spanning-tree priority <priority>

no spanning-tree priority

Default The default priority is 32678.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage To force a particular device to become the root bridge use a lower value than other

devices in the spanning tree.

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# spanning-tree priority 4096

Commands

spanning-tree mst instance priority

show spanning-tree

Parameter Description

<priority><0-61440> The bridge priority, which will be rounded to a multiple of

4096.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 547

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE PRIORITY (PORT PRIORITY)

spanning-tree priority (port priority)

Overview Use this command in Interface Configuration mode for a switch port interface only

to set the port priority for port. A lower priority value indicates a greater likelihood

of the port becoming part of the active topology.

Use this command for RSTP, STP, or MSTP. When the device is in MSTP mode, this

will apply to the CIST.

Use the no variant of this command to reset it to the default.

Syntax spanning-tree priority <priority>

no spanning-tree priority

Default The default priority is 128.

Mode Interface Configuration mode for a switch port interface only.

Usage To force a port to be part of the active topology (for instance, become the root port

or a designated port) use a lower value than other ports on the device. (This

behavior is subject to network topology, and more significant factors, such as

bridge ID.)

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# spanning-tree priority 16

Commands

spanning-tree mst instance priority

spanning-tree priority (bridge priority)

show spanning-tree

Parameter Description

<priority><0-240>, in increments of 16. The port priority, which will be rounded

down to a multiple of 16.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 548

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE RESTRICTED-ROLE

spanning-tree restricted-role

Overview Use this command in Interface Configuration mode for a switch port interface only

to restrict the port from becoming a root port.

Use the no variant of this command to disable the restricted role functionality.

Syntax spanning-tree restricted-role

no spanning-tree restricted-role

Default The restricted role is disabled.

Mode Interface Configuration mode for a switch port interface only.

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# spanning-tree restricted-role

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 549

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE RESTRICTED-TCN

spanning-tree restricted-tcn

Overview Use this command in Interface Configuration mode for a switch port interface only

to prevent TCN (Topology Change Notification) BPDUs (Bridge Protocol Data

Units) from being sent on a port. If this command is enabled, after a topology

change a bridge is prevented from sending a TCN to its designated bridge.

Use the no variant of this command to disable the restricted TCN functionality.

Syntax spanning-tree restricted-tcn

no spanning-tree restricted-tcn

Default The restricted TCN is disabled.

Mode Interface Configuration mode for a switch port interface only.

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# spanning-tree restricted-tcn

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 550

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

SPANNING-TREE TRANSMIT-HOLDCOUNT

spanning-tree transmit-holdcount

Overview Use this command to set the maximum number of BPDU transmissions that are

held back.

Use the no variant of this command to restore the default transmit hold-count

value.

Syntax spanning-tree transmit-holdcount

no spanning-tree transmit-holdcount

Default Transmit hold-count default is 3.

Mode Global Configuration

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# spanning-tree transmit-holdcount

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 551

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

SPANNING TREE COMMANDS

UNDEBUG MSTP

undebug mstp

Overview This command applies the functionality of the no debug mstp (RSTP and STP)

command.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 552

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Link Aggregation

Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference of commands used to configure a

static channel group (static aggregator) and dynamic channel group (LACP

channel group, etherchannel or LACP aggregator). Link aggregation is also

sometimes referred to as channeling.

NOTE: AlliedWare Plus™ supports IEEE 802.3ad link aggregation and uses the Link

Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). LACP does not interoperate with devices that use

Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP).

Link aggregation does not necessarily achieve exact load balancing across the links.

The load sharing algorithm is designed to ensure that any given data flow always goes

down the same link. It also aims to spread data flows across the links as evenly as

possible.

Link aggregation hashes one or more of the source and destination MAC address, IP

address and UDP/TCP ports to select a link on which to send a packet. So packet flow

between a pair of hosts always takes the same link inside the Link Aggregation Group

(LAG). The net effect is that the bandwidth for a given packet stream is restricted to the

speed of one link in the LAG.

For example, for a 2 Gbps LAG that is a combination of two 1 Gbps ports, any one flow

of traffic can only ever reach a maximum throughput of 1 Gbps. However, the hashing

algorithm should spread the flows across the links so that when many flows are

operating, the full 2 Gbps can be utilized.

For a description of static and dynamic link aggregation (LACP), and configuration

examples, see the Link Aggregation Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Command List •“channel-group” on page 554

•“clear lacp counters” on page 556

•“debug lacp” on page 557

•“lacp global-passive-mode enable” on page 558

•“lacp port-priority” on page 559

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 553

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS

•“lacp system-priority” on page 560

•“lacp timeout” on page 561

•“platform load-balancing” on page 563

•“show debugging lacp” on page 564

•“show diagnostic channel-group” on page 565

•“show etherchannel” on page 567

•“show etherchannel detail” on page 568

•“show etherchannel summary” on page 569

•“show lacp sys-id” on page 570

•“show lacp-counter” on page 571

•“show port etherchannel” on page 572

•“show static-channel-group” on page 573

•“static-channel-group” on page 574

•“undebug lacp” on page 576

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 554

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS

CHANNEL-GROUP

channel-group

Overview Use this command to either create a new dynamic channel group while at the

same time adding a port to it, or to add a port to an existing dynamic channel

group. Note that you must also set the LACP mode to be either active or passive.

You can create up to 32 dynamic (LACP) channel groups (and up to 96 static

channel groups).

Use the no variant of this command to turn off link aggregation on the device port.

You will be returned to Global Configuration mode from Interface Configuration

mode.

Syntax channel-group <dynamic-channel-group-number> mode

{active|passive}

no channel-group

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage All the device ports in a channel-group must belong to the same VLANs, have the

same tagging status, and can only be operated on as a group. All device ports

within a channel group must have the same port speed and be in full duplex mode.

Once the LACP channel group has been created, it is treated as a device port, and

can be referred to in most other commands that apply to device ports.

To refer to an LACP channel group in other LACP commands, use the channel

group number. To specify an LACP channel group (LACP aggregator) in other

commands, prefix the channel group number with po. For example, ‘po2’ refers to

the LACP channel group with channel group number 2.

For more information about LACP, see the Link Aggregation Feature Overview and

Configuration Guide which is available on our website at alliedtelesis.com.

Parameter Description

<dynamic-channel-

group-number>

<1-32> Specify a dynamic channel group number for an

LACP link. You can create up to 32 dynamic (LACP) channel

groups (in addition to up to 96 static channel groups).

active Enables initiation of LACP negotiation on a port. The port

will transmit LACP dialogue messages whether or not it

receives them from the partner device.

passive Disables initiation of LACP negotiation on a port. The port

will only transmit LACP dialogue messages if the partner

device is transmitting them, i.e., the partner is in the active

mode.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 555

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS

CHANNEL-GROUP

Examples To add device port1.0.6 to a newly created LACP channel group 2 use the

commands below:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.6

awplus(config-if)# channel-group 2 mode active

To remove device port1.0.6 from any created LACP channel groups use the

command below:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.6

awplus(config-if)# no channel-group

To reference channel group 2 as an interface, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface po2

awplus(config-if)#

Commands

show etherchannel

show etherchannel detail

show etherchannel summary

show port etherchannel

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 556

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS

CLEAR LACP COUNTERS

clear lacp counters

Overview Use this command to clear all counters of all present LACP aggregators (channel

groups) or a given LACP aggregator.

Syntax clear lacp [<1-32>] counters

Mode Privileged Exec

Example awplus# clear lacp 2 counters

Parameter Description

<1-32>Channel-group number.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 557

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS

DEBUG LACP

debug lacp

Overview Use this command to enable all LACP troubleshooting functions.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this function.

Syntax debug lacp {all|cli|event|ha|packet|sync|timer[detail]}

no debug lacp {all|cli|event|ha|packet|sync|timer[detail]}

Mode Privileged Exec and Global Configuration

Examples awplus# debug lacp timer detail

awplus# debug lacp all

Commands

show debugging lacp

undebug lacp

Parameter Description

all Turn on all debugging for LACP.

cli Specifies debugging for CLI messages.

Echoes commands to the console.

event Specifies debugging for LACP events.

Echoes events to the console.

ha Specifies debugging for HA (High Availability) events.

Echoes High Availability events to the console.

packet Specifies debugging for LACP packets.

Echoes packet contents to the console.

sync Specified debugging for LACP synchronization.

Echoes synchronization to the console.

timer Specifies debugging for LACP timer.

Echoes timer expiry to the console.

detail Optional parameter for LACP timer-detail.

Echoes timer start/stop details to the console.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 558

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS

LACP GLOBAL-PASSIVE-MODE ENABLE

lacp global-passive-mode enable

Overview Use this command to enable LACP channel-groups to dynamically self-configure

when they are connected to another device that has LACP channel-groups

configured with Active Mode.

Syntax lacp global-passive-mode enable

no lacp global-passive-mode enable

Default Enabled

Mode Global Configuration

Usage Do not mix LACP configurations (manual and dynamic). When LACP global passive

mode is turned on (by using the lacp global-passive-mode enable command),

we do not recommend using a mixed configuration in a LACP channel-group; i.e.

some links are manually configured (by the channel-group command) and others

are dynamically learned in the same channel-group.

Example To enable global passive mode for LACP channel groups, use the command:

awplus(config)# lacp global-passive-mode enable

To disable global passive mode for LACP channel groups, use the command:

awplus(config)# no lacp global-passive-mode enable

Commands

show etherchannel

show etherchannel detail

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 559

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS

LACP PORT-PRIORITY

lacp port-priority

Overview Use this command to set the priority of a device port. Ports are selected for

aggregation based on their priority, with the higher priority (numerically lower)

ports selected first.

Use the no variant of this command to reset the priority of port to the default.

Syntax lacp port-priority <1-65535>

no lacp port-priority

Default The default is 32768.

Mode Interface Configuration

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.5

awplus(config-if)# lacp port-priority 34

Parameter Description

<1-65535> Specify the LACP port priority.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 560

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS

LACP SYSTEM-PRIORITY

lacp system-priority

Overview Use this command to set the system priority of a local system. This is used in

determining the system responsible for resolving conflicts in the choice of

aggregation groups.

Use the no variant of this command to reset the system priority of the local system

to the default.

Syntax lacp system-priority <1-65535>

no lacp system-priority

Default The default is 32768.

Mode Global Configuration

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# lacp system-priority 6700

Parameter Description

<1-65535> LACP system priority. Lower numerical values have higher priorities.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 561

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS

LACP TIMEOUT

lacp timeout

Overview Use this command to set the short or long timeout on a port. Ports will time out of

the aggregation if three consecutive updates are lost.

Syntax lacp timeout {short|long}

Default The default is long timeout (30 seconds).

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage This command enables the device to indicate the rate at which it expects to receive

LACPDUs from its neighbor.

If the timeout is set to long, then the device expects to receive an update every 30

seconds, and this will time a port out of the aggregation if no updates are seen for

90 seconds (i.e. 3 consecutive updates are lost).

If the timeout is set to short, then the device expects to receive an update every

second, and this will time a port a port out of the aggregation if no updates are

seen for 3 seconds (i.e. 3 consecutive updates are lost).

The device indicates its preference by means of the Timeout field in the Actor

section of its LACPDUs. If the Timeout field is set to 1, then the device has set the

short timeout. If the Timeout field is set to 0, then the device has set the long

timeout.

Setting the short timeout enables the device to be more responsive to

communication failure on a link, and does not add too much processing overhead

to the device (1 packet per second).

NOTE: It is not possible to configure the rate that the device sends LACPDUs; the device

must send at the rate which the neighbor indicates it expects to receive LACPDUs.

Examples The following commands set the LACP long timeout period for 30 seconds on

port1.0.2.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# lacp timeout long

Parameter Description

timeout Number of seconds before invalidating a received LACP data unit

(DU).

short LACP short timeout. The short timeout value is 1 second.

long LACP long timeout. The long timeout value is 30 seconds.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 562

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS

LACP TIMEOUT

The following commands set the LACP short timeout for 1 second on port1.0.2.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# lacp timeout short

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 563

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS

PLATFORM LOAD-BALANCING

platform load-balancing

Overview This command selects which address fields are used as inputs into the load

balancing algorithm for aggregated links. The output from this algorithm is used

to select which individual path a given packet will traverse within an aggregated

link.

The no variant of this command applies its default setting.

Syntax platform load-balancing {src-dst-mac|src-dst-ip}

no platform load-balancing

Default The default is src-dst-ip.

Mode Global configuration

Examples To set the load balancing algorithm to include only Layer 2 MAC addresses, enter:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# platform load-balancing src-dst-mac

To set the load balancing algorithm to include only Layer 3 IP addresses and L4

ports, enter:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# platform load-balancing src-dst-ip

Commands

show platform

Parameter Description

src-dst-mac Include the source and destination MAC addresses (Layer 2)

src-dst-ip Include the source and destination IP addresses (Layer 3) and

UDP/TCP source and destination ports.

If you choose this option, the algorithm will use MAC addresses

to calculate load balancing for Layer 2 and non-IP packets.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 564

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS

SHOW DEBUGGING LACP

show debugging lacp

Overview Use this command to display the LACP debugging option set.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show debugging lacp

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example awplus# show debugging lacp

Output Figure 17-1: Example output from the show debugging lacp command

Commands

debug lacp

LACP debugging status:

LACP timer debugging is on

LACP timer-detail debugging is on

LACP cli debugging is on

LACP packet debugging is on

LACP event debugging is on

LACP sync debugging is on

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 565

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS

SHOW DIAGNOSTIC CHANNEL-GROUP

show diagnostic channel-group

Overview This command displays dynamic and static channel group interface status

information. The output of this command is useful for Allied Telesis authorized

service personnel for diagnostic purposes.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show diagnostic channel-group

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example awplus# show diagnostic channel-group

Output Figure 17-2: Example output from the show diagnostic channel-group

command



awplus#show diagnostic channel-group



Channel Group Info based on NSM:

Note: Pos - position in hardware table

-------------------------------------------------------------

Dev Interface IfIndex Member port IfIndex Active Pos

-------------------------------------------------------------

sa3 4503 port1.0.15 5015 No

sa3 4503 port1.0.18 5018 No

po1 4601 port1.0.7 5007 No

po1 4601 port1.0.8 5008 No

po1 4601 port1.0.9 5009 No



Channel Group Info based on HSL:

Note: Pos - position in hardware table

-------------------------------------------------------------

Dev Interface IfIndex Member port IfIndex Active Pos

-------------------------------------------------------------

sa3 4503 N/a

po1 4601 N/a



Channel Group Info based on IPIFWD:

Note: Pos - position in hardware table

-------------------------------------------------------------

Dev Interface IfIndex Member port IfIndex Active Pos

-------------------------------------------------------------

sa3 4503 N/a

po1 4601 N/a

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 566

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS

SHOW DIAGNOSTIC CHANNEL-GROUP

Commands

show tech-support



Channel Group Info based on HW:

Note: Pos - position in hardware table

Only entries from first device are displayed.

-------------------------------------------------------------

Dev Interface IfIndex Member port IfIndex Active Pos

-------------------------------------------------------------

sa3 4503 N/a

po1 4601 N/a



No error found

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 567

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS

SHOW ETHERCHANNEL

show etherchannel

Overview Use this command to display information about a LACP channel specified by the

channel group number.

The command output also shows the thrash limiting status. If thrash limiting is

detected and the action parameter of the thrash-limiting command is set to

vlan-disable, the output will also show the VLANs on which thrashing is detected.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide, which is

available on our website at alliedtelesis.com.

Syntax show etherchannel [<1-32>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example awplus# show etherchannel

Output Figure 17-3: Example output from show etherchannel

Example awplus# show etherchannel 1

Output Figure 17-4: Example output from show etherchannel for a particular channel

Parameter Description

<1-32>Channel-group number.

awplus#show etherchannel

LAG Maximum : 128

LAG Static Maximum: 96

LAG Dynamic Maximum: 32

LAG Static Count : 0

LAG Dynamic Count : 1

LAG Total Count : 1

Lacp Aggregator: po1

Member:

port1.0.5

port1.0.6

awplus#show etherchannel 1

Aggregator po1 (4601)

Mac address: 00:00:00:00:00:00

Admin Key: 0001 - Oper Key 0000

Receive link count: 0 - Transmit link count: 0

Individual: 0 - Ready: 0

Partner LAG: 0x0000,00-00-00-00-00-00

Link: port1.0.1 (5001) disabled

Link: port1.0.2 (5002) disabled

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 568

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS

SHOW ETHERCHANNEL DETAIL

show etherchannel detail

Overview Use this command to display detailed information about all LACP channels.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide, which is

available on our website at alliedtelesis.com.

Syntax show etherchannel detail

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example awplus# show etherchannel detail

Output Example output from show etherchannel detail

awplus#show etherchannel detail

Aggregator po1 (IfIndex: 4601)

Mac address: 00:00:cd:37:05:17

Admin Key: 0001 - Oper Key 0001

Receive link count: 2 - Transmit link count: 2

Individual: 0 - Ready: 1

Partner LAG: 0x8000,00-00-cd-37-02-9a,0x0001

Link: port1.0.1 (IfIndex: 8002) synchronized

Link: port1.0.2 (IfIndex: 20002) synchronized

Aggregator po2 (IfIndex: 4602)

Mac address: 00:00:cd:37:05:17

Admin Key: 0002 - Oper Key 0002

Receive link count: 2 - Transmit link count: 2

Individual: 0 - Ready: 1

Partner LAG: 0x8000,ec-cd-6d-aa-c8-56,0x0002

Link: port1.0.3 (IfIndex: 8001) synchronized

Link: port1.0.4 (IfIndex: 20001) synchronized

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 569

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS

SHOW ETHERCHANNEL SUMMARY

show etherchannel summary

Overview Use this command to display a summary of all LACP channels.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide, which is

available on our website at alliedtelesis.com.

Syntax show etherchannel summary

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example awplus# show etherchannel summary

Output Example output from show etherchannel summary



awplus#show etherchannel summary

Aggregator po10 (IfIndex: 4610)

Admin Key: 0010 - Oper Key 0010

Link: port1.0.1 (IfIndex: 7007) synchronized

Link: port1.0.2 (IfIndex: 8007) synchronized

Link: port1.0.3 (IfIndex: 11007) synchronized

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 570

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS

SHOW LACP SYS-ID

show lacp sys-id

Overview Use this command to display the LACP system ID and priority.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide, which is

available on our website at alliedtelesis.com.

Syntax show lacp sys-id

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example awplus# show lacp sys-id

Output Example output from show lacp sys-id

System Priority: 0x8000 (32768)

MAC Address: 0200.0034.5684

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 571

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS

SHOW LACP-COUNTER

show lacp-counter

Overview Use this command to display the packet traffic on all ports of all present LACP

aggregators, or a given LACP aggregator.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide, which is

available on our website at alliedtelesis.com.

Syntax show lacp-counter [<1-32>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example awplus# show lacp-counter 2

Output Example output from show lacp-counter

Parameter Description

<1-32>Channel-group number.

% Traffic statistics

Port LACPDUs Marker Pckt err

Sent Recv Sent Recv Sent Recv

% Aggregator po2 (IfIndex: 4604)

port1.0.2 0 0 0 0 0 0

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 572

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS

SHOW PORT ETHERCHANNEL

show port etherchannel

Overview Use this command to show LACP details of the device port specified.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide, which is

available on our website at alliedtelesis.com.

Syntax show port etherchannel <port>

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example awplus# show port etherchannel port1.0.2

Output Example output from show port etherchannel

Parameter Description

<port> Name of the device port to display LACP information about.

awplus#show port etherchannel port1.0.2

LACP link info: port1.0.2 - 7007

Link: port1.0.2 (IfIndex: 7007)

Aggregator: po10 (IfIndex: 4610)

Receive machine state: Current

Periodic Transmission machine state: Slow periodic

Mux machine state: Collecting/Distributing

Actor Information: Partner Information:

Selected ................. Selected Partner Sys Priority ....... 0x8000

Physical Admin Key .............. 2 Partner System .. ec-cd-6d-d1-64-d0

Port Key ....................... 10 Port Key ....................... 10

Port Priority ............... 32768 Port Priority ............... 32768

Port Number .................. 7007 Port Number .................. 5001

Mode ....................... Active Mode ....................... Active

Timeout ...................... Long Timeout ...................... Long

Individual .................... Yes Individual .................... Yes

Synchronised .................. Yes Synchronised .................. Yes

Collecting .................... Yes Collecting .................... Yes

Distributing .................. Yes Distributing .................. Yes

Defaulted ...................... No Defaulted ...................... No

Expired ........................ No Expired ........................ No

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 573

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS

SHOW STATIC-CHANNEL-GROUP

show static-channel-group

Overview Use this command to display all configured static channel groups and their

corresponding member ports. Note that a static channel group is the same as a

static aggregator.

The command output also shows the thrash limiting status. If thrash limiting is

detected and the action parameter of the thrash-limiting command is set to

vlan-disable, the output will also show the VLANs on which thrashing is detected.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide, which is

available on our website at alliedtelesis.com.

Syntax show static-channel-group

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example awplus# show static-channel-group

Output Example output from show static-channel-group

Commands

static-channel-group

% LAG Maximum : 128

% LAG Static Maximum: 96

% LAG Dynamic Maximum: 32

% LAG Static Count : 2

% LAG Dynamic Count : 2

% LAG Total Count : 4

% Static Aggregator: sa2

% Member:

port1.0.1

% Static Aggregator: sa3

% Member:

port1.0.2

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 574

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS

STATIC-CHANNEL-GROUP

static-channel-group

Overview Use this command to create a static channel group, or add a member port to an

existing static channel group. Static channel groups are also known as static

aggregators.

You can create up to 96 static channel groups (and up to 32 dynamic channel

groups).

Use the no variant of this command to remove the device port from the static

channel group.

Syntax static-channel-group <static-channel-group-number>

[member-filters]

no static-channel-group

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage This command adds the device port to the static channel group with the specified

channel group number. If the channel group does not exist, it is created, and the

port is added to it. The no prefix detaches the port from the static channel group.

If the port is the last member to be removed, the static channel group is deleted.

All the ports in a channel group must have the same VLAN configuration: they

must belong to the same VLANs and have the same tagging status, and can only

be operated on as a group.

Once the static channel group has been created, it is treated as a device port, and

can be referred to in other commands that apply to device ports.

To refer to a static channel group in other static channel group commands, use the

channel group number. To specify a static channel group in other commands,

prefix the channel group number with sa. For example, ‘sa2’ refers to the static

channel group with channel group number 2.

Examples To define static channel group 2 on a device port, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.4

awplus(config-if)# static-channel-group 2

Parameter Description

<static-channel-

group-number>

<1-96> Static channel group number.

member-filters Allow QoS and ACL settings to be configured on the

aggregator’s individual member ports, instead of the

aggregator itself. This configuration is required when using

QoS Storm Protection on a static aggregator.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 575

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS

STATIC-CHANNEL-GROUP

To reference static channel group 2 as an interface, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface sa2

awplus(config-if)#

To make it possible to use QoS Storm Protection on static channel group 2 on

port1.0.6, with an ACL named “test-acl”, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.6

awplus(config-if)# static-channel-group 2 member-filters

awplus(config-if)# access-group test-acl

Commands

show static-channel-group

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 576

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS

UNDEBUG LACP

undebug lacp

Overview This command applies the functionality of the no debug lacp command.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 577

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Power over

Ethernet

Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter contains an alphabetical list of commands used to configure Power

over Ethernet (PoE). Each command contains a functional description and shows

examples of configuration and output screens for show commands. These

commands are only supported on PoE capable ports. An error message will display

on the console if you enter a PoE command on a port that does not support PoE.

The following documents offer further information for configuring PoE on

AlliedWare Plus switches.

•the PoE Feature Overview and Configuration_Guide.

•the Support for Allied Telesis Enterprise_MIBs_in AlliedWare Plus, for

information about which PoE MIB objects are supported.

•the SNMP Feature Overview and Configuration_Guide, for information about

SNMP traps.

Power over Ethernet (PoE) is a technology allowing devices such as security

cameras to receive power over LAN cabling.

The Powered Device (PD) referred to throughout this chapter is a PoE or PoE+

powered device, such as an IP phone or a Wireless Access Point (WAP).

Command List •“clear power-inline counters interface” on page 579

•“debug power-inline” on page 580

•“power-inline allow-legacy” on page 582

•“power-inline description” on page 583

•“power-inline enable” on page 584

•“power-inline max” on page 585

•“power-inline priority” on page 587

•“power-inline usage-threshold” on page 589

•“service power-inline” on page 590

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 578

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS

•“show debugging power-inline” on page 591

•“show power-inline” on page 592

•“show power-inline counters” on page 595

•“show power-inline interface” on page 597

•“show power-inline interface detail” on page 599

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 579

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS

CLEAR POWER-INLINE COUNTERS INTERFACE

clear power-inline counters interface

Overview This command will clear the counters from a specified port, a range of ports, or all

ports on the switch. If no ports are entered then PoE counters for all ports are

cleared. It will also clear all Power over Ethernet (PoE) counters supported by the

Power Ethernet MIB (RFC 3621).

Syntax clear power-inline counters interface [<port-list>]

Mode Privileged Exec

Usage The PoE counters are displayed with the show power-inline counters command.

Examples To clear the PoE counters for port1.0.2 only, use the following command:

awplus# clear power-inline counters interface port1.0.2

To clear the PoE counters for port1.0.5 through port1.0.8, use the following

command:

awplus# clear power-inline counters interface

port1.0.5-port1.0.8

To clear the PoE counters for all ports, use the following command:

awplus# clear power-inline counters interface

Validation

Commands

show power-inline counters

Parameter Description

<port-list>Selects the port or ports whose counters are to be cleared.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 580

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS

DEBUG POWER-INLINE

debug power-inline

Overview This command enables debugging display for messages that are specific to Power

over Ethernet (PoE).

Use the no variant of this command to disable the specified PoE debugging

messages.

Syntax debug power-inline [all|event|info|power]

no debug power-inline [all|event|info|power]

Default No debug messages are enabled by default.

Mode Privileged Exec

Usage Use the terminal monitor command to display PoE debug messages on the

console.

Use the show debugging power-inline command to show the PoE debug

configuration.

Examples To enable PoE debugging and start the display of PoE event and info debug

messages on the console, use the following commands:

awplus# terminal monitor

awplus# debug power-inline event info

To enable PoE debugging and start the display of all PoE debugging messages on

the console, use the following commands:

awplus# terminal monitor

awplus# debug power-inline all

To stop the display of PoE info debug messages on the console, use the following

command:

awplus# no debug power-inline info

To disable all PoE debugging and stop the display of any PoE debugging messages

on the console, use the following command:

awplus# no debug power-inline all

Parameter Description

all Displays all (event, info, nsm, power) debug messages.

event Displays event debug information, showing any error conditions

that may occur during PoE operation.

info Displays informational level debug information, showing high-level

essential debugging, such as information about message types.

power Displays power management debug information.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 581

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS

DEBUG POWER-INLINE

Commands

show debugging power-inline

terminal monitor

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 582

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS

POWER-INLINE ALLOW-LEGACY

power-inline allow-legacy

Overview This command enables detection of pre-IEEE 802.3af Power Ethernet standard

legacy Powered Devices (PDs).

The no variant of this command disables detection of pre-IEEE 802.3af Power

Ethernet standard legacy Powered Devices (PDs).

Syntax power-inline allow-legacy

no power-inline allow-legacy

Default Detection of legacy PDs is enabled on all ports

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To disable detection of legacy PDs, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no power-inline allow-legacy

To enable detection of legacy PDs, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# power-inline allow-legacy

Validation

Commands

show power-inline

show running-config power-inline

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 583

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS

POWER-INLINE DESCRIPTION

power-inline description

Overview This command adds a description for a Powered Device (PD) connected to a PoE

port.

The no variant of this command clears a previously entered description for a

connected PD, resetting the PD description to the default (null).

Syntax power-inline description <pd-description>

no power-inline description

Default No description for a connected PD is set by default.

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage Select a PoE port, a list of PoE ports, or a range of PoE ports with the preceding

interface (to configure) command. If you specify a range or list of ports they must

all be PoE capable ports.

Examples To add the description “Desk Phone” for a connected PD on port1.0.2, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# power-inline description Desk Phone

To clear the description for the connected PD on port1.0.2, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# no power-inline description

Commands

show power-inline interface

show running-config power-inline

Parameter Description

<pd-description>Description of the PD connected to the PoE capable port

(with a maximum 256 character string limit per PD

description).

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 584

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS

POWER-INLINE ENABLE

power-inline enable

Overview This command enables Power over Ethernet (PoE) to detect a connected Powered

Device (PD) and supply power.

The no variant of this command disables PoE functionality on the selected PoE

port(s). No power is supplied to a connected PD after PoE is disabled on the

selected PoE port(s).

Ports still provide Ethernet connectivity after PoE is disabled.

Syntax power-inline enable

no power-inline enable

Default PoE is enabled by default on all ports

Mode Interface Configuration for one or more ports.

Usage No PoE log messages are generated for ports on which PoE is disabled.

Examples To disable PoE on port1.0.1 to port1.0.4, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1-port1.0.4

awplus(config-if)# no power-inline enable

To enable PoE on port1.0.1 to port1.0.4, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1-port1.0.4

awplus(config-if)# power-inline enable

Commands

show power-inline

show power-inline interface

show power-inline interface detail

show running-config power-inline

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 585

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS

POWER-INLINE MAX

power-inline max

Overview This command sets the maximum power allocated to a Power over an Ethernet

(PoE and PoE+) port. The amount of power actually supplied to the port depends

on the power requirements of the connected PD. It is also a function of the total

PoE power loading on the switch and the PoE priority set for the port by the

power-inline priority command. However this command (power-inline max) does

apply a maximum value to the power that the port is able to supply.

Note that the value set by this command will be the figure the switch will use when

apportioning the power budget for its ports. For example, if 15.4 W is assigned to

a port whose PD only consumes 5 W, the switch will reserve the full 15.4 W for this

port when determining its total power PoE power requirement.

The no variant of this command sets the maximum power supplied to a PoE port

to the default, which is set to the maximum power limit for the class of the

connected Powered Device (PD).

Syntax power-inline max <4000-30000>

no power-inline max

Default The switch supplies the maximum power limit for the class of the PD connected to

the port by default.

NOTE: See the PoE Feature Overview and Configuration Guide for further information

about power classes.

Mode Interface Configuration for one or more ports. If you specify a range or list of ports,

they must all be PoE capable ports.

Usage If you select a range of PoE ports in Interface Configuration mode before issuing

this command, then each port in the range selected will have the same maximum

power value configured. If the PoE port attempts to draw more than the maximum

power, this is logged and all power is removed.

Note that the value entered is rounded up to the next value supported by the

hardware. The actual value used is displayed after you enter the command, such as

in the following sample console output:

Parameter Description

<4000-30000>The maximum power supplied to a PoE port in milliwatts

(mW).

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 586

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS

POWER-INLINE MAX

See the LLDP Feature Overview and Configuration Guide for information about

power monitoring at the PD.

Note the difference in power supplied from the PSE to the power available at the

PD due to line loss.

See the PoE Feature Overview and Configuration Guide for further information

about the difference between the power supplied from the PSE and the power

available at the PD.

Examples To set the maximum power supplied to ports in the range port1.0.1 to port1.0.4 to

6450mW per port, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2-port1.0.4

awplus(config-if)# power-inline max 6450

To clear the user-configured maximum power supplied to port1.0.1, and revert to

using the default maximum power, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1

awplus(config-if)# no power-inline max

Commands

show power-inline interface

show running-config power-inline



awplus#configure terminal



awplus(config)#interface port1.0.1



awplus(config-if)#power-line max 5300



% The maximum power has been rounded to 5450mW in hardware.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 587

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS

POWER-INLINE PRIORITY

power-inline priority

Overview This command sets the Power over Ethernet (PoE) priority level of a PoE port to one

of three available priority levels:

•low

•high

•critical

The no variant of this command restores the PoE port priority to the default (low).

Syntax power-inline priority {low|high|critical}

no power-inline priority

Default The default priority is low for all PoE ports

Mode Interface Configuration

Usage Select a PoE port, a list of PoE ports, or a range of PoE ports with the preceding

interface (to configure) command. If you specify a range or list of ports they must

all be PoE capable ports.

PoE ports with higher priorities are given power before PoE ports with lower

priorities. If the priorities for two PoE ports are the same then the lower numbered

PoE port is given power before the higher numbered PoE port.

See the PoE Feature Overview and Configuration Guide for further information

about PoE priority.

Examples To set the priority level to high on port1.0.1 to port1.0.4, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1-port1.0.4

awplus(config-if)# power-inline priority high

Parameter Description

low The lowest priority for a PoE enabled port (default). PoE ports

set to low only receive power if all the PoE ports assigned to

the other two levels are already receiving power.

high The second highest priority for a PoE enabled port. PoE ports

set to high receive power only if all the ports set to critical

are already receiving power.

critical The highest priority for a PoE enabled port. PoE ports set to

critical are guaranteed power before any ports assigned to

the other two priority levels. Ports assigned to the other

priority levels receive power only if all critical ports are

receiving power.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 588

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS

POWER-INLINE PRIORITY

To reset the priority level to the default of low on port1.0.1 to port1.0.4, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1-port1.0.4

awplus(config-if)# no power-inline priority

Commands

power-inline usage-threshold

show power-inline

show power-inline interface

show running-config power-inline

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 589

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS

POWER-INLINE USAGE-THRESHOLD

power-inline usage-threshold

Overview This command sets the level at which the switch will issue a message that the

power supplied to all Powered Devices (PDs) has reached a critical level of the

nominal power rating for the switch. The level is set as a percentage of total

available power.

The no variant of this command resets the notification usage-threshold to the

default (80% of the nominal power rating).

Syntax power-inline usage-threshold <1-99>

no power-inline usage-threshold

Default The default power usage threshold is 80% of the nominal power rating

Mode Global Configuration

Usage Use the snmp-server enable trap command to configure SNMP notification. An

SNMP notification is sent when the usage-threshold, as configured in the example,

is exceeded.

Examples To generate SNMP notifications when power supplied exceeds 70% of the nominal

power rating, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# snmp-server enable trap power-inline

awplus(config)# power-inline usage-threshold 70

To reset the notification threshold to the default (80% of the nominal power

rating), use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no power-inline usage-threshold

Commands

snmp-server enable trap

show power-inline interface

show running-config power-inline

Parameter Description

<1-99>The usage-threshold percentage configured with this

command.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 590

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS

SERVICE POWER-INLINE

service power-inline

Overview This command enables Power over Ethernet (PoE) globally on the switch, for all

PoE ports.

Syntax service power-inline

no service power-inline

Default PoE functionality is enabled by default

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To disable PoE, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no service power-inline

To re-enable PoE, if PoE has been disabled, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# service power-inline

Commands

show power-inline

show running-config power-inline

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 591

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS

SHOW DEBUGGING POWER-INLINE

show debugging power-inline

Overview This command displays Power over Ethernet (PoE) debug settings.

Syntax show debugging power-inline

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display PoE debug settings, use the following command:

awplus# show debugging power-inline

Output Figure 18-1: Example output from the show debugging power-inline

command

Commands

debug power-inline

terminal monitor

awplus#show debugging power-inline

PoE Debugging status:

PoE Informational debugging is disabled

PoE Event debugging is disabled

PoE Power Management debugging is disabled



PoE NSM debugging is enabled

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 592

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS

SHOW POWER-INLINE

show power-inline

Overview This command displays the Power over Ethernet (PoE) status for all ports.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show power-inline

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the PoE status for all ports, use the following command:

awplus# show power-inline

Output Figure 18-2: Example output from show power-inline

awplus#show power-inline

PoE Status:



Nominal Power: 370W

Power Allocated: 246W



Actual Power Consumption: 151W

Operational Status: On

Power Usage Threshold: 80% (296W)



PoE Interface:

Interface Admin Pri Oper Power Device Class Max(mW)

port1.0.1 Enabled Low Powered 3840 n/a 1 4000 [C]

port1.0.2 Enabled High Powered 6720 n/a 2 7000 [C]

port1.0.3 Enabled Low Powered 14784 n/a 3 15400 [C]

port1.0.4 Enabled Crit Powered 14784 n/a 3 15400 [C]

port1.0.5 Enabled Crit Powered 3840 n/a 1 4000 [C]

...

Table 1: Parameters in the show power-inline command output

Parameter Description

Nominal Power The nominal power available on the switch in watts (W).

Power Allocated The current power allocated in watts (W) that is available to

be drawn by any connected Powered Devices (PDs). This is

updated every 5 seconds.

Actual Power

Consumption

The current power consumption in watts (W) drawn by all

connected Powered Devices (PDs). This is updated every 5

seconds.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 593

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS

SHOW POWER-INLINE

Operational Status The operational status of the PSU hardware when this

command was issued:

•On if the PSU is installed and switched on.

•Off when the PSU is switched off (an RPS may be

connected to the switch to power PoE instead of the

PSU).

•Fault when there is an issue with the PSU hardware.

Power Usage Threshold

(%)

The configured SNMP trap / log threshold, as configured

from a power-inline usage-threshold command.

Interface The PoE port(s) in the format portx.y.z, where x is the device

number, y is the module number within the device, and z is

the PoE port number within the module.

Admin The administrative state of PoE on a PoE port, either

Enabled or Disabled.

Pri The current PoE priorities for PoE ports, as configured using

the power-inline priority command:

•Low is the lowest priority (this is the default).

•High is the second highest priority.

•Crit (critical) is the highest priority.

If the switch cannot supply all ports, it will supply critical

ports, then high-priority ports, then low-priority ports.

Oper The current PoE port state when this command was issued:

•Powered displays if there is a PD connected and power

is being supplied.

•Denied displays if supplying power would make the

switch go over the power budget.

•Off displays if the port is not supplying power but has

not been denied power by the switch. This is the default

state for ports that are not connected to a PD.

•Disabled displays if the PoE port is administratively

disabled.

•Syncing displays if PoE is still initializing the port when

you issue the command.

•Fault displays if there is a problem with PoE on the port.

•Unknown displays if PoE cannot determine the state of

the port.

Power The power consumption in milliwatts (mW) for the PoE

port when this command was entered.

Table 1: Parameters in the show power-inline command output (cont.)

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 594

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS

SHOW POWER-INLINE

Commands

show power-inline counters

show power-inline interface

Device The description of the connected PD device if a description

has been added with the power-inline description

command. No description is shown for PDs not configured

with the power-inline description command.

Class The class of the connected PD, if power is being supplied to

the PD.

Max (mW) The power in milliwatts (mW) allocated for the PoE port.

Additionally, note the following as displayed per PoE port:

•[U] if the power limit for a port was user configured (with

the power-inline max command).

•[L] if the power limit for a port was supplied by LLDP.

•[C] if the power limit for a port was supplied by the PD

class.

Table 1: Parameters in the show power-inline command output (cont.)

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 595

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS

SHOW POWER-INLINE COUNTERS

show power-inline counters

Overview This command displays Power over Ethernet (PoE) event counters for ports on the

Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE). The PoE event counters displayed can also be

accessed by objects in the PoE MIB (RFC 3621). See the MIB Objects Feature

Overview and Configuration Guide for information about which PoE MIB objects

are supported.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show power-inline counters [<port-list>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Examples To display all PoE event counters for all PoE ports, use the command:

awplus# show power-inline counters

To display the PoE event counters for the port range 1.0.1 to 1.0.3, use the

command:

awplus# show power-inline counters interface port1.0.1-1.0.3

Output Figure 18-3: Example output from the show power-inline counters command

Parameter Description

<port-list>Enter the PoE port(s) to display PoE event counters for them.

awplus#show power-inline counters interface port1.0.4-port1.0.12

PoE Counters:

Interface MPSAbsent Overload Short Invalid Denied

port1.0.4 0 0 0 0 0

port1.0.5 0 0 0 0 0

port1.0.6 0 0 0 0 0

port1.0.7 0 0 0 0 0

port1.0.8 0 0 0 0 0

port1.0.9 0 0 0 0 0

port1.0.10 0 0 0 0 0

port1.0.11 0 0 0 0 0

port1.0.12 0 0 0 0 0

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 596

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS

SHOW POWER-INLINE COUNTERS

Commands

clear power-inline counters interface

show power-inline

show power-inline interface

Table 2: Parameters in the show power-inline counters command output

Parameter Description

Interface The PoE port(s) in the format portx.y.z, where x is the device

number, y is the module number within the device, and z is the

PoE port number within the module.

MPSAbsent The number of instances when the PoE MPS (Maintain Power

Signature) signal has been lost. The PoE MPS signal is lost when a

PD is disconnected from the PSE. Also increments

pethPsePortMPSAbsentCounter in the PoE MIB.

Overload The number of instances when a PD exceeds its configured power

limit (as configured by the power-inline max command). Also

increments pethPsePortOverLoadCounter in the PoE MIB.

Short The number of short circuits that have happened with a PD. Also

increments pethPsePortShortCounter in the PoE MIB.

Invalid The number of times a PD with an Invalid Signature (where the PD

has an open or short circuit, or is a legacy PD) is detected. Also

increments pethPseInvalidSignatureCounter in the PoE

MIB.

Denied The number of times a PD has been refused power due to power

budget limitations for the PSE. Also increments

pethPsePortPowerDeniedCounter in the PoE MIB.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 597

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS

SHOW POWER-INLINE INTERFACE

show power-inline interface

Overview This command displays a summary of Power over Ethernet (PoE) information for

specified ports. If no ports are specified then PoE information is displayed for all

ports.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show power-inline interface [<port-list>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the PoE port-specific information for all PoE ports on the switch, use the

following command:

awplus# show power-inline interface

To display the PoE port specific information for the port range1.0.1 to 1.0.4, use the

following command:

awplus# show power-inline interface port1.0.1-port1.0.4

Output Figure 18-4: Example output from the show power-inline interface command

Parameter Description

<port-list>Enter the PoE port(s) to display PoE specific information in the show

output.

awplus#show power-inline interface port1.0.1-port1.0.4

Interface Admin Pri Oper Power Device Class Max(mW)

port1.0.1 Disabled Low Disabled 0 n/a n/a n/a

port1.0.2 Enabled High Powered 3840 Desk Phone 1 5000 [U]

port1.0.3 Enabled Crit Powered 6720 AccessPoint 2 7000 [C]

port1.0.4 Disabled Low Disabled 0 n/a n/a n/a

Table 3: Parameters in the show power-inline interface command output

Parameter Description

Interface The PoE port(s) in the format portx.y.z, where x is the device

number, y is the module number within the device, and z is the

PoE port number within the module.

Admin The administrative state of PoE on a PoE port, either Enabled or

Disabled.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 598

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS

SHOW POWER-INLINE INTERFACE

Commands

show power-inline

show power-inline interface detail

Pri The current PoE priorities for PoE ports on the PSE, as configured

from a power-inline priority command:

•Low displays when the low parameter is issued. The lowest

priority for a PoE enabled port (default).

•High displays when the high parameter is issued. The

second highest priority for a PoE enabled port.

•Crit displays when the critical parameter is issued. The

highest priority for a PoE enabled port.

Oper The current PoE port state when this command was issued:

•Powered displays if there is a PD connected and power is

being supplied.

•Denied displays if supplying power would make the switch

go over the power budget.

•Off displays if the port is not supplying power but has not

been denied power by the switch. This is the default state for

ports that are not connected to a PD.

•Disabled displays if the PoE port is administratively disabled.

•Syncing displays if PoE is still initializing the port when you

issue the command.

•Fault displays if there is a problem with PoE on the port.

•Unknown displays if PoE cannot determine the state of the

port.

Power The power consumption in milliwatts (mW) for the PoE port

when this command was entered.

Device The description of the connected PD device if a description has

been added with the power-inline description command. No

description is shown for PDs not configured with the

power-inline description command.

Class The class of the connected PD, if power is being supplied to the

PD from the PSE.

See the PoE Feature Overview and Configuration Guide for

further information about power classes.

Max (mW) The power in milliwatts (mW) allocated for the PoE port.

Additionally, note the following is displayed per PoE port:

•[U] if the power limit for a port was user configured (with the

power-inline max command).

•[L] if the power limit for a port was supplied by LLDP.

•[C] if the power limit for a port was supplied by the PD class.

Table 3: Parameters in the show power-inline interface command output

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 599

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS

SHOW POWER-INLINE INTERFACE DETAIL

show power-inline interface detail

Overview This command displays detailed information for one or more Power over Ethernet

(PoE) ports.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show power-inline interface [<port-list>] detail

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Usage The power allocated to each port is listed in the Power allocated row, and is

limited by the maximum power per Powered Device (PD) class, or a user

configured power limit.

Examples To display detailed PoE port specific information for the port range 1.0.1 to 1.0.3,

use the command:

awplus# show power-inline interface port1.0.1-1.0.3 detail

Output Figure 18-5: Example output from the show power-inline interface detail

command

Parameter Description

<port-list>Enter the PoE port(s) to display information about only the specified

port or ports.

awplus#show power-inline interface port1.0.1-1.0.2 detail

Interface port1.0.1

Powered device type: Desk Phone #1

PoE admin enabled

Priority Low

Detection status: Powered

Current power consumption: 4800 mW

Powered device class: 1

Power allocated: 5000 mW (from configuration)

Detection of legacy devices is disabled

Powered pairs: Data

Interface port1.0.2

Powered device type: Access Point #3

PoE admin enabled

Priority High

Detection status: Powered

Current power consumption: 6720 mW

Powered device class: 2

Power allocated: 7000 mW (from powered device class)

Detection of legacy devices is enabled

Powered pairs: Data

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 600

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS

SHOW POWER-INLINE INTERFACE DETAIL

Table 4: Parameters in show power-inline interface detail command output

Parameter Description

Interface The PoE port(s) in the format portx.y.z, where x is the device

number, y is the module number within the device, and z is the

PoE port number within the module.

Powered

device type:

The name of the PD, if connected and if power is being supplied

to the PD from the PSE, configured with the power-inline

description command. n/a displays if a description has not been

configured for the PD.

PoE admin The administrative state of PoE on a PoE capable port, either

Enabled or Disabled as configured from the power-inline enable

command or the no power-inline enable command

respectively.

Priority The PoE priority of a port, which is either Low, or High, or

Critical, as configured by the power-inline priority command.

Detection

status:

The current PSE PoE port state when this command was issued:

•Powered displays when there is a PD connected and power is

being supplied from the PSE.

•Denied displays when supplying power would make the PSE

go over the power budget.

•Disabled displays when the PoE port is administratively

disabled.

•Off displays when PoE has been disabled for the port.

•Fault displays when a PSE goes over its power allocation.

Current power

consumption:

The power consumption for the PoE port when this command

was entered. Note that the power consumption may have

changed since the command was entered and the power is

displayed.

Powered

device class:

The class of the connected PD if connected, and if power is being

supplied to the PD from the PSE.

See the PoE Feature Overview and Configuration Guide for

further information about power classes.

Power

allocated:

The power in milliwatts (mW) allocated for the PoE port.

Additionally, note the following as displayed per PoE port:

•[U] if the power limit for a port was user configured (with the

power-inline max command).

•[L] if the power limit for a port was supplied by LLDP.

•[C] if the power limit for a port was supplied by the PD class.

Detection of

legacy

devices is

The status of legacy PoE detection on the PoE port (enabled or

disabled), as configured for the PoE port with the power-inline

allow-legacy command.

Powered

pairs:

The IEEE 802.3af and IEEE 802.3at standards allow for either data

or spare twisted pairs to be used to transfer power to a PD.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 601

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS

SHOW POWER-INLINE INTERFACE DETAIL

Commands

show power-inline

show power-inline interface

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 602

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Part 3: Layer 3 Switching

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 603

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP Addressing and

Protocol Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference of commands used to configure

various IP features, including the following protocols:

• Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)

For more information, see the IP Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Command List •“arp-aging-timeout” on page 605

•“arp-mac-disparity” on page 606

•“arp (IP address MAC)” on page 609

•“arp log” on page 610

•“arp opportunistic-nd” on page 613

•“arp-reply-bc-dmac” on page 614

•“clear arp-cache” on page 615

•“debug ip packet interface” on page 616

•“ip address (IP Addressing and Protocol)” on page 618

•“ip gratuitous-arp-link” on page 620

•“ip redirects” on page 622

•“ip unreachables” on page 623

•“ping” on page 625

•“show arp” on page 626

•“show debugging ip packet” on page 628

•“show ip interface” on page 630

•“show ip sockets” on page 631

•“show ip traffic” on page 634

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 604

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

•“tcpdump” on page 636

•“traceroute” on page 637

•“undebug ip packet interface” on page 638

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 605

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

ARP-AGING-TIMEOUT

arp-aging-timeout

Overview This command sets a timeout period on dynamic ARP entries associated with a

specific interface. If your device stops receiving traffic for the host specified in a

dynamic ARP entry, it deletes the ARP entry from the ARP cache after this timeout

is reached.

Your device times out dynamic ARP entries to ensure that the cache does not fill

with entries for hosts that are no longer active. Static ARP entries are not aged or

automatically deleted.

By default the time limit for dynamic ARP entries is 300 seconds on all interfaces.

The no variant of this command sets the time limit to the default of 300 seconds.

Syntax arp-aging-timeout <0-432000>

no arp-aging timeout

Default 300 seconds (5 minutes)

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Example To set the ARP entries on interface vlan30 to time out after two minutes, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan30

awplus(config-if)# arp-aging-timeout 120

Commands

clear arp-cache

show arp

Parameter Description

<0-432000> The timeout period in seconds.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 606

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

ARP-MAC-DISPARITY

arp-mac-disparity

Overview Use this command to enable the switch to support services like Microsoft Network

Load Balancing (MS-NLB).

Such services use ARP with disparate MAC addresses to ensure that packets

destined for a server cluster virtual address are sent to all servers in the cluster.

Disparate MAC addresses mean that the MAC address in the “sender hardware

address” field of an ARP reply is different to the MAC address in the “Source MAC

address” field of the Ethernet header that the ARP packet is encapsulated in.

The no variant of this command reverts to the default behavior. See the Default

section below for more information.

Syntax arp-mac-disparity {multicast|multicast-igmp|unicast}

no arp-mac-disparity {multicast|multicast-igmp|unicast}

Default ARP-MAC disparity support is disabled and:

• If the disparate ARP has a multicast MAC address in the ARP reply, the switch

drops the ARP reply and does not learn any associated addresses

• If the disparate ARP has a unicast MAC address in the ARP reply, the switch

learns the address in the ARP reply. The learned ARP entry points to the

single port that the ARP reply arrived on. Matching traffic will go out this

port.

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage, multicast

mode

When you are using multicast mode, you can limit the number of ports that

packets are flooded to, instead of flooding to all ports in the VLAN. To do this,

specify the list of ports when creating the ARP entry.

Parameter Description

multicast Enables support of server clusters operating in multicast mode.

Packets destined for the server cluster are flooded to all ports

in the VLAN.

multicast-igmp Enables support of server clusters operating in multicast/IGMP

mode. In multicast/IGMP mode, the MS-NLB server cluster uses

IGMP reports to forward server traffic to a limited set of ports.

unicast Enables support of server clusters operating in unicast mode.

Packets destined for the server cluster are flooded to all ports

in the VLAN.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 607

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

ARP-MAC-DISPARITY

For example, to flood only port1.0.1 to port1.0.3, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# arp 10.10.1.100 010e.11ff.2222

port1.0.1-port1.0.3

Usage, multicast

igmp mode

Multicast-IGMP mode is enabled by using the command arp-mac-disparity

multicast-igmp.

In this mode, the only difference to standard multicast mode is that the reception

of IGMP reports now controls the ports to which the L3 switch floods traffic. That

is, rather than simply flooding each packet destined for the NLB cluster IP address

to all ports on the egress VLAN, those packets are only sent to the switchports in

the VLAN that have received IGMP reports for the multicast group corresponding

to the NLB cluster MAC address.

Like arp-mac-disparity multicast, the command arp-mac-disparity

multicast-igmp puts the switch into a mode where it will accept disparate ARP

responses. Similarly, upon receiving a disparate ARP response, an ARP entry is

created for the IP/MAC in the content of the ARP packet. The difference with the

arp-mac-disparity multicast-igmp command is that the egress port is set to the

subset of ports in the VLAN that have received IGMP reports for the NLB cluster

MAC address.

Note that the ARP entry is updated as ports join/leave the IGMP group. If no ports

have received IGMP reports for the NLB cluster MAC address then the ARP entry

will have no egress ports and will simply drop packets destined for the NLB cluster

IP address.

Again, no FDB entry is created in response to receiving the ARP packet. However,

since the NLB server is operating in multicast mode with the IGMP option set and

is sending IGMP reports, an FDB entry will already exist for the IGMP group (and, as

a result, the NLB cluster MAC address).

When the arp-mac-disparity multicast-igmp command is configured on the

VLAN, ARP entries appear in the output of the command show arp like this:

Examples To enable support for MS-NLB in unicast mode on interface vlan2, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# arp-mac-disparity unicast

awplus#show arp

IP Address MAC Address Interface Port Type

10.100.0.56 0100.5e7f.0038 vlan200 igmp-group dynamic

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 608

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

ARP-MAC-DISPARITY

To disable support for MS-NLB in unicast mode on interface vlan2, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# no arp-mac-disparity unicast

Commands

arp (IP address MAC)

clear arp-cache

show arp

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 609

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

ARP (IP ADDRESS MAC)

arp (IP address MAC)

Overview This command adds a static ARP entry to the ARP cache. This is typically used to

add entries for hosts that do not support ARP or to speed up the address resolution

function for a host. The ARP entry must not already exist. Use the alias parameter

to allow your device to respond to ARP requests for this IP address.

The no variant of this command removes the static ARP entry. Use the clear

arp-cache command to remove the dynamic ARP entries in the ARP cache.

Syntax arp <ip-addr> <mac-address> [<port-number>] [alias]

no arp <ip-addr>

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To add the IP address 10.10.10.9 with the MAC address 0010.2533.4655 into the

ARP cache, and have your device respond to ARP requests for this address, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# arp 10.10.10.9 0010.2355.4566 alias

Commands

arp-mac-disparity

clear arp-cache

show arp

Parameter Description

<ip-addr> The IPv4 address of the device you are adding as a static ARP

entry.

<mac-address> The MAC address of the device you are adding as a static ARP

entry, in hexadecimal notation with the format

HHHH.HHHH.HHHH.

<port-number> The port number associated with the IP address. Specify this

when the IP address is part of a VLAN.

alias Allows your device to respond to ARP requests for the IP

address. Proxy ARP must be enabled on the interface before

using this parameter.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 610

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

ARP LOG

arp log

Overview This command enables the logging of dynamic and static ARP entries in the ARP

cache. The ARP cache contains mappings of device ports, VLAN IDs, and IP

addresses to physical MAC addresses for hosts.

This command can display the MAC addresses in the ARP log either using the

notation HHHH.HHHH.HHHH, or using the IEEE standard hexadecimal notation

(HH-HH-HH-HH-HH-HH).

Use the no variant of this command to disable the logging of ARP entries.

Syntax arp log [mac-address-format ieee]

no arp log [mac-address-format ieee]

Default The ARP logging feature is disabled by default.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage You have the option to change how the MAC address is displayed in the ARP log

message. The output can either use the notation HHHH.HHHH.HHHH or

HH-HH-HH-HH-HH-HH.

Enter arp log to use HHHH.HHHH.HHHH notation.

Enter arp log mac-address-format ieee to use HH-HH-HH-HH-HH-HH notation.

Enter no arp log mac-address-format ieee to revert from HH-HH-HH-HH-HH-HH

to HHHH.HHHH.HHHH.

Enter no arp log to disable ARP logging.

To display ARP log messages use the command show log | include ARP_LOG.

Examples To enable ARP logging and specify that the MAC address in the log message is

displayed in HHHH.HHHH.HHHH notation, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# arp log

To disable ARP logging on the device, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no arp log

Parameter Description

mac-address-format ieee Display the MAC address in the standard IEEE

format (HH-HH-HH-HH-HH-HH), instead of

displaying the MAC address with the format

HHHH.HHHH.HHHH.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 611

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

ARP LOG

To enable ARP logging and specify that the MAC address in the log message is

displayed in the standard IEEE format hexadecimal notation

(HH-HH-HH-HH-HH-HH), use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# arp log mac-address-format ieee

To leave ARP logging enabled, but stop using HH-HH-HH-HH-HH-HH format and

use HHHH.HHHH.HHHH format instead, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no arp log mac-address-format ieee

To display ARP log messages, use the following command:

awplus# show log | include ARP_LOG

Output Figure 19-1: Output from show log | include ARP_LOG after enabling ARP

logging using arp log. Note that this output uses

HHHH.HHHH.HHHH format.

Figure 19-2: Output from show log | include ARP_LOG after enabling ARP

logging using arp log mac-address format ieee. Note that this

output uses HH-HH-HH-HH-HH-HH format.

awplus#configure terminal

awplus(config)#arp log

awplus(config)#exit

awplus#show log | include ARP_LOG

2016 Oct 6 06:21:01 user.notice awplus HSL[1007]: ARP_LOG port1.0.1 vlan1 add 

0013.4078.3b98 (192.168.2.4)

2016 Oct 6 06:22:30 user.notice awplus HSL[1007]: ARP_LOG port1.0.1 vlan1 del 

0013.4078.3b98 (192.168.2.4)

2016 Oct 6 06:23:26 user.notice awplus HSL[1007]: ARP_LOG port1.0.1 vlan1 add 

0030.940e.136b (192.168.2.20)

2016 Oct 6 06:23:30 user.notice awplus IMISH[1830]: show log | include ARP_LOG

awplus#configure terminal

awplus(config)#arp log mac-address-format ieee

awplus(config)#exit

awplus#show log | include ARP_LOG

2016 Oct 6 06:25:28 user.notice awplus HSL[1007]: ARP_LOG port1.0.1 vlan1 add

00-17-9a-b6-03-69 (192.168.2.12)

2016 Oct 6 06:25:30 user.notice awplus HSL[1007]: ARP_LOG port1.0.1 vlan1 add

00-03-37-6b-a6-a5 (192.168.2.10)

2016 Oct 6 06:26:53 user.notice awplus HSL[1007]: ARP_LOG port1.0.1 vlan1 del

00-30-94-0e-13-6b (192.168.2.20)

2016 Oct 6 06:27:31 user.notice awplus HSL[1007]: ARP_LOG port1.0.1 vlan1 del

00-17-9a-b6-03-69 (192.168.2.12)

2016 Oct 6 06:28:09 user.notice awplus HSL[1007]: ARP_LOG port1.0.1 vlan1 del

00-03-37-6b-a6-a5 (192.168.2.10)

2016 Oct 6 06:28:14 user.notice awplus IMISH[1830]: show log | include ARP_LOG

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 612

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

ARP LOG

The following table lists the parameters in output of the show log | include

ARP_LOG command. The ARP log message format is:

<date> <time> <severity> <hostname> <program-name> 

ARP_LOG <port-number> <vid> <operation> <MAC> <IP>

Commands

show log

show running-config

Table 19-1: Parameters in the output from show log | include ARP_LOG

Parameter Description

ARP_LOG Indicates that ARP log entry information follows.

<port-number>Indicates device port number for the ARP log entry.

<vid>Indicates the VLAN ID for the ARP log entry.

<operation>Indicates “add” if the ARP log entry displays an ARP addition.

Indicates “del” if the ARP log entry displays an ARP deletion.

<MAC>Indicates the MAC address for the ARP log entry, either in the

default hexadecimal notation (HHHH.HHHH.HHHH) or in the

IEEE standard format hexadecimal notation

(HH-HH-HH-HH-HH-HH) as specified with the arp log or the arp

log mac-address-format ieee command.

<IP>Indicates the IP address for the ARP log entry.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 613

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

ARP OPPORTUNISTIC-ND

arp opportunistic-nd

Overview Use this command to enable opportunistic neighbor discovery for the global ARP

cache. This command changes the behavior for unsolicited ARP packet forwarding

on the device.

Use the no variant of this command to disable opportunistic neighbor discovery

for the global ARP cache.

Syntax arp opportunistic-nd

no arp opportunistic-nd

Default Opportunistic neighbor discovery is disabled by default.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage When opportunistic neighbor discovery is enabled, the device will reply to any

received unsolicited ARP packets (but not gratuitous ARP packets). The source

MAC address for the unsolicited ARP packet is added to the ARP cache, so the

device forwards the ARP packet. When opportunistic neighbor discovery is

disabled, the source MAC address for the ARP packet is not added to the ARP

cache, so the ARP packet is not forwarded by the device.

Examples To enable opportunistic neighbor discovery for the global ARP cache, enter:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# arp opportunistic-nd

To disable opportunistic neighbor discovery for the global ARP cache, enter:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no arp opportunistic-nd

Commands

ipv6 opportunistic-nd

show arp

show running-config interface

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 614

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

ARP-REPLY-BC-DMAC

arp-reply-bc-dmac

Overview Use this command to allow processing of ARP replies that arrive with a broadcast

destination MAC (ffff.ffff.ffff). This makes neighbors reachable if they send ARP

responses that contain a broadcast destination MAC.

Use the no variant of this command to turn off processing of ARP replies that arrive

with a broadcast destination MAC.

Syntax arp-reply-bc-dmac

no arp-reply-bc-dmac

Default By default, this functionality is disabled.

Mode Interface Configuration for VLAN interfaces

Example To allow processing of ARP replies that arrive on VLAN2 with a broadcast

destination MAC, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# arp-reply-bc-dmac

Commands

clear arp-cache

show arp

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 615

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

CLEAR ARP-CACHE

clear arp-cache

Overview This command deletes dynamic ARP entries from the ARP cache. You can

optionally specify the IPv4 address of an ARP entry to be cleared from the ARP

cache.

Syntax clear arp-cache [<ip-address>]

Mode Privileged Exec

Usage To display the entries in the ARP cache, use the show arp command. To remove

static ARP entries, use the no variant of the arp (IP address MAC) command.

Example To clear all dynamic ARP entries, use the command:

awplus# clear arp-cache

To clear all dynamic ARP entries associated with the IPv4 address 192.168.1.1, use

the command:

awplus# clear arp-cache 192.168.1.1

Commands

arp-mac-disparity

arp (IP address MAC)

show arp

Parameter Description

<ip-address> The IPv4 address of an ARP entry that is to be cleared from the

ARP cache.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 616

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

DEBUG IP PACKET INTERFACE

debug ip packet interface

Overview The debug ip packet interface command enables IP packet debug and is

controlled by the terminal monitor command.

If the optional icmp keyword is specified then ICMP packets are shown in the

output.

The no variant of this command disables the debug ip interface command.

Syntax debug ip packet interface {<interface-name>|all} [address

<ip-address>|verbose|hex|arp|udp|tcp|icmp]

no debug ip packet interface [<interface-name>]

Mode Privileged Exec and Global Configuration

Parameter Description

<interface> Specify a single Layer 3 interface name (not a range of interfaces)

This keyword can be specified as either all or as a single Layer 3

interface to show debugging for either all interfaces or a single

interface.

all Specify all Layer 3 interfaces on the device.

<ip-address> Specify an IPv4 address.

If this keyword is specified, then only packets with the specified IP

address as specified in the ip-address placeholder are shown in the

output.

verbose Specify verbose to output more of the IP packet.

If this keyword is specified then more of the packet is shown in the

output.

hex Specify hex to output the IP packet in hexadecimal.

If this keyword is specified, then the output for the packet is shown

in hex.

arp Specify arp to output ARP protocol packets.

If this keyword is specified, then ARP packets are shown in the

output.

udp Specify udp to output UDP protocol packets.

If this keyword is specified then UDP packets are shown in the

output.

tcp Specify tcp to output TCP protocol packets.

If this keyword is specified, then TCP packets are shown in the

output.

icmp Specify icmp to output ICMP protocol packets.

If this keyword is specified, then ICMP packets are shown in the

output.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 617

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

DEBUG IP PACKET INTERFACE

Examples To turn on ARP packet debugging on vlan1, use the command:

awplus# debug ip packet interface vlan1 arp

To turn on all packet debugging on all interfaces on the device, use the command:

awplus# debug ip packet interface all

To turn on TCP packet debugging on vlan1 and IP address 192.168.2.4, use

the command:

awplus# debug ip packet interface vlan1 address 192.168.2.4 tcp

To turn off IP packet interface debugging on all interfaces, use the command:

awplus# no debug ip packet interface

To turn off IP packet interface debugging on interface vlan2, use the command:

awplus# no debug ip packet interface vlan2

Commands

no debug all

tcpdump

terminal monitor

undebug ip packet interface

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 618

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

IP ADDRESS (IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL)

ip address (IP Addressing and Protocol)

Overview This command sets a static IP address on an interface.

The no variant of this command removes the IP address from the interface. You

cannot remove the primary address when a secondary address is present.

Syntax ip address <ip-addr/prefix-length> [secondary] [label <label>]

no ip address [<ip-addr/prefix-length>] [secondary]

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface or a local loopback interface.

Usage To set the primary IP address on the interface, specify only ip address

<ip-address/m>. This overwrites any configured primary IP address. To add

additional IP addresses on this interface, use the secondary parameter. You must

configure a primary address on the interface before configuring a secondary

address.

NOTE: Use show running-config interface not show ip interface brief when you

need to view a secondary address configured on an interface. show ip interface brief

will only show the primary address not a secondary address for an interface.

Examples To add the primary IP address 10.10.10.50/24 to the interface vlan3, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan3

awplus(config-if)# ip address 10.10.10.50/24

To add the secondary IP address 10.10.11.50/24 to the same interface, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan3

awplus(config-if)# ip address 10.10.11.50/24 secondary

Parameter Description

<ip-addr/prefix-

length>

The IPv4 address and prefix length you are assigning to the

interface.

secondary Secondary IP address.

label Adds a user-defined description of the secondary IP address.

<label> A user-defined description of the secondary IP address. Valid

characters are any printable character and spaces.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 619

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

IP ADDRESS (IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL)

To add the IP address 10.10.11.50/24 to the local loopback interface lo, use

the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface lo

awplus(config-if)# ip address 10.10.11.50/24

Commands

interface (to configure)

show ip interface

show running-config interface

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 620

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

IP GRATUITOUS-ARP-LINK

ip gratuitous-arp-link

Overview This command sets the Gratuitous ARP time limit for all switchports. The time limit

restricts the sending of Gratuitous ARP packets to one Gratuitous ARP packet

within the time in seconds.

NOTE: This command specifies time between sequences of Gratuitous ARP packets,

and time between individual Gratuitous ARP packets occurring in a sequence, to allow

legacy support for older devices and interoperation between other devices that are not

ready to receive and forward data until several seconds after linkup.

Additionally, jitter has been applied to the delay following linkup, so Gratuitous ARP

packets applicable to a given port are spread over a period of 1 second so are not all

sent at once. Remaining Gratuitous ARP packets in the sequence occur after a fixed

delay from the first one.

Syntax ip gratuitous-arp-link <0-300>

no ip gratuitous-arp-link

Default The default Gratuitous ARP time limit for all switchports is 8 seconds.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage Every switchport will send a sequence of 3 Gratuitous ARP packets to each VLAN

that the switchport is a member of, whenever the switchport moves to the

forwarding state. The first Gratuitous ARP packet is sent 1 second after the

switchport becomes a forwarding switchport. The second and third Gratuitous

ARP packets are each sent after the time period specified by the Gratuitous ARP

time limit.

Additionally, the Gratuitous ARP time limit specifies the minimum time between

the end of one Gratuitous ARP sequence and the start of another Gratuitous ARP

sequence. When a link is flapping, the switchport’s state is set to forwarding several

times. The Gratuitous ARP time limit is imposed to prevent Gratuitous ARP packets

from being sent undesirably often.

Examples To disable the sending of Gratuitous ARP packets, use the commands :

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ip gratuitous-arp-link 0

Parameter Description

<0-300>Specify the minimum time between sequences of Gratuitous ARPs and

the fixed time between Gratuitous ARPs occurring in a sequence, in

seconds.

0 disables the sending of Gratuitous ARP packets.

The default is 8 seconds.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 621

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

IP GRATUITOUS-ARP-LINK

To restrict the sending of Gratuitous ARP packets to one every 20 seconds, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ip gratuitous-arp-link 20

Validation

Commands

show running-config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 622

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

IP REDIRECTS

ip redirects

Overview This command enables the device to send ICMP redirects on one or more

interfaces.

Use the no variant of this command to stop the device from sending ICMP redirects

on one or more interfaces.

Syntax ip redirects

no ip redirects

Default ICMP redirects are disabled by default.

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage ICMP redirect messages are used to notify hosts that a better route is available to a

destination.

ICMP redirects are used when a packet is routed into the device on the same

interface that the packet is routed out of the device. ICMP redirects are only sent to

packet sources that are directly connected to the device.

Examples To enable the device to send ICMP redirects on interface vlan2, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip redirects

To stop the device from sending ICMP redirects on interface vlan2, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# no ip redirects

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 623

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

IP UNREACHABLES

ip unreachables

Overview Use this command to enable ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) type 3,

destination unreachable, messages.

Use the no variant of this command to disable destination unreachable messages.

This prevents an attacker from using these messages to discover the topology of a

network.

Syntax ip unreachables

no ip unreachables

Default Destination unreachable messages are enabled by default.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage When a device receives a packet for a destination that is unreachable it returns an

ICMP type 3 message, this message includes a reason code, as per the table below.

An attacker can use these messages to obtain information regarding the topology

of a network. Disabling destination unreachable messages, using the no ip

unreachables command, secures your network against this type of probing.

NOTE: Disabling ICMP destination unreachable messages breaks applications such as

traceroute and Path MTU Discovery (PMTUD), which depend on these messages to

operate correctly.

Table 19-2: ICMP type 3 reason codes and description

Code Description [RFC]

0Network unreachable [RFC792]

1Host unreachable [RFC792]

2Protocol unreachable [RFC792]

3Port unreachable [RFC792]

4Fragmentation required, and DF flag set [RFC792]

5Source route failed [RFC792]

6Destination network unknown [RFC1122]

7Destination host unknown [RFC1122]

8Source host isolated [RFC1122]

9Network administratively prohibited [RFC768]

10 Host administratively prohibited [RFC869]

11 Network unreachable for Type of Service [RFC908]

12 Host unreachable for Type of Service [RFC938]

13 Communication administratively prohibited [RFC905]

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 624

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

IP UNREACHABLES

Example To disable destination unreachable messages, use the commands

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no ip unreachables

To enable destination unreachable messages, use the commands

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ip unreachables

14 Host Precedence Violation [RFC1812]

15 Precedence cutoff in effect [RFC1812]

Table 19-2: ICMP type 3 reason codes and description (cont.)

Code Description [RFC]

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 625

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

PING

ping

Overview This command sends a query to another IPv4 host (send Echo Request messages).

Syntax ping [ip] <host> [broadcast] [df-bit {yes|no}] [interval

<0-128>] [pattern <hex-data-pattern>] [repeat

{<1-2147483647>|continuous}] [size <36-18024>] [source

<ip-addr>] [timeout <1-65535>] [tos <0-255>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To ping the IP address 10.10.0.5 use the following command:

awplus# ping 10.10.0.5

Parameter Description

<host>The destination IP address or hostname.

broadcast Allow pinging of a broadcast address.

df-bit Enable or disable the do-not-fragment bit in the IP header.

interval <0-128> Specify the time interval in seconds between sending ping

packets. The default is 1. You can use decimal places to

specify fractions of a second. For example, to ping every

millisecond, set the interval to 0.001.

pattern <hex-

data-pattern>

Specify the hex data pattern.

repeat Specify the number of ping packets to send.

<1-2147483647> Specify repeat count. The default is 5.

continuous Continuous ping

size <36-18024> The number of data bytes to send, excluding the 8 byte ICMP

header. The default is 56 (64 ICMP data bytes).

source <ip-addr> The IP address of a configured IP interface to use as the

source in the IP header of the ping packet.

timeout

<1-65535>

The time in seconds to wait for echo replies if the ARP entry is

present, before reporting that no reply was received. If no

ARP entry is present, it does not wait.

tos <0-255> The value of the type of service in the IP header.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 626

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

SHOW ARP

show arp

Overview Use this command to display entries in the ARP routing and forwarding table—the

ARP cache contains mappings of IP addresses to physical addresses for hosts. To

have a dynamic entry in the ARP cache, a host must have used the ARP protocol to

access another host.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show arp [security [interface [<interface-list>]]

show arp [statistics [detail][interface [<interface-list>]]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Usage Running this command with no additional parameters will display all entries in the

ARP routing and forwarding table.

Example To display all ARP entries in the ARP cache, use the following command:

awplus# show arp

Output Figure 19-3: Example output from the show arp command

Parameter Description

security Specify the DHCP Snooping ARP security output option.

interface Specify an interface list for DHCP Snooping ARP security

output.

<interface-list>Specify a single Layer 3 interface name, or a range of

interfaces.

statistics Specify brief DHCP Snooping ARP security statistics.

detail Specify detailed DHCP Snooping ARP security statistics.

awplus#show arp



IP Address MAC Address Interface Port Type 

192.168.10.2 0015.77ad.fad8 vlan1 port1.0.1 dynamic

192.168.20.2 0015.77ad.fa48 vlan2 port1.0.2 dynamic

192.168.1.100 00d0.6b04.2a42 vlan2 port1.0.6 static

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 627

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

SHOW ARP

Commands

arp (IP address MAC)

clear arp-cache

Table 20: Parameters in the output of the show arp command

Parameter Meaning

IP Address IP address of the network device this entry maps to.

MAC Address Hardware address of the network device.

Interface Interface over which the network device is accessed.

Port Physical port that the network device is attached to.

Type Whether the entry is a static or dynamic entry. Static

entries are added using the arp (IP address MAC)

command. Dynamic entries are learned from ARP

request/reply message exchanges.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 628

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

SHOW DEBUGGING IP PACKET

show debugging ip packet

Overview Use this command to show the IP interface debugging status. IP interface

debugging is set using the debug ip packet interface command.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show debugging ip packet

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the IP interface debugging status when the terminal monitor off, use the

command:

awplus# terminal no monitor

awplus# show debug ip packet

Output Figure 19-4: Example output from the show debugging ip packet command

with terminal monitor off

Example To display the IP interface debugging status when the terminal monitor is on, use

the command:

awplus# terminal monitor

awplus# show debug ip packet

Output Figure 19-5: Example output from the show debugging ip packet command

with terminal monitor on

awplus#terminal no monitor



awplus#show debug ip packet



IP debugging status:



interface all tcp (stopped)



interface vlan1 arp verbose (stopped)

awplus#terminal monitor



awplus#show debug ip packet



IP debugging status:



interface all tcp (running)



interface vlan1 arp verbose (running)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 629

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

SHOW DEBUGGING IP PACKET

Commands

debug ip packet interface

terminal monitor

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 630

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

SHOW IP INTERFACE

show ip interface

Overview Use this command to display information about interfaces and the IP addresses

assigned to them. To display information about a specific interface, specify the

interface name with the command.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show ip interface [<interface-list>] [brief]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Examples To show brief information for the assigned IP address for interface port1.0.2 use

the command:

awplus# show ip interface port1.0.2 brief

To show the IP addresses assigned to vlan2 and vlan3, use the command:

awplus# show ip interface vlan2-3 brief

Output Figure 19-6: Example output from the show ip interface brief command

Parameter Description

<interface-list> The interfaces to display information about. An interface-list

can be:

•an interface, e.g. vlan2

• a continuous range of interfaces separated by a hyphen, e.g.

vlan2-8 or vlan2-vlan5

• a comma-separated list of interfaces or interface ranges, e.g.

vlan2,vlan5,vlan8-10

The specified interfaces must exist.

Interface IP-Address Status Protocol

port1.0.2 unassigned admin up down

vlan1 192.168.1.1 admin up running

vlan2 192.168.2.1 admin up running

vlan3 192.168.3.1 admin up running

vlan8 unassigned admin up down

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 631

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

SHOW IP SOCKETS

show ip sockets

Overview Use this command to display information about the IP or TCP sockets that are

present on the device. It includes TCP and UDP listen sockets, and displays the

associated IP address and port.

The information displayed for established TCP sessions includes the remote IP

address, port, and session state. Raw IP protocol listen socket information is also

displayed for protocols such as ICMP6, which are configured to receive IP packets

with the associated protocol number.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show ip sockets

Mode Privileged Exec

Usage Use this command to verify that the socket being used is opening correctly. If there

is a local and remote endpoint, a connection is established with the ports

indicated.

Note that this command does not display sockets that are used internally for

exchanging data between the various processes that exist on the device and are

involved in its operation and management. It only displays sockets that are present

for the purposes of communicating with other external devices.

Example To display IP sockets currently present on the device, use the command:

awplus# show ip sockets

Output Figure 19-7: Example output from show ip sockets



Socket information



Not showing 40 local connections

Not showing 7 local listening ports



Typ Local Address Remote Address State

tcp 0.0.0.0:111 0.0.0.0:* LISTEN

tcp 0.0.0.0:80 0.0.0.0:* LISTEN

tcp 0.0.0.0:23 0.0.0.0:* LISTEN

tcp 0.0.0.0:443 0.0.0.0:* LISTEN

tcp 0.0.0.0:4743 0.0.0.0:* LISTEN

tcp 0.0.0.0:873 0.0.0.0:* LISTEN

tcp :::23 :::* LISTEN

udp 0.0.0.0:111 0.0.0.0:*

udp 226.94.1.1:5405 0.0.0.0:*

udp 0.0.0.0:161 0.0.0.0:*

udp :::161 :::*

raw 0.0.0.0:112 0.0.0.0:* 112

raw :::58 :::* 58

raw :::112 :::* 112

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 632

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

SHOW IP SOCKETS

Table 19-1: Parameters in the output from show ip sockets

Parameter Description

Not showing

local

connections

This field refers to established sessions between processes internal

to the device, that are used in its operation and management.

These sessions are not displayed as they are not useful to the user.

<number> is some positive integer.

Not showing

local

listening

ports

This field refers to listening sockets belonging to processes internal

to the device, that are used in its operation and management. They

are not available to receive data from other devices. These sessions

are not displayed as they are not useful to the user. <number> is

some positive integer.

Typ This column displays the type of the socket. Possible values for this

column are:

tcp : IP Protocol 6

udp : IP Protocol 17

raw : Indicates that socket is for a non port-orientated protocol (i.e.

a protocol other than TCP or UDP) where all packets of a specified IP

protocol type are accepted. For raw socket entries the protocol type

is indicated in subsequent columns.

Local

Address

For TCP and UDP listening sockets this shows the destination IP

address and destination TCP or UDP port number for which the

socket will receive packets. The address and port are separated by ’:’.

If the socket will accept packets addressed to any of the device’s IP

addresses, the IP address will be 0.0.0.0 for IPv4 or :: for IPv6. For

active TCP sessions the IP address will display which of the devices

addresses the session was established with. For raw sockets this

displays the IP address and IP protocol for which the socket will

accept IP packets. The address and protocol are separated by ’:’. If

the socket will accept packets addressed to any of the device’s IP

addresses, the IP address will be 0.0.0.0 for IPv4 and :: for IPv6. IP

Protocol assignments are described

at:www.iana.org/assignments/protocol-numbers

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 633

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

SHOW IP SOCKETS

Remote

Address

For TCP and UDP listening sockets this shows the source IP address

(either IPv4 or IPv6) and source TCP or UDP port number for which

the socket will accept packets. The address and port are separated

by ’:’. If the socket will accept packets addressed from any IP

address, the IP address will be 0.0.0.0 for IPv4 . This is the usual case

for a listening socket. Normally for a listen socket any source port

will be accepted. This is indicated by “. For active TCP sessions the IP

address will display the remote address and port the session was

established with. For raw sockets the entry in this column will be

0.0.0.0: for IPv4 .

State This column shows the state of the socket. For TCP sockets this

shows the state of the TCP state machine. For UDP sockets this

column is blank. For raw sockets it contains the IP protocol number.

The possible TCP states are:

LISTEN

SYN-SENT

SYN-RECEIVED

ESTABLISHED

FIN-WAIT-1

FIN-WAIT-2

CLOSE-WAIT

CLOSING

LAST-ACK

TIME-WAIT

CLOSED

RFC793 contains the TCP state machine diagram with Section 3.2

describing each of the states.

Table 19-1: Parameters in the output from show ip sockets (cont.)

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 634

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

SHOW IP TRAFFIC

show ip traffic

Overview Use this command to display statistics regarding IP traffic sent and received by all

interfaces on the device, showing totals for IP and IPv6 and then broken down into

sub-categories such as TCP, UDP, ICMP and their IPv6 equivalents when

appropriate.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show ip traffic

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To display IP traffic statistics, use the command:

awplus# show ip traffic

Output Figure 19-8: Example output from the show ip traffic command



IP:

261998 packets received

261998 delivered

261998 sent

69721 multicast packets received

69721 multicast packets sent

23202841 bytes received

23202841 bytes sent

7669296 multicast bytes received

7669296 multicast bytes sent

IPv6:

28 packets discarded on transmit due to no route

ICMP6:

UDP6:

UDPLite6:

TCP:

0 remote connections established

40 local connections established

7 remote listening ports

7 local listening ports

261 active connection openings

247 passive connection openings

14 connection attempts failed

122535 segments received

122535 segments transmitted

14 resets transmitted

227 TCP sockets finished time wait in fast timer

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 635

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

SHOW IP TRAFFIC

155 delayed acks sent

21187 headers predicted

736 pure ACKs

80497 pure ACKs predicted

UDP:

139468 datagrams received

139468 datagrams sent

UDPLite:

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 636

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

TCPDUMP

tcpdump

Overview Use this command to start a tcpdump, which gives the same output as the

Unix-like tcpdump command to display TCP/IP traffic. Press <ctrl> + c to stop

a running tcpdump.

Syntax tcpdump <line>

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To start a tcpdump running to capture IP packets, enter the command:

awplus# tcpdump ip

Output Figure 19-9: Example output from the tcpdump command

Commands

debug ip packet interface

Parameter Description

<line>Specify the dump options. For more information on the

options for this placeholder see

http://www.tcpdump.org/tcpdump_man.html

03:40:33.221337 IP 192.168.1.1 > 224.0.0.13: PIMv2, Hello, 

length: 34

1 packets captured

2 packets received by filter

0 packets dropped by kernel

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 637

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

TRACEROUTE

traceroute

Overview Use this command to trace the route to the specified IPv4 host.

Syntax traceroute {<ip-addr>|<hostname>}

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example awplus# traceroute 10.10.0.5

Parameter Description

<ip-addr> The destination IPv4 address. The IPv4 address uses the

format A.B.C.D.

<hostname>The destination hostname.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 638

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IP ADDRESSING AND PROTOCOL COMMANDS

UNDEBUG IP PACKET INTERFACE

undebug ip packet interface

Overview This command applies the functionality of the no debug ip packet interface

command.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 639

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Domain Name

Service (DNS)

Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference of commands used to configure

the Domain Name Service (DNS) client.

For more information about DNS for Switches, see the Domain Name System (DNS)

for AlliedWare Plus Switches Feature Overview and Configuration Guide

Command List •“ip domain-list” on page 640

•“ip domain-lookup” on page 641

•“ip domain-name” on page 642

•“ip name-server” on page 643

•“show hosts” on page 644

•“show ip domain-list” on page 645

•“show ip domain-name” on page 646

•“show ip name-server” on page 647

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 640

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

DOMAIN NAME SERVICE (DNS) COMMANDS

IP DOMAIN-LIST

ip domain-list

Overview This command adds a domain to the DNS list. Domains are appended to

incomplete host names in DNS requests. Each domain in this list is tried in turn in

DNS lookups. This list is ordered so that the first entry you create is checked first.

The no variant of this command deletes a domain from the list.

Syntax ip domain-list <domain-name>

no ip domain-list <domain-name>

Mode Global Configuration

Usage If there are no domains in the DNS list, then your device uses the domain specified

with the ip domain-name command. If any domain exists in the DNS list, then the

device does not use the domain set using the ip domain-name command.

Example To add the domain example.net to the DNS list, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ip domain-list example.net

Commands

ip domain-lookup

ip domain-name

show ip domain-list

Parameter Description

<domain-name> Domain string, for example “company.com”.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 641

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

DOMAIN NAME SERVICE (DNS) COMMANDS

IP DOMAIN-LOOKUP

ip domain-lookup

Overview This command enables the DNS client on your device. This allows you to use

domain names instead of IP addresses in commands. The DNS client resolves the

domain name into an IP address by sending a DNS inquiry to a DNS server,

specified with the ip name-server command.

The no variant of this command disables the DNS client. The client will not attempt

to resolve domain names. You must use IP addresses to specify hosts in

commands.

Syntax ip domain-lookup

no ip domain-lookup

Mode Global Configuration

Usage The client is enabled by default. However, it does not attempt DNS inquiries unless

there is a DNS server configured.

Examples To enable the DNS client on your device, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ip domain-lookup

To disable the DNS client on your device, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no ip domain-lookup

Commands

ip domain-list

ip domain-name

ip name-server

show hosts

show ip name-server

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 642

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

DOMAIN NAME SERVICE (DNS) COMMANDS

IP DOMAIN-NAME

ip domain-name

Overview This command sets a default domain for the DNS. The DNS client appends this

domain to incomplete host-names in DNS requests.

The no variant of this command removes the domain-name previously set by this

command.

Syntax ip domain-name <domain-name>

no ip domain-name <domain-name>

Mode Global Configuration

Usage If there are no domains in the DNS list (created using the ip domain-list command)

then your device uses the domain specified with this command. If any domain

exists in the DNS list, then the device does not use the domain configured with this

command.

When your device is using its DHCP client for an interface, it can receive Option 15

from the DHCP server. This option replaces the domain name set with this

command.

Example To configure the domain name, enter the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ip domain-name company.com

Commands

ip domain-list

show ip domain-list

show ip domain-name

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 643

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

DOMAIN NAME SERVICE (DNS) COMMANDS

IP NAME-SERVER

ip name-server

Overview This command adds IPv4 or IPv6 DNS server addresses. The DNS client on your

device sends DNS queries to IP addresses in this list when trying to resolve a host

name. Host names cannot be resolved until you have added at least one server to

this list. A maximum of three name servers can be added to this list.

The no variant of this command removes the specified DNS name-server address.

Syntax ip name-server <ip-addr>

no ip name-server <ip-addr>

Mode Global Configuration

Usage To allow the device to operate as a DNS proxy, your device must have learned

about a DNS name-server to forward requests to. Name-servers can be learned

through the following means:

• Manual configuration, using the ip name-server command

• Learned from DHCP server with Option 6

This command is used to statically configure a DNS name-server for the device to

use.

Examples To allow a device to send DNS queries to a DNS server with the IPv4 address

10.10.10.5, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ip name-server 10.10.10.5

To enable your device to send DNS queries to a DNS server with the IPv6 address

2001:0db8:010d::1, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ip name-server 2001:0db8:010d::1

Commands

ip domain-list

ip domain-lookup

ip domain-name

show ip name-server

Parameter Description

<ip-addr> The IP address of the DNS server that is being added to the name

server list. The address is entered in the form A.B.C.D for an IPv4

address, or in the form X:X::X:X for an IPv6 address.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 644

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

DOMAIN NAME SERVICE (DNS) COMMANDS

SHOW HOSTS

show hosts

Overview This command shows the default domain, domain list, and name servers

configured on your device.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show hosts

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the default domain, use the command:

awplus# show hosts

Output Figure 20-1: Example output from the show hosts command

Commands

ip domain-list

ip domain-lookup

ip domain-name

ip name-server

awplus#show hosts



Default domain is mycompany.com

Domain list: company.com

Name/address lookup uses domain service

Name servers are 10.10.0.2 10.10.0.88

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 645

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

DOMAIN NAME SERVICE (DNS) COMMANDS

SHOW IP DOMAIN-LIST

show ip domain-list

Overview This command shows the domains configured in the domain list. The DNS client

uses the domains in this list to append incomplete hostnames when sending a

DNS inquiry to a DNS server.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show ip domain-list

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the list of domains in the domain list, use the command:

awplus# show ip domain-list

Output Figure 20-2: Example output from the show ip domain-list command

Commands

ip domain-list

ip domain-lookup

awplus#show ip domain-list

alliedtelesis.com

mycompany.com

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 646

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

DOMAIN NAME SERVICE (DNS) COMMANDS

SHOW IP DOMAIN-NAME

show ip domain-name

Overview This command shows the default domain configured on your device. When there

are no entries in the DNS list, the DNS client appends this domain to incomplete

hostnames when sending a DNS inquiry to a DNS server.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show ip domain-name

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the default domain configured on your device, use the command:

awplus# show ip domain-name

Output Figure 20-3: Example output from the show ip domain-name command

Commands

ip domain-name

ip domain-lookup

awplus#show ip domain-name

alliedtelesis.com

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 647

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

DOMAIN NAME SERVICE (DNS) COMMANDS

SHOW IP NAME-SERVER

show ip name-server

Overview This command displays a list of IPv4 and IPv6 DNS server addresses that your

device will send DNS requests to. This is a static list configured using the ip

name-server command.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show ip name-server

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the list of DNS servers that your device sends DNS requests to, use the

command:

awplus# show ip name-server

Output Figure 20-4: Example output from the show ip name-server command

Commands

ip domain-lookup

ip name-server

awplus# show ip name-server

10.10.0.123

10.10.0.124

2001:0db8:010d::1

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 648

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPv6 Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference of commands used to configure

IPv6. For more information, see the IPv6 Feature Overview and Configuration

Guide.

Command List •“clear ipv6 neighbors” on page 650

•“ipv6 address” on page 651

•“ipv6 address autoconfig” on page 653

•“ipv6 enable” on page 655

•“ipv6 eui64-linklocal” on page 657

•“ipv6 forwarding” on page 658

•“ipv6 multicast forward-slow-path-packet” on page 659

•“ipv6 nd accept-ra-pinfo” on page 660

•“ipv6 nd minimum-ra-interval” on page 661

•“ipv6 nd ra-interval” on page 662

•“ipv6 nd raguard” on page 663

•“ipv6 nd suppress-ra” on page 665

•“ipv6 neighbor” on page 666

•“ipv6 opportunistic-nd” on page 667

•“ipv6 route” on page 668

•“ipv6 unreachables” on page 669

•“ping ipv6” on page 670

•“show ipv6 forwarding” on page 671

•“show ipv6 interface brief” on page 672

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 649

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

•“show ipv6 neighbors” on page 673

•“show ipv6 route” on page 674

•“show ipv6 route summary” on page 676

•“traceroute ipv6” on page 677

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 650

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

CLEAR IPV6 NEIGHBORS

clear ipv6 neighbors

Overview Use this command to clear all dynamic IPv6 neighbor entries.

Syntax clear ipv6 neighbors

Mode Privileged Exec

Example awplus# clear ipv6 neighbors

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 651

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

IPV6 ADDRESS

ipv6 address

Overview Use this command to set the IPv6 address of an interface. The command also

enables IPv6 on the interface, which creates an EUI-64 link-local address as well as

enabling RA processing and SLAAC.

To stop the device from processing prefix information (routes and addresses from

the received Router Advertisements) use the command no ipv6 nd

accept-ra-pinfo.

To remove the EUI-64 link-local address, use the command no ipv6

eui64-linklocal.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the IPv6 address assigned and

disable IPv6. Note that if no global addresses are left after removing the IPv6

address then IPv6 is disabled.

Syntax ipv6 address <ipv6-addr/prefix-length>

no ipv6 address <ipv6-addr/prefix-length>

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage Note that link-local addresses are retained in the system until they are negated by

using the no variant of the command that established them. See the ipv6 enable

command for more information.

Also note that the link-local address is retained in the system if the global address

is removed using another command, which was not used to establish the link-local

address. For example, if a link local address is established with the ipv6 enable

command then it will not be removed using a no ipv6 address command.

Examples To assign the IPv6 address 2001:0db8::a2/64 to the VLAN interface vlan2, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 address 2001:0db8::a2/64

To remove the IPv6 address 2001:0db8::a2/64 from the VLAN interface vlan2, use

the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# no ipv6 address 2001:0db8::a2/64

Parameter Description

<ipv6-addr/prefix-

length>

Specifies the IPv6 address to be set. The IPv6

address uses the format X:X::X:X/Prefix-Length. The

prefix-length is usually set between 0 and 64.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 652

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

IPV6 ADDRESS

Commands

ipv6 address autoconfig

ipv6 enable

ipv6 eui64-linklocal

show running-config

show ipv6 interface brief

show ipv6 route

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 653

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

IPV6 ADDRESS AUTOCONFIG

ipv6 address autoconfig

Overview Use this command to enable IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration (SLAAC) for

an interface. This configures an IPv6 address on an interface derived from the MAC

address on the interface.

Use the no variant of this command to disable IPv6 SLAAC on an interface. Note

that if no global addresses are left after removing all IPv6 autoconfigured

addresses then IPv6 is disabled.

Syntax ipv6 address autoconfig

no ipv6 address autoconfig

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage This command enables automatic configuration of IPv6 addresses using stateless

autoconfiguration on an interface and enables IPv6, but does not enable IPv6

forwarding. See the ipv6 forwarding command for further description and

examples.

IPv6 hosts can configure themselves when connected to an IPv6 network using

ICMPv6 (Internet Control Message Protocol version 6) router discovery messages.

Configured routers respond with a Router Advertisement (RA) containing

configuration parameters for IPv6 hosts.

The SLAAC process derives the interface identifier of the IPv6 address from the

MAC address of the interface. When applying SLAAC to an interface, note that the

MAC address of the default VLAN is applied to the interface if the interface does not

have its own MAC address.

Note that link-local addresses are retained in the system until they are negated by

using the no variant of the command that established them. See the ipv6 enable

command for more information.

Also note that the link-local address is retained in the system if the global address

is removed using another command that was not used to establish the link-local

address. For example, if a link local address is established with the ipv6 enable

command then it will not be removed using a no ipv6 address command.

Examples To enable SLAAC on the VLAN interface vlan2, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 address autoconfig

To disable SLAAC on the VLAN interface vlan2, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# no ipv6 address autoconfig

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 654

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

IPV6 ADDRESS AUTOCONFIG

Commands

ipv6 address

ipv6 enable

show ipv6 interface brief

show ipv6 route

show running-config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 655

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

IPV6 ENABLE

ipv6 enable

Overview Use this command to enable automatic configuration of a link-local IPv6 address

on an interface using Stateless Automatic Address Configuration (SLAAC). By

default, the EUI-64 method is used to generate the link-local address.

Use the no variant of this command to disable IPv6 on an interface without a global

address. Note, to stop EUI-64 from generating the automatic link-local address, use

the command no ipv6 eui64-linklocal.

Syntax ipv6 enable

no ipv6 enable

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage The ipv6 enable command automatically configures an IPv6 link-local address on

the interface and enables the interface for IPv6 processing.

A link-local address is an IP (Internet Protocol) address that is only used for

communications in the local network, or for a point-to-point connection. Routing

does not forward packets with link-local addresses. IPv6 requires that a link-local

address is assigned to each interface that has the IPv6 protocol enabled, and when

addresses are assigned to interfaces for routing IPv6 packets.

Note that link-local addresses are retained in the system until they are negated by

using the no variant of the command that established them.

Also note that the link-local address is retained in the system if the global address

is removed using another command that was not used to establish the link-local

address. For example, if a link local address is established with the ipv6 enable

command then it will not be removed using a no ipv6 address command.

Default All interfaces default to IPv6-down with no address.

Examples To enable IPv6 with only a link-local IPv6 address on the VLAN interface vlan2,

use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 enable

To disable IPv6 with only a link-local IPv6 address on the VLAN interface vlan2,

use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# no ipv6 enable

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 656

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

IPV6 ENABLE

Commands

ipv6 address

ipv6 address autoconfig

show ipv6 interface brief

show ipv6 route

show running-config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 657

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

IPV6 EUI64-LINKLOCAL

ipv6 eui64-linklocal

Overview When IPv6 is enabled on an interface, an EUI link-local address is generated and

installed on the interface. In other words, ipv6 eui64-linklocal is enabled by

default on any IPv6 enabled interface.

Use the no variant of this command to disallow the automatic generation of the

EUI-64 link-local address on an IPv6 enabled interface.

Syntax ipv6 eui64-linklocal

no ipv6 eui64-linklocal

Default The command ipv6 eui64-linklocal is enabled by default on any IPv6 enabled

interface.

Mode Interface

Example To enable IPv6 on the interface vlan1, and use the link-local address of fe80 : :1/10

instead of the EUI-64 link-local that is automatically generated, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan1

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 enable

awplus(config-if)# no ipv6 eui64-linklocal

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 address fe80::1/10

Commands

ipv6 address

ipv6 address autoconfig

ipv6 enable

Command

changes

Version 5.4.7-0.1: command added

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 658

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

IPV6 FORWARDING

ipv6 forwarding

Overview Use this command to turn on IPv6 unicast routing for IPv6 packet forwarding.

Execute this command globally on your device prior to issuing ipv6 enable on

individual interfaces.

Use this no variant of this command to turn off IPv6 unicast routing. Note IPv6

unicast routing is disabled by default.

Syntax ipv6 forwarding

no ipv6 forwarding

Mode Global Configuration

Default IPv6 unicast forwarding is disabled by default.

Usage Enable IPv6 unicast forwarding globally for all interface on your device with this

command. Use the no variant of this command to disable IPv6 unicast forwarding

globally for all interfaces on your device.

IPv6 unicast forwarding allows devices to communicate with devices that are more

than one hop away, providing that there is a route to the destination address. If

IPv6 forwarding is not enabled then pings to addresses on devices that are more

than one hop away will fail, even if there is a route to the destination address.

Examples To enable IPv6 unicast routing, use this command as shown below:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ipv6 forwarding

To disable IPv6 unicast routing, use the no variant of this command as shown

below:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no ipv6 forwarding

Commands

ipv6 enable

ipv6 multicast-routing

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 659

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

IPV6 MULTICAST FORWARD-SLOW-PATH-PACKET

ipv6 multicast forward-slow-path-packet

Overview Use this command to enable multicast packets to be forwarded to the CPU.

Enabling this command will ensure that the layer L3 MTU is set correctly for each

IP multicast group and will apply the value of the smallest MTU among the

outgoing interfaces for the multicast group.

It will also ensure that a received packet that is larger than the MTU value will result

in the generation of an ICMP Too Big message.

Use the no variant of this command to disable the above functionality.

Syntax ipv6 multicast forward-slow-path-packet

no ipv6 multicast forward-slow-path-packet

Default Disabled.

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To enable the ipv6 multicast forward-slow-path-packet function, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ip multicast forward-slow-path-packet

Commands

show ipv6 forwarding

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 660

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

IPV6 ND ACCEPT-RA-PINFO

ipv6 nd accept-ra-pinfo

Overview Use this command to allow the processing of the prefix information included in a

received RA (Router Advertisement) on an IPv6 enabled interface.

Use the no variant of this command to disable an IPv6 interface from using the

prefix information within a received RA.

Syntax ipv6 nd accept-ra-pinfo

no ipv6 nd accept-ra-pinfo

Default The command ipv6 nd accept-ra-pinfo is enabled by default on any IPv6

interface.

Mode Interface

Usage By default, when IPv6 is enabled on an interface, SLAAC is also enabled. SLAAC

addressing along with the EUI-64 process, uses the prefix information included in

a received RA to generate an automatic link-local address on the IPv6 interface.

Note, an AlliedWare Plus device will, by default, add a prefix for the connected

interface IPv6 address(es) to the RA it transmits. However, this behavior can be

changed by using the command no ipv6 nd prefix auto-advertise, so there is no

guarantee that an RA will contain a prefix.

Example To enable IPv6 on vlan1 without installing a SLAAC address on the interface, use

the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan1

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 enable

awplus(config-if)# no ipv6 nd accept-ra-pinfo

Commands

ipv6 address

ipv6 address autoconfig

ipv6 enable

Command

changes

Version 5.4.7-0.1: command added

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 661

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

IPV6 ND MINIMUM-RA-INTERVAL

ipv6 nd minimum-ra-interval

Overview Use this command in Interface Configuration mode to set a minimum Router

Advertisement (RA) interval for a VLAN interface.

Use the no variant of this command in Interface Configuration mode to remove the

minimum RA interval for a VLAN interface.

Syntax ipv6 nd minimum-ra-interval <seconds>

no ipv6 nd minimum-ra-interval

Default The RA interval for a VLAN interface is unset by default.

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Examples To set the minimum RA interval for the VLAN interface vlan2, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 nd minimum-ra-interval 60

To remove the minimum RA interval for the VLAN interface vlan2, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# no ipv6 nd minimum-ra-interval 60

Commands

ipv6 nd ra-interval

ipv6 nd suppress-ra

Parameter Description

<seconds>Specifies the number of seconds between IPv6 Router

Advertisements (RAs). Valid values are from 3 to 1350

seconds.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 662

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

IPV6 ND RA-INTERVAL

ipv6 nd ra-interval

Overview Use this command to specify the interval between IPv6 Router Advertisements

(RA) transmissions.

Use no parameter with this command to reset the value to the default value (600

seconds).

Syntax ipv6 nd ra-interval <seconds>

no ipv6 nd ra-interval

Default 600 seconds.

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage Advertisement flags will not be transmitted unless you have applied the ipv6 nd

suppress-ra command as shown in the example below.

Example To set the advertisements interval on the VLAN interface “vlan4” to be 60 seconds,

use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan4

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 nd ra-interval 60

awplus(config-if)# no ipv6 nd suppress-ra

Commands

ipv6 nd minimum-ra-interval

ipv6 nd suppress-ra

Parameter Description

<seconds>Specifies the number of seconds between IPv6 Router

Advertisements (RAs). Valid values are from 4 to 1800 seconds.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 663

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

IPV6 ND RAGUARD

ipv6 nd raguard

Overview Use this command to apply the Router Advertisements (RA) Guard feature from the

Interface Configuration mode for a device port. This blocks all RA messages

received on a device port.

For more information about RA Guard, see the IPv6 Feature Overview and

Configuration Guide.

Use the no parameter with this command to disable RA Guard for a specified

device port.

Syntax ipv6 nd raguard

no ipv6 nd raguard

Default RA Guard is not enabled by default.

Mode Interface Configuration for a device port interface.

Usage Router Advertisements (RAs) are used by Routers to announce themselves on the

link. Applying RA Guard to a device port disallows Router Advertisements and

redirect messages. RA Guard blocks RAs from untrusted hosts. Blocking RAs stops

untrusted hosts from flooding malicious RAs and stops any misconfigured hosts

from disrupting traffic on the local network.

Enabling RA Guard on a port blocks RAs from a connected host and indicates the

port and host are untrusted. Disabling RA Guard on a port allows RAs from a

connected host and indicates the port and host are trusted. Ports and hosts are

trusted by default to allow RAs.

Example To enable RA Guard on device ports port1.0.2-1.0.12, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2-1.0.12

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 nd raguard

To verify RA Guard is enabled on device port interface port1.0.2, use the

command:

awplus# show running-config interface port1.0.2

To disable RA Guard on device ports port1.0.2-1.0.12, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2-port1.0.12

awplus(config-if)# no ipv6 nd raguard

When RA Guard is disabled on a device port it is not displayed in show

running-config output.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 664

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

IPV6 ND RAGUARD

Output Example output from using show running-config interface port1.0.2 to verify RA

Guard:

Commands

show running-config interface

!

interface port1.0.2

switchport mode access



ipv6 nd raguard

!

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 665

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

IPV6 ND SUPPRESS-RA

ipv6 nd suppress-ra

Overview Use this command to inhibit IPv6 Router Advertisement (RA) transmission for the

current interface. Router advertisements are used when applying IPv6 stateless

auto-configuration.

Use no parameter with this command to enable Router Advertisement

transmission.

Syntax ipv6 nd suppress-ra

no ipv6 nd suppress-ra

Default Router Advertisement (RA) transmission is suppressed by default.

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Example To enable the transmission of router advertisements from the VLAN interface

vlan4 on the device, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan4

awplus(config-if)# no ipv6 nd suppress-ra

Commands

ipv6 nd ra-interval

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 666

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

IPV6 NEIGHBOR

ipv6 neighbor

Overview Use this command to add a static IPv6 neighbor entry.

Use the no variant of this command to remove a specific IPv6 neighbor entry.

Syntax ipv6 neighbor <ipv6-address> <vlan-name> <mac-address>

<port-list>

no ipv6 neighbor <ipv6-address> <vlan-name> <port-list>

Mode Global Configuration

Usage Use this command to clear a specific IPv6 neighbor entry. To clear all dynamic

address entries, use the clear ipv6 neighbors command.

Example To create a static neighbor entry for IPv6 address 2001:0db8::a2, on vlan 4, MAC

address 0000.cd28.0880, on port1.0.6, use the command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ipv6 neighbor 2001:0db8::a2 vlan4

0000.cd28.0880 port1.0.6

Commands

clear ipv6 neighbors

Parameter Description

<ipv6-address>Specify the neighbor’s IPv6 address in the format X:X::X:X.

<vlan-name>Specify the neighbor’s VLAN name.

<mac-address>Specify the MAC hardware address in hexadecimal notation in

the format HHHH.HHHH.HHHH.

<port-list> Specify the port number, or port range.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 667

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

IPV6 OPPORTUNISTIC-ND

ipv6 opportunistic-nd

Overview Use this command to enable opportunistic neighbor discovery for the global IPv6

ND cache. Opportunistic neighbor discovery changes the behavior for unsolicited

ICMPv6 ND packet forwarding on the device.

Use the no variant of this command to disable opportunistic neighbor discovery

for the global IPv6 ND cache.

Syntax ipv6 opportunistic-nd

no ipv6 opportunistic-nd

Default Opportunistic neighbor discovery is disabled by default.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage When opportunistic neighbor discovery is enabled, the device will reply to any

received unsolicited ICMPv6 ND packets. The source MAC address for the

unsolicited ICMPv6 ND packet is added to the IPv6 ND cache, so the device

forwards the ICMPv6 ND packet. When opportunistic neighbor discovery is

disabled, the source MAC address for the ICMPv6 packet is not added to the IPv6

ND cache, so the ICMPv6 ND packet is not forwarded by the device.

Examples To enable opportunistic neighbor discovery for the IPv6 ND cache, enter:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ipv6 opportunistic-nd

To disable opportunistic neighbor discovery for the IPv6 ND cache, enter:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no ipv6 opportunistic-nd

Commands

arp opportunistic-nd

show ipv6 neighbors

show running-config interface

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 668

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

IPV6 ROUTE

ipv6 route

Overview This command adds a static IPv6 route to the Routing Information Base (RIB). If this

route is the best route for the destination, then your device adds it to the

Forwarding Information Base (FIB). Your device uses the FIB to advertise routes to

neighbors and forward packets.

The no variant of this command removes the static route.

Syntax ipv6 route <dest-prefix> <dest-prefix/length>

{<gateway-ip>|<gateway-name>} [<distvalue>]

no ipv6 route <dest-prefix> <dest-prefix/length>

{<gateway-ip>|<gateway-name>} [<distvalue>]

Mode Global Configuration

Usage Administrative distance can be modified so static routes do not take priority over

other routes.

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ipv6 route 2001:0db8::1/128 vlan2 32

Validation

Commands

show running-config

show ipv6 route

Parameter Description

<dest-prefix/

length>

Specifies the IP destination prefix.

The IPv6 address prefix uses the format X:X::/prefix-length.

The prefix-length is usually set between 0 and 64.

<gateway-ip>Specifies the IP gateway (or next hop) address. The IPv6

address uses the format X:X::X:X/Prefix-Length. The

prefix-length is usually set between 0 and 64.

<gateway-name>Specifies the name of the gateway (or next hop) interface.

<distvalue>Specifies the administrative distance for the route. Valid

values are from 1 to 255.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 669

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

IPV6 UNREACHABLES

ipv6 unreachables

Overview Use this command to enable ICMPv6 (Internet Control Message Protocol version 6)

type 1, destination unreachable, messages.

Use the no variant of this command to disable destination unreachable messages.

This prevents an attacker from using these messages to discover the topology of a

network.

Syntax ipv6 unreachables

no ipv6 unreachables

Default Destination unreachable messages are enabled by default.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage When a device receives a packet for a destination that is unreachable it returns an

ICMPv6 type 1 message. This message includes a reason code, as per the table

below. An attacker can use these messages to obtain information regarding the

topology of a network. Disabling destination unreachable messages, using the no

ipv6 unreachables command, secures your network against this type of probing.

NOTE: Disabling ICMPv6 destination unreachable messages breaks applications such

as traceroute, which depend on these messages to operate correctly.

Example To disable destination unreachable messages, use the commands

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no ipv6 unreachables

To enable destination unreachable messages, use the commands

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ipv6 unreachables

Table 21-1: ICMPv6 type 1 reason codes and description

Code Description [RFC]

0No route to destination [RFC4443]

1Communication with destination administratively prohibited [RFC4443]

2Beyond scope of source address [RFC4443]

3Address unreachable [RF4443]

4Port unreachable [RFC4443]

5Source address failed ingress/egress policy [RFC4443]

6Reject route to destination [RFC4443

7Error in Source Routing Header [RFC6554]

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 670

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

PING IPV6

ping ipv6

Overview This command sends a query to another IPv6 host (send Echo Request messages).

Syntax ping ipv6 {<host>|<ipv6-address>} [repeat

{<1-2147483647>|continuous}] [size <10-1452>] [interface

<interface-list>] [timeout <1-65535>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example awplus# ping ipv6 2001:0db8::a2

Commands

traceroute ipv6

Parameter Description

<ipv6-addr> The destination IPv6 address. The IPv6 address uses the

format X:X::X:X.

<hostname>The destination hostname.

repeat Specify the number of ping packets to send.

<1-2147483647> Specify repeat count. The default is 5.

size <10-1452> The number of data bytes to send, excluding the 8 byte ICMP

header. The default is 56 (64 ICMP data bytes).

interface

<interface-list>

The interface or range of configured IP interfaces to use as the

source in the IP header of the ping packet. You can only

specify the interface when pinging a link local address.

timeout

<1-65535>

The time in seconds to wait for echo replies if the ARP entry is

present, before reporting that no reply was received. If no ARP

entry is present, it does not wait.

repeat Specify the number of ping packets to send.

<1-2147483647> Specify repeat count. The default is 5.

continuous Continuous ping.

size <10-1452> The number of data bytes to send, excluding the 8 byte ICMP

header. The default is 56 (64 ICMP data bytes).

timeout

<1-65535>

The time in seconds to wait for echo replies if the ARP entry is

present, before reporting that no reply was received. If no ARP

entry is present, it does not wait.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 671

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

SHOW IPV6 FORWARDING

show ipv6 forwarding

Overview Use this command to display IPv6 forwarding status.

Syntax show ipv6 forwarding

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example awplus# show ipv6 forwarding

Output Figure 21-1: Example output from the show ipv6 forwarding command



ipv6 forwarding is on

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 672

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

SHOW IPV6 INTERFACE BRIEF

show ipv6 interface brief

Overview Use this command to display brief information about interfaces and the IPv6

address assigned to them.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show ipv6 interface [brief]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Examples awplus# show ipv6 interface brief

Output Figure 21-2: Example output from the show ipv6 interface brief command

Commands

show interface brief

Parameter Description

brief Specify this optional parameter to display brief IPv6 interface

information.

awplus#show ipv6 interface brief

Interface IPv6-Address Status Protocol

lo unassigned admin up running

vlan1 2001:db8::1/48 admin up down

fe80::215:77ff:fee9:5c50/64

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 673

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

SHOW IPV6 NEIGHBORS

show ipv6 neighbors

Overview Use this command to display all IPv6 neighbors.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show ipv6 neighbors

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 674

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

SHOW IPV6 ROUTE

show ipv6 route

Overview Use this command to display the IPv6 routing table for a protocol or from a

particular table.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show ipv6 route

<ipv6-addr/prefix-length>)]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example 1 To display an IP route with all parameters turned on, use the following command:

awplus# show ipv6 route

Output Figure 21-3: Example output of the show ipv6 route command

Parameter Description

connected Displays only the routes learned from connected

interfaces.

database Displays only the IPv6 routing information extracted

from the database.

static Displays only the IPv6 static routes you have configured.

summary Displays summary information from the IPv6 routing

table.

<ipv6-address> Displays the routes for the specified address in the IP

routing table. The IPv6 address uses the format

X:X::X:X/Prefix-Length. The prefix-length is usually set

between 0 and 64.

<ipv6-prefix/length> Displays only the routes for the specified IP prefix.



IPv6 Routing Table

Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, O - OSPF, B - BGP

S ::/0 [1/0] via 2001::a:0:0:c0a8:a6, vlan10

C 2001:db8::a:0:0:0:0/64 via ::, vlan10

C 2001:db8::14:0:0:0:0/64 via ::, vlan20

C 2001:db8::0:0:0:0/64 via ::, vlan30

C 2001:db8::28:0:0:0:0/64 via ::, vlan40

C 2001:db8::fa:0:0:0:0/64 via ::, vlan250

C 2001:db8::/64 via ::, vlan250

C 2001:db8::/64 via ::, vlan40

C 2001:db8::/64 via ::, vlan20

C 2001:db8::/64 via ::, vlan10

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 675

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

SHOW IPV6 ROUTE

Example 2 To display all database entries for an IP route, use the following command:

awplus# show ipv6 route database

Output Figure 21-4: Example output of the show ipv6 route database command



IPv6 Routing Table

Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, O - OSPF, B - BGP

> - selected route, * - FIB route, p - stale info

Timers: Uptime



S ::/0 [1/0] via 2001::a:0:0:c0a8:a01 inactive, 6d22h12m

[1/0] via 2001::fa:0:0:c0a8:fa01 inactive, 6d22h12m

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 676

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

SHOW IPV6 ROUTE SUMMARY

show ipv6 route summary

Overview Use this command to display the summary of the current NSM RIB entries.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show ipv6 route summary

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display IP route summary, use the following command:

awplus# show ipv6 route summary

Output Figure 21-5: Example output from the show ipv6 route summary command

Commands

show ip route database

IPv6 routing table name is Default-IPv6-Routing-Table(0)

IPv6 routing table maximum-paths is 4

RouteSource Networks

connected 4

rip 5

Total 9

FIB 5

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 677

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 COMMANDS

TRACEROUTE IPV6

traceroute ipv6

Overview Use this command to trace the route to the specified IPv6 host.

Syntax traceroute ipv6 {<ipv6-addr>|<hostname>}

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To run a traceroute for the IPv6 address 2001:0db8::a2, use the following

command:

awplus# traceroute ipv6 2001:0db8::a2

Commands

ping ipv6

Parameter Description

<ipv6-addr> The destination IPv6 address. The IPv6 address uses the format

X:X::X:X.

<hostname>The destination hostname.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 678

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Routing Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference of routing commands that are

common across the routing IP protocols. For more information, see the Route

Selection Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Command List •“ip route” on page 679

•“ipv6 route” on page 681

•“max-fib-routes” on page 682

•“max-static-routes” on page 683

•“show ip route” on page 684

•“show ip route database” on page 686

•“show ip route summary” on page 687

•“show ipv6 route” on page 688

•“show ipv6 route summary” on page 690

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 679

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

ROUTING COMMANDS

IP ROUTE

ip route

Overview This command adds a static route to the Routing Information Base (RIB). If this

route is the best route for the destination, then your device adds it to the

Forwarding Information Base (FIB). Your device uses the FIB to advertise routes to

neighbors and forward packets.

The no variant of this command removes the static route from the RIB and FIB.

Syntax ip route <subnet&mask> {<gateway-ip>|<interface>} [<distance>]

no ip route <subnet&mask> {<gateway-ip>|<interface>}

[<distance>]

Mode Global Configuration

Default The default administrative distance for a static route is 1 for priority over non-static

routes.

Usage Administrative distance can be modified so that static routes do not take priority

over other routes.

Examples To add the destination 192.168.3.0 with the mask 255.255.255.0 as a static route

available through the device at “10.10.0.2” with the default administrative

distance, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ip route 192.168.3.0 255.255.255.0 10.10.0.2

Parameter Description

<subnet&mask>The IPv4 address of the destination subnet defined using either a

prefix length or a separate mask specified in one of the following

formats:

• The IPv4 subnet address in dotted decimal notation followed by

the subnet mask, also in dotted decimal notation.

• The IPv4 subnet address in dotted decimal notation, followed

by a forward slash, then the prefix length

<gateway-ip>The IPv4 address of the gateway device.

<interface>The interface that connects your device to the network. Enter the

name of the VLAN or its VID.

The gateway IP address or the interface is required.

<distance>The administrative distance for the static route in the range

<1-255>. Static routes by default have an administrative distance

of 1.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 680

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

ROUTING COMMANDS

IP ROUTE

To remove the destination 192.168.3.0 with the mask 255.255.255.0 as a static

route available through the device at “10.10.0.2” with the default administrative

distance, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no ip route 192.168.3.0 255.255.255.0 10.10.0.2

To add the destination 192.168.3.0 with the mask 255.255.255.0 as a static route

available through the device at “10.10.0.2” with an administrative distance of 128,

use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ip route 192.168.3.0 255.255.255.0 10.10.0.2

128

Commands

show ip route

show ip route database

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 681

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

ROUTING COMMANDS

IPV6 ROUTE

ipv6 route

Overview This command adds a static IPv6 route to the Routing Information Base (RIB). If this

route is the best route for the destination, then your device adds it to the

Forwarding Information Base (FIB). Your device uses the FIB to advertise routes to

neighbors and forward packets.

The no variant of this command removes the static route.

Syntax ipv6 route <dest-prefix> <dest-prefix/length>

{<gateway-ip>|<gateway-name>} [<distvalue>]

no ipv6 route <dest-prefix> <dest-prefix/length>

{<gateway-ip>|<gateway-name>} [<distvalue>]

Mode Global Configuration

Usage Administrative distance can be modified so static routes do not take priority over

other routes.

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ipv6 route 2001:0db8::1/128 vlan2 32

Validation

Commands

show running-config

show ipv6 route

Parameter Description

<dest-prefix/

length>

Specifies the IP destination prefix.

The IPv6 address prefix uses the format X:X::/prefix-length.

The prefix-length is usually set between 0 and 64.

<gateway-ip>Specifies the IP gateway (or next hop) address. The IPv6

address uses the format X:X::X:X/Prefix-Length. The

prefix-length is usually set between 0 and 64.

<gateway-name>Specifies the name of the gateway (or next hop) interface.

<distvalue>Specifies the administrative distance for the route. Valid

values are from 1 to 255.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 682

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

ROUTING COMMANDS

MAX-FIB-ROUTES

max-fib-routes

Overview This command enables you to control the maximum number of FIB routes

configured. It operates by providing parameters that enable you to configure

preset maximums and warning message thresholds.

NOTE: For static routes use the max-static-routes command.

Use the no variant of this command to set the maximum number of FIB routes to

the default of 4294967294 FIB routes.

Syntax max-fib-routes <1-4294967294> [<1-100>|warning-only]

no max-fib-routes

Default The default number of FIB routes is the maximum number of FIB routes

(4294967294).

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To set the maximum number of dynamic routes to 2000 and warning threshold of

75%, use the following commands:

awplus# config terminal

awplus(config)# max-fib-routes 2000 75

Parameter Description

max-fib-routes This is the maximum number of routes that can be stored in the

device’s Forwarding Information dataBase. In practice, other

practical system limits would prevent this maximum being

reached.

<1-4294967294>The allowable configurable range for setting the maximum

number of FIB-routes.

<1-100>This parameter enables you to optionally apply a percentage

value. This percentage will be based on the maximum number

of FIB routes you have specified. This will cause a warning

message to appear when your routes reach your specified

percentage value. Routes can continue to be added until your

configured maximum value is reached.

warning-only This parameter enables you to optionally apply a warning

message. If you set this option a warning message will appear if

your maximum configured value is reached. Routes can

continue to be added until your device reaches either the

maximum capacity value of 4294967294, or a practical system

limit.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 683

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

ROUTING COMMANDS

MAX-STATIC-ROUTES

max-static-routes

Overview Use this command to set the maximum number of static routes, excluding FIB

(Forwarding Information Base) routes.

NOTE: For FIB routes use the max-fib-routes command.

Use the no variant of this command to set the maximum number of static routes

to the default of 1000 static routes.

Syntax max-static-routes <1-1000>

no max-static-routes

Default The default number of static routes is the maximum number of static routes (1000).

Mode Global Configuration

Example To reset the maximum number of static routes to the default maximum, use the

command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no max-static-routes

NOTE: Static routes are applied before adding routes to the RIB (Routing Information

Base). Therefore, rejected static routes will not appear in the running config.

Commands

max-fib-routes

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 684

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

ROUTING COMMANDS

SHOW IP ROUTE

show ip route

Overview Use this command to display routing entries in the FIB (Forwarding Information

Base). The FIB contains the best routes to a destination, and your device uses these

routes when forwarding traffic. You can display a subset of the entries in the FIB

based on protocol.

To modify the lines displayed, use the | (output modifier token); to save the output

to a file, use the > output redirection token.

Syntax show ip route [connected|rip|static|<ip-addr>|

<ip-addr/prefix-length>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the static routes in the FIB, use the command:

awplus# show ip route static

Output Each entry in the output from this command has a code preceding it, indicating the

source of the routing entry. The first few lines of the output list the possible codes

that may be seen with the route entries.

Typically, route entries are composed of the following elements:

•code

• a second label indicating the sub-type of the route

• network or host IP address

• administrative distance and metric

• next hop IP address

• outgoing interface name

• time since route entry was added

Parameter Description

connected Displays only the routes learned from connected

interfaces.

rip Displays only the routes learned from RIP.

static Displays only the static routes you have configured.

<ip-addr> Displays the routes for the specified address. Enter

an IPv4 address.

<ip-addr/prefix-length> Displays the routes for the specified network. Enter

an IPv4 address and prefix length.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 685

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

ROUTING COMMANDS

SHOW IP ROUTE

Figure 22-1: Example output from the show ip route command

Connected Route The connected route entry consists of:

This route entry denotes:

• Route entries for network 10.10.31.0/24 are derived from the IP address

of local interface vlan2.

• These routes are marked as Connected routes (C) and always preferred

over routes for the same network learned from other routing protocols.

Commands

ip route

show ip route database

Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, B - BGP

O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area

N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2

E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2

* - candidate default



C 3.3.3.0/24 is directly connected, vlan1

C 10.10.31.0/24 is directly connected, vlan2

C 10.70.0.0/24 is directly connected, vlan4

C 33.33.33.33/32 is directly connected, lo

C 10.10.31.0/24 is directly connected, vlan2

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 686

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

ROUTING COMMANDS

SHOW IP ROUTE DATABASE

show ip route database

Overview This command displays the routing entries in the RIB (Routing Information Base).

When multiple entries are available for the same prefix, RIB uses the routes’

administrative distances to choose the best route. All best routes are entered into

the FIB (Forwarding Information Base). To view the routes in the FIB, use the show

ip route command.

To modify the lines displayed, use the | (output modifier token); to save the output

to a file, use the > output redirection token.

Syntax show ip route database [connected|rip|static]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the static routes in the RIB, use the command:

awplus# show ip route database static

Output Figure 22-2: Example output from the show ip route database command

Commands

show ip route

Parameter Description

connected Displays only the routes learned from connected interfaces.

rip Displays only the routes learned from RIP.

static Displays only the static routes you have configured.



Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, B - BGP

O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area

N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2

E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2

> - selected route, * - FIB route, p - stale info



C *> 10.10.31.0/24 is directly connected, vlan2

S *> 10.10.34.0/24 [1/0] via 10.10.31.16, vlan2

C *> 10.30.0.0/24 is directly connected, vlan6

S *> 11.22.11.0/24 [1/0] via 10.10.31.16, vlan2

S *> 16.16.16.16/32 [1/0] via 10.10.31.16, vlan2

C *> 45.45.45.45/32 is directly connected, lo

C *> 127.0.0.0/8 is directly connected, lo

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 687

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

ROUTING COMMANDS

SHOW IP ROUTE SUMMARY

show ip route summary

Overview This command displays a summary of the current RIB (Routing Information Base)

entries.

To modify the lines displayed, use the | (output modifier token); to save the output

to a file, use the > output redirection token.

Syntax show ip route summary

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display a summary of the current RIB entries, use the command:

awplus# show ip route summary

Output Figure 22-3: Example output from the show ip route summary command

Commands

show ip route

show ip route database

IP routing table name is Default-IP-Routing-Table(0)

IP routing table maximum-paths is 4

Route Source Networks

connected 5

Total 8

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 688

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

ROUTING COMMANDS

SHOW IPV6 ROUTE

show ipv6 route

Overview Use this command to display the IPv6 routing table for a protocol or from a

particular table.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show ipv6 route

<ipv6-addr/prefix-length>)]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example 1 To display an IP route with all parameters turned on, use the following command:

awplus# show ipv6 route

Output Figure 22-4: Example output of the show ipv6 route command

Parameter Description

connected Displays only the routes learned from connected

interfaces.

database Displays only the IPv6 routing information extracted

from the database.

static Displays only the IPv6 static routes you have configured.

summary Displays summary information from the IPv6 routing

table.

<ipv6-address> Displays the routes for the specified address in the IP

routing table. The IPv6 address uses the format

X:X::X:X/Prefix-Length. The prefix-length is usually set

between 0 and 64.

<ipv6-prefix/length> Displays only the routes for the specified IP prefix.



IPv6 Routing Table

Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, O - OSPF, B - BGP

S ::/0 [1/0] via 2001::a:0:0:c0a8:a6, vlan10

C 2001:db8::a:0:0:0:0/64 via ::, vlan10

C 2001:db8::14:0:0:0:0/64 via ::, vlan20

C 2001:db8::0:0:0:0/64 via ::, vlan30

C 2001:db8::28:0:0:0:0/64 via ::, vlan40

C 2001:db8::fa:0:0:0:0/64 via ::, vlan250

C 2001:db8::/64 via ::, vlan250

C 2001:db8::/64 via ::, vlan40

C 2001:db8::/64 via ::, vlan20

C 2001:db8::/64 via ::, vlan10

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 689

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

ROUTING COMMANDS

SHOW IPV6 ROUTE

Example 2 To display all database entries for an IP route, use the following command:

awplus# show ipv6 route database

Output Figure 22-5: Example output of the show ipv6 route database command



IPv6 Routing Table

Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, O - OSPF, B - BGP

> - selected route, * - FIB route, p - stale info

Timers: Uptime



S ::/0 [1/0] via 2001::a:0:0:c0a8:a01 inactive, 6d22h12m

[1/0] via 2001::fa:0:0:c0a8:fa01 inactive, 6d22h12m

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 690

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

ROUTING COMMANDS

SHOW IPV6 ROUTE SUMMARY

show ipv6 route summary

Overview Use this command to display the summary of the current NSM RIB entries.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show ipv6 route summary

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display IP route summary, use the following command:

awplus# show ipv6 route summary

Output Figure 22-6: Example output from the show ipv6 route summary command

Commands

show ip route database

IPv6 routing table name is Default-IPv6-Routing-Table(0)

IPv6 routing table maximum-paths is 4

RouteSource Networks

connected 4

rip 5

Total 9

FIB 5

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 691

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference of commands used to configure

RIP.

For information about configuring RIP, see the RIP Feature Overview and

Configuration Guide.

Command List •“accept-lifetime” on page 693

•“alliedware-behavior” on page 695

•“cisco-metric-behavior (RIP)” on page 697

•“clear ip rip route” on page 698

•“debug rip” on page 699

•“default-information originate (RIP)” on page 700

•“default-metric (RIP)” on page 701

•“distance (RIP)” on page 702

•“distribute-list (RIP)” on page 703

•“fullupdate (RIP)” on page 704

•“ip rip authentication key-chain” on page 705

•“ip rip authentication mode” on page 707

•“ip rip authentication string” on page 710

•“ip rip receive-packet” on page 712

•“ip rip receive version” on page 713

•“ip rip send-packet” on page 714

•“ip rip send version” on page 715

•“ip rip send version 1-compatible” on page 717

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 692

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

•“ip rip split-horizon” on page 719

•“key” on page 720

•“key chain” on page 721

•“key-string” on page 722

•“maximum-prefix” on page 723

•“neighbor (RIP)” on page 724

•“network (RIP)” on page 725

•“offset-list (RIP)” on page 726

•“passive-interface (RIP)” on page 727

•“recv-buffer-size (RIP)” on page 728

•“redistribute (RIP)” on page 729

•“restart rip graceful” on page 730

•“rip restart grace-period” on page 731

•“route (RIP)” on page 732

•“router rip” on page 733

•“send-lifetime” on page 734

•“show debugging rip” on page 736

•“show ip protocols rip” on page 737

•“show ip rip” on page 738

•“show ip rip database” on page 739

•“show ip rip interface” on page 740

•“timers (RIP)” on page 741

•“undebug rip” on page 742

•“version (RIP)” on page 743

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 693

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

ACCEPT-LIFETIME

accept-lifetime

Overview Use this command to specify the time period during which the authentication key

on a key chain is received as valid.

Use the no variant of this command to remove a specified time period for an

authentication key on a key chain as set previously with the accept-lifetime

command.

Syntax accept-lifetime <start-date> {<end-date>|

duration <seconds>|infinite}

no accept-lifetime

Mode Keychain-key Configuration

Examples The following examples show the setting of accept-lifetime for key 1 on the key

chain named “mychain”.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# key chain mychain

awplus(config-keychain)# key 1

awplus(config-keychain-key)# accept-lifetime 03:03:01 Sep 3

2016 04:04:02 Oct 6 2016

Parameter Description

<start-date> Specifies the start time and date in the format: 

<hh:mm:ss> <day> <month> <year> or 

<hh:mm:ss> <month> <day> <year>, where:

<hh:mm:ss> The time of the day, in hours, minutes and seconds

<day> <1-31> The day of the month

<month> The month of the year (the first three letters of the

month, for example, Jan)

<year> <1993-2035> The year

<end-date> Specifies the end time and date in the format: 

<hh:mm:ss> <day> <month> <year> or 

<hh:mm:ss> <month> <day> <year>, where:

<hh:mm:ss> The time of the day, in hours, minutes and seconds

<day> <1-31> The day of the month

<month> The month of the year (the first three letters of the

month, for example, Jan)

<year> <1993-2035> The year

<seconds> <1-2147483646> Duration of the key in seconds.

infinite Never expires.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 694

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

ACCEPT-LIFETIME

or:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# key chain mychain

awplus(config-keychain)# key 1

awplus(config-keychain-key)# accept-lifetime 03:03:01 3 Sep

2016 04:04:02 6 Oct 2016

Commands

key

key-string

key chain

send-lifetime

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 695

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

ALLIEDWARE-BEHAVIOR

alliedware-behavior

Overview This command configures your device to exhibit AlliedWare behavior when

sending RIPv1 response/update messages. Configuring for this behavior may be

necessary if you are replacing an AlliedWare device with an AlliedWare Plus device

and wish to ensure consistent RIPv1 behavior.

Use the no variant of this command to implement AlliedWare Plus behavior.

This command has no impact on devices running RIPv2. Reception and

transmission can be independently altered to conform to AlliedWare standard.

Syntax alliedware-behavior {rip1-send|rip1-recv}

no alliedware-behavior {rip1-send|rip1-recv}

Default By default when sending out RIPv1 updates on an interface, if the prefix (learned

through RIPv2 or otherwise redistributed into RIP) being advertised does not

match the subnetting used on the outgoing RIPv1 interface it will be filtered. The

alliedware-behavior command returns your router’s RIPv1 behavior to the

AlliedWare format, where the prefix will be advertised as-is.

For example, if a RIPv1 update is being sent over interface 192.168.1.4/26, by

default the prefix 192.168.1.64/26 will be advertised, but the prefix

192.168.1.144/28 will be filtered because the mask /28 does not match the

interface's mask of /26. If alliedware- behavior r ip1-send is configured, the prefix

192.168.1.144 would be sent as-is.

Mode Router Configuration

Examples To configure your device for alliedware-behavior when sending and receiving

RIPv1 update messages, enter the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# router rip

awplus(config-router)# alliedware-behavior rip1-send

awplus(config-router)# alliedware-behavior rip1-recv

Parameter Description

rip1-send Configures the router to behave in AlliedWare mode when sending

update messages.

rip1-recv Configures the router to behave in AlliedWare mode when receiving

update messages.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 696

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

ALLIEDWARE-BEHAVIOR

To return your device to AlliedWare Plus-like behavior when sending and

receiving RIPv1 update messages, enter the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# router rip

awplus(config-router)# no alliedware-behavior rip1-send

awplus(config-router)# no alliedware-behavior rip1-recv

Validation

Commands

show ip protocols rip

show running-config

Commands

fullupdate (RIP)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 697

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

CISCO-METRIC-BEHAVIOR (RIP)

cisco-metric-behavior (RIP)

Overview Use this command to enable or disable the RIP routing metric update to conform

to Cisco’s implementation. This command is provided to allow inter-operation

with older Cisco devices that do not conform to the RFC standard for RIP route

metrics.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this feature.

Syntax cisco-metric-behavior {enable|disable}

no cisco-metric-behavior

Default By default, the Cisco metric-behavior is disabled.

Mode Router Configuration

Examples To enable the routing metric update to behave as per the Cisco implementation,

enter the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# router rip

awplus(config-router)# cisco-metric-behavior enable

To disable the routing metric update to behave as per the default setting, enter the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# router rip

awplus(config-router)# no cisco-metric-behavior

Validation

Commands

show running-config

Parameter Description

enable Enables updating the metric consistent with Cisco.

disable Disables updating the metric consistent with Cisco.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 698

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

CLEAR IP RIP ROUTE

clear ip rip route

Overview Use this command to clear specific data from the RIP routing table.

Mode Privileged Exec

Usage Using this command with the all parameter clears the RIP table of all the routes.

Examples To clear the route 10.0.0.0/8 from the RIP routing table, use the following

command:

awplus# clear ip rip route 10.0.0.0/8

Parameter Description

<ip-dest-network/

prefix-length>

Removes entries which exactly match this destination

address from RIP routing table. Enter the IP address and

prefix length of the destination network.

static Removes static entries from the RIP routing table.

connected Removes entries for connected routes from the RIP routing

table.

rip Removes only RIP routes from the RIP routing table.

ospf Removes only OSPF routes from the RIP routing table.

invalid-routes Removes routes with metric 16 immediately. Otherwise,

these routes are not removed until RIP times out the route

after 2 minutes.

all Clears the entire RIP routing table.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 699

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

DEBUG RIP

debug rip

Overview Use this command to specify the options for the displayed debugging information

for RIP events and RIP packets.

Use the no variant of this command to disable the specified debug option.

Syntax debug rip {events|nsm|<packet>|all}

no debug rip {events|nsm|<packet>|all}

Default Disabled

Mode Privileged Exec and Global Configuration

Example The following example displays information about the RIP packets that are

received and sent out from the device.

awplus# debug rip packet

Commands

undebug rip

Parameter Description

events RIP events debug information is displayed.

nsm RIP and NSM communication is displayed.

<packet>packet [recv|send] [detail] Specifies RIP packets only.

recv Specifies that information for received packets be displayed.

send Specifies that information for sent packets be displayed.

detail Displays detailed information for the sent or received packet.

all Displays all RIP debug information.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 700

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

DEFAULT-INFORMATION ORIGINATE (RIP)

default-information originate (RIP)

Overview Use this command to generate a default route into the Routing Information

Protocol (RIP).

Use the no variant of this command to disable this feature.

Syntax default-information originate

no default-information originate

Default Disabled

Mode Router Configuration

Usage If routes are being redistributed into RIP and the router’s route table contains a

default route, within one of the route categories that are being redistributed, the

RIP protocol will advertise this default route, irrespective of whether the

default-information originate command has been configured or not. However,

if the router has not redistributed any default route into RIP, but you want RIP to

advertise a default route anyway, then use this command.

This will cause RIP to create a default route entry in the RIP database. The entry will

be of type RS (Rip Static). Unless actively filtered out, this default route will be

advertised out every interface that is sending RIP. Split horizon does not apply to

this route, as it is internally generated. This operates quite similarly to the OSPF

default-information originate always command.

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# router rip

awplus(config-router)# default-information originate

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 701

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

DEFAULT-METRIC (RIP)

default-metric (RIP)

Overview Use this command to specify the metrics to be assigned to redistributed RIP routes.

Use the no variant of this command to reset the RIP metric back to its default (1).

Syntax default-metric <metric>

no default-metric [<metric>]

Default By default, the RIP metric value is set to 1.

Mode RIP Router Configuration

Usage This command is used with the redistribute (RIP) command to make the routing

protocol use the specified metric value for all redistributed routes, regardless of

the original protocol that the route has been redistributed from.

Examples This example assigns the cost of 10 to the routes that are redistributed into RIP.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# router rip

awplus(config-router)# default-metric 10

awplus(config-router)# redistribute ospf

awplus(config-router)# redistribute connected

Commands

redistribute (RIP)

Parameter Description

<metric> <1-16> Specifies the value of the default metric.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 702

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

DISTANCE (RIP)

distance (RIP)

Overview This command sets the administrative distance for RIP routes. Your device uses this

value to select between two or more routes to the same destination obtained from

two different routing protocols. The route with the smallest administrative

distance value is added to the Forwarding Information Base (FIB). For more

information, see the Route Selection Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

The no variant of this command sets the administrative distance for the RIP route

to the default of 120.

Syntax distance <1-255> [<ip-addr/prefix-length> [<access-list>]]

no distance [<1-255>] [<ip-addr/prefix-length> [ <access-list>]]

Mode RIP Router Configuration

Examples To set the administrative distance to 8 for the RIP routes within the 10.0.0.0/8

network that match the access-list “mylist”, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# router rip

awplus(config-router)# distance 8 10.0.0.0/8 mylist

To set the administrative distance to the default of 120 for the RIP routes within the

10.0.0.0/8 network that match the access-list “mylist”, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# router rip

awplus(config-router)# no distance 8 10.0.0.0/8 mylist

Parameter Description

<1-255> The administrative distance value you are setting for this RIP

route.

<ip-addr/

prefix-length>

The network IP address and prefix-length that you are changing

the administrative distance for.

<access-list> Specifies the access-list name. This access list specifies which

routes within the specified network this command applies to.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 703

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

DISTRIBUTE-LIST (RIP)

distribute-list (RIP)

Overview Use this command to filter incoming or outgoing route updates using the

access-list or the prefix-list.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this feature.

Syntax distribute-list {<access-list> | prefix <prefix-list>} {in|out}

[<interface>]

no distribute-list {<access-list> | prefix <prefix-list>}

{in|out} [<interface>]

Default Disabled

Mode RIP Router Configuration

Usage Filter out incoming or outgoing route updates using access-list or prefix-list. If you

do not specify the name of the interface, the filter will be applied to all interfaces.

Examples In this example the following commands are used to apply an access list called

myfilter to filter incoming routing updates in vlan2

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# router rip

awplus(config-router)# distribute-list prefix myfilter in vlan2

Commands

access-list extended (named)

Parameter Description

prefix Filter prefixes in routing updates.

<access-list> Specifies the IPv4 access-list number or name to use.

<prefix-list> Specifies the name of the IPv4 prefix-list to use.

in Filter incoming routing updates.

out Filter outgoing routing updates.

<interface>The interface on which distribute-list applies. For instance: vlan2

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 704

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

FULLUPDATE (RIP)

fullupdate (RIP)

Overview Use this command to specify which routes RIP should advertise when performing

a triggered update. By default, when a triggered update is sent, RIP will only

advertise those routes that have changed since the last update. When fullupdate

is configured, the device advertises the full RIP route table in outgoing triggered

updates, including routes that have not changed. This enables faster convergence

times, or allows inter-operation with legacy network equipment, but at the

expense of larger update messages.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this feature.

Syntax fullupdate

no fullupdate

Default By default this feature is disabled.

Mode RIP Router Configuration

Example To enable the fullupdate (RIP) function, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# router rip

awplus(config-router)# fullupdate

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 705

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

IP RIP AUTHENTICATION KEY-CHAIN

ip rip authentication key-chain

Overview Use this command to enable RIPv2 authentication on an interface and specify the

name of the key chain to be used.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this function.

Syntax ip rip authentication key-chain <key-chain-name>

no ip rip authentication key-chain

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage Use this command to perform authentication on the interface. Not configuring the

key chain results in no authentication at all.

The AlliedWare Plus™ implementation provides the choice of configuring

authentication for single key or multiple keys at different times. Use the ip rip

authentication string command for single key authentication. Use the ip rip

authentication key-chain command for multiple keys authentication. See the RIP

Feature Overview and Configuration Guide for illustrated RIP configuration

examples.

For multiple key authentication, use the following steps to configure a route to

enable RIPv2 authentication using multiple keys at different times:

1) Define a key chain with a key chain name, using the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# key chain <key-chain-name>

2) Define a key on this key chain, using the following command:

awplus(config-keychain)# key <keyid>

3) Define the password used by the key, using the following command:

awplus(config-keychain-key)# key-string <key-password>

4) Enable authentication on the desired interface and specify the key chain to

be used, using the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface <id>

awplus(config-if)# ip rip authentication key-chain

<key-chain-name>

Parameter Description

<key-chain-name>Specify the name of the key chain. This is an alpha-numeric

string, but it cannot include spaces.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 706

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

IP RIP AUTHENTICATION KEY-CHAIN

5) Specify the mode of authentication for the given interface (text or MD5),

using the following command:

awplus(config-if)# ip rip authentication mode {md5|text}

Example In the following example of a configuration for multiple keys authentication, a

password “toyota” is set for key 1 in key chain “cars”. Authentication is enabled on

vlan2 and the authentication mode is set to MD5:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# key chain cars

awplus(config-keychain)# key 1

awplus(config-keychain-key)# key-string toyota

awplus(config-keychain-key)# accept-lifetime 10:00:00 Oct 08

2016 duration 43200

awplus(config-keychain-key)# send-lifetime 10:00:00 Oct 08 2016

duration 43200

awplus(config-keychain-key)# exit

awplus(config-keychain)# exit

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip rip authentication key-chain cars

awplus(config-if)# ip rip authentication mode md5

Example In the following example, the VLAN interface vlan23 is configured to use key-chain

authentication with the keychain “mykey”. See the key command for a description

of how a key chain is created.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan23

awplus(config-if)# ip rip authentication key-chain mykey

Commands

accept-lifetime

send-lifetime

ip rip authentication mode

ip rip authentication string

key

key chain

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 707

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

IP RIP AUTHENTICATION MODE

ip rip authentication mode

Overview Use this command to specify the type of authentication mode used for RIP v2

packets.

Use the no variant of this command to restore clear text authentication.

Syntax ip rip authentication mode {md5|text}

no ip rip authentication mode

Default Text authentication is enabled

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage The AlliedWare Plus™ implementation provides the choice of configuring

authentication for single key or multiple keys at different times. Use the ip rip

authentication string command for single key authentication. Use the ip rip

authentication key-chain command for multiple keys authentication. See the RIP

Feature Overview and Configuration Guide for illustrated RIP configuration

examples.

Usage: single key Use the following steps to configure a route to enable RIPv2 authentication using

a single key or password:

1) Define the authentication string or password used by the key for the desired

interface, using the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface <id>

awplus(config-if)# ip rip authentication string

<auth-string>

2) Specify the mode of authentication for the given interface (text or MD5),

using the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface <id>

awplus(config-if)# ip rip authentication mode {md5|text}

Parameter Description

md5 Uses the keyed MD5 authentication algorithm.

text Specifies clear text or simple password authentication.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 708

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

IP RIP AUTHENTICATION MODE

Usage: multiple

key

For multiple keys authentication, use the following steps to configure a route to

enable RIPv2 authentication using multiple keys at different times:

1) Define a key chain with a key chain name, using the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# key chain <key-chain-name>

2) Define a key on this key chain using the following command:

awplus(config-keychain)# key <keyid>

3) Define the password used by the key, using the following command:

awplus(config-keychain-key)# key-string <key-password>

4) Enable authentication on the desired interface and specify the key chain to

be used, using the following commands:

awplus(config-if)# ip rip authentication key-chain

<key-chain-name>

5) Specify the mode of authentication for the given interface (text or MD5),

using the following commands:

awplus(config-if)# ip rip authentication mode {md5|text}

Example 1 In the following example of a configuration for multiple keys authentication, a

password of “toyota” is set for key 1 in key chain “cars”. Authentication is enabled

on vlan2 and the authentication mode is set to MD5:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# key chain cars

awplus(config-keychain)# key 1

awplus(config-keychain-key)# key-string toyota

awplus(config-keychain-key)# accept-lifetime 10:00:00 Oct 08

2016 duration 43200

awplus(config-keychain-key)# send-lifetime 10:00:00 Oct 08 2016

duration 43200

awplus(config-keychain-key)# exit

awplus(config-keychain)# exit

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip rip authentication key-chain cars

awplus(config-if)# ip rip authentication mode md5

Example 2 The following example shows MD5 authentication configured on VLAN interface

vlan2, ensuring authentication of RIP packets received on this interface.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip rip authentication mode md5

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 709

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

IP RIP AUTHENTICATION MODE

Example 3 The following example specifies “mykey” as the authentication string with MD5

authentication, for the VLAN interface vlan2:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip rip authentication string mykey

awplus(config-if)# ip rip authentication mode md5

Commands

ip rip authentication string

ip rip authentication key-chain

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 710

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

IP RIP AUTHENTICATION STRING

ip rip authentication string

Overview Use this command to specify the authentication string or password used by a key.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the authentication string.

Syntax ip rip authentication string <auth-string>

no ip rip authentication string

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage The AlliedWare Plus™ implementation provides the choice of configuring

authentication for single key or multiple keys at different times. Use this command

to specify the password for a single key on an interface. Use the ip rip

authentication key-chain command for multiple keys authentication. For

information about configuring RIP, see the RIP Feature Overview and

Configuration Guide.

Use the following steps to configure a route to enable RIPv2 authentication using

a single key or password:

1) Define the authentication string or password used by the key for the desired

interface, using the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface <id>

2) Specify the mode of authentication for the given interface (text or MD5),

using the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config-if)# ip rip authentication string

<auth-string>

awplus(config)# interface <id>

awplus(config-if)# ip rip authentication mode {md5|text}

Example See the example below to specify mykey as the authentication string with MD5

authentication for the VLAN interface vlan2:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip rip authentication string mykey

awplus(config-if)# ip rip authentication mode md5

Parameter Description

<auth-string> The authentication string or password used by a key. It is an alpha-

numeric string and can include spaces.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 711

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

IP RIP AUTHENTICATION STRING

Example In the following example, the VLAN interface vlan2 is configured to have an

authentication string as guest. Any received RIP packet in that interface should

have the same string as password.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip rip authentication string guest

commands

ip rip authentication key-chain

ip rip authentication mode

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 712

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

IP RIP RECEIVE-PACKET

ip rip receive-packet

Overview Use this command to configure the interface to enable the reception of RIP

packets.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this feature.

Syntax ip rip receive-packet

no ip rip receive-packet

Default Receive-packet is enabled

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Example This example shows packet receiving being turned on for the VLAN interface

vlan3:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan3

awplus(config-if)# ip rip receive-packet

Commands

ip rip send-packet

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 713

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

IP RIP RECEIVE VERSION

ip rip receive version

Overview Use this command to specify the version of RIP packets accepted on an interface

and override the setting of the version command.

Use the no variant of this command to use the setting specified by the version (RIP)

command.

Syntax ip rip receive version {[1][2]}

no ip rip receive version

Default Version 2

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage This command applies to a specific VLAN interface and overrides any the version

specified by the version (RIP) command.

RIP can be run in version 1 or version 2 mode. Version 2 has more features than

version 1; in particular RIP version 2 supports authentication and classless routing.

Once the RIP version is set, RIP packets of that version will be received and sent on

all the RIP-enabled interfaces.

Example In the following example, the VLAN interface vlan3 is configured to receive both

RIP version 1 and 2 packets:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan3

awplus(config-if)# ip rip receive version 1 2

Commands

version (RIP)

Parameter Description

1Specifies acceptance of RIP version 1 packets on the interface.

2Specifies acceptance of RIP version 2 packets on the interface.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 714

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

IP RIP SEND-PACKET

ip rip send-packet

Overview Use this command to enable sending RIP packets through the current interface.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this feature.

Syntax ip rip send-packet

no ip rip send-packet

Default Send packet is enabled

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Example This example shows packet sending being turned on for the VLAN interface

vlan4:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan4

awplus(config-if)# ip rip send-packet

Commands

ip rip receive-packet

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 715

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

IP RIP SEND VERSION

ip rip send version

Overview Use this command in Interface Configuration mode to specify the version of RIP

packets sent on an interface and override the setting of the version (RIP)

command. This mechanism causes RIP version 2 interfaces to send multicast

packets instead of broadcasting packets.

Use the no variant of this command to use the setting specified by the version (RIP)

command.

Syntax ip rip send version {1|2|1 2|2 1}

no ip rip send version

Default RIP version 2 is enabled by default.

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage This command applies to a specific interface and overrides the version specified by

the version (RIP) command.

RIP can be run in version 1 or version 2 mode. Version 2 has more features than

version 1; in particular RIP version 2 supports authentication and classless routing.

Once the RIP version is set, RIP packets of that version will be received and sent on

all the RIP-enabled interfaces. Selecting version parameters 1 2 or 2 1 sends RIP

version 1 and 2 packets.

Use the ip rip send version 1-compatible command in an environment where you

cannot send multicast packets. For example, in environments where multicast is

not enabled and where hosts do not listen to multicast.

Examples In the following example, the VLAN interface vlan4 is configured to send both RIP

version 1 and 2 packets.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan4

awplus(config-if)# ip rip send version 1 2

Parameter Description

1Specifies the sending of RIP version 1 packets out of an interface.

2Specifies the sending of RIP version 2 packets out of an interface.

12 Specifies the sending of both RIP version 1 and RIP version 2

packets out of an interface.

21 Specifies the sending of both RIP version 2 and RIP version 1

packets out of an interface.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 716

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

IP RIP SEND VERSION

In the following example, the VLAN interface vlan4 is configured to send both RIP

version 2 and 1 packets.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan4

awplus(config-if)# ip rip send version 2 1

In the following example, the VLAN interface vlan4 is configured to send RIP

version 1 packets only.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan4

awplus(config-if)# ip rip send version 1

In the following example, the VLAN interface vlan4 is configured to send RIP

version 2 packets only.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan4

awplus(config-if)# ip rip send version 2

In the following example, the VLAN interface vlan3 is configured to use the RIP

version specified by the version (RIP) command.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan3

awplus(config-if)# no ip rip send version

Commands

ip rip send version 1-compatible

version (RIP)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 717

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

IP RIP SEND VERSION 1-COMPATIBLE

ip rip send version 1-compatible

Overview Use this command in Interface Configuration mode to send RIP version 1

compatible packets from a RIP version 2 interfaces to other RIP Interfaces. This

mechanism causes RIP version 2 interfaces to send broadcast packets instead of

multicasting packets, and is used in environments where multicast is not enabled

or where hosts do not listen to multicast.

Use the no variant of this command to use the setting specified by the version (RIP)

command, and disable the broadcast of RIP version 2 packets that are sent as

broadcast packets.

Syntax ip rip send version 1-compatible

no ip rip send version

Default RIP version 2 is enabled by default.

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage This command applies to a specific interface and overrides the version specified by

the version (RIP) command.

RIP can be run in version 1 compatible mode. Version 2 has more features than

version 1; in particular RIP version 2 supports authentication and classless routing.

Once the RIP version is set, RIP packets of that version will be received and sent on

all the RIP-enabled interfaces.

Use the ip rip send version command in an environment where you can send

multicast packets. For example, in environments where multicast is enabled and

where hosts listen to multicast.

Examples In the following example, the VLAN interface vlan2 is configured to send RIP

version 1- compatible packets.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip rip send version 1-compatible

In the following example, the VLAN interface vlan3 is configured to use the RIP

version specified by the version (RIP) command.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan3

awplus(config-if)# no ip rip send version

Parameter Description

1-compatible Specify this parameter to send RIP version 1 compatible packets

from a version 2 RIP interface to other RIP interfaces.

This mechanism causes version 2 RIP interfaces to broadcast

packets instead of multicasting packets.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 718

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

IP RIP SEND VERSION 1-COMPATIBLE

Commands

ip rip send version

version (RIP)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 719

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

IP RIP SPLIT-HORIZON

ip rip split-horizon

Overview Use this command to turn on the split-horizon mechanism on the interface.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this mechanism.

Syntax ip rip split-horizon [poisoned]

no ip rip split-horizon

Default Split horizon poisoned

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage Use this command to avoid including routes in updates sent to the same gateway

from which they were learned. Without the poisoned parameter, using this

command causes routes learned from a neighbor to be omitted from updates sent

to that neighbor. With the poisoned parameter, using this command causes such

routes to be included in updates, but sets their metrics to infinity. This advertises

that these routes are not reachable.

Example To turn on split horizon poisoned on vlan2, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip rip split-horizon poisoned

Parameter Description

poisoned Performs split-horizon with poison-reverse. See “Usage” below for

more information.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 720

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

KEY

key

Overview Use this command to manage, add and delete authentication keys in a key-chain.

Use the no variant of this command to delete the authentication key.

Syntax key <keyid>

no key <keyid>

Mode Keychain Configuration

Usage This command allows you to enter the keychain-key mode where a password can

be set for the key.

Example The following example configures a key number 1 and shows the change into a

keychain- key command mode prompt.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# key chain mychain

awplus(config-keychain)# key 1

awplus(config-keychain-key)#

Commands

key chain

key-string

accept-lifetime

send-lifetime

Parameter Description

<keyid> <0-2147483647> Key identifier number.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 721

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

KEY CHAIN

key chain

Overview Use this command to enter the key chain management mode and to configure a

key chain with a key chain name.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the key chain and all configured

keys.

Syntax key chain <key-chain-name>

no key chain <key-chain-name>

Mode Global Configuration

Usage This command allows you to enter the keychain mode from which you can specify

keys on this key chain.

Example The following example shows the creation of a key chain named mychain and the

change into keychain mode prompt.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# key chain mychain

awplus(config-keychain)#

Commands

key

key-string

accept-lifetime

send-lifetime

Parameter Description

<key-chain-name> Specify the name of the key chain to manage.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 722

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

KEY-STRING

key-string

Overview Use this command to define the password to be used by a key.

Use the no variant of this command to remove a password.

Syntax key-string <key-password>

no key-string

Mode Keychain-key Configuration

Usage Use this command to specify passwords for different keys.

Examples In the following example, the password for key1 in the key chain named

mychain is set to password prime:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# key chain mychain

awplus(config-keychain)# key 1

awplus(config-keychain-key)# key-string prime

In the following example, the password for key1 in the key chain named

mychain is removed:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# key chain mychain

awplus(config-keychain)# key 1

awplus(config-keychain-key)# no key-string

Commands

key

key chain

accept-lifetime

send-lifetime

Parameter Description

<key-password> A string of characters to be used as a password by the key.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 723

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

MAXIMUM-PREFIX

maximum-prefix

Overview Use this command to configure the maximum number of RIP routes stored in the

routing table.

Use the no variant of this command to disable all limiting of the number of RIP

routes stored in the routing table.

Syntax maximum-prefix <maxprefix> [<threshold>]

no maximum-prefix

Mode Router Configuration

Example To configure the maximum number of RIP routes to 150, use the following

command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# router rip

awplus(config-router)# maximum-prefix 150

Parameter Description

<maxprefix> <1-65535> The maximum number of RIP routes allowed.

<threshold> <1-100> Percentage of maximum routes to generate a warning. The

default threshold is 75%.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 724

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

NEIGHBOR (RIP)

neighbor (RIP)

Overview Use this command to specify a neighbor router. It is used for each router to which

you wish to send unicast RIP updates.

Use the no variant of this command to stop sending unicast updates to the specific

router.

Syntax neighbor <ip-address>

no neighbor <ip-address>

Default Disabled

Mode Router Configuration

Usage Use this command to exchange nonbroadcast routing information. It can be used

multiple times for additional neighbors.

The passive-interface (RIP) command disables sending routing updates on an

interface. Use the neighbor command in conjunction with the passive-interface

(RIP) to send routing updates to specific neighbors.

Example To specify the neighbor router to 1.1.1.1, use the following command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# router rip

awplus(config-router)# passive-interface vlan1

awplus(config-router)# neighbor 1.1.1.1

Commands

passive-interface (RIP)

Parameter Description

<ip-address> The IP address of a neighboring router with which the routing

information will be exchanged.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 725

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

NETWORK (RIP)

network (RIP)

Overview Use this command to activate the transmission of RIP routing information on the

defined network.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the specified network or VLAN as

one that runs RIP.

Syntax network {<network-address>[/<subnet-mask>]|<vlan-name>}

no network {<network-address>[/<subnet-mask>]|<vlan-name>}

Default Disabled

Mode RIP Router Configuration

Usage Use this command to specify networks, or VLANs, to which routing updates will be

sent and received. The connected routes corresponding to the specified network,

or VLANs, will be automatically advertised in RIP updates. RIP updates will be sent

and received within the specified network or VLAN.

Example Use the following commands to activate RIP routing updates on network

172.16.20.0/24:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# router rip

awplus(config-router)# network 172.16.20.0/24

Commands

show ip rip

show running-config

clear ip rip route

Parameter Description

<network-address>

[/<subnet-mask>]

Specifies the network address to run RIP. Entering a subnet

mask (or prefix length) for the network address is optional.

Where no mask is entered, the device will attempt to apply a

mask that is appropriate to the class (A, B, or C) of the

address entered, e.g. an IP address of 10.0.0.0 will have a

prefix length of 8 applied to it.

<vlan-name> Specify a VLAN name with up to 32 alphanumeric characters

to run RIP.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 726

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

OFFSET-LIST (RIP)

offset-list (RIP)

Overview Use this command to add an offset to the in and out metrics of routes learned

through RIP.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the offset list.

Syntax offset-list <access-list> {in|out} <offset> [<interface>]

no offset-list <access-list> {in|out} <offset> [<interface>]

Default The default offset value is the metric value of the interface over which the updates

are being exchanged.

Mode RIP Router Configuration

Usage Use this command to specify the offset value that is added to the routing metric.

When the networks match the access list the offset is applied to the metrics. No

change occurs if the offset value is zero.

Examples In this example the router examines the RIP updates being sent out from interface

vlan2 and adds 5 hops to the routes matching the ip addresses specified in the

access list 8.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# router rip

awplus(config-router)# offset-list 8 in 5 vlan2

Commands

access-list (extended numbered)

Parameter Description

<access-list>Specifies the access-list number or names to apply.

in Indicates the access list will be used for metrics of incoming

advertised routes.

out Indicates the access list will be used for metrics of outgoing

advertised routes.

<offset><0-16> Specifies that the offset is used for metrics of networks

matching the access list.

<interface>An alphanumeric string that specifies the interface to match.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 727

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

PASSIVE-INTERFACE (RIP)

passive-interface (RIP)

Overview Use this command to block RIP broadcasts on the interface.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this function.

Syntax passive-interface <interface>

no passive-interface <interface>

Default Disabled

Mode RIP Router Configuration

Example Use the following commands to block RIP broadcasts on vlan20:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# router rip

awplus(config-router)# passive-interface vlan20

Commands

show ip rip

Parameter Description

<interface> Specifies the interface name.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 728

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

RECV-BUFFER-SIZE (RIP)

recv-buffer-size (RIP)

Overview Use this command to run-time configure the RIP UDP (User Datagram Protocol)

receive-buffer size to improve UDP reliability by avoiding UDP receive buffer

overrun.

Use the no variant of this command to reset the configured RIP UDP receive-buffer

size to the system default (196608 bits).

Syntax recv-buffer-size <8192-2147483647>

no recv-buffer-size [<8192-2147483647>]

Default 196608 bits is the system default when reset using the no variant of this command.

Mode Router Configuration

Examples To run-time configure the RIP UDP, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# router rip

awplus(config-router)# recv-buffer-size 23456789

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# router rip

awplus(config-router)# no recv-buffer-size 23456789

Parameter Description

<8192-2147483647>Specify the RIP UDP (User Datagram Protocol) buffer size

value in bits.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 729

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

REDISTRIBUTE (RIP)

redistribute (RIP)

Overview Use this command to redistribute information from other routing protocols into

RIP.

Use the no variant of this command to disable the specified redistribution. The

parameters metric and routemap may be used on this command, but have no

effect.

Syntax redistribute {connected|static|ospf} [metric <0-16>] [routemap

<routemap>]

no redistribute {connected|static|ospf} [metric] [routemap]

Default By default, the RIP metric value is set to 1.

Mode RIP Router Configuration

Example To apply the metric value 15 to static routes being redistributed into RIP, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# router rip

awplus(config-router)# redistribute static metric 15

Commands

default-metric (RIP)

Parameter Description

routemap Optional. Specifies route-map that controls how routes are

redistributed.

<routemap>Optional. The name of the route map.

connected Redistribute from connected routes.

static Redistribute from static routes.

ospf Redistribute from Open Shortest Path First (OSPF).

metric <0-16>Optional. Sets the value of the metric that will be applied to

routes redistributed into RIP from other protocols. If a value is not

specified, and no value is specified using the default-metric (RIP)

command, the default is one.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 730

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

RESTART RIP GRACEFUL

restart rip graceful

Overview Use this command to force the RIP process to restart, and optionally set the

grace-period.

Syntax restart rip graceful [grace-period <1-65535>]

Mode Privileged Exec

Default The default RIP grace-period is 60 seconds.

Usage After this command is executed, the RIP process immediately shuts down. It

notifies the system that RIP has performed a graceful shutdown. Routes that have

been installed into the route table by RIP are preserved until the specified

grace-period expires.

When a restart rip graceful command is issued, the RIP configuration is reloaded

from the last saved configuration. Ensure you first enter the command copy

running-config startup-config.

Example To apply a restart rip graceful setting, grace-period to 100 seconds use the

following commands:

awplus# copy running-config startup-config

awplus# restart rip graceful grace-period 100

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 731

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

RIP RESTART GRACE-PERIOD

rip restart grace-period

Overview Use this command to change the grace period of RIP graceful restart.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this function.

Syntax rip restart grace-period <1-65535>

no rip restart grace-period <1-65535>

Mode Global Configuration

Default The default RIP grace-period is 60 seconds.

Usage Use this command to enable the Graceful Restart feature on the RIP process.

Entering this command configures a grace period for RIP.

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# rip restart grace-period 200

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 732

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

ROUTE (RIP)

route (RIP)

Overview Use this command to add a static RIP route.

Use the no variant of this command to remove a static RIP route.

Syntax route <ip-addr/prefix-length>

no route <ip-addr/prefix-length>

Default No static RIP route is added by default.

Mode RIP Router Configuration

Usage Use this command to add a static RIP route. After adding the RIP route, the route

can be checked in the RIP routing table.

Example To create a static RIP route to IP subnet 192.168.1.0/24, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# router rip

awplus(config-router)# route 192.168.1.0/24

Commands

show ip rip

clear ip rip route

Parameter Description

<ip-addr/prefix-length> The IPv4 address and prefix length.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 733

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

ROUTER RIP

router rip

Overview Use this global command to enter Router Configuration mode to enable the RIP

routing process.

Use the no variant of this command to disable the RIP routing process.

Syntax router rip

no router rip

Mode Global Configuration

Example This command is used to begin the RIP routing process:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# router rip

awplus(config-router)# version 1

awplus(config-router)# network 10.10.10.0/24

awplus(config-router)# network 10.10.11.0/24

awplus(config-router)# neighbor 10.10.10.10

Commands

network (RIP)

version (RIP)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 734

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

SEND-LIFETIME

send-lifetime

Overview Use this command to specify the time period during which the authentication key

on a key chain can be sent.

Syntax send-lifetime <start-date> {<end-date>|

duration <seconds>|infinite}

no send-lifetime

Mode Keychain-key Configuration

Example The following example shows the setting of send-lifetime for key 1 on the key

chain named “mychain”.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# key chain mychain

awplus(config-keychain)# key 1

awplus(config-keychain-key)# send-lifetime 03:03:01 Jan 3 2016

04:04:02 Dec 6 2016

Parameter Description

<start-date> Specifies the start time and date in the format: 

<hh:mm:ss> <day> <month> <year> or 

<hh:mm:ss> <month> <day> <year>, where:

<hh:mm:ss> The time of the day, in hours, minutes and

seconds

<day> <1-31> The day of the month

<month> The month of the year (the first three letters of

the month, for example, Jan)

<year> <1993-2035> The year

<end-date> Specifies the end time and date in the format: 

<hh:mm:ss> <day> <month> <year> or 

<hh:mm:ss> <month> <day> <year>, where:

<hh:mm:ss> The time of the day, in hours, minutes and

seconds

<day> <1-31> The day of the month

<month> The month of the year (the first three letters of

the month, for example, Jan)

<year> <1993-2035> The year

<seconds> <1-2147483646> Duration of the key in seconds.

infinite Never expires.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 735

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

SEND-LIFETIME

Commands

key

key-string

key chain

accept-lifetime

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 736

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

SHOW DEBUGGING RIP

show debugging rip

Overview Use this command to display the RIP debugging status for these debugging

options: nsm debugging, RIP event debugging, RIP packet debugging and RIP nsm

debugging.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show debugging rip

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Usage Use this command to display the debug status of RIP.

Example awplus# show debugging rip

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 737

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

SHOW IP PROTOCOLS RIP

show ip protocols rip

Overview Use this command to display RIP process parameters and statistics.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show ip protocols rip

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example awplus# show ip protocols rip

Output Figure 23-1: Example output from the show ip protocols rip command

Routing Protocol is "rip" 

Sending updates every 30 seconds with +/-50%, next due in 12 

seconds 

Timeout after 180 seconds, garbage collect after 120 seconds 

Outgoing update filter list for all interface is not set 

Incoming update filter list for all interface is not set 

Default redistribution metric is 1 

Redistributing: connected static 

Default version control: send version 2, receive version 2 

Interface Send Recv Key-chain 

vlan25 2 2 

Routing for Networks: 

10.10.0.0/24 

Routing Information Sources: 

Gateway BadPackets BadRoutes Distance Last Update 

Distance: (default is 120

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 738

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

SHOW IP RIP

show ip rip

Overview Use this command to show RIP routes.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show ip rip

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example awplus# show ip rip

Output Figure 23-2: Example output from the show ip rip command

Commands

route (RIP)

network (RIP)

clear ip rip route

awplus#show ip rip

Codes: R - RIP, Rc - RIP connected, Rs - RIP static

C - Connected, S - Static, O - OSPFNetwork Next Hop

Metric From If Time

C 10.0.1.0/24 1 vlan20

S 10.10.10.0/24 1 vlan20

C 10.10.11.0/24 1 vlan20

S 192.168.101.0/24 1 vlan20

R 192.192.192.0/24 1 --

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 739

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

SHOW IP RIP DATABASE

show ip rip database

Overview Use this command to display information about the RIP database.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show ip rip database [full]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example awplus# show ip rip database

awplus# show ip rip database full

Commands

show ip rip

Parameter Description

full Specify the full RIP database including sub-optimal RIP routes.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 740

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

SHOW IP RIP INTERFACE

show ip rip interface

Overview Use this command to display information about the RIP interfaces. You can specify

an interface name to display information about a specific interface.

Syntax show ip rip interface [<interface>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example awplus# show ip rip interface

Parameter Description

<interface>The interface to display information about. For instance: vlan2.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 741

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

TIMERS (RIP)

timers (RIP)

Overview Use this command to adjust routing network timers.

Use the no variant of this command to restore the defaults.

Syntax timers basic <update> <timeout> <garbage>

no timers basic

Default Enabled

Mode RIP Router Configuration

Usage This command adjusts the RIP timing parameters.

The update timer is the time between sending out updates, that contain the

complete routing table, to every neighboring router.

If an update for a given route has not been seen for the time specified by the

timeout parameter, that route is no longer valid. However, it is retained in the

routing table for a short time, with metric 16, so that neighbors are notified that the

route has been dropped.

When the time specified by the garbage parameter expires the metric 16 route is

finally removed from the routing table. Until the garbage time expires, the route is

included in all updates sent by the router.

All the routers in the network must have the same timers to ensure the smooth

operation of RIP throughout the network.

Examples To set the update timer to 30, the routing information timeout timer to 180, and

the routing garbage collection timer to 120, use the following command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# router rip

awplus(config-router)# timers basic 30 180 120

Parameter Description

Specifies the period at which RIP route update packets are

transmitted. The default is 30 seconds.

Specifies the routing information timeout timer in seconds. The

default is 180 seconds. After this interval has elapsed and no updates

for a route are received, the route is declared invalid.

Specifies the routing garbage collection timer in seconds. The default

is 120 seconds.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 742

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

UNDEBUG RIP

undebug rip

Overview Use this command to disable the options set for debugging information of RIP

events, packets and communication between RIP and NSM.

This command has the same effect as the no debug rip command.

Syntax undebug rip {all|events|nsm|<packet>}

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To disable the options set for debugging RIP information events, use the following

command:

awplus# undebug rip packet

Commands

debug rip

Parameter Description

all Disables all RIP debugging.

events Disables the logging of RIP events.

nsm Disables the logging of RIP and NSM communication.

<packet> packet [recv|send] [detail]

Disables the debugging of RIP packets.

recv Disables the logging of received packet information.

send Disables the logging of sent packet information.

detail Disables the logging of sent or received RIP packets.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 743

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

RIP COMMANDS

VERSION (RIP)

version (RIP)

Overview Use this command to specify a RIP version used globally by the router.

Use the no variant of this command to restore the default version.

Syntax version {1|2}

no version

Default Version 2

Mode RIP Router Configuration

Usage RIP can be run in version 1 or version 2 mode. Version 2 has more features than

version 1; in particular RIP version 2 supports authentication and classless routing.

Once the RIP version is set, RIP packets of that version will be received and sent on

all the RIP-enabled interfaces.

Setting the version command has no impact on receiving updates, only on

sending them. The ip rip send version command overrides the value set by the

version (RIP) command on an interface-specific basis. The ip rip receive version

command allows you to configure a specific interface to accept only packets of the

specified RIP version. The ip rip receive version command and the ip rip send

version command override the value set by this command.

Examples To specify a RIP version, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# router rip

awplus(config-router)# version 1

Commands

ip rip receive version

ip rip send version

show running-config

Parameter Description

1|2 Specifies the version of RIP processing.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 744

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Part 4: Multicast Applications

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 745

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP and IGMP

Snooping

Commands

Introduction

Overview Devices running AlliedWare Plus use IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol)

and MLD (Multicast Listener Discovery) to track which multicast groups their clients

belong to. This enables them to send the correct multimedia streams to the correct

destinations. IGMP is used for IPv4 multicasting, and MLD is used for IPv6

multicasting.

This chapter describes the commands to configure IGMP Querier behaviour and

selection and IGMP Snooping.

Command List •“clear ip igmp” on page 747

•“clear ip igmp group” on page 748

•“clear ip igmp interface” on page 749

•“debug igmp” on page 750

•“ip igmp” on page 751

•“ip igmp access-group” on page 752

•“ip igmp flood specific-query” on page 753

•“ip igmp immediate-leave” on page 754

•“ip igmp last-member-query-count” on page 755

•“ip igmp last-member-query-interval” on page 756

•“ip igmp limit” on page 757

•“ip igmp maximum-groups” on page 758

•“ip igmp querier-timeout” on page 760

•“ip igmp query-holdtime” on page 761

•“ip igmp query-interval” on page 763

•“ip igmp query-max-response-time” on page 765

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 746

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

•“ip igmp ra-option” on page 767

•“ip igmp robustness-variable” on page 768

•“ip igmp snooping” on page 769

•“ip igmp snooping fast-leave” on page 770

•“ip igmp snooping mrouter” on page 771

•“ip igmp snooping querier” on page 772

•“ip igmp snooping report-suppression” on page 773

•“ip igmp snooping routermode” on page 774

•“ip igmp snooping tcn query solicit” on page 776

•“ip igmp source-address-check” on page 778

•“ip igmp static-group” on page 779

•“ip igmp startup-query-count” on page 781

•“ip igmp startup-query-interval” on page 782

•“ip igmp trusted” on page 783

•“ip igmp version” on page 784

•“show debugging igmp” on page 785

•“show ip igmp groups” on page 786

•“show ip igmp interface” on page 788

•“show ip igmp snooping mrouter” on page 790

•“show ip igmp snooping routermode” on page 791

•“show ip igmp snooping statistics” on page 792

•“undebug igmp” on page 794

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 747

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

CLEAR IP IGMP

clear ip igmp

Overview Use this command to clear all IGMP group membership records on all interfaces.

Syntax clear ip igmp

Mode Privileged Exec

Example awplus# clear ip igmp

Commands

clear ip igmp group

clear ip igmp interface

show ip igmp interface

show running-config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 748

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

CLEAR IP IGMP GROUP

clear ip igmp group

Overview Use this command to clear IGMP group membership records for a specific group

on either all interfaces, a single interface, or for a range of interfaces.

Syntax clear ip igmp group *

clear ip igmp group <ip-address> <interface>

Mode Privileged Exec

Usage This command applies to groups learned by IGMP or IGMP Snooping.

In addition to the group, an interface can be specified. Specifying this will mean

that only entries with the group learned on the interface will be deleted.

Examples To delete all group records, use the command:

awplus# clear ip igmp group *

To delete records for 224.1.1.1 on vlan1, use the command:

awplus# clear ip igmp group 224.1.1.1 vlan1

Commands

clear ip igmp

clear ip igmp interface

show ip igmp interface

show running-config

Parameter Description

*Clears all groups on all interfaces. This has the same effect as the

clear ip igmp command.

<ip-address> Specifies the group whose membership records will be cleared

from all interfaces, entered in the form A.B.C.D.

<interface>Specifies the name of the interface; all groups learned on this

interface are deleted.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 749

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

CLEAR IP IGMP INTERFACE

clear ip igmp interface

Overview Use this command to clear IGMP group membership records on a particular

interface.

Syntax clear ip igmp interface <interface>

Mode Privileged Exec

Usage This command applies to interfaces configured for IGMP or IGMP Snooping.

Example To delete records for vlan1, use the command:

awplus# clear ip igmp interface vlan1

Commands

clear ip igmp

clear ip igmp group

show ip igmp interface

show running-config

Parameter Description

<interface>Specifies the name of the interface. All groups learned on this

interface are deleted.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 750

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

DEBUG IGMP

debug igmp

Overview Use this command to enable debugging of either all IGMP or a specific component

of IGMP.

Use the no variant of this command to disable all IGMP debugging, or debugging

of a specific component of IGMP.

Syntax debug igmp {all|decode|encode|events|fsm|tib}

no debug igmp {all|decode|encode|events|fsm|tib}

Modes Privileged Exec and Global Configuration

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# debug igmp all

Commands

show debugging igmp

undebug igmp

Parameter Description

all Enable or disable all debug options for IGMP

decode Debug of IGMP packets that have been received

encode Debug of IGMP packets that have been sent

events Debug IGMP events

fsm Debug IGMP Finite State Machine (FSM)

tib Debug IGMP Tree Information Base (TIB)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 751

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP

ip igmp

Overview Use this command to enable IGMP on an interface. The command configures the

device as an IGMP querier.

Use the no variant of this command to return all IGMP related configuration to the

default on this interface.

Syntax ip igmp

no ip igmp

Default Disabled

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage An IP address must be assigned to the interface first, before this command will

work.

Example To specify an interface as an IGMP querier, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp

Validation

Commands

show ip igmp interface

show running-config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 752

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP ACCESS-GROUP

ip igmp access-group

Overview This command adds an access control list to a VLAN interface configured for IGMP

or IGMP Snooping. The access control list is used to control and filter the multicast

groups learned on the VLAN interface.

The no variant of this command disables the access control filtering on the

interface.

Syntax ip igmp access-group {<access-list-number>|<access-list-name>}

no ip igmp access-group

Default By default there are no access lists configured on any interface.

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage This command applies to VLAN interfaces configured for IGMP or IGMP Snooping.

Example In the following example, hosts serviced by VLAN interface vlan2 can only join the

group 225.2.2.2:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list 1 permit 225.2.2.2 0.0.0.0

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp access-group 1

Parameter Description

<access-list-number>Standard IP access-list number, in the range <1-99>.

<access-list-name>Standard IP access-list name.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 753

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP FLOOD SPECIFIC-QUERY

ip igmp flood specific-query

Overview Use this command if you want IGMP to flood specific queries to all VLAN member

ports, instead of only sending the queries to multicast group member ports.

Use the no variant of this command if you want IGMP to only send the queries to

multicast group member ports.

Syntax ip igmp flood specific-query

no ip igmp flood specific-query

Default By default, specific queries are flooded to all VLAN member ports.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage In an L2 switched network running IGMP, it is considered more robust to flood all

specific queries. In most cases, the benefit of flooding specific queries to all VLAN

member ports outweighs the disadvantages.

However, sometimes this is not the case. For example, if hosts with very low CPU

capability receive specific queries for multicast groups they are not members of,

their performance may degrade unacceptably. In this situation, it is desirable for

IGMP to send specific queries to known member ports only. This minimises the

performance degradation of such hosts. In those circumstances, use this

command to turn off flooding of specific queries.

Example To cause IGMP to flood specific queries only to multicast group member ports, use

the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no ip igmp flood specific-query

Commands

show ip igmp interface

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 754

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP IMMEDIATE-LEAVE

ip igmp immediate-leave

Overview In IGMP version 2, use this command to minimize the leave latency of IGMP

memberships for specified multicast groups. The specified access list number or

name defines the multicast groups in which the immediate leave feature is

enabled.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this feature.

Syntax ip igmp immediate-leave group-list

{<access-list-number>|<access-list-number-expanded>|

<access-list-name>}

no ip igmp immediate-leave

Default Disabled by default.

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage This command applies to VLAN interfaces configured for IGMP or IGMP Snooping.

Example The following example shows how to enable the immediate-leave feature on the

VLAN interface vlan2 for a specific range of multicast groups:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp immediate-leave group-list 34

awplus(config-if)# exit

awplus(config)# access-list 34 permit 225.192.20.0 0.0.0.255

Commands

ip igmp last-member-query-interval

Parameter Description

<access-list-number>Access-list number, in the range <1-99>.

<access-list-number-expanded>Access-list number (expanded range), in

the range <1300-1999>.

<access-list-name>Standard IP access-list name.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 755

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP LAST-MEMBER-QUERY-COUNT

ip igmp last-member-query-count

Overview Use this command to set the last-member query-count value for an interface.

Use the no variant of this command to return to the default on an interface.

Syntax ip igmp last-member-query-count <2-7>

no ip igmp last-member-query-count

Default The default last member query count value is 2.

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage This command applies to VLAN interfaces configured for IGMP or IGMP Snooping.

Example To set the last-member query-count to 3 on vlan2, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp last-member-query-count 3

Commands

ip igmp last-member-query-interval

ip igmp startup-query-count

show ip igmp interface

show running-config

Parameter Description

<2-7>Last member query count value.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 756

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP LAST-MEMBER-QUERY-INTERVAL

ip igmp last-member-query-interval

Overview Use this command to configure the frequency at which the router sends IGMP

group specific host query messages.

Use the no variant of this command to set this frequency to the default.

Syntax ip igmp last-member-query-interval <interval>

no ip igmp last-member-query-interval

Default 1000 milliseconds

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage This command applies to VLAN interfaces configured for IGMP or IGMP Snooping.

Example To change the IGMP group-specific host query message interval to 2 seconds

(2000 milliseconds) on vlan2, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp last-member-query-interval 2000

Commands

ip igmp last-member-query-count

show ip igmp interface

show running-config

Parameter Description

<interval>The frequency in milliseconds at which IGMP group-specific host

query messages are sent, in the range 1000-25500.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 757

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP LIMIT

ip igmp limit

Overview Use this command to configure the limit on the maximum number of group

membership entries for the device as a whole or for the specified interface (if in

interface mode). Once the specified number of group memberships is reached, all

further membership reports will be ignored.

Optionally, you can configure an access-list to stop certain addresses from being

subject to the limit.

Use the no variant of this command to unset the limit and any specified exception

access-list.

Syntax ip igmp limit <limit-value> [except

{<access-list-number>|<access-list-number-extended>|

<access-list-name>}]

no ip igmp limit

Default The default limit, which is reset by the no variant of this command, is 512.

Mode Global Configuration and Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage This command applies to VLAN interfaces configured for IGMP or IGMP Snooping.

Example To configure an IGMP limit of 100 group membership entries on vlan2, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp limit 100

To configure an IGMP limit of 100 group membership entries across all interfaces

on which IGMP is enabled, and exclude group 224.1.1.1 from this limitation, use

the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list 1 permit 224.1.1.1 0.0.0.0

awplus(config)# ip igmp limit 100 except 1

Parameter Description

<limit-value> Maximum number of group membership

entries, from 2 to 512.

<access-list-number>Access-list number, in the range 1 to 99.

<access-list-number-extended>Access-list number (expanded range), in

the range 1300 to 1999.

<access-list-name>IP access-list name.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 758

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP MAXIMUM-GROUPS

ip igmp maximum-groups

Overview Use this command to set a limit, per switch port, on the number of IGMP groups

clients can join. This stops a single client from using all the switch’s available

group-entry resources, and ensures that clients on all ports have a chance to join

IGMP groups.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the limit.

Syntax ip igmp maximum-groups <0-65535>

no ip igmp maximum-groups

Default The default is 0, which means no limit

Mode Interface mode for a switch port

Usage We recommend using this command with IGMP snooping fast leave on the

relevant VLANs. To enable fast leave, use the command:

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp snooping fast-leave

The device keeps count of the number of groups learned by each port. This counter

is incremented when group joins are received via IGMP reports. It is decremented

when:

• Group memberships time out

• Group leaves are received via leave messages or reports

Also, the port's group counter is cleared when:

• The port goes down

• You run the command clear ip igmp group *

• The port is removed from a VLAN

You can see the current value of the group counter by using either of the

commands:

awplus# show ip igmp snooping statistics interface <port-list>

awplus# show ip igmp interface <port>

Parameter Description

<0-65535> The maximum number of IGMP groups clients can join on this

switch port. 0 means no limit.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 759

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP MAXIMUM-GROUPS

Example To limit clients to 10 groups on port 1.0.1, which is in vlan1, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp maximum-groups 10

awplus(config-if)# exit

awplus(config)# interface vlan1

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp snooping fast-leave

Commands

clear ip igmp group

ip igmp snooping fast-leave

show ip igmp interface

show ip igmp snooping statistics

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 760

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP QUERIER-TIMEOUT

ip igmp querier-timeout

Overview Use this command to configure the timeout period before the device takes over as

the querier for the interface after the previous querier has stopped querying.

Use the no variant of this command to restore the default.

Syntax ip igmp querier-timeout <timeout>

no ip igmp querier-timeout

Default The default timeout interval is 255 seconds.

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage This command applies to VLAN interfaces configured for IGMP.

The timeout value should not be less than the current active querier’s general

query interval.

Example To configure the device to wait 130 seconds from the time it received the last query

before it takes over as the querier for vlan2, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp querier-timeout 130

Commands

ip igmp query-interval

show ip igmp interface

show running-config

Parameter Description

<timeout>IGMP querier timeout interval value in seconds, in the range 1-

65535.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 761

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP QUERY-HOLDTIME

ip igmp query-holdtime

Overview This command sets the time that an IGMP Querier waits after receiving a query

solicitation before it sends an IGMP Query. IGMP General Query messages will not

be sent during the hold time interval.

Use the no variant of this command to return to the default query hold time

period.

Syntax ip igmp query-holdtime <interval>

no ip igmp query-holdtime

Default By default the delay before sending IGMP General Query messages is 500

milliseconds.

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage Use this command to configure a value for the IGMP query hold time in the current

network. IGMP Queries can be generated after receiving Query Solicitation (QS)

packets and there is a possibility of a DoS (Denial of Service) attack if a stream of

Query Solicitation (QS) packets are sent to the IGMP Querier, eliciting a rapid

stream of IGMP Queries. This command applies to interfaces on which the device

is acting as an IGMP Querier.

Use the ip igmp query-interval command when a delay for IGMP general query

messages is required and IGMP general query messages are required. The ip igmp

query-holdtime command stops IGMP query messages during the configured

holdtime interval, so the rate of IGMP Queries that can be sent out of an interface

can be restricted.

See the IGMP Feature Overview and Configuration Guide for introductory

information about the Query Solicitation feature.

Examples To set the IGMP query holdtime to 900 ms for vlan20, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan20

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp query-holdtime 900

To reset the IGMP query holdtime to the default (500 ms) for vlan10, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan10

awplus(config-if)# no ip igmp query-holdtime

Parameter Description

<interval>Query interval value in milliseconds, in the range <100-5000>.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 762

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP QUERY-HOLDTIME

Commands

ip igmp query-interval

ip igmp snooping tcn query solicit

show ip igmp interface

show running-config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 763

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP QUERY-INTERVAL

ip igmp query-interval

Overview Use this command to configure the period for sending IGMP General Query

messages.

The IGMP query interval specifies the time between IGMP General Query messages

being sent.

Use the no variant of this command to return to the default query interval period.

NOTE: The IGMP query interval must be greater than IGMP query maximum response

time.

Syntax ip igmp query-interval <interval>

no ip igmp query-interval

Default The default IGMP query interval is 125 seconds.

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage This command applies to interfaces configured for IGMP. Note that the IGMP query

interval is automatically set to a greater value than the IGMP query max response

time.

For example, if you set the IGMP query max response time to 2 seconds using the

ip igmp query-max-response-time command, and the IGMP query interval is

currently less than 3 seconds, then the IGMP query interval period will be

automatically reconfigured to be 3 seconds, so it is greater than the IGMP query

maximum response time.

Use the ip igmp query-interval command when a non-default interval for IGMP

General Query messages is required.

The ip igmp query-holdtime command can occasionally delay the sending of IGMP

Queries.

Examples To set the period between IGMP host-query messages to 3 minutes (180 seconds)

for vlan20, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan20

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp query-interval 180

Parameter Description

<interval>Query interval value in seconds, in the range <2-18000>.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 764

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP QUERY-INTERVAL

To reset the period between sending IGMP host-query messages to the default

(125 seconds) for vlan10, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan10

awplus(config-if)# no ip igmp query-interval

Commands

ip igmp query-holdtime

ip igmp query-max-response-time

ip igmp startup-query-interval

show ip igmp interface

show running-config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 765

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP QUERY-MAX-RESPONSE-TIME

ip igmp query-max-response-time

Overview Use this command to configure the maximum response time advertised in IGMP

Queries.

Use the no variant of this command to restore the default.

NOTE: The IGMP query maximum response time must be less than the IGMP query

interval.

Syntax ip igmp query-max-response-time <response-time>

no ip igmp query-max-response-time

Default The default IGMP query maximum response time is 10 seconds.

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage This command applies to interfaces configured for IGMP.

Note that the IGMP query interval is automatically set to a greater value than the

IGMP query maximum response time.

For example, if you set the IGMP query interval to 3 seconds using the ip igmp

query-interval command, and the current IGMP query interval is less than 3

seconds, then the IGMP query maximum response time will be automatically

reconfigured to be 2 seconds, so it is less than the IGMP query interval time.

To get the network to converge faster, use the ip igmp

query-max-response-time command and set a low response time value, such as

one or two seconds, so that the clients will respond immediately with a report as a

response to the IGMP Queries.

Examples To set a maximum response time of 8 seconds for vlan20, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan20

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp query-max-response-time 8

To reset the default maximum response time to the default (10 seconds) for vlan10,

use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan10

awplus(config-if)# no ip igmp query-max-response-time

Parameter Description

<response-time>Response time value in seconds, in the range 1-3180.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 766

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP QUERY-MAX-RESPONSE-TIME

Commands

ip igmp query-interval

show ip igmp interface

show running-config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 767

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP RA-OPTION

ip igmp ra-option

Overview Use this command to enable strict Router Alert (RA) option validation. With strict

RA option enabled, IGMP packets without RA options are ignored.

Use the no variant of this command to disable strict RA option validation.

Syntax ip igmp ra-option

no ip igmp ra-option

Default The default state of RA validation is unset.

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage This command applies to interfaces configured for IGMP and IGMP Snooping.

Examples To enable strict Router Alert (RA) option validation on vlan20, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan20

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp ra-option

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 768

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP ROBUSTNESS-VARIABLE

ip igmp robustness-variable

Overview Use this command to change the robustness variable value on an interface.

Use the no variant of this command to return to the default on an interface.

Syntax ip igmp robustness-variable <1-7>

no ip igmp robustness-variable

Default The default robustness variable value is 2.

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage This command applies to interfaces configured for IGMP and IGMP Snooping.

Examples To set the robustness variable to 3 on vlan20, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan20

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp robustness-variable 3

Commands

show ip igmp interface

show running-config

Parameter Description

<1-7>The robustness variable value.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 769

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP SNOOPING

ip igmp snooping

Overview Use this command to enable IGMP Snooping. When this command is used in the

Global Configuration mode, IGMP Snooping is enabled at the device level. When

this command is used in Interface Configuration mode, IGMP Snooping is enabled

for the specified VLANs.

Use the no variant of this command to either globally disable IGMP Snooping, or

disable IGMP Snooping on a specified interface.

NOTE: IGMP snooping cannot be disabled on an interface if IGMP snooping has

already been disabled globally. IGMP snooping can be disabled on both an interface

and globally if disabled on the interface first and then disabled globally.

Syntax ip igmp snooping

no ip igmp snooping

Default By default, IGMP Snooping is enabled both globally and on all VLANs.

Mode Global Configuration and Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage For IGMP snooping to operate on particular VLAN interfaces, it must be enabled

both globally by using this command in Global Configuration mode, and on

individual VLAN interfaces by using this command in Interface Configuration

mode (both are enabled by default.)

Both IGMP snooping and MLD snooping must be enabled globally on the device

for IGMP snooping to operate. MLD snooping is also enabled by default. To enable

it if it has been disabled, use the ipv6 mld snooping command in Global

Configuration mode.

Examples To enable IGMP Snooping on vlan2, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ip igmp snooping

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp snooping

Commands

ipv6 mld snooping

show ip igmp interface

show running-config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 770

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP SNOOPING FAST-LEAVE

ip igmp snooping fast-leave

Overview Use this command to enable IGMP Snooping fast-leave processing. Fast-leave

processing is analogous to immediate-leave processing. The IGMP

group-membership entry is removed as soon as an IGMP leave group message is

received, without sending out a group-specific query.

Use the no variant of this command to disable fast-leave processing.

Syntax ip igmp snooping fast-leave

no ip igmp snooping fast-leave

Default IGMP Snooping fast-leave processing is disabled.

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage This IGMP Snooping command can only be configured on VLAN interfaces.

Example To enable fast-leave processing on vlan2, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp snooping fast-leave

Commands

show ip igmp interface

show running-config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 771

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP SNOOPING MROUTER

ip igmp snooping mrouter

Overview Use this command to statically configure the specified port as a multicast router

port for IGMP Snooping for an interface. This command applies to interfaces

configured for IGMP Snooping.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the static configuration of the port

as a multicast router port.

Syntax ip igmp snooping mrouter interface <port>

no ip igmp snooping mrouter interface <port>

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Example To configure port1.0.2 statically as a multicast router interface for vlan2, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp snooping mrouter interface port1.0.2

Commands

show ip igmp snooping mrouter

Parameter Description

<port>The port may be a device port (e.g. port1.0.4), a static channel

group (e.g. sa3), or a dynamic (LACP) channel group (e.g. po4).

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 772

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP SNOOPING QUERIER

ip igmp snooping querier

Overview Use this command to enable IGMP querier operation when no multicast routing

protocol is configured. When enabled, the IGMP Snooping querier sends out

periodic IGMP queries for all interfaces. This command applies to interfaces

configured for IGMP Snooping.

Use the no variant of this command to disable IGMP querier configuration.

Syntax ip igmp snooping querier

no ip igmp snooping querier

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage The IGMP Snooping querier uses the 0.0.0.0 Source IP address because it only

masquerades as a proxy IGMP querier for faster network convergence.

It does not start, or automatically cease, the IGMP Querier operation if it detects

query message(s) from a multicast router.

If an IP address is assigned to a VLAN, which has IGMP querier enabled on it, then

the IGMP Snooping querier uses the VLAN’s IP address as the Source IP Address in

IGMP queries.

The IGMP Snooping Querier will not stop sending IGMP Queries if there is another

IGMP Snooping Querier in the network with a lower Source IP Address.

NOTE: Do not enable the IGMP Snooping Querier feature on a Layer 2 device when

there is an operational IGMP Querier in the network.

Example To configure vlan2 as a Snooping querier, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp snooping querier

Commands

show ip igmp interface

show running-config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 773

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP SNOOPING REPORT-SUPPRESSION

ip igmp snooping report-suppression

Overview Use this command to enable report suppression for IGMP versions 1 and 2. This

command applies to interfaces configured for IGMP Snooping.

Report suppression stops reports being sent to an upstream multicast router port

when there are already downstream ports for this group on this interface.

Use the no variant of this command to disable report suppression.

Syntax ip igmp snooping report-suppression

no ip igmp snooping report-suppression

Default Report suppression does not apply to IGMPv3, and is turned on by default for

IGMPv1 and IGMPv2 reports.

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Example To enable report suppression for IGMPv2 reports for vlan2, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp version 2

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp snooping report-suppression

Commands

show ip igmp interface

show running-config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 774

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP SNOOPING ROUTERMODE

ip igmp snooping routermode

Overview Use this command to set the destination IP addresses as router multicast

addresses.

Use the no variant of this command to set it to the default. You can also remove a

specified IP address from a custom list of multicast addresses.

Syntax ip igmp snooping routermode

{all|default|ip|multicastrouter|address <ip-address>}

no ip igmp snooping routermode [address <ip-address>]

Default The default routermode is default (not all) and shows the following reserved

multicast addresses:

Mode Global Configuration

Parameter Description

all All reserved multicast addresses (224.0.0.x).

Packets from all possible addresses in range 224.0.0.x are

treated as coming from routers.

default Default set of reserved multicast addresses.

Packets from 224.0.0.1, 224.0.0.2, 224.0.0.4, 224.0.0.5,

224.0.0.6, 224.0.0.9, 224.0.0.13, 224.0.0.15 and 224.0.0.24

are treated as coming from routers.

ip Custom reserved multicast addresses.

Packets from custom IP address in the 224.0.0.x range are

treated as coming from routers.

multicastrouter Packets from DVMRP (224.0.0.4) and PIM (224.0.0.13)

multicast addresses are treated as coming from routers.

address

<ip-address>

Packets from the specified multicast address are treated as

coming from routers. The address must be in the 224.0.0.x

range.

Router mode.............Def



Reserved multicast address

224.0.0.1

224.0.0.2

224.0.0.4

224.0.0.5

224.0.0.6

224.0.0.9

224.0.0.13

224.0.0.15

224.0.0.24

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 775

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP SNOOPING ROUTERMODE

Examples To set ip igmp snooping routermode for all default reserved addresses enter:

awplus(config)# ip igmp snooping routermode default

To remove the multicast address 224.0.0.5 from the custom list of multicast

addresses enter:

awplus(config)# no ip igmp snooping routermode address

224.0.0.5

commands

ip igmp trusted

show ip igmp snooping routermode

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 776

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP SNOOPING TCN QUERY SOLICIT

ip igmp snooping tcn query solicit

Overview Use this command to enable IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol)

Snooping TCN (Topology Change Notification) Query Solicitation feature. When

this command is used in the Global Configuration mode, Query Solicitation is

enabled.

Use the no variant of this command to disable IGMP Snooping TCN Query

Solicitation. When the no variant of this command is used in Interface

Configuration mode, this overrides the Global Configuration mode setting and

Query Solicitation is disabled.

Syntax ip igmp snooping tcn query solicit

no ip igmp snooping tcn query solicit

Default IGMP Snooping TCN Query Solicitation is disabled by default on the device, unless

the device is the Master Node in an EPSR ring, or is the Root Bridge in a Spanning

Tree.

When the device is the Master Node in an EPSR ring, or the device is the Root

Bridge in a Spanning Tree, then IGMP Snooping TCN Query Solicitation is enabled

by default and cannot be disabled using the Global Configuration mode

command. However, Query Solicitation can be disabled for specified interfaces

using the no variant of this command from the Interface Configuration mode.

Mode Global Configuration, and Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage Once enabled, if the device is not an IGMP Querier, on detecting a topology

change, the device generates IGMP Query Solicit messages that are sent to all the

ports of the vlan configured for IGMP Snooping on the device.

On a device that is not the Master Node in an EPSR ring or the Root Bridge in a

Spanning Tree, Query Solicitation can be disabled using the no variant of this

command after being enabled.

If the device that detects a topology change is an IGMP Querier then the device will

generate an IGMP Query message.

Note that the no variant of this command when issued in Global Configuration

mode has no effect on a device that is the Master Node in an EPSR ring or on a

device that is a Root Bridge in a Spanning Tree. Query Solicitation is not disabled

for the device these instances. However, Query Solicitation can be disabled on a

per-vlan basis from the Interface Configuration mode.

See the following state table that shows when Query Solicit messages are sent in

these instances:

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 777

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP SNOOPING TCN QUERY SOLICIT

See the IGMP Feature Overview and Configuration Guide for introductory

information about the Query Solicitation feature.

Examples To enable Query Solicitation on a device, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ip igmp snooping tcn query solicit

To disable Query Solicitation on a device, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no ip igmp snooping tcn query solicit

To enable Query Solicitation for vlan2, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp snooping tcn query solicit

To disable Query Solicitation for vlan2, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# no ip igmp snooping tcn query solicit

Commands

ip igmp query-holdtime

show ip igmp interface

show running-config

Command

issued from

Global

Configuration

Command issued

from Interface

Configuration

Device is STP Root

Bridge or the

EPSR Master Node

IGMP Query Solicit

message sent on VLAN

No Yes Yes Yes

Yes No Yes No

Yes Yes Yes Yes

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 778

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP SOURCE-ADDRESS-CHECK

ip igmp source-address-check

Overview This command enables the checking of the Source Address for an IGMP Report,

rejecting any IGMP Reports originating on devices outside of the local subnet.

Use the no variant of this command to disable the checking of the Source Address

for an IGMP Report, which allows IGMP Reports from devices outside of the local

subnet.

Syntax ip igmp source-address-check

no ip igmp source-address-check

Default Source address checking for IGMP Reports is enabled by default.

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage This is a security feature, and should be enabled unless IGMP Reports from outside

the local subnet are expected, for example, if Multicast VLAN Registration is active

in the network.

The no variant of this command is required to disable the IGMP Report source

address checking feature in networks that use Multicast VLAN Registration to allow

IGMP Reports from devices outside of the local subnet.

Examples To deny IGMP Reports from outside the current subnet for vlan20, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan20

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp source-address-check

To allow IGMP Reports from outside the current subnet for vlan10, use the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan10

awplus(config-if)# no ip igmp source-address-check

Validation

Commands

show ip igmp interface

show running-config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 779

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP STATIC-GROUP

ip igmp static-group

Overview Use this command to statically configure multicast group membership entries on

a VLAN interface, or to statically forward a multicast channel out a particular port

or port range.

To statically add only a group membership, do not specify any parameters.

To statically add a (*,g) entry to forward a channel out of a port, specify only the

multicast group address and the switch port range.

To statically add an (s,g) entry to forward a channel out of a port, specify the

multicast group address, the source IP address, and the switch port range.

Use the no variant of this command to delete static group membership entries.

Syntax ip igmp static-group <ip-address> [source {<ip-source-addr>}]

[interface <port>]

no ip igmp static-group <ip-address> [source

{<ip-source-addr>}] [interface <port>]

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage This command applies to IGMP operation, or to IGMP Snooping on a VLAN

interface.

Parameter Description

<ip-address> Standard IP Multicast group address, entered in the form

A.B.C.D, to be configured as a static group member.

source Optional.

<ip-source-addr> Standard IP source address, entered in the form A.B.C.D, to be

configured as a static source from where multicast packets

originate.

interface Use this parameter to specify a specific switch port or switch

port range to statically forward the multicast group out of. If

not used, static configuration is applied on all ports in the

VLAN.

<port>The port or port range to statically forward the group out of.

The port may be a switch port (e.g. port1.0.4), a static

channel group (e.g. sa2), or a dynamic (LACP) channel group

(e.g. po2).

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 780

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP STATIC-GROUP

Example The following example show how to statically add group and source records for

IGMP on vlan3:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan3

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp static-group 226.1.2.4 source

10.2.3.4

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 781

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP STARTUP-QUERY-COUNT

ip igmp startup-query-count

Overview Use this command to configure the IGMP startup query count for an interface. The

IGMP startup query count is the number of IGMP General Query messages sent by

a querier at startup. The default IGMP startup query count is 2.

Syntax ip igmp startup-query-count <startup-query-count>

no ip igmp startup-query-count

Default The default IGMP startup query count is 2.

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Example To set the IGMP startup query count to 4 on vlan2, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp startup-query-count 4

Commands

ip igmp last-member-query-count

ip igmp startup-query-interval

Parameter Description

<startup-query-count> Specify the IGMP startup query count, in the range

2-10.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 782

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP STARTUP-QUERY-INTERVAL

ip igmp startup-query-interval

Overview Use this command to configure the IGMP startup query interval for an interface.

The IGMP startup query interval is the amount of time in seconds between

successive IGMP General Query messages sent by a querier during startup. The

default IGMP startup query interval is one quarter of the IGMP query interval value.

Syntax ip igmp startup-query-interval <startup-query-interval>

no ip igmp startup-query-interval

Default The default IGMP startup query interval is one quarter of the IGMP query interval

value.

NOTE: The IGMP startup query interval must be one quarter of the IGMP query interval.

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Example To set the IGMP startup query interval to 15 seconds for vlan2, which is one quarter

of the IGMP query interval of 60 seconds, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp query-interval 60

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp startup-query-interval 15

Commands

ip igmp last-member-query-interval

ip igmp query-interval

ip igmp startup-query-count

Parameter Description

<startup-query-interval> Specify the IGMP startup query interval, in the

range of 2-1800 seconds. The value must be one

quarter of the IGMP query interval value.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 783

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP TRUSTED

ip igmp trusted

Overview Use this command to allow IGMP to process packets received on certain trusted

ports only.

Use the no variant of this command to stop IGMP from processing specified

packets if the packets are received on the specified ports or aggregator.

Syntax ip igmp trusted {all|query|report|routermode}

no ip igmp trusted {all|query|report|routermode}

Default By default, all ports and aggregators are trusted interfaces, so IGMP is allowed to

process all IGMP query, report, and router mode packets arriving on all interfaces.

Mode Interface mode for one or more switch ports or aggregators

Usage Because all ports are trusted by default, use this command in its no variant to stop

IGMP processing packets on ports you do not trust.

For example, you can use this command to make sure that only ports attached to

approved IGMP routers are treated as router ports.

Example To stop ports port1.0.3-port1.0.6 from being treated as router ports by IGMP, use

the commands:

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.3-port1.0.6

awplus(config-if)# no ip igmp trusted routermode

Parameter Description

all Specifies whether or not the interface is allowed to receive all

IGMP and other routermode packets

query Specifies whether or not the interface is allowed to receive IGMP

queries

report Specifies whether or not the interface is allowed to receive IGMP

membership reports

routermode Specifies whether or not the interface is allowed to receive

routermode packets

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 784

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

IP IGMP VERSION

ip igmp version

Overview Use this command to set the current IGMP version (IGMP version 1, 2 or 3) on an

interface.

Use the no variant of this command to return to the default version.

Syntax ip igmp version <1-3>

no ip igmp version

Default The default IGMP version is 3.

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Example To set the IGMP version to 2 for vlan2, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ip igmp version 2

Commands

show ip igmp interface

Parameter Description

version <1-3>IGMP protocol version number

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 785

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

SHOW DEBUGGING IGMP

show debugging igmp

Overview Use this command to display the IGMP debugging options set.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show debugging igmp

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display the IGMP debugging options set, enter the command:

awplus# show debugging igmp

Output Figure 24-1: Example output from the show debugging igmp command

Commands

debug igmp

IGMP Debugging status:

IGMP Decoder debugging is on

IGMP Encoder debugging is on

IGMP Events debugging is on

IGMP FSM debugging is on

IGMP Tree-Info-Base (TIB) debugging is on

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 786

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

SHOW IP IGMP GROUPS

show ip igmp groups

Overview Use this command to display the multicast groups with receivers directly

connected to the router, and learned through IGMP.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show ip igmp groups [<ip-address>|<interface> detail]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example The following command displays local-membership information for all ports in all

interfaces:

awplus# show ip igmp groups

Output Figure 24-2: Example output from the show ip igmp groups command

Parameter Description

<ip-address> Address of the multicast group, entered in the form A.B.C.D.

<interface> Interface name for which to display local information.

IGMP Connected Group Membership 

Group Address Interface Uptime Expires Last Reporter 

224.0.1.1 port1.0.1 00:00:09 00:04:17 10.10.0.82 

224.0.1.24 port1.0.2 00:00:06 00:04:14 10.10.0.84 

224.0.1.40 port1.0.3 00:00:09 00:04:15 10.10.0.91 

224.0.1.60 port1.0.3 00:00:05 00:04:15 10.10.0.7 

224.100.100.100 port1.0.1 00:00:11 00:04:13 10.10.0.91 

228.5.16.8 port1.0.3 00:00:11 00:04:16 10.10.0.91 

228.81.16.8 port1.0.7 00:00:05 00:04:15 10.10.0.91 

228.249.13.8 port1.0.3 00:00:08 00:04:17 10.10.0.91 

235.80.68.83 port1.0.11 00:00:12 00:04:15 10.10.0.40 

239.255.255.250 port1.0.3 00:00:12 00:04:15 10.10.0.228 

239.255.255.254 port1.0.12 00:00:08 00:04:13 10.10.0.84

Table 1: Parameters in the output of the show ip igmp groups command

Parameter Description

Group

Address

Address of the multicast group.

Interface Port through which the group is reachable.

Uptime The time in weeks, days, hours, minutes, and seconds that this

multicast group has been known to the device.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 787

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

SHOW IP IGMP GROUPS

Expires Time (in hours, minutes, and seconds) until the entry expires.

Last

Reporter

Last host to report being a member of the multicast group.

Table 1: Parameters in the output of the show ip igmp groups command (cont.)

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 788

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

SHOW IP IGMP INTERFACE

show ip igmp interface

Overview Use this command to display the state of IGMP Snooping for a specified VLAN, or

all VLANs. IGMP is shown as Active or Disabled in the show output. You can also

display the number of groups a switch port belongs to.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show ip igmp interface [<interface>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Output The following output shows IGMP interface status for vlan2 with IGMP Snooping

enabled:

The following output shows IGMP interface status for vlan2 with IGMP Snooping

disabled:

Parameter Description

<interface>The name of the interface.

If you specify a switch port number, the output displays the number

of groups the port belongs to, and the port’s group membership

limit, if a limit has been set (with the command ip igmp

maximum-groups).

awplus#show ip igmp interface vlan2

Interface vlan2 (Index 202)

IGMP Disabled, Inactive, Version 3 (default)

IGMP interface has 0 group-record states

IGMP activity: 0 joins, 0 leaves

IGMP robustness variable is 2

IGMP last member query count is 2

IGMP query interval is 125 seconds

IGMP query holdtime is 500 milliseconds

IGMP querier timeout is 255 seconds

IGMP max query response time is 10 seconds

Last member query response interval is 1000 milliseconds

Group Membership interval is 260 seconds

Strict IGMPv3 ToS checking is disabled on this interface

Source Address checking is enabled

IGMP Snooping is globally enabled

IGMP Snooping query solicitation is globally disabled

Num. query-solicit packets: 57 sent, 0 recvd

IGMP Snooping is enabled on this interface

IGMP Snooping fast-leave is not enabled

IGMP Snooping querier is not enabled

IGMP Snooping report suppression is enabled

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 789

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

SHOW IP IGMP INTERFACE

The following output displays membership information for port1.0.1:

awplus#show ip igmp interface vlan2

Interface vlan2 (Index 202)

IGMP Disabled, Inactive, Version 3 (default)

IGMP interface has 0 group-record states

IGMP activity: 0 joins, 0 leaves

IGMP robustness variable is 2

IGMP last member query count is 2

IGMP query interval is 125 seconds

IGMP query holdtime is 500 milliseconds

IGMP querier timeout is 255 seconds

IGMP max query response time is 10 seconds

Last member query response interval is 1000 milliseconds

Group Membership interval is 260 seconds

Strict IGMPv3 ToS checking is disabled on this interface

Source Address checking is enabled

IGMP Snooping is globally enabled

IGMP Snooping query solicitation is globally disabled

Num. query-solicit packets: 57 sent, 0 recvd

IGMP Snooping is not enabled on this interface

IGMP Snooping fast-leave is not enabled

IGMP Snooping querier is not enabled

IGMP Snooping report suppression is enabled

awplus#show ip igmp interface port1.0.1

IGMP information for port1.0.1

Maximum groups limit set: 10

Number of groups port belongs to: 0

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 790

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

SHOW IP IGMP SNOOPING MROUTER

show ip igmp snooping mrouter

Overview Use this command to display the multicast router ports, both static and dynamic,

in a VLAN.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show ip igmp snooping mrouter [interface <interface>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To show all multicast router interfaces, use the command:

awplus# show ip igmp snooping mrouter

To show the multicast router interfaces in vlan1, use the command:

awplus# show ip igmp snooping mrouter interface vlan1

Output Figure 24-3: Example output from the show ip igmp snooping mrouter

command

Figure 24-4: Example output from the show ip igmp snooping mrouter interface

vlan1 command

Commands

ip igmp snooping mrouter

Parameter Description

interface A specific interface.

<interface>The name of the VLAN interface.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 791

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

SHOW IP IGMP SNOOPING ROUTERMODE

show ip igmp snooping routermode

Overview Use this command to display the current routermode and the list of IP addresses

set as router multicast addresses from the ip igmp snooping routermode

command.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show ip igmp snooping routermode

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To show the routermode and the list of router multicast addresses, use the

command:

awplus# show ip igmp snooping routermode

Output Figure 24-5: Example output from the show ip igmp snooping router mode

command

Commands

ip igmp snooping routermode

awplus#show ip igmp snooping routermode

Router mode.............Def

Reserved multicast address



224.0.0.1

224.0.0.2

224.0.0.4

224.0.0.5

224.0.0.6

224.0.0.9

224.0.0.13

224.0.0.15

224.0.0.24

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 792

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

SHOW IP IGMP SNOOPING STATISTICS

show ip igmp snooping statistics

Overview Use this command to display IGMP Snooping statistics data.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show ip igmp snooping statistics interface <interface-range>

[group [<ip-address>]]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To display IGMP statistical information for vlan1 and vlan2, use the command:

awplus# show ip igmp snooping statistics interface vlan1-vlan2

Output Figure 24-6: Example output from the show ip igmp snooping statistics

command for VLANs

Parameter Description

<ip-address> Optionally specify the address of the multicast group, entered in

the form A.B.C.D.

<interface> Specify the name of the interface or interface range. If you

specify a port number, the output displays the number of

groups the port belongs to, and the port’s group membership

limit, if a limit has been set (with the command ip igmp

maximum-groups)

awplus#show ip igmp interface vlan1-vlan2

IGMP Snooping statistics for vlan1

Interface: port1.0.3

Group: 224.1.1.1

Uptime: 00:00:09

Group mode: Exclude (Expires: 00:04:10)

Last reporter: 10.4.4.5

Source list is empty

IGMP Snooping statistics for vlan2

Interface: port1.0.4

Group: 224.1.1.2

Uptime: 00:00:19

Group mode: Exclude (Expires: 00:05:10)

Last reporter: 10.4.4.6

Source list is empty

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 793

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

SHOW IP IGMP SNOOPING STATISTICS

Figure 24-7: Example output from the show ip igmp snooping statistics

command for a switch port

awplus#show ip igmp interface port1.0.1

IGMP information for port1.0.1

Maximum groups limit set: 10

Number of groups port belongs to: 0

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 794

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IGMP AND IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

UNDEBUG IGMP

undebug igmp

Overview This command applies the functionality of the no debug igmp command.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 795

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MLD Snooping

Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference of configuration, clear, and show

commands related to MLD Snooping.

Command List •“clear ipv6 mld” on page 796

•“clear ipv6 mld group” on page 797

•“clear ipv6 mld interface” on page 798

•“debug mld” on page 799

•“ipv6 mld immediate-leave” on page 800

•“ipv6 mld limit” on page 801

•“ipv6 mld snooping” on page 803

•“ipv6 mld snooping fast-leave” on page 805

•“ipv6 mld snooping mrouter” on page 806

•“ipv6 mld snooping querier” on page 808

•“ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression” on page 809

•“ipv6 mld static-group” on page 811

•“show debugging mld” on page 813

•“show ipv6 mld groups” on page 814

•“show ipv6 mld interface” on page 815

•“show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter” on page 816

•“show ipv6 mld snooping statistics” on page 817

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 796

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MLD SNOOPING COMMANDS

CLEAR IPV6 MLD

clear ipv6 mld

Overview Use this command to clear all MLD local memberships on all interfaces.

Syntax clear ipv6 mld

Mode Privileged Exec

Example awplus# clear ipv6 mld

Commands

clear ipv6 mld group

clear ipv6 mld interface

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 797

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MLD SNOOPING COMMANDS

CLEAR IPV6 MLD GROUP

clear ipv6 mld group

Overview Use this command to clear MLD specific local-membership(s) on all interfaces, for

a particular group.

Syntax clear ipv6 mld group {*|<ipv6-address>}

Mode Privileged Exec

Example awplus# clear ipv6 mld group *

Commands

clear ipv6 mld

clear ipv6 mld interface

Parameter Description

*Clears all groups on all interfaces. This is an alias to the clear

ipv6 mld command.

<ipv6-address>Specify the group address for which MLD local-memberships

are to be cleared from all interfaces.

Specify the IPv6 multicast group address in the format in the

format X:X::X:X.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 798

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MLD SNOOPING COMMANDS

CLEAR IPV6 MLD INTERFACE

clear ipv6 mld interface

Overview Use this command to clear MLD interface entries.

Syntax clear ipv6 mld interface <interface>

Mode Privileged Exec

Example awplus# clear ipv6 mld interface vlan2

Commands

clear ipv6 mld

clear ipv6 mld group

Parameter Description

<interface> Specifies name of the interface; all groups learned from this interface

are deleted.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 799

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MLD SNOOPING COMMANDS

DEBUG MLD

debug mld

Overview Use this command to enable all MLD debugging modes, or a specific MLD

debugging mode.

Use the no variant of this command to disable all MLD debugging modes, or a

specific MLD debugging mode.

Syntax debug mld {all|decode|encode|events|fsm|tib}

no debug mld {all|decode|encode|events|fsm|tib}

Mode Privileged Exec and Global Configuration

Examples awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# debug mld all

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# debug mld decode

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# debug mld encode

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# debug mld events

Commands

show debugging mld

Parameter Description

all Debug all MLD.

decode Debug MLD decoding.

encode Debug MLD encoding.

events Debug MLD events.

fsm Debug MLD Finite State Machine (FSM).

tib Debug MLD Tree Information Base (TIB).

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 800

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MLD SNOOPING COMMANDS

IPV6 MLD IMMEDIATE-LEAVE

ipv6 mld immediate-leave

Overview Use this command to minimize the leave latency of MLD memberships.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this feature.

Syntax ipv6 mld immediate-leave group-list <IPv6-access-list-name>

no ipv6 mld immediate-leave

Default Disabled

Mode Interface Configuration for a specified VLAN interface or a range of VLAN

interfaces.

Example The following example shows how to enable the immediate-leave feature on an

interface for a specific range of multicast groups. In this example, the router

assumes that the group access-list consists of groups that have only one node

membership at a time per interface:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ipv6 forwarding

awplus(config)# ipv6 multicast-routing

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 enable

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 mld immediate-leave v6grp

awplus(config-if)# exit

Parameter Description

<IPv6-access-

list-name>

Specify a Standard or an Extended software IPv6 access-list

name that defines multicast groups in which the

immediate leave feature is enabled.

See IPv6 Software Access Control List (ACL) Commands for

supported IPv6 ACLs.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 801

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MLD SNOOPING COMMANDS

IPV6 MLD LIMIT

ipv6 mld limit

Overview Use this command to configure a limit on the maximum number of group

memberships that may be learned. The limit may be set for the device as a whole,

or for a specific interface.

Once the specified group membership limit is reached, all further

local-memberships will be ignored.

Optionally, an exception access-list can be configured to specify the

group-address(es) that are exempted from being subject to the limit.

Use the no variant of this command to unset the limit and any specified exception

access-list.

Syntax ipv6 mld limit <limitvalue> [except <IPv6-access-list-name>]

no ipv6 mld limit

Default The default limit, which is reset by the no variant of this command, is the same as

maximum number of group membership entries that can be learned with the ipv6

mld limit command.

The default limit of group membership entries that can be learned is 512 entries.

Mode Global Configuration and Interface Configuration for a specified VLAN interface or

a range of VLAN interfaces.

Usage This command applies to interfaces configured for MLD Layer-3 multicast

protocols and learned by MLD Snooping.

Examples The following example configures an MLD limit of 100 group-memberships across

all VLAN interfaces on which MLD is enabled, and excludes groups in the range

ff1e:0db8:0001::/64 from this limitation:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ipv6 forwarding

awplus(config)# ipv6 multicast-routing

awplus(config)# ipv6 access-list standard v6grp permit

ff1e:0db8:0001::/64

awplus(config)# ipv6 mld limit 100 except v6grp

Parameter Description

<limitvalue><2-512> Maximum number of group membership states.

<IPv6-access-list-

name>

Specify a Standard or an Extended software IPv6 access-list

name that defines multicast groups, which are exempted

from being subject to the configured limit.

See IPv6 Software Access Control List (ACL) Commands for

supported IPv6 ACLs.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 802

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MLD SNOOPING COMMANDS

IPV6 MLD LIMIT

The following example configures an MLD limit of 100 group-membership states

on the VLAN interface vlan2:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ipv6 forwarding

awplus(config)# ipv6 multicast-routing

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 enable

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 mld limit 100

The following example configures an MLD limit of 100 group-membership states

on the VLAN interfaces vlan2-vlan4:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ipv6 forwarding

awplus(config)# ipv6 multicast-routing

awplus(config)# interface vlan2-vlan4

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 enable

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 mld limit 100

Commands

ipv6 mld immediate-leave

show ipv6 mld groups

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 803

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MLD SNOOPING COMMANDS

IPV6 MLD SNOOPING

ipv6 mld snooping

Overview Use this command to enable MLD Snooping. When this command is issued in the

Global Configuration mode, MLD Snooping is enabled globally for the device.

When this command is issued in Interface mode for a VLAN then MLD Snooping is

enabled for the specified VLAN. Note that MLD Snooping is enabled on the VLAN

only if it is enabled globally and on the VLAN.

Use the no variant of this command to globally disable MLD Snooping in Global

Configuration mode, or for the specified VLAN interface in Interface mode.

NOTE: There is a 100 MLD interface limit when applying MLD commands to multiple

VLANs. Only the first 100 VLANs have the required multicast structures added to the

interfaces that allow multicast routing.

The device has a 512 MLD group limit for (*, G) and (S,G) entries.

Syntax ipv6 mld snooping

no ipv6 mld snooping

Default By default, MLD Snooping is enabled both globally and on all VLANs.

Mode Global Configuration and Interface Configuration for a specified VLAN interface or

a range of VLAN interfaces.

Usage For MLD Snooping to operate on particular VLAN interfaces, it must be enabled

both globally by using this command in Global Configuration mode, and on

individual VLAN interfaces by using this command in Interface Configuration

mode (both are enabled by default).

MLD requires memory for storing data structures, as well as the hardware tables to

implement hardware routing. As the number of ports, VLANs, static and dynamic

groups increases then more memory is consumed. You can track the memory used

for MLD with the command:

awplus# show memory pools nsm | grep MLD

Static and dynamic groups (LACP), ports and VLANs are not limited for MLD. For

VLANs, this allows you to configure MLD across more VLANs with fewer ports per

VLAN, or fewer VLANs with more ports per VLAN. For LACPs, you can configure

MLD across more LACP groups with fewer ports per LACP, or fewer LACP groups

with more ports per LACP.

Examples To configure MLD Snooping on the VLAN interface vlan2, enter the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 mld snooping

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 804

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MLD SNOOPING COMMANDS

IPV6 MLD SNOOPING

To configure MLD Snooping on the VLAN interfaces vlan2-vlan4, enter the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2-vlan4

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 mld snooping

To disable MLD Snooping for the VLAN interface vlan2, enter the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config)# no ipv6 mld snooping

To disable MLD Snooping for the VLAN interfaces vlan2-vlan4, enter the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2-vlan4

awplus(config)# no ipv6 mld snooping

To configure MLD Snooping globally for the device, enter the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ipv6 mld snooping

To disable MLD Snooping globally for the device, enter the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no ipv6 mld snooping

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 805

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MLD SNOOPING COMMANDS

IPV6 MLD SNOOPING FAST-LEAVE

ipv6 mld snooping fast-leave

Overview Use this command to enable MLD Snooping fast-leave processing. Fast-leave

processing is analogous to immediate-leave processing; the MLD

group-membership is removed as soon as an MLD leave group message is

received, without sending out a group-specific query.

Use the no variant of this command to disable fast-leave processing.

Syntax ipv6 mld snooping fast-leave

no ipv6 mld snooping fast-leave

Default MLD Snooping fast-leave processing is disabled.

Mode Interface Configuration for a specified VLAN interface or a range of VLAN

interfaces.

Usage This MLD Snooping command can only be configured on VLAN interfaces.

Examples This example shows how to enable fast-leave processing on the VLAN interface

vlan2.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 mld snooping fast-leave

This example shows how to enable fast-leave processing on the VLAN interface

vlan2- vlan4.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2-vlan4

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 mld snooping fast-leave

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 806

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MLD SNOOPING COMMANDS

IPV6 MLD SNOOPING MROUTER

ipv6 mld snooping mrouter

Overview Use this command to statically configure the specified port as a Multicast Router

interface for MLD Snooping within the specified VLAN.

See detailed usage notes below to configure static multicast router ports when

using static IPv6 multicast routes with EPSR, and the destination VLAN is an EPSR

data VLAN.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the static configuration of the

interface as a Multicast Router interface.

Syntax ipv6 mld snooping mrouter interface <port>

no ipv6 mld snooping mrouter interface <port>

Mode Interface Configuration for a specified VLAN interface or a range of VLAN

interfaces.

Usage This MLD Snooping command statically configures a switch port as a Multicast

Router interface.

Note that if static IPv6 multicast routing is being used with EPSR and the

destination VLAN is an EPSR data VLAN, then multicast router (mrouter) ports must

be statically configured. This minimizes disruption for multicast traffic in the event

of ring failure or restoration.

When configuring the EPSR data VLAN, statically configure mrouter ports so that

the multicast router can be reached in either direction around the EPSR ring.

For example, if port1.0.1 and port1.0.6 are ports on an EPSR data VLAN vlan101,

which is the destination for a static IPv6 multicast route, then configure both ports

as multicast router (mrouter) ports as shown in the example commands listed

below:

Output Figure 25-1: Example ipv6 mld snooping mrouter commands when static IPv6

multicast routing is being used and the destination VLAN is an EPSR

data VLAN:

Parameter Description

<port>Specify the name of the port.

awplus>enable

awplus#configure terminal

awplus(config)#interface vlan101

awplus(config-if)#ipv6 mld snooping mrouter interface port1.0.1

awplus(config-if)#ipv6 mld snooping mrouter interface port1.0.6

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 807

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MLD SNOOPING COMMANDS

IPV6 MLD SNOOPING MROUTER

Examples This example shows how to specify the next-hop interface to the multicast router

for VLAN interface vlan2:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 mld snooping mrouter interface

port1.0.5

This example shows how to specify the next-hop interface to the multicast router

for VLAN interfaces vlan2-vlan4:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2-vlan4

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 mld snooping mrouter interface

port1.0.5

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 808

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MLD SNOOPING COMMANDS

IPV6 MLD SNOOPING QUERIER

ipv6 mld snooping querier

Overview Use this command to enable MLD querier operation on a subnet (VLAN) when no

multicast routing protocol is configured in the subnet (VLAN). When enabled, the

MLD Snooping querier sends out periodic MLD queries for all interfaces on that

VLAN.

Use the no variant of this command to disable MLD querier configuration.

Syntax ipv6 mld snooping querier

no ipv6 mld snooping querier

Mode Interface Configuration for a specified VLAN interface.

Usage This command can only be configured on a single VLAN interface - not on multiple

VLANs.

The MLD Snooping querier uses the 0.0.0.0 Source IP address because it only

masquerades as an MLD querier for faster network convergence.

The MLD Snooping querier does not start, or automatically cease, the MLD Querier

operation if it detects query message(s) from a multicast router. It restarts as an

MLD Snooping querier if no queries are seen within the other querier interval.

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 mld snooping querier

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 809

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MLD SNOOPING COMMANDS

IPV6 MLD SNOOPING REPORT-SUPPRESSION

ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression

Overview Use this command to enable report suppression from hosts for Multicast Listener

Discovery version 1 (MLDv1) on a VLAN in Interface Configuration mode.

Use the no variant of this command to disable report suppression on a VLAN in

Interface Configuration mode.

Syntax ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression

no ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression

Default Report suppression does not apply to MLDv2, and is turned on by default for

MLDv1 reports.

Mode Interface Configuration for a specified VLAN interface or a range of VLAN

interfaces.

Usage This MLD Snooping command can only be configured on VLAN interfaces.

MLDv1 Snooping maybe configured to suppress reports from hosts. When a

querier sends a query, only the first report for particular set of group(s) from a host

will be forwarded to the querier by the MLD Snooping device. Similar reports (to

the same set of groups) from other hosts, which would not change group

memberships in the querier, will be suppressed by the MLD Snooping device to

prevent 'flooding' of query responses.

Examples This example shows how to enable report suppression for MLD reports on VLAN

interface vlan2:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression

This example shows how to disable report suppression for MLD reports on VLAN

interface vlan2:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# no ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression

This example shows how to enable report suppression for MLD reports on VLAN

interfaces vlan2-vlan4:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2-vlan4

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 810

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MLD SNOOPING COMMANDS

IPV6 MLD SNOOPING REPORT-SUPPRESSION

This example shows how to disable report suppression for MLD reports on VLAN

interfaces vlan2-vlan4:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2-vlan4

awplus(config-if)# no ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 811

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MLD SNOOPING COMMANDS

IPV6 MLD STATIC-GROUP

ipv6 mld static-group

Overview Use this command to statically configure IPv6 group membership entries on an

interface. To statically add only a group membership, do not specify any

parameters.

Use the no variant of this command to delete static group membership entries.

Syntax ipv6 mld static-group <ipv6-group-address> [source

<ipv6-source-address>] [interface <port>]

no ipv6 mld static-group <ipv6-group-address> [source

<ipv6-source-address>] [interface <port>]

Mode Interface Configuration for a VLAN interface.

Usage This command applies to MLD Snooping on a VLAN interface to statically add

groups and/or source records.

Examples To add a static group record, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 mld static-group ff1e::10

To add a static group and source record, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 mld static-group ff1e::10 source

fe80::2fd:6cff:fe1c:b

Parameter Description

<ipv6-group-

address>

Specify a standard IPv6 Multicast group address to be

configured as a static group member.

The IPv6 address uses the format X:X::X:X.

<ipv6-source-

address>

Optional. Specify a standard IPv6 source address to be

configured as a static source from where multicast

packets originate.

The IPv6 address uses the format X:X::X:X.

<port>Optional. Physical interface. This parameter specifies a

physical port. If this parameter is used, the static

configuration is applied to just to that physical interface.

If this parameter is not used, the static configuration is

applied on all ports in the VLAN.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 812

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MLD SNOOPING COMMANDS

IPV6 MLD STATIC-GROUP

To add a static group record on a specific port on vlan2, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface vlan2

awplus(config-if)# ipv6 mld static-group ff1e::10 interface

port1.0.4

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 813

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MLD SNOOPING COMMANDS

SHOW DEBUGGING MLD

show debugging mld

Overview Use this command to display the MLD debugging modes enabled with the debug

mld command.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show debugging mld

Mode Privileged Exec

Example awplus# show debugging mld

Output

Commands

debug mld

show debugging mld 

MLD Debugging status: 

MLD Decoder debugging is on 

MLD Encoder debugging is on 

MLD Events debugging is on 

MLD FSM debugging is on 

MLD Tree-Info-Base (TIB) debugging is on 

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 814

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MLD SNOOPING COMMANDS

SHOW IPV6 MLD GROUPS

show ipv6 mld groups

Overview Use this command to display the multicast groups that have receivers directly

connected to the router and learned through MLD.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show ipv6 mld groups [<ipv6-address>|<interface>] [detail]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Examples The following command displays local-membership information for all interfaces:

awplus# show ipv6 mld groups

Output Figure 25-2: Example output for show ipv6 mld groups

The following command displays local-membership information for all interfaces:

awplus# show ipv6 mld groups detail

Parameter Description

<ipv6-address>Optional. Specify Address of the multicast group in format

X:X::X:X.

<interface>Optional. Specify the Interface name for which to display local

information.

awplus#show ipv6 mld groups 

MLD Connected Group Membership 

Group Address Interface Uptime Expires 

Last Reporter 

ff08::1 vlan10 (port1.0.1) 00:07:27 00:03:10 

fe80::200:1ff:fe20:b5ac

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 815

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MLD SNOOPING COMMANDS

SHOW IPV6 MLD INTERFACE

show ipv6 mld interface

Overview Use this command to display the state of MLD and MLD Snooping for a specified

interface, or all interfaces.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show ipv6 mld interface [<interface>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example The following command displays MLD interface status on all interfaces enabled for

MLD:

awplus# show ipv6 mld interface

Output

Parameter Description

<interface>Interface name.

awplus#show ipv6 mld interface



Interface vlan1 (Index 301)

MLD Enabled, Active, Querier, Version 2 (default)

Internet address is fe80::215:77ff:fec9:7468

MLD interface has 0 group-record states

MLD activity: 0 joins, 0 leaves

MLD robustness variable is 2 

MLD last member query count is 2 

MLD query interval is 125 seconds

MLD querier timeout is 255 seconds

MLD max query response time is 10 seconds

Last member query response interval is 1000 milliseconds

Group Membership interval is 260 seconds

MLD Snooping is globally enabled

MLD Snooping is enabled on this interface

MLD Snooping fast-leave is not enabled

MLD Snooping querier is enabled

MLD Snooping report suppression is enabled

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 816

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MLD SNOOPING COMMANDS

SHOW IPV6 MLD SNOOPING MROUTER

show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter

Overview Use this command to display the multicast router interfaces, both configured and

learned, in a VLAN. If you do not specify a VLAN interface then all the VLAN

interfaces are displayed.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter [<interface>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Examples The following command displays the multicast router interfaces in vlan2:

awplus# show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter vlan2

Output

The following command displays the multicast router interfaces for all VLAN

interfaces:

awplus# show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter

Output

Parameter Description

<interface>Optional. Specify the name of the VLAN interface. Note: If you do not

specify a single VLAN interface, then all VLAN interfaces are shown.



awplus#show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter vlan2

VLAN Interface Static/Dynamic

2 port1.0.2 Dynamically Learned

2 port1.0.3 Dynamically Learned



awplus#show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter

VLAN Interface Static/Dynamic

2 port1.0.2 Dynamically Learned

2 port1.0.3 Dynamically Learned

3 port1.0.4 Statically Assigned

3 port1.0.5 Statically Assigned

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 817

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MLD SNOOPING COMMANDS

SHOW IPV6 MLD SNOOPING STATISTICS

show ipv6 mld snooping statistics

Overview Use this command to display MLD Snooping statistics data.

For information on filtering and saving command output, see the “Getting Started

with AlliedWare Plus” Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Syntax show ipv6 mld snooping statistics interface <interface>

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example The following command displays MLDv2 statistical information for vlan1:

awplus# show ipv6 mld snooping statistics interface vlan1

Output

Parameter Description

<interface>The name of the VLAN interface.

awplus#show ipv6 mld snooping statistics interface vlan1

MLD Snooping statistics for vlan1 

Interface: port1.0.1 

Group: ff08::1 

Uptime: 00:02:18 

Group mode: Include () 

Last reporter: fe80::eecd:6dff:fe6b:4783 

Group source list: (R - Remote, M - SSM Mapping, S - Static ) 

Source Address Uptime v2 Exp Fwd Flags 

2001:db8::1 00:02:18 00:02:02 Yes R 

2001:db8::3 00:02:18 00:02:02 Yes R 



C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 818

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Multicast

Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference of multicast commands for

configuring:

• IPv4 and IPv6 multicast forwarding

• IPv4 and IPv6 static multicast routes

• mroutes (routes back to a multicast source)

For commands for other multicast protocols, see:

•IGMP and IGMP Snooping Commands

•MLD Snooping Commands

NOTE: The IPv6 Multicast addresses shown can be derived from IPv6 unicast prefixes as

per RFC 3306. The IPv6 unicast prefix reserved for documentation is 2001:0db8::/32 as

per RFC 3849. Using the base /32 prefix the IPv6 multicast prefix for 2001:0db8::/32 is

ff3x:20:2001:0db8::/64. Where an RP address is 2001:0db8::1 the embedded RP

multicast prefix is ff7x:120:2001:0db8::/96. For ASM (Any-Source Multicast) the IPV6

multicast addresses allocated for documentation purposes are ff0x::0db8:0:0/96 as per

RFC 6676. This is a /96 prefix so that it can be used with group IDs as per RFC 3307. These

addresses should not be used for practical networks (other than for testing purposes),

nor should they appear in any public network.

The IPv6 addresses shown use the address space 2001:0db8::/32, defined in RFC 3849

for documentation purposes. These addresses should not be used for practical

networks (other than for testing purposes) nor should they appear on any public

network.

Command List •“clear ip mroute” on page 820

•“clear ip mroute statistics” on page 821

•“clear ipv6 mroute” on page 822

•“clear ipv6 mroute statistics” on page 823

•“ipv6 multicast forward-slow-path-packet” on page 824

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 819

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

•“debug nsm mcast” on page 825

•“debug nsm mcast6” on page 826

•“ip mroute” on page 827

•“ip multicast forward-first-packet” on page 829

•“ip multicast route-limit” on page 830

•“ip multicast wrong-vif-suppression” on page 831

•“ip multicast-routing” on page 832

•“ipv6 mroute” on page 833

•“ipv6 multicast route-limit” on page 835

•“ipv6 multicast-routing” on page 836

•“multicast” on page 837

•“show ip mroute” on page 838

•“show ip mvif” on page 840

•“show ip rpf” on page 841

•“show ipv6 mroute” on page 842

•“show ipv6 multicast forwarding” on page 844

•“show ipv6 mif” on page 845

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 820

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

CLEAR IP MROUTE

clear ip mroute

Overview Use this command to delete entries from the IPv4 multicast routing table.

NOTE: If you use this command, you should also use the clear ip igmp group command

to clear IGMP group membership records.

Syntax clear ip mroute {*|<ipv4-group-address>

[<ipv4-source-address>]} [pim sparse-mode]

Mode Privileged Exec

Usage When this command is used, the Multicast Routing Information Base (MRIB) clears

the IPv4 multicast route entries in its IPv4 multicast route table, and removes the

entries from the multicast forwarder. The MRIB sends a “clear” message to the

multicast protocols. Each multicast protocol has its own “clear” multicast route

command. The protocol-specific “clear” command clears multicast routes from

PIM Sparse Mode, and also clears the routes from the MRIB.

Examples awplus# clear ip mroute 225.1.1.1 192.168.3.3

awplus# clear ip mroute *

Commands

show ip mroute

Parameter Description

*Deletes all multicast routes.

<ipv4-group-

address>

Group IPv4 address, in dotted decimal notation in the format

A.B.C.D.

<ipv4-source-

address>

Source IPv4 address, in dotted decimal notation in the format

A.B.C.D.

pim sparse-mode Clear specified IPv4 multicast route(s) for PIM Sparse Mode only.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 821

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

CLEAR IP MROUTE STATISTICS

clear ip mroute statistics

Overview Use this command to delete multicast route statistics entries from the IP multicast

routing table.

Syntax clear ip mroute statistics {*|<ipv4-group-addr>

[<ipv4-source-addr>]}

Mode Privileged Exec

Example awplus# clear ip mroute statistics 225.1.1.2 192.168.4.4

awplus# clear ip mroute statistics *

Parameter Description

*All multicast route entries.

<ipv4-group-addr> Group IPv4 address, in dotted decimal notation in

the format A.B.C.D.

<ipv4-source-addr> Source IPv4 address, in dotted decimal notation in

the format A.B.C.D.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 822

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

CLEAR IPV6 MROUTE

clear ipv6 mroute

Overview Use this command to delete one or more dynamically-added route entries from

the IPv6 multicast routing table.

Syntax clear ipv6 mroute {*|<ipv6-group-address>

[<ipv6-source-address>]}

Mode Privileged Exec

Usage When this command is used, the Multicast Routing Information Base (MRIB) clears

the relevant IPv6 multicast route entries in its IPv6 multicast route table, and

removes the entries from the multicast forwarder. The MRIB sends a “clear”

message to the multicast protocols. Each multicast protocol has its own “clear”

multicast route command.

Example awplus# clear ipv6 mroute 2001::2 ff08::1

Commands

show ipv6 mroute

Parameter Description

*Deletes all dynamically-learned IPv6 multicast routes.

<ipv6-group-address> Group IPv6 address, in hexadecimal notation in the

format X.X::X.X.

<ipv6-source-address> Source IPv6 address, in hexadecimal notation in the

format X.X::X.X.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 823

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

CLEAR IPV6 MROUTE STATISTICS

clear ipv6 mroute statistics

Overview Use this command to delete multicast route statistics entries from the IPv6

multicast routing table.

NOTE: Static IPv6 multicast routes take priority over dynamic IPv6 multicast routes. Use

the clear ipv6 mroute command to clear static IPv6 multicast routes and ensure

dynamic IPv6 multicast routes can take over from previous static IPv6 multicast routes.

Syntax clear ipv6 mroute statistics {*|<ipv6-group-address>

[<ipv6-source-address>]}

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples awplus# clear ipv6 mroute statistics 2001::2 ff08::1

awplus# clear ipv6 mroute statistics *

Parameter Description

*All multicast route entries.

<ipv6-group-addr> Group IPv6 address, in hexadecimal notation in the

format X.X::X.X.

<ipv6-source-addr> Source IPv6 address, in hexadecimal notation in

the format X.X::X.X.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 824

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

IPV6 MULTICAST FORWARD-SLOW-PATH-PACKET

ipv6 multicast forward-slow-path-packet

Overview Use this command to enable multicast packets to be forwarded to the CPU.

Enabling this command will ensure that the layer L3 MTU is set correctly for each

IP multicast group and will apply the value of the smallest MTU among the

outgoing interfaces for the multicast group.

It will also ensure that a received packet that is larger than the MTU value will result

in the generation of an ICMP Too Big message.

Use the no variant of this command to disable the above functionality.

Syntax ipv6 multicast forward-slow-path-packet

no ipv6 multicast forward-slow-path-packet

Default Disabled.

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To enable the ipv6 multicast forward-slow-path-packet function, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ip multicast forward-slow-path-packet

Commands

show ipv6 forwarding

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 825

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

DEBUG NSM MCAST

debug nsm mcast

Overview Use this command to debug IPv4 events in the Multicast Routing Information Base

(MRIB).

Syntax debug nsm mcast

{all|fib-msg|mrt|mtrace|mtrace-detail|register|stats|vif}

Mode Privileged Exec and Global Configuration

Examples awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# debug nsm mcast all

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# debug nsm mcast fib-msg

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# debug nsm mcast mrt

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# debug nsm mcast mtrace

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# debug nsm mcast mtrace-detail

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# debug nsm mcast register

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# debug nsm mcast stat

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# debug nsm mcast vif

Parameter Description

all All IPv4 multicast debugging.

fib-msg Forwarding Information Base (FIB) messages.

mrt Multicast routes.

mtrace Multicast traceroute.

mtrace-detail Multicast traceroute detailed debugging.

stats Multicast statistics.

vif Multicast interface.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 826

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

DEBUG NSM MCAST6

debug nsm mcast6

Overview Use this command to debug IPv6 events in the Multicast Routing Information Base

(MRIB).

Syntax debug nsm mcast6

{all|fib-msg|mrt|mtrace|mtrace-detail|register|stats|vif}

Mode Privileged Exec and Global Configuration

Examples awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# debug nsm mcast6 all

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# debug nsm mcast6 fib-msg

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# debug nsm mcast6 mif

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# debug nsm mcast6 mrt

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# debug nsm mcast6 register

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# debug nsm mcast6 stats

Parameter Description

all All IPv4 multicast debugging.

fib-msg Forwarding Information Base (FIB) messages.

mif Multicast interfaces.

mrt Multicast routes.

stats Multicast statistics.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 827

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

IP MROUTE

ip mroute

Overview Use this command to inform multicast of the RPF (Reverse Path Forwarding) route

to a given IPv4 multicast source.

Use the no variant of this command to delete a route to an IPv4 multicast source.

Syntax ip mroute <ipv4-source-address/mask-length>

[bgp|ospf|rip|static] <rpf-address> [<admin-distance>]

no ip mroute <ipv4-source-address/mask-length>

[bgp|ospf|rip|static]

Mode Global Configuration

Usage Typically, when a Layer 3 multicast routing protocol is determining the RPF

(Reverse Path Forwarding) interface for the path to an IPv4 multicast source, it uses

the unicast route table to find the best path to the source. However, in some

networks a deliberate choice is made to send multicast via different paths to those

used for unicast. In this case, the interface via which a multicast stream from a

given source enters a router may not be the same as the interface that connects to

the best unicast route to that source.

This command enables the user to statically configure the device with “multicast

routes” back to given sources. When performing the RPF check on a stream from a

given IPv4 source, the multicast routing protocol will look at these static entries as

well as looking into the unicast routing table. The route with the lowest

Parameter Description

<ipv4-source-

address/mask-length>

A multicast source IPv4 address and mask length, in

dotted decimal notation in the format A.B.C.D/M.

ospf OSPF unicast routing protocol.

rip RIP unicast routing protocol.

static Specifies a static route.

<rpf-address>A.B.C.D

The closest known address on the multicast route back

to the specified source. This host IPv4 address can be

within a directly connected subnet or within a remote

subnet. In the case that the address is in a remote

subnet, a lookup is done from the unicast route table to

find the next hop address on the path to this host.

<admin-distance>The administrative distance. Use this to determine

whether the RPF lookup selects the unicast or multicast

route. Lower distances have preference. If the multicast

static route has the same distance as the other RPF

sources, the multicast static route takes precedence.

The default is 0 and the range available is 0-255.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 828

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

IP MROUTE

administrative distance - whether a static “multicast route” or a route from the

unicast route table - will be chosen as the RPF route to the source.

Note that in this context the term “multicast route” does not imply a route via

which the current router will forward multicast; instead it refers to the route the

multicast will have traversed in order to arrive at the current router.

Examples The following example creates a static multicast IPv4 route back to the sources in

the 10.10.3.0/24 subnet. The multicast route is via the host 192.168.2.3,

and has an administrative distance of 2:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ip mroute 10.10.3.0/24 static 2 192.168.2.3 2

The following example creates a static multicast IPv4 route back to the sources in

the 192.168.3.0/24subnet. The multicast route is via the host 10.10.10.50.

The administrative distance on this route has the default value of 0:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ip mroute 192.168.3.0/24 10.10.10.50

Validation

Commands

show ip rpf

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 829

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

IP MULTICAST FORWARD-FIRST-PACKET

ip multicast forward-first-packet

Overview Use this command to enable multicast to forward the first multicast packets

coming to the device.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this feature.

Syntax ip multicast forward-first-packet

no ip multicast forward-first-packet

Default By default, this feature is disabled.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage If this command is enabled, the device will forward the first packets in a multicast

stream that create the multicast route, possibly causing degradation in the quality

of the multicast stream, such as the pixelation of video and audio data.

NOTE: If you use this command, ensure that the ip igmp snooping command is

enabled, the default setting, otherwise the device will not process the first packets of

the multicast stream correctly.

The device will forward the first multicast packets to all interfaces which are on the

same VLAN as those which asked for this multicast group.

Examples To enable the forwarding of the first multicast packets, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ip multicast forward-first-packet

To disable the forwarding of the first multicast packets, use the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no ip multicast forward-first-packet

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 830

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

IP MULTICAST ROUTE-LIMIT

ip multicast route-limit

Overview Use this command to limit the number of multicast routes that can be added to an

IPv4 multicast routing table.

Use the no variant of this command to return the IPv4 route limit to the default.

Syntax ip multicast route-limit <limit> [<threshold>]

no ip multicast route-limit

Default The default limit and threshold value is 2147483647.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage This command limits the number of multicast IPv4 routes (mroutes) that can be

added to a router, and generates an error message when the limit is exceeded. If

the threshold parameter is set, a threshold warning message is generated when

this threshold is exceeded, and the message continues to occur until the number

of mroutes reaches the limit set by the limit argument.

Examples awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ip multicast route-limit 34 24

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no ip multicast route-limit

Parameter Description

<limit> <1-2147483647> Number of routes.

<threshold> <1-2147483647> Threshold above which to generate a warning

message. The mroute warning threshold must not exceed the

mroute limit.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 831

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

IP MULTICAST WRONG-VIF-SUPPRESSION

ip multicast wrong-vif-suppression

Overview Use this command to prevent unwanted multicast packets received on an

unexpected VLAN being trapped to the CPU.

Use the no variant of this command to disable wrong VIF suppression.

Syntax ip ip multicast wrong-vif-suppression

no ip multicast wrong-vif-suppression

Default By default, this feature is disabled.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage Use this command if there is excessive CPU load and multicast traffic is enabled. To

confirm that VIF messages are being sent to the CPU use the debug nsm mcast6

command.

Examples To enable the suppression of wrong VIF packets, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ip multicast wrong-vif-suppression

To disable the suppression of wrong VIF packets, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no ip multicast wrong-vif-suppression

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 832

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

IP MULTICAST-ROUTING

ip multicast-routing

Overview Use this command to turn on/off IPv4 multicast routing on the router; when turned

off the device does not perform multicast functions.

Use the no variant of this command to disable IPv4 multicast routing after

enabling it. Note the default stated below.

Syntax ip multicast-routing

no ip multicast-routing

Default By default, IPv4 multicast routing is off.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage When the no variant of this command is used, the Multicast Routing Information

Base (MRIB) cleans up Multicast Routing Tables (MRT), stops IGMP operation, and

stops relaying multicast forwarder events to multicast protocols.

When multicast routing is enabled, the MRIB starts processing any MRT

addition/deletion requests, and any multicast forwarding events.

You must enable multicast routing before issuing other multicast commands.

Example awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ip multicast-routing

Validation

Commands

show running-config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 833

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

IPV6 MROUTE

ipv6 mroute

Overview Use this command to inform multicast of the RPF (Reverse Path Forwarding) route

to a given IPv6 multicast source.

Use the no variant of this command to delete a route to an IPv6 multicast source.

JC - 25/6/12 - added missing IPI IPv6 multicast commands that have been in since

5.4.1 as undocumented and unregistered CLI commands but have been available

in 5.4.1/5.4.2 sw - this is out for 542-25 but should be added back in for 543 - check

in with Team Zeta on it

Syntax ipv6 mroute <ipv6-source-address/mask-length> [rip|static]

<rpf-address> [<admin-distance>]

no ipv6 mroute <ipv6-source-address/mask-length> [rip|static]

Mode Global Configuration

Usage Typically, when a Layer 3 multicast routing protocol is determining the RPF

(Reverse Path Forwarding) interface for the path to a multicast source, it uses the

unicast IPv6 route table to find the best path to the source. However, in some

networks a deliberate choice is made to send multicast via different paths to those

used for unicast. In this case, the interface via which a multicast stream from a

given source enters a router may not be the same as the interface that connects to

the best unicast route to that source.

This command enables the user to statically configure the switch with “multicast

routes” back to given sources. When performing the RPF check on a stream from a

Parameter Description

<ipv6-source-

address/mask-length>

A multicast source IPv6 address and mask length, in

hexadecimal notation in the format X.X::X.X/M.

rip RIPng IPv6 unicast routing protocol.

static Specifies a static route.

<rpf-address>X.X::X:X

The closest known address on the IPv6 multicast route

back to the specified source. This host IPv6 address can

be within a directly connected subnet or within a

remote subnet. In the case that the address is in a

remote subnet, a lookup is done from the unicast route

table to find the nexthop address on the path to this

host.

<admin-distance>The administrative distance. Use this to determine

whether the RPF lookup selects the unicast or multicast

route. Lower distances have preference. If the multicast

static route has the same distance as the other RPF

sources, the multicast static route takes precedence. The

default is 0 and the range available is 0-255.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 834

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

IPV6 MROUTE

given IPv6 source, the multicast routing protocol will look at these static entries as

well as looking into the unicast routing table. The route with the lowest

administrative distance - whether a static “multicast route” or a route from the

unicast route table - will be chosen as the RPF route to the source.

Note that in this context the term “multicast route” does not imply a route via

which the current router will forward multicast; instead it refers to the route the

multicast will have traversed in order to arrive at the current router.

Examples The following example creates a static multicast route back to the sources in the

2001::1/64 subnet. The multicast route is via the host 2002::2, and has an

administrative distance of 2:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ipv6 mroute 2001::1/64 static 2 2002::2

The following example creates a static multicast route back to the sources in the

2002::2/64subnet. The multicast route is via the host 2001::1. The administrative

distance on this route has the default value of 0:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ipv6 mroute 2002::2/64 2001::1

Validation

Commands

show ipv6 mroute

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 835

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

IPV6 MULTICAST ROUTE-LIMIT

ipv6 multicast route-limit

Overview Use this command to limit the number of multicast routes that can be added to an

IPv6 multicast routing table.

Use the no variant of this command to return the IPv6 route limit to the default.

Syntax ipv6 multicast route-limit <limit> [<threshold>]

no ipv6 multicast route-limit

Default The default limit and threshold value is 2147483647.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage This command limits the number of multicast IPv6 routes (mroutes) that can be

added to a router, and generates an error message when the limit is exceeded. If

the threshold parameter is set, a threshold warning message is generated when

this threshold is exceeded, and the message continues to occur until the number

of mroutes reaches the limit set by the limit argument.

Examples awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ipv6 multicast route-limit 34 24

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no ipv6 multicast route-limit

Parameter Description

<limit> <1-2147483647> Number of routes.

<threshold> <1-2147483647> Threshold above which to generate a warning

message. The mroute warning threshold must not exceed the

mroute limit.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 836

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

IPV6 MULTICAST-ROUTING

ipv6 multicast-routing

Overview Use this command to turn on/off IPv6 multicast routing on the router; when turned

off the device does not perform multicast functions.

Use the no variant of this command to disable IPv6 multicast routing after

enabling it. Note the default stated below.

Syntax ipv6 multicast-routing

no ipv6 multicast-routing

Default By default, IPv6 multicast routing is off.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage When the no variant of this command is used, the Multicast Routing Information

Base (MRIB) cleans up Multicast Routing Tables (MRT, and stops relaying multicast

forwarder events to multicast protocols.

When multicast routing is enabled, the MRIB starts processing any MRT

addition/deletion requests, and any multicast forwarding events.

You must enable multicast routing before issuing other multicast commands.

Examples awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ipv6 multicast-routing

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no ipv6 multicast-routing

Validation

Commands

show running-config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 837

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

MULTICAST

multicast

Overview Use this command to enable a device port to route multicast packets that ingress

the port.

Use the no variant of this command to stop the device port from routing multicast

packets that ingress the port. Note that this does not affect Layer 2 forwarding of

multicast packets. If you enter no multicast on a port, multicast packets received

on that port will not be forwarded to other VLANs, but ports in the same VLANs as

the receiving port will still receive the multicast packets.

CAUTION: We do not recommend disabling multicast routing in a live network. Some

non-multicast protocols use multicast packets and will not function correctly if you

disable it.

Syntax multicast

no multicast

Default By default, all device ports route multicast packets.

Mode Interface Configuration

Examples To disable routing of multicast packets on a port, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config-if)# no multicast

To re-enable routing of multicast packets on a port, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config-if)# multicast

Validation

Commands

show running-config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 838

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

SHOW IP MROUTE

show ip mroute

Overview Use this command to display the contents of the IPv4 multicast routing (mroute)

table.

Syntax show ip mroute [<ipv4-group-addr>] [<ipv4-source-addr>]

[{dense|sparse}] [{count|summary}]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Examples awplus# show ip mroute 10.10.3.34 224.1.4.3

awplus# show ip mroute 10.10.5.24 225.2.2.2 count

awplus# show ip mroute 10.10.1.34 summary

Output The following is a sample output of this command displaying the IPv4 multicast

routing table, with and without specifying the group and source IPv4 address:

Figure 26-1: Example output from the show ip mroute command

Parameter Description

<ipv4-group-addr> Group IPv4 address, in dotted decimal notation in the

format A.B.C.D.

<ipv4-source-addr> Source IPv4 address, in dotted decimal notation in the

format A.B.C.D.

dense Display dense IPv4 multicast routes.

sparse Display sparse IPv4 multicast routes.

count Display the route and packet count from the IPv4 multicast

routing (mroute) table.

summary Display the contents of the IPv4 multicast routing (mroute)

table in an abbreviated form.

awplus# show ip mroute

IP Multicast Routing Table

Flags: I - Immediate Stat, T - Timed Stat, F - Forwarder 

installed

Timers: Uptime/Stat Expiry

Interface State: Interface (TTL)



(10.10.1.52, 224.0.1.3), uptime 00:00:31, stat expires 00:02:59

Owner PIM-SM, Flags: TF

Incoming interface: vlan2

Outgoing interface list:

vlan3 (1)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 839

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

SHOW IP MROUTE

Figure 26-2: Example output from the show ip mroute command with the

source and group IPv4 address specified

The following is a sample output of this command displaying the packet count

from the IPv4 multicast routing table:

Figure 26-3: Example output from the show ip mroute count command

The following is a sample output for this command displaying the IPv4 multicast

routing table in an abbreviated form:

Figure 26-4: Example output from the show ip mroute summary command

awplus# show ip mroute 10.10.1.52 224.0.1.3



IP Multicast Routing Table

Flags: I - Immediate Stat, T - Timed Stat, F - Forwarder 

installed

Timers: Uptime/Stat Expiry

Interface State: Interface (TTL)



(10.10.1.52, 224.0.1.3), uptime 00:03:24, stat expires 00:01:28

Owner PIM-SM, Flags: TF

Incoming interface: vlan2

Outgoing interface list:

vlan3 (1)

awplus# show ip mroute count 

IP Multicast Statistics

Total 1 routes using 132 bytes memory

Route limit/Route threshold: 2147483647/2147483647

Total NOCACHE/WRONGVIF/WHOLEPKT recv from fwd: 1/0/0

Total NOCACHE/WRONGVIF/WHOLEPKT sent to clients: 1/0/0

Immediate/Timed stat updates sent to clients: 0/0

Reg ACK recv/Reg NACK recv/Reg pkt sent: 0/0/0

Next stats poll: 00:01:10



Forwarding Counts: Pkt count/Byte count, Other Counts: Wrong If 

pkts

Fwd msg counts: WRONGVIF/WHOLEPKT recv

Client msg counts: WRONGVIF/WHOLEPKT/Imm Stat/Timed Stat sent

Reg pkt counts: Reg ACK recv/Reg NACK recv/Reg pkt sent



(10.10.1.52, 224.0.1.3), Forwarding: 2/19456, Other: 0

Fwd msg: 0/0, Client msg: 0/0/0/0, Reg: 0/0/0

awplus# show ip mroute summary



IP Multicast Routing Table

Flags: I - Immediate Stat, T - Timed Stat, F - Forwarder 

installed

Timers: Uptime/Stat Expiry

Interface State: Interface (TTL)



(10.10.1.52, 224.0.1.3), 00:01:32/00:03:20, PIM-SM, Flags: TF

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 840

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

SHOW IP MVIF

show ip mvif

Overview Use this command to display the contents of the IPv4 Multicast Routing

Information Base (MRIB) VIF table.

Syntax show ip mvif [<interface>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example awplus# show ip mvif vlan2

Output Figure 26-5: Example output from the show ip mvif command

Figure 26-6: Example output from the show ip mvif command with the

interface parameter vlan2 specified

Parameter Description

<interface>The interface to display information about.

Interface Vif Owner TTL Local Remote Uptime

Idx Module Address Address

vlan2 0 PIM-SM 1 192.168.1.53 0.0.0.0 00:04:26

vlan3 2 PIM-SM 1 192.168.10.53 0.0.0.0 00:04:25



Interface Vif Owner TTL Local Remote Uptime

Idx Module Address Address

vlan2 0 PIM-SM 1 192.168.1.53 0.0.0.0 00:05:17

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 841

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

SHOW IP RPF

show ip rpf

Overview Use this command to display Reverse Path Forwarding (RPF) information for the

specified IPv4 source address.

Syntax show ip rpf <source-addr>

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example awplus# show ip rpf 10.10.10.50

Parameter Description

<ipv4-source- addr>Source IPv4 address, in dotted decimal notation in the

format A.B.C.D.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 842

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

SHOW IPV6 MROUTE

show ipv6 mroute

Overview Use this command to display the contents of the IPv6 multicast routing (mroute)

table.

Syntax show ipv6 mroute [<ipv6-group-addr>] [<ipv6-source-addr>]

[{count|summary}]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Examples awplus# show ipv6 mroute

awplus# show ipv6 mroute count

awplus# show ipv6 mroute summary

awplus# show ipv6 mroute 2001::2 ff08::1 count

awplus# show ipv6 mroute 2001::2 ff08::1

awplus# show ipv6 mroute 2001::2 summary

Output The following is a sample output of this command displaying the IPv6 multicast

routing table for a single static IPv6 Multicast route:

Figure 26-7: Example output from the show ipv6 mroute command

Parameter Description

<ipv6-group-addr> Group IPv6 address, in hexadecimal notation in the format

X.X::X.X.

<ipv6-source-addr> Source IPv6 address, in hexadecimal notation in the format

X.X::X.X.

count Display the route and packet count from the IPv6 multicast

routing (mroute) table.

summary Display the contents of the IPv6 multicast routing (mroute)

table in an abbreviated form.

awplus#show ipv6 mroute 

IPv6 Multicast Routing Table 

Flags: I - Immediate Stat, T - Timed Stat, F - Forwarder 

installed 

Timers: Uptime/Stat Expiry 

Interface State: Interface 

(2001::2, ff08::1), uptime 03:18:38 

Owner IMI, Flags: F 

Incoming interface: vlan2 

Outgoing interface list: 

vlan3 



C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 843

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

SHOW IPV6 MROUTE

The following is a sample output of this command displaying the IPv6 multicast

routing count table for a single static IPv6 Multicast route:

Figure 26-8: Example output from the show ipv6 mroute count command

The following is a sample output of this command displaying the IPv6 multicast

routing summary table for a single static IPv6 Multicast route:

Figure 26-9: Example output from the show ipv6 mroute summary command

awplus#show ipv6 mroute count 



IPv6 Multicast Statistics 

Total 1 routes using 152 bytes memory 

Route limit/Route threshold: 1024/1024 

Total NOCACHE/WRONGmif/WHOLEPKT recv from fwd: 6/0/0 

Total NOCACHE/WRONGmif/WHOLEPKT sent to clients: 6/0/0 

Immediate/Timed stat updates sent to clients: 0/0 

Reg ACK recv/Reg NACK recv/Reg pkt sent: 0/0/0 

Next stats poll: 00:01:14 



Forwarding Counts: Pkt count/Byte count, Other Counts: Wrong If 

pkts 

Fwd msg counts: WRONGmif/WHOLEPKT recv 

Client msg counts: WRONGmif/WHOLEPKT/Imm Stat/Timed Stat sent 

Reg pkt counts: Reg ACK recv/Reg NACK recv/Reg pkt sent 



(2001::2, ff08::1), Forwarding: 0/0, Other: 0 

Fwd msg: 0/0, Client msg: 0/0/0/0, Reg: 0/0/0 



awplus#show ipv6 mroute summary 

IPv6 Multicast Routing Table 

Flags: I - Immediate Stat, T - Timed Stat, F - Forwarder 

installed 

Timers: Uptime/Stat Expiry 

Interface State: Interface 



(2001::2, ff08::1), 03:20:28/-, IMI, Flags: F 



C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 844

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

SHOW IPV6 MULTICAST FORWARDING

show ipv6 multicast forwarding

Overview Use this command to view the status of multicast forwarding slow-path-packet

setting.

Syntax show ipv6 multicast forwarding

Mode User Exec

Example To show the status of the multicast forwarding, slow-path-packet setting, use the

following command:

awplus# show ipv6 multicast forwarding

Output Figure 26-10: Example output from the show ipv6 multicast forwarding

command:

Commands

ipv6 multicast forward-slow-path-packet

ipv6 multicast forwarding is disabled

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 845

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

MULTICAST COMMANDS

SHOW IPV6 MIF

show ipv6 mif

Overview Use this command to display the contents of the IPv6 Multicast Routing

Information Base (MRIB) MIF table.

Syntax show ipv6 mif [<interface>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example awplus# show ipv6 mif

awplus# show ipv6 mif vlan2

Output Figure 26-11: Example output from the show ipv6 mif command

Figure 26-12: Example output from the show ipv6 mif command with the

interface parameter vlan2 specified

Parameter Description

<interface>The interface to display information about.

awplus#show ipv6 mif 

Interface Mif Owner Uptime 

Idx Module 

vlan3 0 MLD/MLD Proxy-Service 03:28:48 

vlan2 1 MLD/MLD Proxy-Service 03:28:48 

vlan1 2 MLD/MLD Proxy-Service 03:28:48 



Interface Mif Owner TTL Remote Uptime

Idx Module Address

vlan2 0 PIM-SMv6 1 0.0.0.0 00:05:17

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 846

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

Part 5: Access and Security

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 847

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPv4 Hardware

Access Control List

(ACL) Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference of IPv4 Hardware Access Control

List (ACL) commands. It contains detailed command information and command

examples about IPv4 hardware ACLs, which you can apply directly to interfaces

using the access-group command.

To apply ACLs to an LACP channel group, apply it to all the individual switch ports

in the channel group. To apply ACLs to a static channel group, apply it to the static

channel group itself.

Most ACL command titles include information in parentheses:

• When the command title ends with words in parentheses, these words

indicate usage instead of keywords to enter into the CLI. For example, the

title access-list (numbered hardware ACL for ICMP) indicates that the

command is used to create an ACL with the syntax:

access-list <3000-3699> <action> icmp <source-ip> <dest-ip>

[icmp-type <number>] [vlan <1-4094>]

• When the command title is completely surrounded by parentheses, the title

indicates the type of ACL filter instead of keywords to enter into the CLI. For

example, the title (named hardware ACL: ICMP entry) represents a

command with the syntax:

[<sequence-number>] <action> icmp <source-ip> <dest-ip>

[icmp-type <number>] [vlan <1-4094>]

Hardware ACLs will permit access unless explicitly denied by an ACL action.

Sub-modes Many of the ACL commands operate from sub-modes that are specific to particular

ACL types. The following table shows the CLI prompts at which ACL commands are

entered.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 848

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

References For descriptions of ACLs, and further information about rules when applying them,

see the ACL Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

For more information on link aggregation see the following references:

•the Link Aggregation Feature Overview_and Configuration Guide.

•Link Aggregation Commands

Command List •“access-group” on page 850

•“access-list (numbered hardware ACL for ICMP)” on page 852

•“access-list (numbered hardware ACL for IP packets)” on page 856

Table 27-1: IPv4 Hardware Access List Commands and Prompts

Command Name Command Mode Prompt

show interface access-group Privileged Exec awplus#

show access-list (IPv4 Hardware ACLs) Privileged Exec awplus#

show interface access-group Privileged Exec awplus#

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for IP

packets)

Global Configuration awplus(config)#

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for

ICMP)

Global Configuration awplus(config)#

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for IP

protocols)

Global Configuration awplus(config)#

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for

TCP or UDP)

Global Configuration awplus(config)#

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for

MAC addresses)

Global Configuration awplus(config)#

access-list hardware (named hardware

ACL)

Global Configuration awplus(config)#

(named hardware ACL: IP packet entry) IPv4 Hardware ACL

Configuration

awplus(config-ip-hw-acl)#

(named hardware ACL: ICMP entry) IPv4 Hardware ACL

Configuration

awplus(config-ip-hw-acl)#

(named hardware ACL: IP protocol entry) IPv4 Hardware ACL

Configuration

awplus(config-ip-hw-acl)#

(named hardware ACL: TCP or UDP entry) IPv4 Hardware ACL

Configuration

awplus(config-ip-hw-acl)#

(named hardware ACL: MAC entry) IPv4 Hardware ACL

Configuration

awplus(config-ip-hw-acl)#

commit (IPv4) IPv4 Hardware ACL

Configuration

awplus(config-ip-hw-acl)#

access-group Interface Configuration awplus(config-if)#

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 849

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

•“access-list (numbered hardware ACL for IP protocols)” on page 859

•“access-list (numbered hardware ACL for MAC addresses)” on page 863

•“access-list (numbered hardware ACL for TCP or UDP)” on page 866

•“access-list hardware (named hardware ACL)” on page 870

•“(named hardware ACL: ICMP entry)” on page 872

•“(named hardware ACL: IP packet entry)” on page 876

•“(named hardware ACL: IP protocol entry)” on page 880

•“(named hardware ACL: MAC entry)” on page 886

•“(named hardware ACL: TCP or UDP entry)” on page 889

•“commit (IPv4)” on page 893

•“show access-list (IPv4 Hardware ACLs)” on page 894

•“show interface access-group” on page 896

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 850

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-GROUP

access-group

Overview This command adds or removes a hardware-based access-list to or from a switch

port interface. The number of hardware numbered and named access-lists that can

be added to a switch port interface is determined by the available memory in

hardware-based packet classification tables.

This command works in Interface Configuration mode to apply hardware

access-lists to selected switch port interfaces.

The no variant of this command removes the selected access-list from an interface.

Syntax access-group

[<3000-3699>|<4000-4699>|<hardware-access-list-name>]

no access-group

[<3000-3699>|4000-4699|<hardware-access-list-name>]

Mode Interface Configuration for a switch port interface

Default Any traffic on an interface controlled by a hardware ACL that does not explicitly

match a filter is permitted.

Usage First create an IP access-list that applies the appropriate permit/deny requirements

with the access-list (numbered hardware ACL for IP packets) command, the

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for MAC addresses) command or the

access-list hardware (named hardware ACL) command. Then use this command to

apply this hardware access- list to a specific port or port range. Note that this

command will apply the access-list only to incoming data packets.

To apply ACLs to an LACP aggregated link, apply it to all the individual switch ports

in the aggregated group. To apply ACLs to a static channel group, apply it to the

static channel group itself. An ACL can even be applied to a static aggregated link

that spans more than one switch instance (Link Aggregation Commands).

Note that you cannot apply software numbered ACLs to switch port interfaces with

the access-group command. This command will only apply hardware ACLs.

NOTE: Hardware ACLs will permit access unless explicitly denied by an ACL action.

Parameter Description

<3000-3699> Hardware IP access-list.

<4000-4699>Hardware MAC access-list.

<hardware-access-list-name>The hardware access-list name.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 851

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-GROUP

Examples To add the numbered hardware access-list 3005 to switch port interface port1.0.1,

enter the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1

awplus(config-if)# access-group 3005

To add the named hardware access-list “hw-acl” to switch port interface port1.0.2,

enter the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.2

awplus(config-if)# access-group hw-acl

To apply an ACL to static channel group 2 containing switch port1.0.5 and

port1.0.6, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.5-1.0.6

awplus(config-if)# static-channel-group 2

awplus(config)# interface sa2

awplus(config-if)# access-group 3000

Commands

access-list hardware (named hardware ACL)

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for IP packets)

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for MAC addresses)

show interface access-group

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 852

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST (NUMBERED HARDWARE ACL FOR ICMP)

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for

ICMP)

Overview This command creates an access-list for use with hardware classification. The

access-list will match on ICMP packets that have the specified source and

destination IP addresses and, optionally, ICMP type. You can use the value any

instead of source or destination address if an address does not matter.

Once you have configured the ACL, you can use the access-group or the match

access-group command to apply this ACL to a port, VLAN or QoS class-map.

The optional vlan parameter can be used to match tagged (802.1q) packets.

The no variant of this command removes the previously specified access-list.

Syntax access-list <3000-3699> <action> icmp <source-ip> <dest-ip>

[icmp-type <number>] [vlan <1-4094>]

no access-list <3000-3699>

Parameter Description

<3000-3699>An ID number for this hardware IP access-list.

<action> The action that the switch will take on matching packets:

deny Reject packets that match the source

and destination filtering specified

with this command.

permit Permit packets that match the source

and destination filtering specified

with this command.

copy-to-cpu Send a copy of matching packets to

the CPU.

copy-to-mirror Send a copy of matching packets to

the mirror port.

Use the mirror interface command to

configure the mirror port.

send-to-mirror Send matching packets to the mirror

port.

Use the mirror interface command to

configure the mirror port.

send-to-cpu Send matching packets to the CPU.

icmp Match against ICMP packets

<source-ip> The source addresses to match against. You can specify a single

host, a subnet, or all source addresses. The following are the valid

formats for specifying the source:

any Match any source IP address.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 853

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST (NUMBERED HARDWARE ACL FOR ICMP)

host <ip-addr> Match a single source host with the

IP address given by <ip-addr> in

dotted decimal notation.

<ip-addr>/<prefix>Match any source IP address within

the specified subnet. Specify the

subnet by entering the IPv4 address,

then a forward slash, then the prefix

length.

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Match any source IP address within

the specified subnet. Specify the

subnet by entering a reverse mask in

dotted decimal format. For example,

entering “192.168.1.1 0.0.0.255” is the

same as entering 192.168.1.1/24.

<dest-ip>The destination addresses to match against. You can specify a

single host, a subnet, or all destination addresses. The following

are the valid formats for specifying the destination:

any Match any destination IP address.

host <ip-addr> Match a single destination host with

the IP address given by <ip-addr> in

dotted decimal notation.

<ip-addr>/<prefix>Match any destination IP address

within the specified subnet. Specify

the subnet by entering the IPv4

address, then a forward slash, then

the prefix length.

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Match any destination IP address

within the specified subnet. Specify

the subnet by entering a reverse

mask in dotted decimal format. For

example, entering “192.168.1.1

0.0.0.255” is the same as entering

192.168.1.1/24.

icmp-type

The type of ICMP message to match against, as defined in RFC792

and RFC950. Values include:

0Echo replies.

3Destination unreachable messages.

4Source quench messages.

5Redirect (change route) messages.

8Echo requests.

11 Time exceeded messages.

12 Parameter problem messages.

13 Timestamp requests.

14 Timestamp replies.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 854

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST (NUMBERED HARDWARE ACL FOR ICMP)

Mode Global Configuration

Default On an interface controlled by a hardware ACL, any traffic that does not explicitly

match a filter is permitted.

Usage This command creates an ACL for use with hardware classification. Once you have

configured the ACL, use the access-group or the match access-group command to

apply this ACL to a port, VLAN or QoS class-map.

ACLs numbered in the range 3000-3699 match on packets that have the specified

source and destination IP addresses.

ICMP ACLs will match any ICMP packet that has the specified source and

destination IP addresses and ICMP type. The ICMP type is an optional parameter.

You can use ACLs to redirect packets, by sending them to the CPU, the mirror port,

or a specific VLAN on a specific port. Use such ACLs with caution. They could

prevent control packets from reaching the correct destination, such as EPSR

healthcheck messages and VCStack messages.

Hardware ACLs will permit access unless explicitly denied by an ACL action.

Examples To create an access-list that will permit ICMP packets with a source address of

192.168.1.0/24 with any destination address and an ICMP type of 5 enter the

following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list 3000 permit icmp 192.168.1.0/24 any

icmp-type 5

To destroy the access-list with an access-list identity of 3000 enter the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no access-list 3000

Commands

access-group

match access-group

show running-config

show access-list (IPv4 Hardware ACLs)

15 Information requests.

16 Information replies.

17 Address mask requests.

18 Address mask replies.

vlan <1-4094> The VLAN to match against. The ACL will match against the

specified ID in the packet’s VLAN tag.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 855

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST (NUMBERED HARDWARE ACL FOR ICMP)

Command

changes

Version 5.4.6-2.1: send-to-vlan-port action parameter added

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 856

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST (NUMBERED HARDWARE ACL FOR IP PACKETS)

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for IP

packets)

Overview This command creates an access-list for use with hardware classification. The

access-list will match on packets that have the specified source and destination IP

addresses. You can use the value any instead of source or destination address if an

address does not matter.

Once you have configured the ACL, you can use the access-group or the match

access-group command to apply this ACL to a port, VLAN or QoS class-map.

The optional vlan parameter can be used to match tagged (802.1q) packets.

The no variant of this command removes the previously specified IP hardware

access-list.

Syntax access-list <3000-3699> <action> ip <source-ip> <dest-ip> [vlan

<1-4094>]

no access-list <3000-3699>

Table 27-2: IP and ICMP parameters in access-list (hardware IP numbered)

Parameter Description

<3000-3699>An ID number for this hardware IP access-list.

<action> The action that the switch will take on matching packets:

deny Reject packets that match the

source and destination filtering

specified with this command.

permit Permit packets that match the

source and destination filtering

specified with this command.

copy-to-cpu Send a copy of matching packets to

the CPU.

copy-to-mirror Send a copy of matching packets to

the mirror port.

Use the mirror interface command

to configure the mirror port.

send-to-mirror Send matching packets to the mirror

port.

Use the mirror interface command

to configure the mirror port.

send-to-cpu Send matching packets to the CPU.

ip Match against IP packets

<source-ip> The source addresses to match against. You can specify a single

host, a subnet, or all source addresses. The following are the valid

formats for specifying the source:

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 857

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST (NUMBERED HARDWARE ACL FOR IP PACKETS)

Mode Global Configuration

Default On an interface controlled by a hardware ACL, any traffic that does not explicitly

match a filter is permitted.

Usage This command creates an ACL for use with hardware classification. Once you have

configured the ACL, use the access-group or the match access-group command to

apply this ACL to a port, VLAN or QoS class-map.

any Match any source IP address.

host <ip-addr> Match a single source host with the

IP address given by <ip-addr> in

dotted decimal notation.

<ip-addr>/<prefix>Match any source IP address within

the specified subnet. Specify the

subnet by entering the IPv4 address,

then a forward slash, then the prefix

length.

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Match any source IP address within

the specified subnet. Specify the

subnet by entering a reverse mask in

dotted decimal format. For example,

entering “192.168.1.1 0.0.0.255” is

the same as entering 192.168.1.1/24.

<dest-ip>The destination addresses to match against. You can specify a

single host, a subnet, or all destination addresses. The following

are the valid formats for specifying the destination:

any Match any destination IP address.

host <ip-addr> Match a single destination host with

the IP address given by <ip-addr> in

dotted decimal notation.

<ip-addr>/<prefix>Match any destination IP address

within the specified subnet. Specify

the subnet by entering the IPv4

address, then a forward slash, then

the prefix length.

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Match any destination IP address

within the specified subnet. Specify

the subnet by entering a reverse

mask in dotted decimal format. For

example, entering “192.168.1.1

0.0.0.255” is the same as entering

192.168.1.1/24.

vlan <1-4094> The VLAN to match against. The ACL will match against the

specified ID in the packet’s VLAN tag.

Table 27-2: IP and ICMP parameters in access-list (hardware IP numbered)

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 858

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST (NUMBERED HARDWARE ACL FOR IP PACKETS)

ACLs numbered in the range 3000-3699 match on packets that have the specified

source and destination IP addresses.

You can use ACLs to redirect packets, by sending them to the CPU, the mirror port,

or a specific VLAN on a specific port. Use such ACLs with caution. They could

prevent control packets from reaching the correct destination, such as EPSR

healthcheck messages and VCStack messages.

Hardware ACLs will permit access unless explicitly denied by an ACL action.

Examples To create an access-list that will permit IP packets with a source address of

192.168.1.1 and any destination address, enter the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list 3000 permit ip 192.168.1.1/32 any

To destroy the access-list with an access-list identity of 3000 enter the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no access-list 3000

Commands

access-group

match access-group

show running-config

show access-list (IPv4 Hardware ACLs)

Command

changes

Version 5.4.6-2.1: send-to-vlan-port action parameter added

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 859

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST (NUMBERED HARDWARE ACL FOR IP PROTOCOLS)

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for IP

protocols)

Overview This command creates an access-list for use with hardware classification. The

access-list will match on packets that have the specified source and destination IP

addresses and IP protocol number. You can use the value any instead of source or

destination address if an address does not matter.

Once you have configured the ACL, you can use the access-group or the match

access-group command to apply this ACL to a port, VLAN or QoS class-map.

The optional vlan parameter can be used to match tagged (802.1q) packets.

The no variant of this command removes the previously specified IP hardware

access-list.

Syntax access-list <3000-3699> <action> proto <1-255> <source-ip>

<dest-ip> [vlan <1-4094>]

no access-list <3000-3699>

Table 27-3: Parameters in access-list (hardware IP numbered)

Parameter Description

<3000-3699>An ID number for this hardware IP access-list.

<action> The action that the switch will take on matching packets:

deny Reject packets that match the source

and destination filtering specified

with this command.

permit Permit packets that match the source

and destination filtering specified

with this command.

copy-to-cpu Send a copy of matching packets to

the CPU.

copy-to-mirror Send a copy of matching packets to

the mirror port.

Use the mirror interface command to

configure the mirror port.

send-to-mirror Send matching packets to the mirror

port.

Use the mirror interface command to

configure the mirror port.

send-to-cpu Send matching packets to the CPU.

proto <1-255>The IP protocol number to match against, as defined by IANA

(Internet Assigned Numbers Authority

www.iana.org/assignments/protocol-numbers)

See below for a list of IP protocol numbers and their descriptions.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 860

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST (NUMBERED HARDWARE ACL FOR IP PROTOCOLS)

<source-ip> The source addresses to match against. You can specify a single

host, a subnet, or all source addresses. The following are the valid

formats for specifying the source:

any Match any source IP address.

host <ip-addr> Match a single source host with the

IP address given by <ip-addr> in

dotted decimal notation.

<ip-addr>/<prefix>Match any source IP address within

the specified subnet. Specify the

subnet by entering the IPv4 address,

then a forward slash, then the prefix

length.

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Match any source IP address within

the specified subnet. Specify the

subnet by entering a reverse mask in

dotted decimal format. For example,

entering “192.168.1.1 0.0.0.255” is

the same as entering 192.168.1.1/24.

<dest-ip>The destination addresses to match against. You can specify a

single host, a subnet, or all destination addresses. The following

are the valid formats for specifying the destination:

any Match any destination IP address.

host <ip-addr> Match a single destination host with

the IP address given by <ip-addr> in

dotted decimal notation.

<ip-addr>/<prefix>Match any destination IP address

within the specified subnet. Specify

the subnet by entering the IPv4

address, then a forward slash, then

the prefix length.

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Match any destination IP address

within the specified subnet. Specify

the subnet by entering a reverse

mask in dotted decimal format. For

example, entering “192.168.1.1

0.0.0.255” is the same as entering

192.168.1.1/24.

vlan <1-4094> The VLAN to match against. The ACL will match against the

specified ID in the packet’s VLAN tag.

Table 27-3: Parameters in access-list (hardware IP numbered) (cont.)

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 861

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST (NUMBERED HARDWARE ACL FOR IP PROTOCOLS)

Table 27-4: IP protocol number and description

Protocol Number Protocol Description [RFC]

1Internet Control Message [RFC792]

2Internet Group Management [RFC1112]

3Gateway-to-Gateway [RFC823]

4IP in IP [RFC2003]

5Stream [RFC1190] [RFC1819]

6TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) [RFC793]

8EGP (Exterior Gateway Protocol) [RFC888]

9IGP (Interior Gateway Protocol) [IANA]

11 Network Voice Protocol [RFC741]

17 UDP (User Datagram Protocol) [RFC768]

20 Host monitoring [RFC869]

27 RDP (Reliable Data Protocol) [RFC908]

28 IRTP (Internet Reliable Transaction Protocol) [RFC938]

29 ISO-TP4 (ISO Transport Protocol Class 4) [RFC905]

30 Bulk Data Transfer Protocol [RFC969]

33 DCCP (Datagram Congestion Control Protocol) [RFC4340]

48 DSR (Dynamic Source Routing Protocol) [RFC4728]

50 ESP (Encap Security Payload) [RFC2406]

51 AH (Authentication Header) [RFC2402]

54 NARP (NBMA Address Resolution Protocol) [RFC1735]

58 ICMP for IPv6 [RFC1883]

59 No Next Header for IPv6 [RFC1883]

60 Destination Options for IPv6 [RFC1883]

88 EIGRP (Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol)

89 OSPFIGP [RFC1583]

97 Ethernet-within-IP Encapsulation / RFC3378

98 Encapsulation Header / RFC1241

108 IP Payload Compression Protocol / RFC2393

112 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol / RFC3768

134 RSVP-E2E-IGNORE / RFC3175

135 Mobility Header / RFC3775

136 UDPLite / RFC3828

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 862

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST (NUMBERED HARDWARE ACL FOR IP PROTOCOLS)

Mode Global Configuration

Default On an interface controlled by a hardware ACL, any traffic that does not explicitly

match a filter is permitted.

Usage This command creates an ACL for use with hardware classification. Once you have

configured the ACL, use the access-group or the match access-group command to

apply this ACL to a port, VLAN or QoS class-map.

ACLs numbered in the range 3000-3699 match on packets that have the specified

source and destination IP addresses.

You can use ACLs to redirect packets, by sending them to the CPU, the mirror port,

or a specific VLAN on a specific port. Use such ACLs with caution. They could

prevent control packets from reaching the correct destination, such as EPSR

healthcheck messages and VCStack messages.

Hardware ACLs will permit access unless explicitly denied by an ACL action.

Examples To create an access-list that will deny all IGMP packets (IP protocol 2) from the

192.168.0.0 network, enter the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list 3000 deny proto 2 192.168.0.0/16

any

To destroy the access-list with an access-list identity of 3000 enter the following

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no access-list 3000

Commands

access-group

match access-group

show running-config

show access-list (IPv4 Hardware ACLs)

Command

changes

Version 5.4.6-2.1: send-to-vlan-port action parameter added

137 MPLS-in-IP / RFC4023

138 MANET Protocols / RFC-ietf-manet-iana-07.txt

139-252 Unassigned / IANA

253 Use for experimentation and testing / RFC3692

254 Use for experimentation and testing / RFC3692

255 Reserved / IANA

Table 27-4: IP protocol number and description (cont.)

Protocol Number Protocol Description [RFC]

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 863

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST (NUMBERED HARDWARE ACL FOR MAC ADDRESSES)

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for

MAC addresses)

Overview This command creates an access-list for use with hardware classification. The

access-list will match on packets that have the specified source and destination

MAC addresses. You can use the value any instead of source or destination address

if an address does not matter.

Once you have configured the ACL, you can use the access-group or the match

access-group command to apply this ACL to a port, VLAN or QoS class-map.

The no variant of this command removes the specified MAC hardware filter

access-list.

Syntax access-list <4000-4699> <action> {<source-mac>|any}

{<dest-mac>|any} [vlan <1-4094>] [inner-vlan <1-4094>]

no access-list <4000-4699>

Parameter Description

<4000-4699>Hardware MAC access-list.

<action> The action that the switch will take on matching packets:

deny Reject packets that match the source

and destination filtering specified with

this command.

permit Permit packets that match the source

and destination filtering specified with

this command.

copy-to-cpu Send a copy of matching packets to

the CPU.

copy-to-mirror Send a copy of matching packets to

the mirror port.

Use the mirror interface command to

configure the mirror port.

send-to-mirror Send matching packets to the mirror

port.

Use the mirror interface command to

configure the mirror port.

send-to-cpu Send matching packets to the CPU.

<source-mac> The source MAC address to match against, followed by the mask.

Enter the address in the format <HHHH.HHHH.HHHH>, where each

H is a hexadecimal number.

Enter the mask in the format <HHHH.HHHH.HHHH>, where each H

is a hexadecimal number. For a mask, each value is either 0 or F,

where FF = Ignore, and 00 = Match.

any Match against any source MAC address.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 864

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST (NUMBERED HARDWARE ACL FOR MAC ADDRESSES)

Mode Global Configuration

Default On an interface controlled by a hardware ACL, any traffic that does not explicitly

match a filter is permitted.

Usage This command creates an ACL for use with hardware classification. Once you have

configured the ACL, use the access-group or the match access-group command to

apply this ACL to a port, VLAN or QoS class-map.

ACLs numbered in the range 4000-4699 match on packets that have the specified

source and destination MAC addresses.

You can use ACLs to redirect packets, by sending them to the CPU, the mirror port,

or a specific VLAN on a specific port. Use such ACLs with caution. They could

prevent control packets from reaching the correct destination, such as EPSR

healthcheck messages and VCStack messages.

Hardware ACLs will permit access unless explicitly denied by an ACL action.

Examples To create an access-list that will permit packets with a source MAC address of

0000.00ab.1234 and any destination address, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list 4000 permit 0000.00ab.1234

0000.0000.0000 any

To create an access-list that will permit packets if their source MAC address starts

with 0000.00ab, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list 4001 permit 0000.00ab.1234

0000.0000.FFFF any

<dest-mac> The destination MAC address to match against, followed by the

mask.

Enter the address in the format <HHHH.HHHH.HHHH>, where each

H is a hexadecimal number.

Enter the mask in the format <HHHH.HHHH.HHHH>, where each H

is a hexadecimal number. For a mask, each value is either 0 or F,

where FF = Ignore, and 00 = Match.

any Match against any destination MAC address.

vlan <1-4094>Match against the specified ID in the packet’s VLAN tag.

inner-vlan

<1-4094>

Match against the inner VLAN tag (VID). This parameter is used

within double-tagged VLANs. It is sometimes referred to as the

C-TAG (Customer VLAN TAG), where the vlan VID tag is referred to as

the S-TAG (Service VLAN TAG).

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 865

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST (NUMBERED HARDWARE ACL FOR MAC ADDRESSES)

To create an access-list that will send a copy of packets to the mirror port if their

source MAC address starts with 0000.00ab, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list 4001 copy-to-mirror 0000.00ab.1234

0000.0000.FFFF any

You also need to configure the mirror port with the mirror interface command.

To destroy the access-list with an access-list identity of 4000 enter the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no access-list 4000

Commands

access-group

match access-group

show running-config

show access-list (IPv4 Hardware ACLs)

Command

changes

Version 5.4.6-2.1: send-to-vlan-port action parameter added

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 866

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST (NUMBERED HARDWARE ACL FOR TCP OR UDP)

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for TCP

or UDP)

Overview This command creates an access-list for use with hardware classification. The

access-list will match on TCP or UDP packets that have the specified source and

destination IP addresses and optionally, port values. You can use the value any

instead of source or destination IP address if an address does not matter.

Once you have configured the ACL, you can use the access-group or the match

access-group command to apply this ACL to a port, VLAN or QoS class-map.

You can use the optional vlan parameter to match tagged (802.1q) packets.

The no variant of this command removes the specified IP hardware access-list.

Syntax access-list <3000-3699> <action> {tcp|udp} <source-ip>

[<source-ports>] <dest-ip> [<dest-ports>] [vlan <1-4094>]

no access-list <3000-3699>

Parameter Description

<3000-3699>An ID number for this hardware IP access-list.

<action> The action that the switch will take on matching packets:

deny Reject packets that match the

source and destination filtering

specified with this command.

permit Permit packets that match the

source and destination filtering

specified with this command.

copy-to-cpu Send a copy of matching packets to

the CPU.

copy-to-mirror Send a copy of matching packets to

the mirror port.

Use the mirror interface command

to configure the mirror port.

send-to-mirror Send matching packets to the

mirror port.

Use the mirror interface command

to configure the mirror port.

send-to-cpu Send matching packets to the CPU.

tcp Match against TCP packets.

udp Match against UDP packets.

<source-ip> The source addresses to match against. You can specify a single

host, a subnet, or all source addresses. The following are the valid

formats for specifying the source:

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 867

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST (NUMBERED HARDWARE ACL FOR TCP OR UDP)

any Match any source IP address.

host <ip-addr> Match a single source host with the

IP address given by <ip-addr> in

dotted decimal notation.

<ip-addr>/<prefix>Match any source IP address within

the specified subnet. Specify the

subnet by entering the IPv4 address,

then a forward slash, then the prefix

length.

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Match any source IP address within

the specified subnet. Specify the

subnet by entering a reverse mask in

dotted decimal format. For example,

entering “192.168.1.1 0.0.0.255” is

the same as entering 192.168.1.1/24.

<source-ports

Match source TCP or UDP port numbers. Port numbers are

specified as integers between 0 and 65535. You can specify one or

more port numbers as follows:

eq <0-65535> Match a single port number.

lt <0-65535> Match all port numbers that are less

than the specified port number.

gt <0-65535> Match all port numbers that are

greater than the specified port

number.

ne <0-65535> Match all port numbers except the

specified port number.

range <start-port>

<end-port>

Match a range of port numbers.

<dest-ip>The destination addresses to match against. You can specify a

single host, a subnet, or all destination addresses. The following

are the valid formats for specifying the destination:

any Match any destination IP address.

host <ip-addr> Match a single destination host with

the IP address given by <ip-addr> in

dotted decimal notation.

<ip-addr>/<prefix>Match any destination IP address

within the specified subnet. Specify

the subnet by entering the IPv4

address, then a forward slash, then

the prefix length.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 868

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST (NUMBERED HARDWARE ACL FOR TCP OR UDP)

Mode Global Configuration

Default On an interface controlled by a hardware ACL, any traffic that does not explicitly

match a filter is permitted.

Usage This command creates an ACL for use with hardware classification. Once you have

configured the ACL, use the access-group or the match access-group command to

apply this ACL to a port, VLAN or QoS class-map.

ACLs numbered in the range 3000-3699 match on packets that have the specified

source and destination IP addresses.

You can use ACLs to redirect packets, by sending them to the CPU, the mirror port,

or a specific VLAN on a specific port. Use such ACLs with caution. They could

prevent control packets from reaching the correct destination, such as EPSR

healthcheck messages and VCStack messages.

Hardware ACLs will permit access unless explicitly denied by an ACL action.

Examples To create an access-list that will permit TCP packets with a destination address of

192.168.1.1, a destination port of 80, and any source address and source port, enter

the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list 3000 permit tcp any 192.168.1.1/32

eq 80

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Match any destination IP address

within the specified subnet. Specify

the subnet by entering a reverse

mask in dotted decimal format. For

example, entering “192.168.1.1

0.0.0.255” is the same as entering

192.168.1.1/24.

<dest-ports>Match destination TCP or UDP port numbers. Port numbers are

specified as integers between 0 and 65535. You can specify one or

more port numbers as follows:

eq <0-65535> Match a single port number.

lt <0-65535> Match all port numbers that are less

than the specified port number.

gt <0-65535> Match all port numbers that are

greater than the specified port

number.

ne <0-65535> Match all port numbers except the

specified port number.

range <start-port>

<end-port>

Match a range of port numbers.

vlan <1-4094> The VLAN to match against. The ACL will match against the

specified ID in the packet’s VLAN tag.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 869

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST (NUMBERED HARDWARE ACL FOR TCP OR UDP)

To create an access-list that will copy TCP packets to the mirror port, if they have a

destination address of 192.168.1.1, a destination port of 80, and any source address

and source port, enter the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list 3000 copy-to-mirror tcp any

192.168.1.1/32 eq 80

You also need to configure the mirror port with the mirror interface command.

Commands

access-group

match access-group

show running-config

show access-list (IPv4 Hardware ACLs)

Command

changes

Version 5.4.6-2.1: send-to-vlan-port action parameter added

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 870

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST HARDWARE (NAMED HARDWARE ACL)

access-list hardware (named hardware ACL)

Overview This command creates a named hardware access-list and puts you into IPv4

Hardware ACL Configuration mode, where you can add filter entries to the ACL.

Once you have configured the ACL, you can use the access-group or the match

access-group command to apply this ACL to a port, VLAN or QoS class-map.

The no variant of this command removes the specified named hardware ACL.

Syntax access-list hardware <name>

no access-list hardware <name>

Mode Global Configuration

Default Any traffic on an interface controlled by a hardware ACL that does not explicitly

match a filter is permitted.

Usage Use this command to name a hardware ACL and enter the IPv4 Hardware ACL

Configuration mode. If the named hardware ACL does not exist, it will be created

after entry. If the named hardware ACL already exists, then this command puts you

into IPv4 Hardware ACL Configuration mode for that existing ACL.

Entering this command moves you to the IPv4 Hardware ACL Configuration mode

(config-ip-hw-acl prompt), so you can enter ACL filters with sequence numbers.

From this prompt, configure the filters for the ACL. See the ACL Feature Overview

and Configuration Guide for complete examples of configured sequenced

numbered ACLs.

NOTE: Hardware ACLs will permit access unless explicitly denied by an ACL action.

Examples To create the hardware access-list named “ACL-1” and enter the IPv4 Hardware

ACL Configuration mode to specify the ACL filter entry, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list hardware ACL-1

awplus(config-ip-hw-acl)#

To remove the hardware access-list named “ACL-1”, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no access-list hardware ACL-1

Parameter Description

<name>Specify a name for the hardware ACL.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 871

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST HARDWARE (NAMED HARDWARE ACL)

Commands

access-group

(named hardware ACL: ICMP entry)

(named hardware ACL: IP protocol entry)

(named hardware ACL: TCP or UDP entry)

(access-list standard named filter)

show access-list (IPv4 Hardware ACLs)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 872

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(NAMED HARDWARE ACL: ICMP ENTRY)

(named hardware ACL: ICMP entry)

Overview Use this command to add a new ICMP filter entry to the current hardware

access-list. The filter will match on any ICMP packet that has the specified source

and destination IP addresses and (optionally) ICMP type. You can specify the value

any if source or destination address does not matter.

If you specify a sequence number, the switch inserts the new filter at the specified

location. Otherwise, the switch adds the new filter to the end of the access-list.

The no variant of this command removes an ICMP filter entry from the current

hardware access-list. You can specify the ICMP filter entry for removal by entering

either its sequence number (e.g. no 100), or by entering its ICMP filter profile

without specifying its sequence number (e.g. no permit icmp 192.168.1.0/24 any

icmp-type 11).

You can find the sequence number by running the show access-list (IPv4 Hardware

ACLs) command.

Hardware ACLs will permit access unless explicitly denied by an ACL action.

Syntax [<sequence-number>] <action> icmp <source-ip> <dest-ip>

[icmp-type <number>] [vlan <1-4094>]

no <sequence-number>

no <action> icmp <source-ip> <dest-ip> [icmp-type <number>]

[vlan <1-4094>]

Parameter Description

<sequence-



number>

The sequence number for the filter entry of the selected access

control list, in the range 1-65535. If you do not specify a

sequence number, the switch puts the entry at the end of the

ACL and assigns it the next available multiple of 10 as its

sequence number. .

<action> The action that the switch will take on matching packets:

deny Reject packets that match the

source and destination filtering

specified with this command.

permit Permit packets that match the

source and destination filtering

specified with this command.

copy-to-cpu Send a copy of matching packets

to the CPU.

copy-to-mirror Send a copy of matching packets

to the mirror port.

Use the mirror interface command

to configure the mirror port.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 873

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(NAMED HARDWARE ACL: ICMP ENTRY)

send-to-mirror Send matching packets to the

mirror port.

Use the mirror interface command

to configure the mirror port.

send-to-cpu Send matching packets to the CPU.

icmp Match against ICMP packets

<source-ip> The source addresses to match against. You can specify a single

host, a subnet, or all source addresses. The following are the

valid formats for specifying the source:

any Match any source IP address.

host <ip-addr> Match a single source host with the

IP address given by <ip-addr> in

dotted decimal notation.

<ip-addr>/<prefix>Match any source IP address within

the specified subnet. Specify the

subnet by entering the IPv4

address, then a forward slash, then

the prefix length.

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Match any source IP address within

the specified subnet. Specify the

subnet by entering a reverse mask

in dotted decimal format. For

example, entering “192.168.1.1

0.0.0.255” is the same as entering

192.168.1.1/24.

<dest-ip>The destination addresses to match against. You can specify a

single host, a subnet, or all destination addresses. The following

are the valid formats for specifying the destination:

any Match any destination IP address.

host <ip-addr> Match a single destination host

with the IP address given by

<ip-addr> in dotted decimal

notation.

<ip-addr>/<prefix>Match any destination IP address

within the specified subnet.

Specify the subnet by entering the

IPv4 address, then a forward slash,

then the prefix length.

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Match any destination IP address

within the specified subnet.

Specify the subnet by entering a

reverse mask in dotted decimal

format. For example, entering

“192.168.1.1 0.0.0.255” is the same

as entering 192.168.1.1/24.

icmp-type

The type of ICMP message to match against, as defined in

RFC792 and RFC950. Values include:

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 874

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(NAMED HARDWARE ACL: ICMP ENTRY)

Mode IPv4 Hardware ACL Configuration (accessed by running the command access-list

hardware (named hardware ACL))

Default On an interface controlled by a hardware ACL, any traffic that does not explicitly

match a filter is permitted.

Usage To use this command, first run the command access-list hardware (named

hardware ACL) and enter the desired access-list name. This changes the prompt to

awplus(config-ip-hw-acl)#.

Then use this command (and the other “named hardware ACL: entry” commands)

to add filter entries. You can add multiple filter entries to an ACL. You can insert a

new filter entry into the middle of an existing list by specifying the appropriate

sequence number. If you do not specify a sequence number, the switch puts the

entry at the end of the ACL and assigns it the next available multiple of 10 as its

sequence number.

Then use the access-group or the match access-group command to apply this ACL

to a port, VLAN or QoS class-map. Note that the ACL will only apply to incoming

data packets.

You can use ACLs to redirect packets, by sending them to the CPU, the mirror port,

or a specific VLAN on a specific port. Use such ACLs with caution. They could

prevent control packets from reaching the correct destination, such as EPSR

healthcheck messages and VCStack messages.

0Echo replies.

3Destination unreachable

messages.

4Source quench messages.

5Redirect (change route) messages.

8Echo requests.

11 Time exceeded messages.

12 Parameter problem messages.

13 Timestamp requests.

14 Timestamp replies.

15 Information requests.

16 Information replies.

17 Address mask requests.

18 Address mask replies.

vlan <1-4094> The VLAN to match against. The ACL will match against the

specified ID in the packet’s VLAN tag.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 875

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(NAMED HARDWARE ACL: ICMP ENTRY)

Examples To add an access-list filter entry with a sequence number of 100 to the access-list

named “my-list” that will permit ICMP packets with a source address of

192.168.1.0/24, any destination address and an ICMP type of 5, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list hardware my-list

awplus(config-ip-hw-acl)# 100 permit icmp 192.168.1.0/24 any

icmp-type 5

To remove an access-list filter entry with a sequence number of 100 from the

access-list named “my-list”, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list hardware my-list

awplus(config-ip-hw-acl)# no 100

Commands

access-group

access-list hardware (named hardware ACL)

match access-group

show running-config

show access-list (IPv4 Hardware ACLs)

Command

changes

Version 5.4.6-2.1: send-to-vlan-port action parameter added

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 876

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(NAMED HARDWARE ACL: IP PACKET ENTRY)

(named hardware ACL: IP packet entry)

Overview Use this command to add an IP packet filter entry to the current hardware

access-list. The filter will match on IP packets that have the specified IP and/or MAC

addresses. You can use the value any instead of source or destination IP or MAC

address if an address does not matter.

If you specify a sequence number, the switch inserts the new filter at the specified

location. Otherwise, the switch adds the new filter to the end of the access-list.

The no variant of this command removes a filter entry from the current hardware

access-list. You can specify the filter entry for removal by entering either its

sequence number (e.g. no 100), or by entering its filter profile without specifying

its sequence number (e.g. no deny ip 192.168.0.0/16 any).

You can find the sequence number by running the show access-list (IPv4 Hardware

ACLs) command.

Hardware ACLs will permit access unless explicitly denied by an ACL action.

Syntax [<sequence-number>] <action> ip <source-ip> <dest-ip>

[<source-mac> <dest-mac>] [vlan <1-4094>]

no <sequence-number>

no <action> ip <source-ip> <dest-ip> [<source-mac> <dest-mac>]

[vlan <1-4094>]

Parameter Description

<sequence-



number>

The sequence number for the filter entry of the selected access

control list, in the range 1-65535. If you do not specify a sequence

number, the switch puts the entry at the end of the ACL and

assigns it the next available multiple of 10 as its sequence

number. .

<action> The action that the switch will take on matching packets:

deny Reject packets that match the

source and destination filtering

specified with this command.

permit Permit packets that match the

source and destination filtering

specified with this command.

copy-to-cpu Send a copy of matching packets to

the CPU.

copy-to-mirror Send a copy of matching packets to

the mirror port.

Use the mirror interface command

to configure the mirror port.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 877

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(NAMED HARDWARE ACL: IP PACKET ENTRY)

send-to-mirror Send matching packets to the

mirror port.

Use the mirror interface command

to configure the mirror port.

send-to-cpu Send matching packets to the CPU.

ip Match against IP packets

<source-ip> The source addresses to match against. You can specify a single

host, a subnet, or all source addresses. The following are the valid

formats for specifying the source:

any Match any source IP address.

dhcpsnooping Match the source address learned

from the DHCP Snooping binding

database.

host <ip-addr> Match a single source host with the

IP address given by <ip-addr> in

dotted decimal notation.

<ip-addr>/<prefix>Match any source IP address within

the specified subnet. Specify the

subnet by entering the IPv4 address,

then a forward slash, then the prefix

length.

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Match any source IP address within

the specified subnet. Specify the

subnet by entering a reverse mask

in dotted decimal format. For

example, entering “192.168.1.1

0.0.0.255” is the same as entering

192.168.1.1/24.

<dest-ip>The destination addresses to match against. You can specify a

single host, a subnet, or all destination addresses. The following

are the valid formats for specifying the destination:

any Match any destination IP address.

host <ip-addr> Match a single destination host with

the IP address given by <ip-addr> in

dotted decimal notation.

<ip-addr>/<prefix>Match any destination IP address

within the specified subnet. Specify

the subnet by entering the IPv4

address, then a forward slash, then

the prefix length.

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Match any destination IP address

within the specified subnet. Specify

the subnet by entering a reverse

mask in dotted decimal format. For

example, entering “192.168.1.1

0.0.0.255” is the same as entering

192.168.1.1/24.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 878

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(NAMED HARDWARE ACL: IP PACKET ENTRY)

Mode IPv4 Hardware ACL Configuration (accessed by running the command access-list

hardware (named hardware ACL))

Default On an interface controlled by a hardware ACL, any traffic that does not explicitly

match a filter is permitted.

Usage To use this command, first run the command access-list hardware (named

hardware ACL) and enter the desired access-list name. This changes the prompt to

awplus(config-ip-hw-acl)#.

Then use this command (and the other “named hardware ACL: entry” commands)

to add filter entries. You can add multiple filter entries to an ACL. You can insert a

new filter entry into the middle of an existing list by specifying the appropriate

<source-mac> The source MAC address to match against. You can specify a

single MAC address, a range (through a mask), the address

learned from DHCP snooping, or any:

any Match against any source MAC

address.

<source-mac> The source MAC address to match

against, followed by the mask.

Enter the address in the format

<HHHH.HHHH.HHHH>, where each

H is a hexadecimal number.

Enter the mask in the format

<HHHH.HHHH.HHHH>, where each

H is a hexadecimal number. For a

mask, each value is either 0 or F,

where FF = Ignore, and 00 = Match.

dhcpsnooping Match the source address learned

from the DHCP Snooping binding

database.

<dest-mac> The destination MAC address to match against. You can specify a

single MAC address, a range (through a mask), or any:

any Match against any destination MAC

address.

<dest-mac> The destination MAC address to

match against, followed by the

mask.

Enter the address in the format

<HHHH.HHHH.HHHH>, where each

H is a hexadecimal number.

Enter the mask in the format

<HHHH.HHHH.HHHH>, where each

H is a hexadecimal number. For a

mask, each value is either 0 or F,

where FF = Ignore, and 00 = Match.

vlan <1-4094> The VLAN to match against. The ACL will match against the

specified ID in the packet’s VLAN tag.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 879

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(NAMED HARDWARE ACL: IP PACKET ENTRY)

sequence number. If you do not specify a sequence number, the switch puts the

entry at the end of the ACL and assigns it the next available multiple of 10 as its

sequence number.

Then use the access-group or the match access-group command to apply this ACL

to a port, VLAN or QoS class-map. Note that the ACL will only apply to incoming

data packets.

You can use ACLs to redirect packets, by sending them to the CPU, the mirror port,

or a specific VLAN on a specific port. Use such ACLs with caution. They could

prevent control packets from reaching the correct destination, such as EPSR

healthcheck messages and VCStack messages.

Examples To add a filter entry to the access-list named “my-list” that will permit any IP packet

with a source address of 192.168.1.1, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list hardware my-list

awplus(config-ip-hw-acl)# permit ip 192.168.1.1/32 any

To add a filter entry to the access-list named “my-list” that will permit any IP packet

with a source address of 192.168.1.1and a MAC source address of ffee.ddcc.bbaa,

use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list hardware my-list

awplus(config-ip-hw-acl)# permit ip 192.168.1.1/32 any mac

ffee.ddcc.bbaa 0000.0000.0000 any

To add a filter entry to the access-list named “my-list” that will deny all IP packets

on vlan 2, use the commands:

awplus# enable

awplus(config)# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list hardware my-list

awplus(config-ip-hw-acl)# deny ip any any vlan 2

Commands

access-group

access-list hardware (named hardware ACL)

match access-group

show running-config

show access-list (IPv4 Hardware ACLs)

Command

changes

Version 5.4.6-2.1: send-to-vlan-port action parameter added

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 880

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(NAMED HARDWARE ACL: IP PROTOCOL ENTRY)

(named hardware ACL: IP protocol entry)

Overview Use this command to add an IP protocol type filter entry to the current hardware

access-list. The filter will match on IP packets that have the specified IP protocol

number, and the specified IP and/or MAC addresses. You can use the value any

instead of source or destination IP or MAC address if an address does not matter.

If you specify a sequence number, the switch inserts the new filter at the specified

location. Otherwise, the switch adds the new filter to the end of the access-list.

The no variant of this command removes a filter entry from the current hardware

access-list. You can specify the filter entry for removal by entering either its

sequence number (e.g. no 100), or by entering its filter profile without specifying

its sequence number (e.g. no deny proto 2 192.168.0.0/16 any).

You can find the sequence number by running the show access-list (IPv4 Hardware

ACLs) command.

Hardware ACLs will permit access unless explicitly denied by an ACL action.

Syntax [<sequence-number>] <action> proto <1-255> <source-ip>

<dest-ip> [<source-mac> <dest-mac>] [vlan <1-4094>]

no <sequence-number>

no <action> proto <1-255> <source-ip> <dest-ip> [<source-mac>

<dest-mac>] [vlan <1-4094>]

Table 27-5: Parameters in IP protocol ACL entries

Parameter Description

<sequence-



number>

The sequence number for the filter entry of the selected access

control list, in the range 1-65535. If you do not specify a sequence

number, the switch puts the entry at the end of the ACL and

assigns it the next available multiple of 10 as its sequence

number. .

<action> The action that the switch will take on matching packets:

deny Reject packets that match the

source and destination filtering

specified with this command.

permit Permit packets that match the

source and destination filtering

specified with this command.

copy-to-cpu Send a copy of matching packets to

the CPU.

copy-to-mirror Send a copy of matching packets to

the mirror port.

Use the mirror interface command

to configure the mirror port.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 881

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(NAMED HARDWARE ACL: IP PROTOCOL ENTRY)

send-to-mirror Send matching packets to the

mirror port.

Use the mirror interface command

to configure the mirror port.

send-to-cpu Send matching packets to the CPU.

proto <1-255>The IP protocol number to match against, as defined by IANA

(Internet Assigned Numbers Authority

www.iana.org/assignments/protocol-numbers)

See below for a list of IP protocol numbers and their descriptions.

<source-ip> The source addresses to match against. You can specify a single

host, a subnet, or all source addresses. The following are the valid

formats for specifying the source:

any Match any source IP address.

dhcpsnooping Match the source address learned

from the DHCP Snooping binding

database.

host <ip-addr> Match a single source host with the

IP address given by <ip-addr> in

dotted decimal notation.

<ip-addr>/<prefix>Match any source IP address within

the specified subnet. Specify the

subnet by entering the IPv4

address, then a forward slash, then

the prefix length.

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Match any source IP address within

the specified subnet. Specify the

subnet by entering a reverse mask

in dotted decimal format. For

example, entering “192.168.1.1

0.0.0.255” is the same as entering

192.168.1.1/24.

<dest-ip>The destination addresses to match against. You can specify a

single host, a subnet, or all destination addresses. The following

are the valid formats for specifying the destination:

any Match any destination IP address.

host <ip-addr> Match a single destination host with

the IP address given by <ip-addr> in

dotted decimal notation.

<ip-addr>/<prefix>Match any destination IP address

within the specified subnet. Specify

the subnet by entering the IPv4

address, then a forward slash, then

the prefix length.

Table 27-5: Parameters in IP protocol ACL entries (cont.)

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 882

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(NAMED HARDWARE ACL: IP PROTOCOL ENTRY)

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Match any destination IP address

within the specified subnet. Specify

the subnet by entering a reverse

mask in dotted decimal format. For

example, entering “192.168.1.1

0.0.0.255” is the same as entering

192.168.1.1/24.

<source-mac> The source MAC address to match against. You can specify a

single MAC address, a range (through a mask), the address

learned from DHCP snooping, or any:

any Match against any source MAC

address.

<source-mac> The source MAC address to match

against, followed by the mask.

Enter the address in the format

<HHHH.HHHH.HHHH>, where each

H is a hexadecimal number.

Enter the mask in the format

<HHHH.HHHH.HHHH>, where each

H is a hexadecimal number. For a

mask, each value is either 0 or F,

where FF = Ignore, and 00 = Match.

dhcpsnooping Match the source address learned

from the DHCP Snooping binding

database.

<dest-mac> The destination MAC address to match against. You can specify a

single MAC address, a range (through a mask), or any:

any Match against any destination MAC

address.

<dest-mac> The destination MAC address to

match against, followed by the

mask.

Enter the address in the format

<HHHH.HHHH.HHHH>, where each

H is a hexadecimal number.

Enter the mask in the format

<HHHH.HHHH.HHHH>, where each

H is a hexadecimal number. For a

mask, each value is either 0 or F,

where FF = Ignore, and 00 = Match.

vlan <1-4094> The VLAN to match against. The ACL will match against the

specified ID in the packet’s VLAN tag.

Table 27-5: Parameters in IP protocol ACL entries (cont.)

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 883

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(NAMED HARDWARE ACL: IP PROTOCOL ENTRY)

Table 27-6: IP protocol number and description

Protocol Number Protocol Description [RFC]

1Internet Control Message [RFC792]

2Internet Group Management [RFC1112]

3Gateway-to-Gateway [RFC823]

4IP in IP [RFC2003]

5Stream [RFC1190] [RFC1819]

6TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) [RFC793]

8EGP (Exterior Gateway Protocol) [RFC888]

9IGP (Interior Gateway Protocol) [IANA]

11 Network Voice Protocol [RFC741]

17 UDP (User Datagram Protocol) [RFC768]

20 Host monitoring [RFC869]

27 RDP (Reliable Data Protocol) [RFC908]

28 IRTP (Internet Reliable Transaction Protocol) [RFC938]

29 ISO-TP4 (ISO Transport Protocol Class 4) [RFC905]

30 Bulk Data Transfer Protocol [RFC969]

33 DCCP (Datagram Congestion Control Protocol)

[RFC4340]

48 DSR (Dynamic Source Routing Protocol) [RFC4728]

50 ESP (Encap Security Payload) [RFC2406]

51 AH (Authentication Header) [RFC2402]

54 NARP (NBMA Address Resolution Protocol) [RFC1735]

58 ICMP for IPv6 [RFC1883]

59 No Next Header for IPv6 [RFC1883]

60 Destination Options for IPv6 [RFC1883]

88 EIGRP (Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol)

89 OSPFIGP [RFC1583]

97 Ethernet-within-IP Encapsulation / RFC3378

98 Encapsulation Header / RFC1241

108 IP Payload Compression Protocol / RFC2393

112 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol / RFC3768

134 RSVP-E2E-IGNORE / RFC3175

135 Mobility Header / RFC3775

136 UDPLite / RFC3828

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 884

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(NAMED HARDWARE ACL: IP PROTOCOL ENTRY)

Mode IPv4 Hardware ACL Configuration (accessed by running the command access-list

hardware (named hardware ACL))

Default On an interface controlled by a hardware ACL, any traffic that does not explicitly

match a filter is permitted.

Usage To use this command, run the command access-list hardware (named hardware

ACL) and enter the desired access-list name. This changes the prompt to

awplus(config-ip-hw-acl)#.

Then use this command (and the other “named hardware ACL: entry” commands)

to add filter entries. You can add multiple filter entries to an ACL. You can insert a

new filter entry into the middle of an existing list by specifying the appropriate

sequence number. If you do not specify a sequence number, the switch puts the

entry at the end of the ACL and assigns it the next available multiple of 10 as its

sequence number.

Then use the access-group or the match access-group command to apply this ACL

to a port, VLAN or QoS class-map. Note that the ACL will only apply to incoming

data packets.

You can use ACLs to redirect packets, by sending them to the CPU, the mirror port,

or a specific VLAN on a specific port. Use such ACLs with caution. They could

prevent control packets from reaching the correct destination, such as EPSR

healthcheck messages and VCStack messages.

Examples To add a filter entry to the access-list named “my-list” that will deny all IGMP

packets (protocol 2) from the 192.168.0.0 subnet, and give it a sequence number

of 50, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list hardware my-list

awplus(config-ip-hw-acl)# 50 deny proto 2 192.168.0.0/16 any

Commands

access-group

access-list hardware (named hardware ACL)

137 MPLS-in-IP / RFC4023

138 MANET Protocols / RFC-ietf-manet-iana-07.txt

139-252 Unassigned / IANA

253 Use for experimentation and testing / RFC3692

254 Use for experimentation and testing / RFC3692

255 Reserved / IANA

Table 27-6: IP protocol number and description (cont.)

Protocol Number Protocol Description [RFC]

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 885

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(NAMED HARDWARE ACL: IP PROTOCOL ENTRY)

match access-group

show running-config

show access-list (IPv4 Hardware ACLs)

Command

changes

Version 5.4.6-2.1: send-to-vlan-port action parameter added

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 886

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(NAMED HARDWARE ACL: MAC ENTRY)

(named hardware ACL: MAC entry)

Overview Use this command to add a MAC address filter entry to the current hardware

access-list. The access-list will match on packets that have the specified source and

destination MAC addresses. You can use the value any instead of source or

destination MAC address if an address does not matter.

If you specify a sequence number, the switch inserts the new filter at the specified

location. Otherwise, the switch adds the new filter to the end of the access-list.

The no variant of this command removes a filter entry from the current hardware

access-list. You can specify the filter entry for removal by entering either its

sequence number (e.g. no 100), or by entering its filter profile without specifying

its sequence number (e.g. no permit mac aaaa.bbbb.cccc 0000.0000.0000 any).

You can find the sequence number by running the show access-list (IPv4 Hardware

ACLs) command.

Hardware ACLs will permit access unless explicitly denied by an ACL action.

Syntax [<sequence-number>] <action> mac {<source-mac>|any}

{<dest-mac>|any} [vlan <1-4094>] [inner-vlan <1-4094>]

no <sequence-number>

no <action> mac {<source-mac>|any} {<dest-mac>|any} [vlan

<1-4094>] [inner-vlan <1-4094>]

Parameter Description

<4000-4699>Hardware MAC access-list.

<action> The action that the switch will take on matching packets:

deny Reject packets that match the source

and destination filtering specified with

this command.

permit Permit packets that match the source

and destination filtering specified with

this command.

copy-to-cpu Send a copy of matching packets to

the CPU.

copy-to-mirror Send a copy of matching packets to

the mirror port.

Use the mirror interface command to

configure the mirror port.

send-to-mirror Send matching packets to the mirror

port.

Use the mirror interface command to

configure the mirror port.

send-to-cpu Send matching packets to the CPU.

mac Match against MAC address

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 887

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(NAMED HARDWARE ACL: MAC ENTRY)

Mode IPv4 Hardware ACL Configuration (accessed by running the command access-list

hardware (named hardware ACL))

Default On an interface controlled by a hardware ACL, any traffic that does not explicitly

match a filter is permitted.

Usage To use this command, first run the command access-list hardware (named

hardware ACL) and enter the desired access-list name. This changes the prompt to

awplus(config-ip-hw-acl)#.

Then use this command (and the other “named hardware ACL: entry” commands)

to add filter entries. You can add multiple filter entries to an ACL. You can insert a

new filter entry into the middle of an existing list by specifying the appropriate

sequence number. If you do not specify a sequence number, the switch puts the

entry at the end of the ACL and assigns it the next available multiple of 10 as its

sequence number.

Then use the access-group or the match access-group command to apply this ACL

to a port, VLAN or QoS class-map. Note that the ACL will only apply to incoming

data packets.

You can use ACLs to redirect packets, by sending them to the CPU, the mirror port,

or a specific VLAN on a specific port. Use such ACLs with caution. They could

prevent control packets from reaching the correct destination, such as EPSR

healthcheck messages and VCStack messages.

<source-mac> The source MAC address to match against, followed by the mask.

Enter the address in the format <HHHH.HHHH.HHHH>, where each

H is a hexadecimal number.

Enter the mask in the format <HHHH.HHHH.HHHH>, where each H

is a hexadecimal number. For a mask, each value is either 0 or F,

where FF = Ignore, and 00 = Match.

any Match against any source MAC address.

<dest-mac> The destination MAC address to match against, followed by the

mask.

Enter the address in the format <HHHH.HHHH.HHHH>, where each

H is a hexadecimal number.

Enter the mask in the format <HHHH.HHHH.HHHH>, where each H

is a hexadecimal number. For a mask, each value is either 0 or F,

where FF = Ignore, and 00 = Match.

any Match against any destination MAC address.

vlan <1-4094>Match against the specified ID in the packet’s VLAN tag.

inner-vlan

<1-4094>

Match against the inner VLAN tag (VID). This parameter is used

within double-tagged VLANs. It is sometimes referred to as the

C-TAG (Customer VLAN TAG), and the vlan VID tag is referred to as

the S-TAG (Service VLAN TAG).

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 888

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(NAMED HARDWARE ACL: MAC ENTRY)

Examples To add a filter entry to the access-list named “my-list” that will permit packets with

a source MAC address of 0000.00ab.1234 and any destination MAC address, use

the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list hardware my-list

awplus(config-ip-hw-acl)# permit mac 0000.00ab.1234

0000.0000.0000 any

To remove a filter entry that permit packets with a source MAC address of

0000.00ab.1234 and any destination MAC address, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list hardware my-list

awplus(config-ip-hw-acl)# no permit mac 0000.00ab.1234

0000.0000.0000 any

Commands

access-group

access-list hardware (named hardware ACL)

match access-group

show running-config

show access-list (IPv4 Hardware ACLs)

Command

changes

Version 5.4.6-2.1: send-to-vlan-port action parameter added

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 889

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(NAMED HARDWARE ACL: TCP OR UDP ENTRY)

(named hardware ACL: TCP or UDP entry)

Overview Use this command to add a TCP or UDP filter entry to the current hardware

access-list. The access-list will match on TCP or UDP packets that have the specified

source and destination IP addresses and optionally, port values. You can use the

value any instead of source or destination IP address if an address does not matter.

If you specify a sequence number, the switch inserts the new filter at the specified

location. Otherwise, the switch adds the new filter to the end of the access-list.

The no variant of this command removes a filter entry from the current hardware

access-list. You can specify the filter entry for removal by entering either its

sequence number (e.g. no 100), or by entering its filter profile without specifying

its sequence number (e.g. no permit udp 192.168.0.0/16 any).

You can find the sequence number by running the show access-list (IPv4 Hardware

ACLs) command.

Hardware ACLs will permit access unless explicitly denied by an ACL action.

Syntax [<sequence-number>] <action> {tcp|udp} <source-ip>

[<source-ports>] <dest-ip> [<dest-ports>] [vlan <1-4094>]

no <sequence-number>

no <action> {tcp|udp} <source-ip> [<source-ports>] <dest-ip>

[<dest-ports>] [vlan <1-4094>]

Parameter Description

<sequence-



number>

The sequence number for the filter entry of the selected access

control list, in the range 1-65535. If you do not specify a sequence

number, the switch puts the entry at the end of the ACL and

assigns it the next available multiple of 10 as its sequence

number. .

<action> The action that the switch will take on matching packets:

deny Reject packets that match the

source and destination filtering

specified with this command.

permit Permit packets that match the

source and destination filtering

specified with this command.

copy-to-cpu Send a copy of matching packets to

the CPU.

copy-to-mirror Send a copy of matching packets to

the mirror port.

Use the mirror interface command

to configure the mirror port.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 890

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(NAMED HARDWARE ACL: TCP OR UDP ENTRY)

send-to-mirror Send matching packets to the

mirror port.

Use the mirror interface command

to configure the mirror port.

send-to-cpu Send matching packets to the CPU.

tcp Match against TCP packets.

udp Match against UDP packets.

<source-ip> The source addresses to match against. You can specify a single

host, a subnet, or all source addresses. The following are the valid

formats for specifying the source:

any Match any source IP address.

host <ip-addr> Match a single source host with the

IP address given by <ip-addr> in

dotted decimal notation.

<ip-addr>/<prefix>Match any source IP address within

the specified subnet. Specify the

subnet by entering the IPv4 address,

then a forward slash, then the prefix

length.

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Match any source IP address within

the specified subnet. Specify the

subnet by entering a reverse mask

in dotted decimal format. For

example, entering “192.168.1.1

0.0.0.255” is the same as entering

192.168.1.1/24.

<source-



ports>

Match source TCP or UDP port numbers. Port numbers are

specified as integers between 0 and 65535. You can specify one or

more port numbers as follows:

eq <0-65535> Match a single port number.

lt <0-65535> Match all port numbers that are less

than the specified port number.

gt <0-65535> Match all port numbers that are

greater than the specified port

number.

ne <0-65535> Match all port numbers except the

specified port number.

range <start-port>

<end-port>

Match a range of port numbers.

<dest-ip>The destination addresses to match against. You can specify a

single host, a subnet, or all destination addresses. The following

are the valid formats for specifying the destination:

any Match any destination IP address.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 891

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(NAMED HARDWARE ACL: TCP OR UDP ENTRY)

Mode IPv4 Hardware ACL Configuration (accessed by running the command access-list

hardware (named hardware ACL))

Default On an interface controlled by a hardware ACL, any traffic that does not explicitly

match a filter is permitted.

Usage To use this command, first run the command access-list hardware (named

hardware ACL) and enter the desired access-list name. This changes the prompt to

awplus(config-ip-hw-acl)#.

Then use this command (and the other “named hardware ACL: entry” commands)

to add filter entries. You can add multiple filter entries to an ACL. You can insert a

new filter entry into the middle of an existing list by specifying the appropriate

sequence number. If you do not specify a sequence number, the switch puts the

entry at the end of the ACL and assigns it the next available multiple of 10 as its

sequence number.

host <ip-addr> Match a single destination host with

the IP address given by <ip-addr> in

dotted decimal notation.

<ip-addr>/<prefix>Match any destination IP address

within the specified subnet. Specify

the subnet by entering the IPv4

address, then a forward slash, then

the prefix length.

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Match any destination IP address

within the specified subnet. Specify

the subnet by entering a reverse

mask in dotted decimal format. For

example, entering “192.168.1.1

0.0.0.255” is the same as entering

192.168.1.1/24.

<dest-ports>Match destination TCP or UDP port numbers. Port numbers are

specified as integers between 0 and 65535. You can specify one or

more port numbers as follows:

eq <0-65535> Match a single port number.

lt <0-65535> Match all port numbers that are less

than the specified port number.

gt <0-65535> Match all port numbers that are

greater than the specified port

number.

ne <0-65535> Match all port numbers except the

specified port number.

range <start-port>

<end-port>

Match a range of port numbers.

vlan <1-4094> The VLAN to match against. The ACL will match against the

specified ID in the packet’s VLAN tag.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 892

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(NAMED HARDWARE ACL: TCP OR UDP ENTRY)

Then use the access-group or the match access-group command to apply this ACL

to a port, VLAN or QoS class-map. Note that the ACL will only apply to incoming

data packets.

You can use ACLs to redirect packets, by sending them to the CPU, the mirror port,

or a specific VLAN on a specific port. Use such ACLs with caution. They could

prevent control packets from reaching the correct destination, such as EPSR

healthcheck messages and VCStack messages.

Example To add a filter entry to access-list named “my-list” that will permit TCP packets with

a destination address of 192.168.1.1, a destination port of 80, from any source, use

the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list hardware my-list

awplus(config-ip-hw-acl)# permit tcp any 192.168.1.1/32 eq 80

Commands

access-group

access-list hardware (named hardware ACL)

match access-group

show running-config

show access-list (IPv4 Hardware ACLs)

Command

changes

Version 5.4.6-2.1: send-to-vlan-port action parameter added

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 893

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

COMMIT (IPV4)

commit (IPv4)

Overview Use this command to commit the IPv4 ACL filter configuration entered at the

console to the hardware immediately without exiting the IPv4 Hardware ACL

Configuration mode.

This command forces the associated hardware and software IPv4 ACLs to

synchronize.

Syntax commit

Mode IPv4 Hardware ACL Configuration

Usage Normally, when an IPv4 hardware ACL is edited, the new configuration state of the

IPv4 ACL is not written to hardware until you exit IPv4 Hardware ACL Configuration

mode. By entering this command you can ensure that the current state of a

hardware access-list that is being edited is written to hardware immediately.

Scripts typically do not include the exit command to exit configuration modes,

potentially leading to IPv4 ACL filters in hardware not being correctly updated.

Using this commit command in a configuration script after specifying an IPv4

hardware ACL filter ensures that it is updated in the hardware immediately.

Example To update the hardware with the IPv4 ACL filter configuration, use the command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list hardware my-hw-list

awplus(config-ip-hw-acl)# commit

Commands

access-list hardware (named hardware ACL)

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 894

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

SHOW ACCESS-LIST (IPV4 HARDWARE ACLS)

show access-list (IPv4 Hardware ACLs)

Overview Use this command to display the specified access-list, or all access-lists if none have

been specified. Note that only defined access-lists are displayed. An error message

is displayed for an undefined access-list.

Syntax show access-list

[<1-99>|<100-199>|<1300-1999>|<2000-2699>|<3000-3699>|<4000-44

99>|<access-list-name>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Examples To show all access-lists configured on the switch:

awplus# show access-list

To show the access-list with an ID of 20:

awplus# show access-list 20

The following error message is displayed if you try to show an undefined

access-list.

awplus# show access-list 2

Parameter Description

<1-99>IP standard access-list.

<1300-1999>IP standard access-list (standard - expanded range).

<3000-3699>Hardware IP access-list.

<4000-4499>Hardware MAC access-list.

<access-list-name>IP named access-list.

Standard IP access list 1

deny 172.16.2.0, wildcard bits 0.0.0.255

Standard IP access list 20

deny 192.168.10.0, wildcard bits 0.0.0.255

deny 192.168.12.0, wildcard bits 0.0.0.255

Hardware IP access list 3001

permit ip 192.168.20.0 255.255.255.0 any

Hardware IP access list 3020

permit tcp any 192.0.2.0/24

awplus#show access-list 20

Standard IP access-list 20

deny 192.168.10.0, wildcard bits 0.0.0.255

deny 192.168.12.0, wildcard bits 0.0.0.255

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 895

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

SHOW ACCESS-LIST (IPV4 HARDWARE ACLS)

Commands

access-list extended (named)

access-list (numbered hardware ACL for MAC addresses)

access-list hardware (named hardware ACL)

% Can't find access-list 2

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 896

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

SHOW INTERFACE ACCESS-GROUP

show interface access-group

Overview Use this command to display the access groups attached to a port. If an access

group is specified, then the output only includes the ports that the specified access

group is attached to. If no access group is specified then this command displays all

access groups that are attached to the ports that are specified with <port-list>.

Note that access group is the term given for an access-list when it is applied to an

interface.

Syntax show interface <port-list> access-group

[<3000-3699>|<4000-4699>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To show all access-lists attached to port1.0.1, use the command:

awplus# show interface port1.0.1 access-group

Output Figure 27-1: Example output from the show interface access-group command

Commands

access-group

Parameter Description

<port-list> Specify the ports to display information. A port-list can be

either:

• a switch port (e.g. port1.0.6) a static channel group (e.g.

sa2) or a dynamic (LACP) channel group (e.g. po2)

• a continuous range of ports separated by a hyphen, e.g.

port1.0.1-1.0.6 or port1.0.1-port1.0.6 or po1-po2

• a comma-separated list of ports and port ranges, e.g.

port1.0.1,port1.0.3-1.0.6. Do not mix switch ports, static

channel groups, and LACP channel groups in the same

list.

access group Select the access group whose details you want to show.

<3000-3699> Specifies the Hardware IP access-list.

<4000-4699> Specifies the Hardware MAC access-list.

Interface port1.0.1

access-group 3000

access-group 3002

access-group 3001

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 897

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPv4 Software

Access Control List

(ACL) Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference for the IPv4 Software Access

Control List (ACL) commands, and contains detailed command information and

command examples about IPv4 software ACLs as applied to Routing and

Multicasting, which are not applied to interfaces.

For information about ACLs, see the ACL Feature Overview and Configuration

Guide.

To apply ACLs to an LACP channel group, apply it to all the individual switch ports

in the channel group. To apply ACLs to a static channel group, apply it to the static

channel group itself. For more information on link aggregation see the following

references:

•the Link Aggregation Feature Overview_and Configuration Guide.

•Link Aggregation Commands

NOTE: Text in parenthesis in command names indicates usage not keyword entry. For

example, access-list hardware (named) indicates named IPv4 hardware ACLs

entered as access-list hardware <name> where <name> is a placeholder not

a keyword.

Parenthesis surrounding ACL filters indicates the type of ACL filter not the keyword

entry in the CLI, such as (access-list standard numbered filter) represents command

entry in the format shown in the syntax:

[<sequence-number>] {deny|permit} {<source-address>|host

<host-address>|any}

NOTE: Software ACLs will deny access unless explicitly permitted by an ACL action.

Sub-modes Many of the ACL commands operate from sub-modes that are specific to particular

ACL types. The following table shows the CLI prompts at which ACL commands are

entered.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 898

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

Command List •“access-list extended (named)” on page 900

•“access-list (extended numbered)” on page 908

•“(access-list extended ICMP filter)” on page 910

•“(access-list extended IP filter)” on page 912

•“(access-list extended IP protocol filter)” on page 915

•“(access-list extended TCP UDP filter)” on page 919

•“access-list standard (named)” on page 921

•“access-list (standard numbered)” on page 923

•“(access-list standard named filter)” on page 925

•“(access-list standard numbered filter)” on page 927

•“dos” on page 929

•“maximum-access-list” on page 932

•“show access-list (IPv4 Software ACLs)” on page 933

•“show dos interface” on page 935

Table 28-1: IPv4 Software Access List Commands and Prompts

Command Name Command Mode Prompt

show ip access-list Privileged Exec awplus#

access-group Global Configuration awplus(config)#

access-list (extended named) Global Configuration awplus(config)#

access-list (extended numbered) Global Configuration awplus(config)#

access-list (standard named) Global Configuration awplus(config)#

access-list (standard numbered) Global Configuration awplus(config)#

maximum-access-list Global Configuration awplus(config)#

(access-list extended ICMP filter) IPv4 Extended ACL

Configuration

awplus(config-ip-ext-acl)#

(access-list extended IPfilter) IPv4 Extended ACL

Configuration

awplus(config-ip-ext-acl)#

(access-list extended IP protocol filter) IPv4 Extended ACL

Configuration

awplus(config-ip-ext-acl)#

(access-list extended TCP UDP filter) IPv4 Extended ACL

Configuration

awplus(config-ip-ext-acl)#

(access-list standard named filter) IPv4 Standard ACL

Configuration

awplus(config-ip-std-acl)#

(access-list standard numbered filter) IPv4 Standard ACL

Configuration

awplus(config-ip-std-acl)#

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 899

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

•“show ip access-list” on page 938

•“vty access-class (numbered)” on page 939

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 900

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST EXTENDED (NAMED)

access-list extended (named)

Overview This command configures an extended named access-list that permits or denies

packets from specific source and destination IP addresses. You can either create an

extended named ACL together with an ACL filter entry in the Global Configuration

mode, or you can use the IPv4 Extended ACL Configuration mode for sequenced

ACL filter entry after entering a list name.

The no variant of this command removes a specified extended named access-list.

Syntax

[list-name]

access-list extended <list-name>

no access-list extended <list-name>

Syntax [icmp] access-list extended <list-name>{deny|permit} icmp <source>

<destination> [icmp-type <type-number>] [log]

no access-list extended <list-name>{deny|permit} icmp <source>

<destination> [icmp-type <type-number>] [log]

Parameter Description

<list-name>A user-defined name for the access-list

Table 28-2: Parameters in the access-list extended (named) command - icmp

Parameter Description

<list-name>A user-defined name for the access-list.

deny The access-list rejects packets that match the type, source, and

destination filtering specified with this command.

permit The access-list permits packets that match the type, source, and

destination filtering specified with this command.

icmp The access-list matches only ICMP packets.

icmp-type Matches only a specified type of ICMP messages. This is valid only

when the filtering is set to match ICMP packets.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 901

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST EXTENDED (NAMED)

<source> The source address of the packets. You can specify a single host, a

subnet, or all sources. The following are the valid formats for

specifying the source:

any Matches any source IP address.

host<ip-addr> Matches a single source host with the

IP address given by <ip-addr> in

dotted decimal notation.

<ip-addr>/

An IPv4 address, followed by a forward

slash, then the prefix length. This

matches any source IP address within

the specified subnet.

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Alternatively, you can enter a reverse

mask in dotted decimal format. For

example, entering 192.168.1.1

0.0.0.255 is the same as entering

192.168.1.1/24.

<destination>The destination address of the packets. You can specify a single

host, a subnet, or all destinations. The following are the valid

formats for specifying the destination:

any Matches any destination IP address.

host<ip-addr> Matches a single destination host with

the IP address given by <ip-addr> in

dotted decimal notation.

<ip-addr>/

An IPv4 address, followed by a forward

slash, then the prefix length. This

matches any destination IP address

within the specified subnet.

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Alternatively, you can enter a reverse

mask in dotted decimal format. For

example, entering 192.168.1.1

0.0.0.255 is the same as entering

192.168.1.1/24.

Table 28-2: Parameters in the access-list extended (named) command - icmp

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 902

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST EXTENDED (NAMED)

Syntax [tcp|udp] access-list extended <list-name> {deny|permit} {tcp|udp}

<source> [eq <sourceport>|lt <sourceport>|gt <sourceport>|ne

<sourceport>] <destination> [eq <destport>|lt <destport>|gt

<destport>|ne <destport>] [log]

no access-list extended <list-name> {deny|permit} {tcp|udp}

<source> [eq <sourceport>|lt <sourceport>|gt <sourceport>|ne

<sourceport>] <destination> [eq <destport> |lt <destport>|gt

<destport>|ne <destport>][log]

<type-number>The ICMP type, as defined in RFC792 and RFC950. Specify one of

the following integers to create a filter for the ICMP message type:

0Echo replies.

3Destination unreachable messages.

4Source quench messages.

5Redirect (change route) messages.

8Echo requests.

11 Time exceeded messages.

12 Parameter problem messages.

13 Timestamp requests.

14 Timestamp replies.

15 Information requests.

16 Information replies.

17 Address mask requests.

18 Address mask replies.

log Logs the results.

Table 28-2: Parameters in the access-list extended (named) command - icmp

Parameter Description

Table 28-3: Parameters in the access-list extended (named) command - tcp|udp

Parameter Description

<list-name>A user-defined name for the access-list.

deny The access-list rejects packets that match the type, source, and

destination filtering specified with this command.

permit The access-list permits packets that match the type, source, and

destination filtering specified with this command.

tcp The access-list matches only TCP packets.

udp The access-list matches only UDP packets.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 903

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST EXTENDED (NAMED)

<source> The source address of the packets. You can specify a single host, a

subnet, or all sources. The following are the valid formats for

specifying the source:

any Matches any source IP address.

host<ip-addr> Matches a single source host with the

IP address given by <ip-addr> in

dotted decimal notation.

<ip-addr>/

An IPv4 address, followed by a forward

slash, then the prefix length. This

matches any source IP address within

the specified subnet.

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Alternatively, you can enter a reverse

mask in dotted decimal format. For

example, entering 192.168.1.1

0.0.0.255 is the same as entering

192.168.1.1/24.

<destination>The destination address of the packets. You can specify a single

host, a subnet, or all destinations. The following are the valid

formats for specifying the destination:

any Matches any destination IP address.

host<ip-addr> Matches a single destination host with

the IP address given by <ip-addr> in

dotted decimal notation.

<ip-addr>/

An IPv4 address, followed by a forward

slash, then the prefix length. This

matches any destination IP address

within the specified subnet.

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Alternatively, you can enter a reverse

mask in dotted decimal format. For

example, entering 192.168.1.1

0.0.0.255 is the same as entering

192.168.1.1/24.

<sourceport>The source port number, specified as an integer between 0 and

65535.

<destport>The destination port number, specified as an integer between 0

and 65535.

eq Matches port numbers equal to the port number specified

immediately after this parameter.

lt Matches port numbers less than the port number specified

immediately after this parameter.

gt Matches port numbers greater than the port number specified

immediately after this parameter.

Table 28-3: Parameters in the access-list extended (named) command - tcp|udp

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 904

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST EXTENDED (NAMED)

Syntax

[proto|any| ip]

access-list extended <list-name> {deny|permit} {proto

<ip-protocol>|any|ip} {<source>} {<destination>} [log]

no access-list extended <list-name>{deny|permit} {proto

<ip-protocol>|any|ip}{<source>}{<destination>}[log]

ne Matches port numbers not equal to the port number specified

immediately after this parameter.

log Log the results.

Table 28-3: Parameters in the access-list extended (named) command - tcp|udp

Parameter Description

Table 28-4: Parameters in the access-list extended (named) command -

proto|ip|any

Parameter Description

<list-name>A user-defined name for the access-list.

deny The access-list rejects packets that match the type, source, and

destination filtering specified with this command.

permit The access-list permits packets that match the type, source, and

destination filtering specified with this command.

proto Matches only a specified type of IP Protocol.

any The access-list matches any type of IP packet.

ip The access-list matches only IP packets.

<source> The source address of the packets. You can specify a single host, a

subnet, or all sources. The following are the valid formats for

specifying the source:

any Matches any source IP address.

host<ip-addr> Matches a single source host with the IP

address given by <ip-addr> in dotted

decimal notation.

<ip-addr>/

An IPv4 address, followed by a forward

slash, then the prefix length. This matches

any source IP address within the specified

subnet.

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Alternatively, you can enter a reverse mask

in dotted decimal format. For example,

entering 192.168.1.1 0.0.0.255 is

the same as entering 192.168.1.1/24.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 905

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST EXTENDED (NAMED)

<destination>The destination address of the packets. You can specify a single

host, a subnet, or all destinations. The following are the valid

formats for specifying the destination:

any Matches any destination IP address.

host<ip-addr> Matches a single destination host with the

IP address given by <ip-addr> in dotted

decimal notation.

<ip-addr>/

An IPv4 address, followed by a forward

slash, then the prefix length. This matches

any destination IP address within the

specified subnet.

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Alternatively, you can enter a reverse mask

in dotted decimal format. For example,

entering 192.168.1.1 0.0.0.255 is

the same as entering 192.168.1.1/24.

log Logs the results.

<ip-protocol> The IP protocol number, as defined by IANA (Internet Assigned

Numbers Authority

www.iana.org/assignments/protocol-numbers) 

See below for a list of IP protocol numbers and their descriptions.

Table 28-5: IP protocol number and description

Protocol Number Protocol Description [RFC]

1Internet Control Message [RFC792]

2Internet Group Management [RFC1112]

3Gateway-to-Gateway [RFC823]

4IP in IP [RFC2003]

5Stream [RFC1190] [RFC1819]

6TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) [RFC793]

8EGP (Exterior Gateway Protocol) [RFC888]

9IGP (Interior Gateway Protocol) [IANA]

11 Network Voice Protocol [RFC741]

17 UDP (User Datagram Protocol) [RFC768]

20 Host monitoring [RFC869]

27 RDP (Reliable Data Protocol) [RFC908]

28 IRTP (Internet Reliable Transaction Protocol) [RFC938]

Table 28-4: Parameters in the access-list extended (named) command -

proto|ip|any (cont.)

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 906

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST EXTENDED (NAMED)

Mode Global Configuration

Default Any traffic controlled by a software ACL that does not explicitly match a filter is

denied.

Usage Use this command when configuring access-lists for filtering IP software packets.

You can either create access-lists from within this command, or you can enter

access-list extended followed by only the name. Entering only the name moves

you to the IPv4 Extended ACL Configuration mode for the selected access-list.

29 ISO-TP4 (ISO Transport Protocol Class 4) [RFC905]

30 Bulk Data Transfer Protocol [RFC969]

33 DCCP (Datagram Congestion Control Protocol)

[RFC4340]

48 DSR (Dynamic Source Routing Protocol) [RFC4728]

50 ESP (Encap Security Payload) [RFC2406]

51 AH (Authentication Header) [RFC2402]

54 NARP (NBMA Address Resolution Protocol) [RFC1735]

58 ICMP for IPv6 [RFC1883]

59 No Next Header for IPv6 [RFC1883]

60 Destination Options for IPv6 [RFC1883]

88 EIGRP (Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol)

89 OSPFIGP [RFC1583]

97 Ethernet-within-IP Encapsulation / RFC3378

98 Encapsulation Header / RFC1241

108 IP Payload Compression Protocol / RFC2393

112 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol / RFC3768

134 RSVP-E2E-IGNORE / RFC3175

135 Mobility Header / RFC3775

136 UDPLite / RFC3828

137 MPLS-in-IP / RFC4023

138 MANET Protocols / RFC-ietf-manet-iana-07.txt

139-252 Unassigned / IANA

253 Use for experimentation and testing / RFC3692

254 Use for experimentation and testing / RFC3692

255 Reserved / IANA

Table 28-5: IP protocol number and description (cont.)

Protocol Number Protocol Description [RFC]

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 907

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST EXTENDED (NAMED)

From there you can configure your access-lists by using the commands (access-list

extended ICMP filter), (access-list extended IP filter), and (access-list extended IP

protocol filter).

Note that packets must match both the source and the destination details.

NOTE: Software ACLs will deny access unless explicitly permitted by an ACL action.

Examples You can enter the extended named ACL in the Global Configuration mode

together with the ACL filter entry on the same line, as shown below:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list extended TK deny tcp 2.2.2.3/24 eq

14 3.3.3.4/24 eq 12 log

Alternatively, you can enter the extended named ACL in Global Configuration

mode before specifying the ACL filter entry in the IPv4 Extended ACL

Configuration mode, as shown below:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list extended TK

awplus(config-ip-ext-acl)# deny tcp 2.2.2.3/24 eq 14 3.3.3.4/24

eq 12 log

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 908

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST (EXTENDED NUMBERED)

access-list (extended numbered)

Overview This command configures an extended numbered access-list that permits or

denies packets from specific source and destination IP addresses. You can either

create an extended numbered ACL together with an ACL filter entry in the Global

Configuration mode, or you can use the IPv4 Extended ACL Configuration mode

for sequenced ACL filter entry after entering a list number.

The no variant of this command removes a specified extended named access-list.

Syntax

[list-number]

access-list {<100-199>|<2000-2699>}

no access-list {<100-199>|<2000-2699>}

Syntax [deny|

permit]

access-list {<100-199>|<2000-2699>} {deny|permit} ip <source>

no access-list {<100-199>|<2000-2699>}{deny|permit} ip <source>

Parameter Description

<100-199>IP extended access-list.

<2000-2699>IP extended access-list (expanded range).

Parameter Description

<100-199>IP extended access-list.

<2000-2699>IP extended access-list (expanded range).

deny Access-list rejects packets that match the source and destination

filtering specified with this command.

permit Access-list permits packets that match the source and destination

filtering specified with this command.

<source>The source address of the packets. You can specify a single host, a

subnet, or all sources. The following are the valid formats for

specifying the source:

any Matches any source IP address.

host<ip-addr> Matches a single source host with the IP

address given by <ip-addr> in dotted

decimal notation.

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

An IPv4 address, followed by a reverse

mask in dotted decimal format. For

example, entering 192.168.1.1

0.0.0.255 is the same as entering

192.168.1.1/24. This matches any

source IP address within the specified

subnet.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 909

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST (EXTENDED NUMBERED)

Mode Global Configuration

Default Any traffic controlled by a software ACL that does not explicitly match a filter is

denied.

Usage Use this command when configuring access-list for filtering IP software packets.

You can either create access-lists from within this command, or you can enter

access-list followed by only the number. Entering only the number moves you to

the IPv4 Extended ACL Configuration mode for the selected access-list. From there

you can configure your access-lists by using the commands (access-list extended

ICMP filter), (access-list extended IP filter), and (access-list extended IP protocol

filter).

Note that packets must match both the source and the destination details.

NOTE: Software ACLs will deny access unless explicitly permitted by an ACL action.

Examples You can enter the extended ACL in the Global Configuration mode together with

the ACL filter entry on the same line, as shown below:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list 101 deny ip 172.16.10.0 0.0.0.255

any

Alternatively, you can enter the extended ACL in Global Configuration mode

before specifying the ACL filter entry in the IPv4 Extended ACL Configuration

mode, as shown below:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list 101

awplus(config-ip-ext-acl)# deny ip 172.16.10.0 0.0.0.255 any

<destination>The destination address of the packets. You can specify a single

host, a subnet, or all destinations. The following are the valid

formats for specifying the destination:

any Matches any destination IP address.

host<ip-addr> Matches a single destination host with the

IP address given by <ip-addr> in dotted

decimal notation.

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

An IPv4 address, followed by a reverse

mask in dotted decimal format. For

example, entering 192.168.1.1

0.0.0.255 is the same as entering

192.168.1.1/24. This matches any

destination IP address within the specified

subnet.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 910

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(ACCESS-LIST EXTENDED ICMP FILTER)

(access-list extended ICMP filter)

Overview Use this ACL filter to add a new ICMP filter entry to the current extended access-list.

If the sequence number is specified, the new filter is inserted at the specified

location. Otherwise, the new filter is added at the end of the access-list.

The no variant of this command removes an ICMP filter entry from the current

extended access-list. You can specify the ICMP filter entry for removal by entering

either its sequence number (e.g. no 10), or by entering its ICMP filter profile

without specifying its sequence number.

Note that the sequence number can be found by running the show access-list (IPv4

Software ACLs) command.

Syntax [icmp] [<sequence-number>] {deny|permit} icmp <source> <destination>

[icmp-type <icmp-value>] [log]

no {deny|permit} icmp <source> <destination>[icmp-type

<icmp-value>] [log]

no <sequence-number>

Parameter Description

<sequence-

number>

<1-65535>

The sequence number for the filter entry of the selected access

control list.

deny Access-list rejects packets that match the source and destination

filtering specified with this command.

permit Access-list permits packets that match the source and destination

filtering specified with this command.

icmp ICMP packet type.

<source>The source address of the packets. You can specify a single host, a

subnet, or all sources. The following are the valid formats for

specifying the source:

<ip-addr>/

An IPv4 address, followed by a

forward slash, then the prefix length.

This matches any source IP address

within the specified subnet.

any Matches any source IP address.

<destination>The destination address of the packets. You can specify a single

host, a subnet, or all destinations. The following are the valid

formats for specifying the destination:

<ip-addr>/

An IPv4 address, followed by a

forward slash, then the prefix length.

This matches any destination IP

address within the specified subnet.

any Matches any destination IP address.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 911

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(ACCESS-LIST EXTENDED ICMP FILTER)

Mode IPv4 Extended ACL Configuration

Default Any traffic controlled by a software ACL that does not explicitly match a filter is

denied.

Usage An ACL can be configured with multiple ACL filters using sequence numbers. If the

sequence number is omitted, the next available multiple of 10 will be used as the

sequence number for the new filter. A new ACL filter can be inserted into the

middle of an existing list by specifying the appropriate sequence number.

NOTE: The access control list being configured is selected by running the access-list

(extended numbered) command or the access-list extended (named) command, with

the required access control list number, or name - but with no further parameters

selected.

Software ACLs will deny access unless explicitly permitted by an ACL action.

Examples To add a new entry in access-list called my-list that will reject ICMP packets from

10.0.0.1 to 192.168.1.1, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list extended my-list

awplus(config-ip-ext-acl)# deny icmp 10.0.0.1/32 192.168.1.1/32

Use the following commands to add a new filter at sequence number 5 position of

the access-list called my-list. The filter will accept the ICMP type 8 packets from

10.1.1.0/24 network, to 192.168.1.0 network:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list extended my-list

awplus(config-ip-ext-acl)# 5 permit icmp 10.1.1.0/24

192.168.1.0/24 icmp-type 8

icmp-type The ICMP type.

<icmp-value>The value of the ICMP

type.

log Log the results.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 912

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(ACCESS-LIST EXTENDED IP FILTER)

(access-list extended IP filter)

Overview Use this ACL filter to add a new IP filter entry to the current extended access-list. If

the sequence number is specified, the new filter is inserted at the specified

location. Otherwise, the new filter is added at the end of the access-list.

The no variant of this command removes an IP filter entry from the current

extended access-list. You can specify the IP filter entry for removal by entering

either its sequence number (e.g. no 10), or by entering its IP filter profile without

specifying its sequence number.

Note that the sequence number can be found by running the show access-list (IPv4

Software ACLs) command.

Syntax [ip] [<sequence-number>] {deny|permit} ip <source> <destination>

no {deny|permit} ip <source> <destination>

no <sequence-number>

Parameter Description

<sequence-

number>

<1-65535>

The sequence number for the filter entry of the selected access

control list.

deny Access-list rejects packets that match the source and destination

filtering specified with this command.

permit Access-list permits packets that match the source and destination

filtering specified with this command.

<source> The source address of the packets. You can specify a single host, a

subnet, or all sources. The following are the valid formats for

specifying the source:

any Matches any source IP address.

host<ip-addr> Matches a single source host with the IP

address given by <ip-addr> in dotted

decimal notation.

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Alternatively, enter an IPv4 address

followed by a reverse mask in dotted

decimal format. For example, enter

192.168.1.1 0.0.0.255.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 913

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(ACCESS-LIST EXTENDED IP FILTER)

Mode Extended ACL Configuration

Default Any traffic controlled by a software ACL that does not explicitly match a filter is

denied.

Usage An ACL can be configured with multiple ACL filters using sequence numbers. If the

sequence number is omitted, the next available multiple of 10 will be used as the

sequence number for the new filter. A new ACL filter can be inserted into the

middle of an existing list by specifying the appropriate sequence number.

NOTE: The access control list being configured is selected by running the access-list

(extended numbered) command or the access-list extended (named) command, with

the required access control list number, or name - but with no further parameters

selected.

Software ACLs will deny access unless explicitly permitted by an ACL action.

Example 1

[list-number]

First use the following commands to enter the IPv4 Extended ACL Configuration

mode and define a numbered extended access-list 101:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list 101

awplus(config-ip-ext-acl)#

Then use the following commands to add a new entry to the numbered extended

access- list 101 that will reject packets from 10.0.0.1 to 192.168.1.1:

awplus(config-ip-ext-acl)# deny ip host 10.0.0.1 host

192.168.1.1

awplus(config-ip-ext-acl)# 20 permit ip any any

Example 2

[list-name]

First use the following commands to enter the IPv4 Extended ACL Configuration

mode and define a named access-list called my-acl:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list extended my-acl

awplus(config-ip-ext-acl)#

<destination>The destination address of the packets. You can specify a single

host, a subnet, or all destinations. The following are the valid

formats for specifying the destination:

any Matches any destination IP address.

host<ip-addr> Matches a single destination host with the

IP address given by <ip-addr> in dotted

decimal notation.

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Alternatively, enter an IPv4 address

followed by a reverse mask in dotted

decimal format. For example, enter

192.168.1.1 0.0.0.255.

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 914

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(ACCESS-LIST EXTENDED IP FILTER)

Then use the following commands to add a new entry to the named access-list

my-acl that will reject packets from 10.0.0.1 to 192.168.1.1:

awplus(config-ip-ext-acl)# deny ip host 10.0.0.1 host

192.168.1.1

awplus(config-ip-ext-acl)# 20 permit ip any any

Example 3

[list-number]

Use the following commands to remove the access-list filter entry with sequence

number 20 from extended numbered access-list 101.

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list 101

awplus(config-ip-ext-acl)# no 20

Example 4

[list-name]

Use the following commands to remove the access-list filter entry with sequence

number 20 from extended named access-list my-acl:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list extended my-acl

awplus(config-ip-ext-acl)# no 20

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 915

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(ACCESS-LIST EXTENDED IP PROTOCOL FILTER)

(access-list extended IP protocol filter)

Overview Use this ACL filter to add a new IP protocol type filter entry to the current extended

access-list. If the sequence number is specified, the new filter is inserted at the

specified location. Otherwise, the new filter is added at the end of the access-list.

The no variant of this command removes an IP protocol filter entry from the

current extended access-list. You can specify the IP filter entry for removal by

entering either its sequence number (e.g. no 10), or by entering its IP filter profile

without specifying its sequence number.

Note that the sequence number can be found by running the show access-list (IPv4

Software ACLs) command.

Syntax [proto] [<sequence-number>] {deny|permit} proto <ip-protocol> <source>

<destination> [log]

no {deny|permit} proto <ip-protocol> <source> <destination>

[log]

no <sequence-number>

Parameter Description

<sequence-

number>

<1-65535>

The sequence number for the filter entry of the selected access

control list.

deny Access-list rejects packets that match the source and destination

filtering specified with this command.

permit Access-list permits packets that match the source and destination

filtering specified with this command.

proto

<ip-protocol>

<1-255>

Specify IP protocol number, as defined by IANA (Internet Assigned

Numbers Authority

www.iana.org/assignments/protocol-numbers)

See below for a list of IP protocol numbers and their descriptions.

<source>The source address of the packets. You can specify a single host, a

subnet, or all sources. The following are the valid formats for

specifying the source:

<ip-addr>/

An IPv4 address, followed by a forward

slash, then the prefix length. This matches

any source IP address within the specified

subnet.

any Matches any source IP address.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 916

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(ACCESS-LIST EXTENDED IP PROTOCOL FILTER)

<destination>The destination address of the packets. You can specify a single

host, a subnet, or all destinations. The following are the valid

formats for specifying the destination:

<ip-addr>/

An IPv4 address, followed by a forward

slash, then the prefix length. This matches

any destination IP address within the

specified subnet.

any Matches any destination IP address.

log Log the results.

Table 28-6: IP protocol number and description

Protocol Number Protocol Description [RFC]

1Internet Control Message [RFC792]

2Internet Group Management [RFC1112]

3Gateway-to-Gateway [RFC823]

4IP in IP [RFC2003]

5Stream [RFC1190] [RFC1819]

6TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) [RFC793]

8EGP (Exterior Gateway Protocol) [RFC888]

9IGP (Interior Gateway Protocol) [IANA]

11 Network Voice Protocol [RFC741]

17 UDP (User Datagram Protocol) [RFC768]

20 Host monitoring [RFC869]

27 RDP (Reliable Data Protocol) [RFC908]

28 IRTP (Internet Reliable Transaction Protocol) [RFC938]

29 ISO-TP4 (ISO Transport Protocol Class 4) [RFC905]

30 Bulk Data Transfer Protocol [RFC969]

33 DCCP (Datagram Congestion Control Protocol)

[RFC4340]

48 DSR (Dynamic Source Routing Protocol) [RFC4728]

50 ESP (Encap Security Payload) [RFC2406]

51 AH (Authentication Header) [RFC2402]

54 NARP (NBMA Address Resolution Protocol) [RFC1735]

58 ICMP for IPv6 [RFC1883]

59 No Next Header for IPv6 [RFC1883]

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 917

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(ACCESS-LIST EXTENDED IP PROTOCOL FILTER)

Mode IPv4 Extended ACL Configuration

Default Any traffic controlled by a software ACL that does not explicitly match a filter is

denied.

Usage An ACL can be configured with multiple ACL filters using sequence numbers. If the

sequence number is omitted, the next available multiple of 10 will be used as the

sequence number for the new filter. A new ACL filter can be inserted into the

middle of an existing list by specifying the appropriate sequence number.

NOTE: The access control list being configured is selected by running the access-list

(extended numbered) command or the access-list extended (named) command, with

the required access control list number, or name - but with no further parameters

selected.

Software ACLs will deny access unless explicitly permitted by an ACL action.

Example 1

[creating a list]

Use the following commands to add a new access-list filter entry to the access-list

named my-list that will reject IP packets from source address 10.10.1.1/32

to destination address 192.68.1.1/32:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list extended my-list

awplus(config-ip-ext-acl)# deny ip 10.10.1.1/32 192.168.1.1/32

60 Destination Options for IPv6 [RFC1883]

88 EIGRP (Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol)

89 OSPFIGP [RFC1583]

97 Ethernet-within-IP Encapsulation / RFC3378

98 Encapsulation Header / RFC1241

108 IP Payload Compression Protocol / RFC2393

112 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol / RFC3768

134 RSVP-E2E-IGNORE / RFC3175

135 Mobility Header / RFC3775

136 UDPLite / RFC3828

137 MPLS-in-IP / RFC4023

138 MANET Protocols / RFC-ietf-manet-iana-07.txt

139-252 Unassigned / IANA

253 Use for experimentation and testing / RFC3692

254 Use for experimentation and testing / RFC3692

255 Reserved / IANA

Table 28-6: IP protocol number and description (cont.)

Protocol Number Protocol Description [RFC]

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 918

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(ACCESS-LIST EXTENDED IP PROTOCOL FILTER)

Example 2

[adding to a list]

Use the following commands to add a new access-list filter entry at sequence

position 5 in the access-list named my-list that will accept packets from source

address 10.10.1.1/24 to destination address 192.68.1.1/24:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list extended my-list

awplus(config-ip-ext-acl)# 5 permit ip 10.10.1.1/24

192.168.1.1/ 24

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 919

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(ACCESS-LIST EXTENDED TCP UDP FILTER)

(access-list extended TCP UDP filter)

Overview Use this ACL filter to add a new TCP or UDP filter entry to the current extended

access-list. If the sequence number is specified, the new filter is inserted at the

specified location. Otherwise, the new filter is added at the end of the access-list.

The no variant of this command removes a TCP or UDP filter entry from the current

extended access-list. You can specify the TCP or UDP filter entry for removal by

entering either its sequence number (e.g. no 10), or by entering its TCP or UDP

filter profile without specifying its sequence number.

Note that the sequence number can be found by running the show access-list (IPv4

Software ACLs) command.

Syntax [tcp|udp] [<sequence-number>] {deny|permit} {tcp|udp} <source> {eq

<sourceport> |lt <sourceport>|gt <sourceport>|ne <sourceport>}

<destination> [eq <destport>|lt <destport>|gt <destport>|ne

<destport>] [log]

no [<sequence-number>]{deny|permit} {tcp|udp} <source> {eq

<sourceport> |lt <sourceport>|gt <sourceport>|ne <sourceport>}

<destination> [eq <destport>|lt <destport>|gt <destport>|ne

<destport>] [log]

no <sequence-number>

Mode IPv4 Extended ACL Configuration

Default Any traffic controlled by a software ACL that does not explicitly match a filter is

denied.

Usage An ACL can be configured with multiple ACL filters using sequence numbers. If the

sequence number is omitted, the next available multiple of 10 will be used as the

sequence number for the new filter. A new ACL filter can be inserted into the

middle of an existing list by specifying the appropriate sequence number.

NOTE: The access control list being configured is selected by running the access-list

(extended numbered) command or the access-list extended (named) command, with

the required access control list number, or name - but with no further parameters

selected.

Software ACLs will deny access unless explicitly permitted by an ACL action.

Example 1

[creating a list]

To add a new entry to the access-list named my-list that will reject TCP packets

from 10.0.0.1on TCP port 10 to 192.168.1.1 on TCP port 20, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list extended my-list

awplus(config-ip-ext-acl)# deny tcp 10.0.0.1/32 eq 10

192.168.1.1/32 eq 20

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 920

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(ACCESS-LIST EXTENDED TCP UDP FILTER)

Example 2

[adding to a list]

To insert a new entry with sequence number 5 of the access-list named my-list

that will accept UDP packets from 10.1.1.0/24 network to 192.168.1.0/24

network on UDP port 80, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list extended my-list

awplus(config-ip-ext-acl)# 5 permit udp 10.1.1.0/24

192.168.1.0/24 eq 80

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 921

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST STANDARD (NAMED)

access-list standard (named)

Overview This command configures a standard named access-list that permits or denies

packets from a specific source IP address. You can either create a standard named

ACL together with an ACL filter entry in the Global Configuration mode, or you can

use the IPv4 Standard ACL Configuration mode for sequenced ACL filter entry after

first entering an access-list name.

The no variant of this command removes a specified standard named access-list.

Syntax

[list-name]

access-list standard <standard-access-list-name>

no access-list standard <standard-access-list-name>

Syntax

[deny|permit]

access-list standard <standard-access-list-name> {deny|permit}

no access-list standard <standard-access-list-name>

{deny|permit} <source>

Mode Global Configuration

Default Any traffic controlled by a software ACL that does not explicitly match a filter is

denied.

Parameter Description

<standard-access-list-name

Specify a name for the standard access-list.

Parameter Description

<standard-

access-list-

name>

Specify a name for the standard access-list.

deny The access-list rejects packets that match the source filtering

specified with this command.

permit The access-list permits packets that match the source filtering

specified with this command.

<source>The source address of the packets. You can specify a single host, a

subnet, or all sources. The following are the valid formats for

specifying the source:

<ip-addr>/<prefix>An IPv4 address, followed by a

forward slash, then the prefix

length. This matches any source

IP address within the specified

subnet.

any Matches any source IP address.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 922

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST STANDARD (NAMED)

Usage Use this command when configuring a standard named access-list for filtering IP

software packets.

You can either create access-lists from within this command, or you can enter

access-list standard followed by only the name. Entering only the name moves

you to the IPv4 Standard ACL Configuration mode for the selected access-list. From

there you can configure your access-lists by using the command (access-list

standard named filter).

NOTE: Software ACLs will deny access unless explicitly permitted by an ACL action.

Examples To define a standard access-list named my-list and deny any packets from any

source, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list standard my-list deny any

Alternatively, to define a standard access-list named my-list and enter the IPv4

Standard ACL Configuration mode to deny any packets from any source, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list standard my-list

awplus(config-ip-std-acl)# 5 deny any

Commands

(access-list standard named filter)

show running-config

show ip access-list

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 923

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST (STANDARD NUMBERED)

access-list (standard numbered)

Overview This command configures a standard numbered access-list that permits or denies

packets from a specific source IP address. You can either create a standard

numbered ACL together with an ACL filter entry in the Global Configuration mode,

or you can use the IPv4 Standard ACL Configuration mode for sequenced ACL filter

entry after first entering an access-list number.

The no variant of this command removes a specified standard numbered

access-list.

Syntax

[list-number]

access-list {<1-99>|<1300-1999>}

no access-list {<1-99>|<1300-1999>}

Syntax [deny|

permit]

access-list {<1-99>|<1300-1999>} {deny|permit} <source>

no access-list {<1-99>|<1300-1999>} {deny|permit} <source>

Mode Global Configuration

Default Any traffic controlled by a software ACL that does not explicitly match a filter is

denied.

Usage Use this command when configuring a standard numbered access-list for filtering

IP software packets.

Parameter Description

<1-99>IP standard access-list.

<1300-1999>IP standard access-list (expanded range).

Parameter Description

<1-99>IP standard access-list.

<1300-1999>IP standard access-list (expanded range).

deny Access-list rejects packets from the specified source.

permit Access-list accepts packets from the specified source.

<source>The source address of the packets. You can specify a single host, a

subnet, or all sources. The following are the valid formats for

specifying the source:

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Enter an IPv4 address followed by a reverse

mask in dotted decimal format. For example,

entering 192.168.1.1 0.0.0.255 is

the same as entering 192.168.1.1/24.

any Matches any source IP address.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 924

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

ACCESS-LIST (STANDARD NUMBERED)

You can either create access-lists from within this command, or you can enter

access-list followed by only the number. Entering only the number moves you to

the IPv4 Standard ACL Configuration mode for the selected access-list. From there

you can configure your access-lists by using the command (access-list standard

numbered filter).

NOTE: Software ACLs will deny access unless explicitly permitted by an ACL action.

Examples To create ACL number 67 that will deny packets from subnet 172.16.10, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list 67 deny 172.16.10.0 0.0.0.255

Alternatively, to enter the IPv4 Standard ACL Configuration mode to create the

ACL filter and deny packets from subnet 172.16.10.0 for the standard

numbered access-list 67, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list 67

awplus(config-ip-std-acl)# deny 172.16.10.0 0.0.0.255

Commands

(access-list standard named filter)

show running-config

show ip access-list

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 925

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(ACCESS-LIST STANDARD NAMED FILTER)

(access-list standard named filter)

Overview This ACL filter adds a source IP address filter entry to a current named standard

access-list. If the sequence number is specified, the new filter entry is inserted at

the specified location. Otherwise, the new entry is added at the end of the

access-list.

The no variant of this command removes a source IP address filter entry from the

current named standard access-list. You can specify the source IP address filter

entry for removal by entering either its sequence number (e.g. no 10), or by

entering its source IP address filter profile without specifying its sequence number.

Note that the sequence number can be found by running the show access-list (IPv4

Software ACLs) command.

Syntax [<sequence-number>] {deny|permit} {<source> [exact-match]|any}

no {deny|permit} {<source> [exact-match]|any}

no <sequence-number>

Mode IPv4 Standard ACL Configuration

Default Any traffic controlled by a software ACL that does not explicitly match a filter is

denied.

Parameter Description

<sequence-number><1-65535>

The sequence number for the filter entry of the

selected access control list.

deny Access-list rejects packets of the source filtering

specified.

permit Access-list allows packets of the source filtering

specified

<source>The source address of the packets. You can specify

either a subnet or all sources. The following are the

valid formats for specifying the source:

<ip-addr>/

An IPv4 address, followed by a

forward slash, then the prefix

length. This matches any

destination IP address within

the specified subnet.

<ip-addr> An IPv4 address in a.b.c.d

format.

exact-match Specify an exact IP prefix to match on.

any Matches any source IP address.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 926

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(ACCESS-LIST STANDARD NAMED FILTER)

Usage An ACL can be configured with multiple ACL filters using sequence numbers. If the

sequence number is omitted, the next available multiple of 10 will be used as the

sequence number for the new filter. A new ACL filter can be inserted into the

middle of an existing list by specifying the appropriate sequence number.

NOTE: The access control list being configured is selected by running the access-list

standard (named) command with the required access control list name, but with no

further parameters selected.

Software ACLs will deny access unless explicitly permitted by an ACL action.

Examples Use the following commands to add a new filter entry to access-list my-list that

will reject IP address 10.1.1.1:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list standard my-list

awplus(config-ip-std-acl)# deny 10.1.1.1/32

Use the following commands to insert a new filter entry into access-list my-list

at sequence position number 15 that will accept IP network 10.1.2.0:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list standard my-list

awplus(config-ip-std-acl)# 15 permit 10.1.2.0/24

Commands

access-list standard (named)

show running-config

show ip access-list

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 927

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(ACCESS-LIST STANDARD NUMBERED FILTER)

(access-list standard numbered filter)

Overview This ACL filter adds a source IP address filter entry to a current standard numbered

access-list. If a sequence number is specified, the new filter entry is inserted at the

specified location. Otherwise, the new filter entry is added at the end of the

access-list.

The no variant of this command removes a source IP address filter entry from the

current standard numbered access-list. You can specify the source IP address filter

entry for removal by entering either its sequence number (e.g. no 10), or by

entering its source IP address filter profile without specifying its sequence number.

Note that the sequence number can be found by running the show access-list (IPv4

Software ACLs) command.

Syntax [<sequence-number>] {deny|permit} {<source>|host

<host-address>|any}

no {deny|permit} {<source>|host <host-address>|any}

no <sequence-number>

Mode IPv4 Standard ACL Configuration

Default Any traffic controlled by a software ACL that does not explicitly match a filter is

denied.

Parameter Description

<sequence-number><1-65535>

The sequence number for the filter entry of the

selected access control list.

deny Access-list rejects packets of the type specified.

permit Access-list allows packets of the type specified

<source>The source address of the packets. You can specify

either a subnet or all sources. The following are the

valid formats for specifying the source:

<ip-addr>

<reverse-mask>

Enter a reverse mask for the

source address in dotted

decimal format. For example,

entering 192.168.1.1

0.0.0.255 is the same as

entering 192.168.1.1/24.

<ip-addr> An IPv4 address in a.b.c.d

format.

host A single source host.

<host-address>Single source host address.

any Matches any source IP address.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 928

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(ACCESS-LIST STANDARD NUMBERED FILTER)

Usage An ACL can be configured with multiple ACL filters using sequence numbers. If the

sequence number is omitted, the next available multiple of 10 will be used as the

sequence number for the new filter. A new ACL filter can be inserted into the

middle of an existing list by specifying the appropriate sequence number.

NOTE: The access control list being configured is selected by running the access-list

(standard numbered) command with the required access control list number but with

no further parameters selected.

Software ACLs will deny access unless explicitly permitted by an ACL action.

Example To add a new entry accepting the IP network 10.1.1.0/24 at the sequence

number 15 position, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list 99

awplus(config-ip-std-acl)# 15 permit 10.1.2.0 0.0.0.255

Commands

access-list (standard numbered)

show running-config

show ip access-list

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 929

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

DOS

dos

Overview Use this command to configure Denial-of-Service (DoS) features for a port. Six

different DoS attacks can be detected: IP Options, Land, Ping-of-Death, Smurf,

Synflood and Teardrop.

When the attack is detected, three different actions are available:

• Shutdown the port for one minute

• Cause an SNMP trap.

• Send traffic to the mirror port

Syntax dos {ipoptions|land|ping-of-death|smurf broadcast

<ip-address>|synflood|teardrop} action {shutdown|trap|mirror}

Mode Interface Configuration for a switch port interface.

Default DoS attack detection is not configured by default on any switch port interface.

Usage See the below table for more information about the DoS attacks recognized by this

command:

Parameter Description

dos Denial-Of-Service.

ipoptions IP Options attack.

land Land attack.

ping-of-death Large ping attack.

smurf Ping to broadcast address.

broadcast Broadcast.

<ip-address>Local IP Broadcast Address.

synflood SYN flood attack.

teardrop IP fragmentation attack.

action Action.

shutdown Shutdown port.

trap Trap to SNMP.

mirror Send packets to mirror port.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 930

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

DOS

Type of DoS attack Description

ipoptions This type of attack occurs when an attacker sends packets

containing bad IP options to a victim node. There are many

different types of IP options attacks and this software does not

try to distinguish between them. Rather, if this defense is

activated, the number of ingress IP packets containing IP

options is counted. If the number exceeds 20 packets per

second, the switch considers this a possible IP options attack.

This defense does not require the CPU to monitor packets, so

does not put extra load on the switch's CPU.

land This type of attack occurs when the Source IP and Destination IP

address are the same. This can cause a target host to be

confused. Since packets with the same source and destination

addresses should never occur, these packets are dropped when

this attack is enabled.

This defense does not require the CPU to monitor packets, so

does not put extra load on the switch's CPU.

ping-of-death This type of attack results from a fragmented packet which,

when reassembled, would exceed the maximum size of a valid

IP datagram. To detect this attack, the final fragment of ICMP

packets has to be sent to the CPU for inspection. This defense

can therefore load the CPU.

Note that the extra CPU load will not affect normal traffic

switching between ports, but other protocols such as IGMP and

STP may be affected. This defense is not recommended where a

large number of fragmented packets are expected.

smurf This type of attack is an ICMP ping packet to a broadcast

address. Although routers should not forward packets to local

broadcast addresses anymore (see RFC2644), the Smurf attack

can still be explicitly discarded with this command. In order for

the Smurf attack to work, the broadcast IP address is required.

Any ICMP Ping packet with this destination address is

considered an attack.

This defense does not require the CPU to monitor packets, so

does not put extra load on the switch's CPU.

synflood In this type of attack, an attacker, seeking to overwhelm a victim

with TCP connection requests, sends a large number of TCP SYN

packets with bogus source addresses to the victim. The victim

responds with SYN ACK packets, but since the original source

addresses are bogus, the victim node does not receive any

replies. If the attacker sends enough requests in a short enough

period, the victim may freeze operations once the requests

exceed the capacity of its connections queue.

To defend against this form of attack, a switch port monitors the

number of ingress TCP-SYN packets it receives. An attack is

recorded if a port receives more 60 TCP-SYN packets per second.

teardrop In this DoS attack, an attacker sends a packet in several

fragments with a bogus offset value, used to reconstruct the

packet, in one of the fragments to a victim. This results in the

victim being unable to reassemble the packet, possibly causing

it to freeze operations.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 931

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

DOS

Examples To configure smurf DoS detection on port1.0.1, and shutdown the interface if

an attack is detected, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1

awplus(config-if)# dos smurf broadcast 192.168.1.0 action

shutdown

To configure land DoS detection on port1.0.1, and shutdown the interface if an

attack is detected, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1

awplus(config-if)# dos land action shutdown

To configure ipoptions DoS detection on port1.0.1, and shutdown the

interface if an attack is detected, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1

awplus(config-if)# dos ipoptions action shutdown

To configure ping-of-death DoS detection on port1.0.1, and shutdown the

interface if an attack is detected, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1

awplus(config-if)# dos ping-of-death action shutdown

To configure synflood DoS detection on port1.0.1, and shutdown the

interface if an attack is detected, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1

awplus(config-if)# dos synflood action shutdown

To configure teardrop DoS detection on port1.0.1, and shutdown the

interface if an attack is detected, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1

awplus(config-if)# dos teardrop action shutdown

Commands

show dos interface

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 932

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

MAXIMUM-ACCESS-LIST

maximum-access-list

Overview Use this command to set the maximum number of filters that can be added to any

access-list. These are access-lists within the ranges 1-199, 1300-1999 and

2000-2699, and named standard and extended access-lists.

The no variant of this command removes the limit on the number of filters that can

be added to a software access-list.

Syntax maximum-access-list <1-4294967294>

no maximum-access-list

Mode Global Configuration

Example To set the maximum number of software filters to 200, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# maximum-access-list 200

Parameter Description

<1-4294967294>Filter range.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 933

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

SHOW ACCESS-LIST (IPV4 SOFTWARE ACLS)

show access-list (IPv4 Software ACLs)

Overview Use this command to display the specified access-list, or all access-lists if none have

been specified. Note that only defined access-lists are displayed. An error message

is displayed for an undefined access-list

Syntax show access-list

[<1-99>|<100-199>|<1300-1999>|<2000-2699>|<3000-3699>|

<4000-4499>|<access-list-name>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Examples To show all access-lists configured on the switch:

awplus# show access-list

To show the access-list with an ID of 20:

awplus# show access-list 20

Parameter Description

<1-99>IP standard access-list.

<100-199>IP extended access-list.

<1300-1999>IP standard access-list (standard - expanded range).

<2000-2699>IP extended access-list (extended - expanded range).

<3000-3699>Hardware IP access-list.

<4000-4499>Hardware MAC access-list.

<access-list-name>IP named access-list.



Standard IP access list 1

deny 172.16.2.0, wildcard bits 0.0.0.255

Standard IP access list 20

deny 192.168.10.0, wildcard bits 0.0.0.255

deny 192.168.12.0, wildcard bits 0.0.0.255

Hardware IP access list 3001

permit ip 192.168.20.0 255.255.255.0 any

Hardware IP access list 3020

permit tcp any 192.0.2.0/24

awplus#show access-list 20

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 934

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

SHOW ACCESS-LIST (IPV4 SOFTWARE ACLS)

Note the following error message is displayed if you attempt to show an undefined

access-list:

awplus# show access-list 2

Commands

access-list standard (named)

access-list (standard numbered)



Standard IP access-list 20

deny 192.168.10.0, wildcard bits 0.0.0.255

deny 192.168.12.0, wildcard bits 0.0.0.255



% Can't find access-list 2

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 935

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

SHOW DOS INTERFACE

show dos interface

Overview Use this command to display the Denial-of-Service (DoS) features configured on a

switch port interface from the dos command. See the dos command for

descriptions of DoS attack types.

Syntax show dos interface {<port-list>}

Mode Privileged Exec

Output Figure 28-1: Example output from the show dos interface command prior to a

DoS attack

Parameter Description

<port-list>Specify the switch port or port list to display DoS configuration

options set with the dos command.

awplus#configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CTNTL/Z.

awplus(config)#interface port1.0.1

awplus(config-if)#dos synflood action shutdown

awplus(config-if)#exit

awplus(config)#exit

awplus#show dos interface port1.0.1



DoS settings for interface port1.0.1

-----------------------------------------

Port status : Enabled

ipoptions : Disabled

land : Disabled

ping-of-death : Disabled

smurf : Disabled

synflood : Enabled

Action : Shutdown port

Attacks detected : 0

teardrop : Disabled

awplus#

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 936

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

SHOW DOS INTERFACE

Figure 28-2: Example output from the show dos interface command after a

synflood DoS attack

awplus#show dos interface port1.0.1



DoS settings for interface port1.0.1

-----------------------------------------

Port status : Enabled

ipoptions : Disabled

land : Disabled

ping-of-death : Disabled

smurf : Disabled

synflood : Enabled

Action : Shutdown port

Attacks detected : 1

teardrop : Disabled

awplus#

Table 29: Parameters in the show dos interface command output:

Type of DoS attack Description

Port status Displays Enabled when the port is configured as being

administratively up after issuing the no shutdown command.

Displays Disabled when the port is configured as being

administratively down with the shutdown command.

ipoptions Displays Enabled when the ipoptions parameter is

configured with the dos command, plus the action (Shutdown

port, Mirror port, or Trap port) and the number of

instances of any ipoptions DoS attacks that have occurred on

the interface.

Displays Disabled when the ipoptions parameter is not

configured with the dos command.

land Displays Enabled when the land parameter is configured

with the dos command, plus the action (Shutdown port,

Mirror port, or Trap port) and the number of instances

of any land DoS attacks that have occurred on the interface.

Displays Disabled when the land parameter is not

configured with the dos command.

ping-of-death Displays Enabled when the ping-of-death parameter is

configured with the dos command, plus the action (Shutdown

port, Mirror port, or Trap port) and the number of

instances of any ping-of-death DoS attacks that have occurred

on the interface.

Displays Disabled when the ping-of-death parameter is not

configured with the dos command.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 937

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

SHOW DOS INTERFACE

Commands

dos

smurf Displays Enabled when the smurf parameter is configured

with the dos command, plus the action (Shutdown port,

Mirror port, or Trap port) and the number of instances

of any smurf DoS attacks that have occurred on the interface.

Displays Disabled when the smurf parameter is not

configured with the dos command.

synflood Displays Enabled when the synflood parameter is configured

with the dos command, plus the action (Shutdown port,

Mirror port, or Trap port) and the number of instances

of any synflood DoS attacks that have occurred on the

interface.

Displays Disabled when the synflood parameter is not

configured with the dos command.

teardrop Displays Enabled when the teardrop parameter is configured

with the dos command, plus the action (Shutdown port,

Mirror port, or Trap port) and the number of instances

of any teardrop DoS attacks that have occurred on the

interface.

Displays Disabled when the teardrop parameter is not

configured with the dos command.

Table 29: Parameters in the show dos interface command output: (cont.)

Type of DoS attack Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 938

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

SHOW IP ACCESS-LIST

show ip access-list

Overview Use this command to display IP access-lists.

Syntax show ip access-list

[<1-99>|<100-199>|<1300-1999>|<2000-2699>|<access-list-name>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example awplus# show ip access-list

Output Figure 28-3: Example output from the show ip access-list command

Parameter Description

<1-99>IP standard access-list.

<100-199>IP extended access-list.

<1300-1999>IP standard access-list (expanded range).

<2000-2699>IP extended access-list (expanded range).

<access-list-name>IP named access-list.

Standard IP access-list 1

permit 172.168.6.0, wildcard bits 0.0.0.255

permit 192.168.6.0, wildcard bits 0.0.0.255

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 939

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV4 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

VTY ACCESS-CLASS (NUMBERED)

vty access-class (numbered)

Overview For IPv4, use this command to set a standard numbered software access list to be

the management ACL. This is then applied to all available VTY lines for controlling

remote access by Telnet and SSH. This command allows or denies packets

containing the IP addresses included in the ACL to create a connection to your

device.

ACLs that are attached using this command have an implicit deny-all filter as the

final entry in the ACL. So a typical configuration would be to permit a specific

address, or range of addresses, and rely on the deny-all filter to block all other

access.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the access list.

Syntax vty access-class {<1-99>|<1300-1999>}

no vty access-class [<1-99>|<1300-1999>]

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To set access-list 4 to be the management ACL, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# vty access-class 4

To remove access-list 4 from the management ACL, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no vty access-class 4

Output Figure 28-4: Example output from the show running-config command

Commands

show running-config

vty ipv6 access-class (named)

Parameter Description

<1-99> IPv4 standard access-list number

<1300-1999> IPv4 standard access-list number (expanded range)

awplus#show running-config|grep access-class



vty access-class 4

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 940

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPv6 Software

Access Control List

(ACL) Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference for the IPv6 Software Access

Control List (ACL) commands, and contains detailed command information and

command examples about IPv6 software ACLs as applied to Routing and

Multicasting, which are not applied to interfaces.

For information about ACLs, see the ACL Feature Overview and Configuration

Guide.

To apply ACLs to an LACP channel group, apply it to all the individual switch ports

in the channel group. To apply ACLs to a static channel group, apply it to the static

channel group itself. For more information on link aggregation see the following

references:

•the Link Aggregation Feature Overview_and_Configuration Guide.

•Link Aggregation Commands

Note that text in parenthesis in command names indicates usage not keyword

entry. For example, ipv6-access-list (named) indicates named IPv6 ACLs entered

as ipv6-access-list <name> where <name> is a placeholder not a keyword.

Note also that parenthesis surrounding ACL filters indicates the type of ACL filter

not the keyword entry in the CLI. For example, (ipv6 access-list standard IPv6

filter) represents command entry in the format shown in the syntax:

[<sequence-number>] {deny|permit}

{<source-ipv6-address/prefix-length>|any}

NOTE: Software ACLs will deny access unless explicitly permitted by an ACL action.

Sub-modes Many of the ACL commands operate from sub-modes that are specific to particular

ACL types. The following table shows the CLI prompts at which ACL commands are

entered.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 941

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

Command List •“ipv6 access-list standard (named)” on page 942

•“(ipv6 access-list standard filter)” on page 944

•“show ipv6 access-list (IPv6 Software ACLs)” on page 946

•“vty ipv6 access-class (named)” on page 947

Table 29-1: IPv6 Software Access List Commands and Prompts

Command Name Command Mode Prompt

show ipv6 access-list (IPv6 Software

ACLs)

Privileged Exec awplus#

ipv6 access-list standard (named) Global Configuration awplus(config)#

(ipv6 access-list standard filter) IPv6 Standard ACL

Configuration

awplus(config-ipv6-std-acl)#

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 942

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

IPV6 ACCESS-LIST STANDARD (NAMED)

ipv6 access-list standard (named)

Overview This command configures an IPv6 standard access-list for filtering frames that

permit or deny IPv6 packets from a specific source IPv6 address.

The no variant of this command removes a specified IPv6 standard access-list.

Syntax

[list-name]

ipv6 access-list standard <ipv6-acl-list-name>

no ipv6 access-list standard <ipv6-acl-list-name>

Syntax [deny|

permit]

ipv6 access-list standard <ipv6-acl-list-name> [{deny|permit}

{<ipv6-source-address/prefix-length>|any} [exact-match]]

no ipv6 access-list standard <ipv6-acl-list-name>

[{deny|permit} {<ipv6-source-address/prefix-length>|any}

[exact-match]]

Mode Global Configuration

Default Any traffic controlled by a software ACL that does not explicitly match a filter is

denied.

Usage Use IPv6 standard access-lists to control the transmission of IPv6 packets on an

interface, and restrict the content of routing updates. The switch stops checking

the IPv6 standard access-list when a match is encountered.

Parameter Description

<ipv6-acl-list-name> A user-defined name for the IPv6 software standard

access-list.

Parameter Description

<ipv6-acl-list-name> A user-defined name for the IPv6 software standard

access-list.

deny The IPv6 software standard access-list rejects

packets that match the type, source, and destination

filtering specified with this command.

permit The IPv6 software standard access-list permits

packets that match the type, source, and destination

filtering specified with this command.

<ipv6-source-address/

prefix-length>

Specifies a source address and prefix length.

The IPv6 address prefix uses the format

X:X::/prefix-length. The prefix-length is usually set

between 0 and 64.

any Matches any source IPv6 address.

exact-match Exact match of the prefixes.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 943

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

IPV6 ACCESS-LIST STANDARD (NAMED)

For backwards compatibility you can either create IPv6 standard access-lists from

within this command, or you can enter ipv6 access-list standard

followed by only the IPv6 standard access-list name. This latter (and preferred)

method moves you to the (config-ipv6-std-acl) prompt for the selected

IPv6 standard access-list, and from here you can configure the filters for this

selected IPv6 standard access-list.

NOTE: Software ACLs will deny access unless explicitly permitted by an ACL action.

Example To enter the IPv6 Standard ACL Configuration mode for the access-list named

my-list, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ipv6 access-list standard my-list

awplus(config-ipv6-std-acl)#

Commands

(ipv6 access-list standard filter)

show ipv6 access-list (IPv6 Software ACLs)

show running-config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 944

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(IPV6 ACCESS-LIST STANDARD FILTER)

(ipv6 access-list standard filter)

Overview Use this ACL filter to add a filter entry for an IPv6 source address and prefix length

to the current standard IPv6 access-list. If a sequence number is specified, the new

entry is inserted at the specified location. Otherwise, the new entry is added at the

end of the access-list.

The no variant of this command removes a filter entry for an IPv6 source address

and prefix from the current standard IPv6 access-list. You can specify the filter

entry for removal by entering either its sequence number, or its filter entry profile.

Syntax [icmp] [<sequence-number>] {deny|permit}

{<ipv6-source-address/prefix-length>|any}

no {deny|permit} {<ipv6-source-address/prefix-length>|any}

no <sequence-number>

Mode IPv6 Standard ACL Configuration

Default Any traffic controlled by a software ACL that does not explicitly match a filter is

denied.

Usage The filter entry will match on any IPv6 packet that has the specified IPv6 source

address and prefix length. The parameter any may be specified if an address does

not matter.

NOTE: Software ACLs will deny access unless explicitly permitted by an ACL action.

Examples To add an ACL filter entry with sequence number 5 that will deny any IPv6 packets

to the standard IPv6 access-list named my-list, enter the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ipv6 access-list standard my-list

awplus(config-ipv6-std-acl)# 5 deny any

Parameter Description

<sequence-number><1-65535>

The sequence number for the filter entry of the selected

access control list.

deny Specifies the packets to reject.

permit Specifies the packets to accept.

<ipv6-source-

address/prefix-

length>

IPv6 source address and prefix-length in the form X:X::X:X/P.

any Any IPv6 source host address.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 945

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

(IPV6 ACCESS-LIST STANDARD FILTER)

To remove the ACL filter entry that will deny any IPv6 packets from the standard

IPv6 access-list named my-list, enter the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ipv6 access-list standard my-list

awplus(config-ipv6-std-acl)# no deny any

Alternately, to remove the ACL filter entry with sequence number 5 to the

standard IPv6 access-list named my-list, enter the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# ipv6 access-list standard my-list

awplus(config-ipv6-std-acl)# no 5

Commands

ipv6 access-list standard (named)

show ipv6 access-list (IPv6 Software ACLs)

show running-config

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 946

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

SHOW IPV6 ACCESS-LIST (IPV6 SOFTWARE ACLS)

show ipv6 access-list (IPv6 Software ACLs)

Overview Use this command to display all configured IPv6 access-lists or the IPv6 access-list

specified by name.

Syntax show ipv6 access-list [<access-list-name>]

show ipv6 access-list standard [<access-list-name>]

Mode User Exec and Privileged Exec

Example To show all configured IPv6 access-lists, use the following command:

awplus# show ipv6 access-list

Output Figure 29-1: Example output from show ipv6 access-list

Example To show the IPv6 access-list named deny_icmp, use the following command:

awplus# show ipv6 access-list deny_icmp

Output Figure 29-2: Example output from show ipv6 access-list for a named ACL

Commands

ipv6 access-list standard (named)

(ipv6 access-list standard filter)

Parameter Description

<access-list-name>Only display information about an IPv6 access-list with

the specified name.

standard Only display information about standard access-lists.



IPv6 access-list deny_icmp

deny icmp any any vlan 1



IPv6 access-list deny_ssh

deny tcp abcd::0/64 any eq 22



IPv6 access-list deny_icmp

deny icmp any any vlan 1

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 947

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

IPV6 SOFTWARE ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) COMMANDS

VTY IPV6 ACCESS-CLASS (NAMED)

vty ipv6 access-class (named)

Overview For IPv6, use this command to set a standard named software access list to be the

management ACL. This is then applied to all available VTY lines for controlling

remote access by Telnet and SSH. This command allows or denies packets

containing the IPv6 addresses included in the ACL to create a connection to your

device.

ACLs that are attached using this command have an implicit ‘deny-all’ filter as the

final entry in the ACL. A typical configuration is to permit a specific address, or

range of addresses, and rely on the ‘deny-all’ filter to block all other access.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the access list.

Syntax vty ipv6 access-class <access-name>

no vty ipv6 access-class [<access-name>]

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To set the named standard access-list named access-ctrl to be the IPv6

management ACL, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# vty ipv6 access-class access-ctrl

To remove access-ctrl from the management ACL, use the following commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no vty ipv6 access-class access-ctrl

Output Figure 29-3: Example output from the show running-config command

Commands

show running-config

vty access-class (numbered)

Parameter Description

<access-name> Specify an IPv6 standard software access-list name

awplus#showrunning-config|grep access-class



vty ipv6 access-class access-ctrl

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 948

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QoS Commands

Introduction

Overview This chapter provides an alphabetical reference for Quality of Service commands.

QoS uses ACLs. For more information about ACLs, see the ACL Feature Overview

and Configuration Guide.

Command List •“class” on page 950

•“class-map” on page 951

•“clear mls qos interface policer-counters” on page 952

•“default-action” on page 953

•“description (QoS policy-map)” on page 954

•“egress-rate-limit” on page 955

•“match access-group” on page 956

•“match cos” on page 958

•“match dscp” on page 959

•“match eth-format protocol” on page 960

•“match inner-cos” on page 963

•“match inner-vlan” on page 964

•“match ip-precedence” on page 965

•“match mac-type” on page 966

•“match tcp-flags” on page 967

•“match vlan” on page 968

•“mls qos cos” on page 969

•“mls qos enable” on page 970

•“mls qos map cos-queue to” on page 971

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 949

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

•“mls qos map premark-dscp to” on page 972

•“no police” on page 974

•“police single-rate action” on page 975

•“police twin-rate action” on page 977

•“policy-map” on page 979

•“priority-queue” on page 980

•“remark-map” on page 981

•“remark new-cos” on page 983

•“service-policy input” on page 985

•“show class-map” on page 986

•“show mls qos” on page 987

•“show mls qos interface” on page 988

•“show mls qos interface policer-counters” on page 989

•“show mls qos interface queue-counters” on page 991

•“show mls qos interface storm-status” on page 993

•“show mls qos maps cos-queue” on page 994

•“show mls qos maps premark-dscp” on page 995

•“show platform classifier statistics utilization brief” on page 996

•“show policy-map” on page 997

•“storm-action” on page 998

•“storm-downtime” on page 999

•“storm-protection” on page 1000

•“storm-rate” on page 1001

•“storm-window” on page 1002

•“trust dscp” on page 1003

•“wrr-queue disable queues” on page 1004

•“wrr-queue egress-rate-limit queues” on page 1005

•“wrr-queue weight queues” on page 1006

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 950

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

CLASS

class

Overview Use this command to associate an existing class-map to a policy or policy-map

(traffic classification), and to enter Policy Map Class Configuration mode to

configure the class- map.

Use the no variant of this command to delete an existing class-map.

If your class-map does not exist, you can create it by using the class-map

command.

Syntax class {<name>|default}

no class <name>

Mode Policy Map Configuration

Example The following example creates the policy-map pmap1(using the policy-map

command), then associates this to an already existing class-map named cmap1,

use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# policy-map pmap1

awplus(config-pmap)# class cmap1

awplus(config-pmap-c)#

Commands

class-map

policy-map

Parameter Description

<name>Name of the (already existing) class-map.

default Specify the default class-map.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 951

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

CLASS-MAP

class-map

Overview Use this command to create a class-map.

Use the no variant of this command to delete the named class-map.

Syntax class-map <name>

no class-map <name>

Mode Global Configuration

Example This example creates a class-map called cmap1, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# class-map cmap1

awplus(config-cmap)#

Parameter Description

<name>Name of the class-map to be created.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 952

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

CLEAR MLS QOS INTERFACE POLICER-COUNTERS

clear mls qos interface policer-counters

Overview Resets an interface’s policer counters to zero. You can either clear a specific

class-map, or you can clear all class-maps by not specifying a class map.

Syntax clear mls qos interface <port> policer-counters [class-map

<class-map>]

Mode Privileged Exec

Example To reset the policy counters to zero for all class-maps for port1.0.1, use the

command:

awplus# clear mls qos interface port1.0.1 policer-counters

Commands

show mls qos interface policer-counters

Parameter Description

<port>The port may be a switch port (e.g. port1.0.4), a static

channel group (e.g. sa3), or a dynamic (LACP) channel group

(e.g. po4).

class-map Select a class-map.

<class-map>Class-map name.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 953

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

DEFAULT-ACTION

default-action

Overview Sets the action for the default class-map belonging to a particular policy-map. The

action for a non-default class-map depends on the action of any ACL that is applied

to the policy-map.

The default action can therefore be thought of as specifying the action that will be

applied to any data that does not meet the criteria specified by the applied

matching commands.

Use the no variant of this command to reset to the default action of ‘permit’.

Syntax default-action

send-to-mirror]

no default-action

Default The default is ‘permit’.

Mode Policy Map Configuration

Examples To set the action for the default class-map to deny, use the command:

awplus(config-pmap)# default-action deny

To set the action for the default class-map to copy-to-mirror for use with the

mirror interface command, use the command:

awplus(config-pmap)# default-action copy-to-mirror

Commands

mirror interface

Parameter Description

permit Packets to permit.

deny Packets to deny.

send-to-cpu Specify packets to send to the CPU.

copy-to-cpu Specify packets to copy to the CPU.

copy-to-mirror Specify packets to copy to the mirror port.

send-to-mirror Specify packets to send to the mirror port.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 954

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

DESCRIPTION (QOS POLICY-MAP)

description (QoS policy-map)

Overview Adds a textual description of the policy-map. This can be up to 80 characters long.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the current description from the

policy-map.

Syntax description <line>

no description

Mode Policy Map Configuration

Example To add the description, VOIP traffic, use the command:

awplus(config-pmap)# description VOIP traffic

Parameter Description

<line>Up to 80 character long line description.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 955

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

EGRESS-RATE-LIMIT

egress-rate-limit

Overview Use this command to limit the amount of traffic that can be transmitted per second

from this port.

Use the no variant of this command to disable the limiting of traffic egressing on

the interface.

Syntax egress-rate-limit <rate-limit>

no egress-rate-limit

Mode Interface Configuration

Examples To enable egress rate limiting on a port, with a limit of 64 Kbps, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1

awplus(config-if)# egress-rate-limit 64k

% Egress rate limit has been set to 64 Kb

To disable egress rate limiting on a port, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1

awplus(config-if)# no egress-rate-limit

Parameter Description

<rate-limit>Bandwidth <1-10000000 units per second> (usable units: k, m, g).

The egress rate limit can be configured in multiples of 64kbps. If

you configure a value that is not an exact multiple of 64kbps, then

the value will be rounded up to the nearest higher exact multiple

of 64kbps. The minimum is 64 Kb.

The default unit is Kb (k), but Mb (m) or Gb (g) can also be

specified. The command syntax is not case sensitive, so a value

such as 20m or 20M will be interpreted as 20 megabits.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 956

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

MATCH ACCESS-GROUP

match access-group

Overview Use this command to apply an ACL to a class-map or VLAN.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the match.

Syntax match access-group {<hw-IP-ACL>|<hw-MAC-ACL>|<hw-named-ACL>}

no match access-group

{<hw-IP-ACL>|<hw-MAC-ACL>|<hw-named-ACL>}

Mode Class Map or VLAN Access-Map

Usage First create an access-list that applies the appropriate action to matching packets.

Then use the match access-group command to apply this access-list as desired.

Note that this command will apply the access-list matching only to incoming data

packets.

Examples To configure a class-map named “cmap1”, which matches traffic against access-list

3001, which allows IP traffic from any source to any destination, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list 3001 permit ip any any

awplus(config)# class-map cmap1

awplus(config-cmap)# match access-group 3001

To configure a class-map named “cmap2”, which matches traffic against access-list

4001, which allows MAC traffic from any source to any destination, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list 4001 permit any any

awplus(config)# class-map cmap2

awplus(config-cmap)# match access-group 4001

Parameter Description

<hw-IP-ACL>Specify a hardware IP ACL number in the range <3000-3699>.

<hw-MAC-ACL>Specify a hardware MAC ACL number in the range <4000-4699>.

<hw-named-ACL>Specify a hardware named ACL (IP, IPv6 or MAC address entries).

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 957

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

MATCH ACCESS-GROUP

To configure a class-map named “cmap3”, which matches traffic against access-list

“hw_acl”, which allows IP traffic from any source to any destination, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list hardware hw_acl

awplus(config-ip-hw-acl)# permit ip any any

awplus(config)# class-map cmap3

awplus(config-cmap)# match access-group hw_acl

To apply ACL 3001 to VLAN 48, where the ACL drops IP traffic from any source to

any destination, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# access-list 3001 deny ip any any

awplus(config)# vlan access-map deny_all

awplus(config-vlan-access-map)# match access-group 3001

awplus(config-vlan-access-map)# exit

awplus(config)# vlan filter deny_all vlan-list 48 input

Commands

class-map

vlan access-map

Command

changes

Version 5.4.6-2.1: support for VLAN access-maps added

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 958

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

MATCH COS

match cos

Overview Use this command to define a COS to match against incoming packets.

Use the no variant of this command to remove CoS.

Syntax match cos <0-7>

no match cos

Mode Class Map Configuration

Examples To set the class-map’s CoS to 4, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# class-map cmap1

awplus(config-cmap)# match cos 4

To remove CoS from a class-map, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# class-map cmap1

awplus(config-cmap)# no match cos

Parameter Description

<0-7>Specify the CoS value.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 959

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

MATCH DSCP

match dscp

Overview Use this command to define the DSCP to match against incoming packets.

Use the no variant of this command to remove a previously defined DSCP.

Syntax match dscp <0-63>

no match dscp

Mode Class Map Configuration

Usage Use the match dscp command to define the match criterion after creating a

class-map.

Examples To configure a class-map named cmap1 with criterion that matches DSCP 56, use

the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# class-map cmap1

awplus(config-cmap)# match dscp 56

To remove a previously defined DSCP from a class-map named cmap1, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# class-map cmap1

awplus(config-cmap)# no match dscp

Commands

class-map

Parameter Description

<0-63>Specify DSCP value (only one value can be specified).

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 960

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

MATCH ETH-FORMAT PROTOCOL

match eth-format protocol

Overview This command sets the Ethernet format and the protocol for a class-map to match

on.

Select one Layer 2 format and one Layer 3 protocol when you issue this command.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the configured Ethernet format and

protocol from a class-map.

Syntax match eth-format <layer-two-format> protocol

<layer-three-protocol>

no match eth-format protocol

Parameter Description

<layer-two-formats>

802dot2-tagged 802.2 Tagged Packets (enter the parameter name).

802dot2-untagged 802.2 Untagged Packets (enter the parameter name).

ethii-tagged EthII Tagged Packets (enter the parameter name).

ethii-untagged EthII Untagged Packets (enter the parameter name).

ethii-any EthII Tagged or Untagged Packets (enter the parameter

name).

netwareraw-

tagged

Netware Raw Tagged Packets (enter the parameter

name).

netwareraw-

untagged

Netware Raw Untagged Packets (enter the parameter

name).

snap-tagged SNAP Tagged Packets (enter the parameter name).

snap-untagged SNAP Untagged Packets (enter the parameter name).

<layer-three-protocols>

<word> A Valid Protocol Number in hexidecimal.

any Note that the parameter “any” is only valid when used

with the netwarerawtagged and netwarerawuntagged

protocol options.

sna-path-control Protocol Number 04 (enter the parameter name or its

number).

proway-lan Protocol Number 0E (enter the parameter name or its

number).

eia-rs Protocol Number 4E (enter the parameter name or its number).

proway Protocol Number 8E (enter the parameter name or its number).

ipx-802dot2 Protocol Number E0 (enter the parameter name or its

number).

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 961

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

MATCH ETH-FORMAT PROTOCOL

netbeui Protocol Number F0 (enter the parameter name or its

number).

iso-clns-is Protocol Number FE (enter the parameter name or its

number).

xdot75-internet Protocol Number 0801(enter the parameter name or its

number).

nbs-internet Protocol Number 0802 (enter the parameter name or its

number).

ecma-internet Protocol Number 0803 (enter the parameter name or its

number).

chaosnet Protocol Number 0804 (enter the parameter name or its

number).

xdot25-level-3 Protocol Number 0805 (enter the parameter name or its

number).

arp Protocol Number 0806 (enter the parameter name or its

number).

xns-compat Protocol Number 0807 (enter the parameter name or its

number).

banyan-systems Protocol Number 0BAD (enter the parameter name or

its number).

bbn-simnet Protocol Number 5208 (enter the parameter name or its

number).

dec-mop-dump-ld Protocol Number 6001 (enter the parameter name or its

number).

dec-mop-rem-

cdons

Protocol Number 6002 (enter the parameter name or its

number).

dec-decnet Protocol Number 6003 (enter the parameter name or its

number).

dec-lat Protocol Number 6004 (enter the parameter name or its

number).

dec-diagnostic Protocol Number 6005 (enter the parameter name or its

number).

dec-customer Protocol Number 6006 (enter the parameter name or its

number).

dec-lavc Protocol Number 6007 (enter the parameter name or its

number).

rarp Protocol Number 8035 (enter the parameter name or its

number).

dec-lanbridge Protocol Number 8038 (enter the parameter name or its

number).

dec-encryption Protocol Number 803D (enter the parameter name or

its number).

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 962

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

MATCH ETH-FORMAT PROTOCOL

Mode Class Map Configuration

Examples To set the eth-format to ethii-tagged and the protocol to 0800 (IP) for class-map

cmap1, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# class-map cmap1

awplus(config-cmap)# match eth-format ethii-tagged protocol

0800

awplus#

awplus(config-cmap)# match eth-format ethii-tagged protocol ip

To remove the eth-format and the protocol from the class-map cmap1, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# class-map cmap1

awplus(config-cmap)# no match eth-format protocol

appletalk Protocol Number 809B (enter the parameter name or its

number).

ibm-sna Protocol Number 80D5 (enter the parameter name or

its number).

appletalk-aarp Protocol Number 80F3 (enter the parameter name or its

number).

snmp Protocol Number 814CV.

ethertalk-2 Protocol Number 809B (enter the parameter name or its

number).

ethertalk-2-aarp Protocol Number 80F3 (enter the parameter name or its

number).

ipx-snap Protocol Number 8137 (enter the parameter name or its

number).

ipx-802dot3 Protocol Number FFFF (enter the parameter name or its

number).

ip Protocol Number 0800 (enter the parameter name or its

number).

ipx Protocol Number 8137 (enter the parameter name or its

number).

Parameter Description

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 963

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

MATCH INNER-COS

match inner-cos

Overview Sets the Inner CoS for a class-map to match on.

Use the no variant of this command to remove CoS.

Syntax match inner-cos <0-7>

no match inner-cos

Mode Class Map Configuration

Examples To set the class-map’s inner-cos to 4, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# class-map cmap1

awplus(config-cmap)# match inner-cos 4

To remove CoS from the class-map, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# class-map cmap1

awplus(config-cmap)# no match inner-cos

Parameter Description

<0-7>Specify the Inner CoS value.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 964

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

MATCH INNER-VLAN

match inner-vlan

Overview Use this command to define the inner VLAN ID as match criteria.

Use the no variant of this command to disable the VLAN ID used as match criteria.

Syntax match inner-vlan <1-4094>

no match inner-vlan

Mode Class Map Configuration

Usage This command is used in double-tagged networks to match on a VLAN ID

belonging to the client network. For more information on VLAN double-tagged

networks, see the VLAN Feature Overview and Configuration Guide.

Examples To configure a class-map named cmap1 to match traffic from inner VLAN 3, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# class-map cmap1

awplus(config-cmap)# match inner-vlan 3

To disable the configured VLAN ID as a match criteria for the class-map named

cmap1, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# class-map cmap1

awplus(config-cmap)# no match inner-vlan

Parameter Description

<1-4094>The VLAN number.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 965

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

MATCH IP-PRECEDENCE

match ip-precedence

Overview Use this command to identify IP precedence values as match criteria.

Use the no variant of this command to remove IP precedence values from a

class-map.

Syntax match ip-precedence <0-7>

no match ip-precedence

Mode Class Map Configuration

Example To configure a class-map named cmap1 to match all IPv4 packets with a

precedence value of 5, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# class-map cmap1

awplus(config-cmap)# match ip-precedence 5

Parameter Description

<0-7>The precedence value to be matched.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 966

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

MATCH MAC-TYPE

match mac-type

Overview Use this command to set the MAC type for a class-map to match on.

Use no variant of this command to remove the MAC type match entry.

Syntax match mac-type {l2bcast|l2mcast|l2ucast}

no match mac-type

Mode Class Map Configuration

Examples To set the class-map’s MAC type to Layer 2 multicast, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# class-map cmap1

awplus(config-cmap)# match mac-type l2mcast

To remove the class-map’s MAC type entry, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# class-map cmap1

awplus(config-cmap)# no match mac-type

Parameter Description

l2bcast Layer 2 Broadcast traffic.

l2mcast Layer 2 Multicast traffic.

l2ucast Layer 2 Unicast traffic.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 967

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

MATCH TCP-FLAGS

match tcp-flags

Overview Sets one or more TCP flags (control bits) for a class-map to match on.

Use the no variant of this command to remove one or more TCP flags for a

class-map to match on.

Syntax match tcp-flags {[ack][fin][psh][rst][syn][urg]}

no match tcp-flags {[ack][fin][psh][rst][syn][urg]}

Mode Class Map Configuration

Examples To set the class-map’s TCP flags to ack and syn, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# class-map

awplus(config-cmap)# match tcp-flags ack syn

To remove the TCP flags ack and rst, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# class-map

awplus(config-cmap)# no match tcp-flags ack rst

Parameter Description

ack Acknowledge.

fin Finish.

psh Push

rst Reset.

syn Synchronize.

urg Urgent.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 968

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

MATCH VLAN

match vlan

Overview Use this command to define the VLAN ID as match criteria.

Use the no variant of this command to disable the VLAN ID used as match criteria.

Syntax match vlan <1-4094>

no match vlan

Mode Class Map Configuration

Examples To configure a class-map named cmap1 to include traffic from VLAN 3, use the

commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# class-map cmap1

awplus(config-cmap)# match vlan 3

To disable the configured VLAN ID as a match criteria for the class-map named

cmap1, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# class-map cmap1

awplus(config-cmap)# no match vlan

Parameter Description

<1-4094>The VLAN number.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 969

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

MLS QOS COS

mls qos cos

Overview This command assigns a CoS (Class of Service) user-priority value to untagged

frames entering a specified interface. By default, all untagged frames are assigned

a CoS value of 0.

Use the no variant of this command to return the interface to the default CoS

setting for untagged frames entering the interface.

Syntax mls qos cos <0-7>

no mls qos cos

Default By default, all untagged frames are assigned a CoS value of 0. Note that for tagged

frames, the default behavior is not to alter the CoS value.

Mode Interface Configuration

Example To assign a CoS user priority value of 2 to all untagged packets entering ports 1.0.1

to 1.0.6, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# interface port1.0.1-port1.0.6

awplus(config-if)# mls qos cos 2

Parameter Description

<0-7>The Class of Service, user-priority value.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 970

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

MLS QOS ENABLE

mls qos enable

Overview Use this command to globally enable QoS on the switch.

Use the no variant of this command to globally disable QoS and remove all QoS

configuration. The no variant of this command removes all class-maps,

policy-maps, and policers that have been created. Running the no mls qos

command will therefore remove all pre-existing QoS configurations on the switch.

Mode Global Configuration

Syntax mls qos enable

no mls qos

Example To enable QoS on the switch, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# mls qos enable

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 971

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

MLS QOS MAP COS-QUEUE TO

mls qos map cos-queue to

Overview Use this command to set the default CoS to egress queue mapping. This is the

default queue mapping for packets that do not get assigned an egress queue via

any other QoS functionality.

Use the no variant of this command to reset the cos-queue map back to its default

setting. The default mappings for this command are:

Syntax mls qos map cos-queue <cos-priority> to <queue-number>

no mls qos map cos-queue

Mode Global Configuration

Examples To map CoS 2 to queue 0, use the command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# mls qos map cos-queue 2 to 0

To set the cos-queue map back to its defaults, use the command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no mls qos map cos-queue

Commands

show mls qos interface

CoS Priority : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

-----------------------------------

CoS QUEUE: 2 0 1 3 4 5 6 7

Parameter Description

<cos-priority>CoS priority value. Can take a value between 0 and 7.

<queue-number>Queue number. Can take a value between 0 and 7.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 972

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

MLS QOS MAP PREMARK-DSCP TO

mls qos map premark-dscp to

Overview This command configures the premark-dscp map. It is used when traffic is

classified by a class-map that has trust dscp configured. Based on a lookup DSCP,

the map determines new QoS settings for the traffic.

The no variant of this command resets the premark-dscp map to its defaults. If no

DSCP is specified then all DSCP entries will be reset to their defaults.

Syntax mls qos map premark-dscp <0-63> to 

{[new-dscp <0-63>][new-cos <0-7>] 

[new-bandwidth-class {green|yellow|red}]}

no mls qos map premark-dscp [<0-63>]

Mode Global Configuration

Usage With the trust dscp command set, this command (mls qos map premark-dscp)

enables you to make the following changes:

• remap the DSCP (leaving the other settings unchanged)

• remap any or all of CoS, output queue, or bandwidth class values (leaving the

DSCP unchanged)

NOTE: If you attempt to remap both the DSCP and another setting, only the DSCP

remap will take effect.

Parameter Description

premark-dscp <0-63>The DSCP value on ingress.

new-dscp <0-63>The DSCP value that the packet will have on egress.

If unspecified, this value will remain the DSCP ingress

value.

new-cos <0-7>The CoS value that the packet will have on egress.

If unspecified, this value will retain its value on ingress.

new-bandwidth-class Modify Egress Bandwidth-class.

If unspecified, this value will be set to green.

green Egress Bandwidth-class green (marked down

Bandwidth-class).

yellow Egress Bandwidth-class yellow (marked down

Bandwidth-class).

red Egress Bandwidth-class red (marked down Bandwidth-

class).

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 973

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

MLS QOS MAP PREMARK-DSCP TO

Example To set the entry for DSCP 1 to use a new DSCP of 2, a new CoS of 3, and a new

bandwidth class of yellow, use the command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# mls qos map premark-dscp 1 to new-dscp 2 new-cos

3 new-bandwidth-class yellow

Example To reset the entry for DSCP 1 use the command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# no mls qos map premark-dscp 1

Commands

show mls qos maps premark-dscp

trust dscp

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 974

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

NO POLICE

no police

Overview Use this command to disable any policer previously configured on the class-map.

Syntax no police

Mode Policy Map Class Configuration

Usage This command disables any policer previously configured on the class-map.

Example To disable policing on a class-map use the command:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# policy-map name

awplus(config-pmap)# class classname

awplus(config-pmap-c)# no police

Commands

police single-rate action

police twin-rate action

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 975

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

POLICE SINGLE-RATE ACTION

police single-rate action

Overview Configures a single-rate policer for a class-map.

Syntax police single-rate <cir> <cbs> <ebs> action

{drop-red|remark-transmit}

Mode Policy Map Class Configuration

Usage You can use a policer to meter the traffic classified by the class-map and assign it

to one of three bandwidth classes.

The bandwidth classes are green (conforming), yellow (partially-conforming), and

red (non-conforming). A single-rate policer is based on three values. These are the

average rate, minimum burst and maximum burst.

Using an action of drop-red means that any packets classed as red are discarded.

NOTE: This command will not take effect when applied to a class-map that attaches to

a channel group whose ports span processor instances.

Note that the remark-map does not only apply to red traffic. If a remark-map is

configured on the same class-map as the policer, then the remark-map will apply

to green- colored and yellow-colored traffic irrespective of the value configured on

the action parameter of the policer. So, even if action is configured to drop-red,

the remark-map will be applied to green and yellow traffic. So, the action

parameter only applies to red- colored traffic. If action is set to drop-red, then red

Parameter Description

<cir>Specify the Committed Information Rate (CIR) (1-40000000 kbps).

<cbs>Specify the Committed Burst Size (CBS) (0-16777216 bytes).

<ebs>Specify a Excess Burst Size (EBS) (0-16777216 bytes).

action Specify the action if the rate is exceeded.

drop-red Drop the red packets.

remark-

transmit

Modify the packets using the remark map,

then transmit. You can configure the remark

map using the remark-map command.

Color Definition

green The traffic rate is less than the average rate and minimum burst.

yellow The traffic rate is between the minimum burst and the maximum

burst.

red The traffic rate exceeds the average rate and the maximum burst.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 976

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

POLICE SINGLE-RATE ACTION

traffic is dropped; if action is set to remark-transmit, then the red traffic has the

action of the remark map applied to it, and is then transmitted.

Example To configure a single rate meter measuring traffic of 10 Mbps that drops a

sustained burst of traffic over this rate, use the commands:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# policy-map name

awplus(config-pmap)# class classname

awplus(config-pmap-c)# police single-rate 10000 1875000 1875000

action drop-red

Commands

no police

police twin-rate action

remark-map

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 977

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

POLICE TWIN-RATE ACTION

police twin-rate action

Overview Configures a twin-rate policer for a class-map.

Syntax police twin-rate <cir> <pir> <cbs> <pbs> action

{drop-red|remark-transmit}

Mode Policy Map Class Configuration

Usage A policer can be used to meter the traffic classified by the class-map and as a result

will be given one of three bandwidth classes. These are green (conforming), yellow

(partially- conforming), and red (non-conforming).

A twin-rate policer is based on four values. These are the minimum rate (CIR),

minimum burst size (CBS), maximum rate (PIR), and maximum burst size (PBS). The

following table shows how these values define the bandwidth classes.

Using an action of drop-red means that any packets classed as red will be

discarded.

Parameter Description

<cir>Specify the Committed Information Rate (CIR) (1-40000000 kbps).

<pir>Specify the Peak Information Rate (PIR) (1-40000000 kbps).

<cbs>Specify the Committed Burst Size (CBS) (0-16777216 bytes).

<pbs>Specify the Peak Burst Size (PBS) (0-16777216 bytes).

action Specify the action if rate is exceeded.

drop-red Drop the red packets.

remark-transmit Modify the packets using the remark map, then

transmit. You can configure the remark map

using the remark-map command.

Bandwidth

Class Definition

green The sum of the number of existing (buffered) bytes plus those arriving

at the port per unit time results in a value that is less than that set for

the CBS.

yellow The sum of the number of existing (buffered) bytes plus those arriving

at the port per unit time results in a value that is between those set for

the CBS and the PBS.

red The sum of the number of existing (buffered) bytes plus those arriving

at the port per unit time results in a value that exceeds that set for the

PBS.

C613-50163-01 Rev C Command Reference for GS970M Series 978

AlliedWare Plus™ Operating System - Version 5.4.7-0.x

QOS COMMANDS

POLICE TWIN-RATE ACTION

Using an action of remark-transmit means that the packet will be remarked with

the values configured in the policed-dscp map. The index into this map is

determined by the DSCP in the packet.